Introduction to Parallel Processing : Algorithms and

Introduction to Parallel Processing : Algorithms and
Introduction to
Parallel Processing
Algorithms and Architectures
PLENUM SERIES IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
Series Editor: Rami G. Melhem
University of Pittsburgh
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania
FUNDAMENTALS OF X PROGRAMMING
Graphical User Interfaces and Beyond
Theo Pavlidis
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Algorithms and Architectures
Behrooz Parhami
Introduction to
Parallel Processing
Algorithms and Architectures
Behrooz Parhami
University of California at Santa Barbara
Santa Barbara, California
KLUWER ACADEMIC PUBLISHERS
NEW YORK, BOSTON , DORDRECHT, LONDON , MOSCOW
eBook ISBN
0-306-46964-2
Print ISBN
0-306-45970-1
©2002 Kluwer Academic Publishers
New York, Boston, Dordrecht, London, Moscow
All rights reserved
No part of this eBook may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without written consent from the Publisher
Created in the United States of America
Visit Kluwer Online at:
and Kluwer's eBookstore at:
http://www.kluweronline.com
http://www.ebooks.kluweronline.com
To the four parallel joys in my life,
for their love and support.
This page intentionally left blank.
Preface
THE CONTEXT OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
The field of digital computer architecture has grown explosively in the past two decades.
Through a steady stream of experimental research, tool-building efforts, and theoretical
studies, the design of an instruction-set architecture, once considered an art, has been
transformed into one of the most quantitative branches of computer technology. At the same
time, better understanding of various forms of concurrency, from standard pipelining to
massive parallelism, and invention of architectural structures to support a reasonably efficient
and user-friendly programming model for such systems, has allowed hardware performance
to continue its exponential growth. This trend is expected to continue in the near future.
This explosive growth, linked with the expectation that performance will continue its
exponential rise with each new generation of hardware and that (in stark contrast to software)
computer hardware will function correctly as soon as it comes off the assembly line, has its
down side. It has led to unprecedented hardware complexity and almost intolerable development costs. The challenge facing current and future computer designers is to institute
simplicity where we now have complexity; to use fundamental theories being developed in
this area to gain performance and ease-of-use benefits from simpler circuits; to understand
the interplay between technological capabilities and limitations, on the one hand, and design
decisions based on user and application requirements on the other.
In computer designers’ quest for user-friendliness, compactness, simplicity, high performance, low cost, and low power, parallel processing plays a key role. High-performance
uniprocessors are becoming increasingly complex, expensive, and power-hungry. A basic
trade-off thus exists between the use of one or a small number of such complex processors,
at one extreme, and a moderate to very large number of simpler processors, at the other.
When combined with a high-bandwidth, but logically simple, interprocessor communication
facility, the latter approach leads to significant simplification of the design process. However,
two major roadblocks have thus far prevented the widespread adoption of such moderately
to massively parallel architectures: the interprocessor communication bottleneck and the
difficulty, and thus high cost, of algorithm/software development.
vii
viii
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
The above context is changing because of several factors. First, at very high clock rates,
the link between the processor and memory becomes very critical. CPUs can no longer be
designed and verified in isolation. Rather, an integrated processor/memory design optimization is required, which makes the development even more complex and costly. VLSI
technology now allows us to put more transistors on a chip than required by even the most
advanced superscalar processor. The bulk of these transistors are now being used to provide
additional on-chip memory. However, they can just as easily be used to build multiple
processors on a single chip. Emergence of multiple-processor microchips, along with
currently available methods for glueless combination of several chips into a larger system
and maturing standards for parallel machine models, holds the promise for making parallel
processing more practical.
This is the reason parallel processing occupies such a prominent place in computer
architecture education and research. New parallel architectures appear with amazing regularity in technical publications, while older architectures are studied and analyzed in novel
and insightful ways. The wealth of published theoretical and practical results on parallel
architectures and algorithms is truly awe-inspiring. The emergence of standard programming
and communication models has removed some of the concerns with compatibility and
software design issues in parallel processing, thus resulting in new designs and products with
mass-market appeal. Given the computation-intensive nature of many application areas (such
as encryption, physical modeling, and multimedia), parallel processing will continue to
thrive for years to come.
Perhaps, as parallel processing matures further, it will start to become invisible. Packing
many processors in a computer might constitute as much a part of a future computer
architect’s toolbox as pipelining, cache memories, and multiple instruction issue do today.
In this scenario, even though the multiplicity of processors will not affect the end user or
even the professional programmer (other than of course boosting the system performance),
the number might be mentioned in sales literature to lure customers in the same way that
clock frequency and cache size are now used. The challenge will then shift from making
parallel processing work to incorporating a larger number of processors, more economically
and in a truly seamless fashion.
THE GOALS AND STRUCTURE OF THIS BOOK
The field of parallel processing has matured to the point that scores of texts and reference
books have been published. Some of these books that cover parallel processing in general
(as opposed to some special aspects of the field or advanced/unconventional parallel systems)
are listed at the end of this preface. Each of these books has its unique strengths and has
contributed to the formation and fruition of the field. The current text, Introduction to Parallel
Processing: Algorithms and Architectures, is an outgrowth of lecture notes that the author
has developed and refined over many years, beginning in the mid-1980s. Here are the most
important features of this text in comparison to the listed books:
1. Division of material into lecture-size chapters. In my approach to teaching, a lecture
is a more or less self-contained module with links to past lectures and pointers to
what will transpire in the future. Each lecture must have a theme or title and must
PREFACE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ix
proceed from motivation, to details, to conclusion. There must be smooth transitions
between lectures and a clear enunciation of how each lecture fits into the overall
plan. In designing the text, I have strived to divide the material into chapters, each
of which is suitable for one lecture (l–2 hours). A short lecture can cover the first
few subsections, while a longer lecture might deal with more advanced material
near the end. To make the structure hierarchical, as opposed to flat or linear, chapters
have been grouped into six parts, each composed of four closely related chapters
(see diagram on page xi).
A large number of meaningful problems. At least 13 problems have been provided
at the end of each of the 24 chapters. These are well-thought-out problems, many
of them class-tested, that complement the material in the chapter, introduce new
viewing angles, and link the chapter material to topics in other chapters.
Emphasis on both the underlying theory and practical designs. The ability to cope
with complexity requires both a deep knowledge of the theoretical underpinnings
of parallel processing and examples of designs that help us understand the theory.
Such designs also provide hints/ideas for synthesis as well as reference points for
cost–performance comparisons. This viewpoint is reflected, e.g., in the coverage of
problem-driven parallel machine designs (Chapter 8) that point to the origins of the
butterfly and binary-tree architectures. Other examples are found in Chapter 16
where a variety of composite and hierarchical architectures are discussed and some
fundamental cost–performance trade-offs in network design are exposed. Fifteen
carefully chosen case studies in Chapters 21–23 provide additional insight and
motivation for the theories discussed.
Linking parallel computing to other subfields of computer design. Parallel computing is nourished by, and in turn feeds, other subfields of computer architecture and
technology. Examples of such links abound. In computer arithmetic, the design of
high-speed adders and multipliers contributes to, and borrows many methods from,
parallel processing. Some of the earliest parallel systems were designed by researchers in the field of fault-tolerant computing in order to allow independent
multichannel computations and/or dynamic replacement of failed subsystems.
These links are pointed out throughout the book.
Wide coverage of important topics. The current text covers virtually all important
architectural and algorithmic topics in parallel processing, thus offering a balanced
and complete view of the field. Coverage of the circuit model and problem-driven
parallel machines (Chapters 7 and 8), some variants of mesh architectures (Chapter
12), composite and hierarchical systems (Chapter 16), which are becoming increasingly important for overcoming VLSI layout and packaging constraints, and the
topics in Part V (Chapters 17–20) do not all appear in other textbooks. Similarly,
other books that cover the foundations of parallel processing do not contain
discussions on practical implementation issues and case studies of the type found
in Part VI.
Unified and consistent notation/terminology throughout the text. I have tried very
hard to use consistent notation/terminology throughout the text. For example, n
always stands for the number of data elements (problem size) and p for the number
of processors. While other authors have done this in the basic parts of their texts,
there is a tendency to cover more advanced research topics by simply borrowing
x
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
the notation and terminology from the reference source. Such an approach has the
advantage of making the transition between reading the text and the original
reference source easier, but it is utterly confusing to the majority of the students
who rely on the text and do not consult the original references except, perhaps, to
write a research paper.
SUMMARY OF TOPICS
The six parts of this book, each composed of four chapters, have been written with the
following goals:
Part I sets the stage, gives a taste of what is to come, and provides the needed
perspective, taxonomy, and analysis tools for the rest of the book.
Part II delimits the models of parallel processing from above (the abstract PRAM
model) and from below (the concrete circuit model), preparing the reader for everything
else that falls in the middle.
Part III presents the scalable, and conceptually simple, mesh model of parallel processing, which has become quite important in recent years, and also covers some of its
derivatives.
Part IV covers low-diameter parallel architectures and their algorithms, including the
hypercube, hypercube derivatives, and a host of other interesting interconnection
topologies.
Part V includes broad (architecture-independent) topics that are relevant to a wide range
of systems and form the stepping stones to effective and reliable parallel processing.
Part VI deals with implementation aspects and properties of various classes of parallel
processors, presenting many case studies and projecting a view of the past and future
of the field.
POINTERS ON HOW TO USE THE BOOK
For classroom use, the topics in each chapter of this text can be covered in a lecture
spanning 1–2 hours. In my own teaching, I have used the chapters primarily for 1-1/2-hour
lectures, twice a week, in a 10-week quarter, omitting or combining some chapters to fit the
material into 18–20 lectures. But the modular structure of the text lends itself to other lecture
formats, self-study, or review of the field by practitioners. In the latter two cases, the readers
can view each chapter as a study unit (for 1 week, say) rather than as a lecture. Ideally, all
topics in each chapter should be covered before moving to the next chapter. However, if fewer
lecture hours are available, then some of the subsections located at the end of chapters can
be omitted or introduced only in terms of motivations and key results.
Problems of varying complexities, from straightforward numerical examples or exercises
to more demanding studies or miniprojects, have been supplied for each chapter. These problems
form an integral part of the book and have not been added as afterthoughts to make the book
more attractive for use as a text. A total of 358 problems are included (13–16 per chapter).
Assuming that two lectures are given per week, either weekly or biweekly homework can
be assigned, with each assignment having the specific coverage of the respective half-part
xi
PREFACE
The structure of this book in parts, half-parts, and chapters.
(two chapters) or full part (four chapters) as its “title.” In this format, the half-parts, shown
above, provide a focus for the weekly lecture and/or homework schedule.
An instructor’s manual, with problem solutions and enlarged versions of the diagrams
and tables, suitable for reproduction as transparencies, is planned. The author’s detailed
syllabus for the course ECE 254B at UCSB is available at http://www.ece.ucsb.edu/courses/
syllabi/ece254b.html.
References to important or state-of-the-art research contributions and designs are
provided at the end of each chapter. These references provide good starting points for doing
in-depth studies or for preparing term papers/projects.
xii
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
New ideas in the field of parallel processing appear in papers presented at several annual
conferences, known as FMPC, ICPP, IPPS, SPAA, SPDP (now merged with IPPS), and in
archival journals such as IEEE Transactions on Computers [TCom], IEEE Transactions on
Parallel and Distributed Systems [TPDS], Journal of Parallel and Distributed Computing
[JPDC], Parallel Computing [ParC], and Parallel Processing Letters [PPL]. Tutorial and
survey papers of wide scope appear in IEEE Concurrency [Conc] and, occasionally, in IEEE
Computer [Comp]. The articles in IEEE Computer provide excellent starting points for
research projects and term papers.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The current text, Introduction to Parallel Processing: Algorithms and Architectures, is
an outgrowth of lecture notes that the author has used for the graduate course “ECE 254B:
Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallel Processing” at the University of California, Santa
Barbara, and, in rudimentary forms, at several other institutions prior to 1988. The text has
benefited greatly from keen observations, curiosity, and encouragement of my many students
in these courses. A sincere thanks to all of them! Particular thanks go to Dr. Ding-Ming Kwai
who read an early version of the manuscript carefully and suggested numerous corrections
and improvements.
GENERAL REFERENCES
[Akl89]
[Akl97]
[Alma94]
[Bert89]
[Code93]
[Comp]
[Conc]
[Cric88]
[DeCe89]
[Desr87]
[Duat97]
[Flyn95]
[FMPC]
[Foun94]
[Hock81]
[Hord90]
[Hord93]
[Hwan84]
[Hwan93]
Akl, S. G., The Design and Analysis of Parallel Algorithms, Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Almasi, G. S., and A. Gottlieb, Highly Parallel Computing, Benjamin/Cummings, 2nd ed., 1994.
Bertsekas, D. P., and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods,
Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Codenotti, B., and M. Leoncini, Introduction to Parallel Processing, Addison–Wesley, 1993.
IEEE Computer, journal published by IEEE Computer Society: has occasional special issues on
parallel/distributed processing (February 1982, June 1985, August 1986, June 1987, March 1988,
August 1991, February 1992, November 1994, November 1995, December 1996).
IEEE Concurrency, formerly IEEE Parallel and Distributed Technology, magazine published by
IEEE Computer Society.
Crichlow, J. M., Introduction to Distributed and Parallel Computing, Prentice–Hall, 1988.
DeCegama, A. L., Parallel Processing Architectures and VLSI Hardware, Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Desrochers, G. R., Principles of Parallel and Multiprocessing, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Duato, J., S. Yalamanchili, and L. Ni, Interconnection Networks: An Engineering Approach, IEEE
Computer Society Press, 1997.
Flynn, M. J., Computer Architecture: Pipelined and Parallel Processor Design, Jones and Bartlett,
1995.
Proc. Symp. Frontiers of Massively Parallel Computation, sponsored by IEEE Computer Society and
NASA. Held every 1 1/2–2 years since 1986. The 6th FMPC was held in Annapolis, MD, October
27–31, 1996, and the 7th is planned for February 20–25, 1999.
Fountain, T. J., Parallel Computing: Principles and Practice, Cambridge University Press, 1994.
Hockney, R. W., and C. R. Jesshope, Parallel Computers, Adam Hilger, 1981.
Hord, R. M., Parallel Supercomputing in SIMD Architectures, CRC Press, 1990.
Hord, R. M., Parallel Supercomputing in MIMD Architectures, CRC Press, 1993.
Hwang, K., and F. A. Briggs, Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing, McGraw-Hill, 1984.
Hwang, K., Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability, McGrawHill, 1993.
PREFACE
[Hwan98]
[ICPP]
[IPPS]
[JaJa92]
[JPDC]
[Kris89]
[Kuma94]
[Laks90]
[Leig92]
[Lerm94]
[Lipo87]
[Mold93]
[ParC]
[PPL]
[Quin87]
[Quin94]
[Reif93]
[Sanz89]
[Shar87]
[Sieg85]
[SPAA]
[SPDP]
[Ston93]
[TCom]
[TPDS]
[Varm94]
[Zoma96]
xiii
Hwang, K., and Z. Xu, Scalable Parallel Computing: Technology, Architecture, Programming,
McGraw-Hill, 1998.
Proc. Int. Conference Parallel Processing, sponsored by The Ohio State University (and in recent
years, also by the International Association for Computers and Communications). Held annually since
1972.
Proc. Int. Parallel Processing Symp., sponsored by IEEE Computer Society. Held annually since
1987. The 11th IPPS was held in Geneva, Switzerland, April 1–5, 1997. Beginning with the 1998
symposium in Orlando, FL, March 30–April 3, IPPS was merged with SPDP. **
JaJa, J., An Introduction to Parallel Algorithms, Addison-Wesley, 1992.
Journal of Parallel and Distributed Computing, Published by Academic Press.
Krishnamurthy, E. V., Parallel Processing: Principles and Practice, Addison–Wesley, 1989.
Kumar, V., A. Grama, A. Gupta, and G. Karypis, Introduction to Parallel Computing: Design and
Analysis of Algorithms, Benjamin/Cummings, 1994.
Lakshmivarahan, S., and S. K. Dhall, Analysis and Design of Parallel Algorithms: Arithmetic and
Matrix Problems, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Lerman, G., and L. Rudolph, Parallel Evolution of Parallel Processors, Plenum, 1994.
Lipovski, G. J., and M. Malek, Parallel Computing: Theory and Comparisons, Wiley, 1987.
Moldovan, D. I., Parallel Processing: From Applications to Systems, Morgan Kaufmann, 1993.
Parallel Computing, journal published by North-Holland.
Parallel Processing Letters, journal published by World Scientific.
Quinn, M. J., Designing Efficient Algorithms for Parallel Computers, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Quinn, M. J., Parallel Computing: Theory and Practice, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
Reif, J. H. (ed.), Synthesis of Parallel Algorithms, Morgan Kaufmann, 1993.
Sanz, J. L. C. (ed.), Opportunities and Constraints of Parallel Computing (IBM/NSF Workshop, San
Jose, CA, December 1988), Springer-Verlag, 1989.
Sharp, J. A., An Introduction to Distributed and Parallel Processing, Blackwell Scientific Publications, 1987.
Siegel, H. J., Interconnection Networks for Large-Scale Parallel Processing, Lexington Books, 1985.
Proc. Symp. Parallel Algorithms and Architectures, sponsored by the Association for Computing
Machinery (ACM). Held annually since 1989. The 10th SPAA was held in Puerto Vallarta, Mexico,
June 28–July 2, 1998.
Proc. Int. Symp. Parallel and Distributed Systems, sponsored by IEEE Computer Society. Held
annually since 1989, except for 1997. The 8th SPDP was held in New Orleans, LA, October 23–26,
1996. Beginning with the 1998 symposium in Orlando, FL, March 30–April 3, SPDP was merged
with IPPS.
Stone, H. S., High-Performance Computer Architecture, Addison–Wesley, 1993.
IEEE Trans. Computers, journal published by IEEE Computer Society; has occasional special issues
on parallel and distributed processing (April 1987, December 1988, August 1989, December 1991,
April 1997, April 1998).
IEEE Trans. Parallel and Distributed Systems, journal published by IEEE Computer Society.
Varma, A., and C. S. Raghavendra, Interconnection Networks for Multiprocessors and Multicomputers: Theory and Practice, IEEE Computer Society Press, 1994.
Zomaya, A. Y. (ed.), Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook, McGraw-Hill, 1996.
*The 27th ICPP was held in Minneapolis, MN, August 10–15, 1998, and the 28th is scheduled for September
21–24, 1999, in Aizu, Japan.
**The next joint IPPS/SPDP is sceduled for April 12–16, 1999, in San Juan, Puerto Rico.
This page intentionally left blank.
Contents
Part I.
1.
Fundamental Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Introduction to Parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1.1. Why Parallel Processing? . . . . . .
1.2. A Motivating Example . . . . . . .
1.3. Parallel Processing Ups and Downs
1.4. Types of Parallelism: A Taxonomy .
1.5. Roadblocks to Parallel Processing .
1.6. Effectiveness of Parallel Processing
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . .
2.
3.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
8
13
15
16
19
21
23
A Taste of Parallel Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2.1. Some Simple Computations . . .
2.2. Some Simple Architectures . . . .
2.3. Algorithms for a Linear Array . .
2.4. Algorithms for a Binary Tree . . .
2.5. Algorithms for a 2D Mesh . . . .
2.6. Algorithms with Shared Variables
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
28
30
34
39
40
41
43
Parallel Algorithm Complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
47
50
53
55
56
58
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Asymptotic Complexity . . . . . . . .
Algorithm Optimality and Efficiency .
Complexity Classes . . . . . . . . . .
Parallelizable Tasks and the NC Class
Parallel Programming Paradigms . . .
Solving Recurrences . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xv
xvi
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
4.
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
63
Models of Parallel Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
4.1. Development of Early Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2. SIMD versus MIMD Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3. Global versus Distributed Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4. The PRAM Shared-Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5. Distributed-Memory or Graph Models . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6. Circuit Model and Physical Realizations . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
67
69
71
74
77
80
82
85
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
PRAM and Basic Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Part II. Extreme Models
5.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
91
93
96
98
99
102
105
108
More Shared-Memory Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
6.1. Sequential Rank-Based Selection . .
6.2. A Parallel Selection Algorithm . . . .
6.3. A Selection-Based Sorting Algorithm
6.4. Alternative Sorting Algorithms . . . .
6.5. Convex Hull of a 2D Point Set . . . .
6.6. Some Implementation Aspects . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
111
113
114
117
118
121
125
127
Sorting and Selection Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
7.1. What Is a Sorting Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2. Figures of Merit for Sorting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3. Design of Sorting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4. Batcher Sorting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5. Other Classes of Sorting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6. Selection Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
133
135
136
141
142
144
147
5.1. PRAM Submodels and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2. Data Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3. Semigroup or Fan-In Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4. Parallel Prefix Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5. Ranking the Elements of a Linked List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6. Matrix Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
7.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xvii
CONTENTS
Other Circuit-Level Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
8.1. Searching and Dictionary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2. A Tree-Structured Dictionary Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3. Parallel Prefix Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4. Parallel Prefix Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5. The Discrete Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6. Parallel Architectures for FFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
151
152
156
157
161
163
165
168
Part III. Mesh-Based Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
8.
9.
Sorting on a 2D Mesh or Torus
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
173
176
179
180
183
186
187
190
10. Routing on a 2D Mesh or Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
9.1. Mesh-Connected Computers .
9.2. The Shearsort Algorithm . . .
9.3. Variants of Simple Shearsort .
9.4. Recursive Sorting Algorithms
9.5. A Nontrivial Lower Bound . .
9.6. Achieving the Lower Bound .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10.1. Types of Data Routing Operations .
10.2. Useful Elementary Operations . . .
10.3. Data Routing on a 2D Array . . . .
10.4. Greedy Routing Algorithms . . . . .
10.5. Other Classes of Routing Algorithms
10.6. Wormhole Routing . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . .
11. Numerical 2D Mesh Algorithms
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
193
195
197
199
202
204
208
210
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.1. Matrix Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2. Triangular System of Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3. Tridiagonal System of Linear Equations . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4. Arbitrary System of Linear Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5. Graph Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6. Image-Processing Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
213
215
218
221
225
228
231
233
12. Other Mesh-Related Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 5
12.1. Three or More Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 7
xviii
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
12.2. Stronger and Weaker Connectivities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3. Meshes Augmented with Nonlocal Links . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4. Meshes with Dynamic Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5. Pyramid and Multigrid Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6. Meshes of Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P r o b l e m s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
242
245
246
248
253
256
Part IV. Low-Diameter Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
13. Hypercubes and Their Algorithms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
13.1. Definition and Main Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2. Embeddings and Their Usefulness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3. Embedding of Arrays and Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4. A Few Simple Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5. Matrix Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6. Inverting a Lower Triangular Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
263
264
269
272
274
275
278
14. Sorting and Routing on Hypercubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
14.1. Defining the Sorting Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2. Bitonic Sorting on a Hypercube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3. Routing Problems on a Hypercube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4. Dimension-Order Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5. Broadcasting on a Hypercube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6. Adaptive and Fault-Tolerant Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
284
285
288
292
294
295
298
15. Other Hypercubic Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
15.1. Modified and Generalized Hypercubes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2. Butterfly and Permutation Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3. Plus-or-Minus-2'Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4. The Cube-Connected Cycles Network . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5. Shuffle and Shuffle–Exchange Networks . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6. That’s Not All, Folks! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303
305
309
310
313
316
317
320
16. A Sampler of Other Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
321
16.1. Performance Parameters for Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2. Star and Pancake Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3. Ring-Based Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
326
329
xix
CONTENTS
16.4. Composite or Hybrid Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5. Hierarchical (Multilevel) Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6. Multistage Interconnection Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part V. Some Broad Topics
335
337
338
340
343
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
345
17. Emulation and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
17.1. Emulations among Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2. Distributed Shared Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3. The Task Scheduling Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.4. A Class of Scheduling Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.5. Some Useful Bounds for Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.6. Load Balancing and Dataflow Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
349
351
355
357
360
362
364
367
18. Data Storage, Input, and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
18.1. Data Access Problems and Caching . . . .
18.2. Cache Coherence Protocols . . . . . . . .
18.3. Multithreading and Latency Hiding . . . .
18.4. Parallel I/O Technology . . . . . . . . . .
18.5. Redundant Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . .
18.6. Interfaces and Standards . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . .
. .
..
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
371
374
377
379
382
384
386
388
....................
391
19.1. Defects, Faults, . . . , Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2. Defect-Level Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3. Fault-Level Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4. Error-Level Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5. Malfunction-Level Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.6. Degradation-Level Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
396
399
402
404
407
410
413
20. System and Software Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
19. Reliable
20.1.
20.2.
20.3.
20.4.
20.5.
Parallel
Processing
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Coordination and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Portability and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel File Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
417
421
425
427
430
xx
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
20.6. Hardware/Software Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P r o b l e m s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
433
435
Part VI. Implementation Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
21. Shared-Memory MIMD Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .
439
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
441
444
445
448
450
452
455
457
22. Message-Passing MIMD Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
459
21.1. Variations in Shared Memory .
21.2. MIN-Based BBN Butterfly . .
21.3. Vector-Parallel Cray Y-MP . .
21.4. Latency-Tolerant Tera MTA . .
21.5. CC-NUMA Stanford DASH .
21.6. SCI-Based Sequent NUMA-Q
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
461
464
466
469
471
473
475
477
23. Data-Parallel SIMD Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
479
22.1. Mechanisms for Message Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2. Reliable Bus-Based Tandem Nonstop . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3. Hypercube-Based nCUBE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.4. Fat-Tree-Based Connection Machine 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.5. Omega-Network-Based IBM SP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6. Commodity-Driven Berkeley NOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
481
484
485
488
490
492
495
497
.............. . , . . . . . .
499
23.1. Where Have All the SIMDs Gone? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2. The First Supercomputer: ILLIAC IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.3. Massively Parallel Goodyear MPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.4. Distributed Array Processor (DAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.5. Hypercubic Connection Machine 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.6. Multiconnected MasPar MP-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24. Past,
24.1.
24.2.
24.3.
24.4.
24.5.
Present,
and
Future
Milestones in Parallel Processing . .
Current Status, Issues, and Debates .
TFLOPS, PFLOPS, and Beyond . .
Processor and Memory Technologies
Interconnection Technologies . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
501
503
506
508
510
xxi
CONTENTS
24.6. The Future of Parallel Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References and Suggested Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
513
515
517
519
This page intentionally left blank.
Introduction to
Parallel Processing
Algorithms and Architectures
This page intentionally left blank.
I
Fundamental
Concepts
The field of parallel processing is concerned with architectural and algorithmic
methods for enhancing the performance or other attributes (e.g., cost-effectiveness, reliability) of digital computers through various forms of concurrency. Even
though concurrent computation has been around since the early days of digital
computers, only recently has it been applied in a manner, and on a scale, that
leads to better performance, or greater cost-effectiveness, compared with vector
supercomputers. Like any other field of science/technology, the study of parallel
architectures and algorithms requires motivation, a big picture showing the
relationships between problems and the various approaches to solving them,
and models for comparing, connecting, and evaluating new ideas. This part,
which motivates us to study parallel processing, paints the big picture, and
provides some needed background, is composed of four chapters:
•
•
•
•
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
1:
2:
3:
4:
Introduction to Parallelism
A Taste of Parallel Algorithms
Parallel Algorithm Complexity
Models of Parallel Processing
1
This page intentionally left blank.
1
Introduction to
Parallelism
This chapter sets the context in which the material in the rest of the book will
be presented and reviews some of the challenges facing the designers and users
of parallel computers. The chapter ends with the introduction of useful metrics
for evaluating the effectiveness of parallel systems. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.1. Why parallel processing?
1.2. A motivating example
1.3. Parallel processing ups and downs
1.4. Types of parallelism: A taxonomy
1.5. Roadblocks to parallel processing
1.6. Effectiveness of parallel processing
3
This page intentionally left blank.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
5
1.1. WHY PARALLEL PROCESSING?
The quest for higher-performance digital computers seems unending. In the past two
decades, the performance of microprocessors has enjoyed an exponential growth. The growth
of microprocessor speed/performance by a factor of 2 every 18 months (or about 60% per
year) is known as Moore’s law. This growth is the result of a combination of two factors:
1. Increase in complexity (related both to higher device density and to larger size) of
VLSI chips, projected to rise to around 10 M transistors per chip for microprocessors, and 1B for dynamic random-access memories (DRAMs), by the year 2000
[SIA94]
2. Introduction of, and improvements in, architectural features such as on-chip cache
memories, large instruction buffers, multiple instruction issue per cycle, multithreading, deep pipelines, out-of-order instruction execution, and branch prediction
Moore’s law was originally formulated in 1965 in terms of the doubling of chip complexity
every year (later revised to every 18 months) based only on a small number of data points
[Scha97]. Moore’s revised prediction matches almost perfectly the actual increases in the
number of transistors in DRAM and microprocessor chips.
Moore’s law seems to hold regardless of how one measures processor performance:
counting the number of executed instructions per second (IPS), counting the number of
floating-point operations per second (FLOPS), or using sophisticated benchmark suites
that attempt to measure the processor's performance on real applications. This is because
all of these measures, though numerically different, tend to rise at roughly the same rate.
Figure 1.1 shows that the performance of actual processors has in fact followed Moore’s
law quite closely since 1980 and is on the verge of reaching the GIPS (giga IPS = 109
IPS) milestone.
Even though it is expected that Moore's law will continue to hold for the near future,
there is a limit that will eventually be reached. That some previous predictions about when
the limit will be reached have proven wrong does not alter the fact that a limit, dictated by
physical laws, does exist. The most easily understood physical limit is that imposed by the
finite speed of signal propagation along a wire. This is sometimes referred to as the
speed-of-light argument (or limit), explained as follows.
The Speed-of-Light Argument. The speed of light is about 30 cm/ns. Signals travel
on a wire at a fraction of the speed of light. If the chip diameter is 3 cm, say, any computation
that involves signal transmission from one end of the chip to another cannot be executed
faster than 1010 times per second. Reducing distances by a factor of 10 or even 100 will only
increase the limit by these factors; we still cannot go beyond 1012 computations per second.
To relate the above limit to the instruction execution rate (MIPS or FLOPS), we need to
estimate the distance that signals must travel within an instruction cycle. This is not easy to
do, given the extensive use of pipelining and memory-latency-hiding techniques in modern
high-performance processors. Despite this difficulty, it should be clear that we are in fact not
very far from limits imposed by the speed of signal propagation and several other physical
laws.
6
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 1.1. The exponential growth of microprocessor performance, known as Moore’s law,
shown over the past two decades.
The speed-of-light argument suggests that once the above limit has been reached, the
only path to improved performance is the use of multiple processors. Of course, the same
argument can be invoked to conclude that any parallel processor will also be limited by the
speed at which the various processors can communicate with each other. However, because
such communication does not have to occur for every low-level computation, the limit is less
serious here. In fact, for many applications, a large number of computation steps can be
performed between two successive communication steps, thus amortizing the communication overhead.
Here is another way to show the need for parallel processing. Figure 1.2 depicts the
improvement in performance for the most advanced high-end supercomputers in the same
20-year period covered by Fig. 1.1. Two classes of computers have been included: (1)
Cray-type pipelined vector supercomputers, represented by the lower straight line, and (2)
massively parallel processors (MPPs) corresponding to the shorter upper lines [Bell92].
We see from Fig. 1.2 that the first class will reach the TFLOPS performance benchmark
around the turn of the century. Even assuming that the performance of such machines will
continue to improve at this rate beyond the year 2000, the next milestone, i.e., PFLOPS (peta
FLOPS = 1015 FLOPS) performance, will not be reached until the year 2015. With massively
parallel computers, TFLOPS performance is already at hand, albeit at a relatively high cost.
PFLOPS performance within this class should be achievable in the 2000–2005 time frame,
again assuming continuation of the current trends. In fact, we already know of one serious
roadblock to continued progress at this rate: Research in the area of massively parallel
computing is not being funded at the levels it enjoyed in the 1980s.
But who needs supercomputers with TFLOPS or PFLOPS performance? Applications
of state-of-the-art high-performance computers in military, space research, and climate
modeling are conventional wisdom. Lesser known are applications in auto crash or engine
combustion simulation, design of pharmaceuticals, design and evaluation of complex ICs,
scientific visualization, and multimedia. In addition to these areas, whose current computational needs are met by existing supercomputers, there are unmet computational needs in
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
7
Figure 1.2. The exponential growth in supercomputer performance over the past two decades
[Bell92].
aerodynamic simulation of an entire aircraft, modeling of global climate over decades, and
investigating the atomic structures of advanced materials.
Let us consider a few specific applications, in the area of numerical simulation for
validating scientific hypotheses or for developing behavioral models, where TFLOPS
performance is required and PFLOPS performance would be highly desirable [Quin94].
To learn how the southern oceans transport heat to the South Pole, the following model
has been developed at Oregon State University. The ocean is divided into 4096 regions E–W,
1024 regions N–S, and 12 layers in depth (50 M 3D cells). A single iteration of the model
simulates ocean circulation for 10 minutes and involves about 30B floating-point operations.
To carry out the simulation for 1 year, about 50,000 iterations are required. Simulation for
6 years would involve 1016 floating-point operations.
In the field of fluid dynamics, the volume under study may be modeled by a 10³ × 10³
× 10³ lattice, with about 10³ floating-point operations needed per point over 104 time steps.
This too translates to 1016 floating-point operations.
As a final example, in Monte Carlo simulation of a nuclear reactor, about 1011 particles
must be tracked, as about 1 in 108 particles escape from a nuclear reactor and, for accuracy,
we need at least 10³ escapes in the simulation. With 104 floating-point operations needed per
particle tracked, the total computation constitutes about 1015 floating-point operations.
From the above, we see that 1015 –10 16 floating-point operations are required for many
applications. If we consider 10³ –104 seconds a reasonable running time for such computa-
8
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
tions, the need for TFLOPS performance is evident. In fact, researchers have already begun
working toward the next milestone of PFLOPS performance, which would be needed to run
the above models with higher accuracy (e.g., 10 times finer subdivisions in each of three
dimensions) or for longer durations (more steps).
The motivations for parallel processing can be summarized as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Higher speed, or solving problems faster. This is important when applications have
“hard” or “soft” deadlines. For example, we have at most a few hours of computation
time to do 24-hour weather forecasting or to produce timely tornado warnings.
Higher throughput, or solving more instances of given problems. This is important
when many similar tasks must be performed. For example, banks and airlines,
among others, use transaction processing systems that handle large volumes of data.
Higher computational power, or solving larger problems. This would allow us to
use very detailed, and thus more accurate, models or to carry out simulation runs
for longer periods of time (e.g., 5-day, as opposed to 24-hour, weather forecasting).
All three aspects above are captured by a figure-of-merit often used in connection with
parallel processors: the computation speed-up factor with respect to a uniprocessor. The
ultimate efficiency in parallel systems is to achieve a computation speed-up factor of p with
p processors. Although in many cases this ideal cannot be achieved, some speed-up is
generally possible. The actual gain in speed depends on the architecture used for the system
and the algorithm run on it. Of course, for a task that is (virtually) impossible to perform on
a single processor in view of its excessive running time, the computation speed-up factor can
rightly be taken to be larger than p or even infinite. This situation, which is the analogue of
several men moving a heavy piece of machinery or furniture in a few minutes, whereas one
of them could not move it at all, is sometimes referred to as parallel synergy.
This book focuses on the interplay of architectural and algorithmic speed-up techniques. More specifically, the problem of algorithm design for general-purpose parallel
systems and its “converse,” the incorporation of architectural features to help improve
algorithm efficiency and, in the extreme, the design of algorithm-based special-purpose
parallel architectures, are considered.
1.2. A MOTIVATING EXAMPLE
A major issue in devising a parallel algorithm for a given problem is the way in which
the computational load is divided between the multiple processors. The most efficient scheme
often depends both on the problem and on the parallel machine’s architecture. This section
exposes some of the key issues in parallel processing through a simple example [Quin94].
Consider the problem of constructing the list of all prime numbers in the interval [1, n]
for a given integer n > 0. A simple algorithm that can be used for this computation is the
sieve of Eratosthenes. Start with the list of numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . , n represented as a “mark”
bit-vector initialized to 1000 . . . 00. In each step, the next unmarked number m (associated
with a 0 in element m of the mark bit-vector) is a prime. Find this element m and mark all
multiples of m beginning with m ². When m² > n, the computation stops and all unmarked
elements are prime numbers. The computation steps for n = 30 are shown in Fig. 1.3.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
9
10
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 1.4. Schematic representation of single-processor solution for the sieve of Eratosthenes.
Figure 1.4 shows a single-processor implementation of the algorithm. The variable
“current prime” is initialized to 2 and, in later stages, holds the latest prime number found.
For each prime found, “index” is initialized to the square of this prime and is then
incremented by the current prime in order to mark all of its multiples.
Figure 1.5 shows our first parallel solution using p processors. The list of numbers and
the current prime are stored in a shared memory that is accessible to all processors. An idle
processor simply refers to the shared memory, updates the current prime, and uses its private
index to step through the list and mark the multiples of that prime. Division of work is thus
self-regulated. Figure 1.6 shows the activities of the processors (the prime they are working
on at any given instant) and the termination time for n = 1000 and 1 ≤ p ≤ 3. Note that using
more than three processors would not reduce the computation time in this control-parallel
scheme.
We next examine a data-parallel approach in which the bit-vector representing the n
integers is divided into p equal-length segments, with each segment stored in the private
memory of one processor (Fig. 1.7). Assume that p <
so that all of the primes whose
multiples have to be marked reside in Processor 1, which acts as a coordinator: It finds the
next prime and broadcasts it to all other processors, which then proceed to mark the numbers
in their sublists. The overall solution time now consists of two components: the time spent
on transmitting the selected primes to all processors (communication time) and the time spent
by individual processors marking their sublists (computation time). Typically, communication time grows with the number of processors, though not necessarily in a linear fashion.
Figure 1.8 shows that because of the abovementioned communication overhead, adding more
processors beyond a certain optimal number does not lead to any improvement in the total
solution time or in attainable speed-up.
Figure 1.5. Schematic representation of a control-parallel solution for the sieve of Eratosthenes.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
11
12
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 1.7. Data-parallel realization of the sieve of Eratosthenes.
Finally, consider the data-parallel solution, but with data I/O time also included in the
total solution time. Assuming for simplicity that the I/O time is constant and ignoring
communication time, the I/O time will constitute a larger fraction of the overall solution time
as the computation part is speeded up by adding more and more processors. If I/O takes 100
seconds, say, then there is little difference between doing the computation part in 1 second
or in 0.01 second. We will later see that such “sequential” or “unparallelizable” portions of
computations severely limit the speed-up that can be achieved with parallel processing.
Figure 1.9 shows the effect of I/O on the total solution time and the attainable speed-up.
Figure 1.8. Trade-off between communication time and computation time in the data-parallel
realization of the sieve of Eratosthenes.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
13
Figure 1.9. Effect of a constant I/O time on the data-parallel realization of the sieve of
Eratosthenes.
1.3. PARALLEL PROCESSING UPS AND DOWNS
L. F. Richardson, a British meteorologist, was the first person to attempt to forecast the
weather using numerical computations. He started to formulate his method during the First
World War while serving in the army ambulance corps. He estimated that predicting the
weather for a 24-hour period would require 64,000 slow “computers” (humans + mechanical
calculators) and even then, the forecast would take 12 hours to complete. He had the
following idea or dream:
Imagine a large hall like a theater. . . . The walls of this chamber are painted to form a
map of the globe. . . . A myriad of computers are at work upon the weather on the part
of the map where each sits, but each computer attends to only one equation or part of an
equation. The work of each region is coordinated by an official of higher rank. Numerous
little ‘night signs’ display the instantaneous values so that neighbouring computers can
read them. . . . One of [the conductor’s] duties is to maintain a uniform speed of progress
in all parts of the globe. . . . But instead of waving a baton, he turns a beam of rosy light
upon any region that is running ahead of the rest, and a beam of blue light upon those
that are behindhand. [See Fig. 1.10.]
Parallel processing, in the literal sense of the term, is used in virtually every modern
computer. For example, overlapping I/O with computation is a form of parallel processing,
as is the overlap between instruction preparation and execution in a pipelined processor.
Other forms of parallelism or concurrency that are widely used include the use of multiple
functional units (e.g., separate integer and floating-point ALUs or two floating-point multipliers in one ALU) and multitasking (which allows overlap between computation and
memory load necessitated by a page fault). Horizontal microprogramming, and its higherlevel incarnation in very-long-instruction-word (VLIW) computers, also allows some parallelism. However, in this book, the term parallel processing is used in a restricted sense of
having multiple (usually identical) processors for the main computation and not for the I/O
or other peripheral activities.
The history of parallel processing has had its ups and downs (read company formations
and bankruptcies!) with what appears to be a 20-year cycle. Serious interest in parallel
processing started in the 1960s. ILLIAC IV, designed at the University of Illinois and later
14
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 1.10. Richardson’s circular theater for weather forecasting calculations.
built and operated by Burroughs Corporation, was the first large-scale parallel computer
implemented; its 2D-mesh architecture with a common control unit for all processors was
based on theories developed in the late 1950s. It was to scale to 256 processors (four
quadrants of 64 processors each). Only one 64-processor quadrant was eventually built, but
it clearly demonstrated the feasibility of highly parallel computers and also revealed some
of the difficulties in their use.
Commercial interest in parallel processing resurfaced in the 1980s. Driven primarily by
contracts from the defense establishment and other federal agencies in the United States,
numerous companies were formed to develop parallel systems. Established computer vendors also initiated or expanded their parallel processing divisions. However, three factors led
to another recess:
1.
2.
3.
Government funding in the United States and other countries dried up, in part related
to the end of the cold war between the NATO allies and the Soviet bloc.
Commercial users in banking and other data-intensive industries were either saturated or disappointed by application difficulties.
Microprocessors developed so fast in terms of performance/cost ratio that customdesigned parallel machines always lagged in cost-effectiveness.
Many of the newly formed companies went bankrupt or shifted their focus to developing
software for distributed (workstation cluster) applications.
Driven by the Internet revolution and its associated “information providers,” a third
resurgence of parallel architectures is imminent. Centralized, high-performance machines
may be needed to satisfy the information processing/access needs of some of these providers.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
15
1.4. TYPES OF PARALLELISM: A TAXONOMY
Parallel computers can be divided into two main categories of control flow and data
flow. Control-flow parallel computers are essentially based on the same principles as the
sequential or von Neumann computer, except that multiple instructions can be executed at
any given time. Data-flow parallel computers, sometimes referred to as “non-von Neumann,”
are completely different in that they have no pointer to active instruction(s) or a locus of
control. The control is totally distributed, with the availability of operands triggering the
activation of instructions. In what follows, we will focus exclusively on control-flow parallel
computers.
In 1966, M. J. Flynn proposed a four-way classification of computer systems based on
the notions of instruction streams and data streams. Flynn’s classification has become
standard and is widely used. Flynn coined the abbreviations SISD, SIMD, MISD, and MIMD
(pronounced “sis-dee,” “sim-dee,” and so forth) for the four classes of computers shown in
Fig. 1.11, based on the number of instruction streams (single or multiple) and data streams
(single or multiple) [Flyn96]. The SISD class represents ordinary “uniprocessor” machines.
Computers in the SIMD class, with several processors directed by instructions issued from
a central control unit, are sometimes characterized as “array processors.” Machines in the
MISD category have not found widespread application, but one can view them as generalized
pipelines in which each stage performs a relatively complex operation (as opposed to
ordinary pipelines found in modern processors where each stage does a very simple
instruction-level operation).
The MIMD category includes a wide class of computers. For this reason, in 1988, E. E.
Johnson proposed a further classification of such machines based on their memory structure
(global or distributed) and the mechanism used for communication/synchronization (shared
variables or message passing). Again, one of the four categories (GMMP) is not widely used.
The GMSV class is what is loosely referred to as (shared-memory) multiprocessors. At the
Figure 1.11. The Flynn–Johnson classification of computer systems.
16
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
other extreme, the DMMP class is known as (distributed-memory) multicomputers. Finally,
the DMSV class, which is becoming popular in view of combining the implementation ease
of distributed memory with the programming ease of the shared-variable scheme, is sometimes called distributed shared memory. When all processors in a MIMD-type machine
execute the same program, the result is sometimes referred to as single-program multipledata [SPMD (spim-dee)].
Although Fig. 1.11 lumps all SIMD machines together, there are in fact variations
similar to those suggested above for MIMD machines. At least conceptually, there can be
shared-memory and distributed-memory SIMD machines in which the processors communicate by means of shared variables or explicit message passing.
Anecdote. The Flynn–Johnson classification of Fig. 1.11 contains eight four-letter
abbreviations. There are many other such abbreviations and acronyms in parallel processing,
examples being CISC, NUMA, PRAM, RISC, and VLIW. Even our journals (JPDC, TPDS)
and conferences (ICPP, IPPS, SPDP, SPAA) have not escaped this fascination with four-letter
abbreviations. The author has a theory that an individual cannot be considered a successful
computer architect until she or he has coined at least one, and preferably a group of two or
four, such abbreviations! Toward this end, the author coined the acronyms SINC and FINC
(Scant/Full Interaction Network Cell) as the communication network counterparts to the
popular RISC/CISC dichotomy [Parh95]. Alas, the use of these acronyms is not yet as
widespread as that of RISC/CISC. In fact, they are not used at all.
1.5. ROADBLOCKS TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Over the years, the enthusiasm of parallel computer designers and researchers has been
counteracted by many objections and cautionary statements. The most important of these are
listed in this section [Quin87]. The list begins with the less serious, or obsolete, objections
and ends with Amdahl’s law, which perhaps constitutes the most important challenge facing
parallel computer designers and users.
1. Grosch’s law (economy of scale applies, or computing power is proportional to the
square of cost). If this law did in fact hold, investing money in p processors would
be foolish as a single computer with the same total cost could offer p² times the
performance of one such processor. Grosch’s law was formulated in the days of
giant mainframes and actually did hold for those machines. In the early days of
parallel processing, it was offered as an argument against the cost-effectiveness of
parallel machines. However, we can now safely retire this law, as we can buy more
MFLOPS computing power per dollar by spending on micros rather than on supers.
Note that even if this law did hold, one could counter that there is only one “fastest”
single-processor computer and it has a certain price; you cannot get a more powerful
one by spending more.
2. Minsky’s conjecture (speed-up is proportional to the logarithm of the number p of
processors). This conjecture has its roots in an analysis of data access conflicts
assuming random distribution of addresses. These conflicts will slow everything
down to the point that quadrupling the number of processors only doubles the
performance. However, data access patterns in real applications are far from
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
3.
4.
5.
6.
17
random. Most applications have a pleasant amount of data access regularity and
locality that help improve the performance. One might say that the log p speed-up
rule is one side of the coin that has the perfect speed-up p on the flip side. Depending
on the application, real speed-up can range from log p to p (p /log p being a
reasonable middle ground).
The tyranny of IC technology (because hardware becomes about 10 times faster
every 5 years, by the time a parallel machine with 10-fold performance is designed
and implemented, uniprocessors will be just as fast). This objection might be valid
for some special-purpose systems that must be built from scratch with “old”
technology. Recent experience in parallel machine design has shown that off-theshelf components can be used in synthesizing massively parallel computers. If the
design of the parallel processor is such that faster microprocessors can simply be
plugged in as they become available, they too benefit from advancements in IC
technology. Besides, why restrict our attention to parallel systems that are designed
to be only 10 times faster rather than 100 or 1000 times?
The tyranny of vector supercomputers (vector supercomputers, built by Cray,
Fujitsu, and other companies, are rapidly improving in performance and additionally offer a familiar programming model and excellent vectorizing compilers; why
bother with parallel processors?). Figure 1.2 contains a possible answer to this
objection. Besides, not all computationally intensive applications deal with vectors
or matrices; some are in fact quite irregular. Note, also, that vector and parallel
processing are complementary approaches. Most current vector supercomputers do
in fact come in multiprocessor configurations for increased performance.
The software inertia (billions of dollars worth of existing software makes it hard to
switch to parallel systems; the cost of converting the “dusty decks” to parallel
programs and retraining the programmers is prohibitive). This objection is valid in
the short term; however, not all programs needed in the future have already been
written. New applications will be developed and many new problems will become
solvable with increased performance. Students are already being trained to think
parallel. Additionally, tools are being developed to transform sequential code into
parallel code automatically. In fact, it has been argued that it might be prudent to
develop programs in parallel languages even if they are to be run on sequential
computers. The added information about concurrency and data dependencies would
allow the sequential computer to improve its performance by instruction prefetching, data caching, and so forth.
Amdahl’s law (speed-up ≤ 1/[ƒ+ (1 – ƒ)/p ] = p/[1 + ƒ(p – 1)]; a small fraction ƒ of
inherently sequential or unparallelizable computation severely limits the speed-up
that can be achieved with p processors). This is by far the most important of the six
objections/warnings. A unit-time task, for which the fraction ƒ is unparallelizable
(so it takes the same time ƒ on both sequential and parallel machines) and the
remaining 1 – ƒ is fully parallelizable [so it runs in time (1 – ƒ)/p on a p -processor
machine], has a running time of ƒ + (1 – ƒ)/ p on the parallel machine, hence
Amdahl’s speed-up formula.
Figure 1.12 plots the speed-up as a function of the number of processors for different values
of the inherently sequential fraction ƒ. The speed-up can never exceed 1/ƒ, no matter how
18
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 1.12. The limit on speed-up according to Amdahl’s law.
Figure 1.13. Task graph exhibiting limited inherent parallelism.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
19
many processors are used. Thus, for ƒ = 0.1, speed-up has an upper bound of 10. Fortunately,
there exist applications for which the sequential overhead is very small. Furthermore, the
sequential overhead need not be a constant fraction of the job independent of problem size.
In fact, the existence of applications for which the sequential overhead, as a fraction of the
overall computational work, diminishes has been demonstrated.
Closely related to Amdahl’s law is the observation that some applications lack inherent
parallelism, thus limiting the speed-up that is achievable when multiple processors are used.
Figure 1.13 depicts a task graph characterizing a computation. Each of the numbered nodes
in the graph is a unit-time computation and the arrows represent data dependencies or the
prerequisite structure of the graph. A single processor can execute the 13-node task graph
shown in Fig. 1.13 in 13 time units. Because the critical path from input node 1 to output
node 13 goes through 8 nodes, a parallel processor cannot do much better, as it needs at least
8 time units to execute the task graph. So, the speed-up associated with this particular task
graph can never exceed 1.625, no matter how many processors are used.
1.6. EFFECTIVENESS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
Throughout the book, we will be using certain measures to compare the effectiveness
of various parallel algorithms or architectures for solving desired problems. The following
definitions and notations are applicable [Lee80]:
T(p)
Number of processors
Total number of unit operations performed by the p processors; this is often
referred to as computational work or energy
Execution time with p processors; clearly, T(1) = W(1) and T(p) ≤ W (p)
S(p)
Speed-up =
E(p)
Efficiency =
R (p )
Redundancy =
U(p)
Utilization =
Q(p)
Quality =
p
W(p)
The significance of each measure is self-evident from its name and defining equation given
above. It is not difficult to establish the following relationships between these parameters.
The proof is left as an exercise.
1 ≤ S(p ) ≤ p
U(p) = R (p)E(p)
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
20
Figure 1.14. Computation graph for finding the sum of 16 numbers.
Example. Finding the sum of 16 numbers can be represented by the binary-tree
computation graph of Fig. 1.14 with T(1) = W(1) = 15. Assume unit-time additions and ignore
all else. With p = 8 processors, we have
W(8) = 15
T(8) = 4
E(8) = 15/(8 × 4) = 47%
S(8) = 15/4 = 3.75
R(8) = 15/15 = 1
Q(8) = 1.76
Essentially, the 8 processors perform all of the additions at the same tree level in each time
unit, beginning with the leaf nodes and ending at the root. The relatively low efficiency is
the result of limited parallelism near the root of the tree.
Now, assuming that addition operations that are vertically aligned in Fig. 1.14 are to be
performed by the same processor and that each interprocessor transfer, represented by an
oblique arrow, also requires one unit of work (time), the results for p = 8 processors become
21
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
W(8) = 22
T(8) = 7
E(8) = 15/(8 × 7) = 27%
S(8) = 15/7 = 2.14
R(8) = 22/15 = 1.47
Q(8) = 0.39
The efficiency in this latter case is even lower, primarily because the interprocessor transfers
constitute overhead rather than useful operations.
PROBLEMS
1.1.
Ocean heat transport modeling
Assume continuation of the trends in Figs. 1.1 and 1.2:
a . When will a single microprocessor be capable of simulating 10 years of global ocean
circulation, as described in Section 1.1, overnight (5:00 PM to 8:00 AM the following day),
assuming a doubling of the number of divisions in each of the three dimensions? You can
assume that a microprocessor’s FLOPS rating is roughly half of its MIPS rating.
b. When will a vector supercomputer be capable of the computation defined in part (a)?
c . When will a $240M massively parallel computer be capable of the computation of part (a)?
d. When will a $30M massively parallel computer be capable of the computation of part (a)?
1.2.
Micros versus supers
Draw the performance trend line for microprocessors on Fig. 1.2, assuming that a microprocessor’s FLOPS rating is roughly half of its MIPS rating. Compare and discuss the observed
trends.
1.3.
Sieve of Eratosthenes
Figure 1.6 shows that in the control-parallel implementation of the sieve of Eratosthenes
algorithm, a single processor is always responsible for sieving the multiples of 2. For n = 1000,
this is roughly 35% of the total work performed. By Amdahl’s law, the maximum possible
speed-up for p = 2 and ƒ = 0.35 is 1.48. Yet, for p = 2, we note a speed-up of about 2 in Fig.
1.6. What is wrong with the above reasoning?
1.4.
Sieve of Eratosthenes
Consider the data-parallel implementation of the sieve of Eratosthenes algorithm for n = 106.
Assume that marking of each cell takes 1 time unit and broadcasting a value to all processors
takes b time units.
a . Plot three speed-up curves similar to Fig. 1.8 for b = 1, 10, and 100 and discuss the results.
b. Repeat part (a), this time assuming that the broadcast time is a linear function of the number
of processors: b = α p + β , with ( α, β) = (5, 1), (5, 10), (5, 100).
1.5.
Sieve of Eratosthenes
Consider the data-parallel implementation of the sieve of Eratosthenes algorithm for n = 106.
Assume that marking of each cell takes 1 time unit and broadcasting m numbers to all processors
takes b + cm time units, where b and c are constants. For each of the values 1, 10, and 100 for
the parameter b, determine the range of values for c where it would be more cost-effective for
Processor 1 to send the list of all primes that it is holding to all other processors in a single
message before the actual markings begin.
22
1.6.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Sieve of Eratosthenes
a.
Noting that 2 is the only even prime, propose a modification to the sieve of Eratosthenes
algorithm that requires less storage.
b. Draw a diagram, similar to Fig. 1.6, for the control-parallel implementation of the improved
algorithm. Derive the speed-ups for two and three processors.
c. Compute the speed-up of the data-parallel implementation of the improved algorithm over
the sequential version.
d. Compare the speed-ups of parts (b) and (c) with those obtained for the original algorithm.
1.7.
Amdahl’s law
Amdahl’s law can be applied in contexts other than parallel processing. Suppose that a
numerical application consists of 20% floating-point and 80% integer/control operations (these
are based on operation counts rather than their execution times). The execution time of a
floating-point operation is three times as long as other operations. We are considering a redesign
of the floating-point unit in a microprocessor to make it faster.
a.
Formulate a more general version of Amdahl’s law in terms of selective speed-up of a
portion of a computation rather than in terms of parallel processing.
b. How much faster should the new floating-point unit be for 25% overall speed improvement?
c. What is the maximum speed-up that we can hope to achieve by only modifying the
floating-point unit?
1.8.
Amdahl’s law
a.
Represent Amdahl’s law in terms of a task or computation graph similar to that in Fig. 1.13.
Hint: Use an input and an output node, each with computation time ƒ/2, where ƒ is the
inherently sequential fraction.
b. Approximate the task/computation graph of part (a) with one having only unit-time nodes.
1.9. Parallel processing effectiveness
Consider two versions of the task graph in Fig. 1.13. Version U corresponds to each node
requiring unit computation time. Version E/O corresponds to each odd-numbered node being
unit-time and each even-numbered node taking twice as long.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Convert the E/O version to an equivalent V version where each node is unit-time.
Find the maximum attainable speed-up for each of the U and V versions.
What is the minimum number of processors needed to achieve the speed-ups of part (b)?
What is the maximum attainable speed-up in each case with three processors?
Which of the U and V versions of the task graph would you say is “more parallel” and
why?
1.10.
Parallel processing effectiveness
Prove the relationships between the parameters in Section 1.6.
1.11.
Parallel processing effectiveness
An image processing application problem is characterized by 12 unit-time tasks: (1) an input
task that must be completed before any other task can start and consumes the entire bandwidth
of the single-input device available, (2) 10 completely independent computational tasks, and
(3) an output task that must follow the completion of all other tasks and consumes the entire
bandwidth of the single-output device available. Assume the availability of one input and one
output device throughout.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLELISM
23
a . Draw the task graph for this image processing application problem.
b. What is the maximum speed-up that can be achieved for this application with two
processors?
c . What is an upper bound on the speed-up with parallel processing?
d. How many processors are sufficient to achieve the maximum speed-up derived in part (c)?
e . What is the maximum speed-up in solving five independent instances of the problem on
two processors?
f . What is an upper bound on the speed-up in parallel solution of 100 independent instances
of the problem?
g. How many processors are sufficient to achieve the maximum speed-up derived in part (f)?
h. What is an upper bound on the speed-up, given a steady stream of independent problem
instances?
1.12.
Parallelism in everyday life
Discuss the various forms of parallelism used to speed up the following processes:
a.
b.
c.
1.13.
Student registration at a university.
Shopping at a supermarket.
Taking an elevator in a high-rise building.
Parallelism for fame or fortune
In 1997, Andrew Beale, a Dallas banker and amateur mathematician, put up a gradually
increasing prize of up to U.S. $50,000 for proving or disproving his conjecture that if a q + b r
= c s (where all terms are integers and q, r, s > 2), then a, b, and c have a common factor. Beale’s
conjecture is, in effect, a general form of Fermat’s Last Theorem, which asserts that a n + b n =
c n has no integer solution for n > 2. Discuss how parallel processing can be used to claim the
prize.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Bell92]
[Flyn96]
[John88]
[Lee80]
[Parh95]
[Quin87]
[Quin94]
[Scha97]
[SIA94]
Bell, G., “Ultracomputers: A Teraflop Before Its Time,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 35, No.
8, pp. 27–47, August 1992.
Flynn, M. J., and K. W. Rudd, “Parallel Architectures,” ACM Computing Surveys, Vol. 28, No. 1, pp.
67–70, March 1996.
Johnson, E. E., “Completing an MIMD Multiprocessor Taxonomy,” Computer Architecture News,
Vol. 16, No. 3, pp. 44–47, June 1988.
Lee, R. B.-L., “Empirical Results on the Speed, Efficiency, Redundancy, and Quality of Parallel
Computations,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1980, pp. 91–96.
Parhami, B., “The Right Acronym at the Right Time” (The Open Channel), IEEE Computer, Vol. 28,
No. 6, p. 120, June 1995.
Quinn, M. J., Designing Efficient Algorithm for Parallel Computers, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Quinn, M. J., Parallel Computing: Theory and Practice, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
Schaller, R. R., “Moore’s Law: Past, Present, and Future,” IEEE Spectrum, Vol. 34, No. 6, pp. 52-59,
June 1997.
Semiconductor Industry Association, The National Roadmap for Semiconductors, 1994.
This page intentionally left blank.
2
A Taste of Parallel
Algorithms
In this chapter, we examine five simple building-block parallel operations
(defined in Section 2.1) and look at the corresponding algorithms on four simple
parallel architectures: linear array, binary tree, 2D mesh, and a simple sharedvariable computer (see Section 2.2). This exercise will introduce us to the nature
of parallel computations, the interplay between algorithm and architecture, and
the complexity of parallel computations (analyses and bounds). Also, the building-block computations are important in their own right and will be used
throughout the book. We will study some of these architectures and algorithms
in more depth in subsequent chapters. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
Some simple computations
Some simple architectures
Algorithms for a linear array
Algorithms for a binary tree
Algorithms for a 2D mesh
Algorithms with shared variables
25
This page intentionally left blank.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
27
2.1. SOME SIMPLE COMPUTATIONS
In this section, we define five fundamental building-block computations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Semigroup (reduction, fan-in) computation
Parallel prefix computation
Packet routing
Broadcasting, and its more general version, multicasting
Sorting records in ascending/descending order of their keys
Semigroup Computation. Let ⊗ be an associative binary operator; i.e., ( x ⊗ y ) ⊗ z
= x ⊗ ( y ⊗ z) for all x, y, z ∈ S. A semigroup is simply a pair ( S, ⊗ ), where S is a set of
elements on which ⊗ is defined. Semigroup (also known as reduction or fan-in ) computation
is defined as: Given a list of n values x0 , x1 , . . . , xn–1 , compute x0 ⊗ x 1 ⊗ . . . ⊗ xn–1 . Common
examples for the operator ⊗ include +, × , ∧ , ∨ , ⊕ , ∩, ∪ , max, min. The operator ⊗ may or
may not be commutative, i.e., it may or may not satisfy x ⊗ y = y ⊗ x (all of the above
examples are, but the carry computation, e.g., is not). This last point is important; while the
parallel algorithm can compute chunks of the expression using any partitioning scheme, the
chunks must eventually be combined in left-to-right order. Figure 2.1 depicts a semigroup
computation on a uniprocessor.
Parallel Prefix Computation. With the same assumptions as in the preceding paragraph, a parallel prefix computation is defined as simultaneously evaluating all of the prefixes
of the expression x0 ⊗ x 1 . . . ⊗ x n–1 ; i.e., x 0, x 0 ⊗ x 1, x0 ⊗ x1 ⊗ x2, . . . , x 0 ⊗ x 1 ⊗ . . .
⊗ x n–1 . Note that the ith prefix expression is si = x0 ⊗ x1 ⊗ . . . ⊗ x i. The comment about
commutativity, or lack thereof, of the binary operator ⊗ applies here as well. The graph
representing the prefix computation on a uniprocessor is similar to Fig. 2.1, but with the
intermediate values also output.
Packet Routing. A packet of information resides at Processor i and must be sent to
Processor j. The problem is to route the packet through intermediate processors, if needed,
Figure 2.1. Semigroup computation on a uniprocessor.
28
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
such that it gets to the destination as quickly as possible. The problem becomes more
challenging when multiple packets reside at different processors, each with its own destination. In this case, the packet routes may interfere with one another as they go through common
intermediate processors. When each processor has at most one packet to send and one packet
to receive, the packet routing problem is called one-to-one communication or 1–1 routing.
Broadcasting. Given a value a known at a certain processor i, disseminate it to all p
processors as quickly as possible, so that at the end, every processor has access to, or
“knows,” the value. This is sometimes referred to as one-to-all communication. The more
general case of this operation, i.e., one-to-many communication, is known as multicasting.
From a programming viewpoint, we make the assignments xj : = a for 1 ≤ j ≤ p (broadcasting)
or for j ∈ G (multicasting), where G is the multicast group and x j is a local variable in
processor j.
Sorting. Rather than sorting a set of records, each with a key and data elements, we
focus on sorting a set of keys for simplicity. Our sorting problem is thus defined as: Given
a list of n keys x0 , x1 , . . . , x n–1 , and a total order ≤ on key values, rearrange the n keys as
x i , xi , . . . , xi , such that x i ≤ x i ≤ . . . ≤ x i .We consider only sorting the keys in
0
n–1
1
n–1
0
1
nondescending order. Any algorithm for sorting values in nondescending order can be
converted, in a straightforward manner, to one for sorting the keys in nonascending order or
for sorting records.
2.2. SOME SIMPLE ARCHITECTURES
In this section, we define four simple parallel architectures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Linear array of processors
Binary tree of processors
Two-dimensional mesh of processors
Multiple processors with shared variables
Linear Array. Figure 2.2 shows a linear array of nine processors, numbered 0 to 8. The
diameter of a p-processor linear array, defined as the longest of the shortest distances between
pairs of processors, is D = p – 1. The ( maximum) node degree, defined as the largest number
of links or communication channels associated with a processor, is d = 2. The ring variant,
also shown in Fig. 2.2, has the same node degree of 2 but a smaller diameter of D = p/2 .
Binary Tree. Figure 2.3 shows a binary tree of nine processors. This binary tree is
balanced in that the leaf levels differ by at most 1. If all leaf levels are identical and every
nonleaf processor has two children, the binary tree is said to be complete. The diameter of a
Figure 2.2. A linear array of nine processors and its ring variant.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
29
Figure 2.3. A balanced (but incomplete) binary tree of nine processors.
p-processor complete binary tree is 2 log2 (p + 1) – 2. More generally, the diameter of a
p-processor balanced binary tree architecture is 2 log2 p or 2  log2 p – 1, depending on the
placement of leaf nodes at the last level. Unlike linear array, several different p-processor
binary tree architectures may exist. This is usually not a problem as we almost always deal
with complete binary trees. The (maximum) node degree in a binary tree is d = 3.
2D Mesh. Figure 2.4 shows a square 2D mesh of nine processors. The diameter of a
p-processor square mesh is
– 2. More generally, the mesh does not have to be square.
The diameter of a p-processor r × (p/r) mesh is D = r + p /r – 2. Again, multiple 2D meshes
may exist for the same number p of processors, e.g., 2 × 8 or 4 × 4. Square meshes are usually
preferred because they minimize the diameter. The torus variant, also shown in Fig. 2.4, has
end-around or wraparound links for rows and columns. The node degree for both meshes
and tori is d = 4. But a p -processor r × (p/r) torus has a smaller diameter of D =  r /2 +
 p/(2r)  .
Shared Memory. A shared-memory multiprocessor can be modeled as a complete
graph, in which every node is connected to every other node, as shown in Fig. 2.5 for p = 9.
In the 2D mesh of Fig. 2.4, Processor 0 can send/receive data directly to/from P 1 and P 3 .
However, it has to go through an intermediary to send/receive data to/from P 4 , say. In a
shared-memory multiprocessor, every piece of data is directly accessible to every processor
(we assume that each processor can simultaneously send/receive data over all of its p – 1
links). The diameter D = 1 of a complete graph is an indicator of this direct access. The node
Figure 2.4. A 2D mesh of nine processors and its torus variant.
30
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 2.5. A shared-variable architecture modeled as a complete graph.
degree d = p – 1, on the other hand, indicates that such an architecture would be quite costly
to implement if no restriction is placed on data accesses.
2.3. ALGORITHMS FOR A LINEAR ARRAY
Semigroup Computation. Let us consider first a special case of semigroup computation, namely, that of maximum finding. Each of the p processors holds a value initially and
our goal is for every processor to know the largest of these values. A local variable,
max-thus-far, can be initialized to the processor’s own data value. In each step, a processor
sends its max-thus-far value to its two neighbors. Each processor, on receiving values from
its left and right neighbors, sets its max-thus-far value to the largest of the three values, i.e.,
max(left, own, right). Figure 2.6 depicts the execution of this algorithm for p = 9 processors.
The dotted lines in Fig. 2.6 show how the maximum value propagates from P6 to all other
processors. Had there been two maximum values, say in P 2 and P 6 , the propagation would
have been faster. In the worst case, p – 1 communication steps (each involving sending a
processor’s value to both neighbors), and the same number of three-way comparison steps,
are needed. This is the best one can hope for, given that the diameter of a p-processor linear
array is D = p – 1 (diameter-based lower bound).
Figure 2.6. Maximum-finding on a linear array of nine processors.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
31
For a general semigroup computation, the processor at the left end of the array (the one
with no left neighbor) becomes active and sends its data value to the right (initially, all
processors are dormant or inactive). On receiving a value from its left neighbor, a processor
becomes active, applies the semigroup operation ⊗ to the value received from the left and
its own data value, sends the result to the right, and becomes inactive again. This wave of
activity propagates to the right, until the rightmost processor obtains the desired result. The
computation result is then propagated leftward to all processors. In all, 2 p – 2 communication
steps are needed.
Parallel Prefix Computation. Let us assume that we want the ith prefix result to be
obtained at the ith processor, 0 ≤ i ≤ p – 1. The general semigroup algorithm described in
the preceding paragraph in fact performs a semigroup computation first and then does a
broadcast of the final value to all processors. Thus, we already have an algorithm for parallel
prefix computation that takes p – 1 communication/combining steps. A variant of the parallel
prefix computation, in which Processor i ends up with the prefix result up to the ( i – 1)th
value, is sometimes useful. This diminished prefix computation can be performed just as
easily if each processor holds onto the value received from the left rather than the one it sends
to the right. The diminished prefix sum results for the example of Fig. 2.7 would be 0, 5, 7,
15, 21, 24, 31, 40, 41.
Thus far, we have assumed that each processor holds a single data item. Extension of
the semigroup and parallel prefix algorithms to the case where each processor initially holds
several data items is straightforward. Figure 2.8 shows a parallel prefix sum computation
with each processor initially holding two data items. The algorithm consists of each processor
doing a prefix computation on its own data set of size n/p (this takes n/p – 1 combining
steps), then doing a diminished parallel prefix computation on the linear array as above ( p
– 1 communication/combining steps), and finally combining the local prefix result from this
last computation with the locally computed prefixes (n /p combining steps). In all, 2n/p + p
– 2 combining steps and p – 1 communication steps are required.
Packet Routing. To send a packet of information from Processor i to Processor j on
a linear array, we simply attach a routing tag with the value j – i to it. The sign of a routing
tag determines the direction in which it should move (+ = right, – = left) while its magnitude
indicates the action to be performed (0 = remove the packet, nonzero = forward the packet).
With each forwarding, the magnitude of the routing tag is decremented by 1. Multiple packets
Figure 2.7. Computing prefix sums on a linear array of nine processors.
32
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 2.8. Computing prefix sums on a linear array with two items per processor.
originating at different processors can flow rightward and leftward in lockstep, without ever
interfering with each other.
Broadcasting. If Processor i wants to broadcast a value a to all processors, it sends an
rbcast(a) (read r-broadcast) message to its right neighbor and an lbcast(a) message to its left
neighbor. Any processor receiving an rbcast(a ) message, simply copies the value a and
forwards the message to its right neighbor (if any). Similarly, receiving an lbcast( a ) message
causes a to be copied locally and the message forwarded to the left neighbor. The worst-case
number of communication steps for broadcasting is p – 1.
Sorting. We consider two versions of sorting on a linear array: with and without I/O.
Figure 2.9 depicts a linear-array sorting algorithm when p keys are input, one at a time, from
the left end. Each processor, on receiving a key value from the left, compares the received
value with the value stored in its local register (initially, all local registers hold the value + ∞ ).
The smaller of the two values is kept in the local register and larger value is passed on to the
right. Once all p inputs have been received, we must allow p – 1 additional communication
cycles for the key values that are in transit to settle into their respective positions in the linear
array. If the sorted list is to be output from the left, the output phase can start immediately
after the last key value has been received. In this case, an array half the size of the input list
would be adequate and we effectively have zero-time sorting, i.e., the total sorting time is
equal to the I/O time.
If the key values are already in place, one per processor, then an algorithm known as
odd–even transposition can be used for sorting. A total of p steps are required. In an
odd-numbered step, odd-numbered processors compare values with their even-numbered
right neighbors. The two processors exchange their values if they are out of order. Similarly,
in an even-numbered step, even-numbered processors compare–exchange values with their
right neighbors (see Fig. 2.10). In the worst case, the largest key value resides in Processor
0 and must move all the way to the other end of the array. This needs p – 1 right moves. One
step must be added because no movement occurs in the first step. Of course one could use
even–odd transposition, but this will not affect the worst-case time complexity of the
algorithm for our nine-processor linear array.
Note that the odd–even transposition algorithm uses p processors to sort p keys in p
compare–exchange steps. How good is this algorithm? Let us evaluate the odd–even
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
Figure 2.9. Sorting on a linear array with the keys input sequentially from the left.
Figure 2.10. Odd–even transposition sort on a linear array.
33
34
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
transposition algorithm with respect to the various measures introduced in Section 1.6. The
best sequential sorting algorithms take on the order of p log p compare–exchange steps to
sort a list of size p. Let us assume, for simplicity, that they take exactly p log 2 p steps. Then,
we have T (1) = W (1) = p log 2 p, T (p) = p, W(p) = p 2 /2, S (p) = log 2 p (Minsky’s conjecture?),
E(p) = (log 2 p)/p, R(p) = p /(2 log 2 p ), U(p) = 1/2, and Q(p) = 2(log 2 p)3 / p2 .
In most practical situations, the number n of keys to be sorted (the problem size) is greater
than the number p of processors (the machine size). The odd–even transposition sort
algorithm with n/p keys per processor is as follows. First, each processor sorts its list of size
n/p using any efficient sequential sorting algorithm. Let us say this takes ( n/p)log 2 (n/p )
compare–exchange steps. Next, the odd–even transposition sort is performed as before,
except that each compare–exchange step is replaced by a merge–split step in which the two
communicating processors merge their sublists of size n/p into a single sorted list of size
2 n/p and then split the list down the middle, one processor keeping the smaller half and the
other, the larger half. For example, if P 0 is holding (1, 3, 7, 8) and P 1 has (2, 4, 5, 9), a
merge–split step will turn the lists into (1, 2, 3, 4) and (5, 7, 8, 9), respectively. Because the
sublists are sorted, the merge–split step requires n/p compare–exchange steps. Thus, the total
time of the algorithm is (n/p)log2 (n /p ) + n . Note that the first term (local sorting) will be
dominant if p < log 2 n, while the second term (array merging) is dominant for p > log2 n . For
p ≥ log 2 n, the time complexity of the algorithm is linear in n; hence, the algorithm is more
efficient than the one-key-per-processor version.
One final observation about sorting: Sorting is important in its own right, but occasionally it also helps us in data routing. Suppose data values being held by the p processors of a
linear array are to be routed to other processors, such that the destination of each value is
different from all others. This is known as a permutation routing problem. Because the p
distinct destinations must be 0, 1, 2, . . . , p – 1, forming records with the destination address
as the key and sorting these records will cause each record to end up at its correct destination.
Consequently, permutation routing on a linear array requires p compare–exchange steps. So,
effectively, p packets are routed in the same amount of time that is required for routing a
single packet in the worst case.
2.4.
ALGORITHMS FOR A BINARY TREE
In algorithms for a binary tree of processors, we will assume that the data elements are
initially held by the leaf processors only. The nonleaf (inner) processors participate in the
computation, but do not hold data elements of their own. This simplifying assumption, which
can be easily relaxed, leads to simpler algorithms. As roughly half of the tree nodes are leaf
nodes, the inefficiency resulting from this assumption is not very great.
Semigroup Computation. A binary-tree architecture is ideally suited for this computation (for this reason, semigroup computation is sometimes referred to as tree computation).
Each inner node receives two values from its children (if each of them has already computed
a value or is a leaf node), applies the operator to them, and passes the result upward to its
parent. After  log2 p  steps, the root processor will have the computation result. All processors
can then be notified of the result through a broadcasting operation from the root. Total time:
2 log 2 p  steps.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
35
Parallel Prefix Computation. Again, this is quite simple and can be done optimally
in 2  log 2 p  steps (recall that the diameter of a binary tree is 2  log 2 p  or 2  log 2 p  – 1). The
algorithm consists of an upward propagation phase followed by downward data movement.
As shown in Fig. 2.11, the upward propagation phase is identical to the upward movement
of data in semigroup computation. At the end of this phase, each node will have the semigroup
computation result for its subtree. The downward phase is as follows. Each processor
remembers the value it received from its left child. On receiving a value from the parent, a
node passes the value received from above to its left child and the combination of this value
and the one that came from the left child to its right child. The root is viewed as receiving
the identity element from above and thus initiates the downward phase by sending the identity
element to the left and the value received from its left child to the right. At the end of the
downward phase, the leaf processors compute their respective results.
It is instructive to look at some applications of the parallel prefix computation at this
point. Given a list of 0s and 1s, the rank of each 1 in the list (its relative position among the
1s) can be determined by a prefix sum computation:
Figure 2.11. Parallel prefix computation on a binary tree of processors.
36
Data: 0
Prefix sums: 0
Ranks of 1s:
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
2
0
2
0
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
3
4
5
0
5
A priority circuit has a list of 0s and 1s as its inputs and picks the first (highest-priority) 1
in the list. The function of a priority circuit can be defined as
Data: 0
Diminished prefix logical ORs: 0
Complement: 1
AND with data: 0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
As a final example, the carry computation in the design of adders can be formulated as a
parallel prefix computation in the following way. Let “g,” “p”, and “a” denote the event that
a particular digit position in the adder generates, propagates, or annihilates a carry. For a
decimal adder, e.g., these correspond to the digit sums being greater than 9, equal to 9, and
less than 9, respectively. Therefore, the input data for the carry circuit consists of a vector of
three-valued elements such as
Final carries into the various positions can be determined by a parallel prefix computation
using the carry operator “ ¢ ” defined as follows (view x ∈ {g, p, a} as the incoming carry
into a position):
p ¢ x=x
a ¢ x=a
g ¢ x=g
x propagates over p
x is annihilated or absorbed by a
x is immaterial because a carry is generated
In fact, if each node in the two trees of Fig. 2.11 is replaced by a logic circuit corresponding
to the carry operator, a five-digit carry-lookahead circuit would result.
Packet Routing. The algorithm for routing a packet of information from Processor i
to Processor j on a binary tree of processors depends on the processor numbering scheme
used. The processor numbering scheme shown in Fig. 2.3 is not the best one for this purpose
but it will be used here to develop a routing algorithm. The indexing scheme of Fig. 2.3 is
known as “preorder” indexing and has the following recursive definition: Nodes in a subtree
are numbered by first numbering the root node, then its left subtree, and finally the right
subtree. So the index of each node is less than the indices of all of its descendants. We assume
that each node, in addition to being aware of its own index (self) in the tree, which is the
smallest in its subtree, knows the largest node index in its left (maxl) and right (maxr )
subtrees. A packet on its way from node i to node dest, and currently residing in node self,
is routed according to the following algorithm.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
37
if dest = self
then remove the packet {done}
else if dest < self or dest > maxr
then route upward
else if dest ≤ maxl
then route leftward
else route rightward
endif
endif
endif
This algorithm does not make any assumption about the tree except that it is a binary tree.
In particular, the tree need not be complete or even balanced.
Broadcasting.
Processor i sends the desired data upwards to the root processor,
which then broadcasts the data downwards to all processors.
We can use an algorithm similar to bubblesort that allows the smaller
Sorting.
elements in the leaves to “bubble up” to the root processor first, thus allowing the root to
“see” all of the data elements in nondescending order. The root then sends the elements to
leaf nodes in the proper order. Before describing the part of the algorithm dealing with the
upward bubbling of data, let us deal with the simpler downward movement. This downward
movement is easily coordinated if each node knows the number of leaf nodes in its left
subtree. If the rank order of the element received from above (kept in a local counter) does
not exceed the number of leaf nodes to the left, then the data item is sent to the left. Otherwise,
it is sent to the right. Note that the above discussion implicitly assumes that data are to be
sorted from left to right in the leaves.
The upward movement of data in the above sorting algorithm can be accomplished as
follows, where the processor action is described from its own viewpoint. Initially, each leaf
has a single data item and all other nodes are empty. Each inner node has storage space for
two values, migrating upward from its left and right subtrees.
if you have 2 items
then do nothing
else if you have 1 item that came from the left (right)
then get the smaller item from the right (left) child
else get the smaller item from each child
endif
endif
Figure 2.12 shows the first few steps of the upward data movement (up to the point when
the smallest element is in the root node, ready to begin its downward movement). The above
sorting algorithm takes linear time in the number of elements to be sorted. We might be
interested to know if a more efficient sorting algorithm can be developed, given that the
diameter of the tree architecture is logarithmic (i.e., in the worst case, a data item has to move
2  log 2 p  steps to get to its position in sorted order). The answer, unfortunately, is that we
cannot do fundamentally better than the above.
38
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 2.12. The first few steps of the sorting algorithm on a binary tree.
The reasoning is based on a lower bound argument that is quite useful in many contexts.
All we need to do to partition a tree architecture into two equal or almost equal halves
(composed of  p/2  and  p/2 processors) is to cut a single link next to the root processor
(Fig. 2.13). We say that the bisection width of the binary tree architecture is 1. Now, in the
worst case, the initial data arrangement may be such that all values in the left (right) half of
the tree must move to the right (left) half to assume their sorted positions. Hence, all data
elements must pass through the single link. No matter how we organize the data movements,
Figure 2.13. The bisection width of a binary tree architecture.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
39
it takes linear time for all of the data elements to pass through this bottleneck. This is an
example of a bisection-based lower bound.
2.5. ALGORITHMS FOR A 2D MESH
In all of the 2D mesh algorithms presented in this section, we use the linear-array
algorithms of Section 2.3 as building blocks. This leads to simple algorithms, but not
necessarily the most efficient ones. Mesh-based architectures and their algorithms will be
discussed in great detail in Part III (Chapters 9–12).
Semigroup Computation. To perform a semigroup computation on a 2D mesh, do
the semigroup computation in each row and then in each column. For example, in finding
the maximum of a set of p values, stored one per processor, the row maximums are computed
first and made available to every processor in the row. Then column maximums are identified.
– 4 steps on a p-processor square mesh, per the results in Section 2.3. The
This takes 4
same process can be used for computing the sum of p numbers. Note that for a general
semigroup computation with a noncommutative operation, the p numbers must be stored in
row-major order for this algorithm to work correctly.
Parallel Prefix Computation. Again, this is quite simple and can be done in three
phases, assuming that the processors (and their stored values) are indexed in row-major order:
(1) do a parallel prefix computation on each row, (2) do a diminished parallel prefix
computation in the rightmost column, and (3) broadcast the results in the rightmost column
to all of the elements in the respective rows and combine with the initially computed row
prefix value. For example, in doing prefix sums, first-row prefix sums are computed from
left to right. At this point, the processors in the rightmost column hold the row sums. A
diminished prefix computation in this last column yields the sum of all of the preceding rows
in each processor. Combining the sum of all of the preceding rows with the row prefix sums
yields the overall prefix sums.
Packet Routing. To route a data packet from the processor in Row r, Column c, to the
processor in Row r', Column c', we first route it within Row r to Column c'. Then, we route
it in Column c' from Row r to Row r' . This algorithm is known as row-first routing. Clearly,
we could do column-first routing, or use a combination of horizontal and vertical steps to
get to the destination node along a shortest path. If the mesh nodes are indexed as in Fig. 2.4,
rather than in terms of row and column numbers, then we simply determine the index of the
intermediate Processor l where the row-first path has to turn. The problem is then decomposed into two problems: route horizontally from i to l, then route vertically from l to j .
When multiple packets must be routed between different source and destination nodes,
the above algorithm can be applied to each packet independently of others. However,
multiple packets might then compete for the same outgoing link on their paths to their
respective destinations. The processors must have sufficient buffer space to store the
packets that must wait at their turning points before being forwarded along the column.
Details will be discussed in Chapter 10.
Broadcasting. Broadcasting is done in two phases: (1) broadcast the packet to every
processor in the source node’s row and (2) broadcast in all columns. This takes at most
2 – 2 steps. If multiple values are to be broadcast by a processor, then the required data
40
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 2.14. The shearsort algorithm on a 3 × 3 mesh.
movements can be pipelined, such that each additional broadcast requires only one additional
step.
Sorting. We describe, without proof, the simple version of a sorting algorithm known
as shearsort. Complete proof and more efficient variants will be provided in Chapter 9. The
algorithm consists of  log 2 r + 1 phases in a 2D mesh with r rows. In each phase, except for
the last one, all rows are independently sorted in a snakelike order: even-numbered rows 0,
2, … from left to right, odd-numbered rows 1, 3, . . . from right to left. Then, all columns
are independently sorted from top to bottom. For example, in a 3 × 3 mesh, two such phases
are needed, as shown in Fig. 2.14. In the final phase, rows are independently sorted from left
to right. As we already know that row-sort and column-sort on a p-processor square mesh
comparecompare-exchange steps, the shearsort algorithm needs
take
exchange steps for sorting in row-major order.
2.6. ALGORITHMS WITH SHARED VARIABLES
Again, in this section, we focus on developing simple algorithms that are not necessarily
very efficient. Shared-memory architectures and their algorithms will be discussed in more
detail in Chapters 5 and 6.
Semigroup Computation. Each processor obtains the data items from all other
processors and performs the semigroup computation independently. Obviously, all processors will end up with the same result. This approach is quite wasteful of the complex
architecture of Fig. 2.5 because the linear time complexity of the algorithm is essentially
comparable to that of the semigroup computation algorithm for the much simpler linear-array
architecture and worse than the algorithm for the 2D mesh.
Parallel Prefix Computation. Similar to the semigroup computation, except that each
processor only obtains data items from processors with smaller indices.
Packet Routing. Trivial in view of the direct communication path between any pair
of processors.
Broadcasting. Trivial, as each processor can send a data item to all processors directly.
In fact, because of this direct access, broadcasting is not needed; each processor already has
access to any data item when needed.
Sorting. The algorithm to be described for sorting with shared variables consists of
two phases: ranking and data permutation. ranking consists of determining the relative order
of each key in the final sorted list. If each processor holds one key, then once the ranks are
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
41
determined, the j th-ranked key can be sent to Processor j in the data permutation phase,
requiring a single parallel communication step. Processor i is responsible for ranking its own
key xi. This is done by comparing x i to all other keys and counting the number of keys that
are smaller than xi . In the case of equal key values, processor indices are used to establish
the relative order. For example, if Processors 3 and 9 both hold the key value 23, the key
associated with Processor 3 is deemed smaller for ranking purposes. It should be clear that
each key will end up with a unique rank in the range 0 (no key is smaller) to p – 1 (all other
p – 1 keys are smaller).
Again, despite the greater complexity of the shared-variable architecture compared with
the linear-array or binary-tree architectures, the linear time required by the above sorting
algorithm is comparable to the algorithms for these simpler architectures. We will see in
Chapter 6 that logarithmic-time sorting algorithms can in fact be developed for the sharedvariable architecture, leading to linear speed-up over sequential algorithms that need on the
order of n log n compare–exchange steps to sort n items.
PROBLEMS
2.1.
Lower bounds based on bisection width
For each of the following problem/architecture pairs, find a lower bound based on the bisection
width. State if the derived bound is useful.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2.
Semigroup computation on linear array.
Parallel prefix computation on linear array.
Semigroup computation on 2D mesh.
Sorting on shared-variable architecture.
Semigroup or parallel prefix computation on a linear array
a.
b.
Semigroup computation can be performed on a linear array in a recursive fashion. Assume
that p is a power of 2. First, semigroup computation is performed on the left and right
halves of the array independently. Then the results are combined through two half-broadcast operations, i.e., broadcasting from each of the middle two processors to the other side
of the array. Supply the details of the algorithm and analyze its complexity. Compare the
result with that of the algorithm described in Section 2.3.
Can an algorithm similar to that in part (a) be devised for parallel prefix computation? If
so, how does its performance compare with the algorithm described in Section 2.3?
2.3.
Parallel prefix computation on a linear array
Given n data items, determine the optimal number p of processors in a linear array such that if
the n data items are distributed to the processors with each holding approximately n/p elements,
the time to perform the parallel prefix computation is minimized.
2.4.
Multicasting on a linear array
Suppose processors in a linear array compose messages of the form mcast(x, a, b ) with the
meaning that the data value x must be sent (multicast) to all processors with indices in the
interval [a, b ]. Packet routing and broadcasting correspond to the special cases mcast(x, j , j )
and mcast( x , 0, p – 1) of this more general mechanism. Develop the algorithm for handling
such a multicast message by a processor.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
42
2.5. Sorting on a linear array
Determine the speed-up, efficiency, and other effectiveness measures defined in Section 1.6
for linear-array sorting with more than one data item per processor.
2.6. Parallel prefix computation
a . In determining the ranks of 1s in a list of 0s and 1s (Section 2.4), what happens if a
diminished parallel prefix sum computation is performed rather than the regular one?
b . What is the identity element for the carry operator “¢” defined in Section 2.4?
c . Find another example of parallel prefix computation (besides carry computation) involving
a noncommutative binary operation.
2.7. Algorithms for a linear array
In Section 2.3, we assumed that the communication links between the processors in the linear
array are full-duplex, meaning that they can carry data in both directions simultaneously (in
one step). How should the algorithms given in Section 2.3 be modified if the communication
links are half-duplex (they can carry data in either directions, but not in the same step)?
2.8. Algorithms for a ring of processors
Develop efficient algorithms for the five computations discussed in this chapter on a p-processor ring, assuming:
a . Bidirectional, full-duplex links between processors.
b . Bidirectional, half-duplex links between processors.
c . Unidirectional links between processors.
2.9. Measures of parallel processing effectiveness
Compute the effectiveness measures introduced in Section 1.6 for the parallel prefix computation algorithm on a linear array, binary tree, 2D mesh, and shared-variable architecture.
Compare and discuss the results.
2.10. Parallel prefix computation on a binary tree
Develop an algorithm for parallel prefix computation on a binary tree where the inner tree
nodes also hold dates elements.
2.11. Routing on a binary tree of processors
a . Modify the binary tree routing algorithm in Section 2.4 so that the variables maxl and maxr
are not required, assuming that we are dealing with a complete binary tree.
b . Each processor in a tree can be given a name or label based on the path that would take us
from the root to that node via right (R) or left (L) moves. For example, in Fig. 2.3, the root
will be labeled Λ (the empty string), P3 would be labeled LR (left, then right), and P7 would
be labeled RRL. Develop a packet routing algorithm from Node A to Node B if node labels
are specified as above.
2.12. Sorting on a binary tree of processors
a . Develop a new binary-tree sorting algorithm based on all-to-all broadcasting. Each leaf
node broadcasts its key to all other leafs, which compare the incoming keys with their own
and determine the rank of their keys. A final parallel routing phase concludes the algorithm.
Compare this new algorithm with the one described in Section 2.4 and discuss.
b . Modify the binary tree sorting algorithm in Section 2.4 so that it works with multiple keys
initially stored in each leaf node.
A TASTE OF PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
43
2.13. Algorithms on 2D processor arrays
Briefly discuss how the semigroup computation, parallel prefix computation, packet routing,
and broadcasting algorithms can be performed on the following variants of the 2D mesh
architecture.
a. A 2D torus with wraparound links as in Fig. 2.4 (simply ignoring the wraparound links is
not allowed!).
b. A Manhattan street network, so named because the row and column links are unidirectional
and, like the one-way streets of Manhattan, go in opposite directions in adjacent rows or
columns. Unlike the streets, though, each row/column has a wraparound link. Assume that
both dimensions of the processor array are even, with links in even-numbered rows
(columns) going from left to right (bottom to top).
c. A honeycomb mesh, which is a 2D mesh in which all of the row links are left intact but
every other column link has been removed. Two different drawings of this architecture are
shown below.
2.14.
Shearsort on 2D mesh of processors
a. Write down the number of compare–exchange steps required to perform shearsort on
general (possibly nonsquare) 2D mesh with r rows and p/r columns.
b. Compute the effectiveness measures introduced in Section 1.6 for the shearsort algorithm
based on the results of part (a).
c. Discuss the best aspect ratio for a p-processor mesh in order to minimize the sorting time.
d. How would shearsort work if each processor initially holds more than one key?
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Akl85]
[Akl97]
[Corm9O]
[JaJa96]
[Knut73]
[Laks94]
[Leig92]
Akl, S. G., Parallel Sorting Algorithms, Academic Press, 1985.
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Cormen, T. H., C. E. Leiserson, and R. L. Rivest, Introduction to Algorithms, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
JaJa, J. F., “Fundamentals of Parallel Algorithms,” Chapter 12 in Parallel and Distributed Computing
Handbook, Edited by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp. 333–354.
Knuth, D. E., The Art of Computer Programming: Vol. 3—Sorting and Searching, Addison–Wesley,
1973.
Lakshmivarahan, S., and S. K. Dhall, Parallel Computing Using the Prefix Problem, Oxford
University Press, 1994.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
This page intentionally left blank.
3
Parallel Algorithm
Complexity
Having seen several examples of parallel algorithms in Chapter 2, we are ready
to embark on a general discussion of parallel algorithm complexity. This chapter
deals with basic notions of complexity as well as time and time-cost optimality
of parallel algorithms. The ideas and methods covered here lead to tools for
comparing various algorithms or for making given parallel algorithms faster
and/or more efficient. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
Asymptotic complexity
Algorithm optimality and efficiency
Complexity classes
Parallelizable tasks and the NC class
Parallel programming paradigms
Solving recurrences
45
This page intentionally left blank.
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
47
3.1. ASYMPTOTIC COMPLEXITY
Algorithms can be analyzed in two ways: precise and approximate. In precise analysis,
we typically count the number of operations of various types (e.g., arithmetic, memory
access, data transfer) performed in the worst or average case and use these counts as
indicators of algorithm complexity. If each of these operations takes a constant amount of
time, then a weighted sum of these counts will constitute a numerical measure of algorithm
complexity that can be compared with other algorithms for the same task.
Such a precise analysis is quite tedious and at times impossible to perform. We thus
resort to various approximate analysis methods to compare algorithms, always keeping in
mind the error margin of the method applied. For example, if such an approximate analysis
indicates that Algorithm A is 1.2 times slower than Algorithm B, we may not be able to
conclude with certainty that Algorithm B is better for the task at hand.
A useful form of approximate analysis, which we will use extensively throughout this
book, is asymptotic analysis. Suppose that a parallel sorting algorithm requires (log2 n) ²
compare–exchange steps, another one (log 2 n)²/ 2 + 2 log 2 n steps, and a third one 500 log 2
n steps (assume these are the results of exact analyses). Ignoring lower-order terms and
multiplicative constants, we may say that the first two algorithms take on the order of log²
n steps while the third one takes on the order of log n steps. The logic behind ignoring these
details is that when n becomes very large, eventually log n will exceed any constant value.
Thus, for such large values of n, an algorithm with running time c log n is asymptotically
better than an algorithm with running time c' log² n for any values of the constants c and c'.
Of course, n must indeed be very large for log n to overshadow the constant 500 in the
above example. Thus, in practice, we do not totally ignore the constant factors but rather take
a two-step approach. First, through asymptotic analysis, we determine which algorithm is
likely to be better for large problem sizes: An algorithm of order log n is usually, but not
always, better than an algorithm of order log² n. If we have reason to doubt this conclusion,
then we resort to an exact analysis to determine the constant factors involved.
We will see later that there are practical situations when we use an algorithm of order
log² n even though the existence of algorithms of order log n has been demonstrated (albeit
with very large constant factors that make the algorithm worse for any problem size of
practical interest). However, and this is a key observation, once an asymptotically better
algorithm has been found that happens to have a large constant factor as above, it is often
possible to modify or fine-tune the algorithm to reduce its constant factor; if not in all cases,
at least for some special cases of common interest.
To make our discussions of asymptotic analysis more precise, we introduce some
notations that are commonly used in the study of computational complexity. Given two
functions ƒ (n ) and g(n) of an independent variable n (usually, the problem size), we define
the relationships “O” (big-oh), “Ω” (big-omega), and “ Θ” (theta) between them as follows:
Thus,
48
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
ƒ(n) = Θ (g(n)) iff ƒ(n) = O (g(n)) and ƒ(n) = Ω (g(n))
These notations essentially allow us to compare the growth rates of different functions.
For example, ƒ(n) = O(g(n)) means that ƒ(n) grows no faster than g(n), so that for n
sufficiently large (i.e., n > n 0 ) and a suitably chosen constant c, ƒ(n) always remains
below c g(n). This relationship is represented graphically in the left panel of Fig. 3.1.
Similarly, ƒ(n) = Ω (g(n)) means that ƒ(n) grows at least as fast as g(n), so that eventually
ƒ(n) will exceed c g(n) for all n beyond n 0 (middle panel of Fig. 3.1).
Finally, ƒ(n) = Θ (g(n)) means that ƒ(n) and g(n) grow at about the same rate so that the
value of f (n) is always bounded by c g(n) and c’ g(n) for n > n0 (right panel of Fig. 3.1).
Loosely speaking, the above notations, and two new ones introduced below, define
ordering relationships between the growth rates of functions. In other words, in the statement
“The rate of growth of ƒ(n) is
that of g(n).”
we can fill in the blank with the relational symbol (<, ≤ , =, ≥ , >) to the left of the defined
relations shown below:
<
≤
=
≥
>
ƒ(n) = o(g(n))
ƒ(n) = O(g(n))
ƒ(n) = Θ (g(n)) or θ (g(n))
ƒ(n) = Ω(g(n))
ƒ(n) = ω(g(n))
limn →∞ ƒ(n)/g(n) = 0 {read little-oh of g(n)}
{big-oh}
{theta}
{big-omega}
limn →∞ ƒ(n)/g(n) = ∞ {little-omega}
Of the above, the big-oh notation will be used most extensively, because it can express an
upper bound on an algorithm’s time or computational complexity and thus helps us establish
whether or not a given algorithm is feasible for a given architecture.
For example, an algorithm with running time O(n log n) or O(n²) might be feasible
today; one that takes O(n³) time might be just beyond the limit of practicality on today’s
hardware and quite practical in 5–10 years, say, when processor speeds have improved by
Figure 3.1. Graphical representation of the notions of asymptotic complexity.
49
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
Table 3.1. Comparing the Growth Rates of Sublinear and Superlinear Functions (K = 1000,
M = 1,000,000)
Sublinear
n
9
36
81
169
256
361
Superlinear
Linear
log² n
3
10
31
100
316
1K
n 3/2
n log² n
90
3.6 K
81 K
1.7M
26 M
361 M
10
100
1K
10K
100K
1M
30
1K
31 K
1M
31 M
1000 M
one or two orders of magnitude; an algorithm with O(2 n ) running time will likely remain
impractical.
At a very coarse level, we sometimes talk about algorithms with sublinear, linear, and
superlinear running times or complexities. These coarse categories can be further subdivided
or refined as illustrated by the following examples:
Sublinear
O(1)
O(log log n)
O(log n)
O(log k n )
O(n a )
O(n / log kn)
Linear
O(n)
constant-time
double logarithmic
logarithmic
polylogarithmic; k is a constant
a < 1 is a constant; e.g., O( ) for a = 1/2
k is a constant
Superlinear O(n log k n)
O(n c )
O(2 n )
n
O(2 2 )
polynomial; c > 1 is a constant; e.g., O(n
exponential
double exponential
) for c = 3/2
Table 3.2. Effect of Constants on the Growth Rates of Selected Functions
Involving Constant Factors (K = 1000, M = 1,000,000)
n log² n
n
10
100
1K
10K
100K
1M
22
900
20K
423K
6M
90M
90
3.6 K
81 K
1.7 M
26 M
361 M
100
300
1K
3.1 K
10K
32 K
100K
n3/2
30
1K
31 K
1M
32M
1000M
50
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Table 3.3. Effect of Constants on the Growth Rates of Selected Functions Using
Larger Time Units and Round Figures
10
100
1K
10K
100K
1M
n3/2
n log² n
n
20 s
15min
6hr
5 days
2mo
3 yr
2min
1hr
1 day
20 days
1yr
11 yr
.5min
15 min
1hr
3hr
1yr
3 yr
30s
15min
9hr
10 days
1yr
32 yr
Table 3.1 helps you get an idea of the growth rates for two sublinear and two superlinear
functions, as the problem size n increases. Table 3.2 shows the growth rates of a few functions,
including constant multiplicative factors, to give you a feel for the contribution of such
constants. Table 3.3 presents the same information using larger time units and rounded
figures which make the differences easier to grasp (assuming that the original numbers of
Table 3.2 showed the running time of an algorithm in seconds).
3.2. ALGORITHM OPTIMALITY AND EFFICIENCY
One way in which we use the big-oh and big-omega notations, introduced in Section
3.1, is as follows. Suppose that we have constructed a valid algorithm to solve a given
problem of size n in g (n) time, where g(n) is a known function such as n log 2 n or n², obtained
through exact or asymptotic analysis. A question of interest is whether or not the algorithm
at hand is the best algorithm for solving the problem. Of course, algorithm quality can be
judged in many different ways, with running time, resource requirements, simplicity (which
affects the cost of development, debugging, and maintenance), and portability being some
of the factors in this evaluation. Let us focus on running time for now. The question then
becomes
What is the running timeƒ(n) of the fastest algorithm for solving this problem?
If we are interested in asymptotic comparison, then because an algorithm with running time
g(n) is already known, ƒ(n) = O(g(n)); i.e., for large n, the running time of the best
algorithm is upper bounded by cg( n) for some constant c. If, subsequently, someone
develops an asymptotically faster algorithm for solving the same problem, say in time
h(n), we conclude that ƒ(n) = O(h(n)). The process of constructing and improving
algorithms thus contributes to the establishment of tighter upper bounds for the complexity of the best algorithm (Fig. 3.2).
Concurrently with the establishment of upper bounds as discussed above, we might work
on determining lower bounds on a problem's time complexity. A lower bound is useful as it
tells us how much room for improvement there might be in existing algorithms. Lower
bounds can be established by a variety of methods. Examples include
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
1.
2.
3.
51
Showing that, in the worst case, solution of the problem requires data to travel
a certain distance or that a certain volume of data must pass through a limitedbandwidth interface. An example of the first method is the observation that any
commusorting algorithm on a p-processor square mesh needs at least
nication steps in the worst case (diameter-based lower bound). The second method
is exemplified by the worst-case linear time required by any sorting algorithm on a
binary tree architecture (bisection-based lower bound).
Showing that, in the worst case, solution of the problem requires that a certain
number of elementary operations be performed. This is the method used for
establishing the Ω (n log n ) lower bound for comparison-based sequential sorting
algorithms. Consider n distinct (unequal) keys. These n keys can be arranged in n!
different ways. The goal of sorting is to identify the one permutation (among n! )
that corresponds to the sorted order. Each comparison has only two possible
outcomes, and thus narrows down our choice by at most a factor of 2. Thus, log2(n!)
= Θ(n log n) comparisons are needed in the worst case.
Showing that any instance of a previously analyzed problem can be converted to an
instance of the problem under study, so that an algorithm for solving our problem
can also be used, with simple pre- and postprocessing steps, to solve the previous
problem. Any lower bound for the previous problem then becomes a lower bound
for our new problem. For example, we saw in Section 2.4 that the carry computation
problem can be converted to a parallel prefix computation. Thus, any lower bound
established for carry computation is also a lower bound for general parallel prefix
computation. Also, trivially, any upper bound for the prefix computation problem
is an upper bound for the carry problem.
As shown in Fig. 3.2, a known lower bound can be viewed as a barrier against
algorithmic speed improvements. When a wide gap exists between the best known lower and
upper bounds, further efforts in raising the lower bound, or lowering the upper bound, might
be warranted. The lower bound can be raised by applying the methods in the above list in
novel ways. The upper bound can be lowered by designing new algorithms and showing
them to be faster than the best previously known algorithms.
If and when the known upper bound and lower bound for a given problem converge, we
say that we have an optimal algorithm. At this point, no asymptotic improvement is possible
and the focus changes to improving the constant factors involved (e.g., reducing the
algorithm’s running time from
to
Figure 3.2. Upper and lower bounds may tighten over time.
INTRODUTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
52
Now, let us broaden our attention and consider the cost of the machine on which the
algorithm runs in addition to the running time. Unfortunately, a simple, accurate, and
time-invariant cost model for parallel machines does not exist. So, in the interest of
tractability, we often take the number p of processors used for a given algorithm as a very
rough indicator of cost. If we are allowed to vary the number of processors used (either by
choosing/designing our own parallel machine or else by limiting the algorithm's execution
to a subset of processors (a partition) of a larger parallel machine, then the running time will
be a function of both the problem size n and the number p of processors used.
Now, because of the additional cost factor introduced, different notions of optimality
can be entertained. Let T(n, p) be our algorithm’s running time when solving a problem of
size n on a machine with p processors. The algorithm is said to be
• Time-optimal if T(n, p) = g(n, p), where g(n, p) is an established time lower bound.
• Cost-time optimal (cost-optimal for short) iff p T(n, p) = T (n, 1).
Redundancy = Utilization = 1
• Cost-time efficient (efficient for short) iff p T(n, p) = Θ (T(n, 1)).
Redundancy = Utilization = Θ (1)
One final observation is in order. Just as we took a simplified view of cost by equating
it with the number p of processors, we can simplify our view of time by counting computation
and/or communication steps instead of measuring real time. So, rather than saying that a
parallel matrix multiplication algorithm terminates in so many seconds, we may say that it
executes so many floating-point operations and transmits so many messages between the
processors. With this simplified view, one must be careful in comparing algorithm complexities across different machines. A speed-up of 5 in terms of step counts may correspond to a
speed-up of 2 or 3, say, when real time is considered (Fig. 3.3).
Figure 3.3. Five times fewer steps does not necessarily mean five times faster.
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
53
3.3. COMPLEXITY CLASSES
Complexity theory is a branch of computer science that deals with the ease or difficulty
of solving various computational problems of interest. In complexity theory, problems are
divided into several complexity classes according to their running times on a single-processor
system (or a deterministic Turing machine, to be more exact). Problems whose running times
are upper bounded by polynomials in n are said to belong to the P class and are generally
considered to be tractable. Even if the polynomial is of a high degree, such that a large
problem requires years of computation on the fastest available supercomputer, there is still
hope that with improvements in the algorithm or in computer performance, a reasonable
running time may be obtained.
On the other hand, problems for which the best known deterministic algorithm runs in
exponential time are intractable. For example, if solving a problem of size n requires the
execution of 2 n machine instructions, the running time for n = 100 on a GIPS (giga IPS)
processor will be around 400 billion centuries! A problem of this kind for which, when given
a solution, the correctness of the solution can be verified in polynomial time, is said to belong
to the NP (nondeterministic polynomial) class.
An example of an NP problem is the subset-sum problem: Given a set of n integers and
a target sum s, determine if a subset of the integers in the given set add up to s. This problem
looks deceptively simple, yet no one knows how to solve it other than by trying practically
all of the 2n subsets of the given set. Even if each of these trials takes only 1 ps, the problem
is virtually unsolvable for n = 100. This does not mean that we cannot solve specific instances
of the subset-sum problem, or even most instances of practical interest, efficiently. What it
implies is that an efficient general algorithm for solving this problem is not known. Neither
has anyone been able to prove that an efficient (polynomial-time) algorithm for the subsetsum problem does not exist.
In fact, the P =? NP question is an open problem of complexity theory. A positive answer
to this question would mean that the subset-sum and a host of other “hard” problems can be
solved efficiently even if we do not yet know how to do it. A negative answer, on the other
hand, would imply that there exist problems for which efficient algorithms can never be
found. Despite a lack of proof in either direction, researchers in complexity theory believe
that in fact P ≠ NP. Furthermore, they have defined the class of NP-complete problems,
meaning that any problem in NP can be transformed, by a computationally efficient process,
to any one of these problems. The subset-sum problem is known to be NP-complete. Thus,
if one ever finds an efficient solution to the subset-sum problem, this is tantamount to proving
P = NP. On the other hand, if one can prove that the subset-sum problem is not in P, then
neither is any other NP-complete problem (leading to the conclusion P ≠ NP).
Figure 3.4 depicts the relationships of these classes as we currently understand them.
The details and subclasses shown inside the class P will be explained in Section 3.4. The
class NP-hard is explained below.
Given the large class of problems of practical interest that are in NP and the vast amount
of time and other resources spent over the years in trying to find efficient solutions to these
problems, proving that a computational problem is NP-complete virtually removes any hope
of ever finding an efficient algorithm for that problem. Thus, in a sense, NP-complete
problems are the “hardest” problems in the NP class. Besides the subset-sum problem
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
54
Figure 3.4. A conceptual view of complexity classes and their relationships.
mentioned above, the following problems of practical interest (and many others) are known
to be NP-complete:
1.
Determining if there exists an assignment of truth values to the variables in a
Boolean expression, written as the AND of several OR clauses, such that the
resulting value of the expression is "true" (the satisfiability problem). This problem
is in NP even if each OR clause is restricted to have exactly 3 literals (true or
complemented variables).
2. Determining if there exists an assignment of 0s and 1s to the inputs of a logic circuit
that makes the output 1 (the circuit satisfiability problem).
3 . Deciding if a graph contains a cycle or loop with all of the nodes in it (the
Hamiltonian cycle problem).
4. Finding a lowest-cost or shortest-distance tour of a number of cities, given the travel
cost or distance between all pairs of cities (the traveling salesman problem).
One final bit of terminology: As difficult as NP problems may seem, there exist problems
that are not even in NP, meaning that even verifying that a claimed solution to such a problem
is correct is currently intractable. An NP-hard problem is one that we do not know to be in
NP but do know that any NP problem can be reduced to it by a polynomial-time algorithm.
The name of this class implies that such problems are at least as hard as any NP problem.
Typically, the proof that a problem of interest is NP-complete consists of two parts: (1)
proving that it is in NP by showing that a given solution for it can be verified in polynomial
time and (2) proving that it is NP-hard by showing that some NP-complete (and thus any
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
55
NP) problem can be reduced to it. For the latter part of the proof, we have a wide array of
NP-complete problems to choose from. But how was this process bootstrapped; i.e.,
where did the first NP-complete problem come from? The first seed was the satisfiability
problem that was established to be NP-complete by Cook in 1971 [Cook71] using a rather
tedious proof.
3.4. PARALLELIZABLE TASKS AND THE NC CLASS
Based on the discussion in Section 3.3, parallel processing is generally of no avail for
solving NP problems. A problem that takes 400 billion centuries to solve on a uniprocessor,
would still take 400 centuries even if it can be perfectly parallelized over 1 billion processors.
Again, this statement does not refer to specific instances of the problem but to a general
solution for all instances. Thus, parallel processing is primarily useful for speeding up
the execution time of the problems in P. Here, even a factor of 1000 speed-up can mean
the difference between practicality and impracticality (running time of several hours
versus 1 year).
In 1979, Niclaus Pippenger [Pipp79] suggested that efficiently parallelizable problems
in P might be defined as those problems that can be solved in a time period that is at most
k
polylogarithmic in the problem size n, i.e., T ( p ) = O(log n ) for some constant k, using no
l
more than a polynomial number p = O( n ) of processors. This class of problems was later
named Nick’s Class (NC) in his honor. The class NC has been extensively studied and forms
a foundation for parallel complexity theory.
Pippenger used a parallel machine model known as parallel random-access machine
(PRAM) in formulating his complexity results. We will define PRAM in Chapter 5, but
knowledge of the PRAM model is not essential for understanding the NC class, as the NC
class is closed under virtually all transformations of practical interest.
A weaker form of NC, known as the parallel computation thesis, is stated as follows:
Anything that can be computed on a Turing machine using polynomially (polylogarithmically) bounded space in unlimited time can be computed on a parallel machine in
polynomial (polylogarithmic) time using an unlimited number of processors, and vice
versa.
The problem with this thesis is that it places no bound on computational resources other than
time. The significance of NC, and its popularity, stems from its establishing simultaneous
bounds on time and hardware resources, while at the same time being relatively insensitive
to architectural and technological variations in parallel machine implementations.
At present, the question NC = ?P is an open problem of parallel complexity theory. Just
as was the case for the P = ?NP question, no one knows the answer to this question, but there
is strong suspicion that NC ≠ P. The reason behind this suspicion is also quite similar to that
for P ≠ NP. A P-complete problem in P is a problem such that any other problem in P can be
transformed to it in polylogarithmic time using a polynomial number of processors. So, if a
polylogarithmic-time algorithm with a polynomial number of processors is ever found for
any P-complete problem, then all problems in P are efficiently parallelizable and NC = P.
Some of these problems have been around for years and studied extensively by numerous
56
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
researchers. Thus, the lack of efficient algorithms for these problems strongly supports the
conclusion that NC ≠ P.
Sorting is a good example of an NC problem. In Chapter 7, we will see that several
techniques are available for building an n-input sorting network from O(n log 2 n) two-input
compare–exchange circuit blocks, with the critical path across the network going through
O(log 2 n ) comparison–exchange levels. Hence, polylogarithmic time is achieved for sorting
using a number of circuit blocks (processors) that is upper bounded by O(n1+ε ) for any ε > 0.
An example of a P-complete problem is the circuit-value problem: Given a logic circuit
with known inputs, determine its output. The fact that the circuit-value problem is in P should
be obvious. It is a simple problem that we routinely solve in logic simulation packages. Yet
no general algorithm exists for the efficient parallel evaluation of a circuit’s output. This
rather surprising fact limits the speed-ups that can be achieved in parallel logic simulation.
3.5. PARALLEL PROGRAMMING PARADIGMS
Several methods are used extensively in devising efficient parallel algorithms for solving
problems of interest. A brief review of these methods (divide and conquer, randomization,
approximation) is appropriate at this point as they are important to complexity analysis
efforts.
Divide and Conquer. Some problems in P can be solved in parallel as follows.
Decompose the problem of size n into two or more “smaller” subproblems. Suppose that the
required decomposition, when done in parallel, takes Td(n ) time. Solve the subproblems
independently and obtain the corresponding results. As the subproblems are smaller than the
original one, the time Ts to solve them will likely be less than T (n). Finally, combine the
results of the subproblems to compute the answer to the original problem. If the combining
phase can be done in time T c(n), the total computation time is given by
T (n ) = T d (n ) + T s + Tc (n).
For example, in the case of sorting a list of n keys, we can decompose the list into two
halves, sort the two sublists independently in parallel, and merge the two sorted sublists into
a single sorted list. If we can perform each of the decomposition and merging operations in
log 2 n steps on some parallel computer, and if the solution of the two sorting problems of
size n/2 can be completely overlapped in time, then the running time of the parallel algorithm
is characterized by the recurrence T(n ) = T (n/2) + 2 log 2 n. We will discuss the solution of
such recurrences in Section 3.6. The divide-and-conquer paradigm is perhaps the most
important tool for devising parallel algorithms and is used extensively in the rest of this book.
Randomization. Often it is impossible, or computationally difficult, to decompose a
large problem into smaller problems in such a way that the solution times of the subproblems
are roughly equal. Large decomposition and combining overheads, or wide variations in the
solution times of the subproblems, may reduce the effective speed-up achievable by the
divide-and-conquer method. In these cases, it might be possible to use random decisions that
lead to good results with very high probability. The field of randomized parallel algorithms
has grown significantly over the past few years and has led to the solution of many otherwise
unsolvable problems.
Again, sorting provides a good example. Suppose that each of p processors begins with
a sublist of size n/p. First each processor selects a random sample of size k from its local
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
57
sublist. The kp samples from all processors form a smaller list that can be readily sorted,
perhaps on a single processor or using a parallel algorithm that is known to be efficient for
small lists. If this sorted list of samples is now divided into p equal segments and the
beginning values in the p segments used as thresholds to divide the original list of n keys
into p sublists, the lengths of these latter sublists will be approximately balanced with high
probability. The n-input sorting problem has thus been transformed into an initial random
sampling, a small sorting problem for the kp samples, broadcasting of the p threshold values
to all processors, permutation of the elements among the processors according to the p
threshold values, and p independent sorting problems of approximate size n/p . The average
case running time of such an algorithm can be quite good. However, there is no useful
worst-case guarantee on its running time.
Besides the random sampling method used in the above example, randomization can be
applied in several other ways [Gupt94]. Input randomization is used to avoid bad data
patterns for which a particular algorithm, known to be efficient on the average, might have
close to worst-case performance. For example, if a routing algorithm is known to have good
performance when the source/destination nodes are randomly distributed but suffers from
excessive resource contentions, and thus degraded performance, for certain regular data
movement patterns, it might be possible to handle the problematic routing patterns by using
a randomly selected intermediate node for each source–destination pair.
To complete the picture, we briefly review the three other classes of randomization
methods that have been found useful in practice:
1. Random search. When a large space must be searched for an element with certain
desired properties, and it is known that such elements are abundant, random search
can lead to very good average-case performance. A deterministic linear search, on
the other hand, can lead to poor performance if all of the desired elements are
clustered together.
2. Control randomization. To avoid consistently experiencing close to worst-case
performance with one algorithm, related to some unfortunate distribution of inputs,
the algorithm to be applied for solving a problem, or an algorithm parameter, can
be chosen at random.
3. Symmetry breaking. Interacting deterministic processes may exhibit a cyclic behavior that leads to deadlock (akin to two people colliding when they try to exit a room
through a narrow door, backing up, and then colliding again). Randomization can
be used to break the symmetry and thus the deadlock.
Approximation. Iterative numerical methods often use approximation to arrive at the
solution(s). For example, to solve a system of n linear equations, one can begin with some
rough estimates for the answers and then successively refine these estimates using parallel
numerical calculations. Jacobi relaxation, to be covered in Section 11.4, is an example of
such approximation methods. Under proper conditions, the iterations converge to the correct
solutions; the larger the number of iterations, the more accurate the solutions.
The strength of such approximation methods lies in the fact that fairly precise results
can be obtained rather quickly, with additional iterations used to increase the precision if
desired. Provided that the required computations for each iteration can be easily parallelized
over any number p of processors, we have at our disposal a powerful method for time/cost/ac-
58
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
curacy trade-offs. If time and hardware resources are limited by deadlines or concurrent
running of more urgent tasks, the computation can still be performed, albeit at lower
precision. The analysis of complexity is somewhat more difficult here as the number of
iterations required often cannot be expressed as a simple function of the desired accuracy
and/or the problem size. Typically, an upper bound on the number of iterations is established
and used in determining the algorithm’s worst-case running time.
3.6. SOLVING RECURRENCES
In our discussion of the divide-and-conquer method in Section 3.5, we presented the
recurrence T (n ) = T( n/2) + 2 log 2 n as an example of what might transpire in analyzing
algorithm complexity. Because such recurrences arise quite frequently in the analysis of
(parallel) algorithms, it is instructive to discuss methods for their solution. As no general
method exists for solving recurrences, we will review several methods along with examples.
The simplest method for solving recurrences is through unrolling. The method is best
illustrated through a sequence of examples. In all examples below, ƒ(1) = 0 is assumed.
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
59
Alternate solution for the recurrence ƒ( n ) = 2 ƒ ( n /2) + n:
Rewrite the recurrence as
and denote ƒ(n)/n by h(n) to get
This is the same as Example 2 above and leads to
Another method that we will find useful, particularly for recurrences that cannot be
easily unrolled, is guessing the answer to the recurrence and then verifying the guess by
substitution. In fact, the method of substitution can be used to determine the constant
multiplicative factors and lower-order terms once the asymptotic complexity has been
established by other methods.
As an example, let us say that we know that the solution to Example 1 above is ƒ (n ) =
Θ( n ²). We write ƒ (n) = a n² + g (n), where g(n) = o( n ²) represents the lower-order terms.
Substituting in the recurrence equation, we get
This equation simplifies to
Choose a = 1/2 in order to make g(n) = o(n ²) possible. Then, the solution to the recurrence
g(n) = g(n – 1) + 1/2 is g(n) = n /2 – 1, assuming g (1) = 0. The solution to the original
recurrence then becomes ƒ (n ) = n ²/2 + n /2 – 1, which matches our earlier result based
on unrolling.
60
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Unrolling recurrences can be tedious and error-prone in some cases. The following
general theorem helps us establish the order of the solution to some recurrences without
unrolling [Bent80].
T HEOREM 3.1 (basic theorem for recurrences). Given the recurrence ƒ(n) = aƒ (n/b) +
h(n), where a and b are constants and h is an arbitrary function, the asymptotic solution to
the recurrence is
The recurrence given in the statement of Theorem 3.1 arises, for example, if we decompose
a given problem of size n into b problems of size n/b, with these smaller problems solved in
a batches (e.g., because the available resources, typically processors, are inadequate for
solving all subproblems concurrently).
The function h ( n ) represents the time needed to decompose the problem and for
obtaining the overall solution from the solutions to the subproblems. Therefore, a = 1
typically means that we have enough processors to solve all b subproblems concurrently,
a = b means we have just one processor, so the subproblems are solved sequentially, and
1 < a < b means we can solve some of the problems concurrently but that the number of
processors is inadequate to deal with all of them concurrently. An example of this last
situation might be when the number of processors required is sublinear in problem size
thus
(problems with 1/b = 1/4 the size require half as many processors, say, when
dictating a = 2 passes for solving the four subproblems).
Note that the first and third cases in the statement of Theorem 3.1 are separated from
the middle case by ± ε in the exponent of n. Let us consider the middle case first. Unrolling
the recurrence in this case will be done log b n times before getting to ƒ (1). As
each
so, one
of the log b n terms resulting from the unrolling is on the order of
can say that the decomposition/merging overhead is more or less constant across the recursive
iterations. In the third case, the overhead decreases geometrically, so the first term in the
unrolling, i.e., h( n), dictates the complexity. Finally, in the first case, the unrolled terms form
an increasing geometric progression, making the last term in the unrolling dominant. This
last term can be obtained as follows:
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
61
Theorem 3.1 only provides an asymptotic solution in cases where the theorem’s conditions
are met. However, as noted earlier, once the order of the solution is known, substitution in
the recurrence can be used to determine the constant factors and lower-order terms if desired.
PROBLEMS
3.1. Asymptotic complexity
For each of the following pairs of functions ƒ (n ) and g(n), determine which of the relationships
if any, holds.
Explain your reasoning.
3.2. Asymptotic complexity
Order the following functions with respect to their growth rates, from the slowest growing to
the fastest growing. Explain your reasoning.
3.3. Computational complexity
Assume that the pairs of functions ƒ (n) and g(n) of Problem 3.1 correspond to the running times
of two different algorithms A and B, respectively, for solving a given problem when the input
size is n (do not worry about the fact that some of the instances do not represent real problems).
Determine, for each pair of functions, the problem sizes for which Algorithm A is better than
Algorithm B.
3.4. Computational complexity
With reference to the data in Table 3.2, suppose that a running time of 3 hours or less is tolerable
in a given application context. Assuming that Moore’s law holds (see Section 1.1), for each of
the five functions shown in Table 3.2, determine the factor by which the problem size can
increase in 10 years.
3.5. Comparing algorithms
Suppose two different parallel algorithms for solving a given problem lead to the following
recurrences for the computation time. Which algorithm is asymptotically faster and why?
62
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
3.6. Solving recurrences
a . Derive an exact solution to the recurrence T(n) = T( n /2) + cn assuming that n is a power
of 2, c is a constant, and T (1) = 0.
b . More generally, the problem size (initially or in intermediate steps) is not necessarily even.
and use it to derive an upper bound for T(n) .
Consider the recurrence
Hint: The worst case occurs when n is 1 more than a power of 2.
c . Repeat part (b) for the more general recurrence
3.7. System of two recurrences
a . Find exact solutions for A(n) and B(n) if A(n) = B(n/2) + gn and B(n) = A(n/2) + hn, assuming
n to be a power of 2, g and h known constants, and A (1) = B (1) = 0.
b . Repeat part (a) with A(n) = 2B(n/2 ) + gn and B(n) = A(n/2) + hn.
c . Repeat part (a) with A(n) = 2B(n/2) + gn and B(n) = 2A(n/2) + hn.
d . Formulate a general theorem for the asymptotic solution of system of two recurrences of
the form A(n) = cB(n/a) + gn and B(n) = dA(n/b) + hn, where a, b, c, and d are constants.
3.8. Solving recurrences
Apply the method of Theorem 3.1 to the solution of Examples 1 through 6 that precede it,
where applicable.
3.9. Solving recurrences
Apply the method of Theorem 3.1 to the solution of the recurrence ƒ (n) = 2 ƒ (n /4) + cn, where
c is a known constant. Then, find the constant factor and the order of residual terms through
substitution.
3.10. Basic theorem for recurrences
In the proof of the first case of Theorem 3.1, we implicitly assumed that ƒ(1) is a nonzero
constant. Would the proof fall apart if ƒ (1) = 0?
3.11. Solving recurrences
Solve the recurrence
where b and c are constants and 0 < b < 1.
3.12. Asymptotic complexity
A rough set S is characterized by a lower bound set S lb consisting of elements that are certain
to be members of S and an upper bound set S ub which also contains a boundary region consisting
of possible elements of S (the possibility is not quantified) [Paw197]. Define the basic set
operations on rough sets and determine if they are asymptotically more complex than ordinary
set operations in sequential and parallel implementations.
3.13. Computational complexity
Consider the following results from number theory [Stew97]: (a) x is not prime iff some number
in
divides it. (b) x is prime iff it divides ( x – 1) ! + 1. (c) If x is prime, then it divides
2 x – 2 (the converse is not true). A large number x, with hundreds of digits, is given and we
would like to prove that it is not a prime. We do not need the factors; just a confirmation that
it is not a prime. Which of the above three methods would lead to a more efficient parallel
implementation and why? Note that in computing a large number whose divisibility by x is to
be tested, we can do all of the calculations modulo x.
3.14. NP-completeness
In our discussion of NP-completeness, we stated that the satisfiability problem for OR–AND
PARALLEL ALGORITHM COMPLEXITY
63
Boolean expressions is NP-complete and that even the special case where each of the ORed
terms consists of exactly 3 literals (known as the 3-satisfiability problem) is not any easier.
a. Show that the AND–OR version of the satisfiability problem, i.e., when the Boolean
expression in question consists of the OR of AND terms, is in P.
b. Show that 2-satisfiability is in P. Hint: Use the equivalence of x OR y with (NOT x)
IMPLIES y to reduce the 2-satisfiability problem to a problem on a directed graph.
3.15.
NP-completeness
Consider a set S of integers. The set partition problem is that of determining if the set S can be
partitioned into two disjoint subsets such that the sum of the integers in each subset is the same.
Show that the set partition problem is NP-complete.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Cook71]
[Corm90]
[Gupt94]
[Kris96]
[Parb87]
[Pawl97]
[Pipp79]
[Stew97]
Cook, S., “The Complexity of Theorem Proving Procedures,” Proc. 3rd ACM Symp. Theory of
Computing, 1971, pp. 151–158.
Cormen, T. H., C. E. Leiserson, and R. L. Rivest, Introduction to Algorithms, McGraw-Hill, 1990,
Chapter 36, pp. 916–963.
Gupta, R., S. A. Smolka, and S. Bhaskar, “On Randomization in Sequential and Distributed
Algorithms,” ACM Computing Surveys, Vol. 26, pp. 7–86, March 1994.
Krishnamurthy, E. V., “Complexity Issues in Parallel and Distributed Computing,” Chapter 4 in
Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook, edited by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp.
89–126.
Parberry, I., Parallel Complexity Theory, Pitman, 1987.
Pawlak, Z., J. Grzymala-Busse, R. Slowinski, and W. Ziarko, “Rough Sets,” Communications of the
ACM, Vol. 38, No. 11, pp. 89–95, November 1995.
Pippenger, N., “On Simultaneous Resource Bounds,” Proc. 20th Symp. Foundations of Computer
Science, 1979, pp. 307–311.
Stewart, I., “Mathematical Recreations: Big Game Hunting in Primeland,” Scientific American, Vol.
276, No. 5, pp. 108–111, May 1997,
This page intentionally left blank.
4
Models of Parallel
Processing
Parallel processors come in many different varieties. It would not be possible to
discuss all of these varieties, including their distinguishing features, strong points
within application contexts, and drawbacks, in a single book. Thus, we often
deal with abstract models of real machines. The benefits of using abstract models
include technology-independent theories and algorithmic techniques that are
applicable to a large number of existing and future machines. Disadvantages
include the inability to predict the actual performance accurately and a tendency
to simplify the models too much, so that they no longer represent any real
machine. However, even oversimplified models do offer some benefits. The
conceptual simplicity of such models makes the development of algorithms and
the analysis of various trade-offs more manageable. If automatic translation of
these abstract algorithms into efficient programs for real machines is possible
through the use of intelligent or optimizing compilers, then these models can
indeed be enormously helpful. Chapter topics are
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
Development of early models
SIMD versus MIMD architectures
Global versus distributed memory
The PRAM shared-memory model
Distributed-memory or graph models
Circuit model and physical realizations
65
This page intentionally left blank.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
67
4.1. DEVELOPMENT OF EARLY MODELS
Associative processing (AP) was perhaps the earliest form of parallel processing.
Associative or content-addressable memories (AMs, CAMs), which allow memory cells to
be accessed based on contents rather than their physical locations within the memory array,
came into the forefront in the 1950s when advances in magnetic and cryogenic memory
technologies allowed the construction of, and experimentation with, reasonably sized
prototypes. However, the origins of research on AM/AP technology and applications actually
go back to the 1943 sketch of a relay-based associative memory by Konrad Zuse and the
1945 visionary assessment of the need for associative access to information by Vannevar
Bush (see Table 4.1).
AM/AP architectures are essentially based on incorporating simple processing logic into
the memory array so as to remove the need for transferring large volumes of data through
the limited-bandwidth interface between the memory and the processor (the von Neumann
bottleneck). Early associative memories provided two basic capabilities: (1) masked search,
or looking for a particular bit pattern in selected fields of all memory words and marking
those for which a match is indicated, and (2) parallel write, or storing a given bit pattern into
selected fields of all memory words that have been previously marked. These two basic
capabilities, along with simple logical operations on mark vectors (e.g., ORing them
together) suffice for the programming of sophisticated searches or even parallel arithmetic
operations [Parh97].
Over the past half-century, the AM/AP model has evolved through the incorporation of
additional capabilities, so that it is in essence converging with SIMD-type array processors.
Early examples of APs included the Goodyear STARAN processor, a relatively successful
commercial product of the 1970s, whose design was motivated by the computation-intensive
problem of aircraft conflict detection; O(n2) pairwise checks are required to avoid collisions
and near misses for n aircraft in the vicinity of a busy airport. Modern incarnations of this
model are seen in processor-in-memory (PIM) chips, which are basically standard DRAM
chips with a large number of very simple processors added on their data access paths, and
intelligent RAM (IRAM) architectures, which have been shown to have advantages in both
performance and power consumption [From97].
Another early model, introduced in the 1950s, dealt with parallel processing for image
understanding applications. In those days, interest in artificial intelligence, and particularly
its subfield of computer vision, was quite high. The development of perceptrons (a neuronlike
device in charge of processing a single pixel in a digital image) was based on the pioneering
Table 4.1. Entering the Second Half-Century of Associative Processing
Decade
1940s
1950s
1960s
1970s
1980s
1990s
Events and advances
Formulation of need & concept
Emergence of cell technologies
Introduction of basic architectures
Commercialization & applications
Focus on system/software issues
Scalable & flexible architectures
Technology
Relays
Magnetic, cryogenic
Transistors
ICs
VLSI
ULSI, WSI
Performance
Mega-bit-OPS
Giga-bit-OPS
Tera-bit-OPS
Peta-bit-OPS?
68
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
work of McCulloch and Pitts in the 1940s. The perceptron convergence theorem of Rosenblatt, along with Minsky’s work on the limitations of such devices in the 1960s, created a
flurry of research activities that laid the foundation for the modern field of neural networks.
Hopfield's energy approach and the introduction of the back propagation learning algorithm
put neural networks on the fast track so that today they are used for the solution of complex
decision problems in a wide class of applications [Jain96].
The 1960s saw the introduction of a model of fundamental importance. Cellular
automata formed natural extensions of the types of abstract machines that were studied as
theoretical models of von Neumann-type sequential computers. Cellular automata machines
are typically viewed as a collection of identical finite-state automata that are interconnected,
through their input–output links, in a regular fashion, with the state transitions of each
automaton controlled by its own state, the states of the neighbors to which it is connected,
and its primary inputs, if any [Garz95]. Systolic arrays, which form the basis of
high-performance VLSI-based designs in some application areas, can be viewed as
cellular automata. In recent years, we have witnessed a resurgence of interest in cellular
automata as theoretical models of massively parallel systems and as tools for modeling
physical phenomena [PPCA].
In the subsequent sections of this chapter, we will review some of the commonly used
models in the field of parallel processing. Before doing so, it is instructive to revisit the
Flynn–Johnson classification of computer systems. Figure 4.1 depicts the classification
along with the two major dichotomies that we will consider in the next two sections.
The SISD class encompasses standard uniprocessor systems, including those that
employ pipelining, out-of-order execution, multiple instruction issue, and several functional
units to achieve higher performance. Because the SIMD and MIMD classes will be examined
in detail in the remainder of this book, here we say a few words about the class of MISD
parallel architectures for completeness. As mentioned in Section 1.4, the MISD (missdee) class has not found widespread application. One reason is that most application
Figure 4.1. The Flynn–Johnson classification of computer systems.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
69
Figure 4.2. Multiple instruction streams operating on a single data stream (MISD).
problems do not map easily onto a MISD architecture, making it impossible to design a
general-purpose architecture of this type. However, one can quite properly envisage
MISD-type parallel processors for specific applications.
Figure 4.2 shows an example parallel processor with the MISD architecture. A single
data stream enters the machine consisting of five processors. Various transformations are
performed on each data item before it is passed on to the next processor(s). Successive data
items can go through different transformations, either because of data-dependent conditional
statements in the instruction streams (control-driven) or because of special control tags
carried along with the data (data-driven). The MISD organization can thus be viewed as a
flexible or high-level pipeline with multiple paths and programmable stages.
Even though we often view conventional pipelines as linear structures, pipelines with
multiple paths and the capability to selectively bypass various stages are in fact used in
high-performance CPU design. For example, the block diagram of a floating-point arithmetic
pipeline may resemble Fig. 4.2, where the entry block is used for unpacking of the inputs
and detection of special operands, the three parallel branches perform various floating-point
arithmetic operations (say add, multiply, and divide), and the exit block normalizes and packs
the results into the standard format. The key difference between the above pipeline and a
MISD architecture is that the floating-point pipeline stages are not programmable.
4.2. SIMD VERSUS MIMD ARCHITECTURES
Most early parallel machines had SIMD designs. The ILLIAC IV computer, briefly
mentioned in Section 1.3, and described in more detail in Section 23.2, is a well-known
example of such early parallel machines. SIMD implies that a central unit fetches and
interprets the instructions and then broadcasts appropriate control signals to a number of
processors operating in lockstep. This initial interest in SIMD resulted both from characteristics of early parallel applications and from economic necessity. Some of the earliest
applications, such as air traffic control and linear-algebra computations, are pleasantly
parallel (at times researchers have characterized these as “embarrassingly parallel,” referring
to the extreme ease with which they can be parallelized). From the user’s perspective, such
applications tend to be much easier to program in SIMD languages and lead to more
cost-effective SIMD hardware. On the economics front, full-fledged processors with reason-
70
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
able speed were quite expensive in those days, thus limiting any highly parallel system to
the SIMD variety.
Within the SIMD category, two fundamental design choices exist:
1. Synchronous versus asynchronous SIMD. In a SIMD machine, each processor can
execute or ignore the instruction being broadcast based on its local state or
data-dependent conditions. However, this leads to some inefficiency in executing
conditional computations. For example, an “if-then-else” statement is executed by
first enabling the processors for which the condition is satisfied and then flipping
the “enable” bit before getting into the “else” part. On the average, half of the
processors will be idle for each branch. The situation is even worse for “case”
statements involving multiway branches. A possible cure is to use the asynchronous
version of SIMD, known as SPMD (spim-dee or single-program, multiple data),
where each processor runs its own copy of the common program. The advantage of
SPMD is that in an “if-then-else” computation, each processor will only spend time
on the relevant branch. The disadvantages include the need for occasional synchronization and the higher complexity of each processor, which must now have a
program memory and instruction fetch/decode logic.
2. Custom- versus commodity-chip SIMD. A SIMD machine can be designed based
on commodity (off-the-shelf) components or with custom chips. In the first approach, components tend to be inexpensive because of mass production. However,
such general-purpose components will likely contain elements that may not be
needed for a particular design. These extra components may complicate the design,
manufacture, and testing of the SIMD machine and may introduce speed penalties
as well. Custom components (including ASICs = application-specific ICs, multichip
modules, or WSI = wafer-scale integrated circuits) generally offer better performance but lead to much higher cost in view of their development costs being borne
by a relatively small number of parallel machine users (as opposed to commodity
microprocessors that are produced in millions). As integrating multiple processors
along with ample memory on a single VLSI chip becomes feasible, a type of
convergence between the two approaches appears imminent.
Judging by what commercial vendors have introduced in the 1990s, the MIMD paradigm
has become more popular recently. The reasons frequently cited for this shift of focus are
the higher flexibility of the MIMD architectures and their ability to take advantage of
commodity microprocessors, thus avoiding lengthy development cycles and getting a free
ride on the speed improvement curve for such microprocessors (see Fig. 1.1). MIMD
machines are most effective for medium- to coarse-grain parallel applications, where the
computation is divided into relatively large subcomputations or tasks whose executions are
assigned to the various processors. Advantages of MIMD machines include flexibility in
exploiting various forms of parallelism, relative ease of partitioning into smaller independent
parallel processors in a multiuser environment (this property also has important implications
for fault tolerance), and less difficult expansion (scalability). Disadvantages include considerable interprocessor communication overhead and more difficult programming.
Within the MIMD class, three fundamental issues or design choices are subjects of
ongoing debates in the research community.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
71
1. MPP—massively or moderately parallel processor. Is it more cost-effective to build
a parallel processor out of a relatively small number of powerful processors or a
massive number of very simple processors (the “herd of elephants” or the “army of
ants” approach)? Referring to Amdahl’s law, the first choice does better on the
inherently sequential part of a computation while the second approach might allow
a higher speed-up for the parallelizable part. A general answer cannot be given to
this question, as the best choice is both application- and technology-dependent. In
the 1980s, several massively parallel computers were built and marketed (massive
parallelism is generally taken to include 1000 or more processors). In the 1990s,
however, we have witnessed a general shift from massive to moderate parallelism
(tens to hundreds of processors), but the notion of massive parallelism has not been
altogether abandoned, particularly at the highest level of performance required for
Grand Challenge problems.
2. Tightly versus loosely coupled MIMD. Which is a better approach to highperformance computing, that of using specially designed multiprocessors/
multicomputers or a collection of ordinary workstations that are interconnected by commodity networks (such as Ethernet or ATM) and whose interactions
are coordinated by special system software and distributed file systems? The latter
choice, sometimes referred to as network of workstations (NOW) or cluster computing, has been gaining popularity in recent years. However, many open problems
exist for taking full advantage of such network-based loosely coupled architectures.
The hardware, system software, and applications aspects of NOWs are being
investigated by numerous research groups. We will cover some aspects of such
systems in Chapter 22. An intermediate approach is to link tightly coupled clusters
of processors via commodity networks. This is essentially a hierarchical approach
that works best when there is a great deal of data access locality.
3. Explicit message passing versus virtual shared memory. Which scheme is better,
that of forcing the users to explicitly specify all messages that must be sent between
processors or to allow them to program in an abstract higher-level model, with the
required messages automatically generated by the system software? This question is essentially very similar to the one asked in the early days of high-level
languages and virtual memory. At some point in the past, programming in
assembly languages and doing explicit transfers between secondary and primary
memories could lead to higher efficiency. However, nowadays, software is so
complex and compilers and operating systems so advanced (not to mention
processing power so cheap) that it no longer makes sense to hand-optimize
the programs, except in limited time-critical instances. However, we are not
yet at that point in parallel processing, and hiding the explicit communication
structure of a parallel machine from the programmer has nontrivial consequences for performance.
4.3. GLOBAL VERSUS DISTRIBUTED MEMORY
Within the MIMD class of parallel processors, memory can be global or distributed.
72
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 4.3. A parallel processor with global memory.
Global memory may be visualized as being in a central location where all processors
can access it with equal ease (or with equal difficulty, if you are a half-empty-glass type of
person). Figure 4.3 shows a possible hardware organization for a global-memory parallel
processor. Processors can access memory through a special processor-to-memory network.
As access to memory is quite frequent, the interconnection network must have very low
latency (quite a difficult design challenge for more than a few processors) or else memorylatency-hiding techniques must be employed. An example of such methods is the use of
multithreading in the processors so that they continue with useful processing functions while
they wait for pending memory access requests to be serviced. In either case, very high
network bandwidth is a must. An optional processor-to-processor network may be used for
coordination and synchronization purposes.
A global-memory multiprocessor is characterized by the type and number p of processors, the capacity and number m of memory modules, and the network architecture. Even
though p and m are independent parameters, achieving high performance typically requires
that they be comparable in magnitude (e.g., too few memory modules will cause contention
among the processors and too many would complicate the network design).
Examples for both the processor-to-memory and processor-to-processor networks include
1.
2.
3.
Crossbar switch; O(pm) complexity, and thus quite costly for highly parallel systems
Single or multiple buses (the latter with complete or partial connectivity)
Multistage interconnection network (MIN); cheaper than Example 1, more bandwidth than Example 2
The type of interconnection network used affects the way in which efficient algorithms are
developed. In order to free the programmers from such tedious considerations, an abstract
model of global-memory computers, known as PRAM, has been defined (see Section 4.4).
One approach to reducing the amount of data that must pass through the processor-tomemory interconnection network is to use a private cache memory of reasonable size within
each processor (Fig. 4.4). The reason that using cache memories reduces the traffic through
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
73
Figure 4.4. A parallel processor with global memory and processor caches.
the network is the same here as for conventional processors: locality of data access, repeated
access to the same data, and the greater efficiency of block, as opposed to word-at-a-time,
data transfers. However, the use of multiple caches gives rise to the cache coherence problem:
Multiple copies of data in the main memory and in various caches may become inconsistent.
With a single cache, the write-through policy can keep the two data copies consistent. Here,
we need a more sophisticated approach, examples of which include
1.
Do not cache shared data at all or allow only a single cache copy. If the volume of
shared data is small and access to it infrequent, these policies work quite well.
2. Do not cache “writeable” shared data or allow only a single cache copy. Read-only
shared data can be placed in multiple caches with no complication.
3. Use a cache coherence protocol. This approach may introduce a nontrivial consistency enforcement overhead, depending on the coherence protocol used, but removes the above restrictions. Examples include snoopy caches for bus-based
systems (each cache monitors all data transfers on the bus to see if the validity of
the data it is holding will be affected) and directory-based schemes (where writeable
shared data are “owned” by a single processor or cache at any given time, with a
directory used to determine physical data locations). See Sections 18.1 and 18.2 for
more detail.
Distributed-memory architectures can be conceptually viewed as in Fig. 4.5. A collection of p processors, each with its own private memory, communicates through an interconnection network. Here, the latency of the interconnection network may be less critical, as
each processor is likely to access its own local memory most of the time. However, the
communication bandwidth of the network may or may not be critical, depending on the type
of parallel applications and the extent of task interdependencies. Note that each processor is
usually connected to the network through multiple links or channels (this is the norm here,
although it can also be the case for shared-memory parallel processors).
In addition to the types of interconnection networks enumerated for shared-memory
parallel processors, distributed-memory MIMD architectures can also be interconnected by
74
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 4.5. A parallel processor with distributed memory.
a variety of direct networks, so called because the processor channels are directly connected
to their counterparts in other processors according to some interconnection pattern or
topology. Examples of direct networks will be introduced in Section 4.5.
Because access to data stored in remote memory modules (those associated with other
processors) involves considerably more latency than access to the processor’s local memory,
distributed-memory MIMD machines are sometimes described as nonuniform memory
access (NUMA) architectures. Contrast this with the uniform memory access (UMA)
property of global-memory machines. In a UMA architecture, distribution of data in memory
is relevant only to the extent that it affects the ability to access the required data in parallel,
whereas in NUMA architectures, inattention to data and task partitioning among the
processors may have dire consequences. When coarse-grained tasks are allocated to the
various processors, load-balancing (in the initial assignment or dynamically as the computations unfold) is also of some importance.
It is possible to view Fig. 4.5 as a special case of Fig. 4.4 in which the global-memory
modules have been removed altogether; the fact that processors and (cache) memories appear
in different orders is immaterial. This has led to the name all-cache or cache-only memory
architecture (COMA) for such machines.
4.4. THE PRAM SHARED-MEMORY MODEL
The theoretical model used for conventional or sequential computers (SISD class) is
known as the random-access machine (RAM) (not to be confused with random-access
memory, which has the same acronym). The parallel version of RAM [PRAM (pea-ram)],
constitutes an abstract model of the class of global-memory parallel processors. The
abstraction consists of ignoring the details of the processor-to-memory interconnection
network and taking the view that each processor can access any memory location in each
machine cycle, independent of what other processors are doing.
Thus, for example, PRAM algorithms might involve statements like “for 0 ≤ i < p,
Processor i adds the contents of memory location 2 i + 1 to the memory location 2i” (different
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
75
Figure 4.6. Conceptual view of a parallel random-access machine (PRAM).
locations accessed by the various processors) or “each processor loads the contents of
memory location x into its Register 2” (the same location accessed by all processors).
Obviously, the problem of multiple processors attempting to write into a common memory
location must be resolved in some way. A detailed discussion of this issue is postponed to
Chapter 5. Suffice it to say at this point that various inhibition, priority, or combining schemes
can be employed when concurrent write operations to a common location are attempted.
In the formal PRAM model, a single processor is assumed to be active initially. In each
computation step, each active processor can read from and write into the shared memory and
can also activate another processor. Using a recursive doubling scheme, log2 p  steps are
necessary and sufficient to activate all p processors. In our discussions, the set of active
processors is usually implied. We do not explicitly activate the processors.
Even though the global-memory architecture was introduced as a subclass of the MIMD
class, the abstract PRAM model depicted in Fig. 4.6 can be SIMD or MIMD. In the SIMD
variant, all processors obey the same instruction in each machine cycle; however, because
of indexed and indirect (register-based) addressing, they often execute the operation that is
broadcast to them on different data. In fact, the shared-memory algorithms that we will study
in Chapters 5 and 6 are primarily of the SIMD variety, as such algorithms are conceptually
much simpler to develop, describe, and analyze.
In view of the direct and independent access to every memory location allowed for each
processor, the PRAM model depicted in Fig. 4.6 is highly theoretical. If one were to build a
physical PRAM, the processor-to-memory connectivity would have to be realized by an
interconnection network. Because memory locations are too numerous to be assigned
individual ports on an interconnection network, blocks of memory locations (or modules)
would have to share a single network port. Let us ignore this practical consideration for now
in order to make a fundamental point. Suppose we do in fact design a network connecting
the processors to individual memory locations, as shown in Fig. 4.7. If this network is built
from elements with constant fan-in and fan-out, then the depth of the network, and thus its
latency, will be at least logarithmic in mp. This implies that each instruction cycle would
have to consume Ω (log p) real time.
The above point is important when we try to compare PRAM algorithms with those for
distributed-memory models. An O(log p)-step PRAM algorithm may not be faster than an
76
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 4.7. PRAM with some hardware details shown.
O(log 2 p)-step algorithm for a hypercube architecture, say. We should always have Fig. 3.3
in mind when making such comparisons.
It is interesting to note that the above logarithmic latency is of no consequence in most
theoretical studies of parallel algorithms. Recall that the class NC of efficiently parallelizable
problems was defined as those that would require polylogarithmic running times. The formal
definition of NC is in fact in terms of PRAM steps rather than real time. However, if an
algorithm is executed in a polylogarithmic number of PRAM steps and if each step is realized
in logarithmic real time, the actual running time is still polylogarithmic.
There is a way in which the log-factor slowdown implied by the above discussion can
be hidden, leading to higher algorithm efficiency. Suppose that the memory access latency
is exactly log 2 p clock cycles. A p-processor physical machine of the type shown in Fig. 4.7
can be used to emulate a (p log2 p)-processor “logical PRAM.” A PRAM instruction cycle
begins by issuing a memory access request, followed by some computation in the processor
(e.g., an arithmetic operation), and ends by storing the result in memory. Suppose that the
physical Processor 0, emulating logical Processors 0 through log2 p – 1, issues the log2 p
memory access requests in turn, one per clock cycle, with these requests pipelined through
the network. When the last access request has been issued, the data for the first request arrive
at the processor, followed, in consecutive clock cycles, by those for the other requests. In
this way, the processor will be busy at all times and the log2 p memory latency does not slow
it down, provided that the memory access network possesses the aggregate bandwidth
required by all of the p log2 p in-transit memory requests.
Recall the graph representation of a shared-variable architecture introduced in Fig. 2.5,
where each node of the p-node complete graph Kp contains one of the p processors plus m/p
of the m memory locations. This would be an accurate model of the abstract PRAM if each
node can honor p simultaneous memory access requests (one from the local processor and
p – 1 coming from the node’s communication ports), with multiple requests potentially
addressing the same memory location. If only one or a small constant number of memory
access requests can be processed in each cycle, then PRAM is not accurately represented.
However, with additional effort, it is sometimes possible to structure a PRAM algorithm
such that simultaneous accesses to the same block of memory locations are never
attempted.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
77
4.5. DISTRIBUTED-MEMORY OR GRAPH MODELS
Given the internal processor and memory structures in each node, a distributed-memory
architecture is characterized primarily by the network used to interconnect the nodes (Fig. 4.5).
This network is usually represented as a graph, with vertices corresponding to processor–memory
nodes and edges corresponding to communication links. If communication links are unidirectional, then directed edges are used. Undirected edges imply bidirectional communication,
although not necessarily in both directions at once. Important parameters of an interconnection network include
1.
Network diameter: the longest of the shortest paths between various pairs of nodes,
which should be relatively small if network latency is to be minimized. The network
diameter is more important with store-and-forward routing (when a message is
stored in its entirety and retransmitted by intermediate nodes) than with wormhole
routing (when a message is quickly relayed through a node in small pieces).
2. Bisection (band)width: the smallest number (total capacity) of links that need to be
cut in order to divide the network into two subnetworks of half the size. This is
important when nodes communicate with each other in a random fashion. A small
bisection (band)width limits the rate of data transfer between the two halves of the
network, thus affecting the performance of communication-intensive algorithms.
3. Vertex or node degree: the number of communication ports required of each node,
which should be a constant independent of network size if the architecture is to be
readily scalable to larger sizes. The node degree has a direct effect on the cost of
each node, with the effect being more significant for parallel ports containing several
wires or when the node is required to communicate over all of its ports at once.
Table 4.2 lists these three parameters for some of the commonly used interconnection
networks. Do not worry if you know little about the networks listed in Table 4.2. They are
there to give you an idea of the variability of these parameters across different networks
(examples for some of these networks appear in Fig. 4.8).
The list in Table 4.2 is by no means exhaustive. In fact, the multitude of interconnection
networks, and claims with regard to their advantages over competing ones, have become
quite confusing. The situation can be likened to a sea (Fig. 4.8). Once in a while (almost
monthly over the past few years), a new network is dropped into the sea. Most of these make
small waves and sink. Some produce bigger waves that tend to make people seasick! Hence,
there have been suggestions that we should stop introducing new networks and instead focus
on analyzing and better understanding the existing ones. A few have remained afloat and
have been studied/analyzed to death (e.g., the hypercube).
Even though the distributed-memory architecture was introduced as a subclass of the
MIMD class, machines based on networks of the type shown in Fig. 4.8 can be SIMD- or
MIMD-type. In the SIMD variant, all processors obey the same instruction in each machine
cycle, executing the operation that is broadcast to them on local data. For example, all
processors in a 2D SIMD mesh might be directed to send data to their right neighbors and
receive data from the left. In fact, the distributed-memory algorithms that we will study in
Chapters 9–14 are primarily of the SIMD variety, as such algorithms are conceptually much
simpler to develop, describe, and analyze.
78
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Table 4.2. Topological Parameters of Selected Interconnection Networks
Network name(s)
1D mesh (linear array)
1D tours (ring, loop)
2D mesh
2D torus (k-ary 2-cube)
3D mesh
3D torus (k-ary 3-cube)
Pyramid
Binary tree
4-ary hypertree
Butterfly
Hypercube
Cube-connected cycles
Shuffle–exchange
De Bruijn
1With
No. of nodes
k
k
2
k
2
k
3
k
3
k
2
(4k –- 1)/3
l
2 –1
2l (2l +1 –1)
2l (l + 1)
2l
2l l
l
2
l
2
Network
diameter
k–1
k/2
2k – 2
k
3k - 3
3k/2
2 log 2 k
2l – 2
2l
2l
l
2l
2l – l
l
Bisection width Node degree
1
2
k
2k
2
k
2
2k
2k
1
2l+1
2l
l- 1
2
l-1
2
l- 1
≥2 /l
l
2 /l
2
2
4
4
6
6
9
3
6
4
l
3
4 unidir.
4 unidir.
Local links?
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes 1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
folded layout.
The development of efficient parallel algorithms suffers from the proliferation of
available interconnection networks, for algorithm design must be done virtually from scratch
for each new architecture. It would be nice if we could abstract away the effects of the
interconnection topology (just as we did with PRAM for global-memory machines) in order
to free the algorithm designer from a lot of machine-specific details. Even though this is not
Figure 4.8. The sea of interconnection networks.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
79
completely possible, models that replace the topological information reflected in the interconnection graph with a small number of parameters do exist and have been shown to capture
the effect of interconnection topology fairly accurately.
As an example of such abstract models, we briefly review the LogP model [Cull96]. In
LogP, the communication architecture of a parallel computer is captured in four parameters:
L
o
g
P
Latency upper bound when a small message (of a few words) is sent from
an arbitrary source node to an arbitrary destination node
The overhead, defined as the length of time when a processor is dedicated
to the transmission or reception of a message, thus not being able to do any
other computation
The gap, defined as the minimum time that must elapse between consecutive message transmissions or receptions by a single processor (1/g is the
available per-processor communication bandwidth)
Processor multiplicity (p in our notation)
If LogP is in fact an accurate model for capturing the effects of communication in parallel
processors, then the details of interconnection network do not matter. All that is required,
when each new network is developed or proposed, is to determine its four LogP parameters.
Software simulation can then be used to predict the performance of an actual machine that
is based on the new architecture for a given application. On most early, and some currently
used, parallel machines, the system software overhead (o ) for message initiation or reception
is so large that it dwarfs the hop-to-hop and transmission latencies by comparison. For such
machines, not only the topology, but also the parameters L and g of the LogP model may be
irrelevant to accurate performance prediction.
Even simpler is the bulk-synchronous parallel (BSP) model which attempts to hide the
communication latency altogether through a specific parallel programming style, thus
making the network topology irrelevant [Vali90]. Synchronization of processors occurs once
every L time steps, where L is a periodicity parameter. A parallel computation consists of a
sequence of supersteps. In a given superstep, each processor performs a task consisting of
local computation steps, message transmissions, and message receptions from other processors. Data received in messages will not be used in the current superstep but rather beginning
with the next superstep. After each period of L time units, a global check is made to see if
the current superstep has been completed. If so, then the processors move on to executing
the next superstep. Otherwise, the next period of L time units is allocated to the unfinished
superstep.
A final observation: Whereas direct interconnection networks of the types shown in
Table 4.2 or Fig. 4.8 have led to many important classes of parallel processors, bus-based
architectures still dominate the small-scale-parallel machines. Because a single bus can
quickly become a performance bottleneck as the number of processors increases, a variety
of multiple-bus architectures and hierarchical schemes (Fig. 4.9) are available for reducing
bus traffic by taking advantage of the locality of communication within small clusters of
processors.
80
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 4.9. Example of a hierarchical interconnection architecture.
4.6. CIRCUIT MODEL AND PHYSICAL REALIZATIONS
In a sense, the only sure way to predict the performance of a parallel architecture on a
given set of problems is to actually build the machine and run the programs on it. Because
this is often impossible or very costly, the next best thing is to model the machine at the
circuit level, so that all computational and signal propagation delays can be taken into
account. Unfortunately, this is also impossible for a complex supercomputer, both because
generating and debugging detailed circuit specifications are not much easier than a fullblown implementation and because a circuit simulator would take eons to run the simulation.
Despite the above observations, we can produce and evaluate circuit-level designs for
specific applications. The example of sorting networks will be covered in Chapter 7, where
we take the number of two-input compare–exchange circuits as a measure of cost and the
depth of the circuit as being indicative of delay. Additional examples, covering the fast
Fourier transform, parallel prefix computations, and dictionary operations, will be provided
in Chapter 8 where similar cost and delay criteria are used.
Figure 4.10. lntrachip wire delay as a function of wire length.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
81
A more precise model, particularly if the circuit is to be implemented on a dense VLSI
chip, would include the effect of wires, in terms of both the chip area they consume (cost)
and the signal propagation delay between and within the interconnected blocks (time). In
fact, in modern VLSI design, wire delays and area are beginning to overshadow switching
or gate delays and the area occupied by devices, respectively.
The rightmost column in Table 4.2 indicates which network topologies have local or
short links, thus being less likely to suffer from long interprocessor signal propagation delays.
Figure 4.10 depicts the expected wire delays on a 1B-transistor chip of the future as a function
of wire length, assuming the use of copper wires that are less resistive, and thus faster, than
today’s aluminum wires [Parh98]. The circles designate the estimated wire lengths, and thus
interprocessor propagation delays, for a 256-processor chip with three different architectures. It is seen that for the hypercube architecture, which has nonlocal links, the interprocessor wire delays can dominate the intraprocessor delays, thus making the communication
step time much larger than that of the mesh- and torus-based architectures.
Determining the area requirements and maximum wire lengths for various interconnection topologies has been a very active research area in the past two decades. At times, we
can determine bounds on area and wire-length parameters based on network properties,
without having to resort to detailed specification and layout with VLSI design tools. For
example, in 2D VLSI implementation, the bisection width of a network yields a lower bound
on its layout area in an asymptotic sense. If the bisection width is B, the smallest dimension
of the chip should be at least Bw, where w is the minimum wire width (including the
mandatory interwire spacing). The area of the chip is thus Ω (B2). If the bisection width is
Θ ( ), as in 2D meshes, then the area lower bound will be linear in the number p of
processors. Such an architecture is said to be scalable in the VLSI layout sense. On the other
hand, if the bisection width is Θ (p), as in the hypercube, then the area required is a quadratic
function of p and the architecture is not scalable.
The following analogy is intended to reinforce the importance of the above discussion
of physical realizations and scalability [Hart86]. You have all read science-fiction stories, or
seen sci-fi movies, in which scaled up ants or other beasts destroy entire towns (top panel of
Fig. 4.11). Let us say that a 0.5-cm ant has been scaled up by a factor of 10 4 so that its new
length is 50 m. Assuming linear scaling, so that the enlarged ant looks exactly like an ordinary
ant, the ants leg has thickened by the same factor (say from 0.01 cm to 1 m). The weight of
the ant, meanwhile, has increased by a factor of 10 12, say from 1 g to 1 M tons! Assuming
that the original ant legs were just strong enough to bear its weight, the leg thickness must
in fact increase by a factor of
= 10 6 , from 0.01 cm to 100 m, if the ant is not to collapse
under its own weight. Now, a 50-m-long ant with legs that are 100 m thick looks nothing
like the original ant!
Power consumption of digital circuits is another limiting factor. Power dissipation in
modern microprocessors grows almost linearly with the product of die area and clock
frequency (both steadily rising) and today stands at a few tens of watts in high-performance
designs. Even if modern low-power design methods succeed in reducing this power by an
order of magnitude, disposing of the heat generated by 1 M such processors is indeed a great
challenge.
82
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 4.11. Pitfalls of scaling up.
PROBLEMS
4.1. Associative processing
A bit-serial associative memory is capable of searching, in one memory access cycle, a single
bit slice of all active memory words for 0 or 1 and provides the number of responding words
in the form of an unsigned integer. For example, the instruction Search(0, i) will yield the
number of active memory words that store the value 0 in bit position i. It also has instructions
for activating or deactivating memory words based on the results of the latest search (i.e., keep
only the responders active or deactivate the responders). Suppose that initially, all words are
active and the memory stores m unsigned integers.
a.
b.
Devise an AM algorithm to find the largest number stored in the memory.
Devise an AM algorithm for finding the kth largest unsigned integer among the m stored
values.
c . Extend the algorithm of part (b) to deal with signed integers in signed-magnitude format.
d. Extend the algorithm of part (b) to deal with signed integers in 2’s-complement format.
Hint: In a 2’s-complement number, the sign bit carries a negative weight so that 1010
represents –8 + 2 = –6.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
83
4.2. Associative processing
With the same assumptions as in Problem 4.1:
Devise an AM algorithm to find the exclusive-OR (checksum) of the values in all memory
words.
b . Devise an AM algorithm for finding the arithmetic sum of the values stored in all memory
words. Assume unsigned or 2’s-complement numbers, with all results representable in a
single word.
c . Repeat part (b), this time assuming that some results may not be representable in a single
word.
a.
4.3. Cellular automata synchronization
Cellular automata form abstract models of homogeneous massively parallel computers. Consider the special case of a linear array of finite automata viewed as modeling a firing squad.
All cells are identical and the length of the linear array is unknown and unbounded. We would
like to synchronize this firing squad so that all cells enter the special “fire” state at exactly the
same time. The synchronization process begins with a special input to the leftmost cell of the
array (the general). Cells (soldiers) can only communicate with their left and right neighbor in
a synchronous fashion and the only global signal is the clock signal, which is distributed to all
cells. Hint : Try to identify the middle cell, or the middle two cells, of the array, thus dividing
the problem into two smaller problems of exactly the same size.
4.4. Image-processing computer
Two types of operations are commonly used in image processing. Assume that an image is
represented by a 2D matrix of 0s and 1s corresponding to dark and light pixels, respectively.
Noise removal has the goal of removing isolated 0s and 1s (say those that have at most one
pixel of the same type among their eight horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent
neighbors). Smoothing is done by replacing each pixel value with the median of nine values
consisting of the pixel itself and its eight neighbors.
a . Discuss the design of a 2D array of simple cells capable of noise removal or smoothing.
b . Propose suitable generalizations for noise removal and smoothing if each pixel value is a
binary integer (say 4 bits wide) representing a gray level.
c . Sketch the modifications required to the cells of part (a) if part (b) is to be implemented.
4.5. MISD architecture
In the MISD architecture depicted in Fig. 4.2, the rate of data flow or throughput in a
synchronous mode of operation is dictated by the execution time of the slowest of the five
blocks. Suppose that the execution times for the five blocks are not fixed but rather have uniform
distributions in the interval from a lower bound l i to an upper bound u i , 1 ≤ i ≤ 5, where l i and
u i are known constants. Discuss methods for improving the throughput beyond the throughput
1/max (ui) of a synchronous design.
4.6. Cache coherence protocols
Study the snooping and directory-based cache coherence protocols (see, e.g., [Patt96], pp.
655–666 and 679–685). Then pick one example of each and do the following exercises:
a . Present one advantage for each protocol over the other.
b . Discuss an application, or a class of applications, for which the chosen snooping cache
coherence protocol would perform very poorly.
c . Repeat part (b) for the chosen directory-based protocol.
84
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
4.7. Topological parameters of interconnection networks
Add entries corresponding to the following topologies to Table 4.2.
a.
b.
c.
An X-tree; a complete binary tree with nodes on the same level connected as a linear array.
A hierarchical bus architecture with a maximum branching factor b (b = 4 in Fig. 4.9).
A degree-4 chordal ring with skip distance s; i.e., a p-node ring in which Processor i is also
connected to Processors i ± s mod p, in addition to Processors i ± 1 mod p.
4.8. Hierarchical-bus architectures
Consider the hierarchical multilevel bus architecture shown in Fig. 4.9, except that each of the
low-level clusters consists of four processors. Suppose that we want to emulate a 4 × 6 or 6 × 4
mesh architecture on this bus-based system. Consider the shearsort algorithm described in
Section 2.5 and assume that each transfer over a shared bus to another processor or to a switch
node takes unit time. Ignore computation time as well as any control overhead, focusing only
on communication steps.
a.
How long does this system take to emulate shearsort on a 4 × 6 mesh if each processor holds
a single data item and each cluster emulates a column of the mesh?
b . How long does this system take to emulate shearsort on a 6 × 4 mesh (cluster = row)?
c . Devise a method for performing a parallel prefix computation on this architecture.
4.9. The LogP model
Using the LogP model, write an equation in terms of the four parameters of the model for the
total time needed to do a “complete exchange,” defined as each processor sending p– 1 distinct
messages, one to each of the other p – 1 processors.
4.10. The BSP and LogP models
A
array holds the initial data for an iterative computation. One iteration involves
computing a new value for each array element based on its current value and the current values
of its eight horizontally, vertically, and diagonally adjacent array elements. Each of the p
processors stores a k × k block of the array at the center of a (k + 2) × (k + 2) local matrix, where
the top/bottom rows and leftmost/rightmost columns represent data acquired from neighboring
blocks and available at the beginning of an iteration. Processors dealing with blocks at the edge
of the large array simply copy values from edge rows/columns in lieu of receiving them from
a neighboring block.
a.
b.
Formulate the above as a BSP computation.
If you could choose the BSP parameter L at will, how would you go about the selection
process for the above computation?
c . Estimate the running time for m iterations, assuming the BSP model.
d . Repeat Part (c) for the LogP model.
4.11. Physical realizations
Consider the column labeled “Local Links?” in Table 4.2. It is obvious how a 2D mesh can be
laid out so that all links are local or short.
a . Describe a 2D layout for a 2D torus that has short local links. Hint: Use folding.
b . The 3D mesh and torus networks have also been characterized as having short local links.
However, this is only true if a 3D realization is possible. Show that a 3D mesh (and thus
torus) cannot be laid out with short local links in two dimensions.
c . Show that any network whose diameter is a logarithmic function of the number of nodes
cannot be laid out in two or three dimensions using only short local links.
MODELS OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
4.12.
85
Physical realizations
a.
Describe the network diameter, bisection width, and node degree of each of the networks
listed in Table 4.2 as an asymptotic function of the number p of nodes (e.g., the 1D mesh
has diameter, bisection, and degree of Θ (p), Θ (1), and Θ(1), respectively).
b. Using the results of part (a), compare the architectures listed in terms of the composite
figure of merit “degree × diameter,” in an asymptotic way.
c. Obtain an asymptotic lower bound for the VLSI layout area of each architecture based on
its bisection width.
d. The area–time product is sometimes regarded as a good composite figure of merit because
it incorporates both cost and performance factors. Assuming that delay is proportional to
network diameter, compute the asymptotic area–time figure of merit for each of the
architectures, assuming that the area lower bounds of part (c) are in fact achievable.
4.13.
Physical realizations
The average internode distance of an interconnection network is perhaps a more appropriate
indicator of its communication latency than its diameter. For example, if the network nodes are
message routers, some of which are randomly connected to processors or memory modules in
a distributed shared-memory architecture, then the average internode distance is a good
indicator of memory access latency.
a. Compute the average internode distance d avg for as many of the interconnection networks
listed in Table 4.2 as you can.
b. If a processor issues a memory access request in every clock cycle, there is no routing or
memory access conflict, and the memory access time is tma cycles, then, on the average,
each processor will have 2 davg + t ma
outstanding memory access requests at any given time.
Discuss the implications of the above on the scalability of the architectures in part (a).
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Cull96]
[From97]
[Garz95]
[Hart86]
[Jain96]
[Parh95]
[Parh97]
[Parh98]
[Patt96]
Culler, D. E., et al., “A Practical Model of Parallel Computation,” Communications of the ACM, Vol.
39, No. 11, pp. 78–85, November 1996.
Fromm, R., et al., “The Energy Efficiency of IRAM Architectures,” Proc. Int. Conf. Computer
Architecture, 1997, pp. 327–337.
Garzon, M., Models of Massive Parallelism: Analysis of Cellular Automata and Neural Networks,
Springer, 1995.
Hartmann, A. C., and J. D. Ullman, “Model Categories for Theories of Parallel Systems,” Microelectronics and Computer Corporation, Technical Report PP-341-86; reprinted in Parallel Computing:
Theory and Comparisons, by G. J. Lipovski and M. Malek, Wiley, 1987, pp. 367–381.
Jain, A. K., J. Mao, and K. M. Mohiuddin, “Artificial Neural Networks: A Tutorial,” IEEE Computer,
Vol. 29, No. 3, pp. 31–44, March 1996.
Parhami, B., “Panel Assesses SIMD’s Future,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 28, No. 6, pp. 89–91 June 1995.
For an unabridged version of this report, entitled “SIMD Machines: Do They Have a Significant
Future?,” see IEEE Computer Society Technical Committee on Computer Architecture Newsletter,
pp. 23–26, August 1995, or ACM Computer Architecture News, Vol. 23, No. 4, pp. 19–22, September
1995.
Parhami, B., “Search and Data Selection Algorithms for Associative Processors,” in Associative
Processing and Processors, edited by A. Krikelis and C. Weems, IEEE Computer Society Press, 1997,
pp. 10–25.
Parhami, B., and D.-M. Kwai, “Issues in Designing Parallel Architectures Using Multiprocessor and
Massively Parallel Microchips,” in preparation.
Patterson, D. A., and J. L. Hennessy, Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach, 2nd ed.,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1996.
86
[PPCA]
[Vali90]
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Proc. Int. Workshop on Parallel Processing by Cellular Automata and Arrays, 3rd, Berlin, 1986; 6th,
Potsdam, Germany (Parcella’94).
Valiant, L. G., “A Bridging Model for Parallel Computation,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 33,
No. 8, pp. 103–111, August 1990.
II
Extreme Models
The models of parallel computation range from very abstract to very concrete,
with real parallel machine implementations and user models falling somewhere
between these two extremes. At one extreme lies the abstract shared-memory
PRAM model, briefly introduced in Section 4.4, which offers a simple and
familiar programming model but is quite removed from what transpires at the
hardware level as a parallel computation unfolds. At the other extreme is the
circuit model of parallel processing where a computational task is considered
in terms of what happens to individual bits, in order to gain an appreciation for
actual hardware complexities (e.g., circuit depth or VLSI chip layout area). After
covering the two extremes of very abstract (the PRAM model) and very concrete
(the circuit model), we proceed to explore various intermediate models in the
rest of the book. This part consists of the following four chapters:
l
Chapter 5: PRAM and Basic Algorithms
l
l
Chapter 6: More Shared-Memory Algorithms
Chapter 7: Sorting and Selection Networks
l
Chapter 8: Other Circuit-Level Examples
87
This page intentionally left blank.
5
PRAM and Basic
Algorithms
In this chapter, following basic definitions and a brief discussion of the relative
computational powers of several PRAM submodels, we deal with five key
building-block algorithms that lay the foundations for solving various computational problems on the abstract PRAM model of shared-memory parallel processors. We will continue with more algorithms and implementation
considerations in Chapter 6. The example algorithms provided should be
sufficient to convince the reader that the PRAM’s programming model is a natural
extension of the familiar sequential computer (RAM) and that it facilitates the
development of efficient parallel algorithms using a variety of programming
paradigms. Chapter topics are
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
PRAM submodels and assumptions
Data broadcasting
Semigroup or fan-in computation
Parallel prefix computation
Ranking the elements of a linked list
Matrix multiplication
89
This page intentionally left blank.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
91
5.1. PRAM SUBMODELS AND ASSUMPTIONS
As mentioned in Section 4.4, the PRAM model prescribes the concurrent operation of
p processors (in SIMD or MIMD mode) on data that are accessible to all of them in an m-word
shared memory. In the synchronous SIMD or SPMD version of PRAM, which is of primary
interest in our subsequent discussions, Processor i can do the following in the three phases
of one cycle:
1.
2.
3.
Fetch an operand from the source address si in the shared memory
Perform some computations on the data held in local registers
Store a value into the destination address di in the shared memory
Not all three phases need to be present in every cycle; a particular cycle may require no new
data from memory, or no computation (just copying from si to d i , say), or no storing in
memory (partial computation result held in a local register, say).
Because the addresses s i and d i are determined by Processor i, independently of all other
processors, it is possible that several processors may want to read data from the same memory
location or write their values into a common location. Hence, four submodels of the PRAM
model have been defined based on whether concurrent reads (writes) from (to) the same
location are allowed. The four possible combinations, depicted in Fig. 5.1, are
•
•
•
•
EREW:
ERCW:
CREW:
CRCW:
Exclusive-read, exclusive-write
Exclusive-read, concurrent-write
Concurrent-read, exclusive-write
Concurrent-read, concurrent-write
The classification in Fig. 5.1 is reminiscent of Flynn’s classification (Fig. 1.11 or 4.1) and
offers yet another example of the quest to invent four-letter abbreviations/acronyms in
computer architecture! Note that here, too, one of the categories is not very useful, because
if concurrent writes are allowed, there is no logical reason for excluding the less problematic
concurrent reads.
EREW PRAM is the most realistic of the four submodels (to the extent that thousands
of processors concurrently accessing thousands of memory locations within a sharedmemory address space of millions or even billions of locations can be considered realistic!).
CRCW PRAM is the least restrictive submodel, but has the disadvantage of requiring a
conflict resolution mechanism to define the effect of concurrent writes (more on this below).
The default submodel, which is assumed when nothing is said about the submodel, is CREW
PRAM. For most computations, it is fairly easy to organize the algorithm steps so that
concurrent writes to the same location are never attempted.
CRCW PRAM is further classified according to how concurrent writes are handled.
Here are a few example submodels based on the semantics of concurrent writes in CRCW
PRAM:
• Undefined: In case of multiple writes, the value written is undefined (CRCW-U).
• Detecting: A special code representing “detected collision” is written (CRCW-D).
92
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 5.1. Submodels of the PRAM model.
• Common: Multiple writes allowed only if all store the same value (CRCW-C). This
is sometimes called the consistent-write submodel.
• Random: The value written is randomly chosen from among those offered (CRCWR). This is sometimes called the arbitrary-write submodel.
• Priority: The processor with the lowest index succeeds in writing its value (CRCW-P).
• Max/Min: The largest/smallest of the multiple values is written (CRCW-M).
• Reduction: The arithmetic sum (CRCW-S), logical AND (CRCW-A), logical XOR
(CRCW-X), or some other combination of the multiple values is written.
These submodels are all different from each other and from EREW and CREW. One way to
order these submodels is by their computational power. Two PRAM submodels are equally
powerful if each can emulate the other with a constant-factor slowdown. A PRAM submodel
is (strictly) less powerful than another submodel (denoted by the “<” symbol) if there exist
problems for which the former requires significantly more computational steps than the latter.
For example, the CRCW-D PRAM submodel is less powerful than the one that writes the
maximum value, as the latter can find the largest number in a vector A of size p in a single
step (Processor i reads A[i] and writes it to an agreed-upon location x, which will then hold
the maximum value for all processors to see), whereas the former needs at least Ω (log n)
steps. The “less powerful or equal” relationship “ ≤ ” between submodels can be similarly
defined.
The following relationships have been established between some of the PRAM submodels:
EREW < CREW < CRCW-D < CRCW-C < CRCW-R < CRCW-P
Even though all CRCW submodels are strictly more powerful than the EREW submodel,
the latter can simulate the most powerful CRCW submodel listed above with at most
logarithmic slowdown.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
93
THEOREM 5.1. A p-processor CRCW-P (priority) PRAM can be simulated by a
p-processor EREW PRAM with a slowdown factor of Θ (log p).
The proof of Theorem 5.1 is based on the ability of the EREW PRAM to sort or find
the smallest of p values in Θ (log p) time, as we shall see later. To avoid concurrent writes,
each processor writes an ID-address-value triple into its corresponding element of a scratch
list of size p, with the p processors then cooperating to sort the list by the destination
addresses, partition the list into segments corresponding to common addresses (which are
now adjacent in the sorted list), do a reduction operation within each segment to remove all
writes to the same location except the one with the smallest processor ID, and finally write
the surviving address-value pairs into memory. This final write operation will clearly be of
the exclusive variety.
5.2.
DATA BROADCASTING
Because data broadcasting is a fundamental building-block computation in parallel
processing, we devote this section to discussing how it can be accomplished on the various
PRAM submodels. Semigroup computation, parallel prefix computation, list ranking, and
matrix multiplication, four other useful building-block computations, will be discussed in
the next four sections.
Simple, or one-to-all, broadcasting is used when one processor needs to send a data
value to all other processors. In the CREW or CRCW submodels, broadcasting is trivial, as
the sending processor can write the data value into a memory location, with all processors
reading that data value in the following machine cycle. Thus, simple broadcasting is done in
Θ (1) steps. Multicasting within groups is equally simple if each processor knows its group
membership(s) and only members of each group read the multicast data for that group.
All-to-all broadcasting, where each of the p processors needs to send a data value to all other
processors, can be done through p separate broadcast operations in Θ (p) steps, which is
optimal.
The above scheme is clearly inapplicable to broadcasting in the EREW model. The
simplest scheme for EREW broadcasting is to make p copies of the data value, say in a
broadcast vector B of length p, and then let each processor read its own copy by accessing
B[j]. Thus, initially, Processor i writes its data value into B [0]. Next, a method known as
recursive doubling is used to copy B[0] into all elements of B in log 2 p  steps. Finally,
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, reads B [j] to get the data value broadcast by Processor i. The recursive
doubling algorithm for copying B[0] into all elements of the broadcast vector B is given
below.
Making p copies of B[0] by recursive doubling
for k = 0 to  log 2 p  – 1 Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, do
Copy B[j] into B[j + 2k]
endfor
In the above algorithm, it is implied that copying will not occur if the destination address
is outside the list (Fig. 5.2). Alternatively, the list B might be assumed to extend beyond
94
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 5.2. Data broadcasting in EREW PRAM via recursive doubling.
B[p – 1] with dummy elements that are written into but never read. However, it is perhaps
more efficient to explicitly “turn off” the processors that do not perform useful work in a
given step. This approach might allow us to use the idle processors for performing other tasks
in order to speed up algorithm execution, or at the very least, reduce the memory access
traffic through the processor-to-memory interconnection network when the algorithm is
ported to a physical shared-memory machine. Note that in Step k of the above recursive
doubling process, only the first 2 k processors need to be active. The complete EREW
broadcast algorithm with this provision is given below.
EREW PRAM algorithm for broadcasting by Processor i
Processor i write the data value into B[0]
s := 1
while s < p Processor j, 0 ≤ j < min(s, p – s), do
Copy B[j] into B[j + s]
s := 2s
endwhile
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, read the data value in B [j]
The parameter s can be interpreted as the “span” of elements already modified or the “step”
for the copying operation (Fig. 5.3).
The following argument shows that the above Θ(log p)-step broadcasting algorithm is
optimal for EREW PRAM. Because initially a single copy of the data value exists, at most
one other processor can get to know the value through a memory access in the first step. In
the second step, two more processors can become aware of the data value. Continuing in this
manner, at least  log 2 p  read–write cycles are necessary for p-way broadcasting.
To perform all-to-all broadcasting, so that each processor broadcasts a value that it holds
to each of the other p – 1 processors, we let Processor j write its value into B[j], rather than
into B[0]. Thus, in one memory access step, all of the values to be broadcast are written into
the broadcast vector B. Each processor then reads the other p – 1 values in p – 1 memory
accesses. To ensure that all reads are exclusive, Processor j begins reading the values starting
with B[j + 1], wrapping around to B[0] after reading B[p – 1].
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
95
Figure 5.3. EREW PRAM data broadcasting without redundant copying.
EREW PRAM algorithm for all-to-all broadcasting
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, write own data value into B[j]
for k = 1 to p – 1 Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, do
Read the data value in B[ (j + k) mod p]
endfor
Again the above all-to-all broadcasting algorithm is optimal as the shared memory is
the only mechanism for interprocessor communication and each processor can read but one
value from the shared memory in each machine cycle.
Given a data vector S of length p, a naive sorting algorithm can be designed based on
the above all-to-all broadcasting scheme. We simply let Processor j compute the rank R[j]
of the data element S[j] and then store S[j] into S[R[j]]. The rank R[j] of S[j], loosely defined
as the total number of data elements that are smaller than S[j], is computed by each processor
examining all other data elements and counting the number of elements S[l] that are smaller
than S[j]. Because each data element must be given a unique rank, ties are broken by using
the processor ID. In other words, if Processors i and j (i < j) hold equal data values, the value
in Processor i is deemed smaller for ranking purposes. Following is the complete sorting
algorithm.
Naive EREW PRAM sorting algorithm using all-to-all broadcasting
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, write 0 into R [j]
for k = 1 to p – 1 Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, do
l := (j + k) mod p
if S[l] < S[j] or S[l] = S[j] and l < j
then R[j] := R[j] + 1
endif
endfor
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, write S [j] into S[R[j]]
Unlike the broadcasting algorithms discussed earlier, the above sorting algorithm is not
optimal in that the O(p²) computational work involved in it is significantly greater than the
96
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
O(p log p) work required for sorting p elements on a single processor. The analysis of this
algorithm with regard to speed-up, efficiency, and so forth is left as an exercise. Faster and
more efficient PRAM sorting algorithms will be presented in Chapter 6.
5.3. SEMIGROUP OR FAN-IN COMPUTATION
Semigroup computation was defined in Section 2.1 based on associative binary operator
⊗. This computation is trivial for a CRCW PRAM of the “reduction” variety if the reduction
operator happens to be ⊗ . For example, computing the arithmetic sum (logical AND, logical
XOR) of p values, one per processor, is trivial for the CRCW-S (CRCW-A, CRCW-X)
PRAM; it can be done in a single cycle by each processor writing its corresponding value
into a common location that will then hold the arithmetic sum (logical AND, logical XOR)
of all of the values.
Here too the recursive doubling scheme can be used to do the computation on an EREW
PRAM (much of the computation is in fact the same for all PRAM submodels, with the only
difference appearing in the final broadcasting step). Interestingly, the computation scheme
is virtually identical to that of Fig. 5.2, with the copying operation replaced by a combining
( ⊗ ) operation. Figure 5.4 illustrates the process, where the pair of integers u:v shown in each
memory location represents the combination (e.g., sum) of all input values from X[u] to X [v].
Initially, S[i] holds the ith input X[i], or i:i according to our notation. After the first parallel
combining step involving adjacent elements, each element S[i], except S[0], holds (i – 1):i.
The next step leads to the computation of the sums of 4 adjacent elements, then 8, and
eventually all 10. The final result, which is available in S[p – 1], can then be broadcast to
every processor.
EREW PRAM semigroup computation algorithm
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, copy X [j] into S[j]
s := 1
while s < p Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p – s, do
S[j + s] := S[j] ⊗ S [j + s]
s := 2s
Figure 5.4. Semigroup computation in EREW PRAM.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
97
endwhile
Broadcast S[p – 1] to all processors
The Θ(log p) computation time of the above algorithm is optimal, given that in each machine
cycle, a processor can combine only two values and the semigroup computation requires that
we combine p values to get the result.
When each of the p processors is in charge of n/p elements, rather than just one element,
the semigroup computation is performed by each processor first combining its n/p elements
in n/p steps to get a single value. Then, the algorithm just discussed is used, with the first
step replaced by copying the result of the above into S[j].
It is instructive to evaluate the speed-up and efficiency of the above algorithm for an
n-input semigroup computation using p processors. Because the final broadcasting takes
log 2 p steps, the algorithm requires n/p + 2 log 2 p EREW PRAM steps in all, leading to
a speed-up of n/(n/p + 2 log 2 p) over the sequential version. If the number of processors
is p = Θ (n), a sublinear speed-up of Θ(n/log n) is obtained. The efficiency in this case is
Θ(n/log n)/Θ (n) = Θ (1/log n). On the other hand, if we limit the number of processors to
p = O(n/log n), we will have
Speed-up(n, p) = n/O(log n) = Ω (n/log n) = Ω (p)
Hence, linear or Θ (p) speed-up and Θ(1) efficiency can be achieved by using an appropriately
smaller number p of processors compared with the number n of elements.
The above can be intuitively explained as follows. The semigroup computation is
representable in the form of a binary tree, as shown in Fig. 5.5. When the number of
processors is comparable to the number of leaves in this binary tree, only the first few
computation levels possess enough parallelism to utilize the processors efficiently, with most
of the processors sitting idle, or else doing redundant computations, in all subsequent levels.
On the other hand, when p << n, we achieve perfect speed-up/efficiency near the leaves,
where the bulk of the computation occurs. The inefficiency near the root is not enough to
significantly affect the overall efficiency. The use of parallel slack, i.e., having more
processors than items to be processed, is a recurring theme in parallel processing and is often
a prerequisite for efficient parallel computation.
Figure 5.5. Intuitive justification of why parallel slack helps improve the efficiency.
98
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
5.4. PARALLEL PREFIX COMPUTATION
Just as was the case for a linear array (Section 2.3), parallel prefix computation consists
of the first phase of the semigroup computation. We see in Fig. 5.4 that as we find the
semigroup computation result in S[p – 1], all partial prefixes are also obtained in the previous
elements of S. Figure 5.6 is identical to Fig. 5.4, except that it includes shading to show that
the number of correct prefix results doubles in each step.
The above algorithm is quite efficient, but there are other ways of performing parallel
prefix computation on the PRAM. In particular, the divide-and-conquer paradigm leads to
two other solutions to this problem. In the following, we deal only with the case of a p-input
problem, where p (the number of inputs or processors) is a power of 2. As in Section 5.3, the
pair of integers u:v represents the combination (e.g., sum) of all input values from xu to x v .
Figure 5.7 depicts our first divide-and-conquer algorithm. We view the problem as
composed of two subproblems: computing the odd-indexed results s1 , s 3, s 5 , . . . and
computing the even-indexed results s 0, s2, s4 , . . . .
The first subproblem is solved as follows. Pairs of consecutive elements in the input list
(x0 and x 1 , x2 and x3, x4 and x5 , and so on) are combined to obtain a list of half the size.
Performing parallel prefix computation on this list yields correct values for all odd-indexed
results. The even-indexed results are then found in a single PRAM step by combining each
even-indexed input with the immediately preceding odd-indexed result. Because the initial
combining of pairs and the final computation of the even-indexed results each takes one step,
the total computation time is given by the recurrence
T(p) = T(p/2) + 2
whose solution is T(p) = 2 log 2 p.
Figure 5.8 depicts a second divide-and-conquer algorithm. We view the input list as
composed of two sublists: the even-indexed inputs x0, x2, x 4, . . . and the odd-indexed inputs
x1, x 3 , x 5 , . . . . Parallel prefix computation is performed separately on each sublist, leading
to partial results as shown in Fig. 5.8 (a sequence of digits indicates the combination of
elements with those indices). The final results are obtained by pairwise combination of
adjacent partial results in a single PRAM step. The total computation time is given by the
recurrence
T(p) = T(p/2) + 1
Figure 5.6. Parallel prefix computation in EREW PRAM via recursive doubling.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
99
Figure 5.7. Parallel prefix computation using a divide-and-conquer scheme.
whose solution is T(p) = log 2 p.
Even though this latter algorithm is more efficient than the first divide-and-conquer
scheme, it is applicable only if the operator ⊗ is commutative (why?).
5.5. RANKING THE ELEMENTS OF A LINKED LIST
Our next example computation is important not only because it is a very useful building
block in many applications, but also in view of the fact that it demonstrates how a problem
that seems hopelessly sequential can be efficiently parallelized.
The problem will be presented in terms of a linear linked list of size p, but in practice it
often arises in the context of graphs of the types found in image processing and computer
vision applications. Many graph-theoretic problems deal with (directed) paths between
various pairs of nodes. Such a path essentially consists of a sequence of nodes, each
“pointing” to the next node on the path; thus, a directed path can be viewed as a linear linked
list.
The problem of list ranking can be defined as follows: Given a linear linked list of the
type shown in Fig. 5.9, rank the list elements in terms of the distance from each to the terminal
Figure 5.8. Another divide-and-conquer scheme for parallel prefix computation.
100
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 5.9. Example linked list and the ranks of its elements.
element. The terminal element is thus ranked 0, the one pointing to it 1, and so forth. In a
list of length p, each element’s rank will be a unique integer between 0 and p – 1.
A sequential algorithm for list ranking requires Θ(p) time. Basically, the list must be
traversed once to determine the distance of each element from the head, storing the results
in the linked list itself or in a separate integer vector. This first pass can also yield the length
of the list (six in the example of Fig. 5.9). A second pass, through the list, or the vector of p
intermediate results, then suffices to compute all of the ranks.
The list ranking problem for the example linked list of Fig. 5.9 may be approached with
the PRAM input and output data structures depicted in Fig. 5.10. The info and next vectors
are given, as is the head pointer (in our example, head = 2). The rank vector must be filled
with the unique element ranks at the termination of the algorithm.
The parallel solution method for this problem is known as pointer jumping: Repeatedly
make each element point to the successor of its successor (i.e., make the pointer jump over
the current successor) until all elements end up pointing to the terminal node, keeping track
of the number of list elements that have been skipped over. If the original list is not to be
modified, a copy can be made in the PRAM’s shared memory in constant time before the
algorithm is applied.
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, will be responsible for computing rank [j]. The invariant of the list
ranking algorithm given below is that initially and after each iteration, the partial computed
rank of each element is the difference between its rank and the rank of its successor. With
the difference between the rank of a list element and the rank of its successor available, the
rank of an element can be determined as soon as the rank of its successor becomes known.
Again, a doubling process takes place. Initially, only the rank of the terminal element (the
only node that points to itself) is known. In successive iterations of the algorithm, the ranks
Figure 5.10. PRAM data structures representing a linked list and the ranking results.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
101
of two elements, then four elements, then eight elements, and so forth become known until
the ranks of all elements have been determined.
PRAM list ranking algorithm (via pointer jumping)
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, do {initialize the partial ranks}
if next[j ] = j
then rank[j] := 0
else rank[j] := 1
endif
while rank[next[head]] ≠ 0 Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, do
rank[j] := rank [j] + rank [next[j]]
next[j] := next [next[j]]
endwhile
Figure 5.11 shows the intermediate values in the vectors rank (numbers within boxes)
and next (arrows) as the above list ranking algorithm is applied to the example list of Fig.
5.9. Because the number of elements that are skipped doubles with each iteration, the number
of iterations, and thus the running time of the algorithm, is logarithmic in p.
List-ranking appears to be hopelessly sequential, as no access to list elements is possible
without traversing all previous elements. However, the list ranking algorithm presented
above shows that we can in fact use a recursive doubling scheme to determine the rank of
each element in optimal time. The problems at the end of the chapter contain other examples
of computations on lists that can be performed just as efficiently. This is why intuition can
be misleading when it comes to determining which computations are or are not efficiently
parallelizable (formally, whether a computation is or is not in NC).
Figure 5.11. Element ranks initially and after each of the three iterations.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
102
5.6.
MATRIX
MULTIPLICATION
In this section, we discuss PRAM matrix multiplication algorithms as representative
examples of the class of numerical problems. Matrix multiplication is quite important in its
own right and is also used as a building block in many other parallel algorithms. For example,
we will see in Section 11.5 that matrix multiplication is useful in solving graph problems
when the graphs are represented by their adjacency or weight matrices.
Given m × m matrices A and B, with elements a i j and b ij,, their product C is defined as
The following O(m³)-step sequential algorithm can be used for multiplying m × m matrices:
Sequential matrix multiplication algorithm
for i = 0 to m – 1 do
for j = 0 to m – 1 do
t := 0
for k = 0 to m – 1 do
t := t + aik bk j
endfor
ci j := t
endfor
endfor
If the PRAM has p = m³ processors, then matrix multiplication can be done in Θ (log m) time
by using one processor to compute each product aikb k j and then allowing groups of m
processors to perform m -input summations (semigroup computation) in Θ (log m) time.
Because we are usually not interested in parallel processing for matrix multiplication unless
m is fairly large, this is not a practical solution.
Now assume that the PRAM has p = m² processors. In this case, matrix multiplication
can be done in Θ (m) time by using one processor to compute each element c i j of the product
matrix C. The processor responsible for computing ci j reads the elements of Row i in A and
the elements of Column j in B, multiplies their corresponding kth elements, and adds each
of the products thus obtained to a running total t. This amounts to parallelizing the i and j
loops in the sequential algorithm (Fig. 5.12). For simplicity, we label the m² processors with
Figure 5.12. PRAM matrix multiplication by using p = m ² processors.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
103
two indices (i, j), each ranging from 0 to m – 1, rather than with a single index ranging from
0 to m² – 1.
PRAM matrix multiplication algorithm using m² processors
Processor (i, j), 0 ≤ i, j < m, do
begin
t := 0
for k = 0 to m – 1 do
t := t + a ikb kj
endfor
cij := t
end
Because multiple processors will be reading the same row of A or the same column of B, the
above naive implementation of the algorithm would require the CREW submodel. For
example, in a given iteration of the k loop, all processors (i, y), 0 ≤ y < m, access the same
element aik of A and all processors (x, j) access the same element b jk of B. However, it is
possible to convert the algorithm to an EREW PRAM algorithm by skewing the memory
accesses (how?).
Next, assume that the PRAM has p = m processors. In this case, matrix multiplication
can be done in Θ(m²) time by using Processor i to compute the m elements in Row i of the
product matrix C in turn. Thus, Processor i will read the elements of Row i in A and the
elements of all columns in B, multiply their corresponding kth elements, and add each of the
products thus obtained to a running total t. This amounts to parallelizing the i loop in the
sequential algorithm.
PRAM matrix multiplication algorithm using m processors
for j = 0 to m – 1 Processor i, 0 ≤ i < m, do
t := 0
for k = 0 to m – 1 do
t := t + a ik b kj
endfor
cij := t
endfor
Because each processor reads a different row of the matrix A, no concurrent reads from A
are ever attempted. For matrix B, however, all m processors access the same element bk j a t
the same time. Again, one can skew the memory accesses for B in such a way that the EREW
submodel is applicable. Note that for both p = m² and p = m processors, we have efficient
algorithms with linear speed-ups.
In many practical situations, the number of processors is even less than m. So we need
to develop an algorithm for this case as well. We can let Processor i compute a set of m/p
rows in the result matrix C; say Rows i, i + p, i + 2 p, . . . , i + (m/p – 1)p. Again, we are
parallelizing the i loop as this is preferable to parallelizing the k loop (which has data
dependencies) or the j loop (which would imply m synchronizations of the processors, once
104
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
at the end of each i iteration, assuming the SPMD model). On a lightly loaded Sequent
Symmetry shared-memory multiprocessor, this last algorithm exhibits almost linear speedup, with the speed-up of about 22 observed for 24 processors when multiplying two 256 ×
256 floating-point matrices [Quin94]. This is typical of what can be achieved on UMA
multiprocessors with our simple parallel algorithm. Recall that the UMA (uniform memory
access) property implies that any memory location is accessible with the same amount of
delay.
The drawback of the above algorithm for NUMA (nonuniform memory access) sharedmemory multiprocessors is that each element of B is fetched m/p times, with only two
arithmetic operations (one multiplication and one addition) performed for each such element.
Block matrix multiplication, discussed next, increases the computation to memory access
ratio, thus improving the performance for NUMA multiprocessors.
Let us divide the m × m matrices A, B, and C into p blocks of size q × q, as shown in
Fig. 5.13, where
We can then multiply the m × m matrices by using
matrix
multiplication with
processors, where the terms in the algorithm statement t := t +
a ikbk j are now q × q matrices and Processor ( i, j) computes Block (i, j) of the result matrix
C. Thus, the algorithm is similar to our second algorithm above, with the statement t := t +
a ikbk j replaced by a sequential q × q matrix multiplication algorithm.
Each multiply–add computation on q × q blocks needs 2 q²= 2m²/p memory accesses
to read the blocks and 2q³ arithmetic operations. So q arithmetic operations are performed
for each memory access and better performance will be achieved as a result of improved
locality. The assumption here is that Processor (i, j) has sufficient local memory to hold Block
(i, j) of the result matrix C (q² elements) and one block-row of the matrix B; say the q elements
in Row kq + c of Block (k, j) of B. Elements of A can be brought in one at a time. For example,
as element in Row iq + a of Column kq + c in Block (i, k) of A is brought in, it is multiplied
in turn by the locally stored q elements of B, and the results added to the appropriate q
elements of C (Fig. 5.14).
Figure 5.13. Partitioning the matrices for block matrix multiplication.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
105
Figure 5.14. How Processor ( i, j) operates on an element of A and one block-row of B to update
one block-row of C.
On the Cm* NUMA-type shared-memory multiprocessor, a research prototype machine
built at Carnegie-Mellon University in the 1980s, this block matrix multiplication algorithm
exhibited good, but sublinear, speed-up. With 16 processors, the speed-up was only 5 in
multiplying 24 × 24 matrices. However, the speed-up improved to about 9 (11) when larger
36 × 36 (48 × 48) matrices were multiplied [Quin94].
It is interesting to note that improved locality of the block matrix multiplication
algorithm can also improve the running time on a uniprocessor, or distributed shared-memory
multiprocessor with caches, in view of higher cache hit rates.
PROBLEMS
5.1.
Ordering of CRCW PRAM submodels
Complete the ordering relationships between the various CRCW PRAM submodels briefly
discussed in Section 5.1, i.e., place the remaining submodels in the linear order. If you cannot
provide formal proofs, try to guess where the missing submodels belong and describe the
intuition behind your guess.
5.2.
The power of various PRAM submodels
State and prove a result similar to Theorem 5.1 for the CRCW-M (max/min) and CRCW-S
(summation) PRAM submodels (and more generally for the reduction submodel, where the
reduction operation is a semigroup computation).
106
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
5.3. Broadcasting on a PRAM
a . Find the speed-up, efficiency, and the various other measures defined in Section 1.6 for
each of the PRAM broadcasting algorithms presented in Section 5.2.
b. Show how two separate broadcasts, by Processors i0 and i1 , can be completed in only one
or two extra EREW PRAM steps compared with a single broadcast.
c . Can you do p-way broadcasting through a broadcast vector B of length p/2?
d. Modify the broadcasting algorithms such that a processor that obtains the value broadcast
by Processor i keeps it in a register and does not have to read it from the memory each
time.
5.4. Naive sorting on a PRAM
Find the speed-up, efficiency, and the various other measures defined in Section 1.6 for the
naive PRAM sorting algorithm presented in Section 5.2.
b. Present a more efficient sorting algorithm when the elements of the list to be sorted are
two-valued (e.g., each is 0 or 1).
c. Generalize the method proposed in part (b) to the case when the inputs are d-valued and
indicate when the resulting algorithm would be faster than the naive algorithm.
a.
5.5.
Semigroup computation on a PRAM
In order to avoid the final broadcasting phase, which essentially doubles the execution time of
the semigroup computation algorithm in the EREW PRAM, it has been suggested that we
replace the indices i + s in the algorithm with i + s mod p (i.e., allow the computations to wrap
around). Under what conditions would this method yield correct results in all processors?
5.6.
Parallel prefix computation on a PRAM
For each of the PRAM parallel prefix algorithms presented in Section 5.4:
a. Determine the speed-up, efficiency, and the various other measures defined in Section 1.6.
b. Extend the algorithm to the case of n inputs, where n > p.
c. Repeat part (a) for the extended algorithms of part (b).
5.7.
Parallel prefix on a PRAM
Show that a p-processor PRAM needs at least 2n/(p + 1) steps for an n-input parallel prefix
computation, where n = mp(p + 1)/2 + 1 and m ≥ 1 [Wang96].
5.8.
Parallel prefix computation on a PRAM
a.
b.
c.
Modify the algorithms given in Section 5.4 so that they perform the diminished parallel
prefix computation; the ith element of the result is obtained from combining all elements
up to i–1.
Develop a PRAM algorithm for an incomplete parallel prefix computation involving p or
fewer elements in the input vector X[0:p – 1]. In this variant, some elements of X may be
marked as being invalid and the ith prefix result is defined as the combination of all valid
elements up to the ith entry.
Develop a PRAM algorithm for a partitioned parallel prefix computation defined as
follows. The input X consists of p elements. A partition vector Y is also given whose
elements are Boolean values, with Y[i] = 1 indicating that the X[i] is the first element of a
new partition. Parallel prefix computation must be performed independently in each
partition, so that the kth result in a partition is obtained by combining the first k elements
in that partition. Hint: Convert the problem to an ordinary parallel prefix computation by
defining a binary operator for which each operand is a pair of values from X and Y.
PRAM AND BASIC ALGORITHMS
107
d. Extend the algorithm of part (c) so that its input size is n rather than p (n > p ).
5.9.
5.10.
List-ranking on a PRAM
Modify the list ranking algorithm of Section 5.5 so that it works with a circular list. The head
pointer points to an arbitrary list element and the rank of an element is defined as the distance
from head to that element (so the head element itself has a rank of 1, its successor has a rank
of 2, and so on).
List-ranking on a PRAM
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.11.
Show that the CREW submodel is implicit in the list ranking algorithm of Section 5.5.
Modify the algorithm so that it uses the EREW PRAM submodel.
Extend the algorithm so that it ranks a list of size n, with n > p.
Suppose that the info part of a linked list (see Fig. 5.10) is a value from a set S on which
an associative binary operator ⊗ has been defined. Develop an algorithm for parallel prefix
computation that fills a value vector with the prefix computation result on all elements of
the list from the head element up to the current element.
Maximum-sum-subsequence problem
Given a vector composed of n signed numbers, we would like to identify the indices u and v
such that the sum of all vector elements from element u to element v is the largest possible.
a. Develop a sequential algorithm for this problem that has linear running time.
b. Develop an efficient EREW PRAM algorithm for this problem.
5.12. Matrix multiplication
Our first parallel matrix multiplication algorithm in Section 5.6 used p = m ³ processors and
achieved Θ (log m) running time. Show how the same asymptotic running time can be obtained
with a factor of log m fewer processors.
5.13.
Vector operations on a PRAM
Devise PRAM algorithms for the following operations on m-vectors using p (p < m) processors:
a. Inner product of two vectors.
b. Convolution of two vectors.
5.14. Matrix multiplication
Based on what you learned about matrix–matrix multiplication in Section 5.6, devise efficient
PRAM algorithms for the following:
a . Matrix–vector multiplication.
b. Multiplication of large nonsquare matrices.
c. Raising a square matrix to a given integer power.
5.15.
The all-pairs-shortest-path problem on a PRAM
An n-node weighted directed graph can be represented by an n × n matrix W , with W [i, j ]
denoting the weight associated with the edge connecting Node i to Node j. The matrix element
will be ∞ if no such edge exists. Elements of W can be interpreted as the length of the shortest
path between Nodes i and j, where the number of edges in the path is restricted to be ≤ 1.
a. Show that W ² represents the length of the shortest path with ≤ 2 edges, if “matrix
multiplication” is done by using “min” instead of addition and “+” instead of multiplication.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
108
b.
Using the result of part (a), develop an efficient PRAM algorithm for finding the lengths
of the shortest paths between all node pairs in the graph. Hint: What do W 4 , W 8 , . . .
represent?
5.16. Maximum-finding on CRCW PRAM
Consider the problem of finding the maximum of p numbers on a p-processor CRCW PRAM.
Show that this can be done in sublogarithmic time using the following scheme. Divide the p
numbers and processors into p/3 groups of size 3. Select the maximum number in each group
in constant time, thus reducing the problem to that of determining the maximum of p/3 numbers
using p processors. Next, use groups of 21 processors to determine the maximum values in
groups of 7 numbers in constant time. Show how the process continues, what rule is used by
a processor to determine the numbers it will process in a given phase, how many phases are
needed, and which CRCW submodel(s) must be assumed.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Ak197]
[Fort78]
[JaJa92]
[Kron96]
[Quin94]
[Reid93]
[Wang96]
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Fortune, S., and J. Wyllie, “Parallelism in Random Access Machines,” Proc. 10th Annual ACM Symp.
Theory of Computing, 1978, pp. 114–118.
JaJa, J., An Introduction to Parallel Algorithms, Addison–Wesley, 1992.
Kronsjo, L. I., “PRAM Models,” Chapter 6 in Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook, edited
by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp. 163–191.
Quinn, M. J., Parallel Computing: Theory and Practice, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
Reid-Miller, M., G. L. Miller, and F. Modugno, “List Ranking and Parallel Tree Contraction,” Chapter
3 in Synthesis of Parallel Algorithms, edited by J. H. Reif, Morgan Kaufmann, 1993, pp. 115–194.
Wang, H., A. Nicolau, and K.-Y. S. Siu, “The Strict Time Lower Bound and Optimal Schedules for
Parallel Prefix with Resource Constraints,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 45, No. 11, pp. 1257– 1271,
November 1996.
6
More
Shared-Memory
Algorithms
In this chapter, following the same notation and basic methods introduced in
Chapter 5, we develop PRAM algorithms for several additional problems. These
problems are somewhat more complex than the building-block computations of
Chapter 5, to the extent that the reader may not know efficient sequential
algorithms for the problems that would allow one to obtain the PRAM version
by simply parallelizing the sequential algorithm or to deduce the speed-up
achieved by the parallel version. For this reason, some background material is
provided in each case and a separate section (Section 6.1) is devoted to the
sequential version of the first algorithm, complete with its analysis. Chapter
topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.1. Sequential rank-based selection
6.2. A parallel selection algorithm
6.3. A selection-based sorting algorithm
6.4. Alternative sorting algorithms
6.5. Convex hull of a 2D point set
6.6. Some implementation aspects
109
This page intentionally left blank.
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
111
6.1. SEQUENTIAL RANK-BASED SELECTION
Rank-based selection is the problem of finding a (the) kth smallest element in a sequence
S = x 0 , x 1 , . . . , x n -1 whose elements belong to a linear order. Median, maximum, and
minimum finding are special cases of this general problem. Clearly the (rank-based) selection
problem can be solved through sorting: Sort the sequence in nondescending order and output
the kth element (with index k – 1, if 0-origin indexing is used) of the sorted list. However,
this is wasteful in view of the fact that any sorting algorithm requires Ω (n log n) time, whereas
O(n)-time selection algorithms are available. The following is an example of a recursive
linear-time selection algorithm.
Sequential rank-based selection algorithm select(S, k )
if |S |< q { q is a small constant}
then sort S and return the kth smallest element of S
else divide S into |S | /q subsequences of size q
Sort each subsequence and find its median
Let the |S|/q medians form the sequence T
endif
2. m = select(T, |T |/2){find the median m of the |S | /q medians}
3. Create 3 subsequences
L: Elements of S that are < m
E: Elements of S that are = m
G: Elements of S that are > m
4. if |L| ≥ k
then return select(L, k)
else if |L| + |E| ≥ k
then return m
else return select(G, k – |L| – |E|)
endif
1.
An analysis of the above selection algorithm follows. If S is small, then its median is
found through sorting in Step 1 (the size threshold constant q will be defined later). This
requires constant time, say c 0 . Otherwise, we divide the list into a number of subsequences
of length q, sort each subsequence to find its median, and put the medians together into a list
T . These operations require linear time in |S|, say c 1 |S| time. Step 2 of the algorithm that finds
the median of the medians constitutes a smaller, |S |/q-input, selection problem. Given the
median m of the medians, Step 3 of the algorithm takes linear time in |S |, say c3 |S|, as it
involves scanning the entire list, comparing each element to m, and putting it in one of three
output lists according to the comparison result. Finally, Step 4 is another smaller selection
problem. We will show that the size of this selection problem is 3|S |/4 in the worst case.
Assuming that this claim is true, the running time of the above selection algorithm is
characterized by the recurrence
T(n) = T (n/q) + T (3n/4) + cn
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
112
where the term cn represents an amalgamation of all linear-order terms discussed above. This
recurrence has a linear solution for any q > 4. For example, let the linear solution be T (n) =
dn for q = 5. Plugging into the recurrence, we get
dn = dn/5 + 3dn/4 + cn
The above leads to d = 20c and T(n) = 20cn. Choosing a larger value for the threshold
q leads to a multiplicative factor that is smaller than 20 but at the same time increases the
value of c, so an optimal choice may exist for q.
All that is left to complete our analysis of the selection algorithm is to justify the term
T(3n/4) in the above recurrence. The reason that the selection problem in Step 4 of the
algorithm involves no more than 3n/4 inputs is as follows. The median m of the n/q medians
is no smaller (no larger) than at least half, or (n/q)/2, of the medians, each of which is in turn
no smaller (no larger) than q/2 elements of the original input list S. Thus, m is guaranteed to
be no smaller (no larger) than at least ((n/q)/2) × q/2 = n/4 elements of the input list S.
The following example shows the application of the above sequential selection algorithm to an input list of size n = 25 using q = 5.
n/q sublists of q elements
S
6
4
5
6
7
1 5 3
6
T
8
1
2
0
3 4 5
6
3
3
m
2 1 7 1
4 5 4 9 5
2
5
3
1 2 1 0 2 1 1
3 3
L
E
|L| = 7
6 4 5 6 7 5 8 4 5 6 7 4 5 4 9 5
G
|E| = 2
|G| = 16
To find the 5th smallest element in S, select the 5th smallest element in L (| L| ≥ 5) as follows
1
S
2
1
0
2
1
1
1
T
1
1
m
1
0
1
L
1
1
2
E
2
G
leading to the answer 1, because in the second iteration, |L | < 5 and |L| + |E| ≥ 5. The 9th
smallest element of S is 3 (|L | + |E| ≥ 9). Finally, the 13th smallest element of S is found by
selecting the 4th smallest element in G (4 = 13 – |L | – |E|):
S
6
4
5
6
7
5
8
4
6
T
5
6
7
4
5
4
9
5
5
5
5
m
5
4
4
4
4
5
L
The preceding leads to the answer 4.
5
5
E
5
5
6
6
7
8
G
6
7
9
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
113
6.2. A PARALLEL SELECTION ALGORITHM
If a parallel computation model supports fast sorting, then the n-input parallel selection
problem can be solved through sorting. This is the case, e.g., for the CRCW PRAM-S or
“summation” submodel with p = n² processors as shown below. We will see in Chapter 9
that the more realistic 2D mesh model also supports fast sorting relative to its diameter-based
lower bound.
In the CRCW PRAM-S model, let us number each of the p = n ² processors by an index
pair (i, j), with 0 ≥ i, j < n. Processor ( i, j) compares inputs S[i] and S[j] and writes a 1 into
the memory location rank[j] if S[i] < S[j] or if S[i] = S[j] and i < j. Because of the summation
feature on concurrent writes, after this single-cycle operation, rank[j] will hold the rank or
index of S[j] in the sorted list. In the second cycle, Processor (0, j), 0 ≤ j < n , reads S[j] and
writes it into S [rank[j]]. The selection process is completed in a third cycle when all
processors read S[k – 1], the kth smallest element in S.
It is difficult to imagine a faster selection algorithm. Unfortunately, however, this fast
three-step algorithm is quite impractical: It uses both a large number of processors and a very
strong PRAM submodel. One might say that this algorithm holds the record for the most
impractical parallel algorithm described in this book!
Now, coming down to earth, the selection algorithm described in Section 6.1 can be
parallelized to obtain a p-processor PRAMselect algorithm for selecting the kth smallest value
in a list S of size n. List T of size n is used as working storage, in addition to L, E, and G, as
discussed for the sequential selection algorithm in Section 6.1.
Parallel rank-based selection algorithm PRAMselect(S, k, p)
1.
if |S | < 4
then sort S and return the kth smallest element of S
else broadcast |S| to all p processors
divide S into p subsequences S ( j ) of size |S | /p
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, compute the median T j : = select (S (j) , |S ( j ) |/2)
endif
2. m = PRAMselect (T, |T |/2, p)
{find the median of the medians in parallel}
3. Broadcast m to all processors and create 3 subsequences
L: Elements of S that are < m
E: Elements of S that are = m
G: Elements of S that are > m
4. if |L| ≥ k
then return PRAMselect (L, k, p)
else if |L| + |E| ≥ k
then return m
else return PRAMselect (G, k – |L | – |E|, p)
endif
Note that the parallel algorithm PRAMselect is quite similar in appearance, and underlying
concepts, to the sequential algorithm select presented in Section 6.1. This familiarity of the
shared-memory programming model is one of its key advantages. Figuring out the reason
behind the choice of the constant 4 in Step 1 of PRAMselect is left as an exercise.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
114
To analyze the PRAMselect algorithm, we assume that the number p of processors is
sublinear in the number n of elements in the input list; namely, p = n 1 – x , where x is a parameter
that is known a priori. For example, x = 1/2 corresponds to p =
processors being applied
to the solution of an n-input problem.
Step 1 of the algorithm involves broadcasting, which needs O(log p) = O(log n) time,
dividing into sublists, which is done in constant time by each processor independently
computing the beginning and end of its associated sublist based on | S| and x, and sequential
selection on each sublist of length n/p, which needs O(n/p) = O(n x ) time. Step 3 can be done
as follows. First, each processor counts the number of elements that it should place in each
of the lists L , E , and G in O(n/p) = O(n x ) time. Then, three diminished parallel prefix
computations are performed to determine the number of elements to be placed on each list
by all processors with indices that are smaller than i. Finally, the actual placement takes O(n x )
time, with each processor independently writing into the lists L, E , and G using the
diminished prefix computation result as the starting address. Noting that logarithmic terms
are negligible compared with O(n x ) terms and using the knowledge that the parallel selection
algorithm in Step 4 will have no more than 3n/4 inputs, the running time of PRAMselect
algorithm for p = n 1–x can be characterized by the following recurrence, which is easily
verified to have the solution T(n, p) = O(n x );
T(n, p) = T(n 1–x , p) + T(3n/4, p) + cn x
The PRAMselect algorithm is quite efficient:
Speed-up (n, p) = Θ (n)/O(n x ) = Ω (n 1- x ) = Ω(p)
Efficiency
= Speed-up / p = Ω (1)
= pT(n, p) = Θ (n 1 -x )O(n x ) = O(n)
Work (n, p)
The above asymptotic analysis is valid for any x > 0. What if x = 0, i.e., we use p = n processors
for an n-input selection problem? Does the above analysis imply that in this case, we have
a constant-time selection algorithm? The answer is negative. Recall that in the asymptotic
analysis, we ignored several O(log n) terms in comparison with O(n x ) terms. If O(n x ) = O(1),
then the logarithmic terms dominate and the recurrence would have an O(log n) solution.
One positive property of PRAMselect is that it is adaptable to any number of processors
and yields linear speed-up in each case, provided that p < n. This is a desirable property in
a parallel algorithm, as we do not have to adjust the algorithm for running it on different
hardware configurations. It is self-adjusting. Even if the number of processors in the target
machine is known a priori, it is still the case that the number available to the algorithm may
vary, either because the algorithm must share the machine with other running programs (a
machine partition is assigned to it) or because of dynamic variations caused by processor
failures.
6.3. A SELECTION-BASED SORTING ALGORITHM
Here is one way to sort a list of size n via divide and conquer. First identify the k – 1
elements that would occupy positions n/k, 2n/k, 3n/k, . . . , (k – 1)n/k in the sorted list, for
a suitably chosen small constant k. Call the values of these elements m 1 , m 2 , m 3 , . . . , m k–1 ,
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
115
Figure 6.1. Partitioning of the sorted list for selection-based sorting.
and define m 0 = –∞ and mk = +∞ for convenience (see Fig. 6.1). Now, if the above k – 1
elements are put in their proper places in the sorted list and all other elements are moved so
that any element that is physically located between m i and m i + 1 in the list has a value in the
interval [m i , m i+1 ], the sorting task can be completed by independently sorting each of the k
sublists of size n/k.
The assumptions here are quite similar to those for the parallel selection algorithm in
Section 6.2. We have p < n processors for sorting a list of size n, with p = n 1 –x . Because x is
known a priori, we can choose k = 2 1 /x as our partitioning constant. The algorithm thus begins
by finding m i , the (in/k)th smallest element in the sorted list, 0 < i < k, and proceeds as
discussed above.
Parallel selection-based sorting algorithm PRAMselectionsort(S, p)
1.
2.
if |S| < k then return quicksort (S)
for i = 1 to k – 1 do
m i := PRAMselect (S, i |S|/k, p)
{for notational convenience, let m o := –∞ ; m k := + ∞}
endfor
3. for i = 0 to k – 1 do
make the sublist T (i) from elements of S that are between m i and m i+1
endfor
4. for i = 1 to k /2 do in parallel
PRAMselectionsort (T (i) , 2p/k)
{p/(k/2) processors are used for each of the k/2 subproblems}
endfor
5. for i = k/2 + 1 to k do in parallel
PRAMselectionsort (T (i), 2p/k)
endfor
The analysis of complexity for the PRAMselectionsort algorithm is as follows. Step 1
takes constant time. Step 2 consists of k separate and sequentially solved parallel selection
problems with n inputs using n 1–x processors. From the analysis of Section 6.2, because k is
a constant, the total time for Step 2 is O(n x ). In Step 3, each processor compares its n x values
with the k – 1 threshold values and counts how many elements it will contribute to each of
the k partitions. Then, k diminished parallel prefix computations, each taking O(log p ) =
O(log n) time, are performed to obtain the starting index for each processor to store the
elements that it contributes to each partition. The last part of Step 3 involves a processor
writing its n x elements to the various partitions. Thus, Step 3 takes a total of O( n x ) time.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
116
In Steps 4 and 5, the PRAMselectionsort algorithm is recursively called. The running
time of the algorithm is thus characterized by the recurrence
T(n, p) = 2T(n/k, 2p/k) + cn x
which has the solution T(n, p) = O(n x log n). The above recurrence also gives us a clue as to
why all of the k subproblems cannot be handled in Step 4 at once: Our algorithm assumes
the availability of p = n 1 –x processors for n inputs. Thus, to solve each of the subproblems
with n/k = n/2 1 /x inputs, the number of processors needed is
(number of inputs) 1 –x = (n/2 1 /x) 1
–x
= n 1-x /2 1 /x –1 = p/(k/2)
Thus, the number p of processors is adequate for solving k/2 of the subproblems concurrently,
giving rise to the need for two recursive steps to solve all k subproblems.
It is straightforward to establish the asymptotic optimality of PRAMselectionsort among
comparison-based sorting algorithms, keeping in mind that any sequential sorting algorithm
requires Ω (n log n) comparisons:
Speed-up(n, p )
= Ω (n log n) / O(n x log n) = Ω (n 1 -x ) = Ω (p)
Efficiency
= Speed-up / p = Ω (1)
Work(n, p)
= pT(n, p) = Θ (n 1 –x ) O(n x log n) = O(n log n)
As in the case of our PRAMselect algorithm in Section 6.2, the above asymptotic analysis is
valid for any x > 0 but not for x = 0, i.e., PRAMselectionsort does not allow us to sort p keys
using p processors in optimal O(log p) time. Furthermore, even in the case of p < n , the time
complexity may involve large constant multiplicative factors. In most cases, the algorithms
discussed in Section 6.4 might prove more practical.
Consider the following example of how PRAMselectionsort works on an input list with
|S| = 25 elements, using p = 5 processors (thus, x = 1/2 and k = 2 1/x = 4).
S:6456715382103456217045495
The threshold values needed for partitioning the list into k = 4 sublists are determined as
follows:
m0 = –∞
n/k = 25/4 ≈ 6
m 1 = PRAMselect ( S, 6, 5) = 2
2n/k = 50/4 ≈ 13
m 2 = PRAMselect (S, 13, 5) = 4
3n/k = 75/4 ≈ 19
m3 = PRAMselect (S, 19, 5) = 6
m4 = + ∞
After these elements are placed in their respective positions, the working list T looks as
follows, with the partition boundaries also shown for clarity:
T : - - - - - 2|- - - - - - 4|- - - - - 6|- - - - - -
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
117
Once all other 22 elements are placed in their respective partitions and the four partitions
independently sorted, the sorted list T results:
T : 0 0 1 l 1 2|2 3 3 4 4 4 4|5 5 5 5 5 6|6 6 7 7 8 9
Note that for elements that are equal to one of the comparison thresholds, the proper place
may be to the left or right of that value. The algorithm as described above, may not work
properly if the input list contains repeated values. It is possible to modify the algorithm so
that such repeated values are handled properly, but this would lead to higher algorithm
complexity.
6.4. ALTERNATIVE SORTING ALGORITHMS
Much of the complexity of the parallel sorting algorithm described in Section 6.3 is
related to our insistence that the k subproblems resulting at the end be exactly of the same
size, thus allowing us to establish an optimal upper bound on the worst-case running time.
There exist many useful algorithms that are quite efficient on the average but that exhibit
poor worst-case behavior. Sequential quicksort is a prime example that runs in order n log n
time in most cases but can take on the order of n² time for worst-case input patterns.
In the case of our selection-based sorting algorithm, if the comparison thresholds are
picked such that their ranks in the sorted list are approximately, rather than exactly, equal to
in/k, the same process can be applied for the rest of the algorithm, the only difference being
that the resulting k subproblems will be of roughly the same size (in a probabilistic sense).
Given a large list S of inputs, a random sample of the elements can be used to establish
the k comparison thresholds. In fact, it would be easier if we pick k = p, so that each of the
resulting subproblems is handled by a single processor. Recall that this sorting algorithm
was used as an example in our discussion of randomization methods in Section 3.5. Below
is the resulting algorithm assuming
Parallel randomized sorting algorithm PRAMrandomsort(S, p)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, pick  S /p² random samples of its  S /p elements
and store them in its corresponding section of a list T of length  S /p
Processor 0 sort the list T
{the comparison threshold mi is the (i S /p²)th element of T}
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, store its elements that are between mi and m i +1 into the sublist
T (i)
Processor j, 0 ≤ j < p, sort the sublist T ( j )
The analysis of complexity for the above algorithm (in the average case) is left as an exercise.
The next sorting algorithm that we will discuss is parallel radixsort. In the binary version
of radixsort, we examine every bit of the k-bit keys in turn, starting from the least-significant
bit (LSB). In Step i, bit i is examined, 0 ≤ i < k. All records with keys having a 0 in bit position
i are shifted toward the beginning and keys with 1 toward the end of the list, keeping the
relative order of records with the same bit value in the current position unchanged (this is
sometimes referred to as stable sorting). Here is an example of how radixsort works (key
values are followed by their binary representations in parentheses):
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSlNG
118
Input list
5
7
3
1
4
2
7
2
(101)
(111)
(011)
(001)
(100)
(010)
(111)
(010)
Sort by LSB
Sort by middle bit
Sort by MSB
4 (100)
2 (010)
2 (010)
4 (100)
5 (101)
1 (001)
1 (001)
2 (010)
2 (010)
5 (101)
7 (111)
3 (011)
1 (001)
7 (111)
2
2
7
3
7
3 (011)
4 (100)
5 (101)
7 (111)
7 (111)
(010)
(010)
(111)
(011)
(111)
It remains to be shown that the required data movements (upward and downward shifting)
in each of the k steps can be done efficiently in parallel. Let us focus on the data movements
associated with Bit 0. The new position of each record in the shifted list can be established
by two prefix sum computations: a diminished prefix sum computation on the complement
of Bit 0 to establish the new locations of records with 0 in bit position 0 and a normal prefix
sum computation on Bit 0 to determine the location for each record with 1 in bit position 0
relative to the last record of the first category (2 in the following example).
Input list
5 (101)
7 (111)
3 (011)
1
4
2
7
2
(001)
(100)
(010)
(111)
(010)
Compl't of Bit 0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Diminished
prefix sums
—
—
—
—
0
1
—
2
Bit 0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
Prefix sums
plus 2
1
2
3
4
+2=
+2=
+2=
+2=
—
—
5+2=
—
3
4
5
6
7
Shifted list
4
2
2
5
7
(100)
(010)
(010)
(101)
(111)
3 (011)
1 (001)
7 (111)
Thus, the running time of the parallel radixsort algorithm consists mainly of the time needed
to perform 2k parallel prefix computations, where k is the key length in bits. For k a constant,
the running time is asymptotically O(log p) for sorting a list of size p using p processors.
6.5. CONVEX HULL OF A 2D POINT SET
The 2D convex hull algorithm presented in this section is a representative example of
geometric problems that are encountered in image processing and computer vision applications. It is also an excellent case study of multiway divide and conquer. The convex hull
problem for a 2D point set is defined as follows: Given a point set Q of size n on the Euclidean
plane, with the points specified by their (x, y) coordinates, find the smallest convex polygon
that encloses all n points. The inputs can be assumed to be in the form of two n-vectors X
and Y. The desired output is a list of points belonging to the convex hall starting from an
arbitrary point and proceeding, say, in clockwise order. The output list has a size of at most
n. As an example, for the point set shown in Fig. 6.2, the convex hull may be represented by
the list 0, 1, 7, 11, 15, 14, 8, 2.
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
119
Figure 6.2. Defining the convex hull problem.
The following properties of the convex hull allow us to construct an efficient PRAM
parallel algorithm ([Ak193], p. 28):
Property 1. Let q i and q j be consecutive points of CH(Q). View q i as the origin of
coordinates. The line from qj to qi forms a smaller angle with the positive (or negative) x axis
than the line from qj to any other q k in the point set Q. Figure 6.3 illustrates this property.
Property 2. A segment (q i, q j) is an edge of CH(Q ) iff all of the remaining n – 2 points
fall to the same side of it. Again, Fig. 6.3 illustrates this property.
The following algorithm finds the convex hull CH(Q) of a 2D point set of size p on a
p-processor CRCW PRAM.
Parallel convex hull algorithm PRAMconvexhull(S, p)
1. Sort the point set by the x coordinates
subsets Q (i) of size
2. Divide the sorted list into
3. Find the convex hull of each subset Q (i) by assigning
processors to it
convex hulls CH(Q (i ) ) into the overall hull CH(Q )
4. Merge the
Figure 6.4 shows an example with a 16-element sorted point set (p = 16), the four subsets,
and the four partial convex hulls. Step 4 is the heart of the algorithm and is described next.
Note that the convex hull of Q can be divided into the upper hull, which goes from the
point with the smallest x coordinate to the one with the largest x coordinate, and the lower
Fig. 6.3. Illustrating the properties of the convex hull.
120
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 6.4. Multiway divide and conquer for the convex hull problem.
hull, which returns from the latter to the former. We will only show how the upper hull of Q
is derived (the part from q 0 to q 15 in the example of Fig. 6.2).
processors to determine the upper tangent
is assigned
Each point subset of size
line between its hull and each of the other
hulls. One processor finds each tangent in
O(log p) steps using an algorithm of Overmars and van Leeuwen [Over81]. The algorithm
resembles binary search. To determine the upper tangent from CH(Q(i) ) to CH (Q (k) ), the
midpoint of the upper part of CH(Q( k) ) is taken and the slopes for its adjacent points compared
with its own slope. If the slope is minimum, then we have found the tangent point. Otherwise,
the search is restricted to one or the other half. Because multiple processors associated with
various partial convex hulls read data from all hulls, the CREW model must be assumed.
Once all of the upper tangents from each hull to all other hulls are known, a pair of
candidates are selected by finding the min/max slopes. Finally, depending on the angle
between the two candidates being less than or greater than 180 degrees (Fig. 6.5), no point
or a subset of points from CH( Q(i)) belongs to CH(Q).
Figure 6.5. Finding points in a partial hull that belong to the combined hull.
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
121
The final step is to renumber the points in proper order for CH( Q). A parallel prefix
computation on the list containing the number of points from each CH(Q(i) ) that have been
identified as belonging to the combined hull yields the rank or index of each node on CH(Q ) .
The complexity of the above parallel convex hull algorithm (excluding the initial sorting
of the point set) is characterized by the following recurrence:
which has the solution T(p, p) ≈ 2c log p. Given that sorting a list of size p can be performed
in O(log p) time as well, the overall time complexity is O(log p) .
Because the best sequential algorithm for a p-point convex hull problem requires Ω ( p
log p) computation steps, the above parallel convex hull algorithm is asymptotically optimal.
6.6. SOME IMPLEMENTATION ASPECTS
In this section, we discuss a number of practical considerations that are important in
transforming a PRAM algorithm into an efficient program for an actual shared-memory
parallel computer. The most important of these relates to data layout in the shared memory.
To discuss these issues, we need to look at hardware implementation aspects of shared
memory.
In any physical implementation of shared memory, the m memory locations will be in
B memory banks (modules), each bank holding m/B addresses. Typically, a memory bank
can provide access to a single memory word in a given memory cycle. Even though memory
units can be, and have been, designed to allow access to a few independently addressed words
in a single cycle, such multiport memories tend to be quite expensive. Besides, if the number
of memory ports is less than m/B (which is certainly the case in practice), these multiport
memories still do not allow us the same type of access that is permitted even in the weakest
PRAM submodel.
So, even if the PRAM algorithm assumes the EREW submodel where no two processors
access the same memory location in the same cycle, memory bank conflicts may still arise.
Depending on how such conflicts are resolved, moderate to serious loss of performance may
result. An obvious solution is to try to lay out the data in the shared memory and organize
the computational steps of the algorithm so that a memory bank is accessed at most once in
each cycle. This is quite a challenging problem that has received significant attention from
the research community and parallel computer designers.
The main ideas relating to data layout methods are best explained in connection with
the matrix multiplication problem of Section 5.6. Let us take the m × m matrix multiplication
algorithm in which p = m ² processors are used. We identify each processor by an index pair
(i, j). Then, Processor Pi j will be responsible for computing the element ci j of the result matrix
C. The m processors Pi y , 0 ≤ y < m, would need to read Row i of the matrix A for their
computation. In order to avoid multiple accesses to the same matrix element, we skew the
accesses so that Pi y reads the elements of Row i beginning with Ai y. In this way, the entire
Row i of A is read out in every cycle, albeit with the elements distributed differently to the
processors in each cycle.
To ensure that conflict-free parallel access to all elements of each row of A is possible
in every memory cycle, the data layout must assign different columns of A to different
122
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 6.6. Matrix storage in column-major order to allow concurrent accesses to rows.
memory banks. This is possible if we have at least m memory banks and corresponds to the
data storage in column-major order, as shown in Fig. 6.6, where the matrix element (i, j) is
found in location i of memory bank j. If fewer than m memory modules are available, then
the matrix element (i, j) can be stored in location i + m j/B  of memory bank j mod B. This
would ensure that the row elements can be read out with maximum parallelism.
However, also note that Processors Px j , 0 ≤ x < m , all access the jth column of B.
Therefore, the column-major storage scheme of Fig. 6.6 will lead to memory bank conflicts
for all such accesses to the columns of B. We can store B in row-major order to avoid such
conflicts. However, if B is later to be used in a different matrix multiplication, say B × D ,
then either the layout of B must be changed by physically rearranging it in memory or the
algorithm must be modified, neither of which is desirable.
Figure 6.7. Skewed matrix storage for conflict-free accesses to rows and columns.
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
123
Fortunately, a matrix can be laid out in memory in such a way that both columns and
rows are accessible in parallel without memory bank conflicts. Figure 6.7 shows a wellknown skewed storage scheme that allows conflict-free access to both rows and columns of
a matrix. In this scheme, the matrix element (i , j) is found in location i of module (i + j) mod
B. It is clear from this formulation that all elements (i, y), 0 ≤ y < m , will be found in different
modules, as are all elements (x, j), 0 ≤ x < m , provided that B ≥ m. It is also clear that if all
of the m diagonal elements (x, x) of the matrix were to be accessed in parallel, conflicts could
arise, unless B ≥ 2m or else B is an odd number in the range m ≤ B < 2 m .
To generalize the above discussion and lay a foundation for a theoretical treatment of
the memory layout problem for conflict-free parallel access, it is more convenient to deal
with vectors rather than matrices. The 6 × 6 matrix of Figs. 6.6 and 6.7 can be viewed as a
36-element vector, as shown in Fig. 6.8, that may have to be accessed in some or all of the
following ways:
Column:
k , k + 1, k + 2, k + 3, k + 4, k + 5
Stride of 1
Row:
k , k + m, k + 2m, k + 3 m, k + 4 m , k + 5m
Stride of m
Diagonal:
k, k+m +1, k + 2(m + 1), k + 3(m + 1), k + 4(m + 1), k + 5( m + 1)
Stride of m + l
Antidiagonal: k , k + m – 1, k + 2( m – 1), k + 3( m – 1), k + 4( m – 1), k + 5(m – 1)
Stride of m – 1
where index calculations are assumed to be modulo m² (or, more generally, modulo the length
l of the vector at hand). In this context, it does not matter whether we number the matrix
elements in column-major or row-major order, as the latter will only interchange the first
two strides.
Thus, the memory data layout problem is reduced to the following: Given a vector of
length l, store it in B memory banks in such a way that accesses with strides s0 , s1 , . . . ,
s h–1 are conflict-free (ideal) or involve the minimum possible amount of conflict.
A linear skewing scheme is one that stores the kth vector element in the bank a + kb mod
B. The address within the bank is irrelevant to conflict-free parallel access, though it does
affect the ease with which memory addresses are computed by the processors. In fact, the
constant a above is also irrelevant and can be safely ignored. Thus, we can limit our attention
to linear skewing schemes that assign Vk to memory module Mkb mod B·
With a linear skewing scheme, the vector elements k, k + s, k + 2s, . . . , k + ( B – 1) s will
be assigned to different memory modules iff sb is relatively prime with respect to the number
B of memory banks. A simple way to guarantee conflict-free parallel access for all strides is
to choose B to be a prime number, in which case b = 1 can be used for simplicity. But having
Figure 6.8. A 6 × 6 matrix viewed, in column-major order, as a 36-element vector.
124
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
a prime number of banks may be inconvenient for other reasons. Thus, many alternative
methods have been proposed.
Now, even assuming conflict-free access to memory banks, it is still the case that the
multiple memory access requests must be directed from the processors to the associated
memory banks. With a large number of processors and memory banks, this is a nontrivial
problem. Ideally, the memory access network should be a permutation network that can
connect each processor to any memory bank as long as the connection is a permutation.
However, permutation networks are quite expensive to implement and difficult to control
(set up). Thus, we usually settle for networks that do not possess full permutation capability.
Figure 6.9 shows a multistage interconnection network as an example of a compromise
solution. This is a butterfly network that we will encounter again in Chapter 8 where we
devise a circuit for computing the fast Fourier transform (FFT) and again in Chapter 15,
where it is shown to be related to the hypercube architecture. For our discussion here, we
only note that memory accesses can be self-routed through this network by letting the ith bit
of the memory bank address determine the switch setting in Column i – 1 (1 ≤ i ≤ 3), with
0 indicating the upper path and 1 the lower path. For example, independent of the source
processor, any request going to memory bank 3 (0011) will be routed to the “lower,” “upper,”
“upper,” “lower” output line by the switches that forward it in Columns 0–3. A self-routing
interconnection network is highly desirable as the ease of routing translates directly into
simpler hardware, lower delay, and higher throughput.
The switches in the memory access network of Fig. 6.9 can be designed to deal with
access conflicts by simply dropping duplicate requests (in which case the processors must
rely on a positive acknowledgment from memory to ensure that their requests have been
honored), buffering one of the two conflicting requests (which introduces nondeterminacy
in the memory access time), or combining access requests to the same memory location.
When buffers are used to hold duplicate requests, determining the size of the buffers
needed is a challenging problem. Large buffers increase the probability that no request has
to be dropped because of buffer overflow, but lead to complex switches with attendant cost
and speed penalties. Experience has shown that conflicts can usually be resolved in a few
Figure 6.9. Example of a multistage memory access network.
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
125
rounds or handled with relatively small buffers. In other words, the worst case does not
usually occur.
However, there are occasionally “hot spots” in memory that many processors may try
to access simultaneously. If the hot spots are related to control mechanisms, such as locks
and semaphores, that are typically accessed by many processors, then the use of switches
with combining capability may help. For example, multiple read requests from the same
location may be buffered in the switch, with only one forwarded to the next level. When the
read result for such duplicate requests comes back to the switch from its memory side, the
data will be broadcast to both processor-side ports. With combining switches, the powerful
PRAM CRCW reduction submodels (e.g., maximum or summation) can be implemented
with little additional cost in the memory access network relative to the EREW, provided that
multiple accesses to a given memory bank are guaranteed to be to the same memory location.
PROBLEMS
6.1. Parallel sorting on CRCW-S PRAM
For the impractical sorting algorithm discussed at the beginning of Section 6.2, compute the
speed-up, efficiency, and the other figures of merit introduced in Section 1.6.
6.2. Parallel rank-based selection
Develop a parallel selection algorithm by applying the ideas used in the radixsort algorithm of
Section 6.4. Compare the performance of your algorithm to that of parallel radixsort and to the
parallel selection algorithm of Section 6.2 and discuss.
6.3. Parallel rank-based selection
In the parallel selection algorithm of Section 6.2:
a . Why is the constant 4 used on the first line of the algorithm (e.g., why not “if |S | < 3”?)?
b. How would the algorithm complexity be affected if the constant 4 is increased to 6, say?
c. What if instead of a constant we use a value such as p/log2 p or n/log2 n ?
6.4.
Parallel selection-based sorting
In the selection-based sorting algorithm of Section 6.3, the decomposition parameter k was
chosen to be 2 1 /x in order to allow us to solve the k subproblems in two passes (Steps 4 and 5
of the algorithm).
a. Justify the solution given for the recurrence characterizing the running time of the algorithm
with the above choice for k.
b. What is the appropriate choice for k if the k subproblems are to be solved in no more than
r passes?
c . How is the running time of the algorithm affected if r = 4 in part (b)?
6.5.
Parallel selection-based sorting
At the end of Section 6.3, it was mentioned that rank-based selection algorithm becomes more
complex if the input list contains repeated elements. Make the required modifications in the
algorithm for this case.
6.6.
Parallel randomized sorting
Analyze the average-case complexity of the parallel randomized sorting algorithm presented
126
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
in Section 6.4. Using your analysis, justify the choice of |S |/p² random samples in the first
algorithm step.
6.7.
Parallel radixsort algorithm
a . Extend the parallel radixsort algorithm given in Section 6.4 to the case where the number
n of elements to be sorted is larger than the number p of processors.
b . Radixsort can be done in higher radices (e.g., radix 4 rather than 2). Describe a parallel
radixsort algorithm using the radix of 4 and compare its running time with the radix-2
version.
c . Based on the results of part (b), would it be advantageous to use even higher radices?
6.8.
Parallel convex hull algorithm
a . On Fig. 6.4, show how the next level of recursion would subdivide the four smaller
problems.
b . In general, when does the recursion stop?
c . Express the number of recursion levels in terms of the problem size p.
d . Extend the algorithm to the general case of n data points and p processors, with n > p.
6.9.
Other geometric problems on point sets
The convex hull problem is only one example of a rich collection of practical problems that
involve point sets in the Cartesian coordinates. Propose algorithms for solving each of the
following problems on point sets.
a . Determining the center of gravity of a 2D set of points, each having a positive weight.
b . Determining the subset of points that are not dominated by any other point, where a point
(x1 , y 1) dominates another point (x2 , y 2) iff x1 ≥ x 2 and y1 ≥ y 2. As an example, the answer
in the case of the point set in Fig. 6.2 should be 7, 11, 12, 15.
c . Dynamically updating the convex hull of a 2D point set as each point is added to, or removed
from, the set.
d . Determining the largest circle centered at each point that does not have any other point
inside it.
e . Determining the diameter of a 2D point set, defined as the diameter of the smallest circle
that can enclose all of the points.
f . Determining a pair of points that are closest to, or farthest from, each other.
6.10.
Geometric problems on sets of line segments
Given a set of straight line segments on a plane, each specified by the coordinates of its two
endpoints, propose algorithms for solving each of the following problems.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.11.
Yes or no answer to the question of whether any pair of line segments intersect.
Determining all intersection points between pairs of line segments.
Detecting the existence of parallel line segments.
Determining which portion of each line segment would be visible to an observer located
at the point (x, y) = (0, ∞ ), where line segments are assumed to obstruct the visibility of
line segments that are “behind” them.
Polynomial interpolation
We are given n points (xi , yi ), 0 ≤ i < n, and asked to find an (n –1)th-degree polynomial y = ƒ(x )
such that ƒ(x i) = y i for the given n data points. By Newton’s interpolation method, the
polynomial can be written as
MORE SHARED-MEMORY ALGORITHMS
127
a. Show that ci can be computed as the sum of i + 1 terms, the jth of which (0 ≤ j ≤ i) constitutes
a fraction with yj in the numerator and a prefix product of length i in the denominator.
b. Based on the result of part (a), devise a PRAM algorithm that computes the coefficients
c i using n parallel prefix computations and additional arithmetic operations as needed.
c. Devise a PRAM algorithm to compute ƒ(x ), given x and the coefficients ci , 0 ≤ i ≤ n.
6.12. Numerical integration
To compute the integral of ƒ(x)dx over the interval [a, b] using the trapezoidal rule, the interval
[a, b] is divided into n subintervals of equal length h = (b – a)/n. The definite integral is then
approximated by
.
a. Develop a PRAM algorithm implementing the trapezoidal rule.
b. To minimize the number of function evaluations, the following adaptive version of the
trapezoidal rule, known as adaptive quadrature, can be used. Given a desired accuracy ε,
the definite integral is evaluated using the trapezoidal rule with n = 1 and n = 2. Call the
results I1 and I2 . If I 2 – I1 ≤ ε, then I 2 is taken to be the desired result. Otherwise, the same
method is applied to each of the subintervals [a, (a + b )/2] and [(a + b )/2, b] with the
accuracy ε/2. Discuss the parallel implementation of adaptive quadrature.
6.13.
Linear skewing schemes for matrices
Consider the linear skewing scheme s(i, j) = ai + bj mod B that yields the index of the memory
bank where the element (i, j) of an m × m matrix is stored. Prove each of the following results.
a. In order to have conflict-free parallel access to rows, columns, diagonals, and antidiagonals,
it is sufficient to choose B to be the smallest prime number that is no less than max(m, 5).
b. In order to have conflict-free parallel access to rows, columns, diagonals, and antidiagonals,
the smallest number of memory banks required is m if gcd(m, 2) = gcd(m, 3) = 1, m + 1 if
m is even and m = 0 mod 3 or 1 mod 3, m + 2 if m is odd and a multiple of 3, and m + 3 if
m is even and m = 2 mod 3.
c . If it is possible to have conflict-free parallel access to rows, columns, diagonals, and
antidiagonals using a linear skewing scheme, then it is possible to achieve this using the
scheme s(i, j) = i + 2j mod B.
6.14.
Memory access networks
For the butterfly memory access network depicted in Fig. 6.9:
a. Show that there exist permutations that are not realizable.
b. Show that the shift permutation, where Processor i accesses memory bank i + k mod p, for
some constant k, is realizable.
6.15.
PRAM sorting by merging
Develop a parallel algorithm for sorting on the PRAM model of parallel computation that is
based on merging the sublists held by the various processors into successively larger sublists
until a sorted list containing all items is formed. Analyze your algorithm and compare its time
complexity with those of the algorithms presented in this chapter.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[AKl93]
[AKl97]
[Kron96]
Akl, S., and K. A. Lyons, Parallel Computational Geometry, Prentice–Hall, 1993.
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Kronsjo, L. I., “PRAM Models,” Chapter 6 in Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook , edited
by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp. 163–191.
128
[Mace87]
[Over81]
[Prep85]
[Wijs89]
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Mace, M. E., Memory Storage Patterns in Parallel Processing, Kluwer, 1987.
Overmars, M. H., and J. van Leeuwen, “Maintenance of Configurations in the Plane,” J. Computer
and System Sciences, Vol. 23, pp. 166–204, 1981.
Preparata, F. P., and M. I. Shamos, Computational Geometry: An Introduction, Springer-Verlag, 1985.
Wijshoff, H. A. G., Data Organization in Parallel Computers, Kluwer, 1989.
7
Sorting and
Selection Networks
Circuit-level designs for parallel processing are necessarily problem-specific or
special-purpose. This arises in part from the relatively inflexible structure of a
circuit (as compared with a stored program that can be easily modified or
adapted to varying numbers of inputs) and in part from our limited ability to deal
with complexity, making it virtually impossible to develop a complete circuitlevel design individually and in a reasonable amount of time unless the problem
at hand is simple and well-defined. The problem of sorting, which is the focus
of this chapter, is an ideal example. Discussion of sorting networks or circuits
touches on many of the important design methods and speed–cost trade-offs that
are recurring themes in the field of parallel processing. A sampler of other
interesting problems will be covered in Chapter 8. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.1. What is a sorting network?
7.2. Figures of merit for sorting networks
7.3. Design of sorting networks
7.4. Batcher sorting networks
7.5. Other classes of sorting networks
7.6. Selection networks
129
This page intentionally left blank.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
131
7.1. WHAT IS A SORTING NETWORK
A sorting network is a circuit that receives n inputs,
, and permutes
them to produce n outputs,
, such that the outputs satisfy y 0 ≤ y 1 ≤
y 2 ≤ . . . yn–1 . For brevity, we often refer to such an n-input n-output sorting network as an
n-sorter (Fig. 7.1). Just as many sorting algorithms are based on comparing and exchanging
pairs of keys, we can build an n-sorter out of 2-sorter building blocks. A 2-sorter compares
its two inputs (call them input 0 and input1 ) and orders them at the output, by switching their
order if needed, putting the smaller value, min(input0 , input 1), before the larger value,
max(input 0 , input1).
Figure 7.2 shows the block diagram of a 2-sorter that always directs the smaller of the
two input values to the top output. It also depicts simpler representations of the 2-sorter,
where the rectangular box is replaced by a vertical line segment and the input-to-output
direction is implied to be from left to right. Because, in some situations, we may want to
place the smaller of the two inputs on the bottom, rather than top, output, we can replace the
vertical line segment representing the 2-sorter by an arrow pointing in the direction of the
larger output value. These schematic representations make it quite easy to draw large sorting
networks. In particular, note that the heavy dots representing the I/O connections of a 2-sorter
can be removed when there is no ambiguity. The schematic representations can be easily
extended to larger building blocks. For example, a 3-sorter can be represented by a vertical
line segment (or arrow) with three connecting dots.
The hardware realization of a 2-sorter is quite straightforward. If we view the inputs as
unsigned integers that are supplied to the 2-sorter in bit-parallel form, then the 2-sorter can
be implemented using a comparator and two 2-to-1 multiplexers, as shown in Fig. 7.3 (left
panel). When the keys are long, or when we need to implement a sorting network with many
inputs on a single VLSI chip, bit-parallel input becomes impractical in view of pin limitations. Figure 7.3 (right panel) also depicts a bit-serial hardware realization of the 2-sorter
using two state flip-flops. The flip-flops are reset to 0 at the outset. This state represents the
two inputs being equal thus far. The other two states are 01 (the upper input is less) and 10
(the lower input is less). While the 2-sorter is in state 00 or 01, the inputs are passed to the
outputs straight through. When the state changes to 10, the inputs are interchanged, with the
top input routed to the lower output and vice versa.
Figure 7.4 depicts a 4-sorter built of 2-sorter building blocks. For this initial example,
we have shown both the block diagram and the schematic representation. In subsequent
Figure 7.1. An n -input sorting network or an n -sorter.
132
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.2. Block diagram and four different schematic representations for a 2-sorter.
examples, we will use only schematic diagrams. The schematic representation of the 4-sorter
in Fig. 7.4 shows the data values carried on all lines when the input sequence 3, 2, 5, 1 is
applied.
How do we verify that the circuit shown in Fig. 7.4 is in fact a valid 4-sorter? The answer
is easy in this case. After the first two circuit levels, the top line carries the smallest and the
bottom line the largest of the four input values. The final 2-sorter orders the middle two
values. More generally, we need to verify the correctness of an n-sorter through tedious
formal proofs or by time-consuming exhaustive testing. Neither approach is attractive.
Fortunately, the zero–one principle allows us to do this with much less work.
The Zero–One Principle. An n -sorter is valid if it correctly sorts all 0/1 sequences
of length n.
Proof. Clearly any n-sorter must also sort 0s and 1s correctly (necessity). Suppose that
an n-sorter does not sort the input sequence x1, x 2 , . . . , xn properly, i.e., there exist outputs
y i and yi +1 with yi > y i+1 . We show that there is a 0/1 sequence that is not sorted properly also.
Replace all inputs that are strictly less than yi with 0s and all other inputs with 1s. The relative
positions of the input values will not change at the output. Therefore, at the output we will
have yi = 1 and y i +1 = 0.
Figure 7.3. Parallel and bit-serial hardware realizations of a 2-sorter.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
133
Figure 7.4. Block diagram and schematic representation of a 4-sorter.
Using the zero–one principle, the correctness of the 4-sorter in Fig. 7.4 can be verified
by testing it for the 16 possible 0/1 sequences of length 4. The network clearly sorts 0000
and 1111. It sorts all sequences with a single 0 because the 0 “bubbles up” to the top line.
Similarly, a single 1 would “sink down” to the bottom line. The remaining part of the proof
deals with the sequences 0011, 0101, 0110, 1001, 1010, 1100, all of which lead to the correct
output 0011.
7.2. FIGURES OF MERIT FOR SORTING NETWORKS
Is the sorting network shown in Fig. 7.4 the best possible 4-sorter? To answer this
question, we need to specify what we mean by “the best n-sorter.” Two figures of merit
immediately suggest themselves:
• Cost: the total number of 2-sorter blocks used in the design
• Delay: the number of 2-sorters on the critical path from input to output
Of course, for VLSI implementation of an n-sorter, the wiring pattern between the 2-sorters
is also important because it determines the layout area, which has an impact on cost.
However, for simplicity, we will ignore this aspect of cost/complexity and use the number
of 2-sorters as an approximate cost indicator. Each 2-sorter will thus be assumed to have unit
cost, independent of its location in the network or its connectivity.
Similar observations apply to the delay of a sorting network. We will again assume that
a 2-sorter has unit delay independent of its location or connectivity. In VLSI circuits, signal
propagation delay on wires is becoming increasingly important. Longer wires, going from
one chip to another or even from one side to the other side of the same chip, contribute
nonnegligible delays, to the extent that signal propagation delays sometimes overshadow the
device switching or computation delays. Therefore, our delay measure is also approximate.
We can also use composite figures of merit involving both cost and delay. For example,
if we expect linear speed-up from more investment in the circuit, then minimizing cost ×
delay would be appropriate. According to the cost × delay measure, if we can redesign a
sorting network so that it is 10% faster but only 5% more complex, the redesign is deemed
to be cost-effective and the resulting circuit is said to be time-cost-efficient (or at least more
so than the original one).
Figure 7.5 shows examples of low-cost sorting networks ([Knut73], p. 228) that have
been discovered over the years by different researchers. Unfortunately, lowest-cost designs
134
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.5. Some low-cost sorting networks.
are known only for small n and as yet there is no general method for systematically deriving
low-cost designs.
Figure 7.6 depicts examples of fast sorting networks ([Knut73], p. 231). The fastest
possible designs are also known only for small n.
Time-cost-efficient sorting networks are even harder to come by. For the 10-input
examples in Figs. 7.5 and 7.6, the cost × delay products are
Fig. 7.6. Some fast sorting networks.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
29 modules, 9 delay units
cost × delay = 261
31 modules, 7 delay units
cost × delay = 217
135
Thus, the 10-sorter in Fig. 7.6 has higher time-cost efficiency than its counterpart in Fig. 7.5.
However, in general, the most time-cost-efficient design may be neither the fastest nor the
least complex n-sorter.
7.3. DESIGN OF SORTING NETWORKS
There are many ways to design sorting networks, leading to different results with respect
to the figures of merit defined in Section 7.2. For example, Fig. 7.7 shows a 6-sorter whose
design is based on the odd–even transposition sorting algorithm discussed in connection
with sorting on a linear array of processors in Section 2.3 (rotate Fig. 7.7 clockwise by 90
degrees and compare the result with the compare–exchange pattern of Fig. 2.10). This “brick
wall” design offers advantages in terms of wiring ease (because wires are short and do not
cross over). However, it is quite inefficient as it uses n  n/2  modules and has n units of delay.
Its cost × delay product is Θ (n³ ). So, a natural question is how one might design more efficient
sorting networks.
Let us try a couple of other ideas. One way to sort n inputs is to sort the first n – 1 inputs,
say, and then insert the last input in its proper place. This recursive solution based on insertion
sort is depicted in the top left panel of Fig. 7.8. Another way is to select the largest value
among the n inputs, output it on the bottom line, and then sort the remaining n – 1 values.
This also is a recursive solution, as shown in the top right panel of Fig. 7.8. Both solutions
are characterized by the following recurrences for delay and cost. In fact, both lead to the
same design, which is in effect based on the parallel version of bubblesort.
All three designs presented thus far in this section are quite inefficient. Lower bounds
on the cost and delay of an n-sorter are Ω (n log n) and Ω (log n), respectively. These are
established by the fan-in argument and the minimum number of comparisons needed for
Figure 7.7. Brick-wall 6-sorter based on odd–even transposition.
136
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.8. Sorting network based on insertion sort or selection sort.
sorting n values. Can we achieve these lower bounds? Note that even if both bounds are
achieved simultaneously, the resulting cost × delay product will be Θ (n log² n ) which is more
than the sequential lower bound on work, but this is the best we can hope for.
In 1983, Ajtai, Komlos, and Szemeredi [Ajta83] showed how O(n log n )-cost, O(log
n)-delay sorting networks can be constructed. Their proposed design, which uses a sortingby-splitting approach based on the notion of expander graphs, is known as the AKS sorting
network. However, the AKS design is of theoretical interest only, as the asymptotic notation
hides huge four-digit constants! The constants remain large despite further improvements
and refinements by other researchers since 1983. A good exposition of the asymptotically
optimal AKS sorting circuit was given by Akl ([Ak197], pp. 125–137).
Even though researchers have not given up hope on the prospects of practical, O(n log
n)-cost, O(log n)-delay, sorting networks, work has diversified on several other fronts. One
is the design of more efficient sorting networks with special inputs or outputs; for example,
when inputs are only 0s and 1s, or they are already partially sorted, or we require only
partially sorted outputs. Another is the design of networks that sort the input sequence with
high probability but do not guarantee sorted order for all possible inputs [Leig97].
Practical sorting networks are based on designs by Batcher and others that have O(n
log² n) cost and O(log² n) delay. These designs are a factor of log n away from being
asymptotically optimal in cost or delay, but because log 2 n is only 20 when n is as large as
1 million, such networks are more practical than the asymptotically optimal designs mentioned above. Some of these designs will be discussed in Sections 7.4 and 7.5.
7.4. BATCHER SORTING NETWORKS
Batcher’s ingenious constructions date back to the early 1960s (published a few years
later) and constitute some of the earliest examples of parallel algorithms. It is remarkable
137
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
that in more than three decades, only small improvements to his constructions have been
made.
One type of sorting network proposed by Batcher is based on the idea of an (m ,
m ' )-merger and uses a technique known as even–odd merge or odd-even merge. An (m ,
m ' )-merger is a circuit that merges two sorted sequences of lengths m and m' into a single
sorted sequence of length m + m'. Let the two sorted sequences be
If m = 0 or m' = 0, then nothing needs to be done. For m = m' = 1, a single comparator can
do the merging. Thus, we assume mm' > 1 in what follows. The odd–even merge is done by
merging the even- and odd-indexed elements of the two lists separately:
and
are merged to get
and
are merged to get
If we now compare–exchange the pairs of elements
the resulting
sequence
will be completely sorted. Note that v0 , which is known to be
the smallest element overall, is excluded from the final compare–exchange operations.
An example circuit for merging two sorted lists of sizes 4 and 7 using the odd–even
merge technique is shown in Fig. 7.9. The three circuit segments, separated by vertical dotted
lines, correspond to a (2, 4)-merger for even-indexed inputs, a (2, 3)-merger for odd-indexed
inputs, and the final parallel compare–exchange operations prescribed above. Each of the
smaller mergers can be designed recursively in the same way. For example, a (2, 4)-merger
consists of two (1, 2)-mergers for even- and odd-indexed inputs, followed by two parallel
compare–exchange operations. A (1, 2)-merger is in turn built from a (1, 1)-merger, or a
single comparator, for the even-indexed inputs, followed by a single compare–exchange
operation. The final (4, 7)-merger in Fig. 7.9 uses 16 modules and has a delay of 4 units.
It would have been quite difficult to prove the correctness of Batcher’s even–odd merger
were it not for the zero–one principle that allows us to limit the proof of correctness to only
0 and 1 inputs. Suppose that the sorted x sequence has k 0s and m – k 1s. Similarly, let there
be k' 0s and m' – k' 1s in the sorted y sequence. When we merge the even-indexed terms, the
v sequence will have k even = k / 2  +  k ' / 2  0s. Likewise, the w sequence resulting from the
merging of odd-indexed terms will have kodd =  k / 2 +  k' / 2  0s. Only three cases are
possible:
Case a: k even = k odd
The sequence
is already sorted
Case b: k even = k odd + 1 The sequence
is already sorted
138
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.9. Batcher's even–odd merging network for 4 + 7 inputs.
Case c: k even = k odd + 2
In the last case, the sequence
has only a pair of elements that are not in
sorted order, as shown in the example below (the out-of-order pair is underlined).
The problem will be fixed by the compare–exchange operations between wi and vi +1 .
Batcher’s (m, m) even–odd merger, when m is a power of 2, is characterized by the
following delay and cost recurrences:
Armed with an efficient merging circuit, we can design an n-sorter recursively from two
n /2-sorters and an (n/2, n/2)-merger, as shown in Fig. 7.10. The 4-sorter of Fig. 7.4 is an
instance of this design: It consists of two 2-sorters followed by a (2, 2)-merger in turn built
from two (1, 1)-mergers and a single compare–exchange step. A larger example, corresponding to an 8-sorter, is depicted in Fig. 7.11. Here, 4-sorters are used to sort the first and second
halves of the inputs separately, with the sorted lists then merged by a (4, 4)-merger composed
of an even (2, 2)-merger, an odd (2, 2)-merger, and a final stage of three comparators.
Batcher sorting networks based on the even–odd merge technique are characterized by
the following delay and cost recurrences:
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
139
Figure 7.10. The recursive structure of Batcher's even–odd merge sorting network.
A second type of sorting network proposed by Batcher is based on the notion of bitonic
sequences. A bitonic sequence is defined as one that “rises then falls”
, or is
, “falls then rises”
obtained from the first two categories through cyclic shifts or rotations. Examples include
133466622100
Rises then falls
877666546889
Falls then rises
898776665468
The previous sequence, right-rotated by 2
Batcher observed that if we sort the first half and second half of a sequence in opposite
directions, as indicated by the vertical arrows in Fig. 7.12, the resulting sequence will be
bitonic and can thus be sorted by a special bitonic-sequence sorter. It turns out that a
Figure 7.11. Batcher's even–odd merge sorting network for eight inputs.
140
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.12. The recursive structure of Batcher's bitonic sorting network.
bitonic-sequence sorter with n inputs has the same delay and cost as an even–odd ( n/2,
n /2)-merger. Therefore, sorters based on the notion of bitonic sequences (bitonic sorters)
have the same delay and cost as those based on even–odd merging.
A bitonic-sequence sorter can be designed based on the assertion that if in a bitonic
sequence, we compare–exchange the elements in the first half with those in the second half,
as indicated by the dotted comparators in Fig. 7.12, each half of the resulting sequence will
be a bitonic sequence and each element in the first half will be no larger than any element in
the second half. Thus, the two halves can be independently sorted by smaller bitonic-sequence sorters to complete the sorting process. Note that we can reverse the direction of
sorting in the lower n-sorter if we suitably adjust the connections of the dotted comparators
in Fig. 7.12. A complete eight-input bitonic sorting network is shown in Fig. 7.13.
While asymptotically suboptimal, Batcher sorting networks are quite efficient. Attempts
at designing faster or less complex networks for specific values of n have yielded only
marginal improvements over Batcher’s construction when n is large.
Figure 7.13. Batcher's bitonic sorting network for eight inputs.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
141
7.5. OTHER CLASSES OF SORTING NETWORKS
A class of sorting networks that possess the same asymptotic Θ(log2 n) delay and Θ (n
log n ) cost as Batcher sorting networks, but that offer some advantages, are the periodic
balanced sorting networks [Dowd89]. An n-sorter of this type consists of log 2 n identical
stages, each of which is a (log2 n)-stage n-input bitonic-sequence sorter. Thus, the delay and
cost of an n-sorter of this type are (log2 n)2 and n (log2 n)2/2, respectively. Figure 7.14 shows
an eight-input example. The 8-sorter of Fig. 7.14 has a larger delay (9 versus 6) and higher
cost (36 versus 19) compared with a Batcher 8-sorter but offers the following advantages:
2
1. The structure is regular and modular (easier VLSI layout).
2. Slower, but more economical, implementations are possible by reusing the blocks.
In the extreme, log 2 n passes through a single block can be used for cost-efficient
sorting.
3. Using an extra block provides tolerance to some faults (missed exchanges).
4. Using two extra blocks provides tolerance to any single fault (a missed or incorrect
exchange).
5. Multiple passes through a faulty network can lead to correct sorting (graceful
degradation).
6. Single-block design can be made fault-tolerant by adding an extra stage to the block.
Just as we were able to obtain a sorting network based on odd–even transposition sort on a
linear array, we can base a sorting network on a sorting algorithm for a 2D array. For example,
the two 8-sorters shown in Figs. 7.15 and 7.16 are based on shearsort (defined in Section
2.5) with snakelike order on 2 × 4 and 4 × 2 arrays, respectively. Compared with Batcher
8-sorters, these are again slower (7 or 9 versus 6 levels) and more complex (24 or 32 versus
19 modules). However, they offer some of the same advantages enumerated for periodic
balanced sorting networks.
In general, an rc-sorter can be designed based on shearsort on an r × c mesh. It will have
log2 r identical blocks, each consisting of r parallel c-sorters followed by c parallel r -sorters,
followed at the end by a special block composed of r parallel c-sorters. However, such
networks are usually not competitive when r is large.
Figure 7.14. Periodic balanced sorting network for eight inputs.
142
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 7.15. Design of an 8-sorter based on shearsort on 2 × 4 mesh.
Figure 7.16. Design of an 8-sorter based on shearsort on 4 × 2 mesh.
7.6. SELECTION NETWORKS
If we need the kth smallest value among n inputs, then using a sorting network would
be an overkill in that an n-sorter does more than what is required to solve our (n, k) selection
problem. For example, the 8-sorter of Fig. 7.15 can still give us the third or fourth smallest
element among its eight inputs if we remove the five comparators constituting the lower-right
4-sorter. A natural question is whether we can design selection networks that are significantly
simpler than sorting networks. This is an interesting problem and we deal only with some
aspects of it in this section.
Let us broaden our view a bit and define three selection problems [Knut73]:
I.
Select the k smallest values and present them on k outputs in sorted order.
II. Select the kth smallest value and present it on one of the outputs.
III. Select the k smallest values and present them on k outputs in any order.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
143
The above are listed in decreasing order of circuit and time complexity, i.e., (I) is the hardest
and (III) the easiest. For example, the 8-sorter of Fig. 7.15 solves the first problem after
removing the five comparators constituting the lower-right 4-sorter. If, additionally, we
replace the upper-right 4-sorter in Fig. 7.15 with three comparators to choose the maximum
value on the upper four lines, a type II (8, 4)-selector would result. Finally, if we remove the
upper-right 4-sorter altogether, we obtain a type III (8, 4)-selector.
It can be proven ([Knut73], pp. 234–235) that the number of comparators needed for
solving the third selection problem (and hence the second one) satisfies the following lower
bound which is tight for k = 1 and k = 2:
Figure 7.17 depicts a type III (8, 4)-selector. The pairs of integers shown on each line
in Fig. 7.17 denote the minimum and maximum rank that is possible for the value carried by
that line. Initially, each input value can have any rank in [0, 7]. When two inputs are
compared, and possibly exchanged, the upper one will have a rank in [0, 6] and the lower
one in [1, 7]. It is easily proven that if the two inputs of a comparator have ranks in [ li , ui]
and
satisfy
and
and [lj , u j ], then the output rank intervals
Similar results can be proven for the upper bounds and
The correctness of
the type III (8, 4)-selector in Fig. 7.17 is evident from the output rank intervals.
Classifiers constitute a class of selection networks that can divide a set of n values into
n/2 largest and n/2 smallest values, with possible overlap in case of repeated values at the
input. The selection network of Fig. 7.17 is in fact an 8-input classifier. Generalizing the
construction of Fig. 7.17, an n-input classifier can be built from two (n/2)-sorters followed
by n/2 comparators. Using Batcher’s designs for the (n/2)-sorters leads to a depth of O(log2
n) and size of O(n log2 n ) for an n -input classifier. Of course, O(log n)-depth, O(n log n )-cost
classifiers can be derived from AKS sorting networks, but the resulting designs are not
practical. It has been shown that classifiers of depth O(log n) and size Cn log 2 n + O(n),
where C is any number exceeding 3/log 2 3 ≈ 1.8927, can be constructed [Jimb96].
Figure 7.17. A type III (8, 4)-selector.
144
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
PROBLEMS
7.1. Design of 2-sorter and 3-sorter building blocks
a . How should the 2-sorter designs shown in Fig. 7.3 be modified if they are to deal with
signed, rather than unsigned, integer inputs?
b . Design a 3-sorter building block with unsigned bit-serial inputs. Try to make the 3-sorter
as fast as possible, e.g., do not use three 2-sorters inside the module.
7.2.
The zero–one principle
Using the zero–one principle, prove the validity of each of the following sorting networks.
Hint: Noting that the designs begin with a set of smaller sorters reduces the amount of work
needed for your proof.
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.3.
The 6-sorter in Fig. 7.6.
The 9-sorter in Fig. 7.5.
The 9-sorter in Fig. 7.6.
The 12-sorter in Fig. 7.5.
Programmable sorters
Consider the design of a sorting network that can sort in ascending or descending order, as
dictated by a single control signal. Compare the following two design methods with respect to
cost and delay.
a. Sort in ascending order, then reverse the sequence if descending order is desired.
b. Modify the building blocks of Fig. 7.3 so that the output order is switched by the control
signal.
7.4. Bitonic-sequence sorters
Show how an n-input bitonic-sequence sorter can be used to merge two sorted sequences with
unequal lengths that add up to at most n; one sequence is of length m and the other is no longer
than n – m.
7.5. Figures of merit for sorting networks
Calculate the speed-up, efficiency, and other figures of merit introduced in Section 1.6 for each
of the following sorting network designs.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.6.
Sorting networks based on insertion or selection sort.
Batcher sorting networks.
Periodic balanced sorting networks.
Sorting network based on shearsort on a 2 × (n/2) mesh.
Sorting network based on shearsort on an (n/2) × 2 mesh.
Pruning of sorting networks
a . Show that removing the top or bottom line, along with all of the comparators connected to
it, converts an n-sorter to a valid (n – 1)-sorter.
b. Experiment with the transformation given in part (a) to derive new sorting networks from
the n-sorters in Figs. 7.5 and 7.6. For example, derive 6-sorters from the given 9-sorters
and compare the results to the 6-sorters given.
c . Show that the statement of part (a) is in general not valid for other lines in a sorting network.
7.7. Sorting networks
a . Use the zero–one principle to prove that the following circuit is not a valid 6-sorter.
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
145
b. Based on the observations in part (a), show how a single comparator can be added to the
circuit to turn it into a valid 6-sorter.
c . Use Batcher’s odd–even merge method to redesign the right half of the sorter of part (b).
d. Compare the designs of parts (b) and (c) with respect to cost and delay.
7.8.
Periodic balanced sorting networks
a.
Give an example of an input sequence that is sorted after passing through the first two
stages of the 8-sorter in Fig. 7.14 but that is still unsorted at the output of the first stage.
b. Give an example of an input sequence whose sorting requires all three stages of the 8-sorter
in Fig. 7.14 (i.e., it is still unsorted at the output of the second stage).
c. Prove the correctness of the periodic balanced 8-sorter in Fig. 7.14.
d. Using the zero–one principle, prove the correctness of periodic balanced n-sorters in
general.
7.9.
Merging networks
Consider the merging of a single input value x with a sorted list of n values y(i), 0 ≤ i ≤ n – 1.
Let such a (1, n)-merger be depicted as in the left diagram above.
a. Prove that the diagram on the right above represents a valid way to construct a (1, n)-merger.
b. Find the delay and cost of a (1, n)-merger recursively constructed as in part (a).
c. Prove that the (1, n)-merger resulting from the construction suggested in Part (a) is optimal.
7.10.
Sorting networks based on shearsort
Design 16-sorters based on shearsort on 2 × 8, 4 × 4, and 8 × 2 meshes and compare the resulting
designs with respect to various figures of merit.
a. Design each smaller sorter that is needed by using the same shearsort-based approach.
b. Feel free to use the best 4-sorter and 8-sorter designs that you can get as building blocks.
7.11.
Validity of sorting networks
Show that the following circuit built of 4-sorters is a valid 16-sorter.
146
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
7.12.
Synthesis of sorting networks
Define a pairwise 2n -sorter as follows. There are 2n inputs and 2 n outputs y 0 to y2n –1 . The
The pairwise 2n -sorter guarantees that
outputs form n pairs
max
min
for all k. Prove or disprove the following assertion: The
pairwise 2n-sorter defined above is always a 2n-sorter.
7.13.
Merging networks
a. Prove or disprove: One can construct a (2m, m) merging network from two (m, m)-mergers
and no other component.
b. How many (m, m)-mergers are needed to build a (3m, m )-merger and why?
c. How many (m, m)-mergers are needed to build a (2m, 2 m )-merger and why?
7.14.
Synthesis of sorting networks
An n-sorter design can be converted to a kn-sorter design by replacing each line with k lines,
replacing each 2-sorter by a (k, k)-merger, and preceding all of the above with n parallel
k-sorters. The above procedure can be used, e.g., to construct a 3n -sorter, given the design for
an n-sorter. A 3n-sorter can also be designed from three n-sorters, one (n, n )-merger, and one
(n, 2n)-merger in the obvious way.
a.
b.
c.
Design a 6-sorter, a 9-sorter, and a 12-sorter based on the first approach.
Repeat part (a) for the second approach.
Compare the results in parts (a) and (b) with each other and with the sorter designs
appearing in this chapter and discuss.
d. For k = n, the first construction above yields an n 2 -sorter based on a Batcher n-sorter. How
does the resulting design compare with an n 2-sorter built directly based on Batcher’s
method?
7.15. Selection networks
a. Justify the labels assigned to various lines in Fig. 7.17.
b. A type III ( n, n /2)-selector can be converted to an n-sorter by attaching two (n /2)-sorters
to its upper-half and lower-half outputs. For example, applying this method to the
(8,4)-selector of Fig. 7.17 yields the 8-sorter of Fig. 7.15. Using the information provided
by the line labels in Fig. 7.17, show that the two additional 4-sorters can be somewhat
simplified.
c. Prove the bound
given in Section 7.6 for the cost of a type
III selection network. Hint: Label the lines in the selection network as follows. Label all
inputs with 0. The upper output of each comparator is labeled by the smaller of its two
SORTING AND SELECTION NETWORKS
147
input labels and the lower output by the larger input label plus 1. Show that the sum of the
labels at the outputs of the selection network equals the total number of comparators in the
network and that n – k of the outputs have labels that are greater than or equal to  log 2(k
+ 1) . .
d. Show that the bound of part (a) is tight for k = 1 and k = 2.
7.16. Classifier networks
Prove that an n-input classifier (defined at the end of Section 7.6) has a delay of Ω (log n)
and a cost of Ω (n log n). Hint: A classifier is a type III selection network.
b. Show how an n-sorter can be synthesized using classifier networks of various sizes as the
only building blocks.
c. Find the asymptotic delay and cost of the sorting networks derived in part (b) and compare
the results with those of Batcher sorting networks.
d. Show how an (n, k)-selector, where k is an arbitrary given number, can be synthesized using
classifier networks of various sizes as the only building blocks.
e. Determine the worst-case asymptotic delay and cost of the (n ,k)-selector derived in part
(d).
a.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Ajta83]
[Ak197]
[Batc68]
[Dowd89]
[Jimb96]
[Knut73]
[Leig97]
[Pipp91]
[Sun94]
Ajtai, M., J. Komlos, and E. Szemeredi, “Sorting in c log n Parallel Steps,” Combinatorica, Vol. 3,
pp. l–19, 1983.
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Batcher, K., “Sorting Networks and Their Applications,” Proc. AFIPS Spring Joint Computer Conf.,
Vol. 32, pp. 307–314, 1968.
Dowd, M., Y. Perl, L. Rudolph, and M. Saks, “The Periodic Balanced Sorting Network,” J. ACM,
Vol. 36, No. 4, pp. 738–757, October 1989.
Jimbo, S. and A. Maruoka, “A Method of Constructing Selection Networks with O(log n) Depth,”
SIAM J. Computing, Vol. 25, No. 4, pp. 709–739, August 1996.
Knuth, D.E., The Art of Computer Programming: Vol. 3—Sorting and Searching, Addison-Wesley,
1973.
Leighton, T., Y. Ma, and T. Suel, “On Probabilistic Networks for Selection, Merging, and Sorting,”
Theory of Computing Systems, Vol. 30, pp. 559–582, 1997.
Pippenger, N., “Selection Networks,” SAIM J. Computing, Vol. 20, pp. 878–887, 1991.
Sun, J., E. Cerny, and J. Gecsei, “Fault Tolerance in a Class of Sorting Networks,” IEEE Trans.
Computers, Vol. 43, No. 7, pp. 827-837, July 1994.
This page intentionally left blank.
8
Other Circuit-Level
Examples
In this chapter, we study three application areas along with parallel architectures
that were developed to address their specific needs. The application areas are
dictionary operations, parallel prefix computation, and fast Fourier transform.
The resulting hardware structures (tree machine, parallel prefix networks, and
butterfly network) are highly specialized to the application at hand and might
be inappropriate for dealing with other problems. The common thread through
this chapter is that, like sorting networks in Chapter 7, the architectures are fully
specified at the circuit level; i.e., the internal structure of each processor can be
drawn as a digital circuit, given the simplicity of its control functions and data
manipulations. Similarly, the interprocessor links are fully defined and easily
realizable with modest area overhead and delay. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
Searching and dictionary operations
A tree-structured dictionary machine
Parallel prefix computation
Parallel prefix networks
The discrete Fourier transform
Parallel architectures for FFT
149
This page intentionally left blank.
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
151
8.1. SEARCHING AND DICTIONARY OPERATIONS
Searching is one of the most important operations on digital computers and consumes
a great deal of resources. A primary reason for sorting, an activity that has been estimated to
use up more than one-fourth of the running time on most computers, is to facilitate searching.
Thus, it is safe to say that searching consumes at least 25% of the running time on most
computers, directly or indirectly. Obviously, it would be desirable to speed up this operation
through the application of parallelism.
Let us first see how searching for y in a list of n keys can be speeded up on a p-processor
PRAM. Assume that the input list x is sorted in ascending order. Recall that a single processor
uses the binary search algorithm to search a sorted list efficiently in log 2 (n+1)  comparison
steps. The given key y is compared with the key xn /2  at or near the middle of the list. If
y = x  n/ 2 , then the search is over. Two other outcomes are possible:
y < x  n / 2
Restrict the search to x 0 through x n /2 –1
y > xn / 2 
Restrict the search to x n /2 +1 through x n–1
In either case above, the problem size is reduced to n/2, leading to a logarithmic number of
steps. The extension of the binary search algorithm to (p + 1)-ary search on a p -processor
PRAM is straightforward and leads to a running time of k =  log2 (n + l)/log2(p + 1)  steps.
The proof is by induction. Let n = (p + 1) k –1 for some k; otherwise find the smallest k such
that n ≤ ( p + 1) k – 1. The claimed running time can clearly be achieved for k = 1 (p processors
search a p-element list in one step). Assume that k – 1 steps are sufficient for any list of size
not exceeding ( p + 1) k –1 – 1. In Step 1, Processor i compares y with the i(p + 1) k –1 th element
in x. Either one of the processors finds y or the search is restricted to a segment of the list of
a size no larger than ( p + 1) k–1 – 1. Hence, k steps are needed overall.
The above algorithm is optimal in that no comparison-based searching algorithm can
be faster. We use induction on k to show that after k parallel comparisons, there must be one
or more contiguous unexamined segments of the list x containing at least (n + 1)/( p + l) k –1
keys. Equating this expression with 0 yields a lower bound on the number k of steps. The
speed-up achieved by the above parallel search algorithm is
 log 2 (n + l)  /  log 2 ( n + l) /log 2 (p + l) ≈ log 2( p + 1)
which is quite disappointing, given the optimality of the algorithm.
Even though single searches in a sorted list of keys cannot be significantly speeded up
by parallel processing, all hope is not lost and parallel searching is still important. First, in
applications where the list of keys changes quite frequently, the requirement of a sorted list
is unrealistic and leads to significant overhead that must be accounted for in analyzing the
overall application. Associative memories and processors can be quite efficient in searching
unsorted lists and usually offer linear speed-up in this context (see Section 4.1). Second, and
this is our primary focus here, when m different searches are to be performed in the same
list of n keys, parallel searching might be quite efficient and can lead to much better speed-up.
This problem, which is exemplified by a word processor’s spelling checker having to verify
that a list of document words appear in a standard dictionary, is known as batch searching.
152
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
To put the need for searching in a realistic application context, we define a set of
dictionary operations on a given list of n records with keys x0 , x 1 , . . . , x n–1 . We want to be
able to perform the following three basic operations efficiently. In most of what follows, “the
record” can be replaced with “a record” or “all records” if multiple records with the same
key value can exist among the stored records.
search(y) Find the record with key y and return its associated data.
insert ( y, z) Augment the list with a record having the key y and the data part z.
delete(y) Remove the record with key y [and, optionally, return the associated data].
The operation delete (y) is said to be redundant if no record with the key value y is found. In
such a case, the operation can be simply ignored or it might signal an exception. Similarly,
the operation insert(y, z) is said to be redundant if a record with the key value y is already
stored and the list of records is restricted to hold only one record with a given key value. In
this case, we often take “insert” to mean “update or change the data part of the record with
the key value y to z,” although ignoring the redundant insertion is also an option.
Additionally, some or all of the following operations might be of interest:
findmin
findmax
findmed
findbest (y)
findnext (y )
findprev (y)
extractmin
extractmax
extractmed
Find the record with the smallest key value and return its associated data.
Find the record with the largest key value and return its associated data.
Find the record with the median key value and return its associated data.
Find the record with the best or nearest match to the key value y.
Find the record whose key is the successor of the key value y.
Find the record whose key is the predecessor of the key value y.
Remove the record(s) with the smallest key value [return the record data].
Remove the record(s) with the largest key value [return the record data].
Remove the record(s) with the median key value [return the record data].
The findmin and extractmin (or findmax and extractmax ) operations are sometimes referred
to as priority queue operations. For example, the minimum key value might correspond to
the highest-priority task in a queue of tasks that are ready for execution. Finding the priority
level of the highest-priority task in the queue might be of interest when we want to decide
if a currently running task can continue or must be preempted. Extracting the highest-priority
task from the priority queue is required when we want to schedule the task to run on an idle
processor.
8.2. A TREE-STRUCTURED DICTIONARY MACHINE
In dealing with circuit-level designs, we essentially proceed in a direction that is the
reverse of what is done in the rest of the book: Rather than defining a “general-purpose”
parallel architecture (e.g., PRAM, 2D mesh, hypercube) and developing algorithms for
solving various problems of interest on it, we take a problem and deal with one or more
circuit realizations or architectures that can solve it efficiently in parallel.
Tree-structured dictionary machines, an example of which is described in this section,
were proposed by Bentley and Kung [Bent79], among others, and later expanded and refined
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
153
by many other researchers. Others have proposed dictionary machines based on meshes,
hypercubes, and so forth (see, e.g., [Parh90] and [Nara96] for references and latest developments in dictionary machines).
The tree machine consists of two back-to-back complete binary trees whose leaves have
been merged (Fig. 8.1). The “circle” tree is responsible for broadcasting the dictionary
operations that enter via the “input root” to all of the leaf nodes that hold the records. The
“triangle” tree combines the results of individual operations by the leaf nodes into an overall
result that emerges from the “output root.” In an actual hardware implementation, the double
tree might be folded, with circular and triangular nodes merged just like the leaf nodes.
However, even with folding, two separate functions of broadcasting and combining will have
to be performed, making the representation of Fig. 8.1 more appropriate than a simple binary
tree.
Searches can be easily pipelined through the levels of the two trees in Fig. 8.1. As the
first instruction, search(y 0 ), is passed from the input root to its two children, the next one,
search(y1 ), can be accepted. The two instructions are pipelined in lockstep, eventually
reaching the leaf nodes in successive cycles. Each leaf processor then responds to the search
instruction, with the search response (e.g., yes/no, leaf node ID, key value, data, or a
match-degree indicator in the case of best-match search) combined, in the same pipelined
fashion, in the lower tree.
The combining function of the triangular nodes depends on the search type. In the
following operations, it is possible to pass a leaf node ID (indicating the location of the leaf
node where a match was found), along with the control information and data, as part of the
search result.
Figure 8.1. A tree-structured dictionary machine.
154
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
search (y)
findmin
findmax
findmed
findbest (y )
findnext (y)
findprev (y)
Pass the logical OR of the “yes” signals, along with data from the “yes”
side, or from one of the two sides if both indicate “yes” (the choice being
arbitrary or by priority).
Pass the smaller of the two key values and its associated data.
Similar to findmin.
The median-finding operation is not supported by this particular design.
Pass the larger of the two match-degree indicators along with the record.
Leaf nodes generate a “larger” bit; findmin is done among the larger values.
Similar to findnext.
If there are n leaf nodes, a search instruction reaches the leaves in [log 2 n] steps after it enters
the input root node and its result will emerge from the output root node after [log 2 n]
additional steps. The total latency is thus 2[log 2 n]+1 steps, with one search result emerging
in each subsequent cycle. Thus, the throughput can approach one search per cycle with a
suitably large batch of searches. If searches were the only operations of interest and the list
of records were static, the speed-up relative to sequential binary search would not be
impressive. We are in effect using 3n – 2 nodes or simple processors (circles, squares, and
triangles) to reduce the running time per search from log 2 n to 1.
There are two redeeming factors, however. First, because the list of records does not
have to be sorted, both insertion and deletion (extraction) are almost as simple as searching,
as we shall see shortly. Second, each of our nodes is much simpler, and thus significantly
faster, than a sequential processor with the need to calculate the address of the next
comparison location, read data from memory, and then set new search-boundary addresses
for every comparison.
Deleting a record is straightforward when there are no duplicate keys or the deletion is
intended to remove all records with the given key y. The delete (y) instruction is broadcast to
all leaf nodes, with those leaf nodes whose key values are equal to y marking their records
as “deleted.” Reclaiming the space occupied by such records will be discussed along with
insertion. New searches can enter the tree immediately following a delete instruction,
because by the time these search instructions reach the leaf nodes, the deletion will have
already taken place.
Both extractmin and extractmax must be performed in two phases. First, the location of
the leaf node holding the minimum or maximum key value is identified. Once this result has
emerged from the output root node, an instruction is inserted for extracting the record. Thus,
the latency of these instructions is twice as large. Furthermore, no search instruction should
be allowed to enter the tree before the second phase has begun.
Insertion of a record is also straightforward. If duplicate keys are not allowed and we
are not certain that a record with the key value y does not already exist, we may precede the
insert(y, z) instruction with a delete (y) instruction. The main difference between the insert
instruction and the previous ones is that the instruction is not broadcast to all leaf nodes, as
we do not want every empty leaf node to insert the new record. Rather, a mechanism is needed
to selectively route an insert instruction to one, and only one, empty leaf node.
A simple mechanism for routing an insert instruction is as follows. Suppose that each
nonleaf node maintains two counters indicating the number of empty leaf nodes in its left
and right subtrees, respectively. When an insert instruction is received by a nonleaf node, it
is sent to one of the subtrees with a nonzero free-space count (perhaps to the one with the
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
155
larger count if both are nonzero or always to the left subtree if possible). The corresponding
subtree counter is then decremented by 1. Figure 8.2 shows an example eight-leaf tree
machine with three empty leaves and the free-space counter values associated with each
circular node. We see in Fig. 8.2 that as the insert instruction is passed to the left child of the
root node, the left counter of the root node is decremented from 1 to 0.
The only remaining problem is to show how the counter values are updated on deleting
a record. When a delete instruction is being sent down the upper tree, it is not yet known
which leaf node will perform the deletion and, thus, which counters must be incremented.
However, if we require that the deleting leaf’s ID be provided to us at the output root, a
second instruction can be inserted into the machine for the sole purpose of updating the
free-space counters. The slight delay between a record being deleted and its space becoming
usable again is not a serious problem unless the tree machine is almost full. Even in this latter
case, the speed penalty is not paid unless an insertion is required shortly after a delete
instruction.
An interesting variant of the tree machine for dictionary operations uses a systolic
binary-tree data structure in which the root of each subtree contains the smallest, median
value, and largest of the key values in that subtree (Fig. 8.3). When a subtree holds an odd
number of keys, its root contains three values and its two subtrees contain the same number
of keys. Otherwise, by convention, the left subtree contains one fewer key. This information
is held in the root in the form of a single-bit flag, so that the next element inserted will be
forwarded to the left subtree and the bit is flipped to indicate complete balance. With this
data structure, the smallest, largest, and median of the stored values is readily accessible in
one clock cycle via the root node. Specifying the details of the algorithms is left as an
exercise.
Figure 8.2. Tree machine storing five records and containing three free slots.
156
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 8.3. Systolic data structure for minimum, maximum, and median finding.
8.3. PARALLEL PREFIX COMPUTATION
Parallel prefix computation was defined in Section 2.1, with several algorithms provided
subsequently in Sections 2.3 (linear array), 2.4 (binary tree), 2.5 (2D mesh), and 5.4 (PRAM).
Here, we use an alternative formulation in terms of linear recurrences. Let ⊗ be an associative
binary operator over S; i.e., (x ⊗ y) ⊗ z = x ⊗ (y ⊗ z ) for all x, y, z ∈ S. Given a sequence of
n input values x 1, x 2 , . . . , xn, solve the linear recurrence
where s 0 is the identity element of the operator ⊗ (e.g., 0 for addition, 1 for multiplication).
Note that the ith output value is s i = x1 ⊗ x 2 ⊗ ... ⊗ x i.
The linear recurrence formulation of the prefix computation immediately suggests a
sequential circuit implementation shown in Fig. 8.4 (left). One input is provided to the circuit,
and one output is produced, in every clock cycle. Obviously, the clock period must be long
enough to accommodate the worst-case signal propagation delay in the circuit computing ⊗
plus the latch hold and setup times. Figure 2.1 represents a computation dependence graph
or a signal flow graph for this scheme, if we take the clock period as a unit of time.
Figure 8.4. Prefix computation using a latched or pipelined function unit.
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
157
Figure 8.5. High-throughput prefix computation using a pipelined function unit.
A q -stage pipelined function unit does not help in speeding up the prefix computation,
for even though the clock period is now much shorter, one input can be supplied after every
q clock ticks. In fact, because of the added overhead for latching of the intermediate results,
the pipelined function unit shown in Fig. 8.4 (right) actually slows the computation down.
Figure 8.5 shows how parallelism can be applied to improve the throughput to one input
or result per clock tick. It is easy to generalize this scheme to use a pipelined function unit
with more stages, leading to a correspondingly higher throughput with a greater investment
in hardware. However, there is a limit beyond which throughput cannot be improved using
this scheme. Namely, if the latching overhead per pipeline stage is c, then the throughput can
never exceed 1/c no matter how many pipelined units are used or how they are arranged.
In Section 8.4, we will review some of the methods for designing faster prefix computation circuits. The prefix computation is quite important. We discussed some of its applications in Section 2.4. Many other interesting applications are reviewed by Lakshmivarahan
and Dhall ([Laks94], pp. 5–35).
8.4. PARALLEL PREFIX NETWORKS
For the sake of brevity and concreteness, we will discuss the design of circuits for
computing parallel prefix sums with unsigned integer inputs, i.e., the operator ⊗ is taken to
be unsigned integer addition. The resulting circuits, which are built of two-input adders, will
be referred to as (parallel ) prefix sum networks. Replacing the two-input adders in these
networks with blocks that compute the operator ⊗ will yield a general parallel prefix
network.
There are many similarities between prefix sum networks and sorting networks that we
discussed in Chapter 7. A two-input binary adder is roughly of the same complexity as a
two-input comparator. Like comparators, these adders can be implemented with parallel
inputs or with bit-serial inputs. In the latter case, the input order should be LSB-first, as
opposed to MSB-first for two-input comparators. Note that if parallel inputs are used, the
adders need not be of the fast variety (e.g., carry-lookahead). In most cases, a simple
ripple-carry adder will do, because the rippling delays in a set of cascaded adders do not add
158
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
up; the rippling in the next adder downstream can begin as soon as the LSB of the sum from
the previous adder becomes available.
Several strategies can be used to synthesize a prefix sum network. The two divide-andconquer methods discussed in connection with PRAM in Section 5.4, and depicted in Figs.
5.7 and 5.8, can form the basis for hardware prefix sum networks. Figures 8.6 and 8.7 depict
the resulting networks. The analyses of Section 5.4 can be used to deduce the delays of
T (n) = 2 log 2 n –1 and T(n) = log2 n for these circuits, where the unit of time is the delay of
a two-input adder. The cost recurrences for the networks of Figs. 8.6 and 8.7 are C (n ) =
C (n /2) + n – 1 = 2n – 2 – log 2 n and C (n) = 2 C(n/2) + n /2 = (n /2) log2 n, respectively.
The two designs in Figs. 8.6 and 8.7 offer a clear speed–cost trade-off. The second design
is faster (log 2 n as opposed to 2 log2 n – 1 levels) but also much more expensive [( n/2) log2
n adders as opposed to 2n – 2 – log 2 n adder blocks]. Another problem with the second design
is that it leads to large fan-out requirements if implemented directly. We will see shortly that
intermediate designs, with costs and delays that fall between the above two extremes, are
also possible.
The design shown in Fig. 8.6 is known as the Brent–Kung parallel prefix graph. The
16-input instance of this graph is depicted in Fig. 8.8. Note that even though the graph of
Fig. 8.8 appears to have seven levels, levels 4 and 5 from the top have no data dependency
and thus imply a single level of signal delay. In general, an n-input Brent–Kung parallel
prefix graph has a delay of 2 log 2 n – 2 levels and a cost of 2 n – 2 – log 2 n blocks.
Figure 8.9 depicts a Kogge–Stone parallel prefix graph that has the same delay as the
design shown in Fig. 8.7 but avoids its fan-out problem by distributing the required
computations. An n-input Kogge–Stone parallel prefix graph has a delay of log2 n levels and
a cost of n log 2 n – n + 1 blocks. The Kogge–Stone parallel prefix graph represents the fastest
possible implementation of a parallel prefix computation if only two-input blocks are
allowed. However, its cost can be prohibitive for large n, in terms of both blocks and the
dense wiring between blocks.
Other parallel prefix network designs are also possible. For example, it has been
suggested that the Brent–Kung and Kogge–Stone approaches of Figs. 8.8 and 8.9 can be
combined to form hybrid designs [Sugl90]. Figure 8.10 shows an example where the middle
Figure 8.6.Prefix sum network built of one n /2-input network and n – 1 adders.
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
159
Figure 8.7. Prefix sum network built of two n /2-input networks and n /2 adders.
four of the six levels in the design of Fig. 8.8 (essentially doing an eight-input parallel prefix
computation) have been replaced by an eight-input Kogge–Stone network. The resulting
design has five levels and 32 blocks, placing it between the pure Brent–Kung (6, 26) and
pure Kogge–Stone (4, 49) designs.
More generally, if a single Brent–Kung level is used along with an n/2-input Kogge–
Stone design, the delay and cost of the hybrid network become log2 n + 1 and (n /2)log 2 n,
respectively. The resulting design is close to the minimum in terms of delay (only one more
than Kogge–Stone) but costs roughly half as much.
The theory of parallel prefix graphs is quite well developed. There exist numerous
theoretical bounds and actual designs with different restrictions on fan-in/fan-out and with
Figure 8.8. Brent–Kung parallel prefix graph for 16 inputs.
160
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 8.9. Kogge–Stone parallel prefix graph for 16 inputs.
Figure 8.10. A hybrid Brent–Kung/Kogge–Stone parallel prefix graph for 16 inputs.
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
161
various optimality criteria in terms of network cost and delay. For a more detailed discussion,
see Lakshmivarahan and Dhall ([Laks94], pp. 133–211).
8.5. THE DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM
The discrete Fourier transform (DFT) is defined as follows. Given the sequence
according to
compute the sequence
The DFT is expressed in matrix form as y = Fn x , which is shorthand for
and
In the above expressions, ωn is the nth primitive root of unity, i.e.,
For 1
and
where
≤ j < n. For example,
The following are easily
derived:
The inverse DFT can be used to recover the x sequence, given the y sequence. It can be shown
that the inverse DFT is essentially the same computation as the DFT. That is,
Note that n processors can compute the DFT in O(n) time steps, without any communication,
if the j th processor computes y j . Also, given the matrix formulation of the DFT, any
matrix–vector multiplication algorithm can be used to compute DFTs. However, the special
structure of F n can be exploited to devise a much faster algorithm based on the divide-andconquer paradigm. The resulting algorithm, described below, is known as the fast Fourier
transform (FFT) algorithm.
Let us partition the DFT summation into odd- and even-indexed terms:
162
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
where we have used the identity ωn /2 = ω²n in rewriting the two summation terms. The two
terms in the last expression are n/2-point DFTs that can be written as
Then:
Hence, the n-point FFT algorithm consists of performing two independent n/2-point FFTs
and then combining their results using n multiply–add operations. The sequential time
complexity of FFT is thus characterized by the recurrence
T(n) = 2T(n/2) + n = n log 2 n
If the two n/2-point subproblems can be solved in parallel and the n multiply–add operations
are also concurrent, with their required inputs transferred to the computing nodes instantly,
then the recurrence for parallel time complexity becomes
T(n) = T(n/2) + 1 = log 2 n
In both cases, the unit of time is the delay of performing one multiply–add operation.
Before discussing hardware circuits to implement the FFT algorithm, it is instructive to
examine some applications of DFT to polynomial arithmetic. First, note that the DFT can
be viewed as polynomial evaluation:
Given the polynomial
Compute
In matrix form,
In a similar way, the inverse DFT can be used for polynomial interpolation:
The problem of multiplying two polynomials f and g to obtain their product h, where
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
163
that is, computing the cj s given the aj s and bj s, can be converted to three n-point DFTs and
n = n' + n'' – 1 complex multiplications as follows:
1. Evaluate g(x) and h(x) at the n nth roots of unity (two n-point DFTs).
2. Evaluate
for all j (n complex multiplications).
3. Interpolate to find the cj s (an n-point inverse DFT).
Thus, Tpoly - mult = 3TDFT + 1. If we use an O(log n)-time FFT algorithm, the overall time for
polynomial multiplication will be O(log n).
Convolution of two n'-element sequences a and b, defined as computing the n-element
sequence c with
is identical to polynomial
multiplication.
Finally, integer multiplication is intimately related to polynomial multiplication, and
thus to DFT. Straightforward k-bit integer multiplication circuits require O(log k) delay and
O(k²) cost (k ² bit multipliers or AND gates, followed by a carry-save adder tree and a
logarithmic-time fast adder). An O(log k)-time integer multiplication algorithm for k-bit
numbers, using O(k log² k log log k ) bit-level processors, is presented by Leighton ([Leig92],
pp. 722–729). The resulting multiplication circuit can be used to multiply O(log k) pairs of
k-bit integers in O(log k) time through pipelining, thus leading to O(k log k log log k ) cost
per multiplication, which is nearly optimal.
8.6. PARALLEL ARCHITECTURES FOR FFT
Figure 8.11 (left) shows an eight-point FFT network that is derived directly from the
divide-and-conquer computation scheme of Section 8.5. Each circular node performs a
multiply–add computation. An inductive proof that this network does indeed compute the
FFT can be easily constructed. Assume that the uj and vj values, the results of n/2-point FFTs
with even- and odd-indexed inputs, are obtained in the upper and lower parts of the circuit,
as shown in Fig. 8.11. Then, it is easy to see that the last stage of the circuit has just the right
connectivity to finish the computation by performing the required n multiply–adds.
By rearranging the nodes of our FFT circuit, which is known as the butterfly network,
we obtain an equivalent representation, as shown in Fig. 8.11 (right). This representation is
known as the shuffle–exchange network. This network, and the reason for its name, will be
discussed in Section 15.5. For now, we view it as simply an equivalent representation of the
FFT network that offers the advantage of identical connectivities between the various stages
of nodes. In the original FFT network, the inputs are separated into even- and odd-indexed
and provided to the top and bottom half of the circuit, respectively, with the outputs obtained
in ascending index order. In the equivalent shuffle–exchange version, the inputs are in
ascending index order from top to bottom, with the outputs obtained in bit-reversal order.
164
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 8.11. Butterfly network for computing an eight-point FFT.
This means that the order of the indices of the output elements is sorted by the reverse of
their binary representations. For example, the binary representation of 4 is 100, with its
reverse being 001. Thus, y4 is the second output from the top.
More efficient FFT networks are possible. For example, Yeh and Parhami [Yeh96]
present a class of FFT networks that are more modular than those in Fig. 8.11 and thus less
costly in VLSI implementation. The shuffle–exchange circuit of Fig. 8.11 (right) can be
somewhat simplified by removing half of the links, as shown in Fig. 8.12 (left). The arrows
in Fig. 8.12 show the path of data movements (through an intermediate node) in lieu of the
missing links.
The butterfly network, and its variants discussed above, can become quite complex for
large n. In this case, more economical implementations may be sought. One way is to project
the circuit of Fig. 8.12 (left) in the horizontal direction, so that a single multiply–add node
Figure 8.12. FFT network variant and its shared-hardware realization.
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
165
Figure 8.13. Linear array of log2 n cells for n -point FFT computation.
performs, in successive time steps, the function of all of the nodes located in one row. The
resulting circuit is shown in Fig. 8.12 (right). Here, the single column of multiply–add nodes
alternately acts as the various columns of nodes in the diagram on the left, with the partial
computation results that would be passed from one column to the next saved in registers or
latches for use in the following time step. This approach reduces the cost of the network from
O(n log n) to O(n), without significantly increasing its delay.
An even more economical implementation results if the diagram is projected vertically
instead of horizontally. Figure 8.13 shows the resulting linear-array circuit, with feedback
shift registers inserted to maintain the proper timing of the various node inputs [Kwai96].
Discovering the details of how this design works is left as an exercise.
PROBLEMS
8.1. Parallel searching
In Section 8.1, a lower bound for parallel searching of a sorted input list using comparison
operations was obtained and an algorithm was given that matched the lower bound.
a . Obtain a lower bound for parallel searching of an unsorted input list.
b. Provide a parallel search algorithm that matches the lower bound of part (a).
c . Can one improve the lower bound of part (a) or the algorithm of part (b) if the input list is
known to be partially sorted in the sense that no element is more than m locations away
from its correct position in a sorted input list, where m < < n?
8.2. Tree machine
This problem relates to the tree-structured dictionary machine of Section 8.2.
a.
We noted that both extractmin and extractmax must be performed in two phases, with no
search instruction allowed to enter the tree before the second phase has begun. Can any
instruction be entered immediately after the above instructions? Why (not)?
b. Design bit-serial processors for a tree machine that performs only the three basic dictionary
operations of search, insert, and delete.
8.3. Modified tree machine
Consider a variant of the tree-structured dictionary machine of Section 8.2 in which the leaves
166
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
are interconnected as a linear array. Records are stored at the left end of the array; empty slots
are at the right.
a. Discuss how this change affects the operation of the leaf nodes and the execution of the
insert instruction.
b. Suppose that in the modified tree machine, the leaves are to hold the records in ascending
order of the key values from left to right. Propose a method for executing the insert
instruction that maintains the sorted order. Does the sorted order lead to any advantage?
8.4.
Systolic priority queue
The systolic binary tree data structure, described at the end of Section 8.2 and depicted in Fig.
8.3, can perform insert, extractmin, extractmax, and extractmed operations at the rate of one
per clock cycle.
a . Describe the insertion algorithm in detail.
b. Describe algorithms for the three extract operations in detail. Make sure that extractmin
and extractmax lead to equal elements being output in FIFO order.
c. Describe a simplified version of the data structure, and its associated algorithms, if we only
need to extract the smallest or largest value (median extraction is not needed).
d. A simple priority queue only needs the insert and extractmin operations. Can we further
simplify the data structure and algorithms of part (c) in this case?
8.5.
Solving linear recurrences
Show that a linear recurrence of the form
can be solved
by a parallel prefix computation involving vectors and matrices. Hint: Look ahead to the end
of Section 11.3 where it is shown that the solution of a tridiagonal system of linear equations
can be converted to a parallel prefix computation.
8.6.
Pipelined prefix computation
Consider the prefix computation scheme of Fig. 8.4 (right) and its parallel version in Fig.
8.5.
a. Ignoring pipelining overhead and start-up time, the latter is 4 times faster than the former.
Is this inconsistent with the assertion that we cannot achieve a speed-up of more than 3
with three processors?
b. Draw a similar diagram assuming a function unit pipeline that has eight stages.
c. Repeat part (b) for a three-stage pipeline.
d. Present a general method of implementation for any q-stage pipeline.
8.7.
Parallel prefix networks
a. Determine the depth and cost of a 64-input hybrid parallel prefix network with two levels
of the Brent–Kung scheme at each end and the rest built by the Kogge–Stone construction.
b. Compare the design of part (a) with pure Brent–Kung and Kogge–Stone schemes and
discuss.
8.8.
Parallel prefix networks
a. Obtain delay and cost formulas for a hybrid parallel prefix network that has l levels of
Brent–Kung design at the top and bottom and an n/ 2l-input Kogge–Stone network in the
middle.
b. Use the delay–cost product figure of merit to find the best combination of the two
approaches for the number n of inputs ranging from 8 to 64 (powers of 2 only).
OTHER CIRCUIT-LEVEL EXAMPLES
167
8.9. Parallel prefix networks
a. Find delay and cost formulas for the Brent–Kung and Kogge–Stone parallel prefix
networks when the number n of inputs is not a power of 2.
b . Draw Brent–Kung, Kogge–Stone, and hybrid parallel prefix graphs for 24 inputs.
c . Using the results of part (b), plot the cost, delay, and cost–delay product for the three types
of networks for n = 16, 24, 32 inputs and discuss,
8.10. Parallel prefix networks
The large fan-out of sn /2–1 in Fig. 8.7 can be replaced by a tree of constant fan-out logic
elements. Show how this might be done to minimize the speed penalty.
8.11. Discrete Fourier transform
a . Write down the Fourier and inverse Fourier matrices, F8 and F –8 1 , in terms of a = ω 8 .
b. Use DFT to multiply the polynomials g(x) = x³ + 2x² – 3x + 1 and h(X) = –x4 + 5x² – x +
4.
c . Describe the computation of part (b) as convolution of two sequences.
d . Can the computation of part (b) be interpreted as multiplying two integers ? If so, what are
the operands and what is the number representation base?
8.12.
Butterfly FFT network
Consider the butterfly FFT computation network.
a. Write down the complete expression for the partial result evaluated at each node in both
versions of the network shown in Fig. 8.11.
b . Consider the butterfly network in reverse order, i.e., with inputs entering at the rightmost
column and outputs produced at the left Show the ordering of the inputs and outputs in
both versions of the network shown in Fig. 8.11.
8.13. Butterfly FFT network
Consider the butterfly FIT computation network of Fig. 8.11.
a. Draw both versions of the network for n = 16 inputs.
b. Repeat part (a) for n = 12 inputs.
8.14. Shuffle–exchange FFT network
Consider the FFT network variant depicted in Fig. 8.12. Each pair of circular nodes interconnected in the same column constitute a butterfly processor.
a . Redraw the left diagram in Fig. 8.12, showing the three columns of butterfly processors,
the eight inputs, and the eight outputs.
b . Redraw the right diagram in Fig, 8.12, including the registers in the butterfly processors.
c . Present the complete design of a butterfly processor,
8.15. FFT on a line array
This problem relates to the linear array of log 2 n cells for computing the n-point FFT (Fig.
8.13).
a . Explain how the three-cell linear array computes the eight-point FFT. Hint; In cycles 0–3,
the inputs x 0 , x1 , x 2 , and x 3 are simply placed in the four-element feedback shift register
and are subsequently combined with x 4 , x 5 , x 6 , and x 7 in cycles 4–7.
b . How much time is needed to compute an n-point FFT on the (log2 n)-cell linear array‘?
c . Discuss the control scheme for setting the cell multiplexers in the proper state as required
by your explanation for part (a).
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
168
d.
Show that the control settings of part (c) can be implemented by attaching a control tag to
each input [Kwai96].
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Bent79]
[Kwai96]
[Laks94]
[Leig92]
[Nara96]
[Parh90]
[Sug190]
[Yeh96]
Bentley, J. L., and H. T. Kung, “A Tree Machine for Searching Problems,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel
Processing, pp. 257–266, 1979.
Kwai, D.-M., and B. Parhami, “FFT Computation with Linear Processor Arrays Using a Data-Driven
Control Scheme,” J. VLSI Signal Processing, Vol. 13, pp. 57–66, 1996.
Lakshmivarahan, S., and S.K. Dhall, Parallel Computing Using the Prefix Problem, Oxford University Press, 1994.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Narayanan, T. S., “A Class of Semi-X Tree-Based Dictionary Machines,” The Computer J., Vol. 39,
No. 1, pp. 45–51,1996.
Parhami, B., “Massively Parallel Search Processors: History and Modern Trends,” Proc. 4th Int.
Parallel Processing Symp., pp. 91–104,1990.
Sugla, B., and D. A. carlson, “Extreme Area-Time Tradeoffs in VLSI,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol.
39, No. 2, pp. 251–257, February 1990.
Yeh, C.-H., and B. Parhami, “A Class of Parallel Architectures for Fast Fourier Transform,” Proc.
39th Midwest Symp. Circuits and Systems, 1996, pp. 856–859.
III
Mesh-Based
Architectures
The bulk of this part is devoted to the study of 2D meshes and tori, a class of
parallel architectures that can be built quite easily in VLSI and that are readily
scalable to very large configurations. One might say that 2D meshes and tori
occupy one end of the spectrum that has the physically unrealistic PRAM model
at the other end. If the processors in a 2D mesh have simple circuit-level
realizations and are driven by an external control unit in SIMD mode, then the
mesh can be viewed as just another circuit-level model of parallel processing
with the additional benefits of localized connectivity and regularity; properties
that can lead to compact layout and high performance. However, we do not
view meshes or tori in this way. Rather, we use more complex processors, or
processing elements, to make our mesh-based parallel processors
flexible and
,
easier to use for a variety of computational problems. Sorting on 2D meshes is
covered first, followed by data routing and numerical algorithms. We conclude
with variations and extensions of the simple 2D mesh or torus, as well as certain
related architectures. This part consists of the following four chapters:
•
•
•
•
Chapter 9:
Chapter 10:
Chapter 11:
Chapter 12:
Sorting on 2D Mesh or Torus
Routing on 2D Mesh or Torus
Numerical 2D Mesh Algorithms
Other Mesh-Related Architectures
169
This page intentionally left blank.
9
Sorting on a 2D
Mesh or Torus
There are good reasons for beginning our discussion of 2D mesh and torus
architectures through algorithms for the seemingly difficult sorting problem. First,
sorting on the 2D mesh is nothing like its counterpart on the PRAM; it is easy to
build fairly efficient sorting algorithms for the 2D mesh and the process of refining
these algorithms into more efficient ones is also quite intuitive. Second, the
discussion of sorting networks in Chapter 7 has given us all the background that
we need for building, verifying, and evaluating mesh sorting algorithms. So we
can delve right into the algorithms, and the fascinating methods and observations
used in their designs, following a short introductory discussion of the machine
model(s) assumed. Third, sorting is an ideal vehicle for exposing the strengths
and weaknesses of mesh-based architectures in communication-intensive applications. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
Mesh-connected computers
The shearsort algorithm
Variants of simple shearsort
Recursive sorting algorithms
A nontrivial lower bound
Achieving the lower bound
171
This page intentionally left blank.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
173
9.1. MESH-CONNECTED COMPUTERS
A 2D mesh of processors was defined in Section 2.2 and some simple algorithms for it
were presented in Section 2.5. This section covers a complete definition for the simple 2D
mesh, including variations in control, interprocessor communication, input/output, and
processor indexing. Extensions such as higher dimensions, stronger and weaker connectivities, inclusion of buses, addition of express channels, triangular or hexagonal shapes,
variations in the wraparound links, and reconfigurable connectivity will be covered in
Chapter 12.
Figure 9.1 shows the basic 2D mesh architecture. Each processor, other than the ones
located on the boundary, has degree 4. The free links of the boundary processors can be used
for input/output or to establish row and column wraparound connections to form a 2D torus.
Variations in the wraparound links (such as connecting to the next row/column, rather than
to the same row/column) will not be discussed here. A k × k mesh has diameter 2k – 2 and
bisection width k or k + 1. A k × k torus has diameter k or k – 1 and bisection width 2 k o r
2k + 2.
A k × k torus is sometimes referred to as a k-ary 2-cube (or 2D “cube” of size k). The
general form of this architecture is known as k-ary q-cube (q-D cube of size k). In particular,
for k = 2, we get the class of 2-ary (or binary) q -cubes, also known as (binary) hypercubes.
Thus, 2D torus and binary hypercube represent the two extremes of the k-ary q -cube
architecture; fixing q at 2 gives us the 2D torus architecture with fixed node degree and
diameter, while fixing k at 2 gives us the binary hypercube with logarithmic node
degree and Θ(log p) diameter.
A 2D mesh can be laid out on a VLSI chip in an area that increases linearly with the
number of processors. Because of the short, local connections between processors, the area
consumed by the wires is negligible and it would be quite realistic and fair to equate the
complexity or implementation cost of a 2D mesh computer with the number p of processors
that it contains. Furthermore, the signal propagation delay between adjacent processors is
quite small, making it possible to perform communications at very high speed. A 2D torus,
on the other hand, has long wraparound links that can slow down interprocessor communication. However, it is possible to lay out a 2D torus in such a way that it too uses only short,
local links. Figure 9.2 depicts the method of folding that can be used for this purpose.
Figure 9.1. Two-dimensional mesh-connected computer.
174
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 9.2. A 5×5 torus folded along its columns. Folding this diagram along the rows will
produce a layout with only short links.
Unless otherwise stated, the links between processors in 2D meshes and tori are assumed
to be bidirectional and capable of carrying data in both directions at the same time (full
duplex). The four neighbors of a node are sometimes referred to as north, east, west, and
south, leading to the name NEWS mesh. Alternatively, the neighbors may be identified as
“top/up/above,” “right,” “left,” and “bottom/down/below.” For example, a communication
action may be specified for a processor as “send x to north/south neighbor,” “send x
up/down,” “receive x from south/north neighbor,” or “receive x from below/above.”
Various control schemes are possible. In a MIMD mesh, the processors run independent
programs and communicate asynchronously with their four neighbors. A SPMD mesh is
similar, except that the node programs are identical. In a SIMD mesh, all processor actions
are dictated by a shared central control unit. SIMD mesh is the default model assumed in
this book.
Various submodels of the SIMD mesh can be defined with respect to interprocessor
communication. In the weakest submodel, all processors must communicate with a neighbor
in the same direction, e.g., all send data to their “north” neighbor or “upward.” In this weak
SIMD submodel, there is never contention for the use of a link; thus, even half-duplex links
will do. Next in terms of power is a mesh in which each processor can send a message
to only one neighbor in each step, but the neighbor is determined locally based on
data-dependent conditions. Of course, in this case, a processor must be able to receive data
from all neighbors at once. The most powerful submodel allows transmission and reception
to/from all neighbors at once, leading to what is known as the all-port communication model.
Processors in a 2D mesh can be indexed (numbered) in a variety of ways. The simplest
and most natural is to identify or label each processor by its row and column indices, using
either 0-origin or l-origin indexing (we use 0-origin throughout this book). Thus, Processor
(0, 0) is at the upper left corner, Processor
is at the upper right corner, and
Processor(
is at the lower right corner of a p-processor square mesh.
It is at times more convenient to number the processors from 0 to p – 1. This puts the
processors into a linear order that can be used to assign priorities or to define the order of
data elements in processors when we sort them. Figure 9.3 shows some of the possible
indexing schemes. You are already familiar with the row-major and snakelike row-major
orders. Column-major and snakelike column-major orders can be defined similarly. The
shuffled row-major order is a recursive indexing scheme where the mesh is divided into four
quadrants and the quadrants are indexed in row-major order; numbering within each quadrant
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
175
Figure 9.3. Some linear indexing schemes for the processors in a 2D mesh.
is done using the same scheme recursively. Finally, proximity order is also recursive but has
the additional property that processors whose indices differ by 1 are neighbors.
A few words about interprocessor communication in a 2D mesh are in order. Each
processor can communicate with its NEWS neighbors. The actual data transfer mechanism
will be different depending on the communication style. We will take the simple view
depicted in Fig. 9.4 where one or more registers in each processor are viewed as part of the
register space of each of its NEWS neighbors. Hence, access to any of the Registers R1
through R4 in a processor is viewed as reading an element from a neighbor’s register. Even
this simple scheme can be implemented in a variety of ways. The left diagram in Fig. 9.4
depicts a scheme in which a single value placed in Register R 5 of a processor is made available
to its NEWS neighbors. The right diagram in Fig. 9.4 allows more flexibility in that different
values can be sent to the four neighbors. This is particularly helpful in routing of multiple
independent messages through a node. To forward a message eastward, for example, a
processor simply copies its Register R3 into R7 .
Figure 9.4. Reading data from NEWS neighbors via virtual local registers.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
176
9.2. THE SHEARSORT ALGORITHM
The shearsort algorithm was described without proof, in Section 2.5. Here, we look at
the algorithm in more detail and provide a proof of its convergence and correctness. As an
algorithm, shearsort is not very efficient and we will see more efficient 2D mesh sorting
algorithms later. However, shearsort is very easy to describe, prove, and analyze. Furthermore, it can be used as a building block in the synthesis of more efficient sorting algorithms.
Thus, shearsort is important, both as a pedagogical tool and as a practical one.
We begin by assuming that each processor holds a single data item (key) and that the
data should be arranged in nondescending order according to row-major or snakelike
row-major order. Thus, there are p data items and p processors that form an r ×(p/r) mesh
(with r rows and p/r columns). In its simplest form, the shearsort algorithm consists of
phases (Fig. 9.5). In each phase, except for the last one, all rows are independently
sorted in snakelike order: even-numbered rows 0, 2, . . . from left to right, odd-numbered
rows 1, 3, . . . from right to left. Then, all columns are independently sorted from top to
bottom. In the final phase, rows are independently sorted in snakelike order, or from left to
right, depending on the final sorted order desired.
The time complexity of shearsort is easily derived by noting that each row (column) sort
takes p/r ( r) compare–exchange steps, because rows (columns) are linear arrays for which
the odd–even transposition sort is applicable (see Section 2.3):
On a square
mesh, the time complexity of simple shearsort becomes (approximately)
To prove the convergence and correctness of shearsort, it suffices to show that any 0/1
pattern is properly sorted by the algorithm (the zero–one principle). Consider an arbitrary
pattern of 0s and 1s and focus on the first column sort following the initial snakelike row
sort. The end result of this column sort will not change if we precede it with a redundant
Figure 9.5. Description of the shearsort algorithm on an r-row 2D mesh.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
177
compare–exchange between each even-indexed element and the odd-indexed element directly below it (0&1, 2&3, 4&5, . . .). A pair of rows affected by such exchanges can be in
one of three classes:
a.
b.
c.
They contain more 0s than 1s.
They contain more 1s than 0s.
They contain the same number of 0s and 1s.
In each case, the redundant exchange creates at least one “clean” row (containing only 0s or
only 1s) and no more than one “dirty” row (containing both 0s and 1s), as shown in Fig. 9.6.
In sorting the columns, such clean rows “bubble up” or “sink down” and lead to a total of at
least
rows of the array being in their final sorted order. This reduction of the number
of dirty rows by a factor of 2, from r to
to
and so on (Fig. 9.7), continues
until, after
iterations, we have at most one dirty row remaining. This last dirty row
will be put in its proper sorted order by the final phase of the algorithm.
Figure 9.8 shows a complete example for the application of shearsort to sorting 16 keys
on a 4 × 4 mesh. The initial data distribution is given at the top. Then we have two iterations
of snakelike row sorts followed by column sorts. Finally, we end with row-major or snakelike
row sorts, depending on the desired sorted order. Note, in particular, that with arbitrary keys,
“clean” and “dirty” rows do not exist and thus the notions of clean and dirty rows cannot be
used to measure the progress toward the eventual sorted order. In fact, we see in the example
of Fig. 9.8 that none of the rows assumes its final sorted state until the very last step in the
algorithm.
Note that sorting the rows in snakelike order is the key to being able to sort the array by
independent row and column sorts. Take the example of a 4 × 4 mesh with each of its four
rows initially containing the bit pattern 0111. Clearly, no amount of row/column sorting,
with row-major order for row sorts, will sort this array.
Figure 9.6. A pair of dirty rows create at least one clean row in each shearsort iteration.
178
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 9.7. The number of dirty rows halves with each shearsort iteration.
Figure 9.8. Example of shearsort on a 4 × 4 mesh.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
9.3.
179
VARIANTS OF SIMPLE SHEARSORT
Shearsort can be terminated earlier in some cases because sorting is complete when no
exchange occurs during a row sort or a column sort. In practice, one cannot take advantage
of this early termination feature unless some form of fast global combine operation is
implemented in hardware.
It is, however, possible to speed up shearsort by a constant factor by taking advantage
of the reduction of the number of dirty rows in each iteration. Note that in sorting a sequence
of 0s and 1s on a linear array, the number of odd–even transposition steps can be limited to
the number of dirty elements that are not already in their proper places (0 S at the left/top, 1s
at the right/bottom). For example, sorting the sequence 000001011111 requires no more than
two odd–even transposition steps. Therefore, we can replace the complete column sorts
within the shearsort algorithm with successively fewer odd–even transposition steps; r in the
initial step, r/2  in the next step, and so forth. The time complexity of this optimized
shearsort then becomes
When r is a power of 2, the above simplifies to (p/r)(log 2 r + 1) + 2r – 2. For a square
mesh, time complexity of the optimized version of shearsort is approximately
Figure 9.9. Example of shearsort on a 4 × 4 mesh with two keys stored per processor.
180
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Simple shearsort can be easily extended to the case where multiple keys are stored in
each processor. The algorithm begins by presorting the sublists of size n/p within the
processors, using any sequential sorting algorithm. It then proceeds with row and column
sorts as in simple (p-input) shearsort, except that each compare–exchange step of the latter
is replaced by a “merge–split” step involving lists of size n/p. For example, if n/p = 4 and
the two processors doing the compare–exchange step in simple shearsort now hold the
sublists {1, 5, 8, 8} and {2, 3, 5, 7}, the merge–split step will result in the two processors
holding, in the sorting order, the sublists {1, 2, 3, 5} and {5, 7, 8, 8}. Performing a merge–split
operation on two sorted lists of length n/p requires n/p compare–exchange steps in the worst
case.
Figure 9.9 shows an example of shearsort with two keys stored per processor. The time
complexity of the shearsort algorithm with n/p keys per processors is easily obtained from
the Θ (( n/p) log (n/p )) complexity of the presort phase and the Θ (n/p) complexity of each
merge–split operation.
9.4. RECURSIVE SORTING ALGORITHMS
A recursive algorithm for sorting on a square
mesh, based on four-way divideand-conquer strategy, is shown in Fig. 9.10. The algorithm consists of four phases.
First recursive sorting algorithm on a 2D mesh
1. Sort each of the four quadrants in snakelike order.
2. Sort the rows independently, in snakelike order.
Figure 9.10. Graphical depiction of the first recursive algorithm for sorting on a 2D mesh based
on four-way divide and conquer.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
181
3. Sort the columns independently, from top to bottom.
steps of odd–even transposition along the overall snake.
4. Apply
In the last phase, the mesh is viewed as a snakelike p-processor linear array for the application
steps of odd–even transposition.
of the
If the above algorithm is in fact correct, as we will show shortly, its running time is
characterized by the following recurrence:
steps
is the sum of
for row sort (with each half being already sorted,
where
of odd–even transposition suffice for row sort),
for column sort, and
for the last
phase.
As usual, we prove the algorithm correct by using the zero–one principle. Figure 9.11
(left side) shows the state of the array after sorting the four quadrants in Phase 1, with various
numbers of clean 0 and 1 rows as indicated. The snakelike row sort in Phase 2 will spread
the elements of these clean rows roughly evenly in the left and right halves of the array. After
Phase 3, we end up with x clean 0 rows on the top and x' clean 1 rows at the bottom. Because
at most one dirty row remains in each quadrant after sorting it, each of the sums a + a', b +
Let a > b and c < d, as shown in Fig. 9.11
b', c + c', or d + d' is either
(other cases are similar). Then, the row sorts of Phase 2 produce b + c clean 0 rows outright
clean 0 rows as a result of the extra 0 half-rows being divided
and
equally among the left and right halves of the array by the snakelike row sorts. Thus, the
number of clean 0 rows at the end of Phase 3 of the algorithm satisfies
A similar inequality for x' leads to
Figure 9.11. The proof of the first recursive sorting algorithm for 2D meshes.
182
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Hence, the number
of dirty rows after Phase 3 is at most 4. Now, viewing the
steps of odd–even transpoarray as a p -processor snakelike linear array and applying
sition will put the
potentially out-of-position elements in their proper places.
A second, somewhat more efficient, recursive algorithm for sorting on a square
mesh is again based on four-way divide-and-conquer strategy. The algorithm consists of
four phases.
Second recursive sorting algorithm on a 2D mesh
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sort each of the four quadrants in snakelike order.
Shuffle the columns, i.e., interlace the left- and right-half elements in each row.
Sort pairs of columns, 0 & 1, 2 & 3, etc., in snakelike row-major order.
Apply
steps of odd–even transposition along the overall snake.
Figure 9.12 shows the four algorithm phases graphically. In the last phase, the mesh is viewed
as a snakelike p-processor linear array for the application of the
steps of odd–even
transposition.
Again, assuming that the algorithm is in fact correct, its running time is characterized
by the following recurrence:
Figure 9.12. Graphical depiction of the second recursive algorithm for sorting on a 2D mesh
based on four-way divide and conquer.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
183
Figure 9.13. The proof of the second recursive sorting algorithm for 2D meshes.
where the term 4.5 is the sum of 0.5
for row shuffling (this is the maximum distance
that an element needs to move to the right or to the left), 2 for double-column sorts, and
2 for the last phase.
By now you can probably guess that we need to use the zero–one principle in order to
prove the above algorithm correct. The structure of the proof is depicted in Fig. 9.13. As in
Fig. 9.11, representing the proof of the first recursive sorting algorithm, the numbers of clean
0 rows in the four quadrants have been indicated in Fig. 9.13. Filling in the remaining details
of the correctness proof is left as an exercise.
9.5. A NONTRIVIAL LOWER BOUND
Because the diameter of a square
mesh is 2
–2, a
-time algorithm is
the best that we can hope for. However, our best
-time algorithm thus far is about 4.5
times slower that the diameter-based lower bound. Two natural questions at this point are
1. Can we raise the 2 – 2 lower bound?
2. Can we design a sorting algorithm with a lower execution time than 9
?
184
Figure 9.14. The proof of the 3
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
lower bound for sorting in snakelike row-major order.
In this section, we show that for sorting in snakelike row-major order, the lower bound can
be raised to 3
Then, in Section 9.6, we present an algorithm that matches this
lower bound asymptotically in that its execution time is 3
Consider the square
mesh depicted in Fig. 9.14. The shaded triangular region
at the upper left corner of this mesh contains 2
processors and keys. Let the keys held by
the p – 2
processors in the unshaded region be the numbers 1 through p – 2
Each of
the keys in the shaded part is 0 or p – 2 + 1 (i.e., all are smaller or larger than those in the
unshaded region), with the number of 0s being z, 0
We denote by x[t] the key held
by the processor at the lower right corner of the mesh at time step t, as the sorting algorithm
is executed.
We now take an arbitrary sorting algorithm and show that it needs at least 3
steps to sort the above keys in snakelike row-major order. Consider the state of the mesh
after the algorithm has run for 2
– 3 steps and, in particular, the value x[2
–
2
– 3] held by the processor at the lower right corner of the mesh. Because the shortest
path from any processor in the shaded region to the corner processor contains at least
2
– 2 hops, this corner value can in no way depend on the number z of 0s in the
the correct final position of the
shaded region. If we vary z from 0 to its maximum of 2
value x[2
– 3] in the sorted order can be made to be in any of the columns, and in
particular in Column 0. Thus, in the worst case, the algorithm needs at least – 1 additional
steps to complete the sorting. The total running time of the algorithm is thus lower bounded
by
Consider, for example, a 9 × 9 square mesh (p = 81). By the above construction, each of the
18 processors in the shaded region holds a key value 0 or 64, while the remaining processors
hold the key values 1 through 63. If z = 18, the initial state and final sorted order are as shown
on the left side of Fig. 9.15. The other extreme of z = 0 is depicted on the right side of Fig.
9.15. It is clear from this example that as z gradually changes from 0 to 18, the final location
of each of the key values 1–63 shifts through every column in the mesh.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
185
Figure 9.15. Illustrating the effect of fewer or more 0 S in the shaded area.
If we run any given sorting algorithm for 10 steps, the key value that appears at the lower
right corner will be independent of z. If after these 10 steps, the lower right value is 55, say,
then choosing any of the values 0, 9, or 18 for z will force the algorithm to work for at least
8 more steps just to shift the key value 55 to column 0 where it belongs. So, the algorithm
needs at least 10 + 8 = 18 steps for this particular example (it will likely need more).
Note that the above proof only applies to the snakelike final order and is based on the
implicit assumption that each processor holds one key initially and at each step of the
algorithm. Nigam and Sahni [Niga95] have shown that by “folding” the keys into half of the
columns, so that each processor in the central half of the mesh holds two keys, the above
lower bound can be overcome and sorting done in roughly 2.5 communication steps. More
186
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
generally, folding the keys into /k columns reduces the sorting time even further for k >
2. A different approach to obtaining a sorting algorithm that requires 2.5 + o
communication steps on a p-processor square 2D mesh is provided by Kunde [Kund91].
9.6. ACHIEVING THE LOWER BOUND
In this section, we describe a sorting algorithm, reported by Schnorr and Shamir
[Schn86], that comes very close to the 3 lower bound of Section 9.5 in terms of its running
time. However, the mesh has to be quite large for the algorithm to be significantly faster than
the simpler algorithms presented earlier in this chapter. This is so because in the analysis of
the algorithm, several terms on the order of p3/8 or p 3/8 log 2 p are ignored in comparison with
p 1/2 . For p = 2 32 or approximately 4 billion processors, we have p 3/8 log 2 p= 2 12 ×32 = 128K
compared with p 1/2 = 2 16 = 64K. Once the algorithm is described, the reader will see that the
lower-order terms ignored in the analysis in fact constitute a significant portion of the running
time even when the number of processors is in the billions. Hence, presently, this algorithm
cannot be considered practical.
Figure 9.16 depicts the divide-and-conquer strategy, and some relevant notation, for
presenting this asymptotically optimal sorting algorithm.
The eight-phase Schnorr–Shamir algorithm for snakelike sorting on a 2D mesh is based
on dividing the p 1/2 ×p 1/2 mesh into smaller p 3/8 ×p 3/8 submeshes (blocks), sorting the blocks
independently in Phase 1, and then merging the results through various data movement and
sorting operations in the remaining seven phases.
The Schnorr–Shamir algorithm for snakelike sorting on a 2D mesh
1. Sort all of the blocks in snakelike order, independently and in parallel.
Figure 9.16. Notation for the asymptotically optimal sorting algorithm.
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
2.
187
Permute the columns such that the columns of each vertical slice are evenly
distributed among all vertical slices.
Sort each block in snakelike order.
Sort the columns independently from top to bottom.
Sort Blocks 0&1, 2&3, . . . of all vertical slices together in snakelike order, i.e., sort
within 2 p3/8 × p 3/8 submeshes.
Sort Blocks 1&2, 3&4, . . . of all vertical slices together in snakelike order again
sorting is done within 2p3/8 × p 3/8 submeshes.
Sort the rows independently in snakelike order.
Apply 2p3/8 steps of odd–even transposition to the overall snake.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The proof of correctness for this algorithm is somewhat involved and is thus not presented
here (like all other proofs in this chapter, it is based on the zero–one principle).
Each of Phases 1, 3, 5, and 6 of the algorithm can be executed in O( p3/8 log p)
compare–exchange steps, say by using the shearsort algorithm. Each of Phases 2, 4, and 7
requires at most p 1/2 steps. Phase 8 obviously needs 2p 3/8 steps. The total running time is thus
upper bounded by 3p 1/2 + o(p1/2 ), where the second term can be replaced by Θ(p3/8 log p).
PROBLEMS
9.1.
Topological properties of meshes and tori
Write an expression for the diameter of an r × (p/r) mesh and show that it is minimized
when the mesh is square.
b. Repeat part (a) for an r × (p/r) torus.
c. Write an expression for the bisection width of an r × (p/r) mesh and show that it is
maximized when the mesh is square.
d. Repeat part (c) for an r × (p/r) torus.
a.
9.2. Topological properties of meshes and tori
Diameter or worst-case distance is not the only indicator of communication delay. Average or
expected distance is often of greater importance.
a. What is the average distance from a given node to a random destination node in a p-node
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
9.3.
linear array?
Repeat part (a) for a p-node ring.
What is the average distance between two randomly selected nodes in a p-node linear array?
Repeat part (c) for a p-node ring.
Using the result of part (a), find the average distance from a given node to a random
destination node in an r × (p/r) mesh.
Repeat part (e) for an r × (p/r) torus, using the result of part (b).
Using the result of part (c), find the average distance between two randomly selected nodes
in an r × (p/r) mesh.
Repeat part (g) for an r × (p/r) torus, using the result of part (d).
VLSI layout of a 2D mesh or torus
Consider the problem of laying out a mesh or torus on a grid with unit distance between
horizontal and vertical lines. Nodes or processors occupy no area (they are shown as dots) and
wires are restricted to be nonoverlapping and routed on grid lines (intersecting wires are
188
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
acceptable). Let the number p of processors be an even power of 2. Clearly, a p-processor 2D
mesh can be laid out in p units of area.
a.
b.
What is the area needed for laying out a p-processor 2D torus with long wraparound links?
What is the area needed for laying out a p-processor torus if it is folded along the rows and
columns to make all interprocessor connections short?
9.4. Interprocessor communication
Using the communication convention shown in the left side of Fig. 9.4 and assuming that each
processor knows the number r of rows in the mesh, the total number p of processors, and its
own row/column indices (i, j), write a complete program at the level of an assembly language
to sort the elements of each row in snakelike order; i.e., even rows sorted from left to right, odd
rows from right to left.
9.5.
Row and column sorts
a.
b.
Show that if we sort the rows of a matrix from left to right and then sort the columns from
top to bottom, the rows will remain in sorted order.
Show that sorted rows and columns are necessary but not sufficient for a matrix being
sorted in row-major order, while the condition is necessary and sufficient with snakelike
ordering.
9.6. The shearsort algorithm
Prove that if an array of integer keys is sorted by applying the shearsort algorithm, the state of
the array just before the final row sort is such that if we pick an arbitrary threshold value t,
replacing all keys that are less than t with 0 and all those that are greater than or equal to t with
1, the resulting array of 0s and 1s will have at most one dirty row.
9.7.
Optimized shearsort on a 2D mesh
a.
b.
c.
9.8.
Considering the analysis of optimized shearsort, find a closed-form tight bound on the
complexity when r is not a power of 2. Hint: The worst case occurs for r = 2 a + 1.
Prove that your bound is tight by providing one example when the bound is actually
reached.
Can optimized shearsort be extended to the case when n/p keys are stored per processor?
If it can, provide algorithm details and its time complexity. If not, state why.
Recursive sorting on a 2D mesh
Show that in the first recursive sorting algorithm presented in Section 9.4, replacing Phase 4
(the one saying “apply 4 steps of odd–even transposition along the overall snake”) by row
sorts and partial column sorts, as in optimized shearsort, would lead to a more efficient
algorithm. Provide complexity analysis for the improved version of the algorithm.
9.9. The shearsort algorithm
Show that on an r × 2 mesh, shearsort requires only 3r/2 + 3 steps. Then use this result to
improve the performance of the second recursive sorting algorithm described in Section 9.4,
providing the complexity analysis for the improved version.
9.10. The columnsort algorithm
Consider a seven-phase algorithm that sorts the p elements in an r × ( p/r) matrix in columnmajor order. During Phases 1, 3, and 7, the columns are independently sorted from top to
bottom. During Phase 5, the columns are sorted in snakelike column-major order. During Phase
2, we “transpose” the matrix by picking up the items in column-major order and setting them
189
SORTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
down in row-major order, while preserving the r × (p/r) shape of the matrix. During Phase 4,
we reverse the permutation applied in Phase 2, picking up items in row-major order and setting
them down in column-major order. During Phase 6, we apply two odd–even transposition steps
to each row.
a.
b.
c.
9.11.
Show that the above algorithm, known as columnsort, sorts the matrix into column-major
order provided that r³ ≥ p ² .
Find the time complexity of columnsort when performed on an r × (p/r) mesh.
Find the time complexity of columnsort when the r × (p/r) matrix is mapped onto a
×
mesh, with each matrix column occupying r/
(an integer) consecutive mesh columns.
Sorting on a ring of processors
Using a method similar to that used in Section 9.5, prove that a p-processor ring requires at
least 3p/4 – O( 1) steps to sort p items if each processor is restricted to holding exactly one key
in each step. The sorted order is defined as Processor 0 holding the smallest key and the keys
appearing in nondescending order in clockwise direction. Hint: Consider the p/2 processors
that are farthest away from Processor 0 and assume that the key values held by these processors
are smaller or larger than the keys held by the other p/2 processors.
9.12. Optimal snakelike sorting algorithm
1/2
Using the zero–one principle, prove the correctness of the (3p 1 / 2 + o(p ))-step Schnorr–
Shamir sorting algorithm described in Section 9.6 (see [Schn86] or [Leig92], pp. 148–151).
9.13. Bounds for sorting
The bisection bound on sorting on a square 2D mesh is
a.
b.
c.
/2 steps.
Show that if interprocessor communication is restricted to be in one direction in each step,
then a corresponding multisection lower bound of
applies [Kund91].
Derive similar bound for k–k sorting, where each processor begins and ends with k records.
Modify the above lower bounds for a p-processor 2D square torus.
9.14.
Mesh sorting by interleaved row/column sorts
Consider a 2D mesh sorting algorithm based on row sorts and columns sorts, except that the
row sorting and column sorting steps are interleaved (i.e., we perform one odd–even transposition step along the rows, then one along the columns, again one along the rows, and so on).
As in shearsort, the row sort steps are done in opposite directions for adjacent rows. Analyze
this algorithm and derive its worst-case performance.
9.15.
Average-case performance of sorting algorithms
Our analyses of sorting algorithms in this chapter focused on worst-case performance. Mesh
sorting algorithms that are asymptotically optimal in terms of their worst-case performance are
clearly also optimal in terms of their average-case performance when applied to randomly
ordered key values. Show that the average-case performance of shearsort is also asymptotically
the same as its worst-case performance. Hint: Consider what happens to the k smallest keys as
shearsort runs on a k × k mesh.
9.16.
The revsort sorting algorithm
Consider a k × k torus sorting algorithm that is based on alternately sorting rows and columns.
The ith row is cyclically sorted from left to right beginning at Processor rev(i), where rev(i) is
the integer whose binary representation is the reverse of i; e.g., in an 8 × 8 torus, rev(1) =
rev((001) two ) = (100) two = 4.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
190
a.
b.
c.
Prove that all numbers are close to their final row positions after O(log log k) iterations of
a row sort followed by a column sort.
Show that the time complexity of the revsort algorithm is O( k log log k) .
Show that the wraparound links of the torus are not needed and that a 2D mesh can achieve
the same time complexity as in part (b).
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Chle90]
[Kund91]
[Leig85]
[Leig92]
[Niga95]
[Sche86]
[Schn86]
Chlebus, B. S., and M. Kukawka, “A Guide to Sorting on the Mesh-Connected Processor Array,”
Computers and Artificial Intelligence, Vol. 9, pp. 599–610, 1990.
Kunde, M., “Concentrated Regular Data Streams on Grids: Sorting and Routing Near to the Bisection
Bound,” Proc. Symp. Foundations of Computer Science, 1991, pp. 141–150.
Leighton, T., “Tight Bounds on the Complexity of Parallel Sorting,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol.
34, No. 4, pp. 344–354, April 1985.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan–Kaufmann, 1992.
Nigam, M., and S. Sahni, “Sorting n² Numbers on n × n Meshes,” IEEE Trans. Parallel and Distributed
Systems, Vol. 6, No. 12, pp. 1221–1225, December 1995.
Scherson, I., S. Sen, and A. Shamir, “Shear-sort: A True Two-Dimensional Sorting Technique for
VLSI Networks,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1986, pp. 903–908.
Schnorr, C. P. and A. Shamir, “ An Optimal Sorting Algorithm for Mesh Connected Computers,” Proc.
Symp. Theory of Computing, 1986, pp. 255–263.
10
Routing on a 2D
Mesh or Torus
Data routing is needed to make a data item present or computed in one processor
available to other processors. In PRAM, all memory words are directly accessible
to all processors, so the data routing problem is nonexistent. In the circuit model
(e.g., sorting networks), one directly connects the producer of each data word
to all of its consumers, so data routing is hardwired into the design. For meshes
and other network-based architectures, access to a nonlocal data item requires
explicit routing of the access request to the processor where the data item resides
and, in the case of reading, explicit routing of the accessed value back to the
requesting processor. In this chapter we review methods for data routing on 2D
meshes and analyze these methods with regard to their routing delays and
resource requirements. Chapter topics are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
10.5.
10.6.
Types of data routing operations
Useful elementary operations
Data routing on a 2D array
Greedy routing algorithms
Other classes of routing algorithms
Wormhole routing
191
This page intentionally left blank.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
193
10.1. TYPES OF DATA ROUTING OPERATIONS
Most of our discussion will focus on packet data routing or packet switching where a
packet is an atomic unit of data transfer. A packet may be a complete message, containing
one or more data values, or a part of a longer message. In the latter case, the packet will have
a sequence number indicating that it is the ith packet (out of j packets). Because we often
deal with data transfers involving a single data element, we use packet and message
interchangeably. A packet or message typically has a header that holds the destination
address, plus possibly some routing information supplied by its sender, and a message body
(sometimes called payload ) that carries the actual data. Depending on the routing algorithm
used, the routing information in the header may be modified by intermediate nodes. A
message may also have various other control and error detection or correction information,
which we will ignore for simplicity.
Depending on the multiplicity of data sources and destinations, data routing or communication can be divided into two classes: one-to-one (one source, one destination) and
collective (multiple sources and/or multiple destinations).
A processor sending a message to another processor, independent of all other processors,
constitutes a one-to-one data routing operation. Such a data routing operation may be
physically accomplished by composing and sending a point-to-point message. Typically,
multiple independent point-to-point messages coexist in a parallel machine and compete for
the use of communication resources. Thus, we are often interested in the amount of time
required for completing the routing operation for up to p such messages, each being sent by
a different processor. We refer to a batch of up to p independent point-to-point messages,
residing one per processor, as a data routing problem instance. If exactly p messages are sent
by the p processors and all of the destinations are distinct, we have a permutation routing
problem.
Collective data routing, as defined in the Message Passing Interface (MPI) Standard
[MPIF94], may be of three types:
1.
2.
3.
One to many. When a processor sends the same message to many destinations, we
call the operation multicasting. Multicasting to all processors (one to all) is called
broadcasting. When different messages are sent from one source to many destinations, a scatter operation is performed. The multiple destination nodes may be
dynamically determined by problem- and data-dependent conditions or be a
topologically defined subset of the processors (e.g., a row of a 2D mesh).
Many to one. When multiple messages can be merged as they meet at intermediate
nodes on their way to their final common destination, we have a combine or fan-in
operation (e.g., finding the sum of, or the maximum among, a set of values).
Combining values from all processors (all to one) is called global combine. If the
messages reach the destination intact and in their original forms, we have a gather
operation. Combining saves communication bandwidth but is lossy in the sense that,
in general, the original messages cannot be recovered from the combined version.
Many to many. When the same message is sent by each of several processors to
many destinations, we call the operation many-to-many multicasting. If all processors are involved as senders and receivers, we have all-to-all broadcasting. When
194
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
different messages are sent from each source to many (all) nodes, the operation
performed is ( all-to-all ) scatter-gather (sometimes referred to as gossiping ).
For 2D meshes and tori, we are particularly interested in the following three data routing
operations:
1.
2.
3.
Data compaction or packing. Many problems are solved by starting with a set of
elements, as the parameters on which the final computation results depend, and
successively removing some of the elements that are no longer useful or relevant.
Rather than leave these elements in their original locations and pay the worst-case
communication delay in all subsequent computations, we may want to
compact or pack the useful or relevant data into the smallest possible submesh in
order to speed up the rest of the process. Figure 10.1 shows an example where eight
remaining element in a 4 × 4 mesh are compacted or packed into 3 × 3 submesh.
Random-access write (RAW). This operation can be viewed as emulating one
memory write step of a PRAM having p processors and m memory locations on a
distributed-memory machine that has p processors and m/p memory locations per
processor. Each processor may have an address (consisting of destination processor
ID and memory location within the processor) into which it wants to write its value.
Thus, up to p write operations may be required that must be performed via routing
of the destination/address/value messages to their destinations. Once there, the
address/value part of the message is used for performing the write operation. Unique
destination/address pairs correspond to the EREW submodel. Unique destinations
correspond to a further restriction of EREW to a single access per memory block,
as discussed in Section 6.6.
Random-access read (RAR). This operation is similar to RAW and all of the
considerations discussed above apply to it. A RAR operation can be decomposed
into two RAW operations as follows. In the first RAW operation, the requesting
processors write their read access requests, including their own IDS, into the target
processors. In the second RAW operation, which is somewhat more complex than
the simple version discussed in the preceding paragraph if concurrent reads from
the same location/module are to be allowed, the target processors write the results
of the read requests into the requesting processors.
We will discuss the implementation of these operations in Section 10.3 after dealing with
some useful elementary or building-block computations in Section 10.2.
Figure 10.1. Example of data compaction or packing in a 2D mesh.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
195
Processor addresses (also known as node labels or node IDs) can be specified by
row–column numbers or according to their rank in a specified linear order such as those
shown in Fig. 9.3. Such addresses are easily convertible to one another with a small, constant
amount of computation. For example, a processor’s rank k in row-major order can be obtained
from its row number i and column number j based on the equation k = i + j. Conversely,
the row and column numbers can be obtained from the processor’s rank k in row-major order
using i =  k/  and j = k mod .Other ordering schemes are similar. For these reasons,
in the remainder of our discussion of 2D mesh routing and various other algorithms, we
switch freely between different addressing schemes, using each where it is most convenient.
10.2.
USEFUL ELEMENTARY OPERATIONS
In performing data routing and many other operations on a 2D mesh, certain elementary
operations arise quite frequently. It is convenient to review these operations before discussing
routing algorithms.
Row or Column Rotation (all-to-all broadcast within rows or columns). In
–1 st eps, data in one mesh row or column can be rotated once, such that each processor
“sees” every data item. If each processor can send/receive data only to/from one neighbor at
a time, 2 – 2 steps are needed, as right-moving and left-moving messages will be forced
to alternate.
Sorting Records by a Key Field. We presented and analyzed several sorting algorithms for 2D meshes in Chapter 9. In a permutation routing problem, routing the packets is
equivalent to sorting them by the destination node address. In other situations, sorting is often
used as one of several steps in designing the required routing algorithm.
Semigroup Computation. A semigroup computation, such as summation or maximum finding, can be accomplished in 2 – 2 steps (optimal time) by using row rotations
followed by column rotations with bidirectional communication. The time complexity
–4 if communication is restricted to one direction at a time. This simple
increases to 4
algorithm was presented in Section 2.5. A recursive algorithm can be used that is particularly
efficient in the second case above, but that requires commutativity as well as associativity.
The mesh is divided into four quadrants and each quadrant recursively performs the
semigroup computation in such a way that every processor in the quadrant knows the
quadrant result. The quadrants then combine their results horizontally (Fig. 10.2); each
processor in the center two columns exchanges values with its neighbor in the horizontally
Figure 10.2. Recursive semigroup computation in a 2D mesh.
196
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
adjacent quadrant in one or two steps and then initiates a half-row broadcast. This phase thus
or
steps. Vertical combining in the next phase needs the same
requires
amount of time, leading to the recurrence
where ε is 0 or 1. The
solution to the above recurrence is
Parallel Prefix Computation. A (3 –3)-step algorithm was given in Section 2.5.
It was based on computing row prefixes, then doing a diminished prefix computation in the
last column, and finally, broadcasting the results obtained in the last column within rows for
final combining. As for semigroup computation, a more efficient recursive algorithm can be
obtained if the binary operation is commutative. Quadrant prefixes are computed in
row-major order, but in opposite directions in the left and right quadrants (Fig. 10.3). Vertical
+ O(1)steps if the required data broadcasts, shown in the
and horizontal combining take
middle and right panels of Fig. 10.3, are pipelined. Supplying the details of the algorithm is
left as an exercise.
Routing within a Row or Column. Consider the problem of routing multiple packets on a linear array corresponding to a row or column of our square mesh. If the routing
problem is a permutation, we simply apply
steps of odd–even transposition, using the
destination addresses as the keys. Otherwise, we can proceed as follows (see Section 2.3).
Each packet has an information part and a destination address part. It is more convenient to
convert the destination addresses into a signed relative offset, with positive sign indicating
movement to the right and negative sign corresponding to leftward movement. A processor’s
algorithm for dealing with a received packet is as follows. Figure 10.4 shows an example
where right- and left-moving packets alternate.
Data routing on a linear array
if offset = 0
then remove the packet
else if offset > 0
then offset := offset– 1; send to right neighbor
else offset := offset + 1; send to left neighbor
endif
endif
Figure 10.3. Recursive parallel prefix computation in a 2D mesh.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
197
Figure 10.4. Example of routing multiple packets on a linear array.
In fact, the sign of the offset can be removed because each intermediate processor can
recognize the direction in which the packet is moving from the port over which it was
received. For example, in Fig. 9.4, a right-moving packet will enter through the R 3 port.
10.3
DATA ROUTING ON A 2D ARRAY
In this section, we discuss the three routing problems of data compaction (packing),
random-access write (RAW), and random-access read (RAR) introduced in Section 10.1.
To pack a set of a values residing in active processors into the smallest possible square
submesh in the upper left corner of the original mesh, we proceed as follows. First, each
processor is assumed to hold a binary activity flag: 1 for active, 0 for inactive. A diminished
parallel prefix sum on these activity flags yields the rank r of each active processor that is
an integer in [0, a – 1]. This computation can be arranged such that, at the end, each active
processor also knows the value of a. The dimension of the smallest square mesh that can
hold a elements is
. Thus, if the active processor holding the element with rank r sends
column r mod
the compaction or packing
it to the processor located in row
will be complete.
198
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Considering the example shown in Fig. 10.1, the active processors holding the values
“a” through “h” are ranked 0 through 7 as a result of the diminished parallel prefix
computation (in row-major order), with a = 8 also becoming known to each active processor.
The destination processor for the rank-r element is then determined to be in row  r /3 ,
column r mod 3. The last step of the compaction or packing algorithm, which sends each
element to its new location, is a RAW routing problem that we will describe next.
For RAW, we first consider the simple case where all destination processors are distinct,
so that at most one write request will end up in each processor. If, in addition to the above
constraint, every processor is required to participate, the routing problem is a permutation
and we can easily solve it by simply sorting the packets by their destination addresses. For
an incomplete, but exclusive RAW, where some processors do not have a write request, the
following three-phase algorithm can be used.
Exclusive random-access write on a 2D mesh: MeshRAW
1.
2.
3.
Sort the packets in column-major order by their destination column numbers, using
the destination row numbers to break the ties.
Shift the packets to the right, so that each item is in the correct column. There will
be no conflict because at most one element in each row is headed for a given column.
Route the packets within each column.
Figure 10.5 presents an example. At the left, we see the initial packet positions, with the
destination row and column numbers given. In the second diagram from the left, the packets
have been sorted in column-major order by their destination column numbers; packets
headed for Column 0 appear first, followed by those headed for Column 1, and so forth.
Next, the packets have been shifted to the right, if needed, so that each is in its destination
column. Finally, the rightmost diagram in Fig. 10.5 depicts the state of the messages after
the completion of routing within the columns.
Note that with the above algorithm, the packets do not necessarily take the shortest paths
to their destinations. For example, in Fig. 10.5, the packet headed to Processor (3, 1) begins
at Processor (2, 2), moves to Processor (0, 1) because of sorting, remains there in the row
routing phase, and finally, moves down to its final location. This packet is forwarded at least
six times (we cannot say for sure, as the sorting algorithm used is unspecified) to get to a
destination that is only two hops away via a shortest path.
The above observation may lead to the concern that our RAW algorithm is inefficient.
However, this is not the case. After the sorting phase, at most p 1 / 2 – 1 row routing steps and
Figure 10.5. Example of random-access write on a 2D mesh.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
199
p 1/2 – 1 column routing steps are required. Row routing is always from left to right, so its
time complexity does not change even if we allow only unidirectional communication. In
the latter case, the time for the column routing phase may double to 2 p 1/2 – 2. Assuming the
use of the (3p 1/2 + o(p1/2 ))-step snakelike sorting algorithm of Section 9.6, suitably modified
to do the sorting in column-major order and then reversing the order of odd-numbered
columns, the total running time of the RAW algorithm is 6 p1/2 + o(p1/2 ). With unidirectional
communication, the constant 6 in the above expression will increase to 11 (why?).
In the following sections of this chapter, we will study some methods for, and the
implication of, improving the running time of RAW in order to bring it closer to the absolute
2p 1/2 – 2 lower bound imposed by the diameter. Before that, however, we need to consider
the problem of concurrent writes into the same processor.
If multiple write requests to the same processor are allowed, then routing can no longer
be assumed to be conflict-free. In the worst case, all p write requests are addressed to the
same processor. As, independent of the routing algorithm used, a processor cannot receive
more than four packets in any one step, the worst-case running time is lower-bounded by p/4
(p, if only one communication is allowed per cycle). Because of this large speed penalty for
concurrent RAWs, hot spots should be avoided to the extent possible. On the positive side,
the processor to which multiple write requests are directed can use any priority or combining
scheme to decide on the value to be written into a given memory location. So, even very
complex selection or combining rules do not slow down the processor further.
An exclusive RAR operation, with each processor reading from a unique processor, can
be implemented as two RAW operations. Concurrent reads can be handled with a slightly
more complicated algorithm, as follows. If Processor i wants to read from Processor j, it
constructs a record < i, j >. These records are sorted according to the key j. At this point, all
read requests addressed to Processor j will reside in consecutive processors (say, k, k+l, . . . ,
k + l – 1). One of these processors (say k ) will do the reading from j and broadcasts the value
to the others. Finally, each read result is routed back to the requesting processor ( i).
10.4.
GREEDY ROUTING ALGORITHMS
A greedy routing algorithm is one that tries to reduce the distance of a packet from its
destination with every routing step. The term greedy refers to the fact that such an algorithm
only considers local short-term gains as opposed to the global or long-term effects of each
routing decision. The simplest greedy algorithm is dimension-ordered routing or e-cube
routing. The row-first version of the dimension-ordered routing algorithm is as follows.
Greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh
if the packet is not in the destination column
then route it along the row toward the destination column
{processors have buffers to hold the incoming messages.}
else route it along the column toward the destination node
{of the messages that need to use an upward or downward link,
the one that needs to go farthest along the column goes first.}
endif
200
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
If the buffer space in each processor is unlimited, the greedy row-first algorithm is
optimal and terminates in no more than 2p 1/2 – 2 steps for exclusive RAW. Clearly, the row
routing phase needs at most p 1/2 – 1 steps, provided that the processors can accept incoming
messages from left and right simultaneously. If two messages destined for Column j arrive
into the same processor, they can leave in the next step if they need to travel in different
directions along the column. However, if both messages want to go in the same direction
along the column, or if higher-priority messages exist among those waiting in the node’s
buffers, then one or both messages will be delayed for at least an extra cycle. Giving priority
to messages that need to go farther along the column ensures that this phase takes no more
than p 1/2 –1 steps in all; this is easy to prove by noting that a message delayed by δ cycles
does not need to move more than p 1/2 – 1 – δ steps.
Figure 10.6 depicts the use of row-first algorithm for an exclusive RAW operation. In
the initial state, all packets, except the one in Row 2, Column 0, have to move to a different
column. Thus, they are routed horizontally toward their destination columns. The packet
destined for Processor (0, 0) starts its column routing phase right away, moving to Row 1,
Column 0, in the first step. Similarly, other packets begin their column routing phases as
soon as each arrives into its destination column. In this particular example, no routing conflict
is encountered and each packet gets to its destination in the shortest possible time. The
maximum number of packets residing at any one node at a given time is two. This situation
(dearth of conflicts and small buffer space requirements) is typical for random routing
problems.
In the worst case, however, greedy routing suffers from degraded performance. Even
assuming distinct destinations, the required node buffer size is O(p 1/2 ) in the worst case. For
example, in Fig. 10.7, Node (i, j) receives two messages per cycle that are headed to nodes
below it in the same column. Because only one message can be sent downward in each cycle,
the node requires up to p 1/2 /2 message buffers to keep the rest. In fact, once the messages
arriving from above are also taken into account, the situation becomes worse and the buffer
requirement increases to 2p 1/2 /3. However, with randomly distributed destinations, both the
buffer requirements and the added delay related to conflicts will be O(1) with high probability.
Based on our discussions of routing methods for a 2D mesh thus far, we are faced with
a trade-off; i.e., a choice between the fast (2p 1/2 –2)-step greedy routing scheme presented
above, which requires fairly expensive buffers in each node to guarantee that buffer overflow
will not occur, or the slower 6p 1/2 -step algorithm of Section 10.3, which avoids conflicts
altogether and thus requires a single buffer per node. Ideally, we would like to have the
Figure 10.6. Example of greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
201
Figure 10.7. Demonstrating the worst-case buffer requirement with row-first routing.
highest speed with a constant buffer space per node. This, while possible, leads to a very
complicated algorithm with fairly large buffers. So, from a practical standpoint, it makes
sense to look for intermediate solutions with running times between 2 p 1/2 and 6p 1/2 and buffer
requirements between 0 and O(p 1/2 ).
The following algorithm is one such intermediate solution that needs (2 + 4/ q ) p 1/2 +
o(p1/2 /q) routing steps with 2q – 1 buffers per node. For q = 1, this algorithm degenerates
into the one described in Section 10.3, while for very large q, it yields near-optimal speed.
As an example of speed–cost trade-offs, the algorithm turns into a 3 p 1/2 -step algorithm
requiring seven message buffers per node if we pick q = 4.
The intermediate exclusive RAW routing algorithm is as follows. We view the p-processor mesh as q² square blocks of size p 1/2 /q (Fig. 10.8). We sort the packets in each block
in column-major order according to their destination columns and then use the greedy routing
algorithm discussed above to complete the routing. Using the optimal snakelike sorting
algorithm of Section 9.6 and then reversing the order of elements in alternate columns allows
us to complete the sorting phase in 4p 1/2 /q + o(p 1/2 /q) steps. The greedy routing phase takes
2p 1/2 –2 steps. So, the correctness of the claimed running time is established. It only remains
to be shown that 2q – 1 message buffers are adequate.
Consider Row i and call the blocks containing it B 0 , B1 , B2 , . . . , B q –1 . Let r k be the number
of packets in Bk (0 ≤ k < q ) that are headed for Column j. Clearly,
because at
most p 1/2 packets go to Column j; given the assumption of distinct destinations (exclusive
RAW). After sorting the blocks in column-major order, the packets in each block that are
headed for Column j will be evenly divided between the p 1/2 /q rows. Thus, the total number
of packets in Row i that are headed to Column j will be upper bounded by
Note that in the above derivation, we have made use of the strict inequality  x  < 1 + x to
show that the number of message buffers needed is strictly less than 2q or at most 2q – 1.
202
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 10.8. Illustrating the structure of the intermediate routing algorithm.
The design of a (2p 1/2 + o(p 1/2 ))-step routing algorithm with constant queue size per
node has been addressed by many researchers. Initial solutions [Leig89] involved large
constant-size queues (i.e., independent of p). Even though subsequent refinements have
reduced the queue size, these algorithms are still not quite practical. For example, the work
of Gu and Gu [Gu95] has reduced the number of buffers to the constant 28 for a (2 p 1/2 +
O(1))-step algorithm and to 12t s /s for an optimal (2p 1/2 – 2)-step algorithm, where ts is the
sorting time on an s × s mesh. The design of an asymptotically optimal (2 p 1/2 + o ( p 1/2 ))-step
routing algorithm with a small number of buffers (say 3 or 4) per node is still an open
problem.
10.5. OTHER CLASSES OF ROUTING ALGORITHMS
Our inability to design fast deterministic routing algorithms with small buffers has led
to an interest in randomized or probabilistic algorithms. One can prove that if the destination
nodes are randomly distributed in the 2D array, the probability that a given packet is delayed
by ∆ additional steps because of conflicts in the row-first greedy algorithm is O( e –∆ /6 ). In
view of the exponentially decreasing probabilities for larger delays, the expected delay
related to conflicts is O(1) and any packet needing to travel d hops reaches its destination in
d + O(log p ) steps with probability 1 – O(1/p). Furthermore, with a probability very close
to 1, no more than four packets ever wait for transmission over the same link. Proofs of the
above claims and related results have been given by Leighton ([Leig92], pp. 163–173).
In view of the very good average-case performance of the row-first greedy routing
algorithm (on a randomized instance of the routing problem), it may be beneficial to convert
an arbitrary (nonrandom) routing problem into two randomized instances by selecting a
random intermediate destination for each packet and then doing the routing in two phases:
from the source nodes to the randomly selected intermediate nodes and from these nodes to
the desired destinations.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
203
Independent of the routing algorithm used, concurrent writes can degrade the time
complexity to Θ (p). However, it might be possible to reduce this time complexity to O( p 1/2 )
by allowing intermediate nodes to combine multiple write requests that are headed to the
same destination node. Combining means applying the concurrent write rules to multiple
writes destined for the same processor. This is possible if each processor has but one memory
location (or a single location that may be accessed concurrently by multiple processors).
Figure 10.9 shows an example where five write requests headed to the same destination node
are combined into two requests by intermediate nodes.
The routing algorithms discussed thus far belong to the class of oblivious routing
algorithms. A routing algorithm is oblivious if the path selected for the message going from
Processor i to Processor j is dependent only on i and j and is in no way affected by other
messages that may exist in the system. A nonoblivious or adaptive routing algorithm, on the
other hand, allows the path to change as a result of link/processor congestion or failure.
Consider, for example, an algorithm that allows a packet to interlace horizontal and
vertical movements, without any restriction, until it gets to the destination row or column,
at which point it is restricted to move only along the row or column on its way to the
destination node. Such a packet will still travel along a shortest path, but can avoid congested
paths by taking alternate routes. A packet on its way from node (0, 0) to node (3, 2), on
entering node (0, 1), can exit vertically to node (1, 1) if the vertical link is available but the
horizontal link to node (0,2) is not. Of course, there is no guarantee that the packet will get
to its destination faster via this alternate path, as it may encounter congestion or faulty
links/nodes farther ahead. But probabilistically, the availability of alternate paths helps
reduce the routing time and provides some degree of resilience to permanent and/or transient
node/link malfunctions.
As a second example of adaptive algorithms, consider the class of algorithms that
provide one buffer per port in each processor and always send out the received messages (up
to four) to neighboring processors if they are not addressed to the local processor. This class
of algorithms is sometimes referred to as hot-potato routing because each processor immediately gets rid of any incoming message. As messages may be deflected away from the
shortest path to their destinations, a control mechanism is needed to ensure that they do not
wander about in the mesh without ever reaching their destinations. For example, a priority
scheme based on the message age (time steps since its origination) may be used to choose
which of several messages contending for the same outgoing edge should be allowed to use
Figure 10.9. Combining of write requests headed for the same destination.
204
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
it and which are to be deflected to other nodes that may not be on their respective shortest
paths.
Methods to introduce adaptivity into routing algorithms via proper organization of the
information available about the network and the state of packet traffic as well as heuristics
for making the “right” path selection with high probability constitute active areas of research
in parallel processing.
Let us now say a few words about collective communication on 2D meshes using packet
routing. Broadcasting can be simply achieved in two phases: row broadcast followed by
column broadcast, or vice versa. All-to-all broadcasting can be performed in optimal O( p )
time using row and column rotations. Multicasting is very similar to broadcasting, except
that each packet must contain information about its destinations. If the set of destinations is
a submesh, or one of a previously agreed upon groups of processors, this information can be
encoded compactly within the message. For many-to-many communication, routing can be
performed in rounds. For example, if we have k–k routing where each processor sends exactly
k messages and receives exactly k messages, the problem can be decomposed into k 1–1
routing problems that are then solved one at a time. Of course, all-to-all scatter-gather is a
p–p routing problem that can be solved in p rounds, or O
steps. This is asymptotically
optimal because of the p²/4 messages that have to pass through the
bisection of the 2D
mesh.
Thus far, we have focused on routing problems in which all of the packets to be routed
to their respective destinations initially reside in the mesh. These are known as static routing
problems. In dynamic routing problems, messages are created by the various processors at
regular intervals or at random (perhaps with a known distribution). The performance of
routing algorithms for such dynamically created messages can be analyzed using methods
from queuing theory, via simulation on a software model of the mesh architecture, or through
actual programming and observation of a real machine. Analytical evaluation of routing
algorithms often requires simplifying assumptions that may or may not hold in practice.
Thus, even in such cases, experimental verification of the results maybe required.
As an example of theoretical results for dynamic routing, consider the case of a
synchronous array where, in any given cycle, a new packet is introduced at each node with
a constant probability λ , where λ < 4/
The reason for restricting λ as above is that for
the expected number of packets crossing the bisection would be
which can result in unbounded delays. One can prove that with greedy
row-first routing, the probability that any particular packet is delayed by ∆ steps beyond the
length of the shortest path is an exponentially decreasing function of ∆ , provided that the
arrival rate of the packets is below (say at 99% of) the network capacity. Also, in any window
of w steps, the maximum delay incurred by one packet is O(log w + log p) and the maximum
observed queue size is O(1 + log w /log p). Thus, simple greedy routing can be expected to
perform reasonably well under dynamic routing with the above conditions. Details have been
given by Leighton ([Leig92], pp. 173–178).
10.6. WORMHOLE ROUTING
We have thus far discussed routing schemes in which a packet moves from node to node
in its entirety. Because each packet is stored in an intermediate node before being forwarded
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
205
to the next node on its path to the destination, this method is referred to as store-and-forward
routing or packet switching. At the other extreme, we can use circuit switching where a
dedicated path is established between the source and destination nodes (e.g., through link
and node reservations) before the message is actually sent. This may be advantageous for
very long messages, which would otherwise experience significant delays because of
multiple storage and forwarding times and conflict-induced waits. However, the path setup
and teardown times nullify some of this gain. Wormhole switching or routing is an intermediate solution that has become quite popular.
In wormhole routing, each packet is viewed as consisting of a sequence of flits
(flow-control digits, typically 1–2 bytes). Flits, rather than complete packets, are forwarded
between nodes, with all flits of a packet following its head flit like a worm (Fig. 10.10). At
any given time, the flits of a packet occupy a set of nodes on the selected path from the source
to the destination. However, links become available for use by other worms as soon as the
tail of a worm has passed through. Therefore, links are used more efficiently compared with
circuit switching. The down side of not reserving the entire path before transmitting a
message is that deadlocks may arise when multiple worms block each other in a circular
fashion (Fig. 10.10).
Theoretically speaking, any routing algorithm can be used to select the path of a worm.
However, a simple algorithm is preferable as it can minimize the decision time, and thus the
node-to-node delay, allowing the worm to travel faster. If we choose the row-first greedy
algorithm, a possible format for the worm is as follows. The first flit indicates relative
movement in the row direction (0 to 255 with 1 byte, e.g.). Sign or direction of movement
is not needed as it is implicit in the incoming channel. The second flit indicates relative
movement in the column direction (sign is needed here). The worm starts in the horizontal
direction. Each intermediate processor decrements the head flit and forwards the head in the
same direction as received. When the head flit becomes 0, the processor discards it and turns
the worm in the vertical direction. A worm received in the vertical direction with its head flit
containing 0 is at its destination.
Figure 10.11 shows some of the ways of handling conflicts in wormhole routing. One
option is to buffer or store the worm until its needed outgoing channel becomes available.
This option, which is intermediate between circuit switching and store-and-forward routing,
is sometimes referred to as virtual cut-through routing. Its disadvantage is that it leads to
excessive node complexity if buffer space is to be provided for the worst case. This
complexity adversely affects the cost of the node as well as its speed.
Figure 10.10. The notions of worms and deadlock in wormhole routing.
206
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 10.11. Various ways of dealing with conflicts in wormhole routing.
A second option is to block all but one of the conflicting worms, allowing a selected
worm (based on some priority scheme) to advance toward its destination. The blocked worms
will eventually start advancing, provided there is no deadlock.
A third option is to simply discard all but one of the conflicting worms, again based on
some sort of priority. This scheme assumes the use of an acknowledgment mechanism
between the receiver and the sender. For example, if the worms carry memory read requests,
the acknowledgment takes the form of the returned memory value. The requesting processor
can send a duplicate request if it has not received a reply to the original one within a
reasonable amount of time. With this method, the nodes become quite simple because they
do not need to store anything. However, message delay and network load increase as a result
of the retransmissions. Under heavy load, the bulk of network capacity will be taken up by
retransmissions, leading to poor efficiency and excessive delay.
Finally, some of the conflicting worms can be deflected to nodes other than the ones on
the designated path (hot-potato routing). This may take the worm farther away from its
destination but has the advantage of requiring no intermediate storage for the worms and no
dropped worms. Of course, care must be taken to prevent a worm from going in circles, thus
wasting communication bandwidth and never reaching its destination.
Various deadlock avoidance strategies are available. To determine if deadlock is possible, draw a graph with one node for each link in the original graph and an edge from Node
i to j if the routing algorithm allows the use of j immediately after i. A sufficient condition
for deadlock-freedom is that this dependence graph be cycle-free. This is in fact too strong a
condition in that there exist routing algorithms that are free from deadlock but that their
corresponding dependence graphs have cycles. Much research has dealt with determining the
minimum restrictions needed for the routing algorithm to guarantee freedom from deadlock.
An example is shown in Fig. 10.12. A 3 × 3 mesh, with its associated edge labels, is
shown at the top. With unrestricted or adaptive shortest-path routing, the dependence graph
is as shown at the bottom left. In this case, after routing along Edge 7, any of Edges 11, 14,
or 17 can be used. This directed graph has many cycles, thus the corresponding algorithm
can lead to deadlocks. The row-first greedy algorithm, characterized by the dependence
graph on the lower right, has no cycles, leading us to the conclusion that it must be
deadlock-free.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
207
Figure 10.12. Use of dependence graph to check for the possibility of deadlock.
One way to avoid deadlocks is through the use of virtual channels; i.e., sharing a physical
link by multiple virtual channels, each with its own flit buffer and a chance to be used
according to a round-robin schedule. For example, Fig. 10.13 shows the use of two virtual
channels on a northbound link, one each for westward-moving and eastward-moving worms.
Deadlocks can always be avoided through the use of a sufficient number of virtual channels.
We have discussed wormhole routing only in connection with point-to-point messages.
Collective communication can also be done through wormhole routing. A rich theory for
such data communication problems has emerged in recent years [McKi95].
Figure 10.13. Use of virtual channels for avoiding deadlocks.
208
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
PROBLEMS
10.1.
Recursive parallel prefix computation
Specify the details of the parallel prefix computation algorithm given in Fig. 10.3. Present an
analysis of your algorithm and determine an exact value for the O(1) term in its performance.
10.2.
Data routing on a linear array
a. Show that any k-to-l routing problem can be solved in p + k – 1 steps on a p -processor
linear array, provided that each processor starts with at most one packet.
b. How does the time complexity of the k-to-1 routing problem change if each processor can
start with up to k packets and there are at most p packets overall?
10.3.
Sorting-based routing on a 2D mesh
Consider the routing algorithm for 2D meshes in Section 10.3 with the added assumption that
up to k packets can have the same destination.
a. Determine the worst-case running time of the algorithm with unlimited node buffers.
b. Determine the worst-case buffer space requirement per node.
10.4.
Greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh
/3 message buffers per node are adequate to ensure that the greedy row-first
a. Show that
algorithm can run at full speed on a p-processor square mesh.
b. Show that the row-first greedy routing algorithm takes Θ (p) steps in the worst case if each
node is constrained to have a constant number of message buffers (say 4).
10.5.
Greedy routing on a 2D mesh
If data are to be routed on a nonsquare r × (p/r) mesh, which of the two greedy routing
algorithms, row-first or column-first, would minimize the required buffer space per node? First
assume distinct destinations, then relax this assumption.
10.6.
Data compaction or packing
a. Analyze the data compaction or packing problem, described in Section 10.3, with regard
to conflicts and buffer requirements when an adaptive packet routing algorithm is used.
b. Repeat part (a) for wormhole routing, focusing on the possibility of deadlock.
10.7.
Greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh
a. For a 4 × 4 mesh, determine the relative message load of each of the 24 links if row-first
greedy routing is used and each node sends the same number of messages to every other
node on the average.
b. How will the distribution change if messages sent by the same processor alternate between
row-first and column-first routing?
c. Repeat part (a) for a 4 × 4 torus.
d. Repeat part (b) for a 4 × 4 torus.
10.8.
Greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh
Consider a scenario where node ( i, j) in a square 2D mesh begins with xij packets to be routed,
where the x ij are independent Poisson random variables with mean λ , that is,
prob[x i j = k ] = λ k e –λ /k!. Prove the following results.
a. The greedy row-first algorithm routes each packet with constant expected delay iff λ < 1.
b. The expected maximum queue size is constant iff λ < 2.
ROUTING ON A 2D MESH OR TORUS
209
c. The condition of part (a) becomes “iff λ < 2” if the mesh is replaced with a torus.
d. The condition of part (b) becomes “iff λ < 4” if the mesh is replaced with a torus.
10.9.
Greedy routing on a 2D mesh
Analyze the behavior of greedy row-first routing on a 2D mesh if it is known that no packet is
more than d hops away from its intended destination, where d is a known constant independent
of p.
10.10. Greedy routing on a complete binary tree
Analyze the behavior of a greedy routing algorithm on a complete binary tree with respect to
running time and maximum number of message buffers per node. Specify your protocol for
conflict resolution.
10.11. Wormhole routing
Analyze the following algorithm for broadcasting on a 2D mesh using point-to-point wormhole
routing. The source node sends four messages to the four processors located at the lower left
corner of each of the four quadrants of the mesh. Each of these four processors then uses the
same method to broadcast the message within its own quadrant.
10.12. Wormhole routing
Consider wormhole routing with very short messages consisting of one header flit (holding the
destination row and column offsets) and a single information flit.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Does wormhole routing still have advantages over packet routing in this case?
Is deadlock possible with such short messages?
Suppose that the single information flit holds the ID number of the sending processor. Can
a message that carries only the destination and source addresses serve any useful purpose?
Going a step further, does it make sense for a message to hold only the destination address?
10.13. The turn model for adaptive wormhole routing
When routing on a 2D mesh, eight types of turns (four clockwise and four counterclockwise)
are possible in switching from row/column movement to column/row movement. Show how
by disallowing two of these turns, one from each set, an adaptive deadlock-free routing
algorithm can be constructed that uses the remaining six turns without any restriction and does
not need virtual channels [Glas92).
10.14. Interval routing
Interval routing is a routing scheme in which one or more intervals of nodes are associated with
each outgoing link of a node, with a message sent out over a link if the destination node number
is contained in one of the intervals associated with that link. In the simplest case, exemplified
by the seven-node X-tree architecture shown below, a single interval is associated with each
link and the intervals for different outgoing links do not overlap, leading to unique paths.
210
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
a . For the seven-node X-tree architecture shown above, determine the relative message load
on each link if, on the average, each node sends the same number of messages to every
other node.
b. Draw a link dependence graph and prove that deadlock is impossible with wormhole
routing.
c . Replacing each bidirectional link with two unidirectional ones, divide the network into two
subnetworks: the down/right subnetwork consisting of links that point downward or to the
right, and the up/left subnetwork with upward and leftward links. Show that any assignment
of intervals (or any routing scheme, for that matter) that causes a path to begin in the first
subnetwork and either end in the same subnetwork or move to the second subnetwork after
0 or more hops and stay there until getting to the destination, is guaranteed to be
deadlock-free.
d. Devise an interval routing scheme for a 4 × 4 mesh, with one interval attached to each link,
that divides the load as equally as possible between the 24 links and is also deadlock-free.
You are free to choose the node indexing scheme. Hint: The result of part (c) may help.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Felp96]
[Glas92]
[Gu95]
[Leig89]
[Leig92]
[McKi95]
[MPIF94]
[Pink97]
Felperin, S., P. Raghavan, and E. Upfal, “A Theory of Wormhole Routing in Parallel Computers,”
IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 45, No. 6, pp. 704–713, June 1996.
Glass, C. J. and L. M. Ni, “The Turn Model for Adaptive Routing,” Proc. 19th Int. Symp. Computer
Architecture, 1992, pp. 278–287.
Gu, Q.-P., and J. Gu, “Two Packet Routing Algorithms on a Mesh-Connected Computer,” IEEE Trans.
Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 6, No. 4, pp. 436–440, April 1995.
Leighton, T., F. Makedon, and I. G. Tollis, “A 2n–2 Step Algorithm for Routing in an n × n Array
with Constant Size Queues,” Proc. 1st ACM Symp. Parallel Algorithms and Architectures, 1989, pp.
328–335.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
McKinley, P. K., Y.-J. Tsai, and D. F. Robinson, “Collective Communication in Wormhole-Routed
Massively Parallel Computers,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 28, No. 12, pp. 39–50, December 1995.
Message-Passing Interface Forum, “MPI: A Message-Passing Interface Standard,” Version 1.0,
University of Tennessee, Knoxville, 1994.
Pinkston, T. M., and S. Warnakulasuriya, “On Deadlocks in Interconnection Networks,” Proc. Int.
Symp. Computer Architecture, 1997, pp. 38–49.
11
Numerical 2D Mesh
Algorithms
In Chapters 9 and 10, we discussed 2D-mesh sorting and routing algorithms that
are important in themselves and also form useful tools for synthesizing other
parallel algorithms of interest. In this chapter, we cover a sample of numerical
and seminumerical algorithms for 2D meshes. Even though the problems
covered here do not exhaust all interesting or practically important algorithms,
they do expose us to a variety of techniques and problems in parallel algorithm
design for 2D mesh-connected computers. We should then be able to handle
other applications with the knowledge gained from this chapter and the previous
two. Chapter topics are
11.1.
11.2.
11.3.
11.4.
11.5.
11.6.
Matrix multiplication
Triangular system of equations
Tridiagonal system of linear equations
Arbitrary system of linear equations
Graph algorithms
Image-processing algorithms
211
This page intentionally left blank.
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
213
11 .1. MATRIX MULTIPLICATION
The matrix multiplication problem was defined in Section 5.6, where several PRAM
algorithms were developed for solving the problem. To facilitate the development of a 2D
mesh algorithm for matrix multiplication, we first consider matrix–vector multiplication on
a linear array. Let A be an m × m matrix and x an m -vector. The product y = Ax is an m-vector
such that
Figure 11 .1 shows how the computation for m = 4 (including the presentation of the inputs
A and x and the extraction of the output y ) can be organized on a four-processor linear array.
In the first computation step, a00 and x0 are presented to Processor P0, which computes their
product a00 x0 , keeping the result in an internal register. P0 then adds the products a01x1, a 02 x2 ,
and a 03 x3 to its running sum in the next three computation cycles, obtaining its final result
y 0 at the end of the fourth computation cycle. Similarly, P1 computes and adds the terms
a10 x0 , a 11 x1 , a 12x 2 , and a 13 x3, beginning with the second computation cycle and finishing in
the fifth cycle. The xj inputs are shifted from left to right after one cycle of delay in each
processor. The last result, y3, becomes available at the end of the seventh cycle.
With inputs of dimension m and p = m processors, the computation takes 2m – 1 = 2p – 1
cycles, each cycle corresponding to a processor performing a multiplication and an addition.
Because multiplying two m × m matrices can be viewed as m separate matrix–vector
multiplications, the computation structure of Fig. 11.1 can be readily extended to an m × m
processor array multiplying two m × m matrices (Fig. 11.2). The first row of processors is
essentially identical to Fig. 11.1, receiving matrix A from above and Column 0 of matrix B
from the left and computing Column 0 of the result matrix C. In general, Row j of the array
will compute Column j of the result matrix, using all elements of A and only Column j of B,
according to the equation
Figure 11 .1. Matrix–vector multiplication on a linear array.
214
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 11.2. Matrix–matrix multiplication on a 2D mesh.
Because elements of A are delayed by one cycle for each row of processors, columns of B
must be similarly delayed at input in order for relative timings to be preserved in each row.
The total computation time is 3m – 2 = 3 – 2 steps (there are p = m ² processors).
Adding a wraparound link to Fig. 11.1 converts the architecture into a ring and allows
us to rotate the elements of x, initially stored as shown in the example of Fig. 11.3, among
the processors. Elements of A can be input from above or stored in the local memories of the
processors, with Pj holding Row j of A. Figure 11.3 shows a snapshot of the computation
when P 0 is reading or receiving x0 from P3 and a00 from above (or reading it from its local
memory). This corresponds exactly to P0 ’s status in Fig. 11.1. However, whereas all other
processors are idle in the snapshot shown in Fig. 11.1, no idle cycle is ever encountered here.
Elimination of idle processor cycles reduces the computation time to the optimal m = p steps
(p² multiply–add operations done by p processors in p cycles).
Figure 11.3. Matrix–vector multiplication on a ring.
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
215
Figure 11.4. Matrix–matrix multiplication on a torus.
Adding wraparound links to Fig. 11.2 converts the architecture into a torus. Elements
of A and B can now be stored into the processors as shown in Fig. 11.4. Elements of A are
rotated vertically in the columns, while those of B undergo horizontal rotation in the rows.
In the snapshot shown in Fig. 11.4, Processor P00 is reading or receiving a00 from P 30 and
b 00 from P03 . This corresponds exactly to P00 ’s status in Fig. 11.2. Again, no processor is ever
idle. The computation time is reduced from 3 – 2 steps to the optimal
steps (p 3/2
1/2
multiply–add operations done by p processors in p cycles).
The arrangement shown in Fig. 11.4 is easily extended to the practical situation when
large m × m matrices must be multiplied on a small p -processor mesh (p << m²). In this case,
the elements ai j and b i j shown in the figure actually represent (m/p1/2 ) × (m/p 1/2 ) blocks of
the two matrices, with regular multiplication/addition operations replaced by matrix multiplication/addition. Despite the fact that large matrix blocks cannot be passed between
processors in a single cycle, arrangements can be made such that data transfers and
computations overlap. As a processor works on multiplying its current blocks, the next A
and B blocks needed will be loaded into its memory. In multiplying matrix blocks, the
processor performs (m/p 1/2 )³ multiply–add operations on 2(m/p 1/2)² data elements. Thus,
there will be ample time for performing the required data transfers when m/p 1/2 is fairly large.
11.2. TRIANGULAR SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS
A (lower/upper ) triangular square matrix is one in which all elements above the main
diagonal or all elements below it are 0s, respectively (Fig. 11.5). If, additionally, all of the
elements on the main diagonal are also 0s, the triangular matrix is called strictly lower/upper
triangular. The determinant of an m × m triangular matrix A is
We will deal with
lower triangular matrices only, but the techniques discussed can be applied to upper triangular
matrices as well.
A triangular system of linear equations, written in matrix form as Ax = b, is one in which
the matrix A is (lower) triangular. The Ax = b matrix form is shorthand for
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
216
Figure 11.5. Lower/upper triangular square matrix.
..
.
Such a triangular system of linear equations can be easily solved by back substitution.
Compute x0 from the top equation, substitute into the next equation to find x1 , and so forth.
In the ith step, when Equation i is being dealt with, we need i multiplications to compute the
terms containing the already known variables, i subtractions to compute the new right-hand
side, and one division by ai i to compute the value of xi. Thus, the total number of arithmetic
operations is
For comparison purposes, and to demonstrate that the algorithm contains a significant
amount of parallelism, we first implement the back substitution algorithm on PRAM
with p = m processors:
Back substitution on an m-processor PRAM
Processor i, 0 ≤ i < m, do t i : = b i
for j = 0 to m – 1 do
Processor j compute x j : = tj /a j j
Processor j broadcast x j to all other processors
Processor i, j < i < m, do t i : = ti – a i j x j
endfor
On a CREW PRAM, the broadcasting step is simply a concurrent memory access operation.
Thus, each iteration of the algorithm involves three arithmetic operations, yielding a total
running time of 3p steps and a speed-up of p/3.
Performing back substitution for m lower-triangular equations on a linear array of m
processors is straightforward. As shown in Fig. 11.6, the lower triangular matrix A is input
to the array from above and the b vector from the right (this represents the t vector being
initialized to b). If the computation begins from the initial state depicted in Fig. 11.6, with
t0 = b 0 being available to the leftmost processor, then 2m – 1 steps are needed (the first output
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
217
Figure 11.6. Solving a triangular system of linear equations on a linear array.
appears immediately, with one output emerging every two cycles afterwards). If the time for
shifting in of b is also included, the time required will be 3 m – 2.
Figure 11.7 shows how the problem of inverting an m × m lower triangular matrix A can
be viewed as m instances of solving a system of m lower triangular linear equations. This
method of inverting a lower triangular matrix can be easily mapped onto an m × m mesh
(Fig. 11.8), where each row of the mesh computes one column of A–1 and outputs it from
the right. Because multiplication is usually faster than division, the top left processor in the
mesh can be made to compute 1/a i i and pass the result downward so that each of the other
processors in Column 0 needs to perform one multiplication.
Inverting an m × m lower triangular matrix using the computation scheme depicted in
Fig. 11.8, with p = m² processors, takes 3m – 2 steps. If a second m × m lower triangular
Figure 11.7. Inverting a triangular matrix by solving triangular systems of linear equations.
218
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 11.8. Inverting a lower triangular matrix on a 2D mesh.
matrix A' is supplied to the array in the alternate cycles where no element of A or X is present,
both matrices can be inverted in 3m – 1 steps.
11.3. TRIDIAGONAL SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
A tridiagonal square matrix is one in which all elements, except possibly those on the
main diagonal, and the ones just above or below it, are 0s (Fig. 11.9). Instead of the usual
notation a ij for the element in Row i, Column j, of A, we use di to represent the main diagonal
element a ii, ui for the upper diagonal element a i, i + 1 , and l i for the lower diagonal element
ai, i – 1 . For the sake of uniformity, we define l0 = u m–1 = 0.
With the notation defined above, a tridiagonal system of linear equations can be written
as follows, where x –1 = xm = 0 are dummy variables that are introduced for uniformity:
Figure 11.9. A tridiagonal system of linear equations.
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
219
..
.
One method to solve the above tridiagonal system of linear equations is to use odd–even
reduction. Observe that the ith equation can be rewritten as
Taking the above equation for each odd i and substituting into the even-numbered equations
(the ones with even indices for l, d, u, and b), we obtain for each even i (0 ≤ i < m) an equation
of the form
In this way, the m equations are reduced to  m /2  tridiagonal linear equations in the
even-indexed variables. Applying the same method recursively, leads to m/4 equations, then
m /8 equations, and, eventually, a single equation in x0. Solving this last equation to obtain
the value of x0 , and substituting backwards, allows us to compute the value of each of the m
variables. Figure 11 .10 shows the structure of the odd–even reduction method.
Forming each new equation requires six multiplications, six divisions, and four additions, but these can all be done in parallel using p = m /2 processors. Assuming unit-time
arithmetic operations, we obtain the recurrence T(m) = T (m/2) + 8 ≈ 8 log2 m for the total
number of computational steps. The six division operations can be replaced with one
reciprocation per new equation, to find 1/dj for each odd j, plus six multiplications.
Obviously, the above odd–even reduction method is applicable only if none of the dj values
obtained in the course of the computation is 0.
In the above analysis, interprocessor communication time was not taken into account.
The analysis is thus valid only for the PRAM or for an architecture whose topology matches
the communication structure shown in Fig. 11.10. Figure 11.11 shows a binary X-tree
architecture whose communication structure closely matches the needs of the above computation.
Comparing Figs. 11.10 and 11 .11, we note that each of the required data transfers can
be performed in no more than two steps on the X-tree. In fact, if we remove all of the dotted
“left child” links in Fig. 11.11, leading to what is known as a 1D multigrid architecture, we
can still perform odd–even reduction quite efficiently.
To perform odd–even reduction on a linear array of p = m processors, we can assume
that each processor initially holds one of the m equations. Direct one-step communication
between neighboring processors leads to the even-numbered processors obtaining the
reduced set of m/2 equations with a few arithmetic operations as discussed above. The next
reduction phase requires two-step communication, then four-step, and eventually ( m/2)-step,
220
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 11.10. The structure of odd–even reduction for solving a tridiagonal system of linear
equations.
leading to linear running time (of the same order as sequential time). On an m-processor 2D
mesh, odd–even reduction can be easily organized to require Θ
time. Specifying the
details is left as an exercise.
It is worth noting that solving a tridiagonal system of linear equations can be converted
to a parallel prefix problem as follows. Define the 3 × 3 matrix Gi as
Then, the ith equation can be written in matrix form as
In particular, we have
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
221
Figure 11 .11. Binary X-tree (with dotted links) and multigrid architectures.
Solving this last set of three equations provides the value of x0 , which can then be used to
determine the values of all other variables, given the prefix results Gi × G i –1 × ··· × G 0 for
odd i.
11.4. ARBITRARY SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Given a set of m linear equations Ax = b, Gaussian elimination consists of applying a
sequence of row transformation to A and b (multiplying a row by a constant, interchanging
rows, adding a multiple of one row to another). For a nonsingular matrix A, this is done until
A turns into the identity matrix. At that point, x = b. If A is singular, it is turned into an upper
triangular matrix U (we will not consider this case here). Because the same row transformations are applied to both A and b, it is convenient to construct an extended matrix A' that has
A in its first m columns and b in the last column. The row transformations that convert the
first m columns into the identity matrix will yield the solution in the last column. In fact, k
systems of equations with the same A matrix and different b vectors can be solved
simultaneously by simply appending each of the b vectors as a column of A'.
To illustrate the method, we apply it to the solution of two systems of three linear
equations (sharing the same 3 × 3 matrix of coefficients) as follows:
222
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
The extended A' matrix for these two sets of equations has m + k = 5 columns:
Divide Row 0 by 2; then, add –3 times Row 0 to Row 1 and add 1 times Row 0 to Row 2 to
get
Now exchange Rows 1 and 2 to make the next diagonal element nonzero:
Divide Row 1 by 5; then, add –2 times Row 1 to Row 0 and 0 times Row 1 to Row 2 to get
Finally, divide Row 2 by 1/2; then, add 1/2 times Row 2 to Row 0 and 3/2 times Row 2 to
Row 1 to get
The solutions to the two sets of equations are thus x0 = –2, x1 = 0, x 2 = –1, and x0 = 0, x 1 =
–7, x 2 = –5, which are directly read out from the last two columns of A' (2).
A linear array with p = m + k processors can easily perform one phase of Gaussian
elimination. Take the first phase, e.g., that leads from A' to A' (0) . The transformation involves
dividing Row 0 by a 00 and then subtracting a i 0 times the new Row 0 from every Row i for i
≥ 1. As depicted in Fig. 11.12, this can be done by computing the reciprocal of a00 in the
circular node, passing this value to the right so that it can be multiplied by each of the other
elements of Row 0 and the results stored in the corresponding square nodes (node variable
z).
In subsequent steps, the circular node simply passes the values it receives from above
to the right with no change. Denoting the left and top inputs to a square node by x and y,
respectively, a cell must compute and output y – xz = a ij – a i 0 (a 0 j /a 00 ) as each subsequent
row passes over it. Elements of A' (0) emerge from the bottom of the linear array in the same
staggered format as the inputs coming from above, with Rows 1 through m – 1 appearing in
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
223
Figure 11 .12. A linear array performing the first phase of Gaussian elimination.
order, followed by Row 0 which is output when the special termination symbol * is received
as input.
Figure 11.13 shows a 2D architecture for Gaussian elimination. Circular nodes, on
receiving the first nonzero value from above, reciprocate it (i.e., compute 1/ a i i) and pass the
reciprocal value to the right. Processors in Row i are responsible for computing and storing
the ith row of A' (i), producing at their outputs the rows of A'(i) in order from i + 1 to m – 1,
followed by Rows 0 through i. The total computation time is 4m – 1: 2m steps for bm –1 to
arrive into the top row of the array, m – 1 steps for it to move to the bottom row, and m steps
for output.
Figure 11 .13. Implementation of Gaussian elimination on a 2D array.
224
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Note that, because the inversion of an m × m matrix A is equivalent to solving m systems
of linear equations with the same A matrix (one for each column of the unknown inverse
matrix), the scheme of Fig. 11.13 can be easily extended to perform matrix inversion using
Gaussian elimination. Figure 11.14 shows the resulting arrangement where the m × 2m
extended matrix A', with the identity matrix in its last m columns, is input at the top and the
inverse matrix X emerges from the bottom of the array.
An alternative to Gaussian elimination for solving systems of linear equations is the use
of Jacobi relaxation. Assuming that each a i i is nonzero, the ith equation can be solved for
xi, yielding m equations from which new better approximations to the answers can be
obtained from already available approximations x(t)
j :
is an initial approximation for xi
On an m-processor linear array, each iteration of Jacobi relaxation takes O( m) steps, because
essentially the values held by the m processors need to be rotated to allow each processor to
compute its next approximation. The number of iterations needed is O(log m) in most cases,
leading to the overall time complexity O(m log m ).
A variant of the above, known as Jacobi overrelaxation, uses the iterative formula
Figure 11.14. Matrix inversion by Gaussian elimination.
225
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
Here, γ (0 < γ ≤ 1) is a parameter of the method. For γ = 1, the method is the same as Jacobi
relaxation. For smaller values of γ , the overrelaxation method may lead to better performance
because it tends to keep the new values closer to the old values.
11.5. GRAPH ALGORITHMS
An n -node graph can be represented by an n-by-n adjacency matrix A. Nodes are
numbered from 0 to n – 1 with ai j = 1 if there is an edge from Node i to Node j and 0 otherwise.
This matrix representation is quite suitable for use on a mesh-connected computer, as each
matrix entry can be assigned to a processor on an n-by-n mesh. If there are fewer than n²
processors for dealing with an n-node graph, then blocks of A can be assigned to processors.
In some applications, weights are associated with the edges (representing, e.g., travel
times on roads, road tolls, or pipeline capacities). In these cases, a weight matrix can be used
in lieu of the adjacency matrix. Lack of an edge from Node i to Node j is represented by
assigning a suitable value to the corresponding ij element in the weight matrix. For example,
if minimum-weight paths are to be found, assigning the value “ ∞” to missing edges ensures
proper selection. Note that weights can be negative in the general case.
To obtain the transitive closure of a graph, defined as a graph with the same number of
nodes but with an edge between two nodes if there is a path of any length between them in
the original graph, we begin with the adjacency matrix A and define
A0 = I
Paths of length 0
A¹ = A
Paths of length 1
(the identity matrix)
and compute higher “powers” of A using matrix multiplication, except that in our matrix
multiplication algorithm, AND is used instead of multiplication and OR in lieu of addition.
A ²= A × A
Paths of length 2
A³ = A² × A
..
.
Paths of length 3
A * = A0 + A ¹ + A ² +. . . (Ai* j = 1 iff Node j is reachable from Node i)
The matrix A* is the transitive closure of A.
To compute A *, we need only proceed up to the term An–1 , because if there is a path from
i to j, there must be a path of length less than n. Rather than base the derivation of A* on
computing the various powers of the Boolean matrix A, we can use the following simpler
algorithm.
Transitive closure algorithm
Phase 0: Insert the edge (i, j) into the graph if (i, 0) and (0, j) are in the graph.
Phase 1: Insert the edge (i, j) into the graph if (i, 1) and (1, j) are in the graph.
..
.
Phase k: Insert the edge (i, j) into the graph if (i, k) and (k, j) are in the graph.
The graph A (k) at the end of Phase k has an edge (i, j) iff there is a path
226
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 11.15. Matrix representation of directed graphs.
from
i to j that goes only through nodes {1,2, . . . , k } as intermediate hops.
..
Phase n–1: The graph A(n–1) is the required answer A*.
A key question is how to proceed so that each phase takes O(1) time for an overall O( n) time
on an n × n mesh. The O( n) running time would be optimal in view of the O( n³) sequential
complexity of the transitive closure problem. Assume for now that each processor located
on the main diagonal can broadcast a value to all processors in its row. Then the input, output,
and computation can be arranged as shown in Fig. 11.16.
Phase 0 of the algorithm is carried out as Rows 1, 2, . . . , n – 1 of A pass over Row 0 of
A which is stored in the 0th row of the mesh. As Row i passes over Row 0, Processor (0,0)
broadcasts the value of a i 0 to all of the processors in the 0th row. Because the jth processor
has already saved the value of a0 j, it can set the value of a i j that is passing through to 1 if
ai 0 = a 0 j = 1. By the time the kth row of A reaches Row k of the mesh, it has been updated to
Figure 11.16. Transitive closure algorithm on a 2D mesh.
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
227
become the kth row of A(k–1) , i.e., it has passed through the first k – 1 phases. Thus, the total
number of steps for computing the transitive closure of an n-node graph, represented by an
n × n adjacency matrix, is 3n steps.
The need for broadcasting can be eliminated through a technique known as systolic
retiming, defined as inserting delays on some of the edges (and perhaps removing delays
from some others) in such a way that each node still receives its input data in the same
order/combination as before. Figure 11.17 shows the application of systolic retiming to the
above transitive closure algorithm. The algorithm before retiming is shown on the left side
of Fig. 11.17, where the 0-delay row edges represent the broadcasting of akl , for all k > l, by
Processor Pl l .
In systolic retiming, we can multiply all edge delays by a constant factor (slowing down
the computation by that factor) or add the same delay to the edges in a cut in which all edges
go in the same direction. Also, for any node, we can add/subtract δ to/from each input edge
delay and subtract/add δ from/to each output edge delay, as delaying/advancing all inputs
by δ while advancing/delaying all outputs by δ cancel each other out as far as interactions
with other nodes are concerned. Our goal here is to eliminate the broadcasting (making all
edge delays nonzero).
In the case of Fig. 11.17, we can add 6 (more generally, 2 n – 2) units of delay to all
edges crossing Cut 1. This is allowed because all of the edges involved cross the cut in the
same direction. Now, we subtract 6 units of delay from the input to Node (0, 0) and add 6
units to each of its two outputs. Node (0,1) now has its top and side inputs with 7 and 6 units
of delay, respectively. In the next step, we reduce these by 5 (to 2 and 1) and increase the
output delays by 5 (to 6 and 5). Continuing in this manner, we get the retimed version shown
Figure 11.17. Systolic retiming to eliminate broadcasting.
228
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
on the right side of Fig. 11.17, which contains only nonzero edge delays. The retiming
increases the total delay to 5n – 2 steps, which is still asymptotically optimal.
The transitive closure algorithm is useful, e.g., for finding the connected components
of a graph defined as a partitioning of the nodes such that each pair of nodes in a partition
are connected. Clearly, once the transitive closure A* of the adjacency matrix A is found,
information about the graph’s connected components can be easily read out from the rows
of A *. Assigning a unique component ID to each node is straightforward. One can use, e.g.,
the label of the node with the smallest ID to label all nodes in the same component.
Let us now consider briefly another example of graph problems. The all-pairs shortest
path problem is defined as the problem of determining, simultaneously for all node pairs,
the length of the shortest path between them. Taking the weight matrix W shown in Fig. 11.15
as input, the algorithm is quite similar to that for finding the transitive closure of an adjacency
matrix A. There are n phases. In Phase 0, we replace the edge from i to j with the length of
the shortest path that is allowed to pass only through Node 0 as an intermediate node. To do
this, we compare w i j with w i 0 + w 0 j and choose the smaller of the two. This leads to W ( 0 ) .
Continuing in this way, W(k) will contain the length of the shortest path from i to j that passes
only through nodes {1, 2, . . , k} as intermediate nodes. With some additional work, we can
also keep track of the shortest path, rather than just its length, if desired.
11.6. IMAGE-PROCESSING
ALGORITHMS
In this section, we deal with example algorithms used in image analysis and computational geometry applications. Let an image be represented as an array of binary (black/white)
pixels. By labeling the (connected ) components of such a binary image ( or component
labeling for short), we mean grouping the 1 elements that can be reached from each other
via horizontal, vertical, or diagonal steps into components. Figure 11.18 shows an example
binary image that contains four connected components. Here, row-major indexing of the
Figure 11.18. Connected components in an 8 × 8 binary image.
229
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
Figure 11.19. Finding the connected components via divide and conquer.
elements is assumed and each component is given the index of its lowest pixel as its unique
identifying number.
Assuming that each pixel of the p-pixel image is assigned to one processor on a
mesh with p = n processors, the following naive algorithm immediately suggests
itself. Initially, the component ID of each processor holding a 1 is set to the processor’s own
ID. So, we designate each pixel as a separate component at the outset and then try to merge
the components that are connected. Each processor holding a 1 reads the pixel values and
component IDs of its eight neighbors (the diagonally adjacent values are read in two steps).
Now, each processor holding a 1 adjusts its component ID to the lowest ID among the
neighbors holding 1s if any of those IDS is smaller. The problem with this algorithm is that,
in the worst case, it requires Θ (n ) running time, e.g., when there is a single snakelike
component that winds through even-numbered rows.
A recursive O
-step algorithm is described next.
Recursive component-labeling algorithm on a 2D mesh
Phase 1: Label the components in each quadrant.
Phase 2: Merge components horizontally in the upper and lower halves.
Phase 3: Merge component vertically.
0 is changed to 1
if N = W = 1
1 is changed to 0
if N = W = NW = 0
Figure 11.20. Transformation or rewriting rules for Lavialdi's algorithm (no other pixel value
changes).
230
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
231
If each of the two merge phases can be done in O( )steps, then the running time of the
algorithm will be T(n) = T(n/4) + O( ) = O( ). Take the horizontal merge phase in the
upper half of the mesh. There are at most
/2 components that need to be merged ( / 4
on each side). Adjacency information for these components is readily available at the vertical
boundary. A column rotate at this boundary will yield the new label for each merged
/2 such components, information on their
component. Because there are no more than
new labels can be broadcast to all processors in the quadrant in O( ) steps using pipelined
communication.
Lavialdi’s algorithm for component labeling is somewhat more efficient. Using the
locally applied rules depicted in Fig. 11.20, components are shrunk to single pixels in
2
– 1 steps (this shrinkage phase does not disconnect components or merge them). Then,
in a (2 – 1)-step expansion phase, the process is reversed and the label of the single
remaining pixel of each component becomes the component label for all of its pixels.
To see why components will not merge in the shrinkage phase, consider a 0 that is about
to become 1 in the pattern
x 1 y
1 0 y.
y y z
If any of the y pixels is 1, then the associated component is already connected to this
component and no new connection will be created. If all of the y pixels are 0s, then even if
the z pixel is 1, it will be converted to 0, again avoiding any new connection. Figure 11.21
shows 9 steps of Lavialdi’s algorithm applied to an 8 × 8 binary image containing two
components. In this example, complete shrinkage of components to single pixels occurs in
10 steps (the worst case would be 15 steps).
PROBLEMS
11.1. Multiplication of nonsquare matrices
a. Explain the effect of a nonsquare matrix on Figs. 11.1 and 11.3.
b. Modify Figs. 11.2 and 11.4 for multiplying an m' × m matrix A by an m × m" matrix B.
c. How is the block matrix multiplication scheme described at the end of Section 11.1 affected
if the matrices are nonsquare but the mesh is square?
11.2. Matrix multiplication
Figures 11.2 and 11.4 correspond to matrix multiplication with both inputs supplied from
outside the array and both inputs prestored in the array. Show a suitable data organization on
a p -processor array (p = m 2) to multiply a fixed prestored matrix A by several B matrices
supplied as inputs.
11.3. Matrix multiplication
Consider the vector–matrix and matrix–matrix multiplication schemes depicted in Figs. 11.3
and 11.4 but assume that the architecture is a linear array or mesh (without the wraparound
links).
a.
Discuss the effects of removing the wraparound links on algorithm execution and running
time in Fig. 11.3.
b. Repeat part (a) for the matrix–matrix multiplication algorithm of Fig. 11.4.
232
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
c . Would it be helpful if we could store four elements (matrix blocks) in each processor rather
than just two in the course of executing the algorithm?
11.4. Back substitution
In the back substitution scheme depicted in Fig. 11.6, half of the processors are idle at any
given time.
a . Show how we can take advantage of the idle processors to overlap the solution of two
separate triangular systems of linear equations.
b . Show how we can merge pairs of adjacent processors into single processors, each less than
twice as complex as the existing processors, without affecting the running time.
c . Can similar techniques be applied to the inversion of a triangular matrix (Fig. 11.8)?
11.5. Bidiagonal systems of linear equations
Any algorithm for solving tridiagonal systems of linear equations can obviously be applied to
solving a bidiagonal system of linear equations where all of the nonzero elements of A are on
the main and lower (upper) diagonals. Devise a more efficient algorithm for this special case.
11.6. Gaussian elimination
For one of the systems of three linear equations at the beginning of Section 11.4, show all of
the intermediate computation steps, including values held by or passed between processors, on
the diagram of Fig. 11.13.
11.7. Jacobi relaxation
a . Solve one of the systems of three linear equations given near the beginning of Section 11.4
using Jacobi relaxation, beginning with the initial value of 0 for each variable.
b . Show the computation steps, including values held by or passed between processors, as
the solution of Part (a) is obtained by a linear array of three processors.
c . Repeat part (a) using Jacobi overrelaxation with γ = 1/2 and discuss the results.
11.8. Systolic retiming
a . In Fig. 11.17, what happens if we make the delays associated with all edges leading to the
output host in the retimed version of the graph equal to 1? Discuss the practical implications
of this change.
b . Retime a modified form of Fig. 11.17 (left) in which broadcasting by each diagonal node
proceeds to its right and then wraps around to cover the nodes to the left.
11.9. Transitive closure algorithm
Define the single-node-fault version A *(1) of the transitive closure of A as having aij*(1) = 1 iff
Nodes i and j are connected and remain connected if we remove any single node in the graph.
Propose an algorithm for efficiently computing A*(1) . Hint: In each phase of the algorithm, you
need to figure out if a pair of nodes are connected with or without a worst-case single node
fault.
11.10. All-pairs shortest path problem
Describe the complete algorithm for the all-pairs shortest path problem (end of Section 11.5)
that provides the shortest paths rather than only their lengths. Hint: When w i k + w k j is less than
wi j , a new shortest path between Nodes i and j has been identified. This path is the concatenation
of two previously stored paths, one from i to k and the other from k to j.
NUMERICAL 2D MESH ALGORITHMS
233
11.11. Component labeling on a 2D mesh
Analyze the recursive component-labeling algorithm of Section 11.6 in more detail to find its
exact worst-case step count and compare the result with Lavialdi’s algorithm.
11.12. Component labeling on a 2D mesh
Devise a component labeling algorithm that also yields the number of pixels in (area of) each
component.
11.13. Lavialdi’s component-labeling algorithm
a. Specify the operations that need to be performed in the expansion phase of Lavialdi's
algorithm.
b. Complete the steps of the example depicted in Fig. 11.21 all of the way to the end of
labeling.
c. How many steps does Lavialdi’s algorithm need to label the components in Fig. 11.18?
d. Construct an 8´8 binary image such that the shrinkage phase of Lavialdi’s algorithm
– 1 = 17 steps.
requires the worst-case 2
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Bert89]
[Kung88]
[Laks90]
[Lavi72]
[Leig92]
[Leis83]
[Mill85]
Bertsekas, D. P., and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods,
Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Kung, S. Y., VLSI Array Processors, Prentice–Hall, 1988.
Lakshmivarahan, S., and S. K. Dhall, Analysis and Design of Parallel Algorithms: Arithmetic and
Matrix Problems, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
Lavialdi, S., “On Shrinking Binary Picture Patterns,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 15, No. 1,
pp. 7–10, January 1972.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Leiserson, C., and J. Saxe, “Optimizing Synchronous Systems,” J. VLSI & Computer Systems, Vol.
1, No. 1, pp. 41–67, Spring 1983.
Miller, R., and Q. Stout, “Geometric Algorithms for Digitized Pictures on a Mesh-Connected
Computer,” IEEE Trans. Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 216–228,
March 1985.
This page intentionally left blank.
12
Other Mesh-Related
Architectures
In this chapter, we consider variations in mesh architectures that can lead to
higher performance or greater cost-effectiveness in certain applications. The
variations include higher dimensions, stronger and weaker connectivities, inclusion of buses, introduction of express channels, triangular or hexagonal shapes,
different types of wraparound links, and reconfigurable connectivity. Also,
extensions to pyramid networks, meshes of trees, and certain 2D product
networks will be discussed. Chapter topics are
·
·
·
·
·
·
12.1.
12.2.
12.3.
12.4.
12.5.
12.6.
Three or more dimensions
Stronger and weaker connectivities
Meshes augmented with nonlocal links
Meshes with dynamic links
Pyramid and multigrid systems
Meshes of trees
235
This page intentionally left blank.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
237
12.1. THREE OR MORE DIMENSIONS
Our discussions of algorithms in Chapters 9–11 (as well as in Sections 2.3 and 2.5) have
been in terms of 1D and 2D processor arrays. These are the most practical in terms of physical
realization in view of the 2D nature of implementation technologies such as VLSI chips and
printed-circuit boards. Recently, 3D mesh and torus architectures have become viable
alternatives for parallel machine design (we will see why shortly), but higher-dimensional
meshes are currently only of theoretical interest. In this section, we briefly review q- D
meshes, focusing on their differences with 1D and 2D arrays in terms of hardware realization
and algorithm design.
Theoretically, it should be possible to implement a 3D mesh or torus in the 3D physical
space. The processors can be visualized as occupying grid points on a 3D grid (Fig. 12.1),
with all six communication ports of each processor connected to neighboring processors by
short local wires. Even though such 3D structures have been and are being considered by
parallel processing researchers, numerous practical hurdles must be overcome before largescale implementations become cost-effective or even feasible.
The prevailing hardware implementation technology for digital systems that do not fit
on a single printed-circuit (PC) board is to mount multiple PC boards on a backplane that
supports the boards mechanically and also provides the needed electrical connectivity
between them (Fig. 12.1). This allows the boards to be easily replaced for repair or upgrade
and the system to be expanded by inserting extra boards, up to the maximum capacity offered
by the backplane. This method can be viewed as a 2.5D arrangement, with full 2D
connectivity on the circuit boards and limited connectivity along the third dimension via the
backplane.
Consider the example of implementing an 8 × 8 × 8 mesh on eight boards, each holding
an 8 × 8 mesh. Implementing an 8 × 8 2D mesh on a PC board is straightforward and can be
done with only short local links. However, at least some of the 64 links that need to go from
one PC board to the next involve long wires (from one processor to the backplane, a short
distance on the backplane, and from the backplane to the other processor on the next board).
With multiple lines per communication channel, a significant area on each PC board must
be devoted to routing these interboard links. This nullifies some of the advantages of a mesh
in terms of regularity and locality of connections. What we gain in return for the higher
complexity/cost are a smaller network diameter (3p1/3 – 3 instead of 2 p 1/2 – 2) and wider
Figure 12.1. 3D and 2.5D physical realizations of a 3D mesh.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
238
bisection (p 2/3 rather than p1/2 ). Our example mesh above has a diameter of 21 and bisection
width of 64. A comparably sized 22 × 23 2D mesh has a diameter of 43 and bisection width
of 23.
You can now imagine how much harder the implementation of a 4D or 5D mesh would
be with current technology. There is some speculation that using optical communication links
may solve these problems for 3D, and perhaps even higher-dimensional, meshes. However,
optical interconnections are not yet cost-effective, because of both technological factors and
the added delay/cost of electronic/optical conversions.
Regardless of how 3D and higher-dimensional meshes are physically realized, their
algorithms are quite similar to, or easily derivable from, those for 2D meshes discussed in
the preceding chapters. The following paragraphs contain brief discussions of 3D mesh
algorithms, with hints on how a 3D torus architecture, or higher-dimensional meshes/tori,
can be handled. A q-D mesh with m processors along each of its q dimensions (p = m q) has
a node degree of d = 2q, a diameter of D = q(m – 1) = q (p 1 /q – 1), and a bisection width of
p 1 – 1 / q when p1 /q is even. A q-D torus with m processors along each of its q dimensions is
sometimes referred to as an m-ary q-cube.
Sorting. One may guess that just as it was possible to sort a 2D array using alternating
row and column sorts (shearsort), it might be possible to sort a 3D array by suitably
alternating between sorts along the various dimensions. Such a generalized form of shearsort
for three and higher dimensions is indeed feasible [Corb92]. However, the following
algorithm for sorting a 3D array is both faster and simpler (a rarity in algorithm design!);
the algorithm is even simpler to describe than its 2D counterparts. Let Processor ( i, j, k) in
an m × m × m mesh be in Row i ( x dimension), Column j (y dimension), and Layer k ( z
dimension). Define the sorted order to correspond to the lexicographic ordering of reversed
node indices: (0,0,0), (1,0,0), . . . , ( m –1,0,0), (0,1,0), (1,1,0), . . . , (m–1,1,0), (0,2,0), and so
on. In this zyx order, the smallest m 2 elements end up on Layer 0 in column-major order, the
next smallest m 2 elements on Layer 1, and so on (the yx order on a slice is the same as
column-major order and the xy order corresponds to row-major order). The following
five-phase algorithm sorts the elements of the 3D array into the zyx order [Kund86].
Sorting on a 3D mesh
Phase 1: Sort the elements on each zx plane into zx order.
Phase 2: Sort the elements on each yz plane into zy order.
Phase 3: Sort the elements on each xy layer into yx order (odd layers in reverse order).
Phase 4: Apply two steps of odd–even transposition along the z direction.
Phase 5: Sort the elements on each xy layer into yx order.
In Phase 4 of the algorithm, the m3 processors are viewed as m 2 Linear arrays of length m,
aligned along the z direction, and two steps of odd–even transposition are applied to each of
these arrays. The 2D sorts can be performed using any 2D sorting algorithm. If the 2D sorting
algorithm needs T(m × m ) time, the time for our 3D algorithm will be T(m × m × m ) =
4T(m × m) + 2. In particular, any O(m)-time 2D sorting algorithm will lead to a running time
of O(m) = O(p 1/3 ) for the 3D algorithm. As usual, the proof is done using the zero–one
principle.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
239
Data Routing. A greedy zyx (layer-first) routing algorithm would route the packets
along the z dimension until they are in the destination layers and then use a greedy yx
(row-first) algorithm in each xy layer. Considerations with regard to buffer space in intermediate nodes and the delays introduced by conflicts are quite similar to those of 2D mesh
algorithms. To reduce the node storage requirement to a single message buffer, a sortingbased routing algorithm can be used.
Data routing on a 3D mesh
Phase 1: Sort the packets by their destination addresses into zyx order.
Phase 2: Route each packet along the z dimension to the correct xy layer.
Phase 3: Route each packet along the y dimension to the correct column.
Phase 4: Route each packet along the x dimension to the correct row.
Each of the Phases 2–4 takes m – 1 routing steps, with no conflict ever arising ([Leig92],
pp. 232–233). Thus, given that sorting in Phase 1 also takes O( m) compare–exchange steps,
the overall running time is O(m). Adaptive and wormhole routing schemes can similarly be
generalized to 3D and higher-dimensional meshes.
Matrix Multiplication. In Section 11.1, we saw that two m × m matrices can be
multiplied on an m × m torus in m multiply–add steps. A 2D mesh requires longer, but still
O(m), running time, which is optimal. To devise a faster matrix multiplication algorithm
on a 3D mesh, we divide each m × m matrix into an m 1/4 × m 1/4 array of m 3/4 × m 3/4 blocks.
A total of (m 1/4 ) 3 = m 3/4 block multiplications are needed. Let us assume that the
algorithm is to be performed on an m 3/4 × m3/4 × m3/4 mesh with p = m 9/4 processors. Then
each m 3/4 × m 3/4 layer of the mesh can be assigned to one of the m 3/4 × m 3/4 matrix
multiplications, performing its computation in m3/4 multiply–add steps. Finally, the addition
of m 1/4 blocks to form each block of the product matrix can be accomplished in m 1/4 addition
steps with proper distribution of elements to processors. The total running time is thus
O (m 3/4) = O(p 1/3 ) steps, which is optimal from the point of view of both the computational
work and network diameter. A more detailed description of the algorithm and its required
data distribution is given by Leighton ([Leig92], pp. 226–228).
Physical Systems. Intuitively, a 3D mesh seems to be the ideal architecture for
performing simulations of 3D physical systems. The ocean modeling and similar applications described in Section 1.1, e.g., map nicely onto a 3D mesh, with each processor holding
a 3D block of the large model. Because in each update stage only adjacent data points interact,
the 3D mesh is well equipped to perform the required interprocessor transfers rapidly and
efficiently. In image processing, a 3D mesh can deal with 3D images in much the same way
that a 2D mesh accommodates 2D digital images.
Low-versus High-Dimensional Meshes. A low-dimensional mesh, which can be
implemented at much lower cost compared with a high-dimensional mesh with the same
number of processors, can simulate the latter quite efficiently ([Leig92], pp. 234–236). It is
thus natural to ask the following question: Is it more cost-effective, e.g., to have four-port
processors in a 2D mesh architecture or six-port processors in a 3D mesh, given the fact that
for the four-port processors, the economy in number of ports and ease of layout allows us to
make each channel wider? This and similar questions have been studied by several re-
240
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
searchers ([Agar91], [Ande97], [Dall90]). Despite a lack of consensus, there are indications
that lower-dimensional arrays may be more cost-effective.
12.2. STRONGER AND WEAKER CONNECTIVITIES
One problem with a 2D mesh is its relatively large diameter. Higher-dimensional
meshes, on the other hand, present difficult implementation problems. These considerations
have resulted in a wide variety of architectures that are obtained by considering different
(nonrectangular) grids or by inserting/removing links into/from an ordinary mesh. These and
other variations are discussed in this section.
Figure 12.2 shows eight-neighbor and hexagonal meshes as examples of 2D meshes
with stronger connectivities than standard 2D meshes. The eight-neighbor mesh allows direct
communication between diagonally adjacent processors, which may be helpful for some
image-processing applications (e.g., see Section 11.6). An eight-neighbor mesh has smaller
diameter and wider bisection than an ordinary 2D mesh. However, these advantages are offset
by its higher implementation cost. The node degree of 6 in a hex mesh is intermediate
between those of ordinary 2D meshes/tori and the eight-neighbor mesh. However, the
nonrectangular shape of a hex mesh makes it difficult to implement applications involving
regular data structures such as matrices. Both eight-neighbor and hex meshes can have
wraparound links. Such links can be defined in a variety of ways, some of which will be
explored in the end-of-chapter problems.
Removing links from meshes and tori can result in simpler networks with correspondingly lower performance, offering interesting design trade-offs. For example, if an interprocessor link in a 2D torus is viewed as two unidirectional links, with links going in one direction
removed in alternating rows/columns, a Manhattan street network results (the unidirectional
links going in opposite directions in odd- and even-numbered rows/columns resemble the
one-way streets of Manhattan in New York). Figure 12.3 shows a 4 × 4 example. Manhattan
street networks offer the advantages of low diameter and simple node structure. Each node
only has two input and two output ports. The down side is that routing and other algorithms
become more complicated.
Figure 12.2. Eight-neighbor and hexagonal (hex) meshes.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
Figure 12.3. A 4 × 4 Manhattan street network.
Figure 12.4. A pruned 4 × 4 × 4 torus with nodes of degree 4 [Kwai97].
241
242
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 12.5. Eight-neighbor mesh with shared links and example data paths.
Another strategy that allows us to combine the advantages of low diameter and simple
nodes is to prune a high-dimensional mesh/torus by selectively removing some of its links.
Figure 12.4 shows a pruned 3D torus in which all of the z links have been kept, while the x
or y links are removed in alternate layers [Kwai97].
Yet another way to reduce the node degree of a mesh is to share the links that are
never/seldom used at the same time. Many mesh algorithms utilize communications along
the same direction in each step (weak SIMD model) or can be easily modified to honor this
constraint without a significant performance penalty. Algorithms of this type allow us to use
the 2D mesh depicted in Fig. 12.5, which combines the advantages of the eight-neighbor
mesh with the low node degree of a standard mesh. Using the natural designations NE, NW,
SE, and SW for the four ports of each processor, the instruction “send to NE, receive from
SE” corresponds to northward data movement as shown on the right side of Fig. 12.5.
Similarly, “send to NE, receive from SW” would implement a diagonal data transfer
operation.
12.3. MESHES AUGMENTED WITH NONLOCAL LINKS
Because one of the major drawbacks of low-dimensional meshes and tori is their rapidly
increasing diameters when the number of processors becomes large, it has been suggested
that mechanisms be provided in order to speed up long-distance communications among
nodes. One example is the provision of bypass links or express channels, as shown in Fig.
12.6 for one row of a 2D mesh. In the top example, the worst-case distance along the
nine-processor row has been reduced from 8 to 4. Such bypass links destroy the locality and
regularity of connections, leading to both algorithmic complexity and hardware implementation problems. For example, routing becomes more difficult, particularly if a deadlock-free
wormhole routing algorithm is to be devised that takes advantage of the shorter graphtheoretic distances for faster data transfers. However, they may prove worthwhile in some
applications.
A wide variety of mesh architectures have been proposed in which the local links have
been augmented with one or more shared buses to facilitate occasional long-distance
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
243
Figure 12.6. Three examples of bypass links along the rows of a 2D mesh.
communications. Figure 12.7 shows a 2D mesh augmented with a single global bus to which
all processors are connected. For a large number p of processors, this organization is of
theoretical interest only because buses cannot connect thousands of processors. Adding the
global bus increases the node degree from 4 to 5 but has a significant effect on the speed of
some computations. The bus does not help much in computations (such as sorting) that
involve a large amount of data movements as it only increases the bisection width of the
network by 1. However, in other applications, with sparse long-distance communications,
the performance effect of the global bus might become significant.
Consider a semigroup computation such as max-finding, with one item per processor
in a square
mesh. With a single global bus, this computation can be performed in
O( p1/3 ) rather than O(p l/2 ) steps as follows. We assume that the semigroup operation ⊗ is
commutative.
Semigroup computation on 2D mesh with a global bus
Phase 1: Find the partial results in p1/3 ×p 1/3 submeshes in O( p1/3 ) steps, with the
results stored in the upper left corner processor of each submesh (Fig. 12.7).
Figure 12.7. Mesh with a global bus and semigroup computation on it.
244
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Phase 2: Combine the p 1/3 partial results in O(p 1/3 ) steps, using a sequential algorithm
in one processor and the global bus for data transfers.
Phase 3: Broadcast the final result to all processors in one step.
In part because of the impracticality of connecting a large number of processors to a single
global bus and partly to allow a larger number of long-distance data transfers to take place
concurrently, meshes with row and column buses have been proposed. As shown in Fig. 12.8,
each row/column has a separate bus that allows single-step data transfers from any processor
to another processor in the same row/column (but only one such transfer per row or column
in a given cycle). Any processor can be reached from any other in at most two steps. Again,
algorithms like sorting are not significantly affected by the added buses as the bisection width
has only doubled. However, semigroup computation now becomes much faster, requiring
O(p 1/6 ) steps.
Semigroup computation on 2D mesh with row and column buses
Phase 1: Find the partial results in p 1/6 × p 1/6 submeshes in O(p 1/6 ) steps, with the
results stored in the upper left corner of each submesh (Fig. 12.8).
Phase 2: Distribute the p1/3 values left on some of the rows among the p 1/6 rows in
the same slice so that each row only has p 1/6 values (p 1/6 steps).
Phase 3: Use the row buses to combine row values in p1/6 steps; at this stage, there
are p 1/2 values in Column 0 that must be combined.
Phase 4: Distribute the p 1 / 2 values in Column 0 among p1 / 3 columns such that each
column has p 1/6 values; constant time, using the row buses.
Phase 5: Use the column buses to combine column values in p 1 / 6 steps; at this stage,
there are p 1/3 values in Row 0 that must be combined.
Phase 6: Distribute the p 1 / 3 values on Row 0 among the p 1 / 6 rows in Row Slice 0 in
constant time, using the column buses.
Figure 12.8. Mesh with row/column buses and semigroup computation on it.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
245
Phase 7: Combine the row values in p 1/6 steps using the row buses.
Phase 8: Broadcast the final result to all processors in two steps.
Note that when row/column buses are added to a 2D mesh, a square mesh is no longer the
best topology from the viewpoint of the above algorithm. It is relatively easy to show that if
3/8
a p5/8 × p mesh is augmented with row/column buses, the above algorithm can be modified
to run in O(p1/8 ) steps, compared with O(p 1/6 ) in the square mesh. Supplying the details is
left as an exercise.
12.4. MESHES WITH DYNAMIC LINKS
There are various ways of designing meshes so that node connectivities can change
dynamically. For example, if buses are segmented through the insertion of switches that can
be opened and closed under the control of a nearby processor, a powerful architecture results.
When all switches on such a separable bus are closed, it becomes a single bus (e.g., row or
column bus). At the other extreme, when all switches are open, multiple data transfers can
be accommodated by using each bus segment independently. Figure 12.9 shows how a
separable bus can be connected to, and its switches controlled by, the processors in a linear
array.
A semigroup or fan-in computation can be performed on a p-processor linear array with
a separable bus by first combining pairs of elements in even-numbered and the following
odd-numbered processors and then successively dividing the bus into p/4, p /8, . . . , 2, 1
segments and allowing the processors connected to each segment to exchange their partial
results in two bus transfer steps. This leads to an O(log p)-step algorithm. The 2D mesh
version of the algorithm is similar, with row combining and column combining done using
row and column segmented buses as above.
Meshes with separable row/column buses have been studied in depth (see, e.g., [Serr93]
and the references therein). One problem with such meshes is that the switches add to the
data transmission delay over the bus, so that the bus cycle will become longer than that of a
simple row/column bus. An advantage is that the buses provide a convenient mechanism for
bypassing faulty processors so that certain fault tolerance schemes can be implemented with
little effort (see, e.g., [Parh93]).
The additional power and flexibility provided by separable buses may allow us to use
fewer buses for the same or higher performance. For example, if one separable row/column
bus is provided for every p 1/6 rows or columns in a square mesh (say those whose row/column
indices are multiples of p 1/6 ), then the semigroup computation of Fig. 12.8 can still be
performed in O(p 1/6 ) steps. Once the submesh results are obtained, they can be combined in
logarithmic time using the separable row buses to yield p 1/3 values in Column 0. A
Figure 12.9. Linear array with a separable bus using reconfiguration switches.
246
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 12.10. Some processor states in a reconfigurable mesh.
logarithmic time combining phase in Column 0 then yields the final result. In fact, we can
do better than this by using more (but still fewer than 2 p 1/2 ) row and column buses or by
utilizing an optimal nonsquare topology [Serr93].
It is also possible to provide reconfiguration capability within the processors as opposed
to putting switches on the buses. One popular scheme, which has been investigated in great
depth, is known as the reconfigurable mesh architecture. The processors have four ports and
are connected to the ports of their four nearest neighbors as in a conventional mesh. However,
internally each processor can tie together a subset of its ports to allow data to go through it
and get from one neighbor to one or more other neighbors (Fig. 12.10). By proper setting of
processor states, buses can be established: from a global bus linking all processors to a variety
of complex patterns of connectivity. Row and column buses can also be formed as a special
case if desired. The switch delay is still a problem in such architectures, particularly if a
signal has to propagate through many switches.
12.5. PYRAMID AND MULTIGRID SYSTEMS
The pyramid architecture combines 2D mesh and tree connectivities in order to gain
advantages from both schemes. Topologically, the pyramid inherits low logarithmic diameter
from the tree and relatively wide bisection from the mesh. Algorithmically, features of each
network can be utilized when convenient (e.g., fast semigroup or prefix computation on the
tree and efficient sorting or data permutation on the mesh).
A pyramid network can be defined recursively. A single node is a one-level pyramid.
The single node doubles as the pyramid's apex and its 1 × 1 base. An l -level pyramid consists
of a 2 l–1 × 2l–1 base mesh, with groups of four nodes, forming 2× 2 submeshes on the base,
connected to each node of the base of an ( l–1)-level pyramid (Fig. 12.11). The number of
processors in an l-level pyramid is p = (2 2 l – 1)/3. From this expression, it is evident that
roughly three-fourths of the processors belong to the base. It is thus not very wasteful of
processors if we assume that only the base processors contain data and other processors are
only used for data routing and various combining operations. This is similar to our assumption in Section 2.4 that only leaf nodes of a tree architecture hold data elements. The diameter
of an l-level pyramid is 2l–2 and its maximum node degree is 9 for l ≥ 4.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
247
Figure 12.11 Pyramid with three levels and 4 × 4 base along with its 2D layout.
A pyramid can perform a semigroup computation in O(log p) steps when each processor
on the base holds a single data item and the items are indexed in shuffled row-major order
(see Fig. 9.3). Each processor combines the values from its four children until the final result
is found at the apex. Then, the result is broadcast to all nodes. Parallel prefix computation is
similarly quite simple with the same assumptions. Semigroup computation under other
indexing schemes on the base is no different, provided that the semigroup operation ⊗ i s
commutative. Semigroup computation algorithm with other indexing schemes and a noncommutative operator becomes more complex, as does parallel prefix computation under
similar conditions.
Sorting on a pyramid cannot be significantly faster than on a 2D mesh. The 2l -link
bisection width of an l-level pyramid (l > 1) establishes an Ω ( ) lower bound on the
worst-case running time of any sorting algorithm. Data routing, on the other hand, can be
speeded up by the added links compared with a 2D mesh. To route from any node to any
other node on the base mesh, one can simply route upward to the apex and then downward
to the destination node. This algorithm works fine as long as the number of messages is small.
Otherwise, congestion at and near the apex increases the routing delays and buffer requirements. The bisection-width argument can again be invoked to show that an arbitrary
O(p)-packet routing problem would take at least Ω ( ) steps to solve on a p-processor
pyramid.
The 2D multigrid architecture can be derived from the pyramid by removing all but one
of the downward links of each processor (Fig. 12.12). This reduces the maximum node degree
(from 9 to 6) and thus the processor complexity, but otherwise preserves most of the
properties of the pyramid, including its bisection width and logarithmic diameter. It is easy
to see that the diameter of the l-level 2D multigrid architecture satisfies the recurrence D(l )
≤ D(l-1) + 6, with D(2) = 2. Actually the diameter of the two-level 2D multigrid is 3, but
for l ≥ 3, we can take it to be 2 as far as the recurrence is concerned.
The 2D multigrid is to the pyramid what the 1D multigrid is to the binary X-tree (Fig.
11.11). In fact, each of the side views of the pyramid (2D multigrid) is a binary X-tree (1D
multigrid).
Both the pyramid and 2D multigrid architectures are suitable for image-processing
applications where the base holds the image data (one pixel or block of pixels per processor)
248
INTRODUCTION
TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 12.12. The relationship between pyramid and 2D multigrid architectures.
and performs low-level image operations that involve communication between nearby pixels.
Processors in the upper layers of the pyramid or multigrid deal with higher-level features
and processes involving successively larger parts of the image.
12.6. MESHES OF TREES
The mesh of trees architecture represents another attempt at combining the advantages
of tree and mesh structures. Like the pyramid, an l-level mesh of trees architecture has a
2 l –1 × 2 l –l base whose processors are the leaves of 2 l–1 row trees and 2 l –1 column trees. The
number of processors in an l-level mesh of trees is p = 2 l (3 × 22 l –2 – 1). From this expression,
it is evident that roughly one-third of the processors belong to the base. The diameter of an
l-level mesh of trees is 4l – 4, its bisection width is 2 l -1 , and its maximum node degree is 3.
Several variations to the basic mesh of trees architecture of Fig. 12.13 are possible. If
the base processors are connected as a 2D mesh, the maximum node degree increases to 6.
The ith row and ith column root nodes may be merged into a single node (increasing the
node degree to 4) or interconnected by an extra link (preserving the maximum node degree
of 3). Either modification increases the efficiency of some algorithms, One can also construct
trees diagonally, in lieu of or in addition to row and/or column trees.
The mesh of trees architecture has a recursive structure in the sense that removing the
row and column root nodes, along with their associated links, yields four smaller mesh of
trees networks. This property is useful in the design of recursive algorithms. A mesh of trees
network with an m × m base can be viewed as a switching network between m processors
located at the row roots and m memory modules at the column roots (right side of Fig. 12.14).
Note that P i and Mj are connected to one and only one of the switches in the middle column.
Hence, there is a unique path from each Pi to each Mj and the paths are node-disjoint. Thus,
effectively a crossbar switch with full permutation capability and O(log m) switching delay
is implemented. If row and column root nodes are merged, then a processor-to-processor
interconnection network is obtained.
Semigroup and parallel prefix computations can be performed in 4l – 4 and 6 l – 6 steps,
respectively, on an l-level mesh of trees using row/column combining and prefix computations on the respective trees. The latter can be reduced to 4 l – 3 steps by doing row semigroup
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
249
Figure 12.13. Mesh of trees architecture with three levels and a 4×4 base.
computations concurrently with row prefix computations (pipelining the two will add only
one time step to the running time of one of them).
To route m² packets stored one per processor on the m × m base, one can use a variant
of the row-first routing algorithm. Row trees are used to send each packet to its destination
column. Then, column trees are utilized to route the packets to their destination rows.
However, because the m² packets must all go through the 2m root nodes, the worst-case
running time of this algorithm is
If we take the view shown in Fig. 12.14,
with only m packets to be routed from one side of the network to the other, only 2 log 2 m
routing steps are required, provided that the destination nodes are all distinct.
Figure 12.14. Alternate views of the mesh of trees architecture with a 4×4 base.
250
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
To sort m² keys, stored one per processor on the m×m base, one can devise an algorithm
based on shearsort, where row and column sorts are done on the respective trees rather than
on linear arrays. Supplying the details of the algorithm is left as an exercise. Because an
m-node binary tree can sort m items in O(m) time, the running time of this algorithm is
asymptotically the same as that of shearsort on a 2D mesh. If we take the view shown in Fig.
12.14, with only m keys to be sorted, then the following algorithm can be used (we assume
that the row and column root nodes have been merged and each holds one of the keys).
Sorting m keys on a mesh of trees with an m × m base
Phase 1: Broadcast the keys to the leaves within both trees (Leaf i, j gets x i and x j )
Phase 2: At a base processor: if xj > x i or xj = xi and j > i then flag := 1 else flag := 0
Phase 3: Add the flag values in column trees (Root i obtains the rank of xi)
Phase 4: Route xi from Root i to Root rank[i]
Matrix–vector multiplication Ax = y can be done quite efficiently if the matrix A is stored
on the base and the vector x in the column roots, say. Then, the result vector y is obtained in
the row roots as follows.
Multiplying an m×m matrix by an m-vector on a mesh of trees
Phase 1: Broadcast xj through the ith column tree (Leaf i, j has aij and xj )
Phase 2: At each base processor compute aij xj
Phase 3: Sum over row trees (Row root i obtains
One can use pipelining to multiply r matrix–vector pairs in 2l – 2 + r steps.
The convolution of two vectors can be easily computed if the mesh of trees with an m
×(2 m – 1) base contains m diagonal trees in addition to the row and column trees, as shown
in Fig. 12.15. Assume that the ith element of the vector x is in ith row root and that the jth
element of the vector y is in the (m – 1 – j)th diagonal root. The following algorithm yields
the kth element of the convolution z, defined as zk = a k b 0 + a k –1 b 1 + ... + a 0 b k , in the kth
column root.
Convolution of two m-vectors on a mesh of trees with an m×(2m–1) base
Phase 1: Broadcast x j from the ith row root to all row nodes on the base
Phase 2: Broadcast y m –1 – j from the (m – 1 – j)th diagonal root to the base diagonal
Phase 3: Leaf i, j, which has x i and y 2 m – 2 – i – j, multiplies them to get xi y 2 m –2– i–j
Phase 4: Sum over columns to get
in column root j
Note that Phases 1 and 2 of this algorithm can be overlapped to speed up the computation.
The final algorithm described in this section deals with the construction of a minimalweight spanning tree for an undirected graph with edge weights. A spanning tree of a
connected graph is a subset of its edges that preserves the connectivity of all nodes in the
graph but does not contain any cycle. A minimal-weight spanning tree (MWST) is a subset
of edges that has the minimum total weight among all spanning trees. This is a very important
problem. For example, if the graph under consideration represents a communication (trans-
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
251
Figure 12.15. Mesh of trees variant with row, column, and diagonal trees.
portation) network, an MWST tree might correspond to the best way to broadcast a message
to all nodes (deliver products to the branches of a chain store from a central warehouse).
The MWST problem can be solved by a simple greedy algorithm. Assume for simplicity
that all edge weights are unique so that there is always a single minimum-weight edge among
any subset of edges. At each step, we have a set of connected components or “supernodes”
(initially n single-node components). We connect each component to its “nearest” neighbor,
i.e., we find the minimum-weight edge that connects the component to another component.
Any such minimum-weight outgoing edge from a component must be in the MWST. Assume
that it is not; thus, the component is connected to the rest of the MWST by means of one or
more other edges with larger weights. Remove any of these edges and replace it with the
minimum-weight edge. This yields a spanning tree with smaller total weight than the MWST;
clearly a contradiction.
An example is shown in Fig. 12.16. We begin with nine components and identify the
minimal-weight outgoing edge from each. These are shown as heavy lines in the upper right
diagram. Inclusion of these edges in the MWST reduces the problem to that of identifying
the MWST of the four-node graph shown at the lower left, where each node corresponds to
a subset of two or three nodes in the original nine-node graph. Again, the minimal-weight
outgoing edge from each node is identified (heavy lines) and included in the MWST. This
leaves us with two supernodes and their minimal-weight connecting edge with weight 25
completes the MWST as shown in the lower right diagram.
The proof of convergence for the greedy algorithm is simple. The spanning tree has
n – 1 edges. The first phase of the greedy algorithm selects at least n/2 edges of the tree.
Each subsequent phase cuts in half the number of unidentified edges. Thus, there will be log 2
n phases. If the graph’s weight matrix W (see Fig. 11.15) is stored in the leaves of a mesh of
trees architecture, each phase requires O(log² n) steps with a simple algorithm (to be shown)
and O(log n) steps with a more sophisticated algorithm. The total running time is thus O(log³
n) or O(log² n). For comparison purposes, sequential algorithms for this problem have the
following complexities, where n is the number of nodes and e the number of edges in the
graph:
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
252
Figure 12.16. Example for the minimal-weight spanning tree algorithm.
Kruskal’s algorithm: O(e log e) steps ⇒ O(n² log n ) for dense
graphs with e = O(n²)
Prim’s algorithm with binary heap: O((e + n )log n) ⇒ O(n² log n)
Prim’s algorithm with Fibonacci heap: O(e + n log n ) ⇒ O( n²)
Thus, our best parallel solution offers a speed-up of O( n²/log² n) which is sublinear in the
number p = O(n²) of processors used.
The key part of the simple parallel version of the greedy algorithm is showing that each
phase can be done in O(log² n) steps. Because weights are assumed to be unique, they can
double as edge ID S. Edge weights are stored in leaves, with Leaf ( i, j) holding the weight
w(i, j) of Edge (i, j). The roots of Row i and Column i are merged into a single degree-4 node
representing Node i of the graph. A label L(i) associated with each node i gives its supernode
identity. L(i) is initialized to i, i.e., there are n supernodes initially. If L(i) = i, Node i is the
supernode leader. At the start of each of the log 2 n phases, Leaf (i, j) knows if Edge (i, j) is
in the spanning tree and, if so, to which supernode it belongs. The algorithm for each phase
consists of two subphases:
a.
b.
Find the minimum-weight edge incident to each supernode.
Merge the supernodes for the next phase.
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
253
Figure 12.17. Finding the new supernode ID when several supernodes merge.
Subphase (a) can be done in 4 log 2 n steps in the following way. Each member node of a
supernode finds its minimum-weight outgoing edge in 2 log 2 n steps (the minimum value in
Column i). Then, the minimum among these minimums is found in 2 log 2 n steps. Subphase
(b) can be done in O(log² n) steps in the following way. Each supernode leader knows the
“closest” supernode with which it must merge. The only remaining problem are to determine
the identity of the new supernode and to disperse this identity to all nodes within the
supernode. If Supernode A is merging with Supernode B, which is in turn merging with
Supernode C, and so forth, a chain reaction occurs that might slow down the identification
process. If we view the merging information in each Supernode X as a pointer to another
supernode Y (Fig. 12.17), then there will always be a pair of supernodes that point to each
other. Of these two nodes, the one with the smaller supernode ID can be designated as the
new leader. Nodes can become aware of the new leader’s ID by a pointer-jumping process
(see Section 5.5) in log 2 n iterations, each requiring O(log n ) steps. For details and
improvements, consult Leighton ([Leig92], pp. 325–338).
PROBLEMS
12.1. Sorting on q-dimensional mesh and torus networks
Justify the bisection-based lower bound p 1 /q /2 for sorting on a q-D mesh.
Show that if interprocessor communication is restricted to be in one direction in each step,
then a corresponding multisection lower bound of qp 1/ q /2 applies.
c. How are the lower bounds of parts (a) and (b) affected in k–k sorting, where each processor
begins and ends up with k records?
d. Derive lower bounds similar to those of parts (a)–(c) in the case of a q-D torus.
a.
b.
12.2. q-dimensional torus networks
This problem deals with m-ary q-cubes, i.e., q-dimensional torus networks with sides of length
m.
a.
b.
c.
Show that an m-ary q-cube is node-symmetric in the sense that the network looks exactly
the same when viewed from any of its nodes.
Show that the sum of distances from any node of a 2D torus to all other nodes is m(m² – 1)/2
if m is odd and m ³/2 if m is even. These lead to simple closed-form expressions for the
average internode distance in the two cases.
Show that the generalized forms for the expressions of part (b) in the case of an m-ary
q– 1
q-cube are q(m² – 1)m
/4 and qm q +1/4, respectively.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
254
12.3. Hexagonal mesh
The node indexing scheme in the hexagonal mesh of Fig. 12.2 is such that each Node i is
connected to Nodes i ± 1, i ± 7, and i ± 8 (mod 19). Even though wraparound links are not
shown in Fig. 12.2, assume that the same rules apply to them as well.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine the number of nodes in a hex mesh with each outside edge having m processors.
Generalize the above node indexing scheme for a hex mesh with sides of length m.
Draw the hex mesh of Fig. 12.2, with the connectivity rules given above, as a chordal ring.
Show that the general hex mesh, as defined in part (b), consists of three edge-disjoint rings.
12.4. Manhattan street networks
Consider a Manhattan street network with an even number r of rows and an even number p/r
of columns.
a.
b.
c.
Find the exact network diameter in terms of p and r and for the special case of r =
Devise an efficient routing algorithm for the network and analyze its delay and buffer needs.
Analyze the complexity of the shearsort algorithm on this network. Hint: Let pairs of rows
and columns cooperate on row and column sorts.
d. Describe a matrix multiplication algorithm with its associated data layout for this net work.
12.5. Honeycomb mesh
Extend the hex mesh of Fig. 12.2 by adding two layers of nodes around its periphery. Then
remove the nodes currently numbered 0, 2, 3, 5, 14, 16, 17, and so on (the resulting network
resembles a honeycomb). Show that a honeycomb mesh with a rectangular boundary is in fact
a pruned 2D mesh. Use this knowledge to derive its diameter and bisection width.
12.6. Pruned 3D torus
Consider a pruned 3D torus network, similar to that in Fig. 12.4, with an even number l of
layers, r rows, and p/(lr) columns.
a. Find the exact network diameter in terms of p, l, and r and for the special case of
l=r=
b. Devise an efficient routing algorithm for the network and analyze its delay and buffer needs.
c. Analyze the complexity of the 3D mesh sorting algorithm (Section 12.1) for this network.
Hint: Let pairs of layers cooperate on the 2D sorts.
d. How would you partition an 8 × 8 × 8 pruned torus for implementation on eight circuit
boards each holding 64 processors (see Fig. 12.1)?
12.7. Mesh with row/column buses
a.
b.
Show that the optimal aspect ratio (number of rows divided by number of columns) in a
mesh with row/column buses is p 1/4 for the semigroup computation; i.e., the optimal mesh
is p 5 / 8 × p 3 / 8 . Hint: The running time of the algorithm becomes O( p 1 / 8 ).
Show that if multiple items can be stored in each processor, then a mesh with row/column
buses can perform a semigroup computation in O( n 1 / 9) steps using p = n 8 / 9 processors in
an n 5/9 × n 3/9 mesh.
12.8. Mesh with separable row/column buses
a.
b.
In Fig. 12.9, why is a bus switch provided after every four processors rather than after every
two?
Can we remove the local interprocessor links and use the separable buses for all data
transfers, thereby reducing the node degree to 2? Would this involve a speed penalty?
OTHER MESH-RELATED ARCHITECTURES
255
12.9. Mesh with fixed segmented row/column buses
Suppose that an r × (p/r) mesh is equipped with fixed segmented buses. In each column (row),
groups of x (y) processors are connected to the same bus segment, with r/x (p/(ry)) bus segments
in a column (row).
a.
b.
Determine the optimal number of bus segments in each row and column, x opt and y opt, in
order to maximize the speed of semigroup computation.
Determine the optimal aspect ratio r/(p/r) for a p -processor mesh performing semigroup
computation.
12.10. Linear array with a separable bus
Consider a linear array having a single bus that spans the entire array, with a bus switch inserted
after every g processors. Assume that each switch is immediately before, and controlled by, a
processor whose index is a multiple of g. Figure 12.9 shows an example with p = 16 and g =
4.
a . Develop algorithms for semigroup and parallel prefix computation on this architecture.
b. Show how this architecture can efficiently execute the odd–even reduction of Section 11.3 .
12.11. Pyramid architecture
a.
b.
c.
Derive and prove a formula for the bisection width of an l-level pyramid.
Supply the details of parallel prefix computation on a pyramid and find its exact running
time.
Each row on the base of a pyramid can be viewed as forming the leaves of a complete
binary tree rooted at the apex. Can we use this observation to develop a fast semigroup or
parallel prefix computation algorithm for data elements stored on the base with row-major
indexing?
12.12. Pyramid architecture
Can a pyramid with an m × m base efficiently simulate:
a.
b.
c.
d.
A larger pyramid with a 2m × 2m base?
A mesh of trees architecture with an m × m base?
An m × m mesh with a single global bus?
An m × m mesh with row and column buses?
12.13. 2D multigrid architecture
a.
b.
Derive and prove a formula for the bisection width of an l-level 2D multigrid architecture.
Show that the recurrence D( l) = D(l – 1) + 6 with D(2) = 2 provides a tight bound for the
diameter of a 2D multigrid architecture when l is sufficiently large.
c. How large does l need to be for the result of part (b) to hold? Find the exact value of the
diameter for all smaller values of l.
d. Describe and analyze a semigroup computation algorithm on a 2D multigrid.
e. Describe and analyze a parallel prefix computation algorithm on a 2D multigrid.
12.14. Mesh of trees architecture
a.
b.
Show that routing g packets between processors on the base of a mesh of trees networks
requires Ω
routing steps in the worst case, even if no two destinations are the same.
Show how to find the minimum of m numbers, each m bits wide, in O(log² m ) steps on an
m × m mesh of trees network.
256
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
12.15. kD meshes
Show that a k D p-processor mesh with equal sides along each of the k dimensions has a bisection
width no smaller than p 1 – 1 / k. Note that it is not adequate to observe that slicing the kD mesh
down the middle along one of the dimensions will cut exactly p 1 – 1 / k links p 1/ k is even and
slightly more if p 1 /k is odd; this only establishes an upper bound on the bisection width. Hint:
Show how to connect every pair of nodes in the array by a pair of directed paths, one in each
direction, such that no edge of the array is contained in more than p 1 + 1 / k /2 such paths, thereby
establishing a correspondence between the kD mesh and a p-node directed complete graph
whose bisection width is known.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Agar91]
[Ande97]
[Corb92]
[Dall90]
[Kund86]
[Kund91]
[Kwai97]
[Leig92]
[Parh93]
[Raja96]
[Serr93]
Agarwal, A., “Limits on Interconnection Network Performance,” IEEE Trans. Parallel and Distributed Systems, Vol. 2, No. 4, pp. 398–412, October 1991.
Anderson, J. R., and S. Abraham, “Multidimensional Network Performance with Unidirectional
Links,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1997, pp. 26–33.
Corbett, P. F., and I. D. Scherson, “Sorting in Mesh-Connected Multiprocessors,” IEEE Trans.
Parallel and Distributed Systems, Vol. 3, No. 5, pp. 626–632, September 1992.
Dally, W. J., “Performance Analysis of k-ary n-cube Interconnection Networks,” IEEE Trans.
Computers, Vol. 39, No. 6, pp. 775–785, 1990.
Kunde, M., “A General Approach to Sorting on 3-Dimensionally Mesh-Connected Arrays,” Proc.
CONPAR, 1986, pp. 329–337.
Kunde, M., “Concentrated Regular Data Streams on Grids: Sorting and Routing Near to the Bisection
Bound,” Proc. Symp. Foundations of Computer Science, 1991, pp. 141–150.
Kwai, D.-M., and B. Parhami, “A Class of Fixed-Degree Cayley-Graph Interconnection Networks
Derived by Pruning k-ary n-cubes,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1997, pp. 92–95.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Parhami, B., “Fault Tolerance Properties of Mesh-Connected Parallel Computers with Separable
Row/Column Buses” Proc. 36th Midwest Symp. Circuits and Systems, August 1993, pp. 1128–1131.
Rajasekaran, S., “Mesh Connected Computers with Fixed and Reconfigurable Buses: Packet Routing
and Sorting,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 45, No. 5, pp. 529–539, May 1996.
Serrano, M. J., and B. Parhami, “Optimal Architectures and Algorithms for Mesh-Connected Parallel
Computers with Separable Row/Column Buses,” IEEE Trans. Parallel and Distributed Systems, Vol.
4, No. 10, pp. 1073–1080, October 1993.
IV
Low-Diameter
Architectures
The bulk of this part deals with the (binary) hypercube architecture and its many
derivatives and variants, collectively referred to as hypercubic networks. However, we will also consider a variety of other interconnection structures that offer
advantages over hypercubic networks under certain valuation criteria, work
loads, or technological constraints. A common property that links all of these
architectures is that their diameters are (or can be, with proper choice of their
structural parameters) much lower than those of meshes and tori. Specifically,
whereas a q -D p -node mesh or torus has a diameter of Θ ( p1/ q ) with a node
degree of Θ ( q ), these networks offer logarithmic or sublogarithmic diameters
with maximum node degrees ranging from 3 to log 2 p. By the end of this part,
which is composed of the following four chapters, we will have a more or less
complete picture of the sea of interconnection networks partially visible in Fig.
4.8.
• Chapter 13: Hypercubes and Their Algorithms
• Chapter 14: Sorting and Routing on Hypercubes
• Chapter 15: Other Hypercubic Architectures
• Chapter 16: A Sampler of Other Networks
257
This page intentionally left blank.
13
Hypercubes and
Their Algorithms
The hypercube architecture has played an important role in the development of
parallel processing and is still quite popular and influential. The logarithmic
diameter, linear bisection, and highly symmetric recursive structure of the
hypercube support a variety of elegant and efficient parallel algorithms that often
serve as starting points for developing, or benchmarks for evaluating, algorithms
on other architectures. The hypercube's symmetry and recursive structure also
lead to rich theoretical underpinnings that bring forth a wide array of theoretical
results about its performance, layout in physical space, and robustness. In this
chapter, we introduce the hypercube, study its topological and embedding
properties, and present a number of simple algorithms. Sorting and routing
algorithms will be covered in Chapter 14. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
13.1.
13.2.
13.3.
13.4.
13.5.
13.6.
Definition and main properties
Embeddings and their usefulness
Embedding of arrays and trees
A few simple algorithms
Matrix multiplication
Inverting a lower triangular matrix
259
This page intentionally left blank.
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
261
13.1. DEFINITION AND MAIN PROPERTIES
The origins of the hypercube architecture can be traced back to the early 1960s [Squi63].
Subsequently, both the direct (single-stage) version, discussed in this chapter, and the indirect
or multistage version, to be covered in Sections 14.4 and 15.2, were proposed as interconnection networks for parallel processing [Peas77], [Sull77]. None of these early proposals
led to a hardware implementation, primarily because of high hardware cost [Haye89]. The
development of routing algorithms and application programs for the Cosmic Cube, a
64-processor hypercube system built at the California Institute of Technology in the early
1980s [Seit85], was instrumental in the introduction of several hypercube-based commercial
parallel computers in the late 1980s. One example of such machines is discussed in Section
22.3.
As special cases of m-ary q-cubes, hypercubes are also called binary q-cubes, or simply
q-cubes, where q indicates the number of dimensions. We will use the term hypercube to
refer to a generic architecture of this type and q-cube (particularly, 3-cube, 4-cube, and so
forth) when the number of dimensions is relevant to the discussion.
A q -dimensional binary hypercube (q-cube) is defined recursively as follows:
• A 1-cube consists of two nodes, labeled 0 and 1, with a link connecting them.
• A q-cube consists of two (q–1)-cubes, with the nodes labeled by preceding the original
node labels of the two subcubes with 0 and 1, respectively, and connecting each node
with the label 0x to the node with the label 1x. The two (q –1)-cubes forming the q-cube
are known as its 0 and 1 subcubes.
Figure 13.1 shows the recursive construction of q -cubes for q = 1, 2, 3, and 4. The same
process is used to construct q-cubes for larger values of q, although it becomes increasingly
difficult to represent the resulting structures in 2D drawings.
Because a 1-cube has two nodes and each recursive step in the above definition doubles
the number of nodes, a q-cube has p = 2 q nodes or processors. Similarly, because a 1-cube
has nodes of degree 1 and each recursive step increases the node degree by 1, a q-cube consists
of nodes with degree d = q = log 2 p. The node structure of a hypercube (number of its
interprocessor communication ports) changes as the system expands in size; thus, a hypercube architecture is not scalable.
If the label of a node x (its binary ID) is xq–1 xq–2 . . . x 2x 1x 0, then its q neighbors are
x q–1 xq–2 . . . x 2x1 x'0 neighbor along Dimension 0; denoted by N0( x )
xq –1 x q–2 . . . x 2 x'1 x0 neighbor along Dimension 1 or N1( x )
..
.
x'q –1xq–2 . . . x2 x1 x 0 neighbor along Dimension q –1 or Nq–1 (x)
In other words, the labels of any two neighboring nodes differ in exactly 1 bit. Two nodes
whose labels differ in k bits (have a Hamming distance of k ) are connected by a shortest path
of length k. For example, in the 4-cube of Fig. 13.1, a shortest path from Node x = 0010 to
y = 1001 goes through the intermediate nodes N3 (0010) = 1010 and N1 (1010) = 1000, and
262
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 13.1. The recursive structure of binary hypercubes.
thus has a length of 3, which is equal to the Hamming distance between x and y. Consequently,
it is easy to see that the diameter of a q-cube is D = q = log 2 p. The bisection width of a
q-cube is B = p /2 = 2q –1 . The logarithmic diameter and the linear bisection width of a
hypercube are two reasons for its ability to perform many computations at high speed.
Hypercubes are both node- and edge-symmetric, meaning that the roles of any two nodes
(edges) can be interchanged with proper relabeling of the nodes. Swapping the leftmost 2
bits in every node label of a q-cube interchanges the roles of dimensions q – 1 and q – 2. As
a result, 0 and 1 subcubes can be defined for each of the q dimensions of a q -cube.
Complementing a particular bit position in all node labels results in a relabeling of the nodes
that switches the roles of the 0 and 1 subcubes associated with that dimension A node label
x can be transformed to a different node label y with k such complementation steps, where
k is the Hamming distance between x and y. Similarly, swapping bit positions i and j in all
node labels interchanges the roles of Dimension-i and Dimension-j links. Thus, the designations “Dimension 0,” “Dimension 1,” and so forth are arbitrary and no inherent order exists
among the various dimensions.
Hypercubes have many interesting topological properties, some of which will be
explored in the remainder of this chapter and the end-of-chapter problems. The recursive
structure of hypercubes makes them ideal for running recursive or divide-and-conquer type
algorithms. The results of subproblems solved on the two (q –1)-dimensional subcubes of a
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
263
q-cube can often be merged quickly in view of the one-to-one connectivity ( matching)
between the two subcubes. Multiple node-disjoint and edge-disjoint paths exist between
many pairs of nodes in a hypercube, making it relatively easy to develop routing and other
parallel algorithms that are tolerant of node or edge failures. A large MIMD-type hypercube
machine can be shared by multiple applications, each of which uses a suitably sized subcube
or partition.
13.2. EMBEDDINGS AND THEIR USEFULNESS
Given the architectures A and A' we embed A into A' by specifying
• A node mapping (indicating that Node v of A is mapped onto Node v' of A'); the node
mapping can be many-to-one.
• An edge mapping (indicating that Edge uv of A is mapped onto a path from Node u' to
node v' in A', where u' and v' are given by the node mapping).
Example embeddings of a seven-node complete binary tree into 3 × 3, 2 × 4, or 2 × 2 meshes
are shown in Fig. 13.2. For the 3 × 3 and 2 × 4 meshes, each tree node is mapped onto a
different mesh node, whereas for the 2 × 2 mesh, pairs of tree nodes are mapped onto all but
one of the mesh nodes. Generally, edges of the tree are mapped onto single-edge paths in the
meshes, the only exceptions being in the 2 × 4 mesh, where Edge d of the tree has been
mapped onto the path between Nodes 1 and 4 that goes through Node 3, and in the 2 × 2
mesh, where Edges a and e of the tree have been mapped onto paths of length 0 (from a node
to itself).
Embeddings are useful because they allow us to use an algorithm developed for an
existing architecture on a new or different one by simply letting the new/different architecture
follow the same steps as in the old architecture (we say that the new architecture emulates
the old one). Hence, e.g., the embeddings shown in Fig. 13.2 allow each of the meshes to
run tree-based algorithms, albeit with some slowdown in general. However, algorithms
Figure 13.2. Embedding a seven-node binary tree into 2D meshes of various sizes.
264
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
developed directly for a given architecture tend to be more efficient as they take advantage
of unique features or strengths of that architecture.
In order to gauge the effectiveness of an embedding with regard to algorithm performance, various measures or parameters have been defined. The most important ones are listed
below. For these measures, the numerical values of the parameters for the three example
embeddings of Fig. 13.2 are also provided as examples.
Dilation
Congestion
Load factor
Expansion
Examples of Fig. 13.2 →
Longest path onto which any given edge is mapped
Maximum number of edges mapped onto one edge
Maximum number of nodes mapped onto one node
Ratio of the number of nodes in the two graphs
3×3
1
1
1
9/7
2×4
2
2
1
8/7
2×2
1
2
2
4/7
The dilation of an embedding is an indicator of the slowdown in the new architecture
as a result of indirect data communications. In other words, if congestion is 1, a dilation of
2, e.g., means that one communication step in the old architecture may require two time steps
in the emulating one in the worst case.
The congestion of an embedding represents potential slowdown when certain edges in
the old architecture must carry messages at the same time. “Potential” is used because we
may be able to schedule the communication steps on the emulating architecture to reduce,
or even totally eliminate, this slowdown. For example, if Node 1 of the tree were to send
messages to Nodes 3 and 4 at the same time over links c and d, the 4 × 2 mesh emulating
these communications can avoid any slowdown related to congestion by pipelining the two
messages between Nodes 1 and 3, with the message going to Node 4 sent first. In view of
the above, one might say that the congestion of the embedding associated with the 2 × 4 mesh
in Fig. 13.2 is 1.5 rather than 2, as there are two different paths of length 2 that can be used
for routing messages between Nodes 1 and 4.
The load factor of an embedding is an indicator of the potential slowdown in the new
architecture as result of one processor having to perform the job of several processors.
Again, the actual slowdown may be smaller if computation and communication are overlapped, because a processor may have extra cycles to complete its computations as it waits
for dilated or congested communications to take place.
The expansion of an embedding is related to the other parameters in that, e.g., one can
reduce the expansion by increasing the load factor. Occasionally, we are interested in
embeddings that keep the dilation and/or congestion and/or load factor at 1, or some other
small constant, in an effort to have an efficient emulation. In such cases, the expansion of
the embedding is an indicator of the cost of achieving the desired efficiency. Often an
expansion factor that is greater than 1 results from the fact that many architectures come in
specific sizes (e.g., perfect square for a square 2D mesh and power of 2 for a binary
hypercube).
13.3. EMBEDDING OF ARRAYS AND TREES
In this section, we show how meshes, tori, and binary trees can be embedded into
hypercubes in such a way as to allow a hypercube to run mesh, torus, and tree algorithms
efficiently, i.e., with very small dilation and congestion. We will see later in this chapter, and
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
265
in Chapter 14, that there exist several hypercube algorithms that are significantly faster than
their counterparts on meshes/tori and binary trees. These observations together establish the
hypercube architecture as “more powerful” than mesh, torus, or tree architecture.
We begin by showing an embedding of a 2q-node ring in a q-cube for q > 1. Any p-node
graph that can embed a p-node ring with dilation and load factor of 1 is said to be
Hamiltonian. Such an embedding defines a ring subgraph containing all of the nodes of the
graph, or a Hamiltonian cycle of the graph. Not all graphs have Hamiltonian cycles. For
example, a 3 × 3 mesh is not a Hamiltonian graph, nor is a binary tree (or, more generally, an
acyclic graph) of any size. Possession of a Hamiltonian cycle allows an architecture to
emulate a ring or linear-array algorithm efficiently and is viewed as a desirable property.
We now prove that any q-cube is Hamiltonian for q ≥ 2. The proof is by induction,
starting with the basis that a 2-cube is Hamiltonian and proceeding with the induction step
that if the (q–1)-cube is Hamiltonian, then so is the q-cube.
Consider the q-cube as two (q–1)-cubes obtained by removing all Dimension q – 1 links.
Take an arbitrary Hamiltonian path in the 0-subcube. Consider the edge linking a Node x
with its Dimension-k neighbor N k(x) on this path, where 0 ≤ k ≤ q – 2. Now consider a
Hamiltonian path in the 1-subcube that contains the edge linking Nq–1 (x) with N q–1 (N k(x ))
= Nk(N q–1 (x)). Because of edge symmetry, such a Hamiltonian path must exist. Now an
embedded ring results if the two edges linking x with Nk(x) and N q–1 (x) with Nk(N q–1(x ))
(dotted lines in Fig. 13.3) are removed from the two rings and instead the two Dimension(q–1) edges linking x with N q–1 (x) and Nk(x) with N q–1 (N k(x)) (heavy lines in Fig. 13.3) are
inserted.
Another way to prove that the q-cube is Hamiltonian is to show that a q-bit Gray code
(a sequence of q-bit codewords such that any two consecutive codewords, including the last
and the first one, differ in a single bit position) can be constructed. Because of the unit
Hamming distance between the binary labels of neighboring nodes in a q-cube, the q-bit
Gray code defines a Hamiltonian cycle in the q-cube.
A q-bit Gray code can be built by induction. Clearly {0, 1} is a 1-bit Gray code, Given
a (q–1)-bit Gray code that begins with 0q–1 and ends with 10 q–2 , where the superscripts denote
the number of times that a symbol is repeated, a q-bit Gray code can be constructed as
follows:
We next prove a more general result that a 2m0 × 2m1 × … × 2 mh–1 h-D mesh/torus is a subgraph
of the q-cube, where q = m 0 + m 1 + … + m h–1 ; this is equivalent to the former being embedded
in the latter with dilation 1, congestion 1, load factor 1, and expansion 1.
The proof is based on the notion of cross-product graphs, which we first define. Given
k graphs G i = (Vi , Ei ), 1 ≤ i ≤ k , their (cross-) product graph G = G1 × G 2 × … × G k is defined as
the graph G = (V, E), where
266
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 13.3. Hamiltonian cycle in the q -cube.
In other words, the nodes of the (cross-)product graph G are labeled with k-tuples, where the
ith element of the k-tuple is chosen from the node set of the ith component graph. The edges
of the product graph connect pairs of nodes whose labels are identical in all but the jth
elements, say, and the two nodes corresponding to the jth elements in the jth component
graph are connected by an edge. Figure 13.4 depicts three examples of product graphs. Note
that the product graph G = G 1 × G 2 can be viewed as being constructed from |V 1| copies of
G 2 or |V 2| copies of G 1. It is easy to see that a 2D mesh is the product of two linear arrays
and that a torus is the product of two rings.
If G = G 1 × G 2 × … × G k and G' = G'1 × G'2 × … × G' k , where G i is a subgraph of
G'i (1 ≤ i ≤ k ), then G is clearly a subgraph of G'. The proof that a 2m 0 × 2 m1 × … × 2mh–1 h-D
mesh/torus is a subgraph of the (m 0 + m 1 + … + mh–1 )-cube now becomes easy:
1. The 2m0 × 2 m1 × … ×2mh –1 torus is the product of h rings of sizes (2m0 , 2 m1 , . . . ,
2 mh –1 )
Figure 13.4. Examples of product graphs.
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
2.
3.
267
The (m 0 + m 1 + … +mh–1 )-cube is the product of an m0-cube, an m 1-cube, . . . , an
m h–1-cube.
The 2mi-node ring is a subgraph of the mi-cube.
Part (2) above, which is the only part not yet proven, becomes obvious if we note that the
q-cube is the product of q linear arrays of size 2 (see, eg., the middle example in Fig. 13.4).
It is interesting to note that a 4-cube can be reduced to a 4 × 4 mesh by removing half of
the Dimension-1 and Dimension-2 links (Fig. 13.5). Note that the links whose removal
converts the 4-cube into a 4 × 4 mesh are exactly those that turn the 4 × 4 mesh into a 4 × 4
torus. Thus, the 16-node hypercube (2-ary 4-cube) is isomorphic to the 4 × 4 torus (4-ary
2-cube).
Note that for a mesh to be a subgraph of the hypercube, its sides must be powers of 2.
The 3 × 5 mesh, e.g., is not a subgraph of the 16-node hypercube. However, because the 3 × 5
mesh is a subgraph of the 4 × 8 mesh/torus, it is a subgraph of the 5-cube.
We next examine the possibility of embedding the (2q –1)-node complete binary tree in
the q-cube. A simple argument shows that straight one-to-one embedding is impossible.
Divide the hypercube nodes into those with odd and even weights, where the weight of a
node is the number of 1s in its binary label. Exactly half of the nodes, i.e., 2q–1 nodes, fall
into each category. If the node onto which the root of the binary tree is mapped has odd (even)
weight, then the children of the root must be mapped onto even-weight (odd-weight) nodes.
Proceeding in this manner, we see that about three-fourths of the nodes of the binary tree
must be mapped onto hypercube nodes with odd or even weight. This is impossible because
only half of the nodes have each type of weight.
The above negative result can be turned into a positive one by a slight modification in
the graph to be embedded into the q -cube. The 2 q -node double-rooted complete binary tree,
which is obtained from the (2q–1)-node complete binary tree by inserting a node between
the root and its right/left child, is in fact a subgraph of the q-cube (Fig. 13.6). Proving this
result is equivalent to showing that the (2 q –1)-node complete binary tree can be embedded
into a q-cube with dilation 2, congestion 1, load factor 1, and expansion 2q/(2q – 1).
Figure 13.5. The 4 × 4 mesh/torus is a subgraph of the 4-cube.
268
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 13.6. The 2 q-node double-rooted complete binary tree is a subgraph of the q -cube.
The proof is by induction. The 2-node double-rooted complete binary tree (with empty
left and right subtrees) is a subgraph of the 1-cube. This forms our basis. Let the 2q–1 -node
double-rooted complete binary tree be a subgraph of the (q –1)-cube. Figure 13.6 shows how
the embedding in the q-cube can be obtained by taking two embedded trees in the 0 and 1
subcubes along Dimension c, removing one link from each (dotted lines in Fig. 13.6), and
inserting two new links instead (heavy lines). Note that the roles of the a and b dimensions
are interchanged in the embedded double-rooted complete binary tree within the (q–1)-cube
1 compared with that in the (q–1)-cube 0. But we know that this can be done in view of the
complete symmetry of the hypercube with respect to its dimensions.
Embeddings do not have to be 1-to-1 to be efficient or useful. For example, an
embedding of the 2q-leaf, or (2 q+1 –1)-node, complete binary tree in the q-cube is shown in
Fig. 13.7. Here, each node and all of its left descendants (those that can be reached by only
moving leftward) are mapped onto the same hypercube node. This embedding has dilation
1, congestion q, load factor q + 1, and expansion of about 1/2. Even though large congestions
and load factors are generally undesirable, this particular embedding is quite efficient if the
hypercube is to emulate a tree algorithm in which only nodes at a single level of the tree are
active at any given time.
Figure 13.7. Embedding a 15-node complete binary tree into the 3-cube.
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
269
In Section 2.4, we saw examples of tree algorithms in which activity shifts from one
tree level to the one above or below it. The embedding of Fig. 13.7 is ideally suited for
emulating such tree algorithms on a hypercube.
In the semigroup computation algorithm for the binary tree, presented in Section 2.4,
only the leaves were assumed to hold data elements. The nonleaf nodes served to combine
data elements, send the partial results upward, and eventually direct the final result of the
semigroup computation toward the leaves if needed. A hypercube emulating this algorithm
with the embedding shown in Fig. 13.7 will have one node per tree leaf and thus one data
element per node. As activity shifts from the leaves toward the root, successively fewer
hypercube nodes will be doing useful work; the active nodes constitute a smaller and smaller
subcube. In the broadcasting phase of the algorithm, activity shifts back from the root node
toward the leaves, with more and more nodes (larger subcubes) becoming active in each
successive step.
Similarly, for the parallel prefix computation, the activity shifts toward the root and from
there, back toward the leaves. Again, the embedding of Fig. 13.7 leads to efficient emulation
of the algorithm on a hypercube with roughly half as many nodes as the original binary tree.
13.4.
A FEW SIMPLE ALGORITHMS
In this section, we present hypercube algorithms for semigroup computation, parallel
prefix computation, and sequence reversal.
The following is an optimal algorithm involving q communication steps for semigroup
computation on the q-cube, assuming that each Processor x holds one value v[x]. Recall that
Nk (x) denotes the neighbor of Node x along Dimension k; i.e., the node whose binary label
differs from that of x only in bit position k.
Semigroup computation on the q-cube
Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p do t [x] := v[x] {initialize subcube “total” to own value}
for k = 0 to q – 1 Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do
get y := t[Nk (x)]
set t[x] := t[x] ⊗ y
endfor
The communication steps of the above semigroup computation algorithm for a 3-cube are
depicted in Fig. 13.8. In the first step, pairs of elements are combined across Dimension 0,
yielding partial results such as v[0] ⊗ v[1] and v[2] ⊗ v[3] (these are denoted by 0-1, 2-3,
and so on in Fig. 13.8). Then, pairs of partial results are combined across Dimension 1 to
yield v[0] ⊗ v[1] ⊗ v[2] ⊗ v[3] and v[4] ⊗ v[5] ⊗ v[6] ⊗ v[7]. In general, this doubling of
the scope of the partial results continues until the single final result is simultaneously
obtained in all of the nodes.
The above algorithm is an instance of an ascend algorithm. Each node successively
communicates with its neighbors in dimension order from 0 to q–1. Thus communication
takes place between nodes that are 1, 2, 4, . . . , 2 q–1 apart in terms of numerical node labels.
A descend algorithm is similar, except that the dimension order is q–1 to 0. The structure of
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
270
Figure 13.8. Semigroup computation on a 3-cube.
the hypercube is ideally suited to this type of ascend/descend algorithms that double the
scope or coverage of the result with each step.
Parallel prefix computation is similar. Each node x performs the following steps.
Parallel prefix computation on the q-cube
Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do t [x] := u[x] := v[x]
{initialize subcube “total” and partial prefix to own value}
for k = 0 to q – 1 Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do
get y := t[N k(x)]
set t[x] := t[x] ⊗ y
if x > Nk(x) then u[x] := u[x] ⊗ y
endfor
The above parallel prefix computation is also an ascend algorithm. Each node deals with two
variables: a subcube “total” t that corresponds to the result of semigroup computation in the
current subcube and a subcube partial prefix result u that gives the result of parallel prefix
computation in the same subcube. Eventually, t becomes the semigroup computation result
and u the required prefix within the entire q-cube. Figure 13.9 depicts the communication
steps, and the partial results obtained, in a 3-cube. Again i-j stands for the partial combining
result v[i] ⊗ v[i + 1] ⊗ ... ⊗ v[j].
Figure 13.10 depicts another algorithm for parallel prefix computation on the hypercube
using a recursive formulation. The hypercube is divided into two halves consisting of the
even- and odd-numbered nodes (across the 0th dimension). Parallel prefix computation is
performed recursively in each half, with the odd subcube doing a diminished version of the
prefix computation in which the processor’s own value is excluded. Then, the results are
combined across Dimension-0 links. All that is left to do after this step is for the
odd-numbered nodes to combine their own values with the results thus obtained. The running
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
271
Figure 13.9. Parallel prefix computation on a 3-cube.
time of this algorithm on a q-cube is characterized by the recurrence T(q) = T (q – 1) + 2 =
2q = 2 log 2 p.
Our final simple algorithm deals with reversing a sequence, stored one element per
processor. By reversing a sequence v[0], v[1], . . . we mean that the element originally in
Processor x must end up in Processor p – 1 – x; v [0] in Processor p–1, v[1] in Processor
p – 2, and so forth.
Reversing a sequence on the q-cube
for k = 0 to q – 1 Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do
Figure 13.10. A second algorithm for parallel prefix computation on a 3-cube.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
272
Figure 13.11. Sequence reversal on a 3-cube.
get y := v[N k (x)]
set v[x] := y
endfor
Figure 13.11 shows the steps of the sequence reversal algorithm on a 3-cube. Sequence
reversal is yet another example of an ascend-type algorithm.
13.5. MATRIX MULTIPLICATION
Consider now the problem of multiplying m × m matrices A and B on a q -cube to obtain
q
the product matrix C, where m = 2 q /3 and p = m ³ = 2 processors are used. Note that the
number q of dimensions in the hypercube is assumed to be a multiple of 3. Each processor
has three registers R A , R B , and R C . For the sake of algorithm description, it is convenient to
label the hypercube processors by three indices i, j, k, where each index is a (q /3)-bit binary
number. Initially, Processor (0, j, k) holds A jk and B jk in its R A and R B registers, respectively.
All other processor registers are initialized to 0. At the end of the computation, Register R C
of Processor (0, j, k) will hold element C jk of the product matrix C.
The algorithm performs all m ³ multiplications needed for multiplying two m × m
matrices concurrently, one in each of the m³ processors. The remainder of the process is to
ensure that each processor holds the two elements of A and B that it multiplies and to add
the requisite terms that form each element Cjk of the result matrix.
Multiplying m ×m matrices on a q-cube, with q = 3 log 2m
for l = q/3 – 1 downto 0 Processor x = ijk, 0 ≤ i, j, k < m, do
if bit l of i is 1
and z :=
then get y :=
set RA [x] : = y; R B [x] := z
endif
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
273
endfor
for l = q/3 – 1 downto 0 Processor x = ijk, 0 ≤ i, j, k < m, do
if bit l of i and k are different
then get y : = R A [N l (x)]
set R A [x] : = y
endif
endfor
for l = q/3 – 1 downto 0 Processor x= ijk, 0 ≤ i, j, k < m, do
if bit l of i and j are different
then get y :=
set R B [x]: = y
endif
endfor
Processors x, 0 ≤ x < p, do R C := RA × R B
{ p = m ³ = 2q parallel multiplications in one step}
for l = 0 to q/3 – 1 Processor x = ijk, 0 ≤ i, j, k < m, do
if bit l of i is 0
then get y :=
set R C[x] : = R C [x] + y
endif
endfor
The above matrix multiplication algorithm appears complicated. However, the ideas
behind it are quite simple. The first three “for” loops copy the elements of A and B into all
other processors that need them to perform the m³ parallel multiplications. Because m = 2q/3
copies of each element must be made, a recursive doubling scheme is used to make the
required copies in O(q) communication steps. The final “for” loop, after the multiplications,
computes the sum of the m terms that form each of the elements of C, again using recursive
doubling within (q/3)-dimensional subcubes of the original q-cube. It should be clear that
the total running time of this matrix multiplication algorithm is O( q) = O(log p).
An example for multiplying two 2 × 2 matrices on a 3-cube is shown in Fig. 13.12. For
this simple example, q/3 = 1, so each of the “for” loops degenerates into a single communication step. In the first “for” loop, processors with 1 in bit position 2 of their node labels (i.e.,
Processors 4, 5, 6, and 7) receive and store R A and R B values from their Dimension-2
neighbors, as shown in the middle top diagram of Fig. 13.12. In the second “for” loop,
Processors 1, 3, 4, and 6, i.e., those with different i and k components in their node labels,
receive and store RA values from their Dimension-0 neighbors. The third “for” loop updates
the R B values in those processors whose node labels have different i and j components (i.e.,
Processors 2, 3, 4, and 5). At this point, shown in the bottom left diagram of Fig. 13.12, data
distribution is complete. The eight processors then independently multiply their RA and R B
values, storing the results in R C . The final “for” loop adds pairs of values across Dimension
2 in order to obtain elements of the result matrix C in Processors 0, 1, 2, and 3 (bottom right
of Fig. 13.12).
The above algorithm, requiring m³ processors to multiply m× m matrices, is obviously
impractical for large matrices, which are the primary candidates for the application of parallel
processing. However, the standard block matrix multiplication scheme can be used to reduce
274
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 13.12. Multiplying two 2 × 2 matrices on a 3-cube.
the number of processors required. With the block scheme, one can multiply m × m matrices
on a p-processor hypercube by simply viewing each data movement or multiplication in the
above algorithm as being applied to (m/ p1 / 3 )×(m/p 1 / 3 ) matrix blocks rather than to single
matrix elements. When p 1/3 is not an integer or does not divide m, the algorithm becomes
slightly more complex.
An analysis of the above algorithm in the case of block matrix multiplication follows.
1/3
Let the m × m matrices be partitioned into p 1 / 3 ×p 1 / 3 blocks, each of size (m/p )×(m/p1 / 3 ).
2/3
Then, each data communication step involves transferring the m² /p elements of a block
and each multiplication corresponds to 2m ³/p arithmetic operations required to multiply two
such blocks. Assuming unit-time data transfers and arithmetic operations, the total running
time becomes
For m = Θ ( p 1/3 log p) or p = Θ ( m³/log³ m), communication and computation times are
asymptotically of the same order and T mul( m, p) becomes O(log³ p) or O(log³ m). For smaller
values of m, the communication time m ²/p 2/3× O(log p) is dominant. On the other hand,
when very large matrices are multiplied on a relatively small number of processors, the 2m ³ /p
term dominates the running time and linear speed-up is obtained.
13.6.
INVERTING A LOWER TRIANGULAR MATRIX
A lower triangular matrix A is a square m × m matrix in which every element above the
main diagonal is 0 (see Section 11.2, particularly Fig. 11.5). The inverse of A, denoted by
A – 1 , is another square m × m matrix such that A × A–1 = A –1 × A = I m , where I m is the m × m
identity matrix having 1 for each diagonal element and 0 elsewhere. Inversion of lower
triangular matrices is of practical importance in itself and also forms a building block for
inverting arbitrary matrices.
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
275
A recursive algorithm for inverting m × m lower triangular matrices on a q -cube with 2
= m³ processors can be developed based on the following result from linear algebra:
q
where C is an (m/2) × (m/2) matrix and B and D are ( m/2) × (m/2) lower triangular matrices.
This statement can be easily verified through multiplication, noting the simplification
CB – 1 – DD – 1 CB – 1 =CB -1 –Im / 2 CB– 1 = 0.
Thus, if B and D can be inverted in parallel within independent subcubes, the running time
of the algorithm is characterized by the recurrence
where the last term represents the time of two matrix multiplications for computing
–1
–D – 1 CB . Because, using the algorithm of Section 13.5, matrix multiplication can be
performed in logarithmic time, the running time of this matrix inversion algorithm is O(log²
m). The only remaining problem is to show that the two (m /2) × (m/2) matrices B and D can
in fact be inverted in parallel, with each using no more than half of the available processors.
Specifying the details is left as an exercise.
PROBLEMS
13.1. Properties of the hypercube
The bisection width of a q-cube is 2q –1 = Θ (p ). Let us call this the link bisection width of the
q-cube to distinguish it from the node bisection width defined as the least number of nodes
whose removal would bisect the network. Show that the node bisection width of a q -cube is
nodes. Hint: Consider every hypercube node whose
much smaller and consists of
weight, or the number of 1s in its binary label, is  q/2  or  q/2  .
13.2. Embedding meshes into hypercubes
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Show that the 3 × 3 mesh is a subgraph of the 4-cube.
Show that the 3 × 3 torus is not a subgraph of the 4- cube.
Show that the 3 × 5 mesh, and thus the 3 × 5 torus, is not a subgraph of the 4-cube.
Generalize the result of part (b) to any h-D torus with at least one odd side.
Prove or disprove: Any m 0 × m 1 × ... × m h –1 torus, with all of its sides even, is a subgraph
of the q-cube, where
13.3. Embedding meshes into hypercubes
Show an embedding of the 8 × 8 × 8 torus into the 9-cube. Identify explicitly the hypercube
node onto which the node (i, j, k) of the torus is mapped.
13.4. Embedding meshes into hypercubes
a.
Show that any p-node 2D mesh is a subgraph of the([log 2 p]+1)-cube.
276
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
b.
c.
Extend the result of part (a) by showing that any p-node h-D mesh is a subgraph of the
(log2 p  +h–1)-cube.
Show that the result of part (b) is in general the best possible by providing an example of
a p-node h-D mesh that is not a subgraph of the ( log 2 p + h -2)-cube.
13.5. Embedding trees into hypercubes
We have seen that the (2 q –l)-node complete binary tree is not a subgraph of the q-cube.
Show that it is a subgraph of the (q+1)-cube.
b. Show that the (3 x 2 q–1 –2)-node back-to-back complete binary tree, composed of two
( 2 q–1)-node complete binary trees whose leaves have been merged, is a subgraph of the
( q+l)-cube.
a.
13.6. Embedding trees into hypercubes
q
Show that the “in-order” labeling of the nodes of a (2 –1)-node complete binary tree corresponds to a dilation-2 embedding in the q-cube. The in-order labeling of a binary tree requires
that each node be Labeled after all of its left descendants and before any of its right descendants,
with node labels beginning from 0 and ending with 2 q – 2.
13.7. Embedding trees into hypercubes
Using the embedding of the eight-leaf complete binary tree into the 3-cube depicted in Fig.
13.7:
a. Draw a sequence of snapshots showing how the hypercube would emulate the tree
algorithm for semigroup computation with data items stored at the leaves (see Section 2.4).
b. Compare the emulation of part (a) with the direct hypercube algorithm given in Section
13.4.
c. Repeat part (a) for the parallel prefix computation.
d. Repeat part (b) for the parallel prefix computation.
13.8. Simple algorithms on hypercubes
a.
b.
c.
Extend the semigroup computation algorithm given in Section 13.4 and its analysis to the
case where each of the p processors holds n/p data items.
Repeat part (a) for the parallel prefix computation.
Repeat part (a) for the sequence reversal algorithm.
13.9. Unidirectional hypercubes
In Section 12.2, Manhattan street networks were introduced as unidirectional mesh networks.
Show how to construct a undirectional q-cube (q even) with node in-degree and out degree of
q/2 and a diameter of q. Provide the connectivity rule for each Node x.
13.10. Pruned hypercubes
Consider a q-cube, with q even, in which each link is replaced by two unidirectional links going
in opposite directions and then outgoing links along odd (even) dimensions have been removed
for nodes with odd (even) weights. This leads to a unidirectional network with node in-degree
and out-degree of q/2.
a.
b.
c.
Find the diameter of such a pruned q-cube.
Find the bisection width of such a pruned q-cube.
Devise an embedding of the complete q-cube into the pruned q-cube such that the dilation
and congestion of the embedding are as small as possible.
277
HYPERCUBES AND THEIR ALGORITHMS
13.11. Embedding large hypercubes into smaller ones
a.
b.
c.
Devise a dilation-1 embedding for a ( q+c)-cube into a q-cube, where c > 0.
What are the congestion and load factor of the embedding proposed in part (a)?
Is the proposed embedding useful in performing semigroup computation, parallel prefix
computation, or sequence reversal with n data elements ( n > p) through the emulation of
an n -node hypercube on a p-node hypercube?
13.12. Matrix multiplication on a hypercube
q
/2
q
/2
a . Modify the matrix multiplication algorithm of Section 13.5 such that 2
×2
matrices
are multiplied on a q-cube (q even).
b . Analyze the complexity of the algorithm proposed in part (a).
c . Modify the matrix multiplication algorithm of Section 13.5 such that 2q × 2 q matrices are
multiplied on a q-cube.
d . Analyze the complexity of the algorithm proposed in part (c).
13.13. Solving numerical problems on a hypercube
Develop hypercube algorithms for the following problems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Solving a triangular system of linear equations via back substitution (see Section 11.2).
Solving a tridiagonal system of linear equations (see Section 11.3).
Solving an arbitrary system of linear equations by Gaussian elimination (see Section 11.4).
Solving an arbitrary system of linear equations by Jacobi relaxation (see Section 11.4).
Finding the transitive closure of a graph, given its adjacency matrix (see Section 11.5).
Labeling the connected components of a binary image (see Section 11.6).
13.14. Mystery hypercube algorithm
Consider the following hypercube algorithm that deals with an m × m matrix A. Each of the p
= 2q = m² processors has a Register R A that holds some element of A at any given time and a
Register RB used for temporary storage. Initially, a i j is stored in the processor whose ID is mi
+ j, i.e., in row-major order.
Mystery algorithm operating on an m × m matrix A on a q -cube, with q = 2 log 2 m
for l=q–1 down to q /2 Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do
if x l = x l - q/2 {Compare bits l and l – q /2 of the processor’s binary node label}
then get y:= R A [Nl (x)] {Get neighbor’s A value}
set RB [x]:=y
{and store it in the B register}
endif
if x l ≠x l–q/2 {Compare bits l and l – q/2 of the processor’s binary node label}
then get y:=
{Get neighbor’s B value}
(and store it in the A register}
set RA [x]:= y
endif
endfor
a.
b.
what does the above algorithm accomplish?
what is the algorithm’s running time?
13.15. Pruned hypercubes
q–1
Consider a q-cube that is thinned by removing a fraction 1–ƒ of the 2
links between the two
(q–1)-cubes, say one-half or three-fourths of them. This is recursively applied from the highest
dimension down to some Dimension c (we cannot do this all the way down to Dimension 0,
278
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
because the network will become disconnected). The total number of links, and thus the
network cost, is about ƒ times that of the original q-cube. Suggest a rule for removing half of
the links such that the resulting network possesses desirable properties [Hsu96].
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[AK197]
[Haye89]
[Hsu96]
[Peas77]
[Seit85]
[Squi63]
[Sull77]
Akl, S. G., Parallel Computation: Models and Methods, Prentice–Hall, 1997.
Hayes, J. P., and T. Mudge, “Hypercube Supercomputers,” Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 77, No. 12,
pp. 1829–1841, December 1989.
Hsu, W. -J., M. J. Chung, and Z. Hu, "Gaussian Networks for Scalable Distributed Systems,” The
Computer Journal, Vol. 39, No. 5, pp. 417–426, 1996.
Pease, M. C., III, “The Indirect Binary n-cube Microprocessor Array,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol.
C-26, No. 5, pp. 458–473, May 1977.
Seitz, C. L., “The Cosmic Cube,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 28, No. 1, pp. 22–33, January
1985.
Squire, J. S., and S. M. Palais, “Programming and Design Considerations for a Highly Parallel
Computer,” Proc. Spring Joint Computer Conf., 1963, pp. 395–400.
Sullivan, H., T. R. Bashkow, and K. Klappholz, “A Large-Scale Homogeneous, Fully Distributed
Parallel Machine,” Proc. 4th Symp. Computer Architecture, March 1977, pp. 105–124.
14
Sorting and Routing
on Hypercubes
In Chapters 9 and 10, we discussed the importance of sorting and data routing
problems in parallel processing and presented several algorithms of varying
complexities and efficiencies to solve these problems on 2D meshes and tori.
This chapter is devoted to solving the same problems on the hypercube architecture. A single chapter is adequate here as we are already familiar with the
fundamental notions and tools used in developing efficient sorting and routing
algorithms. We will see that the smaller diameter and wider bisection of the
hypercube allow us to develop more efficient algorithms, while the recursive
structure of the hypercube makes the solutions easier to develop, describe, and
understand. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
14.1.
14.2.
14.3.
14.4.
14.5.
14.6.
Defining the sorting problem
Bitonic sorting on a hypercube
Routing problems on a hypercube
Dimension-order routing
Broadcasting on a hypercube
Adaptive and fault-tolerant routing
279
This page intentionally left blank.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
281
14.1. DEFINING THE SORTING PROBLEM
The general problem of sorting on a hypercube is as follows: Given n records distributed
evenly among the p = 2q processors of a q-cube (with each processor holding n/p records),
rearrange the records so that the key values are in the same order as the processor node labels.
Ideally, the product of the number p of processors used and the running time T of the sorting
algorithm will be pT = Θ (n log n), which is optimal. This implies a running time of T = Θ ((n
log n)/p) and linear speed-up. Currently we cannot achieve this optimal running time for all
values of n and p.
For the special case of n = p, i.e., each processor holding a single record before and after
sorting, the most practical hypercube sorting algorithms are based on Batcher’s odd–even
merge or bitonic sort, which we will study in the following sections. Batcher’s sorting
algorithms (see Section 7.4) achieve asymptotically suboptimal O(log² n) = O(log² p )
running time. An O(log n)-time deterministic sorting algorithm, which would be optimal in
view of both the O(n log n ) sequential-time lower bound and the O(log p) diameter of the
hypercube, is not currently known. However, slightly relaxing the assumption n = p or the
requirement for determinism or worst-case bound, makes the problem manageable.
If we have fewer than p records to sort (n ≤ p /4), then a hypercube sorting algorithm
exists that allows us to do the job in O(log p log n /log(p/n)) time [Nass82]. When n = p1– ε,
for some ε > 0, the above algorithm runs in optimal logarithmic time, as in this case
If we have many more than p records to sort (n >> p ), then hypercube algorithms exist that
allow us to do the job in O(n log n/p ) time, i.e., with linear speed-up [Plax89].
The best known deterministic sorting algorithm for the case p = n was published in 1990
and requires O(log p log log p ) or O(log p (log log p )²) running time in the worst case,
depending on assumptions [Cyph90].
From a practical standpoint, randomized algorithms that sort p records in O(log p) time
on the average, but may have higher complexities in the worst case, are quite satisfactory.
Since the late 1980s, several randomized sorting algorithms have been proposed [Reif87].
The proof of the O(log p) = O(log n ) average time complexity of such algorithms is based
on demonstrating that for all but a minute fraction of possible input permutations, sorted
order prevails in logarithmic time.
In Section 14.2, we will study a sorting algorithm for the hypercube that is based on
Batcher’s bitonic sorting method. For this reason, we review the definition of bitonic
sequences and Batcher’s bitonic sorting method in the remainder of this section.
A bitonic sequence is one that “rises then falls”
“falls then rises”
or is obtained from the
above two types of sequences through cyclic shifts or rotations (see the discussion of
Batcher’s bitonic sorting network at the end of Section 7.4). Figure 14.1 depicts four
examples of bitonic sequences. The examples on the left are of the “rise-then-fall” and
“fall-then-rise” types. Such sequences “change direction” at most once; contrast this to
monotonic sequences that do not change direction. The examples on the right are obtained
282
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 14.1. Examples of bitonic sequences.
by cutting a portion of the corresponding sequence and attaching it to the right/left of the
remaining portion. This amounts to left/right rotation or cyclic shift of the sequence.
A bitonic sequence, stored one element per processor on a p-processor linear array, can
be sorted in the following way (see Fig. 14.2). The right half of the sequence is shifted left
by p/2 steps. Then, each processor in the left half of the array compares the two values that
Figure 14.2. Sorting a bitonic sequence on a linear array.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
283
it holds, keeps the smaller value, and sends the larger value to the right by p/2 steps. Each
half of the array now holds a bitonic sequence. Furthermore, each element in the right half
of the array is no smaller than any element in the left half. Thus, the bitonic sequence sorting
problem has been reduced to solving two smaller problems of the same type independently
on the two halves of the array. Because the shifting of the right half to the left half and shifting
back of the larger values to the right half take a total of p steps, the running time of the above
sorting algorithm for bitonic sequences is characterized by the recurrence B(p) = B( p/2) + p
= 2p – 2, given that B(1) = 0.
An arbitrary input sequence on a p-processor linear array can be sorted recursively as
follows. First sort the two halves of the array in the opposite directions so that the resulting
sequence is bitonic (say, rising then falling). Then sort the bitonic sequence using the method
presented above. The running time of this bitonic sorting algorithm is characterized by the
recurrence
T( p ) = T(p/2) + B(p)
= T(p/2) + 2p – 2
= 4 p – 4 – 2 l og 2 p
What actually happens as this bitonic sorting algorithm is executed can be seen in the example
of Fig. 14.3. First, subsequences of length 2 are sorted in opposite directions in B(2) steps.
Then, pairs of such sequences, which form bitonic sequences of length 4, are sorted (merged)
in B(4) steps, and so on. Thus, the following is an alternate formulation for the running time
of the algorithm, proceeding in a bottom-to-top order:
T( p) = B (2) + B (4) + … + B(p)
= 2 + 6 + 1 4 + … +(2p –2)
= 4p – 4 – 2 l og 2 p
Figure 14.3. Sorting an arbitrary sequence on a linear array through recursive application of
bitonic sorting.
284
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
For a linear array of processors, the bitonic sorting algorithm is clearly inferior to the simpler
odd–even transposition sort, which requires only p compare–exchange steps or 2p unidirectional communication steps. However, the situation is quite different for a hypercube.
14.2. BITONIC SORTING ON A HYPERCUBE
If we sort the records in the lower (x q–1 = 0) and upper (x q–1 = 1) subcubes in opposite
directions, the resulting sequence in the entire cube will be bitonic. Now the shifting of the
upper half of the sequence to the lower half and shifting back of the larger values to the upper
half can each be done in a single unidirectional communication step. These two routing steps,
along with the comparison performed between them, constitute a parallel compare–exchange
step. The complexity of the algorithm in terms of the number of compare–exchange steps is
thus characterized by the recurrence T(q ) = T(q – 1) + B(q), where B(q) is the time needed
for sorting a bitonic sequence. B(q) in turn satisfies B(q ) = B(q – 1) + 1 = q, leading to
T(q) = T(q – 1) + q = q (q + 1)/2 = log2 p (log 2 p + 1)/2
Here is the complete algorithm for sorting a bitonic sequence, stored one element per
processor in a q -cube, with the element in Processor x denoted by v[x].
Sorting a bitonic sequence of size n on the q-cube, where q = log 2 n
for l = q – 1 downto 0 Processor x, 0 ≤ x < p, do
if x l = 0
then get y := v [Nl (x)]; keep min(v(x), y); send max(v (x ), y ) to Nl (x )
endif
endfor
The above algorithm is yet another instance of the ascend class of algorithms. An example
for the algorithm is depicted in Fig. 14.4. The bitonic sequence 1, 3, 5, 8, 9, 6, 3, 2 is initially
stored in the eight nodes of the 3-cube. After the compare–exchange step along Dimension
2, we have two size-4 bitonic sequences: 1, 3, 3, 2 in the lower cube and 9, 6, 5, 8 in the
upper cube. Another compare–exchange step along Dimension 1 gives us four bitonic
sequences of size 2, which are then sorted by the final compare–exchange step along
Dimension 0.
Batcher’s odd–even merge sort is similar to bitonic sort and takes the same amount of
time (see Section 7.4). Details of its implementation are thus left as an exercise.
Batcher’s O(log² p)-time bitonic and odd–even merge sorting algorithms for ordering
p elements on a p-processor hypercube are presently the fastest practical deterministic sorting
algorithms available. The more complicated O(log p log log p )-time algorithms (see, e.g.,
[Leig92], pp. 642–657) are not competitive for p ≤ 2 20 . Randomized algorithms, on the other
hand, usually sort in O(log p) steps, so they are quite efficient on the average. However, they
do not provide guaranteed speed-up. This is usually not a problem in practice in the same
sense that the worst-case O(n²) running time of sequential quicksort for sorting a sequence
of length n is not problematic.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
285
Figure 14.4. Sorting a bitonic sequence of size 8 on the 3-cube.
14.3. ROUTING PROBLEMS ON A HYPERCUBE
Intuitively, hypercubes should perform better in dealing with routing problems than 2D
meshes, because their larger node degree translates to the availability of more alternate
(shortest) paths between processors, its logarithmic diameter leads to shorter routes, and its
large bisection width allows many concurrent data transfers to take place between distant
nodes. We will see shortly that this is usually the case. The improved performance is achieved
for certain classes of routing problems unconditionally and for others on the average; the
worst-case performance for a general one-to-one routing problem, however, is not much
improved compared with 2D meshes. We will use an interesting lower-bound method to
prove this latter result.
The types of routing problems that we will discuss in this and the following sections are
essentially the same as those introduced in Section 10.1 in connection with 2D meshes and
tori. In particular, we deal with one-to-one and one-to-many routing problems, which include
packing and broadcasting as special cases, respectively. The simplicity of path selection
strategies in most hypercube routing algorithms makes them suitable for both packet and
wormhole routing. As usual, if the routing problem is a permutation, with each of the p
processors having a packet to send and each node being the destination of exactly one packet,
sorting the packets by their destination node address will solve the routing problem.
Recall, also, that routing algorithms can be divided into the two classes of oblivious,
with the routing path uniquely determined by source and destination node addresses, and
nonoblivious or adaptive, where the path taken by a message may also depend on other
messages in the network. Finally, based on how the computations needed to determine the
path of a message are performed, we have the following dichotomy.
286
•
•
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
On-line routing algorithms make the routing decisions on the fly in the course of
routing: Route selections are made by a parallel/distributed algorithm that runs on the
same system for which routing is being performed.
Off-line routing algorithms are applied to routing problems that are known a priori:
Route selections are precomputed for each problem of interest and stored, usually in
the form of routing tables, within the nodes.
An on-line routing algorithm is often preferred, not only because routing problems may
develop dynamically and in unpredictable data-dependent ways, but also in view of the
preprocessing overhead and storage requirements of an off-line algorithm.
Frequently, we restrict our routing algorithm to send each message along a shortest (or
close to shortest) path. Because most pairs of nodes in a hypercube are connected via multiple
shortest paths, a shortest-path routing algorithm can maintain a high degree of adaptivity
and flexibility despite the restriction.
Though not an absolute requirement, on-line routing algorithms are often oblivious, or
only locally adaptive, while off-line algorithms take advantage of available information to
find routes that are (close to) globally optimal. Oblivious on-line routing algorithms may
suffer from inefficiencies that lead to poor performance, particularly in the worst case.
Routing decisions in on-line algorithms are necessarily local, potentially leading to heavy
data traffic in some areas of the network, while available alternative paths are being
underutilized.
Consider, for example, the following positive result: Any routing problem with p or
fewer packets, having distinct sources and destinations, can be solved on a p-processor
hypercube in O(log p) steps, using an off-line algorithm to precompute the paths. The off-line
algorithm chooses the routes in such a way that the route taken by one message does not
significantly overlap or conflict with those of other messages, leading to optimal time.
In the remainder of this section, we discuss some negative or lower-bound results whose
scopes extend beyond the hypercube architecture. An oblivious routing algorithm can be
characterized by its dilation, defined as the length of the longest path between a pair of nodes
(which may be larger than the network diameter for some algorithms), and congestion,
defined as the maximum number of paths going through the same link for the worst-case
routing problem when that algorithm is used. It is obvious that such a routing algorithm
requires Ω (dilation + congestion) routing steps in the worst case. Randomized routing
algorithms can be devised that asymptotically match the above lower bound in terms of
performance [Leig94].
The effect of signal propagation delays on long wires can be taken into account in the
above lower bound by defining generalized dilation as the sum of edge delays on the longest
path and generalized congestion as the maximum over all edges of the number of packets
that traverse that edge multiplied by the delay of the edge. In this case, efficient randomized
routing algorithms can still be constructed [Gree95], though the performance of such
algorithms does not quite match the above lower bound.
With unit-time edge delays, the network diameter can be used as a lower bound for
maximum dilation. The maximum congestion, however, is harder to characterize. The
following theorem allows us to establish a lower bound for maximum congestion, and thus
for worst-case delay, of any oblivious routing algorithm on an arbitrary network. Hence, the
theorem provides insight into the nature and intrinsic limitations of oblivious routing. When
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
287
applied to the p-node hypercube, this general result implies that any oblivious routing
algorithm requires
time in the worst case. Thus, the worst-case performance of
an oblivious routing algorithm for the hypercube is only slightly better than the
time
required on a much simpler square mesh. However, in most instances, the actual routing
performance is much closer to the logarithmic-time best case than to the above worst case.
THEOREM 14.1. Let G = (V, E) represent a p-node, degree-d network. Any oblivious
routing algorithm for routing p packets in G needs
time in the worst case.
P ROOF. There are p(p – 1) paths Pu,v for routing among all node pairs. These paths are
predetermined and independent of other traffic within the network. Our strategy will be to
find k pairs of Nodes u i , v i (1 ≤ i ≤ k ) such that ui ≠ u j and vi ≠ vj for i ≠ j, and Pui vi all pass
through the same Edge e. Because at most two packets can go through a bidirectional link
in each step, Ω (k) steps will be needed for some 1–1 routing problem. The main part of the
proof consists of showing that k can be as large as
Consider the p – 1 different paths
P u,v ending in some Node v and let E(v, k) denote the set of edges such that at least k of these
paths pass through them. Let V(v, k) be the set of nodes that are incident to the edges in
E(v, k). Clearly,
If k ≤ (p – 1)/d, then v ∈ V (v, k), as no more than d edges enter v and at least one of them
should be on (p – 1)/d or more of the p – 1 paths. Let k ≤ ( p – 1)/d and consider the  V –
V (v, k)  nodes that are not in V(v, k). Because v ∈ V (v, k), a path leading from such a node to
v must, at some point, enter a node in V(v, k). Let (w, w') be the edge leading the path under
consideration to a node in V(v, k); i.e., w ∉ V(v, k), w' ∈ V(v, k). Given that w ∉ V(v, k), at
most k – 1 such paths can enter V (v, k) via the Edge (w, w'). Additionally, because the degree
of w' is at most d, no more than d – 1 choices for w exist. Thus,
In other words, for any k satisfying k ≤ (p – 1)/d, we have
we have  E(v, k)  ≥ p/(2kd). Summing over all nodes v, we get
In particular, for
Because there are no more than pd/2 edges in G, there must be an Edge e such that e ∈ V (v, k)
different choices of v. Select e and v 1 , v 2 , . . . , v k
for at least
such that e ∈ E(v i , k) for 1 ≤ i ≤ k. It is easy to see that one can select the k nodes u1 , u2 , . . . ,
u k , such that Pu , v passes through e for 1 ≤ i ≤ k. Node u i is picked from among the previously
i
i
288
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
unselected members of E(vi , k); because each such set has k or more members, one can always
find an as yet unselected member. This completes the proof of Theorem 14.1.
14.4. DIMENSION-ORDER ROUTING
Dimension-order routing on the hypercube is essentially a generalized version of the
greedy row-first routing on the 2D mesh. In row-first routing, we “adjust” the column number
or Dimension 1 of the message until it is aligned with the column number of the destination
node. Then we adjust the row number or Dimension 0.
In a hypercube, we can do the adjustment of the q dimensions in any order. However,
adjusting in ascending (descending) order of the dimensions is usually chosen in view of its
correspondence with ascend (descend) class of algorithms. Here is an example:
Source node label
Destination node label
Dimensions that differ
01011011
11010110
↑ ↑↑ ↑
Route
01011011
–
11011011
–
11010011
–
11010111
–
11010110
Discussion and analysis of routing algorithms on hypercube architectures is facilitated
if we consider a derivative network that is obtained by “unfolding” the hypercube. An
unfolded q-cube consists of 2 q (q + 1) nodes arranged into 2 q rows, numbered 0 through
2 q – 1, and q + 1 columns, labeled 0 through q. Nodes in Columns i and i + 1 are connected
by straight or horizontal links as well as “cross” links that correspond to Dimension- i links
of the hypercube. The network obtained in this way (Fig. 14.5) is known as an unfolded
hypercube, indirect cube, or butterfly network. Squeezing the network horizontally until all
columns overlap will result in the hypercube network shown on the right side of Pig. 14.5.
Dimension-order routing between Nodes i and j in a hypercube can be viewed as routing
from Node i in Column 0 (q) to Node j in Column q (0) of the butterfly network. This makes
it easy to derive routing algorithms, visualize message paths, and analyze the delays resulting
from link or node congestion.
Consider, for example, routing a message from Node 3 to Node 6 of a 3-cube. The heavy
lines in Fig. 14.6 show that the message can be routed via a path of length 2 that goes through
the intermediate node 2. The unique path of the message from Node i to Node j can be easily
determined on the fly (on-line routing) if we XOR the labels of the source and destination
nodes and append the result to the head of the message as a routing tag (LSB-first for ascend,
MSB-first for descend). Then, in Column 0 of the butterfly network, the 0th bit of the routing
tag is used to decide if the straight link (tag = 0) or the cross Link (tag = 1) should be taken,
in Column 1 the 1st bit is used, and in Column 2 the 2nd bit controls the path selection.
In the example of routing from Node 3 to Node 6, the routing tag is 011 ⊕ 110 = 101.
This indicates the “cross–straight–cross” path consisting of the heavy solid lines in Fig. 14.6.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
289
Figure 14.5. Unfolded 3-cube or the 32-node butterfly network.
A second example path is represented by the heavy dotted lines in Fig. 14.6. This path goes
from Node 6 to Node 1 and corresponds to the routing tag 110 ⊕ 001 = 111. This represents
a “cross–cross–cross” path, which is a diametral path in the original hypercube. It should
be clear that the number of cross links taken, or the number of 1s in the routing tag, equals
the length of path between the source and destination nodes.
The node using a particular bit of the routing tag to make its routing decision can either
discard the bit or cyclically shift the tag by 1 bit. In the former case, the message arrives at
its destination with the routing tag completely removed. With the latter option, the routing
Figure 14.6. Example dimension-order routing paths.
290
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
tag returns to its original form by the time the message arrives at its destination and thus can
be used by the receiving node to identify the sender.
The two messages shown in Fig. 14.6 are routed via disjoint nodes and links. Thus, they
do not give rise to delays related to queuing or congestion. We can add still other paths, say
from Node 4 to Node 7, without increasing the routing delay. Multiple messages that use
distinct intermediate nodes and links can be routed simultaneously in q steps on the q-cube.
On the other hand, message paths that “meet” in a particular node of the butterfly, or go
through the same edge, may cause additional delays.
The question, now, is to determine the extent of these additional delays when dimension-order routing is used in the hypercube. First, observe that the butterfly network cannot
route all permutations without node or edge conflicts. For example, any permutation
involving the routes (1, 7) and (0, 3) leads to a conflict in the dimension-1 edge going from
Row 1 to Row 3. Therefore, the extent of conflicts depends on the particular routing problem.
There exist “good” routing problems for which conflicts are nonexistent or rare. There are
also “bad” routing problems that lead to maximum conflicts and thus the worst-case running
time predicted by Theorem 14.1.
The packing problem is an example of a good routing problem. Here, a subset of k nodes
(k ≤ p) in Column 0 of the butterfly network have messages or values and we want to “pack”
these values into consecutive processors in Column q, beginning with Row 0. The hypercube
counterpart of this problem is to pack a set of values, held by a subset of processors, into the
smallest possible subcube that contains Processor 0. Figure 14.7 shows an instance of this
problem with k = 4 values (A, B, C, D) routed to Rows 0–3 in Column 3. The destination
node address for each value is easily obtained by a diminished parallel prefix computation
yielding the rank of each value (a number between 0 and k – 1). It is fairly easy to show that
such a packing problem always leads to node-disjoint and edge-disjoint paths and, thus, O(q )
routing time, regardless of the number k of the input packets.
Figure 14.7. Packing is a "good" routing problem on the hypercube.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
291
The bit-reversal permutation is an example of a bad routing problem for dimension-order
routing. Bit-reversal permutation routing is when each Node x = x q–1 x q–2. . . x 1 x0 needs to
send a value to the node whose binary label is the reverse of that for x, i.e., to Node
x 0 x1 . . . x q–2 xq–1 .It is easy to show that this routing problem requires
time in the worst
case. This is even worse than what is predicted by Theorem 14.1.
Let q = 2a + 1 and consider the source–destination pairs 0 0 0 . . . 0 0 x1 . . . xa–1 x a and
xa xa –1 . . . x1 0 0 0 . . . 0 0 (i.e., source/destination nodes whose labels begin/end with a + 1
zeros, with the rest of the bits being identical but in reverse order). All such packets must go
through node 0 0 0 . . . 0 0 when routed in dimension order. The number of packets of this
type is
This example shows us that there exist permutation routing
routing steps and roughly the same number
problems of practical interest for which
of message buffers (per node) are needed.
Figure 14.8 depicts an example of the above worst-case routing problem for a = 1. Our
aim is to route 2 a = 2 packets from Node 00x1 to Node x1 00, x1 ∈ {0, 1}. We see that halfway
through their routes, the two packets converge into Node 000 and then diverge on separate
paths to their respective destinations. In this small example, we have p = 8 and thus only
packets converge into Node 0. However, the problem would be much worse on a
larger hypercube, as suggested by the above analysis.
The final item of concern here is to deal with the message buffer requirements of the
dimension-order routing algorithm. One may think that if we limit each node to a small,
constant number of message buffers, then the above bound still holds, except that messages
will be queued at several levels before reaching Node 0, i.e., a message is not allowed to
advance to the next column of the butterfly until the next node is ready to accept it. However,
queuing the messages at multiple intermediate nodes may introduce additional delays that
we have not accounted for, so that even the
running time can no longer be guaranteed.
In fact, one can prove that if each node of the hypercube is limited to O(1) message buffers,
Figure 14.8. Bit-reversal permutation is a "bad" routing problem on the hypercube.
292
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
there exist permutation routing problems that require O(p) time, i.e., as bad as on a linear
array!
Despite the poor performance of dimension-order routing in some cases, one should not
be unduly alarmed by the above negative results. First, the performance is usually much
better, i.e., log 2 p + o(log p ) for most permutations. Hence, the average running time of the
dimension-order routing algorithm is very close to its best case and its message buffer
requirements are quite modest.
Second, if we anticipate any (near) worst-case routing pattern to occur in a given
application, two options are available to us. In the first option, the routing paths for these
worst-case patterns are precomputed, using an off-line routing algorithm, and stored within
the nodes. With the second option, the algorithm is made to behave close to its average case
by doing randomized routing: Each packet is first sent to a randomly chosen intermediate
destination and from there to its final destination. In this way, any worst-case routing problem
is converted to two average-case routing problems. The probabilistic analyses required to
show the good average-case performance of dimension-order routing are quite complicated.
For wormhole routing, some of the above results are directly applicable. Obviously, any
good routing problem, yielding node- and edge-disjoint paths, will remain good for wormhole routing. As an example, in Fig. 14.7, the four worms corresponding to the messages A,
B, C, D will move in the network with no conflict among them. Each message is thus
delivered to its destination in the shortest possible time, regardless of the length of the worms.
For bad routing problems, on the other hand, wormhole routing aggravates the difficulties,
as each message can now tie up a number of nodes and links.
In the case of wormhole routing, one also needs to be concerned with deadlocks resulting
from circular waiting of messages for one another. Fortunately, dimension-order routing is
guaranteed to be deadlock-free. With hot-potato or deflection routing, which is attractive for
reducing the message buffering requirements within nodes, dimension orders are occasionally modified or more than one routing step along some dimensions may be allowed.
Deadlock considerations in this case are similar to those of other adaptive routing schemes
discussed in Section 14.6.
14.5. BROADCASTING ON A HYPERCUBE
A simple “flooding” scheme can be used for broadcasting a message from one node to
all nodes in a q-cube in q steps, provided that each node can send a message simultaneously
to all q neighbors (the all-port communication model). The source node sends the broadcast
message to all of its neighbors. Each node, on receiving a broadcast message for the first
time, relays it to all of its neighbors, except the one from which the message was received.
Thus, in a 5-cube, the knowledge about the broadcast message spreads in the following
pattern:
00000
Source node
00001, 00010, 00100, 01000, 10000
Neighbors of source
00011, 00101, 01001, 10001, 00110, 01010, 10010, 01100, 10100, 11000
Distance-2 nodes
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
293
00111, 01011, 10011, 01101, 10101, 11001, 01110, 10110, 11010, 11100
Distance-3 nodes
Distance-4 nodes
01111, 10111, 11011, 11101, 11110
Distance-5 node
11111
The single-port communication model is more reasonable and is the one usually
implemented in practice. In this model, each processor (or actually the router associated with
it) can send or receive only one message in each communication cycle. A simple recursive
algorithm allows us to broadcast a message in the same q steps with this more restricted
model. Suppose that in the first communication cycle, the source node sends the broadcast
message to its Dimension-(q–l) neighbor. The source node x and its Dimension-(q–l)
neighbor Nq – 1 (x) now independently broadcast the message in their respective subcubes.
Broadcasting time is characterized by the recurrence T(q) = 1 + T (q – 1) = q. Figure 14.9
shows the resulting broadcast pattern which is known as a binomial tree.
For long messages consisting of multiple smaller packets, or in wormhole routing,
transmission of packets or flits can be pipelined. The top set of diagrams in Fig. 14.10 show
a message composed of four parts A, B, C, D being broadcast in the 4-cube using the binomial
tree scheme of Fig. 14.9. The message is sent in its entirety to a neighbor of the source node
before being forwarded to other nodes on the path to various destinations.
The pipelined version of the binomial-tree routing algorithm is depicted in the middle
set of diagrams in Fig. 14.10. Here the flit or packet A is forwarded by the neighbor as soon
as it is received from the source node. Of course, we are assuming that each node can
send/receive messages over all of its ports simultaneously. For example, in the rightmost
snapshot shown for the pipelined binomial-tree scheme in Fig. 14.10, the node that is
receiving D from the source node also has its other three ports active.
The last broadcasting scheme shown in Fig. 14.10, known as Johnsson and Ho’s method
[John89], is faster than the pipelined binomial-tree scheme but involves out-of-sequence
transmission of the messages. For example, the neighbor to the right of the source node in
Fig. 14.10 receives the C part of the message first, followed in turn by B, A, and finally D.
This property creates additional storage and transmission overheads because of the need for
supplying a sequence number on each part of the message.
When used with wormhole routing, all tree-based broadcasting schemes have the
undesirable property that a path blockage in any branch propagates toward the source (root)
node and eventually blocks the entire tree. No further progress can be made until the blocked
Figure 14.9. The binomial broadcast tree for a 5-cube.
294
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 14.10. Three hypercube broadcasting schemes as performed on a 4-cube.
branch is freed; however, blockage may again occur by some other branch becoming
congested. In the worst case, this may result in indefinite blockage or deadlock.
A variety of path-based broadcasting or multicasting schemes have been proposed to
alleviate the above problems. In path-based multicasting, the destination nodes of a multicast
message are divided into subsets, with the ith subset forming a list or path that begins at the
source node and ends at a destination node D i within the subset. Multicasting is then
accomplished by sending a separate message from the source node to each D i along the
designated path. The message headed for Di is picked up (copied) by all of the intermediate
destination nodes along the path. A detailed discussion of path-based multicasting is given
by Duato et al. ([Duat97], pp. 199–219).
14.6. ADAPTIVE AND FAULT-TOLERANT ROUTING
Because there are up to q node-disjoint and edge-disjoint shortest paths between any
node pairs in a q-cube, it is possible to route messages around congested nodes/links or in
spite of node and/or link faults. Such adaptive routing algorithm have been extensively
studied for hypercube networks and the following discussion should be viewed only as an
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
295
Figure 14.11. Partitioning a 3-cube into subnetworks for deadlock-free routing.
introduction to the issues and methods involved in designing such algorithms. Published
research papers in this area consider one-to-one and collective communications for both
packet and wormhole routing schemes.
A useful notion for designing adaptive wormhole routing algorithms is that of virtual
communication networks. For example, if in a hypercube we replace each bidirectional link
with two unidirectional ones going in opposite directions, we can divide the hypercube’s
communication links into two subsets, defining two subnetworks or virtual networks. Let
Subnetwork 0 (1) consist of all of the links that connect a node to another node with larger
(smaller) node label. Figure 14.11 depicts these subnetworks for a 3-cube.
Because each of the two subnetworks shown in Fig. 14.11 is acyclic, any routing scheme
that begins by using the links in Subnetwork 0, at some point switches the routing path to
Subnetwork 1, and from then on uses the links in Subnetwork 1 exclusively, is guaranteed
to be deadlock-free. Such a routing scheme first adjusts all of the dimensions that need to be
changed from 0 to 1, in Phase 0, before dealing with the dimensions that must change from
1 to 0, in Phase 1. Within each phase, the dimensions can be handled in any order, thus
providing added flexibility in case a node/link becomes congested or fails.
The above scheme solves the problem of deadlock in adaptive wormhole routing for
hypercubes but it has some drawbacks. A message from Node x to Node y is first sent from
x to the node whose ID is x ∨ y (logical OR of x and y) and from there to y. Because of this,
some nodes/links may become more congested than others, leading to performance degradation. Such problems can be avoided by more complicated schemes for partitioning the
hypercube network into virtual networks. The methods used may involve dividing each
unidirectional physical channel into multiple virtual channels that time-share the physical link
Fault-tolerant routing on hypercubes and other networks constitutes a fascinating and
active research area in parallel processing. We will revisit this problem in Chapter 19. For
now, it suffices to note that the fault diameter of a hypercube (the diameter of the surviving
part when faulty nodes/links are removed) grows slowly with an increase in the number of
faulty elements. For example, the fault diameter of a q-cube is upper bounded by q + 1 with
at most q – 1 faults and by q + 2 with 2q – 3 or fewer faults [Lati93].
PROBLEMS
14.1. Bitonic sorting on a linear array
Unfold the four phases of the sorting example depicted in Fig. 14.3, showing all shifting and
compare–exchange steps and verifying that the total number of steps is T(16) = 4 × 16 – 4 –
2 log 2 16 = 52.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
296
14.2. Bitonic sorting on a ring
Does changing the linear array into a ring speed up the bitonic sorting algorithm? How or why
not?
14.3. Batcher’s odd–even merge sort
a.
b.
c.
Describe Batcher’s odd–even merge sort (presented in Section 14.2) in the form of an
algorithm for the q-cube.
Draw a set of diagrams, similar to those in Fig. 14.4, that show how the algorithm works.
Analyze the complexity of the algorithm and show that it requires O(q 2 ) running time.
14.4. Batcher’s bitonic sorting algorithm
a.
b.
Analyze the complexity of Batcher’s bitonic sorting algorithm when it is adapted to run
with n/p elements in each of the p = 2 q processors on a q -cube.
Using the bitonic sorting algorithm (as depicted in the example of Fig. 14.4), show that
any shift permutation, where the packet in each Node i needs to go to Node i + k mod 2q ,
can be routed on a q-cube in q steps, i.e., with no conflict.
14.5. Sorting by multiway merging
Suppose that you are given an algorithm to merge
sorted lists, each of size
on a
p-processor hypercube in O(log p log log 2 p) time. Show how the p-processor hypercube can
sort a list of size p in O(log p log log 2 p ) time.
14.6. Alternative sorting algorithms
Show how the sorting algorithms discussed in Section 6.4 in connection with the PRAM
abstract shared-memory model can be implemented on the hypercube.
14.7. Lower bounds for routing
Justify Ω (generalized dilation + generalized congestion) as a lower bound for oblivious routing
on an arbitrary network.
14.8. Generalized packing
The generalized packing problem on a q-cube is defined as that of sending k packets, stored
one per processor ( k ≤ p ), to a sequence of k consecutive nodes, beginning with a given Node
b. The packing problem exemplified by Fig. 14.7 corresponds to the special case of b = 0 in
this generalized version.
Show that the generalized packing problem is a good problem for dimension-order routing.
Using the result of part (a), show that any shift routing problem, where a packet initially
residing in Node i needs to go to Node i + k mod 2 q , can be routed on a q-cube in q steps
with no conflict.
c. Can the order of traversing the q dimensions be reversed for packing or generalized
packing?
a.
b.
14.9. Matrix transposition
The elements of an m × m matrix are stored, in row-major order, on the p = 2q = m 2 processors
of a q -cube. The matrix transposition routing problem is defined as rearranging the elements
into column-major order. This requires the element in Row i, Column j to move to the processor
currently holding the element in Row j, Column i.
a.
b.
c.
Show the paths needed to transpose a 4 × 4 matrix on a 16 × 5 butterfly network.
Is matrix transposition a good or bad problem for dimension-order routing on a q-cube?
Develop an efficient hypercube algorithm for matrix transposition as defined above.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
297
14.10. Hypercube with diametral links
It is possible to augment the hypercube architecture by adding a link between each node and
its dimetrically opposite node. This increases the node degree from q to q + 1. In the augmented
architecture, two nodes are connected iff the Hamming distance between their binary labels is
either 1 or q.
a. What is the effect of this change on the diameter of the hypercube?
b. HOW does the change affect the bisection width of the hypercube?
c. Devise a dimension-order routing algorithm for the q-cube augmented with diametral links.
14.11. Broadcasting on a hypercube
Consider the q-cube broadcasting schemes of Fig. 14.10.
a.
b.
c.
Analyze the communication time of the algorithms assuming long messages of length L
(so that the message transfer time dominates message startup time).
What is the average number of communication links in use during the algorithm?
Experimental measurements on a particular hypercube multicomputer reveal a message
latency of 50 µs and a transfer rate of 100 MB/s. Plot the estimated time needed for the
three algorithms to broadcast k bytes (10 3 ≤ k ≤ 106 ) on a 1024-processor system. Use a
log–log scale for your graph. Assume all-port communication where needed.
14.12. Broadcasting on a hypercube
The binomial-tree broadcasting algorithm was derived recursively: send to one node in the
other half-cube, then broadcast in parallel in each half-cube. Discuss the algorithm obtained
by reversing the order of the two steps: broadcast in the 0 half-cube, then send the message
from each node in the 0 half-cube to its neighbor in the 1 half-cube.
14.13. Adaptive routing algorithms
Consider the routing scheme represented by Fig. 14.11 and assume uniform message traffic
between all node pairs.
a. Which hypercube node will be least congested and why?
b. Which hypercube node will be most congested and why?
14.14. Architecture-independent routing models
The hypercube architecture has rich connectivity, short diameter, and wide bisection. In many
hypercube parallel systems utilizing message passing, the message transmission delay is
dominated by the operating system overhead for the initiation or reception of a message, so
that the actual source and destination addresses and the effects of possible congestion on the
routing paths can be ignored for all practical purposes. An abstract model of the above situation
consists of each node being able to send k messages and receive k messages in unit time, where
k is a limit that is imposed by the system’s aggregate communication bandwidth. Suppose that
one processor needs to broadcast m different messages to all other 2 q – 1 processors in a q-cube.
Determine the minimum time needed to perform this task in each of the following cases:
a. m = 1, k = l .
b. Arbitrary m , with k =1.
c. m = 1, k = 2.
14.15. The postal communication model
The postal communication model is a topology-independent model that associates an integer
number λ of cycles of delay with each message transmission, independent of the source and
destination node addresses. Each node can transmit one message per cycle, but the message
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
298
transmitted in cycle i will not be received at the destination node until cycle i + λ . The name
of this model derives from the following analogy. Suppose you are allowed to write one letter
per day and that it takes the letter 2 days to reach its destination. Then the right-hand diagram
below shows that you can broadcast a message to eight people in 5 days whereas the
binomial-tree broadcasting algorithm on the left requires 6 days to complete the task. The
numbers on multiple edges leaving a node correspond to the cycle number (day) in which the
message is sent.
a.
b.
Show that the number of nodes that have received a broadcast message after t cycles satisfies
the recurrence
we clearly have N λ (t) = 1, as
none of the messages has reached its destination yet.
Discuss the solution to the above recurrence for λ = 2.
14.16. Many-to-many routing on a hypercube
Consider a routing problem in which each node of a q-cube has up to k messages to send and
no more than k of the messages in the entire q-cube are addressed to the same node. Let us call
this a k–k routing problem. Show that any k–k routing problem can be decomposed into k1–1
routing problems by an off-line algorithm. Given the above decomposition, how much time
does the routing require with the all-port communication model?
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Batc68]
[Cyph90]
[Duat97]
[Ferr96]
[Gree95]
[John89]
[Lati93]
[Leig92]
[Leig94]
[McKi95]
Batcher, K., “Sorting Networks and Their Applications,” Proc. AFIPS Spring Joint Computer Conf.,
1968, Vol. 32, pp. 307–314.
Cypher, R., and G. Plaxton, “Deterministic Sorting in Nearly Logarithmic Time on the Hypecube
and Related Computers,” Proc. 22ndACM Symp. Theory of Computing, 1990, pp. 193–203.
Duato, J., S. Yalamanchili, and L. Ni, Interconnection Networks: An Engineering Approach, IEEE
Computer Society Press, 1997.
Ferreira, A., “Parallel and Communication Algorithms on Hypercube Multiprocessors,” Chapter 19
in Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook, edited by A.Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp.
568–589.
Greenberg, R. I., and H.-C. Oh, “Packet Routing in Networks with Long Wires,” J. Parallel and
Distributed Computing, Vol. 31, pp. 153–158,1995.
Johnsson, S. L., and C. -T. Ho, “Optimum Broadcasting and Personalized Communication in
Hypercubes,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 38, No. 9, pp. 1249–1268, September 1989.
Latifi, S., “Combinatorial Analysis of the Fault Diameter of the n-Cube,” IEEE Trans. Computers,
Vol. 42, No. 1, pp. 27–33, January 1993.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Leighton, F. T., B. M. Maggs, and S. B. Rao, “Packet Routing and Job-Shop Scheduling in
O(Congestion + Dilation) Steps,” Combinatorica , Vol. 14, No. 2, pp. 167–180,1994.
McKinley, P. K., Y. -J. Tsai, and D. F. Robinson, “Collective Communication in Wormhole-Routed
Maasively Parallel Computers,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 28, No. 12, pp. 39–50, December 1995.
SORTING AND ROUTING ON HYPERCUBES
[Nass82]
[Plax89]
[Reif87]
299
Nassimi, D., and S. Sahni, “Parallel Permutation and Sorting Algorithms and a New Generalized
Connection Network,” J. ACM, Vol. 29, No. 3, pp. 642–667, July 1982.
Plaxton, G., “Load Balancing, Selection and Sorting on the Hypercube,” Proc. ACM Symp. Parallel
Algorithms and Architectures, 1989, pp. 64–73.
Reif, J., and L. Valiant, “A Logarithmic Time Sort for Linear Size Networks,” J. ACM, Vol. 34, No.
1, pp. 60–76, January 1987.
This page intentionally left blank.
15
Other Hypercubic
Architectures
In this chapter, we discuss a number of modified and generalized hypercubebased architectures that can provide certain benefits over standard hypercubes.
More importantly, we study several constant-degree parallel architectures that
are derivable from, or intimately related to, the logarithmic-degree hypercube.
These constant-degree derivatives share many properties of the hypercube and
can emulate it quite efficiently, but are both realizable at lower cost and more
readily scalable. Hence, one can use the rich structure of the hypercube, and
the wide array of algorithms and theoretical results available for it, to develop
efficient algorithms and then resort to the emulation results presented here to
implement those algorithms or prove desired results for practically realizable
parallel systems. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
15.1.
15.2.
15.3.
15.4.
15.5.
15.6.
Modified and generalized hypercubes
Butterfly and permutation networks
Plus-or-minus-2 i network
The cube-connected cycles network
Shuffle and shuffle–exchange networks
That’s not all, folks!
301
This page intentionally left blank.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
15.1.
303
MODIFIED AND GENERALIZED HYPERCUBES
The versatility and rich algorithmic and theoretical properties of the hypercube have led
researchers define modified, augmented, generalized, or hierarchical versions of the
network. We postpone a discussion of hierarchical hypercubic networks to Section 16.5
where a general framework for multilevel or hierarchical interconnection networks is
presented and several example networks are studied. In this section, we study a few variants
of the standard binary hypercube that are obtained by redirecting some of the links, adding
links/nodes, and changing the basis or “seed” network.
An example of the first category (i.e., redirecting some links) is the twisted hypercube
obtained by redirecting two edges in any 4-cycle, as shown in Fig. 15.1. In general, any
4-cycle uvxy can be chosen in the q-cube, its uv and xy edges removed, and new edges ux,
vy inserted to obtain a twisted q-cube. Let the edges in the 4-cycle be along Dimensions k
and l. Then, each of the Nodes u, v, x, and y of the original 4-cycle will have a neighbor N k l
in the twisted version of the network whose node label differs from it in both bits k and l. It
is easy to show that the diameter of a twisted q-cube is q – 1, i.e., one less than that of the
q-cube. Additionally, rings of any odd length and the (2q –1)-node complete binary tree are
subgraphs of a twisted q-cube; properties that are not possessed by the ordinary q-cube
[Esfa91].
An example of the second category (i.e., adding some links) is the folded hypercube,
which is obtained from the hypercube by linking all pairs of diametrically opposite nodes.
For example, in the 3-cube depicted in Fig. 15.2, Nodes 0 and 7 are diametrically opposite,
as are three other node pairs (1, 6), (2, 5), and (3, 4). Thus, adding the four links shown in
bold in the right-hand diagram of Fig. 15.2 yields a folded 3-cube. It is easy to see that the
diameter of a folded hypercube is about half that of a regular hypercube. Let us designate
the added diametral links as Dimension-q links. Then, a dimension-order routing algorithm
can be devised that routes each message in q /2  steps. Details of this algorithm, as well as
deriving other topological properties of folded hypercubes are left as an exercise.
An important property of folded hypercubes is their improved robustness or fault
tolerance. If one or several Dimension-i links fail, where 0 ≤ i < q , Dimension- q links can
be used in their stead. Figure 15.3 depicts an example where all Dimension-0 links are
removed from a 3-cube and an intact 3-cube is recovered by conceptually rotating the right
subcube, consisting of Nodes 1, 3, 5, and 7, counterclockwise until Nodes 3 and 5 (also, 1
and 7) switch places. In this way, an intact q-cube can be obtained by simply renaming half
Figure 15.1. Deriving a twisted 3-cube by redirecting two links in a 4-cycle
304
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 15.2. Deriving a folded 3-cube by adding four diametral links.
of the nodes. For other interesting properties of folded hypercubes, see El-Amawy and Latifi:
[ElAm91].
A hypercube, as defined and analyzed in the previous two chapters, is the qth power of
a two-node linear array. Thus, a hypercube can be viewed as a power network or homogeneous product network (a product network formed by “multiplying” identical component
networks).
If we view the two-node linear array as a complete graph of size 2, a generalization of
the hypercube immediately suggests itself. The r-node complete graph, K r , is a graph in
which every pair of nodes is directly connected by an edge. The qth power of K r is a
generalized hypercube. Node labels in a generalized hypercube can be viewed as q-digit
radix r numbers, with each node connected to all of the q(r – 1) nodes whose labels differ
from it in a single digit. Actually, as defined by Bhuyan and Agrawal [Bhuy84], a generalized
hypercube is the product of complete graphs which may be of different sizes. The node labels
in this more general case can be viewed as mixed-radix numbers, with each node connected
to
other nodes, where ri is the radix in digit position i.
Another generalization of the hypercube results from using a ring of size m (instead of
2) as the basis or “seed” network. The qth power of the m-node ring is known as the m-ary
q-cube interconnection network, which is the same as q-D torus of equal dimensions m. The
hypercube is then a 2-ary (or binary) q-cube according to this terminology. Again multiplying
rings of different sizes yields a more general structure. Note that hypercubes and 2D tori
represent the two extreme of m-ary q-cubes. Fix q at 2 and you get 2D tori with
diameter; fix m at 2 and you get the hypercube with logarithmic diameter.
Figure 15.3. Folded 3-cube viewed as 3-cube with a redundant dimension.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
305
15.2. BUTTERFLY AND PERMUTATION NETWORKS
In Section 14.4, we defined the butterfly network with 2 q nodes and q + 1 columns as
an unfolded q-cube in order to facilitate the discussion, visualization, and analysis of
hypercube routing algorithms. However, a butterfly network can be viewed as a parallel
processing architecture in its own right. A butterfly architecture (Fig. 15.4, left) has p =
2 q(q + 1) processors of maximum degree d = 4, a diameter of 2q = Θ (log p), and a bisection
width of ( – 1)2 q+1 + 0(2 q ) = Θ (p/log p) [Born 98]. A wrapped butterfly architecture is
obtained if we superimpose or merge the nodes in Columns 0 and q of an ordinary butterfly.
The resulting network has p = 2 q q processors, a uniform node degree of 4, a diameter of
roughly 1.5q, and a bisection width of 2 q .
Each node in a (wrapped) butterfly can be identified by its row and column numbers (x ,
y), where 0 ≤ x < 2 q – 1 and 0 ≤ y ≤ q (q – 1 for wrapped butterfly). Node (x, y) of a butterfly
is connected to the four nodes (x, y – 1 ), (x, y + 1), (N y –1 (x), y – 1), and (Ny (x), y + 1), if they
exist. In the case of wrapped butterfly, the expressions y ± 1 for the column numbers are
evaluated modulo q.
If you shift the columns of a butterfly network cyclically, or permute them in any way,
you can redraw the figure (by exchanging rows) such that it looks exactly the same as before.
Figure 15.5 shows an example in which the connection pattern between Columns 0 and 1
has been interchanged with that between Columns 1 and 2. It is easily seen that if we redraw
the network by interchanging the places of Rows 1 and 2 as well as Rows 5 and 6, the resulting
diagram will look exactly like the left-hand diagram in Fig. 15.4.
The butterfly network is quite versatile. Many other independently developed networks
are in fact butterfly network in disguise. Take a fat tree, for example. Recall that a major
disadvantage of a binary tree architecture is its small bisection width, making the root node
a bottleneck when a large number of long-distance communications must be performed. A
Figure 15.4. Butterfly and wrapped butterfly networks.
306
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 15.5. Butterfly network with permuted dimensions.
fat tree is a treelike network specifically designed to remedy this problem. In a fat tree, the
link multiplicity or capacity increases as we approach the root node (Fig. 15.6). Of course,
taking advantage of the added links or link capacities would require that the nodes near the
root be different (have higher communication performance). To avoid this heterogeneity, one
might divide each such node into a number of simpler, lower-performance nodes. The
resulting architecture, shown in Fig. 15.7, is a butterfly network. We see that even if each of
the eight leaf nodes wants to send a message to another leaf node, the messages can be routed
through the eight root nodes with little or no conflict.
Anecdote. It has been suggested that because trees in nature are thicker near the root
and thinner near the leaves, we should call the networks shown in Fig. 15.6 trees and refer
to regular binary trees as skinny trees.
The structure of the fat tree, as drawn in Fig. 15.7, is such that the communication
bandwidth between Level-i and Level-(i+1) nodes is the same for all i (16 wires or channels
in our example). This is based on the worst-Case assumption that all messages entering a
node from below must be directed to its parent. Real communication patterns are more local
so that only a fraction of the messages entering a node from below must be routed up to the
Figure 15.6. Two representations of a fat tree.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
307
Figure 15.7. Butterfly network redrawn as a fat tree.
parent; most are addressed to nodes within the same subtree. This locality property allows
us to put the fat tree on a diet, making it skinnier near the root. Such a “plump tree” is the
interconnection network used in the CM-5 parallel computer built by Thinking Machines
Corporation (see Section 22.4).
There are many variations of the butterfly network. First, the butterfly network may be
viewed as a multilevel interconnection network connecting processors on one side to memory
modules on the other side. In this type of usage, a 2 q × (q+1) butterfly network built of 2 × 2
routing switches can interconnect 2 q+1 modules on each side, when the nodes in Columns 0
and q are provided with two input and two output links, respectively (see Fig. 6.9). Replacing
the memory modules by processors would yield an interprocessor interconnection network.
Alternatively, a 2 q × 2 q interconnection network results if all modules are connected to one
side of the butterfly network, as shown in Fig. 15.8.
If we unfold Fig. 15.8, so that the processors remain on the left but the memory modules
move to the right, and then merge the middle four nodes in each row which perform no useful
Figure 15.8. Butterfly network used to connect modules that are on the same side.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
308
Figure 15.9. Bene
network formed from two back-to-back butterflies.
routing function, a Bene network results. Figure 15.9 shows the resulting network for
connecting eight processors to eight memory modules. In general, the q-dimensional Bene
network is obtained from two back-to-back q-dimensional butterflies, with the Column q of
one superimposed on the Column 0 of the second one. Thus, a q -dimensional Bene network
has 2 q rows and 2q + 1 columns.
An important property of a Bene network is that it can route any permutation with no
conflict. This is in part related to the availability of multiple edge-disjoint paths between any
pair of input and output nodes. For example, in Fig. 15.10, we see Processors 0, 1, 2, 3, 5,
6, and 9 connected to Banks 6, 14, 0, 15, 11, 4, and 3, respectively. With the connections
already established, Processor 4 can be connected to Bank 7 or 10 but not to other currently
unused memory banks. However, if Processor 4 were to be connected to Bank 8, say, it is
possible to re-route or rearrange the other connections such that the new connection can also
be accommodated. For this reason, the Bene network is called rearrangeable, meaning that
it can route any permutation if rearranging previously established connections is allowed.
Figure 15.10. Another example of a Bene network.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
309
Finally, we note that a butterfly network can be generalized to a high-radix butterfly (or
m-ary butterfly) composed of nodes with degree 2m (or m × m switches). There are m q rows
and q + 1 columns in an m- ary butterfly network.
15.3. PLUS-OR-MINUS-2 i NETWORK
Figure 15.11 shows a plus-or-minus-2i (PM2I) network with eight nodes (p = 2 q nodes
in general) in which each Node x is connected to every node whose label is x ± 2 i mod p for
some i. It is easy to see that the PM2I network is a supergraph of the hypercube. The heavy
lines in Fig. 15.11 show the hypercube subgraph of the eight-node PM2I network.
Just as an unfolded hypercube is isomorphic to the butterfly network, an unfolded PM2I
network yields a useful (multistage) interconnection network known as an augmented data
manipulator (ADM) network. Here, augmented means that the network is derived from a
data manipulator network which, as originally defined, restricted all switches in the same
column to be in identical states (provide exactly the same connectivity pattern between their
inputs and outputs). The data manipulator network was proposed as a multistage interconnection network and the common state for switches in the same column was needed to
simplify its control structure.
The dangling lines at the top and bottom of Fig. 15.12 represent wraparound links in
view of the ±2 i mod 2 q connectivity rule. So, for example, the lines labeled “a” and “b” at
the top are connected to the lines with the same designations at the bottom.
Paths from one side to the other side of an ADM network are nonunique. For example,
there are two paths between Node 2 in Column 0 and Node 4 in Column 3 (heavy lines in
Fig. 15.12). Each link selected corresponds to adding or subtracting a power of 2. The paths
highlighted in Fig. 15.12 correspond to obtaining 4 from 2 by adding 2 to it or by subtracting
2 from it and then adding 4. Routing in ADM network corresponds to decomposing the
difference y – x mod 2 q of source and destination rows into powers of 2. A binary routing
tag can be used to achieve self-routing, with the ith bit of the tag used to select the straight
output (0) or the lower output (1) in Column i. If the routing tag is represented as a binary
signed-digit number, with digit values in {–1, 0, 1 }, then a digit –1 would correspond to
taking the upper output channel. For example, the routing tags corresponding to the two paths
highlighted in Fig. 15.12 are 0 1 0 and 1 - 1 0, where 1 represents the signed digit or tag
value –1.
Figure 15.11. Two representations of the eight-node plus-or-minus-2 i network.
310
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 15.12. Augmented data manipulator network.
Having multiple paths is desirable both for improved performance (network bandwidth)
and for fault tolerance. Thus, the ADM network is more resilient to node and link failure
than a butterfly network of the same size. The hardware cost paid for this added resilience
is a larger node degree and denser interconnections. The software cost is a more complex
routing algorithm that is capable of distributing the traffic evenly among the multiple paths
that are available.
15.4. THE CUBE-CONNECTED CYCLES NETWORK
The cube-connected cycles (CCC) network can be derived from a wrapped butterfly as
follows. Remove the pair of cross links that connect a pair of nodes in Column i – 1 to the
same two nodes in Column i and instead connect the two nodes in Column i (Fig. 15.13).
The resulting network has node degree of 3 but is otherwise quite similar to the butterfly
network. In particular, CCC can emulate any algorithm for a butterfly of the same size with
only a constant factor slowdown.
The original definition of CCC was based on a q-cube in which each node has been
replaced with a cycle of length q, with the aim of reducing the node degree without
significantly affecting the diameter. Figure 15.14 shows how a 3-cube is converted to a
24-node CCC. Each node is replaced with a 3-cycle, with the original hypercube links
distributed one per node in the cycle. Each node also has two cycle edges. The three edges
of a node in CCC can be denoted as
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
311
Figure 15.13. A wrapped butterfly (left) converted into cube-connected cycles.
F
B
C
Forward link in the cycle
Backward link in the cycle
Intercycle or cube link
Each node can be identified by a pair ( x, y) of integers, where x is the cycle number (the node
number in the original hypercube) and y is the node number within the cycle. This same
numbering scheme is applicable to the representation of Fig. 15.13 where x and y correspond
to row and column numbers. Two nodes ( x0 , y 0 ) and (x1 , y1 ) are adjacent iff
x 0 = x 1 and y 0 = y 1 ± 1 or y 0 = y1 and x0 differs from x1 in bit position y0
The number of processors in a CCC derived from a q-cube is p = 2q q.
A simple argument can be used to establish the following bound on the diameter of
CCC:
Figure 15.14. Alternate derivation of CCC from a hypercube.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
312
D < 2.5 q = Θ (log p)
The argument goes as follows. Simple dimension-order routing leads to a message taking
up to q/2 steps in the source ring to gain access to a Dimension-(q–1) link, 2q – 1 steps in
intermediate rings (cube edge, ring edge, cube edge, ring edge, . . . , ring edge, cube edge),
and finally up to q/2 steps in the destination ring. These add up to 3q – 1 steps. If we route
the dimensions in arbitrary order, the first q/2 steps can be eliminated; we simply begin the
routing path with whatever dimension that is accessible from the source node.
The CCC network can be somewhat generalized if the number of nodes in each cycle
is specified to be at least q rather than exactly q. If there are k nodes in each cycle, with k ≥
q, then the first q nodes will have cube links as before and the remaining k – q nodes will
have only F and B links in the cycle. This allows us, e.g., to make the number of nodes in a
cycle a power of 2 (four nodes per cycle in the example of Fig. 15.14), leading to simpler
and cleaner algorithms. In addition, increasing the parameter k provides a performance–cost
trade-off mechanism in the sense that with larger values of k, the network diameter grows
and its bisection width is reduced. In return, the network becomes less complex (e.g., easier
to lay out in VLSI).
q
The exact diameter of CCC with 2 cycles of size k ≥ q is as follows [Meli93]:
CCC can emulate any hypercube algorithm with O(q) = O(log p) slowdown. However, for
a class of hypercube algorithms known as normal algorithms, the slowdown is only a
constant. Thus, for this class of algorithms, which includes the ascend/descend class of
algorithms as special cases, CCC performs almost as well as the hypercube while having a
much lower implementation cost. Recall that in ascend (descend) class of hypercube
algorithms, each node communicates along all possible dimensions in order, beginning with
0 (q–1) and ending with q– l (0). More generally, when each communication activity is along
a dimension that differs from the previous one by ±l mod q, the hypercube algorithm is
called normal.
Assume, for clarity, that q = 2m . The number of processors in our CCC network is then
m
m
p = 2q q =2 2 2 m = 22 + m . The hypercube to be simulated has 2 m + m dimensions. Communication along the first m dimensions is carried out by data rotation within cycles. The
remaining 2 m dimensions are handled as follows. Suppose communication along Dimension
j has just taken place between the values in Nodes (x, j) and (N j (x), j) (see Fig. 15.15). The
next communication is along Dimension j – 1 or j + 1. Assume that it is to be along Dimension
j + 1. Rotating the data values in the nodes in the direction of the arrows will align the values
for Dimension-(j+1) communication, as the value in Node (x, j) goes to Node (x, j+1).
Similarly, rotating in the opposite direction will allow communication along Dimension j–1
to take place. As the data originally in Node (x, j) perform their Dimension-(j+1) communi-
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
313
Figure 15.15. CCC emulating a normal hypercube algorithm.
cation through Node (x, j+1), the data originally in Node (x, j–1) are properly aligned for
Dimension-j communication through Node (x, j).
15.5. SHUFFLE AND SHUFFLE–EXCHANGE NETWORKS
A perfect shuffle, or simply shuffle, connectivity is one that interlaces the nodes in a way
that is similar to a perfect shuffle of a deck of cards. That is, Node 0 is connected to 0, Node
1 to 2, Node 2 to 4, . . . , Node 2 q – 1 – 1 to 2 q – 2, Node 2 q – 1 to 1, . . . , Node 2 q –1 to 2 q – 1,
as depicted in the leftmost diagram of Fig. 15.16. The reverse connectivity is sometimes
referred to as unshuffle. The “exchange” connectivity, which links each even-numbered node
with the next odd-numbered node, is also shown in Fig. 15.16.
Combining the shuffle and exchange connectivities, we get the connectivity of a
shuffle–exchange network. By combining the two, we either mean that both “shuffle”
connection as well as “shuffle-then-exchange” connections are provided or that both shuffle
and exchange connections are provided as separate links. This latter interpretation corresponds to the rightmost diagram in Fig. 15.16 (throughout this figure, two copies of each
node are drawn to show the connectivity rules more clearly). Figure 15.17 shows the
eight-node shuffle–exchange interconnection network in the standard undirected graph
form.
q
In a 2 -node shuffle network, Node x = x q–1 x q–2 . . . x2 x 1 x0 is connected to x q–2 . . .
x 2 x1x0 xq–1 ,i.e., to the node whose label is the cyclically left-shifted version of x. The unshuffle
connection is just the opposite and corresponds to a right cyclic shift in the node label. With
undirected links, both the shuffle and unshuffle connectivities are obviously present, but the
unidirectional version of such networks may have only shuffle or only unshuffle links. In
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
314
Figure 15.16. Shuffle, exchange, and shuffle–exchange connectivities.
the shuffle–exchange network, Node x is additionally connected to xq–2 . . . x2 x1 x0 x'q–1 , where
x'q–1 is the complement of xq –1.
Routing in a shuffle–exchange network is quite simple. A shuffle, and possibly an
exchange, is needed for “adjusting” each address bit. This corresponds to one or two routing
steps per address bit, depending on which of the two right-hand networks in Fig. 15.16 is
implemented.
As an example, consider routing a message from the source node x = 01011011 to the
destination node y = 11010110. The routing is done as follows:
Source
Destination
Positions that differ
01011011
11010110
↑ ↑↑ ↑
Route
0– 11011 Shuffle to 10110110– Exchange to 1011011 1–
–1 0110111 Shuffle to 011011 1 1–
Figure 15.17. Alternate views of an eight-node shuffle–exchange network.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
315
Figure 15.18. Eight-node network with separate shuffle and exchange links.
Figure 15.19. Multistage shuffle–exchange network (omega network) is the same as butterfly
network.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
316
01101111
Shuffle to 11011110–
–
11011110
Shuffle to 10111101–
–
10111101
Shuffle to 01111011–
–
01111010
Shuffle to 11110100–
–
11110101
Shuffle
to 11101011–
–
11101011
Shuffle
to 11010111–
–
Exchange to 01111010–
Exchange to 11110101–
Exchange to 11010110–
Based on the routing algorithm implicitly defined in the above example, it should be obvious
that the diameter of a 2 q -node shuffle–exchange network is q = log2 p (the node degree is
4). With shuffle and exchange links provided separately, as shown in Fig. 15.18, the diameter
increases to 2q – 1 and node degree reduces to 3.
Cascading the two shuffle–exchange structures shown on the right side of Fig. 15.16
results in a multistage interconnection network, as shown on the left side of Fig. 15.19. By
repositioning or renaming the nodes, these omega networks can be redrawn to look like
butterfly networks (right side of Fig. 15.18). Note, for example, the repositioning of the node
labeled “A” in each diagram. Drawing a butterfly network as a multistage shuffle–exchange
network reveals a hardware saving scheme: Only one stage of a shuffle–exchange network
might be implemented and routing done by multiple “passes” through this hardware; this is
similar to periodic sorting networks that allowed us to sort by multiple passes through
hardware corresponding to a single period (see Section 7.5).
15.6. THAT'S NOT ALL, FOLKS!
Thus far in this chapter, we have examined various interconnection architectures that
are derived by changing, generalizing, or unfolding the hypercube. Other modifications and
extensions are also possible. We cannot possibly examine all of them here, but offer only
two examples of the wide array of possibilities.
We note that when q is a power of 2, the 2 q q-node cube-connected cycles network
derived from the q-cube, by replacing each of its nodes with a q-cycle, is a subgraph of the
(q + log 2 q )-cube. Thus, CCC can be viewed as a pruned hypercube. The hypercube itself is
a pruned PM2I network in which roughly half of the links have been removed. Other pruning
strategies are possible, leading to interesting performance–cost trade-offs.
For example, if the number q of dimensions in a q-cube is odd, the following pruning
strategy can be applied to the q-cube to reduce its node degree from q to (q + 1)/2. All
Figure 15.20. Example of a pruned hypercube.
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
317
Figure 15.21. Two 8-node Möbius cubes.
Dimension-0 links remain intact, but within the subcube composed of nodes whose labels
end in 0 (1), only even- (odd-) dimension links are kept and the rest are removed. The
resulting pruned hypercube is much simpler than the unpruned version, yet it has a diameter
that is only one unit more. Figure 15.20 shows a pruned 3-cube, with Dimension-0 links
connecting the left and right 2-cubes each having only half of its original links.
Möbius cubes [Cull95] are similar to hypercubes, except that the Dimension-i neighbor
of Node x = x q– 1 x q –2 . . . xi + 1 x i . . . x 1 x 0 is x q –1 x q –2 . . . 0 x'i . . . x1 x 0 if xi+1 = 0 (i.e., as in the
hypercube, x i is complemented to obtain the neighbor’s node label) and xq –1 x q –2 . . .
1x'i . . . x'1 x'0 if x i+1 = 1 (i.e., x i and all of the bits to its right are complemented to obtain the
neighbor’s node label). For Dimension q – 1, because there is no x q , the neighbor can be
defined in two ways, leading to 0-Möbius cubes (assume x q = 0) and 1-Möbius cubes (assume
xq = 1). Figure 15.21 shows the 0- and 1-Möbius cubes for q = 3. For q = 3, Möbius cubes
are identical to twisted cubes defined in Section 15.1. However, the two are different for
larger values of q. For this reason, Möbius cubes have also been called generalized twisted
cubes. A Möbius cube has a diameter of about one-half and an average internode distance
of about two-thirds of that of a hypercube.
PROBLEMS
15.1. Twisted hypercubes
a . Prove that the diameter of a twisted q-cube, defined in Section 15.1, is q – 1.
b. Devise a routing algorithm for a canonically twisted q-cube, in which the twisted 4-cycle
consists of Nodes 0, 1, 2, and 3, with links 01 and 23 replaced by 03 and 12.
c. What is the bisection width of a twisted q-cube?
d. Prove that a cycle of any length, up to 2 q , is a subgraph of a twisted q-cube.
e. Prove that the 2 q-node double-rooted complete binary tree is a subgraph of a twisted q-cube.
f . Prove that the (2 q –1)-node complete binary tree is a subgraph of a twisted q-cube. Hint:
Begin by assuming that a 2q–1 -node double-rooted complete binary tree has been embedded in each half-cube.
15.2. Folded hypercubes
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prove that the diameter of a folded q-cube, defined in Section 15.1, is q/2.
Devise a routing algorithm for a folded q-cube.
What is the bisection width of a folded q-cube?
What is the fault diameter of a folded q-cube? (See Section 14.6.)
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
318
15.3. The flip network
The flip network, which was used in some early parallel machines, is a multistage interconq
nection network with 2 rows and q + 1 columns of 2 × 2 switches (nodes). Nodes (r, c), in
Row r and Column c, and (r', c + 1) are connected by an edge iff r' is obtainable by a 1-bit
right cyclic shift of r or if r' is formed by inverting the LSB of r and then taking the right cyclic
shift of the result. Show that the flip network is isomorphic to the butterfly network.
15.4. The baseline network
The baseline network is a multistage interconnection network with 2 q rows and q + 1 columns
of 2 × 2 switches (nodes). Node (r, c), in Row r and Column c, is connected to Node (r', c +
1) iff r' is obtainable by cyclically shifting the q–c LSBs of r or if r' is formed by inverting the
LSB of r and then cyclically shifting the q–c LSBs of the result. Show that the baseline network
is isomorphic to the butterfly.
15.5. Butterfly network with an extra stage
Study the implications of adding an extra column of nodes at the right end of the 2q × (q + 1)
butterfly network in the following two ways:
a. Columns q and q + 1 are linked exactly as Columns 0 and 1.
b. Connections between Columns q and q + 1 correspond to the diametral (Dimension-q)
links in a folded hypercube, as defined in Section 15.1.
15.6. PM2I network
a. Determine the node degree and the diameter of a 2 q -node PM2I network.
b. What is the diameter of a data manipulator (unfolded PM2I) network if each node
represents a processor rather than a switch?
c. Describe an efficient routing algorithm for the network of part (b).
15.7. Cube-connected cycles
a. Complete the labeling of the CCC nodes in Fig. 15.14.
b. Modify the CCC in Fig. 15.14 such that each cycle has four nodes (i.e., show the placement
of Node 3 in each cycle).
c. Show that the diameter of the CCC in Fig. 15.14 is 6.
15.8. Cube-connected cycles
Consider the 2 qq-node CCC derived from the q-cube, where q is a power of 2.
a. Show that such a CCC is a subgraph of the (q + log 2 q)-cube.
b. Show that the diameter of such a CCC is D = 2.5 q – 2. How does this diameter compare
with that of a hypercube of the same size?
c. Find the bisection width of the above CCC and compare it with that of a hypercube of the
same size.
15.9. Layout for cube-connected cycles
Lower-degree networks generally have more efficient VLSI layouts than higher-degree ones.
For example, the cube-connected cycles networks can be laid out in a much smaller area than
a hypercube of the same size. Because the bisection width of a p-node hypercube is p, its
required area is Ω (p 2).
a. Ignoring the area required for nodes and focusing only on the wires that must be routed on
the lines of a uniform 2D grid, show that a p-node CCC can be laid out in O(p2 /log2 p )
area. Hint: By separating the nodes in Columns 1 and 2 of the CCC shown in Fig. 15.13
OTHER HYPERCUBIC ARCHITECTURES
319
into two and four columns, respectively, so that all column connections can be established
using straight vertical lines, the 24-node CCC can be laid out in 16(1 + 2 + 4) = 112 units
of space.
b. Show that the area derived in part (a) is asymptotically optimal, given the bisection width
of the p-node CCC.
c. It has been shown that any VLSI circuit that can compute the product of two k-bit integers
and
Based
in T time steps must have a layout area A satisfying
on the above, what is a lower bound on the time required to multiply two p-bit integers,
stored 1 bit per processor, on a p-node CCC?
15.10. VLSI layout of various networks
Ignoring the area required for nodes and focusing only on the wires that must be routed on the
lines of a uniform 2D grid, as in the previous problem:
a. Produce a layout for the p-node butterfly network and express its area as a function of p.
b. Repeat part (a) for the p-node plus-or-minus -2 i network.
c. Repeat part (a) for the p-node shuffle–exchange network.
15.11. de Bruijn network
The de Bruijn network is defined as follows. There are 2 q nodes and 2 q + 1 directed edges. Each
node
is connected, via directed edges, to the two nodes
and
The edges leading to the first (second) node are referred to as type 0 (type 1)
edges.
a.
b.
c.
d.
What is the diameter of the de Bruijn graph?
What is the bisection width of the de Bruijn graph?
Propose an efficient routing algorithm for the de Bruijn graph.
Show that the 2 q -node de Bruijn graph is a subgraph of the graph obtained from the
2 q + 1 -node shuffle–exchange graph, with separate shuffle and exchange links (Fig. 15.18),
and
if we merge the nodes
15.12. Pruned hypercubes
Consider a pruned q-cube, with q odd, as exemplified by Fig. 15.20.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Show that the diameter of such a pruned q-cube is q + 1 .
What is the bisection width of such a pruned q-cube?
Describe an efficient routing algorithm for such pruned hypercubes.
Show how to emulate a complete q-cube on a pruned one with constant slowdown, trying
to make the constant as small as possible.
15.13. Pruned hypercubes
Consider a pruned q-cube, with q odd, as exemplified by Fig. 15.20. Show that such a hypercube
essentially consists of 2 ( q + 1 ) /2 clusters, each of which is a 2 ( q – 1 ) / 2 -node hypercube. If we view
each of these clusters as a supernode, we can divide the supernodes into two equal subsets of
size 2 ( q – 1 ) / 2 that are interconnected as a complete bipartite graph.
15.14. Pruned folded hypercubes
Consider a folded q-cube with q even. Retain all diametral links and remove half of the other
links, say those corresponding to Dimensions q/2 through q–1.
a.
b.
c.
What is the diameter of such a pruned folded q-cube?
What is its bisection width?
Describe a shortest-path routing algorithm for this architecture.
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
320
d. Devise an efficient scheme for emulating a complete q-cube on this architecture.
e. How do the above change if a fraction h/q (0 < h < q/ 2), rather than 1/2, of the other links
are pruned?
15.15. Möbius cubes
a.
b.
Find the exact diameter of a q-dimensional Möbius cube, as defined in Section 15.6. Is the
diameter different for 0- and 1-Möbius cubes?
Define a Möbius-cube-connected cycles architecture in a manner similar to CCC. Does
this architecture offer any advantage over CCC?
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Bhuy84]
[Born98]
[Cull95]
[ElAm91]
[Esfa91]
[Kwai96]
[Kwai97]
[Leig92]
[Meli93]
[Ohri95]
Bhuyan, L., and D. P. Agrawal, “Generalized Hypercube and Hyperbus Structures for a Computer
Network,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 33, No. 4, pp. 323–333, April 1984.
Bornstein, C. et al., “On the Bisection Width and Expansion of Butterfly Networks,” Proc. Joint Int.
Conf. Parallel Processing & Symp. Parallel Distributed Systems, 1998, pp. 144–150.
Cull, P., and S. M. Larson, “The Möbius Cubes,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 44, No. 5, pp. 647–659,
May 1995.
El-Amawy, A., and S. Latifi, “Properties and Performance of Folded Hypercubes,” IEEE Trans.
Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 31–42, January 1991.
Esfahanian, A. -H., L. M. Ni, and B. E. Sagan, “The Twisted N-Cube with Application to Multiprocessing,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 40, No. 1, pp. 88–93, January 1991.
Kwai, D. -M., and B. Parhami, “A Generalization of Hypercubic Networks Based on Their Chordal
Ring Structures,” Information Processing Letters, Vol. 6, No. 4, pp. 469–477, 1996.
Kwai, D. -M., and B. Parhami, “A Class of Fixed-Degree Cayley-Graph Interconnection Networks
Derived by Pruning k-ary n-cubes,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1997, pp. 92–95.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Meliksetian, D. S., and C. Y. R. Chen, “Optimal Routing Algorithm and the Diameter of the
Cube-Connected Cycles,” IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 4, No. 10, pp. 1172–1178,
October 1993.
Ohring, S. R., M. Ibel, S. K. Das, and M. J. Kumar, “On Generalized Fat Trees,” Proc. 9th Int. Parallel
Processing Symp., 1995, pp. 37–44.
16
A Sampler of Other
Networks
In this chapter, we study several other classes of interconnection architectures,
focusing in particular on hybrid or hierarchical schemes that combine features
from two or more different architectures or are based on multilevel application
of the same connectivity. The interconnection networks listed in this chapter by
no means exhaust the space of possibilities. As this chapter is being written, new
types of networks continue to appear in technical journals and conference
proceedings at an astonishing rate. The novelty, usefulness, and impact of these
interconnection architectures are often not immediately discernible but rather
need time to be recognized or disputed. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
16.1. Performance parameters for networks
16.2. Star and pancake networks
16.3. Ring-based networks
16.4. Composite or hybrid networks
16.5. Hierarchical (multilevel) networks
16.6. Multistage interconnection networks
321
This page intentionally left blank.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
323
16.1. PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS FOR NETWORKS
In our discussions of various architectures thus far, we have taken the network diameter
as an indicator of its communication latency. However, network diameter, though important,
does not always provide an accurate measure of communication performance. Under light
loads (so that congestion and the resulting queuing delays can be ignored) and with
shortest-path routing, network diameter might be considered an accurate indicator of
communication delay. However, even in such cases, the average internode distance is a better
measure. In other contexts, such as with wormhole routing or when the network operates
close to saturation, the diameter or average internode distance have at best secondary roles.
The bisection width of a network, or more generally its bisection bandwidth, which
incorporates link capacities as well as their number, provides a rough measure of its
capability in handling random message traffic. But bisection (band)width, like network
diameter, is incomplete in itself.
The main reason for the introduction of so many different interconnection networks is
that no single network provides optimal performance under all conditions. Each network has
its advantages and drawbacks in terms of cost, latency, and bandwidth. We thus need to
understand the interplay of these parameters in order to select a suitable interconnection
architecture or to evaluate the relative merits of two or more networks (or parallel architectures). In the rest of this section, we introduce some concepts that are important in this regard.
Let us begin by examining the interplay between the node degree d and the network
diameter D. Given a certain number p of processors with very simple computational
capabilities, the node degree might be viewed as an indicator of system cost. For a first-order
approximation of cost, we can assume that node cost grows linearly with its degree. In other
words, the cost of a network with uniform degree-d nodes is proportional to the total number
pd/2 of links. Given p nodes of known degree d, we can interconnect them in different ways,
leading to networks of varying diameters. An age-old question in graph theory is determining
the best way to interconnect p nodes of degree d in order to minimize the diameter of the
resulting graph. This question is obviously important for parallel processing as well, although
from our viewpoint, the interconnection complexity, as measured, e.g., by the area required
for VLSI layout, is also important.
Let u s ignore the interconnection complexity and focus only on minimizing the diameter
for now. The problem of constructing a network of minimal diameter, given p nodes of degree
d, or alternatively, building a network with the largest possible number of nodes for a given
node degree d and diameter D, is quite difficult and no general method is available for its
solution. However, some useful bounds can be established that can serve as benchmarks for
determining how close a given network comes to being the absolute best in terms of diameter.
A diameter-D regular digraph (directed graph having the same in-degree and out-degree
d for all nodes) can have no more than 1 + d + d 2 + ... + d D nodes, where d i is the maximum
number of new nodes that can be placed at distance i from a given node. This yields a lower
bound on the diameter of a p-node digraph of degree d, which is known as Moore’s bound:
324
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
A Moore digraph is a digraph for which D is equal to the above bound. It is known that the
only possible Moore digraphs are rings (d = 1, D = p–1) and complete graphs (d = p – 1,
D = 1); but there are near-optimal graphs that come close to Moore’s bound and are good
enough in practice.
A similar bound can be derived for undirected graphs. The largest possible undirected
graph of diameter D and node degree d has no more than 1 + d + d(d – 1) + d(d – 1)² + ... +
d(d – 1) D–1 nodes. This expression is obtained by noting that any given node can have d
neighbors, each of which can in turn have d – 1 other neighbors, and so on. This leads to
Moore’s bound on the diameter of a p-node undirected graph of degree d:
For d = 2, the number p of nodes satisfies p ≤ 1 + 2D or D ≥ (p– 1)/2. This diameter lower
bound is achieved by the ring network with an odd number of nodes.
For d = 3, we have D ≥ log2 [(p + 2)/3] or p ≤ 3 × 2D – 2. A diameter of D = 1 allows
us to have 4 nodes and leads to the complete graph K4 . The first interesting or nontrivial case
is for D = 2, which allows at most p = 10 nodes. The 10-node Petersen graph, depicted in
Fig. 16.1, matches this lower bound with its diameter of D = 2. Again, even though for larger
networks, Moore’s bound cannot be matched, there exist networks whose diameters come
very close to this bound. For example, both the shuffle–exchange and CCC networks,
composed of degree-3 nodes, have asymptotically optimal diameters within constant factors.
For d = 4, Moore’s diameter lower bound is log3[(p + 1)/2]. Thus, mesh and torus
networks are far from optimal in terms of their diameters, whereas the butterfly network is
asymptotically optimal within a constant factor.
Finally, for a q-cube with p = 2 q and d = q, Moore’s lower bound yields D = Ω(q/log q).
The diameter D = q of a q-cube is thus asymptotically a factor of log q worse than the optimal.
To summarize, for a given node degree, Moore’s bound establishes the lowest possible
diameter that we can hope to achieve. Coming within a constant factor of this lower bound
is usually good enough in practice; the smaller the constant factor, the better.
Figure 16.1. The 10-node Petersen graph.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
325
As stated earlier, the average internode distance, ∆ , defined as the average of the path
lengths between all of the p(p – 1) possible source–destination pairs, is perhaps more
important than the diameter D. The distance between two nodes can be defined in different
ways, leading to various definitions for ∆ (e.g., shortest distance, shortest distance in the
presence of certain faults, distance according to some routing algorithm). Even though it is
possible to construct graphs for which ∆ and D are quite different, for most networks of
practical interest, ∆ and D are intimately related, e.g., ∆ is a constant factor smaller than D.
In these cases, using the diameter D in lieu of the average distance ∆ for comparing various
networks would not be problematic.
Another important parameter for an interconnection network is its bisection width,
which is a measure of the available network bandwidth for communication-intensive
applications with random data exchange patterns. For example, in sorting, it is possible to
initially arrange the data such that all data items must cross the bisection in order to appear
in sorted order. Hence, the bisection width of a network establishes a lower bound on how
fast sorting can be done in the worst case.
Unlike network diameter, which is related to the number of nodes and node degree
through Moore bounds, the number of nodes or links in a network has no relation to its
bisection width. It is fairly easy to construct large, dense networks with very small bisections.
Thus, determining the bisection width of a network is not always a simple matter.
Consider, for example, the chordal ring network in Fig. 16.2 in which each Node i is
connected to Nodes i ± 1 and i ± 11 (mod 32). At first glance, it appears that the bisection
produced by drawing a straight line leads to the fewest number of links being cut. The heavy
dotted line, shown in Fig. 16.2, is one such bisection that cuts through 24 links. Hence, it is
tempting to conclude that the bisection width of this network is 24. However, one can bisect
this particular network by cutting only 8 links. Supplying the details is left as an exercise.
Showing that a network can be bisected by cutting through l links only establishes an upper
bound on, rather than the exact value of, the bisection width. Finding the exact bisection
width may require much more work.
The VLSI layout area required by an interconnection network is intimately related to its
bisection width B. If B wires must cross the bisection in a 2D layout and wire separation is
to be 1 unit, then the smallest dimension of the VLSI chip will be at least B units. The chip
area will therefore be Ω (B ² ) units. Networks with larger bisections are thus more likely to
consume greater chip area in their VLSI realizations. Hence, whereas p-node 2D mesh or
torus networks can be laid out in linear space in terms of p, the best layout of a p-node
hypercube requires quadratic space.
As suggested earlier, the total number pd/2 of links (edges) is a very crude measure of
interconnection network cost. With this measure, constant-degree networks have linear or
O(p) cost and the p-node hypercube has O(p log p) cost. For VLSI implementation, the
hardware cost depends not just on the number of links but also on their lengths when the
architecture is laid out in two dimensions. In general, there is no simple way to predict the
VLSI area cost of an interconnection network short of devising an optimal layout for it.
The longest wire required in VLSI layout also affects the performance of the network
in terms of speed. For example, it can be shown that any 2D layout of a p-node hypercube
Because the length of the longest wire grows with the
requires wires of length
system size, the per-node performance is bound to degrade for larger systems. This implies
that speed-up will be sublinear as we scale to larger systems.
326
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 16.2. A network whose bisection width is not as large at it appears.
Composite figures of merit can be used to compare different interconnection networks.
For example, it has been suggested that dD, the product of node degree and network diameter,
is a good measure for comparing networks of the same size, as it is a rough indicator of the
cost of unit performance (d is proportional to cost, 1/D represents performance). This
measure has its limitations, particularly when applied to bus-based systems. If the p
processors in a parallel system are interconnected by a shared bus, then d = D = ∆ = 1, leading
to the best possible value for dD. However, such a system is clearly not the best under all
conditions.
Other network parameters can be defined with regard to robustness or fault tolerance,
which is particularly desirable for large networks in view of the inevitability of faults in some
network components. For example, if there are at least k node-disjoint (edge-disjoint) paths
between any pair of nodes, then k – 1 node (edge) failures can be tolerated. Such a system
is called k-fault-tolerant. The fault diameter of a network, defined as its diameter in the
presence of certain types of faults, is also a useful indicator of its resilience.
16.2. STAR AND PANCAKE NETWORKS
A hypercube has logarithmic diameter, which is suboptimal, given its logarithmic node
degree. Butterfly, CCC, and other hypercubic networks, discussed in the previous chapter,
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
327
have optimal diameters (to within a constant factor), given their fixed node degrees. However,
the latter networks do not have large bisections and, thus, may have a poorer performance
than the hypercube in applications where very high network bandwidth is required. A
possible compromise is to construct a network with sublogarithmic, but nonconstant, node
degree. Such constructions may lead to a network whose node degree does not grow as fast
as that of a hypercube, while still providing good network bandwidth.
Star networks provide a good example. In a q-dimensional star network, or q-star, there
are p = q ! (q factorial) nodes. Each node is labeled with a string x1 x 2 . . . xq , where
(x 1, x 2 , . . . , x q ) is a permutation of {1, 2, . . . , q}. Node x1x 2 . . . xi . . . xq is connected to
x1 x 2 . . . x1 . . . xq for each i (note that x1 and xi are interchanged). For example, in the 4-star
depicted in Fig. 16.3, Node 1234 is connected to Nodes 2134, 3214, and 4231. Because there
are q – 1 possible choices for i, the node degree of a q-star with q! nodes is q – 1. When the
ith symbol is switched with x1 , the corresponding link is referred to as a Dimension-i link.
So the q – 1 dimensions of a q-star are labeled 2 through q, as indicated on some of the links
in Fig. 16.3.
The diameter of a q-star can be easily upper bounded through the following routing
algorithm. The routing algorithm resembles dimension-order routing on the hypercube in
that the various symbols in the node label are adjusted in dimension order. Consider, for
example, routing a message from the source node 154362 to the destination node 346215 in
a 6-star:
Dimension-2 link to
Dimension-6 link to
Dimension-2 link to
Dimension-5 link to
Dimension-2 link to
Dimension-4 link to
1
5
2
1
6
2
3
5
1
1
2
2
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
6
6
6
6
1
1
1
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
Source node
Last symbol now adjusted
Last two symbols now adjusted
Last three symbols now adjusted
Figure 16.3. The four-dimensional star graph.
328
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Dimension-2 link to 6 3 4 2 1 5
Dimension-3 link to 4 3 6 2 1 5 Last four symbols now adjusted
Dimension-2 link to 3 4 6 2 1 5 Destination node
Based on the above routing algorithm, it is obvious that D ≤ 2q – 3: We need two steps to
adjust each of the last q – 2 symbols, plus possibly one final exchange of symbols 1 and 2.
It is easily shown that the diameter is in fact exactly equal to 2 q – 3, making the above simple
routing algorithm optimal with respect to the worst-case distance. Note, however, that the
algorithm does not always route a message via a shortest path.
By Stirling’s approximation, a q-star contains p = q! ≈ e –q qq
processors. Thus,
ln p ≈ –q + (q + 1/2) ln q + ln(2 π)/2 = Θ (q log q )
From the above, we find q = Θ (log p/log log p). Thus, both the node degree and the diameter
of the star graph are sublogarithmic in the number p of processors. In fact, the star graph is
asymptotically optimal to within a constant factor with regard to Moore’s diameter lower
bound.
Routing on star graphs is simple and reasonably efficient. However, virtually all other
algorithms are (much) more complex than the corresponding algorithms on a hypercube.
This is in part related to the size and structure of a star graph. The number q! of nodes is
never a power of 2. The q-star does have a recursive structure in that it is composed of q
copies of a (q–1)-star (the four 3-star subgraphs of the 4-star in Fig. 16.3 are easily identified).
However, such a nonuniform recursion makes the development of recursive or divide-andconquer algorithms somewhat more difficult.
Because the node degree of a star network grows with its size, making it nonscalable, a
degree-3 version of it, known as star-connected cycles (SCC), has been proposed [Lati93].
Figure 16.4 depicts a four-dimensional SCC network where each node is labeled by a pair
(x, y) denoting the cycle number x and the dimension number y (2 ≤ y ≤ q ). Of course, in this
particular example, the node degree is not reduced relative to the original star graph, but this
Figure 16.4. The four-dimensional star-connected cycles network.
329
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
is the largest example that one can draw without clutter rendering the diagram incomprehensible. The diameter of SCC is about the same as a comparably sized cube-connected cycles
network [Lati93]. However, the routing algorithm for SCC is somewhat more complex. Also,
whereas a CCC for which the cycle size is a power of 2 allows one-to-one node mapping in
the emulation of a hypercube, the number q!( q –1) of nodes in an SCC allows no such direct
correspondence to a star graph.
Like the star graph, the pancake network also has p = q! nodes that are labeled by the
various permutations of the symbols {1, 2, . . . , q}. In the q -pancake, Node
is connected to Nodes
for each i
is flipped, like a pancake). Routing in pancake networks is very similar to routing in star
graphs. Denoting the connection that results from flipping the first i symbols (2 ≤ i ≤ q) as
the dimension-i link, we have for example
Dimension-2 link to
Dimension-6 link to
Dimension-4 link to
Dimension-2 link to
1
5
2
4
3
5
1
6
3
4
4
4
3
6
6
3
3
4
2
2
6
6
1
1
1
2
2
5
5
5
Source node
Last two symbols now adjusted
Last four symbols now adjusted
Destination node
In the above example, we were lucky in that multiple symbols could be adjusted with some
flips. Generally, however, we need two flips per symbol; one flip to bring the symbol to the
front from its current position i, and another one to send it to its desired position j. Thus, like
the star graph, the diameter of the q-pancake is 2 q – 3.
One can obviously define the connectivities of the q! nodes labeled by the permutations
of {1, 2, . . . , q } in other ways. In a rotator graph [Corb92], [Ponn94], Node
is connected to
(obtained by a left rotation of the
first i symbols) for each i in the range 2 ≤ i ≤ q. The node degree of a q -rotator is q – 1, as
in star and pancake graphs, but its diameter and average internode distance are smaller.
Except for SCC, all of the networks introduced in this section represent special cases
of a class of networks known as Cayley graphs. A Cayley graph is characterized by a set
Λ of node labels and a set Γ of generators, each defining one neighbor of a Node x. The ith
generator γ i can be viewed as a rule for permuting the node label to get the label of its
“Dimension-i ” neighbor. For example, the star graph has q – 1 generators that correspond
to interchanging the first and ith symbols in the node label. Cayley graphs are node-symmetric,
a property that is important for developing simple and efficient parallel algorithms. Indexpermutation graphs, a generalization of Cayley graphs in which the node labels are not
restricted to consist of distinct symbols [Yeh98], can lead to other interesting and useful
interconnection networks.
16.3. RING-BASED NETWORKS
The ring interconnection scheme has proven quite effective in certain distributed and
small-scale parallel architectures [Berm95] in view of its low node degree and simple routing
algorithm. However, the diameter of a simple ring would become too large for effective
utilization in a large parallel system. As a result, multilevel and hybrid architectures, utilizing
330
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 16.5. A 64-node ring-of-rings architecture composed of eight 8-node local rings and one
second- level ring.
rings at various levels of a hierarchically structured network or as a basis for synthesizing
richer interconnection schemes, have been proposed.
The multilevel ring structure of KSR1’s (Kendall Square Research) interconnection
network [Kend92] and the QuickRing Network of Apple Computer [Vale94] are good
examples of the hierarchical approach. As shown in the two-level ring structure of Fig. 16.5,
each node is a member of a local ring and communicates with remote rings via a second-level
ring. Of course, there is no reason to limit the second-level ring to just one; in the extreme
case of the ith node in each local ring being interconnected by a second-level ring, the
architecture becomes a 2D torus. Similarly, the number of levels can be increased beyond 2.
With 8-node rings connected into a three-level structure, e.g., we get an architecture with 8³
= 512 nodes and a diameter of 4 + 4 + 4 = 12.
The chordal ring architecture, in which each node is connected to its ring neighbors as
well as to one or more distant nodes through skip links or chords (see, e.g., the references in
[Mans94]), and optical multichannel ring networks with variable skip capability in connection with wormhole routing [Reic93] provide examples of the second approach. Such skip
links, chords, or “express channels” reduce the network diameter at the expense of increased
node degree. Because the basic ring structure is preserved, many nice features of a simple
ring, including ease of routing and deadlock avoidance, carry over to these enhanced ring
architectures.
Figure 16.6 shows a simple eight-node unidirectional ring as well as two eight-node
chordal rings with chords, or forward skip links, of length 3 at the top right and of lengths 2
and 4 at the bottom left, added to each node. More generally, the node in- and out-degrees
in a chordal ring may be g + 1, with g skip links of lengths s1 , s2, . . . , s g (satisfying 1 < s 1 <
s 2 <. . . < s g < p ) originating from each of the p nodes. For our subsequent discussion, it is
convenient to view 1 and p as the 0th and (g+l)th skip distances. Thus, s0 corresponds to the
ring edges and sg+1 to a node being connected to itself. We thus have a total of g+2 skips
satisfying
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
331
Figure 16.6. Unidirectional ring, two chordal rings, and node connectivity in general.
which connect a Node x to Nodes x + si mod p, 0 ≤ i ≤ g + 1. Because all node index
expressions are evaluated modulo p, we will omit the mod-p designation in the following.
A simple greedy routing algorithm is applicable to chordal rings. A message going from
Node x to Node y, which has to travel y – x mod p nodes forward, takes the longest skip that
will not lead past the destination node. To implement this scheme, the routing tag y – x mod
p is attached to the message by the source node. Each node then sends the message over the
longest skip link that is smaller than the routing tag and decrements the routing tag by the
length of that skip.
Based on the above greedy routing algorithm, an upper bound for the diameter of a
– 1 times
chordal ring is easily obtained. Note that the skip s i will be taken at most
because of the greedy strategy of the routing algorithm. Thus, the diameter of a chordal ring
satisfies
For example, in the case of the two chordal rings shown in Fig. 16.6, the above diameter
upper bound yields
The diameter of either chordal ring is in fact 3.
Determining the exact diameter of chordal rings, or selecting skip distances in such a
way that the diameter is minimized, are challenging combinatorial problems. Thus, we base
the following analysis on the assumption that the diameter is the same as the upper bound
332
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Differentiating the upper-bound formula with respect to each skip distance si
and equating the resulting expressions with zero leads to the optimal skip distances
For example, with p = 8 nodes and g = 1 skip link per node, the above analysis suggests that
the optimal skip distance is 81/2 ≈ 3. With p = 8 and 2 skip links per node, the optimal distances
are 8 1/3 = 2 and 8 2/3 = 4. Of course, such an analysis is at best approximate. It works nicely
in some cases and gives optimal results. In other cases, the “optimal” results obtained as
above are not even close to the best possible. This is related to the combinatorial nature of
the problem and the restriction of the parameter values to whole numbers.
Note that the greedy routing algorithm presented above, though reasonable and nearoptimal in many cases, does not route messages via shortest paths. In fact, the route selected
by the algorithm may be far from the shortest one available. Take the skips s0 = 1, s1 = 10,
and s 2 = 12 as an example. To route from Node x to Node x + 20, the greedy algorithm will
choose a skip of 12 followed by 8 steps on the ring edges, while the shortest path has a length
of just 2.
Chordal rings are node symmetric. The optimal chordal rings derived as above are very
similar, though not isomorphic, to ( g +l)-dimensional torus networks. Figure 16.7 shows the
top eight-node chordal ring of Fig. 16.6, as well as a nine-node chordal ring with a skip of
s 1 = 3, as toruslike structures. The toruslike network on the right side of Fig. 16.7, in which
the row wraparound links are connected to the following row as opposed to the same row,
are known as twisted torus networks. The ILLIAC IV computer, one of the earliest parallel
machines built, used the 8 × 8 bidirectional version of this network.
The node-symmetric chordal ring architecture is wasteful in that it includes longdistance, medium-distance, and short-distance links for every node. In a manner similar to
deriving the cube-connected cycles architecture from the hypercube, one can distribute the
various skips among a sequence of nodes, each having only one skip link.
Assume that the p ring nodes are split into p/g groups of g consecutive nodes, where g
divides p. The jth node in each group, 0 ≤ j ≤ g – 1, has the skip link s g–j in addition to the
ring link s0 . We assume that each skip distance si , except for s0 , is a multiple of g. This will
ensure that the network is regular with respect to the nodes’ in-degrees as well as their
out-degrees. Figure 16.8 shows the structure of the resulting network, called periodically
Figure 16.7. Chordal rings redrawn to show their similarity to torus networks.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
333
Figure 16.8. Periodically regular chordal ring.
regular chordal ring [Parh95], as well as an example with g = 2 and skip distances s 1 = 2
and s 2 = 4.
A variant of the greedy routing algorithm, in which we first route a packet to the head
(first node) of a group via the ring edges, and then continue in a pure greedy fashion, works
nicely for PRC rings and yields good results on the average. Routing from Node 1 to Node
7 in the example PRC ring of Fig. 16.8 would take the packet to Node 2 (the head node of
Group 1), then to Node 6, and finally to Node 7. As another example, a packet sent from
Node 1 to Node 5 goes through Nodes 2 and 3. The first example path above is a shortest
path, while the second one is nonminimal.
Interesting optimality results have been obtained for PRC rings. For example, it is known
that optimal logarithmic diameter is obtained for g = Θ (log p).
Figure 16.9. VLSI layout for a 64-node periodically regular chordal ring.
334
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Area-efficient VLSI layouts are known for PRC rings, as exemplified by Fig. 16.9. Note
that most of the wraparound links in the layout have been deleted to avoid clutter. These long
links can be replaced by shorter ones through standard folding of the layout if desired.
Both chordal rings and PRC rings have bidirectional variants with similar properties to
the unidirectional versions discussed in this section. As an example of bidirectional PRC
rings, consider the 32-node PRC ring depicted in Fig. 16.10. Here, the group size or period
is g = 4, with the skips s 1 = nil, s2 = 2, s3 = 4, and s4 = 8. In this example, the nil or nonexistent
skips are necessitated by our desire to choose all skips to be powers of 2 and the fact that
there are only three powers of 2 that are less than 32 and multiples of g = 4.
More generally, providing nil skips for some of the nodes in each group constitutes an
important mechanism for performance–cost trade-offs that are identical in nature to those
Figure 16.10. A PRC ring redrawn as a butterfly- or ADM-like network.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
335
offered by the q-DCCC architecture when rings have more than q nodes. Note, for example,
that removing the longest skips from the layout of Fig. 16.9 reduces its area requirement
substantially, at the cost of increased network diameter.
Figure 16.10 has been drawn in such a way as to highlight the similarity of PRC rings
built with power-of-2 skip distances to butterfly and augmented data manipulator networks.
This similarity can be exploited for developing efficient algorithms for the practically
important subclass of PRC ring networks with power-of-2 size, group length, and skip
distances. For example, an ascend- or descend-type hypercube algorithm can be efficiently
emulated on such a PRC ring. In the network of Fig. 16.10, nodes whose labels differ in
either of the least-significant 2 bits communicate via ring edges, while those that are distance
4, 8, or 16 away communicate via skip links, either directly or through intermediate nodes.
Details of the emulation method are very similar to those of the CCC emulating the hypercube
(Section 15.4).
16.4. COMPOSITE OR HYBRID NETWORKS
Most of the networks that we have considered thus far can be classified as “pure”
networks, meaning that a single set of connectivity rules governs the entire network.
Composite or hybrid networks, on the other hand, combine the connectivity rules from two
(or more) pure networks in order to achieve some advantages from each structure, derive
network sizes that are unavailable with either pure architecture, or realize any number of
performance/cost benefits.
Two or more networks can be combined in many different ways. In this section, we
consider only network composition by Cartesian product operation, in view of its many
interesting properties. The (Cartesian) product of networks or graphs was defined in Section
13.3, where it was used as a tool to prove that the hypercube network contains meshes and
tori as subgraphs. Let us focus, for concreteness, on the product G = (V, E) of two
graphs/networks G' = (V', E') and G" = ( V", E" ), with its node and edge sets defined as
V = {v'v" | v' ∈ V', v" ∈ V" }, where v'v" is shorthand for (v', v")
E = { ( u'u", v'v") | u'v' ∈ E' and u" = v" or u"v" ∈ E" and u' = v' }
From the above definition, we see that there are two classes of edges in G, which we call G'
edges ( u'v' ∈ E' and u" = v" ) and G" edges (u"v" ∈ E" and u' = v' ). Examples of product
graphs were provided in Fig. 13.4. The product graph G defined as above has p nodes, where
p = | V | = |V'| × |V "| = p'p"
The product operation on graphs is associative and commutative. Thus, the structure of a
product graph is uniquely specified by specifying the component graphs. When the component graphs of a product graph are all identical, a homogeneous product network or a power
network results.
Topological properties and many algorithms for product graphs are derivable from those
of its component graphs. For example, the node degree, diameter, and average internode
distance of G are the sums of the respective parameters for G' and G" (d = d' + d", D = D'
+ D" , ∆ = ∆' + ∆" ). As a result of the above, if both G' and G" have node degrees or diameters
336
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
that are (sub)logarithmic in terms of their sizes p' and p', the product graph G will also have
a (sub)logarithmic node degree or diameter in terms of its size p.
Given optimal or efficient routing algorithms for G' and G", the following two-phase
routing algorithm will be optimal or efficient for routing from u'u" to v'v" in the product
graph G:
Phase 1. Route from u'u" to v'u" via G' edges using the routing algorithm for G'
Phase 2. Route from v'u" to v'v" via G" edges using the routing algorithm for G"
The above algorithm, which may be called the G'-first routing algorithm, is a generalized
version of row-first routing in 2D meshes. If the routing algorithms for the component graphs
are deadlock-free, so is the above two-phase routing algorithm for G.
Similarly, broadcasting from a node v'v" to all nodes in G can be done by first
broadcasting to all nodes xv", x ∈ V', using a broadcasting algorithm for G' and then
broadcasting from each node xv" to all nodes xy, y ∈ V", using a broadcasting algorithm for
G".
Semigroup and parallel prefix computations can be similarly performed by using the
respective algorithms for the component networks. If the component graphs are Hamiltonian,
then the p' × p" torus will be a subgraph of G. This allows us to use any torus algorithm to
perform computations such as matrix multiplication, sorting, and the like. In the case of
sorting, it is possible to emulate, e.g., the shearsort algorithm for a p' × p" mesh on the product
network. The row and column sorts required in shearsort can be performed by using any
available sorting algorithm for the component graphs G' and G".
Note that product graphs allow us to synthesize networks of virtually any desired size.
For example, the product of a 3-cube (8 nodes) and a 4-star (24 nodes) will have 192 nodes,
whereas no pure hypercube or star network can match this size exactly or even approximately.
As an example of a product network that we have not examined previously, consider the
product of two binary trees, yielding a network known as mesh-connected trees [Efe96].
Note that this network is different from, and higher-performing than, the mesh of trees
network studied in Section 12.6. Examples of the two networks are shown side by side in
Fig. 16.11. It is clear from Fig. 16.11 that a mesh of trees network with an m × m base (3m ²
Figure 16.11. Mesh of trees compared with mesh-connected trees.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
337
– 2m processors) is a subgraph of the mesh-connected trees network with (2m – 1)²
processors; for large m, the latter network has roughly 4/3 as many processors as the former.
If instead of binary trees, we use X-trees as the component networks, the resulting
product graph will contain the square torus of the same size as a subgraph. This is easily
proven by showing that a complete X-tree network is Hamiltonian. Thus, the mesh of X-trees
network can run any torus algorithm with no slowdown.
A layered network is one in which the nodes can be partitioned into numbered layers,
with links connecting only nodes that belong to adjacent layers. Binary trees, butterfly
networks, and mesh of trees networks are examples of layered networks. The layered cross
product of two l-layer networks G' and G" is another l-layer network G whose nodes in Layer
i are labeled (u'i, u"i ), where u'i and u"i are Layer-i nodes in G' and G", respectively. A Layer-i
node (u'i , u"i ) is connected to a Layer-(i +l) node ( u'i+1 , u"i +1 ) in G iff u'i is connected to u'i+1 in
G' and u"i is connected to u"i +1 in G". As an example, the butterfly network can be shown to
be the layered cross product of two binary trees. The notion of layered cross product is
helpful, among other things, for producing rectilinear planar layouts for interconnection
networks [Even97].
16.5. HIERARCHICAL (MULTILEVEL) NETWORKS
Hierarchical or multilevel interconnection networks can be defined in a variety of ways.
In this section, we consider hierarchical composition of networks through recursive substitution, i.e., replacing each node of a network with another network. Figure 16.12 shows an
example, where a top-level 3×3 mesh network is expanded by replacing each of its nine
nodes with a 3×3 mesh. In this particular example, the top- and bottom-level networks
happen to be identical, but this does not have to be the case in general. The CCC network is
an example of this more general type where the top-level network is a q-cube and the
bottom-level network is a q-ring.
To fully characterize a hierarchical interconnection network derived by recursive
substitution, we need to know the network size and topology at various levels of the hierarchy
as well as the rules by which Level-i links are to be assigned to the nodes of Level-(i –1)
networks. In the example of Fig. 16.12, the Level-2 network is a 3×3 mesh, with each node
Figure 16.12. The mesh of meshes network exhibits greater modularity than a mesh.
338
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 16.13. Hierarchical or multilevel bus network.
having two to four links. The assignment of the NEWS links of this Level-2 network to the
nodes of the 3 × 3 Level-1 network is shown in the upper left corner of Fig. 16.12. If the size
of the Level-(i–1) network is greater than the node degree of the Level- i network, then
increase in node degree can be limited to only 1 for each recursion level. This results in
modular networks with fairly small node degrees.
Motivations for designing hierarchical interconnection networks include obtaining
greater modularity, lower cost, finer scalability, and better fault tolerance. The particular
hierarchical composition scheme an component networks used depend on the types of
communications that are expected from target applications. For example, the hierarchical
bus scheme, exemplified by Fig. 16.13, might be quite efficient when the bulk of interprocessor communications are within the same low-level cluster, with occasional remote communications to distant clusters through higher-level buses which introduce higher delays and
have lower aggregate bandwidth. The same network, however, becomes hopelessly congested under heavy random traffic.
Numerous hierarchical combinations of known interconnection networks have been
proposed over the past decade. Unifying theories that allow us to investigate such networks
in classes, rather than as one-of-a-kind structures, are emerging [Yeh98].
16.6. MULTISTAGE INTERCONNECTION NETWORKS
Most of the networks that we have studied thus far belong to the class of direct networks,
meaning that processors are directly connected to other processors via their communication
links. Multistage interconnection networks (MINs), by contrast, connect the processors
indirectly via multiple layers of intermediate nodes or switches. We have already seen several
examples of multistage interconnection networks. In Section 6.6, we introduced the butterfly
network as a mechanism for interconnecting processors and memory modules. Subsequently,
in Chapter 15, we looked at butterfly and related networks in some depth. The butterfly, or
the equivalent shuffle–exchange or omega network, is known as the indirect cube (cubic)
network because it provides the hypercube connectivities between its input and output ports
indirectly.
Bene networks, composed of back-to-back butterflies, were introduced as examples of
rearrangeable permutation networks near the end of Section 15.2. Even though any desired
permutation can be routed through a Bene network without any conflict, the required switch
setups for each permutation must be computed off-line. In practice, we would like to be able
to route messages using an on-line algorithm. A MIN that can determine the path of a message
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
339
on the fly, using simple computational steps within the switches, is known as a self-routing
MIN. The butterfly network is a self-routing MIN, but it is not a permutation network. The
Bene network can realize any permutation, but is not self-routing.
A natural question is whether there exist self-routing permutation networks. The answer
to this question is positive. In what follows, we focus on realizing full permutations, meaning
that every input port must be connected to a distinct output port.
A full permutation can be realized via sorting of the destination addresses. Thus, any
p-sorter of the type discussed in Chapter 7, when suitably augmented to carry along the
message bodies with the key headers, can be viewed as a self-routing MIN that is capable of
routing any p × p permutation. For example, we saw that a Batcher p-sorter consists of Θ (p
log 2 p) comparators, arranged in Θ (log2 p) levels. Because the line labels in a p-sorter are
(log 2 p)-bit binary numbers, a bit-level complexity analysis is needed for complete fairness.
At the bit level, these networks have Θ(p log 3 p) cost and Θ (log 3 p) delay, assuming that the
(log 2 p)-bit destination addresses are supplied in parallel to each cell, where they are
compared by a simple ripple-type comparator having Θ(log p) cost and Θ (log p) delay. When
the inputs are supplied bit-serially, the cost and delay drop to Θ(p log2 p ) and Θ (log 2 p),
respectively.
These results have been improved by Batcher himself and others. For example, Al-Hajery and Batcher [AlHa93] have presented bitonic sorting networks that have Θ(p log p)
bit-level cost and Θ(log 2 p ) bit-level delay. Sorting by such networks requires that the items
being sorted pass through a (log 2 p)-stage bit-level network log 2 p times. Because each key
is log 2 p bits long, successive passes are easily pipelined with no interference. Cheng and
Chen [Chen96] have presented a design based on binary radix sort that uses log2 p stages of
single-bit sorters that require a delay of log2 p levels and cost of p log 2 p (bit-parallel) or p
(bit-serial). For parallel inputs, this design leads to O(p log2 p ) bit-level cost and O(log 2 p )
bit-level delay. With serial inputs, the cost and delay become O(p log p) and O(log 2 p),
respectively (Fig. 16.14).
Below is a partial listing of some of the important types of multistage interconnection
networks, and associated terminology, for ready reference:
•
•
Augmented data manipulator (ADM): Also known as unfolded PM2I (Fig. 15.12).
Banyan: Any MIN with a unique path between any input and any output (e.g., butterfly).
Figure 16.14. Example of sorting on a binary radix sort network.
340
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Baseline: Butterfly network with nodes labeled differently; see, e.g., [Leig92], p, 735.
Bene Back-to-back butterfly networks, sharing one column (Figs. 15.9 and 15.10).
Bidelta: A MIN that is a delta network in either direction.
Butterfly: Also known as unfolded hypercube (Figs. 6.9, 15.4, and 15.5).
Data manipulator: Same as ADM, but with switches in a column restricted to same
state.
Delta: Any MIN for which the outputs of each switch have distinct labels (say 0 and 1
for 2 × 2 switches) and the path label, composed of concatenating the switch output
labels, leading from an arbitrary input to a given output depends only on the output.
Flip: Reverse of the omega network (i.e., roles of inputs and outputs interchanged).
Indirect cube: Same as butterfly or omega.
Omega: Multistage shuffle–exchange network; isomorphic to butterfly (Fig. 15.19).
Permutation: Any network that can realize all possible permutations (e.g., Bene
Rearrangeable: Same as permutation network.
Reverse baseline: Baseline network, with the roles of inputs and outputs interchanged.
PROBLEMS
16.1. Petersen graph
a. Find the average internode distance in the 10-node Petersen graph of Fig. 16.1.
b. Find the bisection width of the 10-node Petersen graph.
c. Express the connectivity rules of the 10-node Petersen graph in terms of the 5-bit node IDs
given in Fig. 16.1.
16.2. Swapped networks
a. Consider a 100-node graph composed of 10 copies of the 10-node Petersen graph (clusters)
in which each node has a two-digit decimal label xy (0 ≤ x, y ≤ 9), with Node xy, i.e., Node
y of Cluster x, connected to Node yx by an additional link; thus, the node degree becomes
4. Node xx does not have an intercluster link. Determine the diameter of this network and
compare it with Moore’s bound.
b. Compare the cost and performance of the network of part (a) to the product of two Petersen
networks.
c. We can generalize the construction of part (a) to any p-node graph to obtain a p 2 -node
graph. Devise semigroup computation, parallel prefix computation, and broadcasting
algorithms for the resulting p2-node network, given the corresponding algorithms for the
original graph.
16.3. Topological parameters of a network
Consider the chordal ring network of Fig. 16.2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine the diameter of the network.
Suggest a shortest-path routing algorithm for the network.
Find the average internode distance for the network. Hint: The network is node-symmetric.
By renumbering Node i of the network as Node 3i mod 32 and redrawing the network as
a ring in order of the new node numbers, show that the bisection width of the network is
at most 8.
e . Derive the exact bisection width of the network.
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
341
16.4. Odd networks
A q-dimensional odd graph/network is one in which each node is identified by a (2q–1)-bit
binary number with exactly q 1s and q – 1 0s. Thus, there are (2qq– 1 ) nodes. Each Node x is
connected to q neighbors whose labels are obtained by keeping one of the 1 bits unchanged
and complementing the other 2q bits.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Show that the 10-node Petersen graph of Fig. 16.1 is in fact the 3D odd graph.
Derive the sizes of q-D odd graphs for 4 ≤ q ≤ 10 and compare with those of the q-cube.
Devise an efficient routing algorithm for the q-D odd network.
Determine the diameter of the q-D odd graph and compare it with Moore’s lower bound.
16.5. Star and pancake networks
a . Compare the sizes of q-D star graphs with those of odd graphs (define in Problem 16.4)
and hypercubes with the same node degrees.
b . Does the routing example from Node 154362 to Node 346215 for the star graph given in
Section 16.2 correspond to a shortest path? If not, what is the shortest path?
c . Repeat part (b) for the routing example for the pancake network given in Section 16.2.
d . Give an example of a diametral path for the 4D star graph of Fig. 16.3. Is the diameter of
this particular q-star equal to 2q – 3?
e . Repeat part (d) for the 4D pancake network.
16.6. Unfolded star, pancake, and rotator networks
Unfolded star, pancake, and rotator networks can be defined in the same way as unfolded
hypercubes.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Draw the unfolded 4-star, 4-pancake, and 4-rotator networks.
Determine the diameters of unfolded 4-star, 4-pancake, and 4-rotator networks.
Compare the diameters obtained in part (b) with Moore’s lower bound.
Determine the bisection widths of unfolded 4-star, 4-pancake, and 4-rotator networks.
16.7. Ring of rings networks
a . Find the optimal number of nodes in each local ring if the diameter of a p-processor ring
of rings network exemplified by Fig. 16.5 is to be minimized.
b. Find the optimal configuration of an h-level, p-processor ring of rings with respect to its
diameter.
c . Determine the maximum number of nodes that can be incorporated in a multilevel ring of
rings network using nodes of degree 4 for various desired diameters in the range 2 ≤ D ≤
5.
d. Devise an algorithm for multiplying m × m matrices on an m 2 -processor ring of rings
network with m processors in each local ring.
16.8. Ring of rings networks
Consider a three-level ring of rings network with 6 nodes in each ring. Each of the 216 nodes
in this network can be identified by a three-digit radix-6 integer.
a. Devise a node indexing scheme that makes it easy to identify which nodes belong to rings
at various levels.
b. Describe a shortest-path routing algorithm based on the indexing scheme of part (a).
c. Identify all of the diametral endpoints in the network (nodes that can be at the end of a
diametral path).
d. How will the diameter of the network change if we connect the diametral endpoints
identified in part (c) into a ring using their unused ports?
342
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
16.9. Product networks
a. Prove that the diameter and average internode distance in a product network is the sum of
the respective parameters for the two component networks. Hint: First prove that given a
shortest path of length l' between u' and v' in G' and a shortest path of length l" between
u" and v" in G", the length of the shortest path between u'u" and v'v" in G is l = l' + l".
b. Extend the result of part (a) to the product of k graphs.
c. Find a formula for the number of edges in a product graph in terms of the parameters of
its k component networks.
d. Prove or disprove: The bisection width of a product graph G = G' × G" is lower bounded
by min(p'B", p"B'), where p' and p" are the numbers of nodes, and B' and B" are the
bisection widths of G' and G", respectively.
16.10. Layered networks
a. Show that a q-D mesh is a Layered network.
b. What can you say about the layered cross product of an l-layer graph G and the l-node
linear array?
c. A one-sided binary tree is a binary tree in which the left (right) child of every node is a
leaf. What is the layered cross product of two one-sided binary trees of the same kind? Of
opposite kinds?
16.11. Layered cross-product networks
Prove the following results:
a. The butterfly network is the layered cross product of two binary trees. Hint: One is inverted.
b. The mesh of trees network is the layered cross product of two binary trees with “paths”
(linear array of nodes) “hanging from” their leaves, as shown in the following diagram.
16.12. Mesh-connected trees
a . Show that a mesh-connected trees network (Fig. 16.11) has four copies of the next smaller
mesh-connected trees network as its subgraphs.
b . Show that the largest complete binary tree whose size does not exceed that of a
mesh-connected trees network is a subgraph of the latter.
16.13. Waksman’s permutation network
A p × p Waksman permutation network [Waks68] is recursively constructed using 2 × 2
switches. First, p/2 switches are used to switch the inputs 0 and 1, 2 and 3, . . . , p – 1 and p.
The upper and lower outputs of the above switches are separately permuted using p/2-permuters. Finally, p/2 – 1 switches are used to switch the corresponding outputs of the p/2-permuters,
except for their lowermost outputs.
a. Show that Waksman’s permutation network can in fact route all permutations.
b. Determine the cost and delay of Waksman’s permutation network in terms of p.
16.14. ADM and gamma networks
The augmented data manipulator network (Fig. 15.12), as originally defined, was a unidirectional multistage interconnection network with inputs on the right and outputs at the left. The
A SAMPLER OF OTHER NETWORKS
343
gamma network (also called inverse ADM or IADM) is an ADM in which the input and output
sides have been switched.
a . Show that ADM and gamma networks are essentially the same network (they are isomorphic).
b. Show that, more generally, any permutation of the intercolumn connectivities of an ADM
network leads to an isomorphic network.
c . Use the result of part (b) to determine the diameter of a wrapped ADM network with
bidirectional links if the nodes are processors rather than switches.
16.15. Hierarchical hypercube networks
A hierarchical (q +1)-dimensional hypercube consists of 2 q copies a q -cube (2 q clusters) with
Node x in Cluster y connected to Node y in Cluster x via a Dimension-q link. Node x in Cluster
x has no intercluster link.
a. Find the diameter of the hierarchical (q +1)D hypercube.
b. Compare the diameter obtained in part (a) with that of a 2q-cube and with Moore’s lower
bound.
c. Devise an efficient routing algorithm for the hierarchical (q+1) hypercube.
d. Show that an ascend- or descend-type algorithm for the 2q-cube can be efficiently emulated
by the hierarchical (q +1)D hypercube.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[AlHa93]
[Arde81]
[Berm95]
[Chen96]
[Corb92]
[Day94]
[Day97]
[Efe96]
[Even97]
[Kend92]
[Kwai96]
[Kwai97]
[Lati93]
[Leig92]
[Mans94]
Al-Hajery, M. Z., and K. E. Batcher, “On the Bit-Level Complexity of Bitonic Sorting Networks,”
Proc. Int. Parallel Processing Conf., 1993, Vol. III. pp. 209–213.
Arden, B. W., and H. Lee, “Analysis of Chordal Ring Networks,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 30,
No. 4, pp. 291–295, April 1981.
Bermond, J.-C., F. Comellas, and D. F. Du, “Distributed Loop Computer Networks: A Survey,” J.
Parallel Distributed Computing, Vol. 24, No. 1, pp. 2–10, January 1995.
Cheng, W.-J., and W.-T. Chen, “A New Self-Routing Permutation Network,” IEEE Trans. Computers,
Vol. 45, No. 5, pp. 630–636, May 1996.
Corbett, P. F., “Rotator Graphs: An Efficient Topology for Point-to-Point Multiprocessor Networks,”
IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 3, No. 5, pp. 622–626, September 1992.
Day, K., and A. Tripathi, “A Comparative Study of Toplogical Properties of Hypercubes and Star
Graphs,” IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 5, No. 1, pp. 31–38, January 1994.
Day, K., and A.-E. Al-Ayyoub, “The Cross Product of Interconnection Networks,” IEEE Trans.
Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 8, No. 2, pp. 109–118, February 1997.
Efe, K., and A. Fernandez, “Mesh-Connected Trees: A Bridge Between Grids and Meshes of Trees,”
IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 7, No. 12, pp. 1281–1291, December 1996.
Even, G., and S. Even, “Embedding Interconnection Networks in Grids via the Layered Cross
Product,” Proc. 3rd Italian Conf. Algorithms and Complexity, Rome, March 1997, pp. 3–12.
Kendall Square Research, “KSR1 Technology Background,” 1992.
Kwai, D.-M., and B. Parhami, “A Generalization of Hypercubic Networks Based on Their Chordal
Ring Structures,” Information Processing Letters, Vol. 6, No. 4, pp. 469–477, 1996.
Kwai, D.-M., and B. Parhami, “A Class of Fixed-Degree Cayley-Graph Interconnection Networks
Derived by Pruning k-ary n-cubes,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, 1997, pp. 92–95.
Latifi, S., M. M. de Azevedo, and N. Bagherzadeh, “The Star Connected Cycles: A Fixed-Degree
Network for Parallel Processing,” in Proc. Int. Parallel Processing Conf., 1993, Vol. I, pp. 91–95.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Mans, B., and N. Santoro, “Optimal Fault-Tolerant Leader Election in Chordal Rings,” Proc. 24th
Int. Symp. Fault-Tolerant Computing, June 1994, pp. 392–401.
344
[Parh95]
[Ponn94]
[Reic93]
[Sche94]
[Vale94]
[Waks68]
[Yeh98]
[Yous95]
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Parhami, B., “Periodically Regular Chordal Ring Networks for Massively Parallel Architectures,”
Proc. 5th Symp. Frontiers Massively Parallel Computation, February 1995, pp. 315–322. [Extended
version to appear in IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems.]
Ponnuswamy, S., and V. Chaudhary, “A Comparative Study of Star Graphs and Rotator Graphs,” in
Proc. Int. Parallel Processing Conf., 1994, Vol. I, pp. 46–50.
Reichmeyer, F., S. Hariri, and K. Jabbour, “Wormhole Routing on Multichannel Ring Networks,”
Proc. 36th Midwest Symp. Circuits and Systems, August 1993, pp. 625–628.
Scherson, I. D., and A. S. Youssef, Interconnection Networks for High-Performance Parallel Computers, IEEE Computer Society Press, 1994.
Valerio, M., L. E. Moser, P. M. Melliar-Smith, and P. Sweazey, “The QuickRing Network,” Proc.
ACM Computer Science Conf., 1994.
Waksman, A., “A Permutation Network,” J. ACM, Vol. 15, No. 1, pp. 159–163, January 1968.
Yeh, C.-H., and B. Parhami, “A New Representation of Graphs and Its Applications to Parallel
Processing,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel and Distributed Systems, 1998, to appear.
Youssef, A., “Design and Analysis of Product Networks,” Proc. 5th Symp. Frontiers Massively
Parallel Computation, February 1995, pp. 521–528.
V
Some Broad Topics
In this part, we consider several topics that influence the acceptance, efficiency,
and quality of parallel computers. For example, coordination and resource
management schemes for computations and data accesses have a direct bearing
on the effectiveness of parallel computers. Likewise, to ensure a balanced design
with no obvious performance bottleneck, any parallel system must be equipped
with high-bandwidth input/output devices capable of supplying data to processors, and removing the computation results, at appropriate rates. The I/O
capabilities of parallel computers are particularly important in data-intensive
applications found in corporate database and network server environments.
From another angle, the high component count of parallel systems makes them
susceptible to hardware faults, thus necessitating fault tolerance provisions in
their designs. Finally, coordination, programming, user views/interfaces, and
system software are important for all types of parallel systems. The above broad
topics are treated in this part, which consists of the following four chapters:
•
•
•
•
Chapter 17: Emulation and Scheduling
Chapter 18: Data Storage, Input, and Output
Chapter 19: Reliable Parallel Processing
Chapter 20: System and Software Issues
345
This page intentionally left blank.
17
Emulation and
Scheduling
We have previously used the notion of one parallel machine emulating another
one in the development and evaluation of certain algorithms. We now take a
closer look at emulation and, in particular, demonstrate how it is applicable to
the provision of a shared-memory view in a distributed-memory environment.
In a coarse-grained MIMD-type parallel computer, the multiple processors often
work independently on different subproblems or subtasks of a large problem.
The processing nodes may be homogeneous or heterogeneous and the subtasks
often have varying complexities and data interdependencies. Once a parallel
algorithm for solving a particular problem has been developed, its subtasks and
their interdependencies must be specified and then assigned to the available
computation and communication resources. Because subtask execution times
can vary as a result of data-dependent conditions, dynamic scheduling or load
balancing might be required to achieve good efficiency. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
17.1. Emulations among architectures
17.2. Distributed shared memory
17.3. The task scheduling problem
17.4. A class of scheduling algorithms
17.5. Some useful bounds for scheduling
17.6. Load balancing and dataflow systems
347
This page intentionally left blank.
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
349
17.1. EMULATIONS AMONG ARCHITECTURES
Emulations are sometimes necessitated by our desire to quickly develop algorithms for
a new architecture without expending the significant resources that would be required for
native algorithm development. Another reason for our interest in emulations among parallel
architectures is that they allow us to develop algorithms for architectures that are easier to
program (e.g., shared-memory or PRAM) and then have them run on machines that are
realizable, easily accessible, or affordable. The developed algorithm then serves as a “source
code” that can be quickly “compiled” to run on any given architecture via emulation.
Emulation results are sometimes used for purposes other than practical porting of
software. For example, we know that the hypercube is a powerful architecture and can
execute many algorithms efficiently. Thus, one way to show that a new architecture is useful
or efficient, without a need for developing a large set of algorithms for it, is to show that it
can emulate the hypercube efficiently. We used this method, e.g., to prove the versatility of
the cube-connected cycles architecture in Section 15.4. The results were that CCC can
emulate a p-node hypercube with O(log p) slowdown and that in the special case of normal
hypercube algorithms, which includes many of the algorithms of practical interest in the
ascend/descend class, emulation is done with Θ (1) slowdown.
Results similar to the above between the hypercube and CCC have been obtained for
many other pairs of parallel architectures. Interestingly, a form of transitivity can be used to
derive new emulation results from existing ones. If architecture A emulates architecture B
with O(f(p)) slowdown and B in turn emulates C with O(g(p)) slowdown (assuming, for
simplicity, that they all contain p processors), then A can emulate C with O(f ( p) × g (p))
slowdown. In this way, if an architecture is shown to emulate CCC with Θ (1) slowdown,
then based on the results of CCC emulating the hypercube, we can deduce that the new
architecture can emulate normal hypercube algorithms with Θ (1) slowdown.
The above are examples of emulation results that are specific to a target (emulated)
architecture and a host (emulating) architecture. In the rest of this section, we introduce three
fairly general emulation results involving classes of, rather than specific, architectures. We
will follow these with a fourth, very important, emulation result in Section 17.2.
Our first result is based on embedding of an architecture or graph into another one. As
discussed in Section 13.2, a graph embedding consists of a node mapping and an edge
mapping. The cost of an embedding is reflected in
Expansion
Ratio of the number of nodes in the two graphs
whereas its performance characteristics are captured by
Dilation
Congestion
Load factor
Longest path onto which any given edge is mapped
Maximum number of edges mapped onto the same edge
Maximum number of nodes mapped onto the same node
Assuming communication is performed by packet routing, such a graph embedding can be
the basis of an emulation with a slowdown factor that is upper bounded by
slowdown ≤ dilation × congestion × load factor
350
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
As a special case, any embedding with constant dilation, congestion, and load factor defines
an emulation with constant-factor slowdown. The above bound is tight in the sense that
slowdown may equal the right-hand side in some cases. As an example, embedding the
p-node complete graph K p into the two-node graph K 2 involves dilation of 1, congestion of
p 2 /4, load factor of p/2, and a worst-case slowdown of p 3 /8. Despite the above worst-case
example, it is often possible to schedule the communications over dilated and congested
paths in such a way that the resulting slowdown is significantly less than the upper bound.
Our second general emulation result is that the PRAM can emulate any degree- d network
with O(d) slowdown, where slowdown is measured in terms of computation steps rather than
real time; i.e., each PRAM computation step, involving memory access by every processor,
counts as one step. The proof is fairly simple. Each processor of the PRAM host emulates
one degree-d node in the target architecture. In one computation step, the emulated node can
send/receive up to d messages to/from its neighbors. In the PRAM emulation, each link buffer
(there are two buffers per bidirectional link) corresponds to a location in shared memory.
The sending of up to d messages by each node can be done in d steps, with the ith step being
devoted to writing a message from the ith send buffer to the ith link buffer (assume that the
neighbors of each node have been ordered). Similarly, the receiving part, which involves
reading up to d messages from known locations in the shared memory, can be done in O(d )
steps.
Because each link buffer is associated with a unique receiving node, the EREW PRAM
submodel is adequate for this emulation. As a special case of the above general result, the
PRAM can emulate any bounded-degree network with constant slowdown. Hence, the
PRAM can be said to be more powerful than any bounded-degree network. As another special
case, any network with logarithmic or sublogarithmic node degree can be emulated with at
most logarithmic slowdown. With the CREW PRAM submodel, we can emulate a hypergraph-based architecture (i.e., one including buses and multipoint links) with O(d ) slowdown.
Our third and final general result, that the (wrapped) butterfly network can emulate any
p-node degree-d network with O(d log p) slowdown, is somewhat more difficult to prove.
Here is a proof sketch. The cornerstone of the proof is a result that shows the ability of a
p-node (wrapped) butterfly network to route any permutation in O(log p) steps (see [Leig92],
p. 457). Thus, if a communication step of an arbitrary p-node degree-d network can be
translated into d permutation routing problems, the desired conclusion will be immediate.
This latter property is a direct consequence of the following result from graph theory:
Consider a 2p-node bipartite graph G with node set U ∪ V, such that U and V each
contain p nodes and every edge connects a node in U to a node in V . If all nodes in G have
the same degree d, then G contains a perfect matching, i.e., a set of p edges that connect
every node in U to every node in V.
If we remove the p edges corresponding to a perfect matching, which define a p -permutation, the remaining graph will have uniform node degree d – 1 and will again contain a
perfect matching by the same result. Removal of this second perfect matching (p -permutation) leaves us with a bipartite graph with node degree d – 2. Continuing in this manner, we
will eventually get a bipartite graph with node degree 1 that defines the dth and final
permutation.
Consider, for example, the five-node graph, with maximum node degree 3, depicted in
Fig. 17.1. We augment this graph with a link from Node 1 to Node 3, in order to make the
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
351
Figure 17.1. Converting a routing step in a degree-3 network to three permutations or perfect
matchings.
node degree uniformly equal to 3, and represent the augmented graph by the bipartite graph,
shown in the middle, which has Nodes u i and v i in its two parts corresponding to Node i in
the original graph. We next identify a perfect matching in this bipartite graph, say, the heavy
dotted edges on the right. This perfect matching, with its edges carrying the label 0 in the
right-hand diagram of Fig. 17.1, defines the permutation P 0 = { 1, 0, 3, 2} of the node set {0,
1, 2, 3}. Removing these edges, we arrive at a bipartite graph having the uniform node degree
2 and the perfect matching defined by the light dotted edges labeled with 1. This time, we
have identified the permutation P 1 = {2, 3, 1, 0}. Finally, the remaining edges, marked with
the label 2 in Fig. 17.1, define the last perfect matching or permutation P 2 = {3, 2, 0, 1}.
A consequence of the above emulation result is that if a problem is efficiently parallelizable on any bounded-degree architecture, then it is efficiently parallelizable on the
butterfly network, because emulating the bounded-degree network on the butterfly increases
the running time by at most a factor of O(log p). In this sense, the butterfly network is a
universal, or universally efficient, bounded-degree parallel architecture.
A fourth general emulation result, that of emulating the abstract PRAM architecture on
feasible bounded-degree networks, is important enough to warrant separate discussion (next
section).
17.2.
DISTRIBUTED SHARED MEMORY
We mentioned, in the introduction to Chapter 5, that the shared-memory model of
parallel computation, and PRAM in particular, facilitates the development of parallel
algorithms using a variety of programming paradigms. This ease of algorithm development
is practically useful only if the underlying model can be built directly in hardware, or at least
lends itself to efficient emulation by feasible (bounded-degree) networks. In this section, we
show that the butterfly network can indeed emulate the PRAM rather efficiently. Such an
emulation, by butterfly or other networks, provides the illusion of shared memory to the
users or programmers of a parallel system that in fact uses message passing for interprocessor
communication. This illusion, or programming view, is sometimes referred to as distributed
(or virtual) shared memory.
We discuss two types of PRAM emulations on the butterfly: (1) randomized or
probabilistic emulation, which allows us to make statements about the average-case or
expected slowdown, but provides no performance guarantee in the worst case, and (2)
352
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
deterministic emulation, which involves greater overhead, and may thus be slower on the
average, but in return guarantees good worst-case performance. The randomized emulation
is good enough for most practical purposes. We thus treat deterministic PRAM emulation as
a topic of theoretical interest.
Let us now discuss a randomized emulation of the p-processor PRAM on a butterfly
distributed-memory machine. Assume, for simplicity, that p = 2 q (q + 1) for some q. Thus, a
p-node butterfly exists that can emulate the PRAM processors on a one-to-one basis (Fig.
17.2). The PRAM processors are arbitrarily mapped onto the butterfly processors. Each of
the m PRAM memory locations is assigned to one of the processors using a hash function h
(a function that maps a set of keys onto a set of integers such that roughly the same number
of keys are mapped to each integer). Thus, a processor needing access to memory location
x will evaluate h(x) to determine which processor holds that particular memory location and
then sends a message to that processor to read from or write into x. Because the hash function
h is a random function, emulating one EREW PRAM step involves a randomized (averagecase) routing problem that can be completed on the butterfly in O(log p) steps with high
probability. One can use, e.g., the simple routing algorithm that sends each packet to Column
0 in the source row, then to Column q in the destination row, and finally to the destination
node within the destination row.
Note that in the EREW PRAM, the processors are constrained to access different
memory locations in each step. When we apply the hash function h in the above emulation
scheme, the p different memory locations accessed by the PRAM processors may not be in
distinct memory modules. However, at most O(log p) of the memory locations accessed will
be in the same butterfly row with high probability. Thus, the O(log p) average slowdown
factor of the emulation can be maintained by suitably pipelining these accesses. The same
result holds for emulating the CRCW PRAM, provided that multiple accesses to the same
memory location are combined.
Figure 17.2. Butterfly distributed-memory machine emulating the PRAM.
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
353
Figure 17.3 depicts an alternative emulation of the p-processor PRAM using a butterfly
MIN connecting p = 2 q processors and memory modules on its two sides. Thus, nodes in the
intermediate columns are not connected to processor or memory modules but merely act as
switching nodes for routing messages back and forth between processors and memory
modules. If we convert the butterfly network into a wrapped butterfly, the processors and
memory modules can be merged to form a distributed-memory machine. The slowdown
factor in this emulation is still O(log p) .
The PRAM emulation scheme depicted in Fig. 17.3 is quite inefficient because it leads
to roughly the same slowdown factor as that of Fig. 17.2, which uses a smaller butterfly.
However, this inefficient scheme can become quite efficient if we use it to emulate a
2 q q-processor PRAM rather than one with 2 q processors. Each processor on the left now
emulates q of the p PRAM processors instead of just one. Each memory module on the right
holds m/2 q = Θ (m log p/p) memory locations. The emulating processor simply cycles through
the emulated processors in a round-robin fashion, issuing their respective memory read
requests (which are pipelined through the butterfly network), then receiving the returned data
from memory, then performing the corresponding computation steps, and finally issuing
write requests for storing the results in shared memory. With pipelining of the read and write
accesses through the network, the entire process of emulating one computation step of the q
processors takes O(q) steps with high probability. Thus, the emulation has Θ(1) efficiency
on the average.
Deterministic emulation is both more difficult and less efficient [Harr94]. Because
conflicts in the routing of memory access requests may delay the completion of such requests,
the main idea is to store multiple copies of each memory data word so that if access to one
copy is delayed by routing conflicts, we can access another copy. The cost penalty is
obviously the need for more memory locations. By storing k = log 2 m copies of each of the
m data items, we can successfully access any p items in O(log m log p log log p ) time in a
Figure 17.3. Distributed-memory machine, with a butterfly multistage interconnection network,
emulating the PRAM.
354
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
p-node butterfly, provided that accesses belonging to a particular PRAM cycle are timestamped with the cycle number.
Intuitively, the improved worst-case performance of the above method results from the
fact that for each access, only  ( k + 1 )/2  of the k copies need to be read/updated. This ensures
the condition
| read set ∩ update set | ≥ 1
which in turn leads to any read set being guaranteed to have one up-to-date value with the
latest time stamp. Requests are issued for reading/updating all k copies of the required data
item but the request is considered satisfied once ( k + 1)/2  copies have been returned or
updated. Thus, congestion on some of the access paths will not lead to significant slowdown.
The detailed mechanism that allows groups of processors to cooperate in satisfying each
round of memory access requests is fairly complicated [Upfa87].
In one sense, the replication factor log m of the preceding emulation is very close to the
best possible; the lower bound on the replication factor to guarantee fast access to at least
one up-to-date copy is Ω (log m/log log m). However, this lower bound applies only if data
items must be stored as atomic or indivisible objects. Using Rabin’s information dispersal
scheme [Rabi89], one can encode each data item z in k = log m pieces z 1 z 2 . . . z k , with each
z i of size ≈ 3|z|/k, in such a way that any k /3 pieces can be used to reconstruct z (Fig. 17.4).
Then, in each read or write access, we deal with 2k/3 pieces, as this will guarantee that at
least k/3 of the 2k/3 pieces accessed will have the latest time stamp. If accessing each piece
is Θ (k) times faster than accessing the entire data item (which is k times larger), then we need
only O(log m log p log log p /k) = O(log p log log p ) time with the above constant-factor
redundancy scheme.
Thus far, our discussion of distributed shared memory has been in terms of emulating
a synchronous PRAM. Because, in such an emulation, one set of memory accesses is
completed before another set begins, the semantics of memory accesses is quite clear and
Figure 17.4. Illustrating the information dispersal approach to PRAM emulation with lower data
redundancy.
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
355
corresponds to the emulated PRAM model. More generally, however, shared memory may
be accessed by multiple asynchronous processes running on different processors (asynchronous PRAM). In such cases, a shared-memory consistency model [Adve96] must be defined
in order to allow efficient and correct parallel programming. The actual shared-memory view
can be provided to the programmer by software or hardware means [Prot96].
17.3. THE TASK SCHEDULING PROBLEM
Virtually all parallel algorithms that we developed in the previous chapters were such
that the allocation of computations to processors was explicit in the algorithm. In other words,
the algorithms explicitly specified what each processor should do in any given computation
step. With coarse-grain parallel computations, it is possible to decouple the algorithm’s
specification from the assignment of tasks to processors. This is in fact required if the
computation is to be executed on a variable number of processors to be determined at compile
time or even run time. It is also necessary for dynamic load balancing (see Section 17.6).
The task scheduling problem is defined as follows: Given a task system characterizing
a parallel computation, determine how the tasks can be assigned to processing resources
(scheduled on them) to satisfy certain optimality criteria. The task system is usually defined
in the form of a directed graph, with nodes specifying computational tasks and links
corresponding to data dependencies or communications. Optimality criteria may include
minimizing execution time, maximizing resource utilization, minimizing interprocessor
communication, meeting deadlines, or a combination of these factors.
Associated with each task is a set of parameters, including one or more of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Execution or running time. We may be given the worst case, average case, or the
probability distribution of a task’s execution time.
Creation. We may be faced with a fixed set of tasks, known at compile time, or a
probability distribution for the task creation times.
Relationship with other tasks. This type of information may include criticality,
priority order, and/or data dependencies.
Start or end time. A task’s release time is the time before which the task should not
be executed. Also, a hard or soft deadline may be associated with each task. A hard
deadline is specified when the results of a task become practically worthless if not
obtained by a certain time. A soft deadline may penalize late results but does not
render them totally worthless.
Resources or processors on which tasks are to be scheduled are typically characterized by
their ability to execute certain classes of tasks and by their performance or speed. Often
uniform capabilities are assumed for all processors, either to make the scheduling problem
tractable or because parallel systems of interest do in fact consist of identical processors. In
this latter case, any task can be scheduled on any processor.
The scheduling algorithm or scheme is itself characterized by
1.
Preemption. With nonpreemptive scheduling, a task must run to completion once
started, whereas with preemptive scheduling, execution of a task may be suspended
to accommodate a more critical or higher-priority task. In practice, preemption
involves some overhead for storing the state of the partially completed task and for
356
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
2.
continually checking the task queue for the arrival of higher-priority tasks. However,
this overhead is ignored in most scheduling algorithms for reasons of tractability.
Granularity. Fine-grain, medium-grain, or coarse-grain scheduling problems deal
with tasks of various complexities, from simple multiply–add calculations to large,
complex program segments, perhaps consisting of thousands of instructions. Finegrain scheduling is often incorporated into the algorithm, as otherwise the overhead
would be prohibitive. Medium- and coarse-grain scheduling are not fundamentally
different, except that with a larger number of medium-grain tasks to be scheduled,
the computational complexity of the scheduling algorithm can become an issue,
especially with on-line or run-time scheduling.
Unfortunately, most interesting task scheduling problems, some with as few as two processors, are NP-complete. This fundamental difficulty has given rise to research results on many
special cases that lend themselves to analytical solutions and to a great many heuristic
procedures that work fine under appropriate circumstances or with tuning of their decision
parameters. Stankovic et al. [Stan95] present a good overview of basic scheduling results
and the boundary between easy and hard problems. El-Rewini et al. [ElRe95] provide an
overview of task scheduling in multiprocessors.
In what follows, we briefly review task scheduling problems of a very restricted type.
A task system is represented by a directed acyclic graph G = (V, E ), where V is the set of
vertices representing unit-time tasks or computations v1 , v 2, . . . , v T 1 and E is the set of edges
representing precedence constraints:
E = {(vi , v j ) | v i , vj ∈ V and Task v i feeds data to Task vj }
An example task system is depicted in Fig. 17.5.
Each task must be scheduled on one of p identical processors. There are no other resource
constraints, such as I/O or memory requirements, and no timing restrictions, such as release
times or deadlines. With these conditions, a schedule S is a set of triples (v i , tj ,Pk ) assigning
a Task v i to a Processor P k for a particular time step tj , and satisfying
a.
b.
Condition (a) simply means that one processor can execute only one task at each time step,
whereas Condition (b) requires that precedence relationships be honored.
An analogy might be helpful. Tasks can be likened to courses, each with a set of
prerequisites. There are, say, T quarters or semesters over which courses needed to satisfy a
degree requirement must be scheduled such that the number of courses in each academic
term does not exceed the maximum allowed course load and the prerequisites for each course
are all taken before the course. Here, the maximum course load corresponds to the number
of processors available and the number T of terms is the analogue of the total execution time
on the parallel machine. Of course, for constructing a study plan, we also have timing
constraints in that not all courses are offered in every term. This analogy should be sufficient
to convince any college student that the task scheduling problem is NP-hard!
357
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
Polynomial time optimal scheduling algorithms exist only for very limited classes of
scheduling problems. Examples include scheduling tree-structured task graphs with any
number of processors and scheduling arbitrary graphs of unit-time tasks on two processors
[ElRe95]. Most practical scheduling problems are solved by applying heuristic algorithms.
An important class of heuristic scheduling algorithms, known as list scheduling, is discussed
next.
17.4. A CLASS OF SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS
In list scheduling, a priority level is assigned to each task. A task list is then constructed
in which the tasks appear in priority order, with some tasks tagged as being ready for
execution (initially, only tasks having no prerequisite are tagged). With each processor that
becomes available for executing tasks, the highest-priority tagged task is removed from the
list and assigned to the processor. If q processors become available simultaneously, then up
to q tasks can be scheduled at once. As tasks complete their executions, thus satisfying the
prerequisites of other tasks, such tasks are tagged and become ready for execution. When all
processors are identical, the schedulers in this class differ only in their priority assignment
schemes.
In the case of unit-time tasks, tagging of new tasks can be done right after scheduling
is completed for the current step. With different, but deterministic, running times, tagging
can be done by attaching a time stamp, rather than a binary indicator, with each task that will
become ready in a known future time. In what follows, we will consider the simple case of
unit-time tasks. Additionally, we will ignore scheduling and communication overheads.
Thus, once a task is run to completion and its processor becomes available, the communication of results to subsequent tasks and the scheduling of a new task on the released processor
are instantaneous.
Here is a possible priority assignment scheme for list scheduling. First the depth T∞ of
the task graph, which is an indicator of its minimum possible execution time, is determined.
The depth of the graph is designated as T∞ because it corresponds to the execution time of
the task graph with an unlimited number of processors. As an example, the depth of the task
graph in Fig. 17.5 is 8. We then take T∞ as our goal for the total running time T p with p
processors and determine the latest possible time step in which each task can be scheduled
if our goal is to be met. This is done by “layering” the nodes beginning with the output node.
For the example in Fig. 17.5, the output node v13 is assigned with T∞ = 8 as its latest possible
time. The prerequisites of v13 , namely, v10 , v 11 , and v 12 , are assigned a latest time of 7, their
prerequisites get 6, and so forth. If we have not made a mistake, some input node will be
assigned 1 as its latest possible time. The results of layering for the task graph of Fig. 17.5
are as follows:
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
5
7
6
8
6
9
6
10
7
11
7
12
7
13
8
Tasks in numerical order
Latest possible times (layers)
The priority of tasks is then assigned in the order of the latest possible times. Ties can be
broken in various ways. Let us give priority to a task with a larger number of descendants in
case of equal values of the latest possible times. For our example, this secondary criterion is
358
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 17.5. Example task system showing communications or dependencies.
of no help, but generally, if a task with more descendants is executed first, the running time
will likely be improved.
1*
1
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
4
4
3
6
5
2
5
6
1
7
6
1
8
6
1
9
6
1
10
7
1
11
7
1
12
7
1
13
8
0
Tasks in priority order
Latest possible times
Number of descendants
Now, to schedule our example task graph on p = 2 processors, we scan the constructed list
from left to right, to select up to two tagged tasks for execution in each time step. Selection
of each task in a time step may result in other tasks being tagged as ready for the next step.
Tasks listed in priority order
1*
2*
3*
4*
6*
8*
10*
12*
13*
2
3
4
6
7*
9*
11*
13
3
4
6
5*
8*
10*
12*
4
6
5
7
9
11
13
6
5
7
8*
10
12
5
7
8
9
11
13
7
8
9
10
12
8
9
10
11
13
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
13
11
12
13
12
13
13
t=l
t=2
t=3
t=4
t=5
t=6
t=7
t=8
t=9
v 1 scheduled
v2 scheduled
v 3 scheduled
v 4 , v5 scheduled
v 6 , v 7 scheduled
v 8 , v 9 scheduled
v 1 0 , v 11 scheduled
v12 scheduled
v 13 scheduled (done)
359
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
Figure 17.6. Schedules with p = 1, 2, 3 processors for an example task graph with unit-time
tasks.
With p = 3 processors, the scheduling of our example task graph goes as follows:
Tasks listed in priority order
1*
2*
3*
4*
6*
9*
12*
13*
2
3
4
6
7*
10*
13
3
4
6
5*
9
12
4
6
5
7
10
13
6
5
7
8*
11*
5
7
8
9
12
7
8
9
10
13
8
9
10
11
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
13
11
12
13
12
13
13
t =l
t=2
t=3
t=4
t=5
t=6
t=7
t=8
v 1 scheduled
v 2 scheduled
v 3 scheduled
v 4, v 5 , v 8 scheduled
v 6 , v 7 , v 11 scheduled
v 9 , v 1 0 scheduled
v 12 scheduled
v 1 3 scheduled (done)
Figure 17.7. Example task system with task running times of 1, 2, or 3 units.
360
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 17.8. Schedules with p = 1, 2, 3 processors for an example task graph with nonuniform
running times.
The schedules derived above for p = 2 and p = 3 processors are depicted in Fig. 17.6, along
with a single-processor schedule for reference. Both schedules happen to be optimal, though
list scheduling does not guarantee this outcome in all cases.
Figures 17.7 and 17.8 show a task graph with nonuniform running times and the resulting
schedules for one, two, or three processors. Derivation of the schedules is left as an exercise.
More general versions of list scheduling, as well as other sophisticated scheduling
algorithms may take communication delays, deadlines, release times, resource requirements,
processor capabilities, and other factors into account. Because most scheduling algorithms
do not guarantee optimal running times anyway, a balance must be struck between the
complexity of the scheduler and its performance in terms of the total schedule length
achieved. The simplicity of the scheduler is particularly important with on-line or run-time
scheduling, where the scheduling algorithm must run on the parallel system itself, thus using
time and other resources like the tasks being scheduled. With off-line or compile-time
scheduling, the running time of the scheduler is less of an issue.
If timing parameters, such as task deadlines and release times, are considered in making
scheduling decisions, we have a real-time scheduling problem or scheduler. Example
scheduling strategies for real-time tasks include “nearest-deadline first” or “least-laxity
first,” where the laxity of a task with deadline d and execution time e at current time t is
defined as d – t – e. When the possibility of failure for processors and other resources is
considered in task assignment or reassignment, we have fault-tolerant scheduling.
17.5. SOME USEFUL BOUNDS FOR SCHEDULING
Section 17.4 reported the bad news that task scheduling is a difficult problem and that
optimal scheduling algorithms are either nonexistent or hard to come by for most cases of
practical interest. Now, it’s time for some good news!
Let T p be the execution time of a task graph, with unit-time nodes, when using p
processors and a particular scheduling algorithm. T1 is the number of nodes in the task graph
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
361
and T∞ is its depth. The following inequalities are easily derived, where c is an arbitrary
integer constant, l is the number of input nodes, and ƒ is the maximum node in-degree or
fan-in:
Less obvious is the following result, known as Brent’s scheduling theorem:
The proof of this result is based on constructing a p-processor schedule whose running time
is strictly less than T∞ + T1 /p in the worst case. First assume the availability of an unlimited
number of processors and schedule each node at the earliest possible time. Let there be nt
nodes scheduled at time t. Clearly, ∑ t nt = T 1 . With only p processors, the tasks scheduled for
time step t can be executed in  n t/ p  steps by running them p at a time. Thus,
Expanding the summation on the right-hand side above yields
Note that Brent’s scheduling theorem offers the following upper bound for the speed-up:
This can be viewed as a generalized form of Amdahl’s law. A large value for T∞ /T 1 is an
indication that the task has a great deal of sequential dependencies, which limits the speed-up
to at most T1 /T∞ with any number of processors. A small value for T∞ /T1 allows us to approach
the ideal speed-up of p with p processors.
The promised good news are derived as corollaries to Brent’s scheduling theorem. The
first “good-news” corollary is obtained by observing that for p ≥ T1/T ∞ , we have T 1/p ≤ T ∞ .
This inequality, along with T∞ ≤ T p and Tp < T1 /p + T ∞ , leads to
What the above inequalities suggest is that we can come within a factor of 2 of the best
running time possible, even with a very simple scheduling algorithm, provided that a suitably
large number of processors is available.
From Figs. 17.6 and 17.8, we observe that using too many processors to execute a task
system that exhibits limited parallelism is wasteful in that processing resources may remain
idle for extended periods. The second “good-news” corollary to Brent’s scheduling theorem
is obtained by observing that for p ≤ T1 /T∞ , we have T∞ ≤ T1 /p, leading to
362
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Here, the interpretation is that we can come within a factor of 2 of the ideal speed-up if we
do not use too many processors.
Combining the above two pieces of good news, we can achieve linear or Θ ( p) speed-up,
along with near-minimal Θ(T∞ ) running time and optimal Θ(1) efficiency, by using roughly
T1 /T∞ processors to execute a task system of depth T∞ composed of T1 unit-time tasks. Thus,
as long as we can control the number of processors that are applied to a given parallel task
system, we can obtain near-optimal results. The architectural implication of the above
observations is that the user must be allowed to choose the number of processors that would
run his or her application most efficiently; hence, the need for partitionable parallel computers that can run several tasks on different subsets of processors (e.g., subcubes, submeshes,
subtrees).
17.6. LOAD BALANCING AND DATAFLOW SYSTEMS
One approach to scheduling a task graph is to initially distribute the tasks among the
available processors, based on some criteria, and then let each processor do its own internal
scheduling (ordering the execution of its set of tasks) according to interdependencies of tasks
and the results received from other processors. The advantage of this approach is that most
scheduling decisions are performed in a distributed manner. A possible drawback is that the
results may be far from optimal. However, if such a scheme is combined with a method for
redistributing the tasks when the initial distribution proves to be inappropriate, good results
may be achieved.
Suppose the tasks are distributed to processors in such a way that the total expected
running times of the tasks assigned to each processor are roughly the same. Because task
running times are not constants, a processor may run out of things to do before other
processors complete their assigned tasks. Also, some processors may remain idle for long
periods of time as they wait for prerequisite tasks on other processors to be executed. In these
cases, a load balancing policy may be applied in an attempt to make the load distribution
more uniform. As we learn about the actual execution times and interdependencies of the
tasks at run time, we may switch as yet unexecuted tasks from an overloaded processor to a
less loaded one. Load balancing can be initiated by an idle or lightly loaded processor
(receiver-initiated) or by an overburdened processor (sender-initiated).
Unfortunately, load balancing may involve a great deal of overhead that reduces the
potential gains. If moving a task from one processor to another means copying a large
program with huge amounts of data and then updating various status tables to indicate the
new location of the task (for the benefit of other processors that may need the results of the
moved task), then communication overhead is significant and load balancing may not be
worth its cost. At the other extreme, if the tasks belong to a standard set of tasks, each of
which is invoked with a small set of parameters (data) and with copies already available
locally to every processor, then moving the tasks may involve only a small broadcast message
to pass the parameters and update the system status tables. In this case, the load balancing
overhead will be minimal.
In circuit-switched networks that use wormhole routing, the load balancing problem can
be formulated as a network flow problem and thus solved using available methods and
algorithms for the latter problem [Bokh93]. The excess (deficiency) of work load at some
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
363
nodes may be viewed as flow sources (sinks) and the requirement is to allow the excess work
load to “flow” from sources to sinks via paths that are, to the extent possible, disjoint and
thus free from conflicts.
The ultimate in automatic load-balancing is a self-scheduling system that tries to keep
all processing resources running at maximum efficiency. There may be a central location or
authority to which processors refer for work and where they return their results. An idle
processor requests that it be assigned new work by sending a message to this central
supervisor and in return receives one or more tasks to perform. This works nicely for tasks
with small contexts and/or relatively long running times. If the central location is consulted
too often, or if it has to send (receive) large volumes of data to (from) processors, it can
become a bottleneck.
A hardware-level implementation of such a self- scheduling scheme, known as dataflow
computing, has a long history. A dataflow computation is characterized by a dataflow graph,
which is very similar to the task graphs of Section 17.4, but may contain decision elements
and loops. We will limit our discussion to decision-free and loop-free dataflow graphs. Figure
17.9 depicts an example that is very similar to the task graph of Fig. 17.7. Tokens, shown in
the form of heavy dots, are used to keep track of the availability of data. Initially only the
primary inputs carry tokens (data values). Once tokens appear on all inputs of a node, the
node is enabled or “fired,” resulting in tokens to be removed from its inputs and placed on
each of its outputs. If an edge is restricted to carry no more than one token, we have a static
dataflow system. If multiple tagged tokens can appear on the edges and are “consumed” after
matching their tags, we have a dynamic dataflow system that allows computations to be
pipelined but implies greater overhead as a result of the requirement for matching of the
token tags.
Figure 17.9. Example dataflow graph with token distribution at the outset (left) and after two
time units (right).
364
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Hardware implementation of dataflow systems with fine-grain computations (one or a
few machine instructions per node), though feasible, has proven impractical [Lee94].
However, when each node or task is a computation thread consisting of longer sequences of
machine instructions, then the activation overhead is less serious and the concept becomes
quite practical. We will discuss the notion of multithreading, and its implications for
tolerating or hiding the memory access latency in parallel computers, in Section 18.3.
PROBLEMS
17.1. Emulation through graph embedding
In Section 17.1, we saw an example of embedding that led to emulation with the maximum
slowdown of dilation × congestion × load factor. This example is extreme in that it involves an
unrealistic parallel architecture being emulated by a very small (two-node) system.
a.
b.
c.
Show that the bound can be equaled or approached in more realistic examples as well.
Consider embeddings of target systems into host systems with dilation 1. Under what
conditions can the slowdown for the corresponding emulation become the larger of
congestion and load factor rather than their product?
Provide a complete example that exhibits the slowdown of part (b).
17.2. Emulation through graph embedding
Suppose that an n T-node, e T -edge, degree-d T target graph, with diameter D T and bisection
width B T , is to be embedded into a host graph with corresponding parameters n H , eH, d H , D H,
B H . Can you derive bounds on the dilation, congestion, and load factor of the embedding, given
only the above information?
17.3. Regular graphs
Prove or disprove: If G is a regular degree-d, p-node undirected graph with no self-loop (edge
from one node to itself), then either p or d must be even. What happens to the above result if
G is a regular directed graph with in-degree and out-degree of d?
17.4. Graph embedding
Which of the following embeddings is possible? Why (not)?
a.
Dilation-1 embedding of the hex-mesh of Fig. 12.2 into a hypercube of at most twice its
size.
b. Congestion-2 embedding of the eight-neighbor mesh (Fig. 12.2) into a mesh of the same
size.
c. Dilation-1 embedding of the 2 q -node shuffle–exchange network (Fig. 15.18) into the
q-cube.
d. Congestion-1 embedding of a 2 q -node Möbius cube (Fig. 15.21) into the q-cube.
e. Dilation-1 embedding of a star graph (Fig. 16.3) into a hypercube of at most twice its size.
f. Constant-dilation embedding of the mesh-connected trees into the mesh of trees (Fig.
16.11).
17.5. Graph embedding
Scheduling of a task graph, with unit-time tasks, on a parallel system (specified in terms of a
directed graph) can also be viewed as a graph embedding problem. Describe the significance
of dilation, congestion, and load factor in this context.
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
365
17.6. PRAM emulation of a degree-d network
a.
The emulation of a degree-d network by PRAM suggested in Section 17.1 requires pd
buffers in shared memory (two per bidirectional link). Can the perfect-matching result of
Section 17.1 be used to reduce the number of buffers to p?
b. A degree-d architecture is restricted to single-port communication, i.e., a processor can
send/receive a message to/from at most one neighbor in each step. Can the PRAM
emulation of this architecture be speeded up to require O(1) rather than O(d ) slowdown?
c. Suppose that we want to emulate a hypergraph with maximum node degree d (in a
hypergraph, an edge can connect more than two nodes). What is the worst-case slowdown
factor if the emulation is done by the EREW PRAM?
d. Either prove, by constructing a worst-case example, that the upper bound of part (c) is tight
or try to improve your bound.
17.7. Butterfly emulation of a degree-d network
a.
b.
Prove the existence of a perfect matching in any p × p bipartite graph with uniform node
degree d (Section 17.1).
State and prove a more general result relating to the emulation of an architecture characterized by a directed graph with maximum node in- and out-degrees of d i n and d o u t ,
respectively, on a butterfly network.
17.8. Distributed shared memory
Show that in each of the following two cases, the butterfly network can emulate the PRAM
with worst-case O(log p) slowdown and no data replication.
a. The number m of shared-memory locations and the number p of processors satisfy m =
O(p).
b. The m memory locations are divided into O(p) banks. Shared data structures and memory
accesses are organized so that no two processors ever need to access the same memory
bank.
17.9. Optimal scheduling
a. Show that the list scheduling algorithm of Section 17.4 yields an optimal schedule for p = 1.
b. It was mentioned in Section 17.3 that a task graph with unit-time tasks can be optimally
scheduled on two processors using a deterministic polynomial-time algorithm. Show that
the list scheduling algorithm discussed in Section 17.4 is such an algorithm.
c. Provide an example to show that the list scheduling algorithm of Section 17.4 is not optimal
for three processors.
d. Provide an example to show that the list scheduling algorithm of Section 17.4 is not optimal
for two processors if task execution times are one or two units.
e. It has been argued that replacing a task with running time of k units with a chain of k
unit-time tasks converts the scheduling problem of part (d) to one with unit-time tasks that
can be optimally solved by a list scheduler per the result of part (b). What is wrong with
this argument?
17.10. List scheduling
Let us call the task graph of Fig. 17.5 with unit-time tasks “version U” of the task graph. We
saw that the list scheduling algorithm introduced in Section 17.4 is optimal for this version U.
Define version E/O of the task graph as one in which all odd-numbered tasks are unit-time but
even-numbered tasks take twice as long.
366
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
a. Is the list scheduling algorithm of Section 17.4 optimal for version E/O with p = 2?
b. Repeat part (a) with p = 3.
17.11. List scheduling
Modify the list scheduling algorithm of Section 17.4 so that the slack of each task, i.e., the
difference between its latest possible execution time (to meet the minimum T∞ running time)
and its earliest possible execution time in view of task interdependencies, is used for assigning
priorities. Apply the modified algorithm to both examples of Section 17.4 and discuss.
17.12. Amdahl’s law
Consider a task graph that begins with one input node of running time ƒ/2, then branches out
into a very large number m of parallel nodes of running time (1 – ƒ)/m each, and finally
converges into a single output node of running time ƒ/2. Assume that m >> p.
a. Show that Brent’s scheduling theorem applied to this task graph yields Amdahl’s law.
b. Formulate the “good-news” corollaries, discussed near the end of Section 17.5, for this
case.
17.13. Brent’s scheduling theorem
a. Show that the scheduling algorithm implicitly defined in the proof of Brent’s scheduling
theorem does not yield an optimal schedule for the task graph of Fig. 17.5 with p = 2.
b. Construct a T 1 -node task graph, with unit-time tasks, that can be scheduled in T 1 /2 time
steps with p = 2 but that leads to a  3T 1 /4  -step schedule using the algorithm of part (a).
Hint: The graph must contain many nodes that can be scheduled at virtually any time before
the final node is to be executed but that are scheduled very early by the above algorithm.
17.14. Real-time scheduling
Real-time scheduling was very briefly discussed at the end of Section 17.4, where the
“nearest-deadline first” (NDF) and “least-laxity first” (LLF) scheduling policies were introduced.
a. Show that with unit-time tasks, the NDF scheduling policy is optimal in that if the task
graph can be scheduled to meet all deadlines, it can be scheduled using the NDF policy.
b. Show that the NDF scheduling policy is not optimal with non-unit-time tasks.
c. Show that the LLF scheduling policy is optimal with unit-time or non-unit-time tasks.
17.15. Load balancing by data redistribution
Load balancing may sometimes be required as a result of processor failures rather than
unpredictable execution times. Study the implications of various data redistribution schemes
in iterative matrix computations in which matrix elements are recomputed based on the values
in a small neighborhood around them [Uyar88].
17.16. Dataflow computation
a . Draw a dataflow graph for computing the roots of the quadratic equation ax² + bx + c = 0.
b. Derive schedules for executing this computation with one, two, or three arithmetic units,
assuming that each arithmetic operation is a unit-time task. Ignore the control overhead.
c. Repeat part (b), this time assuming that addition, multiplication/squaring, and division/square-rooting take one, three, and seven time units, respectively.
d . Modify your dataflow graph to yield minimal execution time with the assumptions of part
(c).
EMULATION AND SCHEDULING
367
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Adve96]
[Bert89]
[Bokh93]
[ElRe95]
[Harr94]
[Lee94]
[Leig92]
[Prot96]
[Rabi89]
[Stan95]
[Upfa87]
[Uyar88]
Adve, S. V., and K. Gharachorloo, “Shared Memory Consistency Models: A Tutorial,” IEEE
Computer, Vol. 29, No. 12, pp. 66–76, December 1996.
Bertsekas, D. P., and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods,
Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Bokhari, S. H., “A Network Flow Model for Load Balancing in Circuit-Switched Multicomputers,”
IEEE Trans. Parallel Distributed Systems, Vol. 4, No. 6, pp. 649–657, June 1993.
El-Rewini, H., H. H. Ali, and T. Lewis, “Task Scheduling in Multiprocessing Systems,” IEEE
Computer, Vol. 28, No. 12, pp. 27–37, December 1995.
Harris, T. J., “A Survey of PRAM Simulation Techniques,” ACM Computing Surveys, Vol. 26, No.
2, pp. 187–206, June 1994.
Lee, B., and A. R. Hurson, “Dataflow Architectures and Multithreading,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 27,
No. 8, pp. 27–39, August 1994.
Leighton, F. T., Introduction to Parallel Algorithms and Architectures: Arrays, Trees, Hypercubes,
Morgan Kaufmann, 1992.
Protic, J., M. Tomacevic, and V. Milutinovic, “Distributed Shared Memory: Concepts and Systems,”
IEEE Parallel & Distributed Technology, Vol. 4, No. 2, pp. 63–79, Summer 1996.
Rabin, M., “Efficient Dispersal of Information for Security, Load Balancing, and Fault Tolerance,”
J. ACM, Vol. 36, No. 2, pp. 335–348, April 1989.
Stankovic, J. A., M. Spuri, M. Di Natale, and G. C. Buttazzo, “Implications of Classical Scheduling
Results for Real-Time Systems,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 28, No. 6, pp. 16–25, June 1995.
Upfal, E., and A. Wigderson, “How to Share Memory in a Distributed System,” J. ACM, Vol. 34, No.
1, pp. 116–127, January 1987.
Uyar, M. U., and A. P. Reeves, “Dynamic Fault Reconfiguration in a Mesh-Connected MIMD
Environment,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 37, pp. 1191–1205, October 1988.
This page intentionally left blank.
18
Data Storage, Input,
and Output
When discussing the implementation aspects of shared-memory machines in
Section 6.6, we learned of the importance of proper data distribution within
memory banks to allow conflict-free parallel access to required data elements
by multiple processors. In this chapter, we elaborate further on the problem of
data distribution in parallel systems, particularly of the distributed-memory
variety. In particular, we study two complementary approaches to the memory
latency problem: latency tolerance/hiding and data caching. Additionally, we
deal with data input and output explicitly. Thus far, we have conveniently
ignored the I/O problem, assuming, in effect, that the needed data fit in the local
memories of participating processors or that the right data are recognized
magically and made memory-resident before they are first accessed. Chapter
topics are:
18.1.
18.2.
18.3.
18.4.
18.5.
18.6.
Data access problems and caching
Cache coherence protocols
Multithreading and latency hiding
Parallel I/O technology
Redundant disk arrays
Interfaces and standards
369
This page intentionally left blank.
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
18.1.
371
DATA ACCESS PROBLEMS AND CACHING
Memory access latency is a major performance hindrance in parallel systems. Even in
sequential processors, the gap between processor and memory speeds has created difficult
design issues for computer architects, necessitating pipelined memory access and multiple
levels of cache memories to bridge the gap. In vector processors, the mismatch between
processor and memory speeds is made tolerable through the provision of vector registers
(that can be loaded/stored as computations continue with data in other registers) and pipeline
chaining, allowing intermediate results to be forwarded between function units without first
being stored in memory or even in registers.
Parallel processing aggravates this speed gap. In a shared-memory system, the memory
access mechanism is much more complicated, and thus slower, than in uniprocessors. In
distributed-memory machines, severe speed penalties are associated with access to nonlocal
data. In both cases, three complementary approaches are available to mediate the problem:
1. Distributing the data so that each item is located where it is needed most. This
involves an initial assignment and periodic redistribution as conditions change.
2. Automatically bringing the most useful, and thus most frequently accessed, data
into local memory whenever possible. This is known as data caching.
3. Making the processors’ computational throughput relatively insensitive to the
memory access latency. This is referred to as latency tolerance or latency hiding.
These methods may be used in combination to achieve the best results. For example, with
caching, we may still need latency tolerance in cases where the required data are not found
in the cache. Option 1, or judicious distribution of data, is possible in applications where the
data sets and their scopes of relevance are static or change rather slowly. Some of the issues
discussed in Section 6.6 are relevant here. We will discuss Option 3, or latency tolerance/hiding methods, in Section 18.3. In the remainder of this section, we introduce some notions
relating to Option 2 to facilitate our discussion of cache coherence protocols in Section 18.2.
This review is by necessity brief. Interested readers can consult Patterson and Hennessy
[Patt96], pp. 375–427, for an in-depth discussion.
A cache is any fast memory that is used to store useful or frequently used data. A
processor cache, e.g., is a very fast (usually static RAM) memory unit holding the instructions and data that were recently accessed by the processor or that are likely to be needed in
the near future. A Level-2 cache is somewhat slower than a processor cache, but still faster
than the high-capacity dynamic RAM main memory. A disk cache or file cache is usually a
portion of main memory that is set aside to hold blocks of data from the secondary memory.
This allows multiple records or pages to be read and/or updated with a single disk access,
which is extremely slow compared with processor or even main memory speeds.
To access a required data word, the cache is consulted first. Finding the required data in
the cache is referred to as a cache hit; not finding it is a cache miss. An important parameter
in evaluating the effectiveness of cache memories of any type is the hit rate, defined as the
fraction of data accesses that can be satisfied from the cache as opposed to the slower memory
that sits beyond it. A hit rate of 95%, e.g., means that only 1 in 20 accesses, on the average,
will not find the required data in the cache. With a hit rate r, cache access cycle of Cfast , and
slower memory access cycle of C slow , the effective memory cycle time is
372
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
This equation is derived with the assumption that when data are not found in the cache, they
must first be brought into the cache (in Cslow time) and then accessed from the cache (in C fast
time). Simultaneous forwarding of data from the slow memory to both the processor and the
cache reduces the effective delay somewhat, but the above simple formula is adequate for
our purposes. We see that when r is close to 1, an effective memory cycle close to Cfast is
achieved. Therefore, the cache provides the illusion that the entire memory space consists
of fast memory.
In typical microprocessors, accessing the cache memory is part of the instruction
execution cycle. As long as the required data are in the cache, instruction execution continues
at full speed. When a cache miss occurs and the slower memory must be accessed, instruction
execution is interrupted. The cache miss penalty is usually specified in terms of the number
of clock cycles that will be wasted because the processor has to stall until the data become
available. In a microprocessor that executes an average of one instruction per clock cycle
when there is no cache miss, a cache miss penalty of four cycles means that four cycles of
delay will be added to the instruction execution time. Given a hit rate of 95%, the effective
instruction execution delay will be 1 + 0.05 × 4 = 1.2 cycles per instruction (CPI).
A cache memory is characterized by several design parameters that influence its
implementation cost and performance (hit rate). In the following description, we limit our
attention to a processor cache that is located between the central processor and main memory,
i.e., we assume that there is no Level-2 cache. Similar considerations apply to other types of
caches. The most important cache parameters are
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cache size in bytes or words. A larger cache can hold more of the program’s useful
data but is more costly and likely to be slower.
Block or cache-line size, defined as the unit of data transfer between the cache and
main memory. With a larger cache line, more data are brought into the cache with
each miss. This can improve the hit rate but also tends to tie up parts of the cache
with data of lesser value.
Placement policy determining where an incoming cache line can be stored. More
flexible policies imply higher hardware cost and may or may not have performance
benefits in view of their more complex, and thus slower, process for locating the
required data in the cache.
Replacement policy determining which of several existing cache blocks (into which
a new cache line can be mapped) should be overwritten. Typical policies include
choosing a random block or the least recently used block.
Write policy determining if updates to cache words are immediately forwarded to
the main memory (write-through policy) or modified cache blocks are copied back
to main memory in their entirety if and when they must be replaced in the cache
(write-back or copy-back policy).
The most commonly used placement policy for processor caches is the set-associative
method, which, at the extreme of single-block sets, degenerates into a direct-mapped cache.
The read operation from a set-associative cache with a set size of s = 2 is depicted in Fig.
18.1. The memory address supplied by the processor is composed of tag and index parts.
DATA STORAGE INPUT AND OUTPUT
373
Figure 18.1. Data Storage and access in a two-way set-associative cache.
The index part, itself consisting of a block address and word offset within the block, identifies
a set of s cache words that can potentially hold the required data, while the tag specifies one
of the many cache lines in the address space that map into the same set of s cache blocks by
the set-associative placement policy. For each memory access, all s candidate words, along
with the tags associated with their respective blocks, are read out. The s tags are then
simultaneously compared with the desired tag, resulting in two possible outcomes:
1.
2.
None of the stored tags matches the desired tag. The data parts are ignored and a
cache miss signal is asserted in order to initiate a block transfer from main memory.
The ith stored tag, which corresponds to the placement option i (0 ≤ i < s ), matches
the desired tag. The word read out from the block corresponding to the ith placement
option is chosen as the data output.
As a practical matter, each cache block may have a valid bit that indicates whether or
not it holds valid data. This valid bit is also read out along with the tag and is ANDed with
the comparison result to indicate a match with valid data. A block of a write-back cache may
also have a dirty bit that is set to 1 with every write update to the block and is used at the
time of block replacement to decide if a block to be overwritten needs to be copied back into
main memory.
374
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
18.2. CACHE COHERENCE PROTOCOLS
As briefly discussed in Section 4.3, placement of shared data into the cache memories
of multiple processors creates the possibility of the multiple copies becoming inconsistent.
If caching of shared modifiable data is to be allowed, hardware provisions for enforcing
cache coherence are needed. There exist many cache coherence protocols that share some
fundamental properties but that differ in implementation details. The differences typically
result from attempts to optimize the protocols for particular hardware platforms and/or
application environments. In what follows, we will review two representative examples, one
from the class of snoopy protocols and another from the class of directory-based schemes.
Figure 18.2 shows four data blocks w, x, y, and z in the shared memory of a parallel
processor along with some copies in the processor caches. The primed values y' and z'
represent modified or updated versions of blocks y and z, respectively. The state of a data
block being cached can be one of the following:
Multiple-consistent. Several caches contain copies of w; the cache copies are consistent
with each other and with the copy of w in the main memory.
Single-consistent. Only one cache contains a copy of x and that copy is consistent with
the copy in the main memory.
Single-inconsistent. Only one cache contains a copy of y which has been modified and
is thus different from the copy in main memory.
Invalid. A cache contains an invalid copy of z; the reason for this invalidity is that z has
been modified in a different cache which is now holding a single consistent copy.
Clearly, we want to avoid having multiple inconsistent cache copies. For this reason, when
there are multiple cache copies and one of the copies is updated, we must either invalidate
all other cache copies (write-invalidate policy) or else modify all of these copies as well
(write-update policy).
Snoopy cache coherence protocols are so named because they require that all caches
“snoop” on the activities of other caches, typically by monitoring the transactions on a bus,
Figure 18.2 Various types of cached data blocks in a parallel processor with global memory
and processor caches.
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
375
to determine if the data that they hold will be affected. Several implementations of snoopy
protocols can be found in bus-based shared-memory multiprocessors, including machines
in the Sequent Symmetry series which use two-way set-associative caches.
A bus-based write-invalidate write-back snoopy cache coherence protocol can be
implemented by a simple finite-state control mechanism within each participating cache (Fig.
18.3). For simplicity, we do not distinguish between the single-consistent and multiple-consistent states discussed above and collectively refer to them as the shared state (top right of
Fig. 18.3) where the processors can freely read data from the block but have to change the
block’s state to exclusive before they can write into it (top left of Fig. 18.3). The shared and
exclusive states might have been called valid clean and valid dirty, respectively.
The state transitions in Fig. 18.3 are explained next. Each transition is labeled with the
event that triggers it, followed by the action(s) that must be taken (if any). Possible events
are CPU read/write requests, a cache hit or miss, and read/write miss notifications from other
caches as observed on the bus. Possible actions are putting a read or write miss notification
on the bus and writing back the block into main memory.
1. CPU read hit. A shared block remains shared; an exclusive block remains exclusive.
2. CPU read miss. A block is selected for replacement; if the block to be overwritten
is invalid or shared, then “read miss” is put on the bus; if it is exclusive, it will have
to be written back into main memory. In all cases, the new state of the block is
“shared.”
3. CPU write hit. An exclusive block remains exclusive; a shared block becomes
exclusive and a “write miss” is put on the bus so that other copies of the block are
invalidated.
4. CPU write miss. A block is selected for replacement; if the block to be overwritten
is invalid or shared, then “write miss” is put on the bus; if it is exclusive, it will have
to be written back into main memory. In all cases, the new state of the block is
“exclusive.”
5. Bus read miss. This is only relevant if the block is exclusive, in which case the block
must be written back to main memory. The two copies of the block will then be
Figure 18.3. Finite-state control mechanism for a bus-based snoopy cache coherence protocol.
376
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
6.
consistent with each other and with the copy in main memory; hence the new state
will be “shared.”
Bus write miss. If the block is exclusive, it must be written back into main memory;
in any case, the new state of the block becomes “invalid.”
In a directory-based coherence protocol, a centralized or distributed directory is used to
maintain data on the whereabouts of the various cache line copies and on the relationship of
those copies. There are two finite-state control mechanisms, one for the individual cache
blocks and one for directory entry representing all of the copies of the cache block. The
finite-state control for individual cache blocks is quite similar to that shown in Fig. 18.3,
except that interaction with other caches is accomplished through messages sent to, and
received from, the directory rather than by monitoring the bus. We leave the required
modifications to the state diagram of Fig. 18.3 to make it correspond to a directory-based
scheme as an exercise for the reader.
The directory entry corresponding to a cache block contains information on the current
state of the block and its cache copies, as described below. The directory receives messages
from various cache units regarding particular blocks and in response, updates the block’s
state and, if required by the protocol, sends messages to other caches that may hold copies
of that block. Figure 18.4 depicts the state transition diagram for a directory entry. The three
states of a data block, from the viewpoint of the directory, are uncached (no cache holds a
copy), shared (read-only), and exclusive (read/write). When in the exclusive state, a data
block is viewed as being “owned” by the single cache that holds a copy of the block. In this
state, the main memory copy of the block is not up-to-date. Thus, to overwrite the block, the
owner must perform a write-back operation.
The state transitions in Fig. 18.4 are explained next. Each transition is labeled with the
type of message that triggers it, followed by the action(s) taken. Possible messages arriving
at a directory are read miss, write miss, and data write-back. Possible actions are sending
data to a requesting cache, fetching data from another cache, requesting invalidation in
another cache, and updating the sharing set (list of caches that hold a copy of the block).
Figure 18.4. States and transitions for a directory entry in a directory-based coherence protocol
(c denotes the cache sending the message).
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
377
Red miss. For a shared block, its data value is sent to the requesting cache unit,
and the new cache is added to the sharing set. For an exclusive block, a fetch message
is sent to the owner cache unit, the data are returned to the requesting cache, and
the new cache is included in the sharing set. For an uncached block, the data value
is returned to the requesting cache, which now forms the singleton sharing set. The
block remains or becomes “shared.”
Write miss. For a shared block, an invalidate message is sent to member caches of
the sharing set, a new singleton sharing set consisting of the requesting cache is
built, and the data value is returned to the requesting cache unit. For an exclusive
block, a message is sent to the old owner to fetch the data and to invalidate the
existing copy. The requesting cache becomes the new owner and thus the only
member of the sharing set. For an uncached block, the data value is returned to the
requesting cache which is now the block’s owner. The block remains or becomes
“exclusive.”
Data write-back. This can only occur for an exclusive block. The sharing set is
emptied and the block becomes “uncached.”
The sharing set can be implemented in different ways. In the full-map approach, a
bit-vector, containing 1 bit for each cache unit, indicates the cache that owns the block or all
of the caches that hold read-only copies. This is quite efficient when the number of caches
is small and fixed. A more flexible approach, typically used in distributed directories, is to
use a singly or doubly linked list, with each directory holding a pointer to the next/previous
directory that has a copy of the block. Notifications are then done by a chain of messages
forwarded along the list from each directory to the next in sequence.
18.3. MULTITHREADING AND LATENCY HIDING
The emulation of a 2 qq-processor PRAM on a 2q-processor distributed-memory system,
with its processors interconnected via a butterfly network (Section 17.2), is an example of
methods for hiding the remote memory access latency in a NUMA parallel processor. The
general idea of latency hiding methods is to provide each processor with some useful work
to do as it waits for remote memory access requests to be satisfied. In the ideal extreme,
latency hiding allows communications to be completely overlapped with computation,
leading to high efficiency and hardware utilization.
Multithreading is a practical mechanism for latency hiding (Fig. 18.5). A multithreaded
computation typically starts with a sequential thread, followed by some supervisory overhead
to set up (schedule) various independent threads, followed by computation and communication (remote accesses) for individual threads, and concluded by a synchronization step to
terminate the threads prior to starting the next unit of parallel work. Thread computations
and remote accesses are separated in Fig. 18.5 for clarity, but they can be interleaved.
When in between the two shaded boxes in Fig. 18.5, a processor is working on a thread
and the thread requires a remote memory access before it can continue, the processor places
the thread in a wait queue and switches to a different thread. This switching of context in the
processor involves some overhead which must be considerably less than the remote access
latency for the scheme to be efficient. A processor for multithreaded computation is thus
378
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 18.5. The concept of multithreaded parallel computation.
likely to have multiple register sets, one per active thread, in order to minimize the context
switching overhead. The higher the remote memory access delay, the larger is the number
of threads required to successfully hide the latency. At some point in its computation, the
newly activated thread may require a remote memory access. Thus, another context switch
occurs, and so on.
The access requests of the threads that are in the wait state may be completed out of
order because, e.g., they involve accesses to memory modules at different network distances
or are routed through paths with varying congestions. It is thus common to tag each access
request with a unique thread identifier so that when the result is returned, the processor knows
which of the waiting threads should be activated. Thread identifiers are sometimes called
continuations. The Tera MTA parallel computer system (see Section 21.4) has hardware
support for 10-bit continuations, thus allowing up to 1024 threads awaiting remote memory
accesses.
Note that application of multithreading is not restricted to a parallel processing environment but offers advantages even on a uniprocessor. A uniprocessor that is provided with
multiple independent threads to execute, can switch among them on each cache miss, on
every load, after each instruction, or after each fixed-size block of instructions, for improved
performance. The processor may need multiple register sets (to reduce the context switching
overhead) and a larger cache memory (to hold recently referenced data for several threads),
but the benefits can outweigh the costs. Hirata et al. [Hira92] report speed-ups of 2.0, 3.7,
and 5.8 in a processor that has nine functional units and executes two, four, and eight
independent threads, respectively.
It is interesting to note that a form of (redundant) parallel processing has been suggested,
and shown to be beneficial, in closing the gap between computation speed and off-chip
memory access latency. In data-scalar computation [Burg97], which is in a sense the opposite
of data-parallel or SIMD-type parallel processing, multiple copies of the same program are
run on several nodes, each of which holds a fraction of the program’s address space. Each
write is performed locally by one of the processors and thus involves no off-chip communication. When a processor needs to read data from a nonlocal memory address, it simply idles
until the required data word arrives. When read access to local memory is performed, the
data that are read out are also broadcast to all other processors that have already encountered
the same access, or will do so shortly. The elimination of off-chip writes, as well as read
379
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
requests, can lead to speed gains of up to 50% with two processors and up to 100% with four
processors [Burg97].
18.4. PARALLEL I/O TECHNOLOGY
An important requirement for highly parallel systems is the provision of high-bandwidth
I/O capability. For some data-intensive applications, the high processing power of a massively parallel system is not of much value unless the I/O subsystem can keep up with the
processors. A problem that illustrates the need for high-speed I/O is that of detecting faint
radio pulsars whose solution involves an FFT computation of 8 to 64 billion points. Solving
this problem requires an I/O throughput of at least 1 billion bytes per second (1 GB/s)
[Thak96].
Some architectures can be easily augmented to incorporate I/O capabilities. For example, the unused links at the boundary of a 2D or 3D mesh can be assigned for I/O functions.
In our treatment of 2D mesh algorithms (Chapters 9–12), we specified I/O explicitly in some
cases, while for others, we assumed implicit I/O by identifying which data are to be held by
each processor as the algorithm is executed. In a hypercube, each node may be provided with
an extra port for I/O, with these ports connected directly, via a smaller number of I/O buses,
or through a more complex switching mechanism, to several high-speed I/O controllers. In
addition to providing access paths to I/O, one needs high-bandwidth devices that can supply
the parallel machine with huge amounts of data at the required rate. Over the years, various
solutions to the parallel I/O problem have been proposed and studied.
Before discussing parallel I/O, it is instructive to review modern magnetic disk technology, which forms the cornerstone of fast I/O on most computers. Figure 18.6 shows a
multiple-platter high-capacity magnetic disk. Each platter has two recording surfaces and a
read/write head mounted on an arm. The access arms are attached to an actuator that can
move the heads radially in order to align them with a desired cylinder (i.e., a set of tracks,
one per recording surface). A sector or disk block is part of a track that forms the unit of data
transfer to/from the disk. Access to a block of data on disk typically consists of three phases:
1.
2.
3.
Cylinder seek: moving the heads to the desired cylinder (seek time)
Sector alignment: waiting until the desired sector is under the head (rotational
latency)
Data transfer: reading the bytes out as they pass under the head (transfer time)
Of course, when accessing consecutive or nearby blocks because of data locality, the
overhead of a random seek and average rotational latency of one-half disk revolution (each
being on the order of several milliseconds) is not paid for each block.
Here are the density data for a vintage 1994 disk drive [Chen94]:
2627
Cylinders
×
21
Tracks/cylinder
×
99
Sectors/track
×
512
Bytes/sector
≈
2.8 GB
The above disk uses 5.25-inch platters, with full rotation time of 11.1 ms, minimum
(single-cylinder) seek time of 1.7 ms, maximum (full-stroke) seek time of 22.5 ms, and
average (random cylinder-to-cylinder) seek time of 11.0 ms. It can transfer data at a rate of
380
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 18.6. Moving-head magnetic disk elements.
4.6 MB/s. Even ignoring seek time and rotational latency, such a data transfer rate is
inadequate for many parallel processing applications.
One of the earliest attempts at achieving high-throughput parallel I/O was the use of
head-per-track disks (Fig. 18.7), with their multiple read/write heads capable of being
activated at the same time. The seek (radial head movement) time of a disk can be
approximately modeled by the equation
Seek time = a + b
where c is the seek distance in cylinders. Typical values for the constants a and b are 2 and
0.4 ms, respectively. Head-per-track or fixed-head disks, as originally developed, were meant
to eliminate seek time and were therefore designed to use a single head at any given time,
with the active head selected electronically. Thus, they had to be modified and specially
Figure 18.7. Head-per-track disk concept.
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
381
outfitted to allow high-bandwidth I/O using all heads concurrently, which made them even
more expensive.
In fact, it was recognized early on that by adding a little extra logic to the already
complex read–write electronics of a head-per-track disk, a massively parallel processor can
be developed that searches the disk data on the fly. Such a device eliminates the need for
reading massive amounts of data from the disk into a parallel processor, in effect allowing
us to replace the parallel processor and its fast I/O system with an intelligent I/O filter and
a high-performance sequential host computer [Parh72]. However, this only works for certain
types of database and text-storage/retrieval applications.
A similar idea was the concurrent use of multiple heads provided on the same track in
order to reduce the average rotational latency. If, for example, two diametrically opposite
heads are provided to reduce the average rotational latency from one-half to one-fourth
revolution (Fig. 18.7), then the heads, when activated simultaneously, can be used to read
out or write two sectors on each track. This scheme is beneficial for both fixed- and
moving-head disks, but again requires special disk units to be developed for parallel systems.
In the mid-1980s, with the personal computer market flourishing and the prices of hard
disks for use with such PCs dropping at an astonishing rate, parallel machine designers
reaIized that any long-term solution to parallel I/O must take advantage of such commodity
products. Developing one-of-a-kind I/O subsystems, with their attendant design, maintenance, reliability, scalability, and obsolescence problems, no longer made economic sense.
Thus, the use of disk arrays became dominant. Disk storage technology and price/performance continue to improve. Early disk drives cost in excess of U.S. $1000 per megabyte of
capacity. Today the cost per megabyte is about 104 time lower, representing an average
improvement factor of 10 per decade. With new techniques allowing the recording of several
gigabytes of data on 1 cm² of disk surface, this downward trend shows no sign of slowing.
Provision of many disks that can be accessed concurrently is only part of the solution
to the I/O problem in parallel systems. Development of suitable file structures and access
strategies in order to reduce the I/O overhead is perhaps more important. A common
technique of file organization in parallel systems is declustering or striping of the files in
order to allow parallel access to different parts of a single file. A striping unit is a collection
of data items stored contiguously on a disk, with round-robin placement of the units forming
a file on multiple disks. Such a unit can range from a single bit to a complete file block
depending on the application. However, if multiple processors independently read from or
write into small portions of the file, the I/O access overhead might become excessive. The
mechanical movement of disks and their read/write heads is extremely slow compared with
processor speeds; thus, even reading an entire row or column of a matrix at once may not be
enough to reduce the overhead to an acceptable level.
In general, knowledge of the collective I/O patterns for all processors is required to allow
global optimization for higher I/O performance. In particular, it may be possible to devise a
globally optimal I/O strategy in which processors access more data than they need, forwarding some of the data to other processors that may need them, and discarding the rest. This
strategy allows us to replace many small I/O requests with fewer large I/O accesses, taking
advantage of the relatively faster interprocessor transfers to route to where they are
needed [Thak96].
The problem of parallel I/O has received considerable attention in recent years. Processor speeds have improved by several orders of magnitude since parallel I/O became an issue,
382
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
while disk speeds have remained virtually stagnant. The use of large disk caches, afforded
by higher capacity and cheaper semiconductor memories, does not solve the entire I/O
problem, just as ordinary caches only partially compensate for slow main memories. Various
technologies for parallel I/O, along with tools and standardization issues, are under extensive
scrutiny within the framework of annual workshops [IOPD].
18.5. REDUNDANT DISK ARRAYS
Compared with the large, expensive disks that were being developed for the highperformance computer market, PC-type hard disks are small, slow, and unreliable. Capacity
is the least serious of these problems in view of steady improvements in disk technology
(multi-gigabyte units are now commonplace and terabyte units will be available shortly) and
the possibility of simply using more disks. Conceptually, both performance and reliability
can be improved through redundancy: Storing multiple copies of a file, e.g., allows us to read
the copy that is most readily accessible and to tolerate the loss of one or more copies related
to disk crashes and other hardware problems. For these reasons, disk array technology began
with the notion of redundancy built in. The acronym “RAID,” for redundant array of
inexpensive disks, reflects this view [Gang94]. Of course, nowadays, there is no such thing
as an expensive disk; the “I” in RAID has thus been redesignated as “independent.”
The reference point for RAID architectures is Level 0, or RAID0 for short, which
involves the use of multiple disks for I/O performance improvement without any redundancy
for fault tolerance. For example, if a file is declustered or striped across disks 0 and 1, then
file data can be accessed at twice the speed, once they have been located on the two disks.
The performance gain is signifacant only for large files, as otherwise the disk access delay
dwarfs the readout or write time. In fact, striping degrades the performance for small files,
unless the multiple disks are synchronized. This is because the data access time is now
dictated by the larger of the two disk head movements and rotational latencies. Synchronization of multiple disks is again undesirable because it involves costly modifications to
commercial off-the-shelf components.
RAID1 takes the above concept and introduces fault tolerance via mirrored disks (Fig.
18.8). For each data disk, there is a backup that holds exactly the same data. If the disks are
truly inexpensive, then this doubling of size should not be a problem. However, there is a
performance overhead to be paid whether or not striping is used. Each update operation on
a file must also update the backup copy. If updating of the backup is done right away, then
the larger of the two disk head movements will dictate the delay. If backup updates are queued
and performed when convenient, then the probability of data loss from a disk crash increases.
An obvious way of reducing the factor-of-2 redundancy of mirrored disk arrays is to
encode, rather than duplicate, the data. RAID2 used a single-error-correcting Hamming code,
combined with striping, to allow for single-disk fault tolerance. This idea proved somewhat
impractical because striping files across several disk in order to reduce the redundancy level
leads to severe performance problems.
In RAID3, data are striped across multiple disks, with parity or checksum information
stored on a separate redundant disk. For example, with parity, the file may be four-way striped
at the bit or byte level and the XOR of 4 bits or bytes stored on a fifth disk. If a data disk
fails, its data can be reconstructed as the XOR of the other three data disks and the parity
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
383
Figure 18.8. Alternative data organizations on redundant disk arrays.
disk. The reconstructed data may then be stored on a spare disk that is normally unused.
Unfortunately, this scheme too has its performance problems. Using multiple parity groups
helps as it allows multiple accesses to occur concurrently. However, the full benefits of
multiple independent disks are not realized.
Because disk data are usually accessed in units of sectors rather than bits or bytes,
RAID4 applies the parity or checksum to disk sectors. In this case, striping does not affect
small files that fit entirely on one sector. However, even in these cases, multiple files cannot
be modified simultaneously in view of the need to access the parity disk at the same time.
When writing any new sector, the parity disk must be accessed to get the old parity for
computing the new parity:
New parity = New sector data ⊕ Old sector data ⊕ Old parity
The new parity must then be written onto the parity disk. Accesses to the parity disk thus
constitutes a serious performance bottleneck.
In RAID5, the above problem is solved by distributing the parity data on multiple disks
instead of putting them on a dedicated disk. As seen in the example depicted in Fig. 18.8,
the parity data for sector 0 through 3 are stored on the rightmost disk, whereas sectors 4
through 7 have their parity data on a different disk. This scheme distributes the parity accesses
and thus eases the performance bottleneck resulting from parity updates.
Note that in all RAID variants, reading from the disks can be performed independently,
with no parity access conflict, assuming that the data are adequately protected by standard
error-detecting coding schemes.
384
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
A new variant of RAID, sometimes referred to as RAID Level 6, combines the above
ideas with a log-structured file system. In a log-structured file, sectors are not modified in
place but rather a fresh copy is made, in a different location, with each update. This method
requires special support for data mapping but allows the system to write data to whichever
disk that is available. As an added benefit, data compression methods can be applied because
file expansion creates no special problem. For example, in Storage Tek’s 9200 Iceberg disk
array system, 13 data disks, 2 parity disks, and a spare disk are used. Updates are held in
nonvolatile cache memory (battery-backed) until there are enough data to fill an array
cylinder. The data are then written onto an empty cylinder in compressed form. Contents of
nearly empty cylinders are relocated by a background garbage collection mechanism to free
up complete cylinders.
Other commercial RAID products include IBM’s Ramac disk array, Hewlett-Packard’s
XLR1200 disk array, and Data General’s Clariion disk array. IBM’s product is a Level-5
system, while the latter two products offer some flexibility to the user in reconfiguring the
data organization based on application needs.
Although disk arrays have gained acceptance as high-performance I/O subsystems,
research is actively continuing into various problems and performance issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Data distribution patterns and their effects on performance under different work
loads (e.g., on-line transaction processing, scientific benchmarks). Aspects of
performance include read time, write time, and rebuild time, with the latter being
less critical for systems composed of highly reliable components.
Combination of data organization with data caching schemes to improve efficiency.
Redundancy schemes to provide greater robustness (e.g., tolerance to double disk
failures).
Coding schemes that imply lower storage overhead and/or simpler rebuilding.
Architectural designs that increase the available bandwidth.
In the past few decades, the demise of magnetic storage media, and their replacement by
faster solid-state memories, has been predicted more than once. It appears, however, that
with the continuing improvement in technology, magnetic disks and disk arrays may be here
to stay.
18.6. INTERFACES AND STANDARDS
Data in parallel systems come from a variety of sources, including local/remote memory
modules, secondary storage devices, and network interfaces. As is the case for uniprocessors,
it is desirable that certain aspects of the mechanisms required to gain access to data be
standardized to allow flexible and easily expandable designs. Adherence to standards could
allow various parts of a parallel system to be modified or upgraded without affecting the rest
of the design. Additionally, use of standard interfaces facilitates the integration of components and subsystems from different suppliers into efficient and usable parallel systems. In
the remainder of this section, we present brief overviews of two such standards: the Scalable
Coherent Interface and High-Performance Parallel Interface.
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
385
Figure 18.9. Two categories of data blocks and the structure of the sharing set in the Scalable
Coherent Interface.
The Scalable Coherent Interface (SCI) standard was developed to facilitate the implementation of large-scale cache-coherent parallel systems using existing or future interconnection technologies. The interface, which is synchronously clocked, can interconnect a large
number of nodes (each with a processor, attached memory, and possibly even I/O devices)
using a ring or crossbar structure. A directory-based cache coherence protocol is part of the
SCI standard. A doubly-linked list of shared data is maintained in each participating cache
and forms a part of a shared, and concurrently accessible, data structure. This shared structure
has no size limit, making the system totally scalable in theory. However, the overhead of
maintaining and updating a large shared structure puts a practical limit on the system size.
The directory scheme of SCI is depicted in Fig. 18.9. Data blocks can be noncoherent
or coherent. Noncoherent blocks essentially contain private data. Processors have the option
of bypassing the coherence protocol when requesting data from main memory. Cache c can
request a coherent copy of a data block from main memory as a result of a read miss, a write
miss, or a write hit. We only describe the required actions in the case of a read miss; the
reader should be able to supply the details for the other two cases. If the block is noncached,
then the memory returns the data, changes the block’s state to “cached,” and sets the head
pointer to point to c. For a cached block, the old head pointer is also sent to the requesting
cache so that it can set its forward pointer accordingly. Also, the previous head block must
set its backward pointer to point to c. In either case, the backward pointer of the block in
Cache c is set to point to the data block in main memory.
The High-Performance Parellel Interface (HiPPI) is a point-to-point connection scheme
between two devices (typically a supercomputer and a peripheral) at either 0.8 or 1.6 Gb/s
over a (copper) cable that is no longer than 25 m. Packets in HiPPI are sent as a sequence of
bursts, where each burst is a group of 1 to 256 words of 32 (0.8 Gb/s) or 64 bits (1.6 Gb/s).
The HiPPI cables are very wide, so a clock rate of only 25 MHz is needed on the cable.
Packet length can range from 2 B to 4 GB. In addition to data, each HiPPI packet contains
a higher layer protocol identifier and up to 1016 B of control information.
HiPPI, which is an ANSI standard, includes electrical, signaling, and connector specifications as well as the definition of a connectionlike packet framing protocol. To send data,
386
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
a device requests that it be connected to the destination device. If a connection cannot be
established, because the destination is already connected to another system, HiPPI allows
the requesting device to either wait for the destination to become available or be notified that
a conflict exists so it can try again later. HiPPI does not allow multiple simultaneous
connections to be multiplexed over a line. When a device is done sending, it asks that the
connection be terminated.
When sending variable length packets through a switch, the usual procedure is to
establish and tear down the connection after every packet, to allow maximum multiplexing
of the switch. As a result, part of the packet overhead is the time required to get a connection
request to the switch and get the answer back and for the sending device to handle the
connection setup and teardown. The connection setup and teardown times depend on the
length of the HiPPI cable.
PROBLEMS
18.1. Cache memories
A computer system has a 32-KB processor cache and a 256-KB Level-2 cache. The miss penalty
in the processor cache is 3 cycles if the required data are found in the Level-2 cache and 10
cycles if the data have to be fetched from main memory. Without misses, the machine executes
one instruction per clock cycle.
a. Determine the instruction execution rate as a function of the hit rates r1 and r 2 for the two
caches.
b. For r 1 = 0.9, what is the least value of r 2 if one instruction is to be executed per 1.5 cycles
on the average?
18.2. Cache memories
A computer system has 4 GB of byte-addressable main memory and a 64 KB cache memory
with 32B blocks.
a. Draw a diagram showing each of the components of the main memory address (i.e., how
many bits for tag, set index, and byte offset within a block) for a four-way set-associative
cache.
b. Draw a diagram similar to Fig. 18.1 to show how data are stored and accessed in the cache.
c. The performance of the computer system with four-way set-associative cache turns out to
be unsatisfactory. The designers are considering two redesign options, each implying
roughly the same additional cost. Option A is to increase the size of the cache to 128 KB.
Option B is to increase the associativity of the 64-KB cache to 16-way. Which option do
you think is more likely to result in higher overall system performance and why?
18.3. Separate instruction and data caches
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of providing separate instruction and data caches.
Which of these two caches must be larger and why? Which one would you make faster if you
had to choose?
18.4. Direct-mapped versus set-associative caches
Sketch the structure of a program and its associated data such that it produces an intolerable
amount of cache block swaps in a direct-mapped cache, performs quite well with a two-way
set-associative cache, and experiences only minor improvement if the associativity is increased
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
387
to four-way. Hint: Consider a matrix of such a size that all elements in one row or one column
map onto the same cache block when direct mapping is used.
18.5. Cache coherence
Show how Fig. 18.2 should be modified after each of the following events that occur in
sequence.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Processor 0 generates a read miss for x.
Processor 0 overwrites y' with a new block u.
Processor 1 changes z' to z''.
Processor p – 1 generates a write miss for w.
18.6. Write-through snoopy caches
In a small-scale bus-based multiprocessor, implementation of a write-through snoopy cache
protocol offers the advantage of simpler coherence enforcement. Modify the snoopy protocol
depicted in Fig. 18.3 to correspond to a write-through scheme.
18.7. Snoopy caches
In Fig. 18.3, one can split the shared state into two states called shared clean and private clean
and rename the “exclusive’” state private dirty. Draw the new stare diagram and explain if it
offers any advantage over the original one.
18.8. Directory-based cache coherence
Draw a state diagram similar to Fig. 18.3 for cache blocks in a directory-based cache coherence
protocol.
18.9. Multitasking or multithreading
Consider a master computation task that spawns a new subordinate task (subtask) after every
time unit. The computation ends after five subtasks have been created and run to completion.
Each subtask runs on a different processor.
a. What is the total running time of this computation if each subtask terminates in six time
units?
b. Repeat part (a) with the running time of each subtask uniformly distributed in [2, 10].
c. Repeat part (a) for the case where each subtask has two time units of computation and two
remote memory accesses, each taking one to three time units; assume uniform distribution
in [1, 3].
18.10. Magnetic disks
For the example moving-head disk system whose parameters were given in Section 18.4, derive
the rotation speed, approximate track density, recording density, and full disk copying time
(e.g., for backup). Also, show that the data transfer rate can be derived from the other parameters
given.
18.11. Magnetic disks
Consider the example moving-head disk system whose parameters were given in Section 18.4.
a. Derive the parameters a and b of the seek-time formula.
b. It has been suggested that for disks with a large number of cylinders, a better formula for
Derive the parameters a, b , and β if the average
seek time is
(random) seek time given is for one third of a full stroke.
c. Can you provide an intuitive justification for the added linear term in the formula of part
(b)?
388
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
18.12. Head-per-track and multiple-arm disks
A 3.5-inch disk platter contains 256 tracks on each side and rotates at 3600 rpm. Data on the
outermost track are recorded at a density of 50,000 b/inch and are read out from or written onto
the disk in 512B sectors. Radial head movement takes 1 ms per 10 cylinders or fraction thereof
(e.g., 3 ms for 27 cylinders).
a. With the head positioned on a random track, what is the average head movement in terms
of tracks and the expected seek time (for moving the head to a randomly chosen track)?
b. With single sectors read out or written in each disk access, what is the expected improvement in disk access speed if we use a head-per-track disk?
c. What about the improvement resulting from using four equally spaced moving-head arms?
18.13. Disk arrays
Consider the example RAID4 and RAID5 data organizations in Fig. 18.8 for 12 data sectors
and their associated three parity sectors, with Pi being the parity sector for data sectors 4i, 4i
+ 1, 4i + 2, and 4i + 3.
a. If each disk read access involves a single sector, which organization will lead to higher data
bandwidth? Quantify the difference assuming random distribution of read addresses.
b. Repeat part (a) for write accesses.
c. Suppose that one of the disks fails and its data must be reconstructed on a spare disk. Which
organization offers better performance for read requests during the reconstruction process?
d. Repeat part (c) for write requests.
18.14. Scalable Coherent Interface
Supply the missing details for the cache coherence protocol used in connection with the
Scalable Coherent Interface discussed in Section 18.6. In particular, indicate the sequence of
events on a write miss, write hit, and block overwrite in a cache.
18.15. Scalable Coherent Interface
Show how Fig. 18.9 should be modified after each of the following events that occur in
sequence.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Processor 0 generates a write hit in the shared block shown.
Processor 1 generates a read miss for data in the shared block shown.
Processor 2 overwrites the shared block with a different shared block.
Processor 1 generates a write hit in the shared block shown.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Burg97]
[Chen94]
[Chen96]
[Frie96)
[Gang94]
[Hira92]
Burger, D., S. Kaxiras, and J. R. Goodman, “Data Scalar Architectures,” Proc. Int'l. Symp. Computer
Architecture , June 1997, pp. 338–349.
Chen, P. M., E. K. Lee, G. A. Gibson, R. H. Katz, and D.A. Patterson, “RAID: High-Performance,
Reliable Secondary Storage,” ACM Computing Surveys, Vol. 26, No. 2, pp. 145–185, June 1994.
Chen, S., and D. Towsley, “A Performance Evaluation of RAID Architectures,” IEEE Trans.
Computers , Vol. 45, No. 10, pp. 1116–1130, October 1996.
Friedman, M. B., “RAID Keeps Going and Going and . . . ,” IEEE Spectrum, Vol. 33, No. 4, pp.
73–79, April 1996.
Ganger, G. R., B. R. Worthington, R. Y. Hou, and Y. N. Patt, “Disk Arrays: High-Performance,
High-Reliability Storage Subsystems,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 27, No. 3, pp. 30–36, March 1994.
Hirata, H., et al., “An Elementary Processor Architecture with Simultaneous Instruction Issuing from
Multiple Threads,” Proc. 19th Int. Symp. Computer Architecture, pp. 136–145, May 1992.
DATA STORAGE, INPUT, AND OUTPUT
[IOPD]
[Parh72]
[Patt96]
[SCI62]
[Thak96]
[Tolm94]
389
I/O in Parallel and Distributed Systems, Annual Workshops. The 5th workshop in this series was held
during November 1997 in San Jose, CA.
Parhami, B., “A Highly Parallel Computing System for Information Retrieval,” AFIPS Conf. Proc.,
Vol. 41 (1972 Fall Joint Computer Conf.), AFIPS Press, pp. 681–690.
Patterson, D. A., and J. L. Hennessy, Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach, Morgan
Kaufmann, 1996.
The Scalable Coherent Interface Standard, IEEE Computer Society, 1992.
Thakur, R., A. Choudhary, R. Bordawekar, S. More, and S. Kuditipudi, ‘Passion: Optimized I/O for
Parallel Applications,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 29, pp. 70–78, June 1996.
Tolmie, D., “High Performance Parallel lnterface (HIPPI),” in High Performance Networks—
Technology and Protocols, edited by A. Tantawy, Kluwer, 1994, pp. 131–156.
This page intentionally left blank.
19
Reliable Parallel
Processing
Modern digital components and subsystems are remarkably robust, but when
one puts a large number of them together to build a parallel computer with data
being passed back and forth between them at extremely high rates, things can
and do go wrong. In data communication, a bit error probability of 10 –10 is
considered quite good. However, at gigabyte per second data transmission or
processing rate, such an error probability translates roughly into one bit-error
per second. While coding methods can be used to protect against errors in data
transmission or storage, the same cannot be said about data manipulations
performed in a CPU. In this chapter, we examine some techniques that can be
used to improve the robustness and reliability of parallel systems. Chapter topics
are
•
•
•
•
•
•
19.1.
19.2.
19.3.
19.4.
19.5.
19.6.
Defects, faults, . . . , failures
Defect-level methods
Fault-level methods
Error-level methods
Malfunction-level methods
Degradation-level methods
391
This page intentionally left blank.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
393
19.1. DEFECTS, FAULTS, . . . , FAILURES
So far, we have assumed that the many components of a parallel machine always behave
as expected: A processor instruction always yields the expected result, a router consistently
makes the correct routing decision, and a wire remains permanently connected. Even though
modern integrated circuits and electronic assemblies are extremely reliable, errors or
malfunctions do occur in the course of lengthy computations, especially in systems that are
highly complex, operate under harsh environmental conditions, deal with extreme/unpredictable loads, or are used during long missions where maintenance is impractical. The output
of an AND gate in a processor or router may become permanently “stuck on 1,” yielding an
incorrect output when at least one input is 0. Or the AND gate may suffer a “transient fault”
where its output becomes incorrect for only a few clock cycles as a result of cross talk or
interference. A table entry may be corrupted by manufacturing imperfections in the memory
cells or logic faults in the read/write circuitry. Wires may break, or short-circuit, because of
overheating, VLSI manufacturing defects, or a combination of both.
Parallel processors are quite complex. A system with hundreds or thousands of components (processors, memory modules, routers, links, switches) is more likely to contain faulty
or malfunctioning elements than a conventional uniprocessor. Thus, there is a need to
explicitly address the testing, fault diagnosis, and reliability issues in parallel processors.
The inherent redundancy of parallel systems is, in principle, good for fault tolerance; after
all, a 1024-processor system remains highly parallel even after losing a dozen or so
processors. However, numerous problems must be dealt with in order to take advantage of
this built-in redundancy.
To see the difficulties, consider a
mesh-connected parallel computer. While it
is true that the failure of one processor still leaves us p – 1 processors to work with, the
structure of the faulty system is no longer a complete 2D mesh. Thus, any algorithm for
routing, sorting, matrix multiplication, and the like, whose proper functioning depends on
the complete 2D mesh structure, will no longer be valid for the surviving (p – 1)-processor
configuration. Even if our algorithms are such that they can run on meshes of various sizes,
a single worst-case processor or link failure can leave us with a nonsquare mesh of about
one-half the original size or a square mesh of one-fourth the size. The same problem exists
for a q-cube, where a single processor or link failure may leave us with a much smaller (q –
1 )-cube.
To dispel any thought that the above difficulty is related to the rigid structure of a 2D
mesh or a hypercube and will go away with a more flexible parallel architecture, consider p
processors that are interconnected via b shared buses. For maximum flexibility and redundancy, assume that each processor is connected to every bus. Again, theoretically, the system
should be able to continue functioning, albeit with degraded performance, despite processor
or bus failures. However, this is only true with certain strong assumptions about the failures
and their effects. For example, if processors fail in fail-stop mode, meaning that they simply
quit all computation and communication, then the healthy processors will remain unaffected.
However, an arbitrary or Byzantine failure may lead to a single faulty processor disabling
the b buses by continually broadcasting bogus messages or by simply grounding all of them.
While researchers have developed methods for ensuring that processors do in fact fail in
fail-stop mode or that any maliciously faulty processor is quickly isolated from common
394
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
resources, the design methods required, and their cost/performance overheads, are far from
trivial.
Ensuring correct functioning of digital systems in the presence of (permanent and
transient) faults is the subject of a discipline known as fault-tolerant (or dependable )
computing. In this chapter, we review some ideas in the field of fault-tolerant computing that
are particularly relevant to ensuring the reliable functioning of parallel systems.
For the sake of precision, we distinguish among various undesirable conditions, or
impairments, that lead to unreliability in any digital system. The six views of impairments
introduced below, along with the ideal system state, define a seven-level model for the study
of dependable computing, depicted in Fig. 19.1 [Parh94]. In the literature, you may find all
of the six italicized concepts below imprecisely referred to as “faults” or “failures”:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Defect level or component level, dealing with deviant atomic parts
Fault level or logic level, dealing with deviant signal values or decisions
Error level or information level, dealing with deviant data or internal states
Malfunction level or system level, dealing with deviant functional behavior
Degradation level or service level, dealing with deviant performance
Failure level or result level, dealing with deviant outputs or actions
Note that a system can begin its life in any of the seven states depicted in Fig. 19.1
(sideways arrows), though we certainly hope that our testing and validation efforts will move
the starting state to the highest possible of these levels. Briefly, a hardware or software
component may be defective (hardware may also become defective by wear and aging).
Certain system states will expose the defect, resulting in the development of faults defined
as incorrect signal values or decisions within the system. If a fault is actually exercised, it
may contaminate the data flowing within the system, causing errors. Erroneous information
or states may or may not cause the affected subsystem to malfunction, depending on the
subsystem’s design and error tolerance. A subsystem malfunction does not necessarily have
a catastrophic, unsafe, or even perceivable service-level effect. Finally, degradation of service
could eventually lead to system failure (producing results or actions that are incorrect,
incomplete, or too late to be useful).
The goal of this chapter is to review some of the methods that allow us to prevent a
system from ever entering the failed state. For each of the five states between ideal and failed
in Fig. 19.1, the complementary approaches of prevention (avoidance or removal) and
tolerance can be used to inhibit a downward transition or to facilitate an upward transition.
These methods are discussed in the following five sections of this chapter.
Figure 19.2 provides an interesting analogy for clarifying the states and state transitions
in our model, using a system of six concentric water reservoirs. Pouring water from above
corresponds to defects, faults, and other impairments, depending on the layer(s) being
affected. These impairments can be avoided by controlling the flow of water through valves
or tolerated by the provision of drains of acceptable capacities for the reservoirs. The system
fails if water ever gets to the outermost reservoir. This may happen, for example, by a broken
valve at some layer combined with inadequate drainage at the same and all outer layers. Wall
heights between adjacent reservoirs represent the natural interlevel latencies in our model.
Water overflowing from the outermost reservoir into the surrounding area corresponds to a
computer failure adversely affecting the larger physical, corporate, or societal system.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
395
Figure 19.1. System states and state transitions in our multilevel model.
It is worth noting that even though we discuss each method in only one section,
according to the abstraction level for which it is most suitable, or where it has been most
successfully applied, many of these techniques are applicable to more than one level. For
example, reconfiguration of processor arrays, introduced in Section 19.2 as a means for
defect tolerance, can be applied to fault, or even malfunction, tolerance with the following
additional provisions:
Figure 19.2. An analogy for the multilevel model of dependable computing.
396
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
On-line fault or malfunction detection
More flexible reconfiguration switching
Data backup and recovery mechanisms
As a second example, circuit-level redundancy/replication methods, introduced for fault
tolerance in Section 19.3, can be applied to malfunction or even degradation tolerance, albeit
with some challenging problems in
Synchronizing higher-level modules
Sophisticated comparison or voting schemes
Performance/reliability trade-off mechanisms
19.2. DEFECT-LEVEL METHODS
Defects are accepted occurrences in the process of integrated-circuit manufacturing and
in software development; their complete avoidance or removal, where not technically
impossible, tends to be cost-ineffective. Defects are caused in two ways, corresponding to
the sideways and downward transitions into the defective state in Fig. 19.1: (1) physical
design slips leading to defective system components, by improper design or inadequate
screening, and (2) development of defects as a result of component wear and aging or
operating conditions that are harsher than those originally envisaged. A defect may be
dormant or ineffective long after its occurrence. During this dormancy period, external
detection of the defect is impossible or, at the very least, extremely difficult. If, despite efforts
to avoid or remove them, defects are nevertheless present in a product, nothing is normally
done about them until they develop into faults. Replacement of sensitive components, as part
of scheduled periodic maintenance, is one way of removing defects before they develop into
faults. Similarly, burn-in of hardware components tends to remove most dormant defects.
Component modifications and improvements, motivated by the analyses of degraded or
failed systems, are other major ways of hardware and software defect removal.
Parallel systems are ideally suited to the application of defect tolerance methods, both
as a way of improving the manufacturing yield [Cici95], and thus making the systems more
cost-effective, and as a way for dynamically reconfiguring the system during its operation.
As an example, consider the development of a VLSI or WSI (wafer-scale integration)
component that houses a square mesh to be used as a building block for synthesizing larger
mesh-connected computers. A large VLSI chip or a wafer is likely to have one or more defects
that could affect the processors or links within the chip. Because a complete square mesh is
needed, even a small defect will render the mesh unusable, thus lowering the manufacturing
yield and increasing the component price.
Before reviewing some of the proposed methods for improving the manufacturing yield
in the above context, let us consider the simpler case of a linear array. Figure 19.3 shows a
four-processor linear array built by including a spare processor and a switching mechanism
that allows any four of the five on-chip processors to be configured into a linear array of the
desired size. Of course a single defective switch would still make the chip unusable. However,
if one views each switch as a pair of multiplexers under common control, it is easy to deduce
how redundancy can be incorporated in the switches to make them tolerant to defects that
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
397
Figure 19.3. A linear array with a spare processor and reconfiguration switches.
affect one multiplexer. Alternatively, the multiplexers can be distributed to the processors,
with each processor independently selecting its right/left neighbor from among two possibilities (Fig. 19.4).
Extension of the above ideas to 2D arrays is straightforward. Figure 19.5 shows two of
the many schemes that are possible for reconfiguring 2D processor arrays in order to bypass
defective elements. The scheme shown on the left is very similar to that of Fig. 19.3, except
that it uses three-state switches (two “bent” states and one “crossed” state). We see, for
example, that by putting two switches in the NW–SE bent state, Processor Pd becomes the
south neighbor of Processor Pa , thus allowing a defective Pc to be bypassed. The scheme
shown on the right side of Fig. 19.5 is the 2D analogue of Fig. 19.4 in that it integrates the
multiplexers with the input ports of the processors. In this way, Processor Pd can pick any of
the three processors above, to its upper left, or to its upper right as its logical north neighbor.
The available choices can be extended to five or more processors for greater flexibility and
defect tolerance level.
With the schemes shown in Fig. 19.5, if we have one row and one column of spare
processors in the array, many defect patterns can be tolerated. Figure 19.6 shows a 6 × 6
processor array with defective components from which a 5 × 5 working mesh has been
salvaged. The reconfiguration switching capability assumed here is slightly more complex
than that shown in Fig. 19.5 (left) in that defective, or otherwise unused, processors (circular
nodes) can be bypassed.
Clearly, reconfiguration switches are themselves subject to defects. Thus, a good
reconfiguration switching scheme should allow the tolerance of switch, as well as processor
and link, defects. The effectiveness of a reconfiguration switching scheme is measured by
the extent of defect tolerance (e.g., random single/double defects, or a cluster of defective
elements of a certain size). Ease of reconfiguration, which includes the determination of the
new working configuration and its associated switch settings, is also an issue, particularly if
reconfiguration is to be dynamic rather than just as a yield enhancement method at manufacturing time.
Consider, as an example, the reconfiguration switching scheme implicit in Fig. 19.6;
i.e., provision of a single track of switches between rows and columns of processors in a
Figure 19.4. A linear array with a spare processor and embedded switching.
398
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 19.5. Two types of reconfiguration switching for 2D arrays.
manner similar to Fig. 19.5 (left), with processor bypass capability included, along with a
spare row and spare column of processing nodes in the array. It is relatively easy to show
that a particular pattern of defective processors can be tolerated (bypassed) using this scheme
if one can draw straight nonintersecting compensation paths from the spare row or spare
column to every defective processor [Kung88]. Figure 19.7 shows seven defective processors
and a set of nonintersecting compensation paths for them. The derivation of switch states to
bypass the seven defective processors is quite easy if we note the rightward/downward
shifting of the horizontal/vertical connections along the compensation paths.
Based on the above, it is easy to see that the reconfiguration scheme of Figs. 19.6 and
19.7 is capable of tolerating any two defective processors. Most, but not all, triple defects
are also tolerated; if a node and both of its east and south neighbors are defective, we cannot
find three nonintersecting compensation paths for them.
A system makes the transition from the defective state to the faulty state when a dormant
defect is awakened and gives rise to a fault. Designers try to impede this transition by
providing adequate safety margins for the components and/or by using defect tolerance
methods. Ironically, one may occasionally try to facilitate this transition for the purpose of
Figure 19.6. A 5 × 5 working array salvaged from a 6 × 6 redundant mesh through reconfiguration
switching.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
399
Figure 19.7. Seven faulty processors and their associated compensation paths.
exposing defects, as faults are more readily observable than defects. To do this, the
components are usually subjected to loads and stresses that are much higher than those
encounted during normal operation. This burning in or torture testing of components
results in the development of faults in marginal components, which are then identified by
fault testing methods. To be able to deduce the underlying defect from an observed fault, we
need to establish a correspondence between various defect and fault classes. This is referred
to as fault modeling.
19.3. FAULT-LEVEL METHODS
A hardware fault may be defined as any anomalous behavior of logic structures or
substructures that can compromise the correct signal values within a logic circuit. The
reference behavior is provided by some form of specification. If the anomalous behavior
results from implementing the logic function g rather than the intended function ƒ, then the
fault is related to a logical design or implementation slip. The alternative cause of faults is
the implementation of the correct logic functions with defective components. Defect-based
faults can be classified according to duration (permanent, intermittent/recurring, or transient), extent (local or distributed/catastrophic), and effect (dormant or active). Only active
faults produce incorrect logic signals. An example of a dormant fault is a line stuck on
logic-value 1 that happens to carry a 1. If incorrect signals are produced as output or stored
in memory elements, they cause errors in the system state.
One way to protect the computations against fault-induced errors is to use duplication
with comparison of the two results (for single fault detection) or triplication with two-outof-three voting on the three results (for single fault masking or tolerance). Figure 19.8 shows
possible ways to implement these schemes.
In the top circuit of Fig. 19.8, the decoding logic is duplicated along with the computation part to ensure that a single fault in the decoder does not go undetected. The encoder, on
the other hand, remains a critical element whose faulty behavior will lead to undetected
400
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 19.8. Fault detection or tolerance with replication.
errors. However, because the output of the encoder is redundant (coded), it is possible to
design the encoding circuitry in such a way as to ensure the production of a non-codeword
at its output if anything goes wrong. Such a design, referred to as self-checking, leads to error
detection by the checker associated with the memory subsystem or later when the erroneous
stored value is used as an input to some other computation. Thus, the duplicated design in
Fig. 19.1 can detect any fault that is totally confined to one of the blocks shown. This includes
a faulty “compare” block which may produce a “false alarm.” An undetected mismatch
would require at least two faults in separate blocks.
The design with triplicated computation in Fig. 19.8 is similar. Here, the voter is a critical
element and must be designed with care. Self-checking design cannot be applied to the voter
(as used in the diagram) because its output is nonredundant. However, by combining the
voting and encoding functions, one may be able to design an efficient self-checking
voter-encoder. This three-channel computation strategy can be generalized to m channels in
order to tolerate more faults. However, the cost overhead of a higher degree of replication
becomes prohibitive.
The above replication schemes are quite general and can be applied to any part of a
parallel system for any type of fault. However, the cost of full replication is difficult to justify
for most applications. Note that for faults in the two or three channels to be truly independent,
the various channels must be packaged separately and be fed from independent power
supplies in order to avoid catastrophic single-point faults. This aggravates the cost and
complexity problems.
Researchers have thus devised various fault tolerance schemes for specific parallel
systems or under restricted fault classes (fault models), For example, in Section 7.5, we noted
that the periodic balanced sorting network can be made tolerant to certain types of faults by
adding one (missed exchanges) or two (missed/incorrect exchanges) extra blocks to it. A
1024-input sorting network with 10 blocks thus requires a redundancy of 10 or 20%. We also
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
401
noted that in the single-block version with multiple passes, an extra stage of comparators
can provide tolerance to single faults; this again implies a redundancy of 10% for n = 1024
inputs.
A second interesting example is the design of fault-tolerant multistage interconnection
networks. Consider the 8 × 8 butterfly network of Fig. 19.9 (left) and its extra-stage version
(right). Because of the extra stage, there exist two paths between any input and any output.
Thus, any single switch fault can be tolerated by using one of the two alternate paths. The
circular nodes are multiplexers and demultiplexers that are required for the tolerance of faults
in the leftmost and rightmost columns, respectively. On the extra-stage butterfly network of
Fig. 19.9, two node- and edge-disjoint paths are shown from Input 4 to Output 3. Thus, any
fault in a single switch, multiplexer, or demultiplexer can be tolerated.
Like the original butterfly network, the extra-stage butterfly network of Fig. 19.9 is
self-routing. To see this, note that the connections between Columns q – 1 and q are identical
to those between Columns 0 and 1. Thus, the two paths essentially correspond to taking the
Dimension-0 link first (as in the regular butterfly) and bypassing Column q, or bypassing
Column 0 and taking the Dimension-0 link last. Hence, a processor that is aware of the fault
status of the network switches can append a suitable routing tag to the message and insert it
into the network through one of its two available access ports. From that point onward, the
message finds its way through the network and automatically avoids the faulty element(s).
Of course, if more than one element is faulty, existence of a path is not guaranteed.
Transition from faulty to erroneous state occurs when a fault affects the state of some
storage element or output. Designers try to impede this transition by using fault tolerance
methods. Another approach is to control this transition so that it leads to an incorrect but safe
state. An example is the provision of internal fault detection mechanisms (e.g., comparators,
activity monitors, or consistency checkers) that can disable a given module or system,
assuming of course that the disabled state is safe. Ironically, one may also try to facilitate
this transition for the purpose of exposing system faults, as errors are more readily observable
than faults. This is precisely the objective of all fault testing schemes. With off-line test
application methods, special input patterns are applied to the circuit or system under test,
Figure 19.9. Regular butterfly and extra-stage butterfly networks.
402
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
while observing possible errors in its outputs or internal state. To deduce underlying faults
from observed errors, we need to establish a correspondence between various fault and error
classes. This is referred to as error modeling. With on-line or concurrent testing, faults must
be exposed during normal system operation and without disrupting its operation. Such a
self-checked mode of operation relies heavily on informational coding and deals with faults
through detecting the errors that they produce.
19.4. ERROR-LEVEL METHODS
An error is any deviation of a system’s state from the reference state as defined by its
specification. Errors are either built into a system by improper initialization (e.g., incorrect
ROM contents) or develop as a result of fault-induced deviations. Assuming that the system’s
state is encoded as a binary vector, an error consists of a set of 0 →1 (read 0-to-1) and/or
1→ 0 inversions. With this view, errors can be classified according to the multiplicity of
inversions (single versus multiple ), their directions (symmetric if both 0 →1 and 1 → 0
inversions are considered at the same time, asymmetric if for example the inversions can only
be of the 1→ 0 type, and unidirectional if multiple inversions are of the same type), and their
dispersion (random versus correlated). There are finer subdivisions in each category. For
example, byte errors and bursts confined to a number of adjacent bit positions are important
special cases of correlated multiple errors.
Methods of detecting or correcting data errors have their origins in the field of
communications. Early communications channels were highly unreliable and extremely
noisy. So signals sent from one end were often distorted or changed by the time they reached
the receiving end. The remedy, thought up by communications engineers, was to encode the
data in redundant formats known as codes. Examples of coding methods include adding a
parity bit (an example of a single-error-detecting or SED code), checksums, and Hamming
single-error-correcting double-error-detecting (SEC/DED) code. Today, error-detecting and
error-correcting codes are still used extensively in communications, for even though the
reliability of these systems and noise reduction/shielding methods have improved enormously, so have the data rates and data transmission volumes, making the error probability
nonnegligible.
Codes originally developed for communications can be used to protect against storage
errors. When the early integrated-circuit memories proved to be less reliable than the then
common magnetic-core technology, IC designers were quick to incorporate SEC/DED codes
into their designs. The data processing cycle in a system whose storage and memory-to-processor data transfers are protected by an error code can be represented as in Fig. 19.10. In this
scheme, which is routinely used in modern digital systems, the data manipulation part is
unprotected. Decoding/encoding is necessary because common codes are not closed under
arithmetic and other operations of interest. For example, the sum of two even-parity numbers
does not necessarily have even parity. As another example, when we change an element
within a list that is protected by a checksum, we must recompute the checksum.
The above problem can be solved in two ways. One is the use of codes that are closed
under data manipulation operations of interest. For example, product codes are closed under
addition and subtraction. A product code with check modulus 15, say, represents the integers
x and y as 15 x and 15 y, respectively. Adding/subtracting the two values directly yields the
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
403
Figure 19.10. A common way of applying information coding techniques.
correct encoded form 15(x ± y ) of the sum/difference x ± y. While product codes are not
closed under multiplication, division, and square-rooting, it is possible to devise arithmetic
algorithms for these operations that deal directly with the coded operands [Parh99].
A second approach, algorithm-based error tolerance, is based on the application of
coding methods at the data-structure level as opposed to at the level of atomic data elements.
The coding methods used, and the required modifications in the algorithms, are highly
application-dependent. However, where applicable, this method yields good error coverage
with a moderate amount of redundancy in data representation and computational steps.
As an example of this approach, consider the multiplication of matrices X and Y yielding
the result matrix Z. The checksum of a list of numbers (a vector) is simply the algebraic sum
of all of the numbers modulo some check constant A. For any k × l matrix M, we define the
row-checksum matrix M r as a k × (l+1) matrix that is identical to M in its Columns 0 through
l – 1 and has as its lth column the respective row checksums. Similarly, the column-checksum
matrix Mc is a (k+1) × l matrix that is identical to M in its Rows 0 through k – 1 and has as
its kth row the respective column checksums. The full-checksum matrix Mf is defined as the
(k+1)×(l+1) matrix (Mr )c, i.e., the column-checksum matrix of the row-checksum matrix of
M. For example, using modulo-A checksums with A = 8, we might have
If X, Y, and Z are matrices satisfying Z = X × Y, we can prove that Z f = Xc×Yr [Huan84]. Based
on this result, we can perform standard matrix multiplication on the encoded matrices X c and
404
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Yr , and then compare the values in the last column and row of the product matrix with
checksums that are computed based on the remaining elements to detect any error that may
have occurred. If the matrix elements are floating-point numbers, then the equalities will
hold approximately, leading to diffiulties in selecting a suitable threshold for considering
values equal. Some methods to resolve this problem are given by Dutt and Assaad [Dutt96].
One can easily prove that in the full-checksum matrix, any single erroneous element can
be corrected and any three erroneous elements can be detected [Huan84]. Consider, for
example, the matrix multiplication algorithm on a 2D mesh, where each processor is in
charge of computing one element of the result matrix Z (Fig. 11.2). According to the above
result, any fault-induced error in one processor leads to an erroneous, but correctable, result
matrix Z. The error correction procedure can be incorporated as part of the error-tolerant
matrix multiplication algorithm. In the arrangement of Fig. 11.2, processors are also involved
in relaying data elements to other processors. Thus, we cannot say that the algorithm is
completely tolerant to single-processor malfunctions. Alternatively, up to three erroneous
elements in the result matrix can be detected. In this case, we might rely on redoing the
computation right away (in the hope that the errors were related to transient faults) or after
the system has been tested and reconfigured or repaired to remove faulty/malfunctioning
elements.
The full-checksum matrix Mf is an example of a robust data structure with certain error
detection/correction properties. Designing such robust data structures with given error
detection or correction capabilities, such that they also lend themselves to direct manipulation by suitably modified algorithms, is still an art. However, steady progress is being made
in this area.
A system moves from erroneous to malfunctioning state when an error affects the
functional behavior of some component subsystem. This transition can be avoided by using
error tolerance techniques. An alternative is to control the transition so that it leads to a safe
malfunction. This latter technique has been extensively applied to the design of malfunctionsafe (fail-safe) sequential circuits. The idea is to encode the states of the sequential circuit
in some error code, specify the transitions between valid states (represented by codewords)
in the normal way, and define the transitions for erroneou states in such a way that they
never lead to a valid state. Thus, an invalid state persists and is eventually detected by an
external observer or monitor. In the meantime, the output logic produces safe values when
the circuit is in an invalid state. One may also try to facilitate this transition for the purpose
of exposing latent system errors. For example, a memory unit containing incorrect data is in
the erroneous state. It will operate correctly as long as the erroneous words are not read out.
Systematic testing of memory can result in a memory malfunction that exposes the errors.
19.5. MALFUNCTION-LEVEL
METHODS
A malfunction is any deviation of a system’s operation from its expected behavior
according to the design specifications. For example, an arithmetic/logic unit computing 2 +
2 = 5 can be said to be malfunctioning, as is a processor executing an unconditional branch
instead of a conditional one. Malfunctions (like defects, faults, and errors) may have no
external symptoms, but they can be made externally observable with moderate effort. In fact,
malfunction detection (complemented by a recovery mechanism) constitutes the main
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
405
strategy in the design of today’s dependable computer systems. Even though such systems
are called fault-tolerant in the prevailing terminology, we will use the adjective malfunctiontolerant for consistency. Many such systems are built from standard off-the-shelf building
blocks with little or no fault and error handling capabilities and use higher-level hardware
and software techniques to achieve malfunction tolerance at the module or subsystem level.
In a parallel computer, multiple processing resources can be used for malfunction
detection and diagnosis. This is sometimes referred to as system-level fault diagnosis in the
literature. Consider the following strategy for malfunction diagnosis. Each processor is tested
by one or more of its neighbors that send it test computations and in return receive the
computation results for comparison with expected results. If the results match, then the tested
processor is considered healthy; otherwise, it is considered to be malfunctioning. The test
routine may be an internal program that exercises most parts of the processor’s hardware.
The testing processor simply supplies a seed value (one data word, say) that affects the final
computation result(s). This seed value is needed to protect against a condition where a
malfunctioning processor accidentally gets a correct result for its internally stored test
program.
In a p-processor system, the diagnosis results can be viewed as a p × p matrix D, with
three-valued elements: Dij = 1 means that Pi thinks Pj is healthy; D ij = 0 means that Pi thinks
Pj is malfunctioning; an “x” entry means that Pi has not tested Pj, perhaps because of the fact
that the two are not neighbors. Even though self-test routines usually do not provide complete
coverage, let us assume, for simplicity, that a healthy processor always correctly diagnoses
a malfunctioning one. Of course, a malfunctioning processor provides an unreliable diagnosis. Figure 19.11 shows an undirected-graph representation of the testing relationships
among five processors and the resulting diagnosis matrix D.
Identifying the malfunctioning processors from the diagnosis matrix D is a challenging
problem. Intuitively, the reason for the difficulty is that the trustworthy diagnoses from
healthy processors are intermixed with unreliable diagnoses offered by malfunctioning
processors. If we insist that all malfunctioning processors be directly identifiable from D,
then correct diagnosis is possible only if we place an upper bound on the number of
malfunctions. In the example of Fig. 19.11, the diagnosis matrix D is consistent with P4 being
the only malfunctioning unit. It is also consistent with P4 being the only healthy unit. Thus,
if we know that there is at most one malfunctioning processor, correct diagnosis is achieved.
The upper bound on the number of malfunctions that are fully diagnosable depends on the
testing graph.
We may be able to do somewhat better by relaxing the strong requirement for full
diagnosis. The weakest diagnosis condition is to be able to correctly identify at least one
Figure 19.11. A testing graph and the resulting diagnosis matrix.
406
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
malfunctioning unit. After such an identification, the known malfunctioning node can be
repaired, replaced, or bypassed and another round of diagnosis conducted with fewer
malfunctioning units. Also, it might be acceptable to identify a superset of the malfunctioning
nodes, because the replacement of such a superset with healthy nodes will remove all
malfunctioning units. Of course, for this method to be useful, the identified superset must
be relatively small (clearly, the set of all p processors is always a valid, but useless, superset
of the set of faulty nodes).
Once a malfunction has been diagnosed, the system must be reconfigured with all, or a
subset of, the healthy units. This is relatively simple in a bus-based system; the malfunctioning processor, memory module, or I/O controller is simply isolated from the bus and
subsequently removed for inspection and repair. In more rigid parallel architectures, the
problem is more difficult. Reconfiguration methods similar to those discussed for defect
tolerance in Section 19.2 can be used to reconfigure the system around faulty units. However,
because each unit is fairly complex at this level, it is desirable to use lower-redundancy
methods if possible.
As an example, consider a reconfigurable 2D mesh that utilizes only one spare processor,
as shown in Fig. 19.12 [Bruc93]. Each processor still has a degree of 4; however, the normally
unused links of the boundary processors are used to accommodate a spare processor in such
a way that any single malfunctioning processor can be removed and the mesh reconfigured
into its original topology by simply renaming the nodes. Of course, a full restart would be
required to initialize the processors with their new node labels and data. In the example of
Fig. 19.12, the processor originally numbered 5 has been removed and the remaining
processors (including the spare) renumbered to form a complete 4 × 4 mesh. Similar methods
can be used for meshes of higher dimensions, without increasing the node degree.
Similar low-redundancy schemes have been developed for other networks, such as tori
and hypercubes, but they generally involve an increase in node degree and the provision of
additional interconnection switches. A method that works for tolerating a single processor
malfunction in any p-processor architecture involves the use of an extra port per processor.
The p extra links, which are unused during normal operation, are interconnected via a p × d
crossbar switch to a degree-d spare node, where d is the maximum node degree in the original
network. When a processor malfunctions, the spare can be made to take its place by setting
up the crossbar switch so that the p neighbors of the malfunctioning processor are linked to
the spare processor. To avoid an excessively complex crossbar switch, various subsets of
Figure 19.12. Reconfigurable 4 × 4 mesh with one spare.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
407
processors can be provided with their own crossbar switch, all linked to the same spare
processor or to different spares.
If a spare is not available, or after all spares have been used up, the malfunctioning unit
can be isolated from the rest of the system. This reduces the amount of hardware resources
(e.g., memory, processing power, I/O bandwidth) available, thus leading to a corresponding
performance degradation. In fact, in the absence of special monitoring facilities, a degraded
performance (e.g., delayed response) may be the first indication of the underlying impairments. Provision of backup resources can postpone this transition, as can the ability to replace
or repair the malfunctioning modules without having to shut down or otherwise disturb the
system. Whereas overall system performance may be degraded, individual users or processes
need not experience the same level of service degradation (e.g., because of reassessment of
priorities). In fact, when degradation is severe, only critical computations may be allowed
to run.
19.6.
DEGRADATION-LEVEL METHODS
A dependable computer system is often defined as one producing trustworthy and timely
results. Actually, neither trustworthiness nor timeliness is a binary (all or none) attribute. The
obtained results may be incomplete or inaccurate rather than totally missing or completely
wrong and they may be tardy enough to cause some inconvenience, without being totally
useless or obsolete. Thus, various levels of inaccuracy, incompleteness, and tardiness can be
distinguished and those that fall below particular thresholds might be viewed as degradations
rather than failures. A computer system that is organized such that module malfunctions
usually lead to degradations rather than to failures is gracefully degrading or fail-soft and is
usually a multiprocessor system.
Figure 19.13 depicts the performance variations in three types of parallel systems:
S 1:
S 2:
S3 :
A fail-hard system with performance Pm a x up to the failure time t1 as well
as after completion of off-line repair at time t'1 .
A fail-soft system with gradually degrading performance level and off-line
repair at time t2 .
A fail-soft system with on-line repair which, from the viewpoint of an
application that requires a performance level of at least P min , postpones its
failure time to t3 .
The traditional notion of reliability is clearly inadequate for systems such as S 2 and S 3 . Such
systems must be characterized by their performability , a measure that encompasses performance and reliability and that constitutes a proper generalization of both.
Malfunction detection/diagnosis and system reconfiguration are starting stages of
graceful degradation but they are not adequate as they form only the system components of
degradation tolerance. Equally important are the application components. Applications may
be designed such that they tolerate temporary or permanent reductions in system resources
or performance. Two fundamental notions that allow an application to be degradation-tolerant are those of scalable and robust algorithms.
408
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 19.13. Performance variations in three example parallel computers.
A scalable algorithm is one that can be executed at various levels of resource availability,
from the full p-processor parallel system down to a certain minimal configuration (ideally,
all the way down to a single processor). Examples include the shared-memory parallel sorting
algorithm described in Section 6.3 or any algorithm that is characterized by a task graph and
run with the tasks dynamically scheduled on the available processors. In order to avoid the
need for restarting an unfinished application program with each configuration change, a
checkpointing scheme may be applied (Fig. 19.14). Saving of partial computation results in
stable storage allows us to roll back the program to the last checkpoint instead of restarting
it from the beginning. Checkpointing frequency is determined by cost–performance tradeoffs in order to balance the overhead against the performance gain in the event of malfunctions.
Parallel systems offer special challenges for correct checkpointing and rollback. Figure
19.14 depicts a set of three communicating tasks, along with examples of consistent and
inconsistent checkpoints. An arrow indicates a message, with the arrow’s tail at the sending
time and its head at the receiving time. The inconsistent checkpoint is so because if we roll
back the three tasks to the points indicated, Task 0 would have received a message that is not
yet sent by Task 2.
Like scalable algorithms, a robust algorithm is one that can be executed at various levels
of resource availability. The difference is that with a robust algorithm, no assumption is made
about the original architecture being preserved. The 2D mesh architecture provides a good
example. A scalable algorithm for 2D mesh can run on various mesh sizes. A single
malfunctioning processor can reduce the size of the available mesh to one-half, if a nonsquare
mesh is acceptable, or to one-fourth, if the algorithm can only work on a square mesh. A
robust algorithm, however, can run on an incomplete mesh that does not have all processors
working [Parh98]. As long as it is known which processors are unavailable, the algorithm
can work its way around them.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
409
Figure 19.14. Checkpointing, its overhead, and pitfalls.
It is not difficult to envisage a routing algorithm that works on an incomplete mesh or
hypercube. Other robust algorithms are harder to grasp, so let us provide an example for
sorting on an incomplete mesh. If the mesh is designed in such a way that malfunctioning
processors can be bypassed in their respective rows and columns (Fig. 19.15, left), then one
can still use shearsort in an r-row, p-processor mesh. The only difference is that, after log 2 r
iterations, there may be more than one dirty row, with the exact number being a function of
the number of bypassed processors and their distribution in the various columns. If the
maximum number of bypassed nodes in odd or even rows of any given column is b, then the
number of dirty rows at the termination of the iterative part of robust shearsort is upper
bounded by 4b + 1 [Parh95]. Thus, if the final row-sort is replaced by the application of (4 b
+ 1)p/r steps of odd–even transposition along the overall snake, the sorted order will be
achieved. The nice thing about the resulting robust algorithm is that with no malfunctioning
processor, it sorts just as fast as standard shearsort, its performance degrades only slightly
with scattered malfunctions (up to one per column, say), and it still works with even a large
number of malfunctions, albeit at degraded performance.
Another robust sorting algorithm, which also works on an incomplete mesh with no
node bypass capability and is thus more general, is based on identifying a submesh that has
a significant number of complete rows and complete columns. In the example of Fig. 19.5
(right), the entire mesh has two complete rows and two complete columns, the submesh
enclosed in the dotted box has three and two, and the submesh consisting of Processors 7–9
and 11–13 has two and three, respectively. The processors located at the intersections of
these complete submesh rows and columns can be used to emulate any 2D mesh sorting
algorithm. Thus, the sorting algorithm consists of three phases: (1) sending data items from
all processors to the designated processors, (2) performing the emulation, and (3) redistributing the data to the original sources [Yeh97].
For example, taking Processors 1,3,7,9,11, and 13 as the processors designated to do
the emulation in Fig. 19.15 (right), we first send all data elements to these processors, with
each getting up to three elements. Then, we perform sorting on the 3 × 2 mesh with each
processor holding three items, and finally we redistribute the three elements in each processor
410
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 19.15. Two types of incomplete meshes, with and without bypass links.
to the original source processors. The sorting phase itself can be done using any mesh sorting
algorithm.
A system fails when its degradation tolerance capacity is exhausted and, as a result, its
performance falls below an acceptable threshold. As degradations are themselves consequences of malfunctions, it is interesting to skip a level and relate system failures directly to
malfunctions. It has been noted that failures in a gracefully degrading system can be
attributed to
1.
2.
3.
4.
Isolated malfunction of a critical subsystem.
Occurrence of catastrophic (multiple space-domain) malfunctions.
Accumulation of (multiple time-domain) malfunctions beyond detectability/tolerance.
Resource exhaustion causing inadequate performance or total shutdown.
Analysis of the PRIME gracefully degrading time-sharing system (developed at Berkeley in
the early 1970s) showed that the first two items, i.e., intolerable malfunctions, are the most
common causes of system failures; this conclusion has since been reinforced by other studies.
In this context, a degradation is almost good news in that the mere fact of its occurrence
means that the highest danger of failure has passed! Minimizing the number and size of
critical subsystems (the hard core) and providing strong protection against catastrophic
common-cause malfunctions are important requirements for recovery and continued operation in a degraded mode.
PROBLEMS
19.1. Defects, faults, . . . , failures
a.
b.
Consider the floating-point division flaw in early Pentium processors. Place this flaw and
its consequences and remedies in the context of the seven-level model presented in Section
19.1.
Repeat part (a) for the Millennium bug, aka the Y2K (year-2000) problem, which will cause
some programs using dates with two-digit year fields to fail when the year turns from 1999
to 2000.
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
411
19.2. Defects, faults, . . . , failures
Relate the following situations to the analogy of Fig. 19.2.
a. A parallel system is designed to tolerate up to two malfunctioning processors. When a
malfunction is diagnosed, the IC card that holds the malfunctioning processor is isolated,
removed, and replaced with a good one, all in about 15 minutes.
b. When the Pentium division flaw was uncovered, a software package was modified through
“patches” to avoid operand values for which the flaw would lead to errors. On replacing
the Pentium chip with a redesigned chip (without the flaw), the patched software was not
modified.
19.3. Defect tolerance in a linear array
Consider the linear-array reconfiguration scheme depicted in Fig. 19.3, with switch defects
being of a type that leaves them forever stuck in the cross or bent state.
a. Show that the reconfiguration scheme in Fig. 19.3 is still single-defect-tolerant.
b. Insert extra switches in the reconfiguration logic to make the scheme tolerant to singleswitch plus single-processor defects. Hint: Data might pass through two switches in getting
from one processor to the next, with the effect of one switch being stuck offset through
proper setting of the other one.
c. What can you say about the scheme in Fig. 19.4 in these regards?
19.4. Defect tolerance in 2D meshes
a. In the scheme of Figs. 19.6 and 19.7, what fraction of triple processor defects are tolerable?
b. How should the switching schemes of Fig. 19.5 be modified to accommodate the processor
bypass capability assumed by the compensation path method?
c. Generalize the compensation path method for defect tolerance to the case where a spare
row/column is provided on each edge of the array (two spare rows, two spare columns).
d. What is the smallest number of defective processors that can disable the scheme of part
(c)?
19.5. Fault-tolerant MINs
The fault-tolerant extra-stage butterfly network of Fig. 19.9 essentially provides connectivity
between 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Can a 16-input butterfly network provide the same function?
How or why not?
19.6. Approximate voting
Suppose the three-input voter shown in Fig. 19.8 is to interpret its 32-bit unsigned inputs as
fractional values that may contain small computational errors (possibly a different amount for
each input).
a. Provide a suitable definition of majority agreement in this case.
b. Is a bit-serial voter, producing its output on the fly, feasible per the definition of part (a)?
c. Design a bit-serial “median voter” that outputs the middle value among its three inexact
inputs.
d. Under what conditions is the output of a median voter the same as that of a majority voter?
19.7. Design of comparators
For the two-channel redundant scheme of Fig. 19.8, discuss the design of bit-serial comparators
for integer (exact) and fractional (approximate) results in a manner similar to the voters of
Problem 19.6.
412
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
19.8. Mean and median voting
One way to reconcile inexact values obtained from multiple computation channels is to take
the mean of the values as the “correct” output.
a.
b.
c.
What are the advantages and drawbacks of mean voting?
Consider a five-channel computation. Show that if the smallest and the largest of the five
values are discarded and the mean of the remaining three values is taken as the “correct”
output, better fault tolerance is obtained.
Compare the voting scheme of part (b) to median voting, which chooses the middle value
among the five results, with regard to advantages and disadvantages.
19.9. Algorithm-based error tolerance
a.
Verify that the product of the matrices M c and M r given in Section 19.4 yields the full
checksum matrix (M²) f if the additions are performed modulo 8.
b. Prove the result in general.
19.10. Algorithm-based error tolerance
a. Devise an algorithm-based error tolerance scheme for matrix–vector multiplication.
b. Apply the scheme of part (a) to DFT computation (see Section 8.5).
c. Given the special structure of the Fourier matrix, can you find a simplified error tolerance
scheme for the DFT computation?
19.11. Malfunction diagnosis
a.
b.
Is the matrix D in Fig. 19.11 consistent with some malfunctioning set of two or three
processors?
Prove or disprove: If the node degree of the testing graph is d and if there are at most d –
1 malfunctioning nodes, then at least one malfunctioning node can be identified with
certainty.
19.12. Robust shearsort
Show that if there are x dirty rows when doing shearsort on an incomplete mesh with bypassed
faulty processors, then one iteration (snakelike row sort followed by column sort) reduces the
number of dirty rows to x/2 + 2b, where b is as defined in Section 19.6. Use this result to prove
the (4b + 1)p/r upper bound on the number of odd–even transposition steps needed at the end.
19.13. Malfunction-tolerant routing in hypercubes
A hypercube node is said to be k-capable if every nonfaulty node at distance k from it is
reachable through a shortest path. Show that in an q-cube, the q-bit capability vectors of all
nodes can be computed recursively through a simple algorithm and devise a fault-tolerant
routing algorithm whereby each node makes its routing decisions solely on the basis of its own
and its neighbors’ capability vectors [Chiu97].
19.14. Fault diameter of q-D meshes and tori
The fault diameter of a network is defined as the diameter of its surviving part after faults have
occurred.
a. What is the fault diameter of a 2D mesh with a single faulty link? What about with a faulty
node?
b. Repeat part (a) for a 2D torus with two faults (node–node, link–link, link–node).
RELIABLE PARALLEL PROCESSING
413
19.15. Reliability evaluation
Assume that nodes are perfectly reliable but that a Link has reliability r. The terminal reliability
of an interconnection network is defined as the minimal probability (over all node pairs) that
a pair of nodes remain connected. Compute the terminal reliability of the following networks.
a.
b.
c.
d.
p-node linear array.
p-node ring.
q-cube.
q-star.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Adam87]
[Bruc93]
[Chiu97]
[Cici95]
[Dutt96]
[Huan84]
[Kung88]
[Parh94]
[Parh95]
[Parh98]
[Parh99]
[Prad96]
[Yeh97]
[Ziv96]
Adams, G. B., III, D. P. Agrawal, and H. J. Siegel, “Fault-Tolerant Multistage Interconnection
Networks,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 20, No. 6, pp. 14–27, June 1987.
Bruck, J., R. Cypher, and C.-T. Ho, “Fault-Tolerant Meshes and Hypercubes with Minimal Numbers
of Spares,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 42, No. 9, pp. 1089–1104, September 1993.
Chiu, G.-M., and K.-S. Chen, “Use of Routing Capbility for Fault-Tolerant Routing in Hypercube
Multicomputers,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 46, No. 8, pp. 953–958, August 1997.
Ciciani, B., Manufacturing Yield Evaluation of VLSI/WSI Systems, IEEE Computer Society Press,
1995.
Dutt, S., and F. T. Assaad, “Mantissa-Preserving Operations and Robust Algorithm-Based Fault
Tolerance for Matrix Computations,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 45, No. 4, pp. 408–424, April
1996.
Huang, K. H., and J. A. Abraham, “Algorithm-Based Fault Tolerance for Matrix Operations,” IEEE
Trans. Computers, Vol. 33, No. 6, pp. 518–528, June 1984.
Kung, S. Y., VLSI Array Processors, Prentice–Hall, 1988.
Parhami, B., “A Multi-Level View of Dependable Computing,” Computers & Electrical Engineering,
Vol. 20, No. 4, pp. 347–368,1994.
Parhami, B., and C. Y. Hung, “Robust Shearsort on Incomplete Bypass Meshes,” Proc. 9th Int.
Parallel Processing Symp., April 1995, pp. 304–311.
Parhami, B., and C.-H. Yeh, “The Robust-Algorithm Approach to Fault Tolerancc on Processor
Arrays: Fault Models, Fault Diameter, and Basic Algorithms,” Proc. Joint 12th Int. Parallel Processing Symp. and 9th Symp. Parallel and Distributed Processing, 1998, pp. 742–746.
Parhami, B., Computer Arithmetic: Algorithms and Architectures, to be published by Oxford
University Press.
Pradhan, D. K., and P. Banerjee, “Fault-Tolerant Multiprocessor and Distributed Systems: Principles,” Chapter 3 in Fault-Tolerant Computer System Design, Prentice–Hall, 1996, pp. 135–235.
Yeh, C.-H., and B. Parhami, “Optimal Sorting Algorithms on Incomplete Meshes with Arbitrary Fault
Patterns,” Proc. Int. Conf. Parallel Processing, August 1997, pp. 4–11.
Ziv, A., and J. Bruck, “Checkpointing in Parallel and Distributed Systems,” Chapter 10 in Parallel
and Distributed Computing Handbook, edited by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp. 274–302.
This page intentionally left blank.
20
System and Software
Issues
This book is about algorithms and architectures for parallel processing. Therefore, I have chosen not to deal with questions such as how to build real parallel
programs, what specification language or execution environment to use, how
parallel system resources are managed, and how hardware and software interact
from economic and application standpoints. So that there is not a complete void
in these practically important areas, some system, software, and application
aspects of parallel processing are reviewed in this chapter, with the goal of
providing a broad picture and pointing the reader to key references for further
study. Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
20.1.
20.2.
20.3.
20.4.
20.5.
20.6.
Coordination and synchronization
Parallel programming
Software portability and standards
Parallel operating systems
Parallel file systems
Hardware/software interaction
415
This page intentionally left blank.
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
417
20.1. COORDINATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION
Multiple processors working on pieces of a common problem require some form of
coordination in order to ensure that they obtain meaningful and consistent results. The
mechanism used for coordination may take various forms that involve the exchange of
application data, state indicators, and timing information among the processors. Such
activities are collectively referred to as synchronization , a term that is used even when the
processors operate asynchronously.
In message-passing systems, synchronization is automatic. A task or process requiring
data from another one typically executes a “receive” operation which either retrieves the data
immediately from communication buffers or else will make the requesting process wait until
the data source has executed a matching “send” operation. Figure 20.1 shows an example.
At the top, the dependence of Task B on Task A is depicted by an arrow going from A to B .
We used this notation, e.g., in the task graphs of Chapter 17. This is a coarse representation
of the data dependence in that it does not specify where in the course of running A the required
data are produced or where in B they are first needed. In a message-passing system, A and
B are viewed as concurrent processes that can be initiated independently. Once B gets to the
point where it needs the data from A (time t 1 ), it may have to wait until A prepares and sends
the data (time t2 ) and the communication network forwards the data from A to B (time t 3 ).
Because the rate of progress in computations is in general load- and data-dependent,
matching sends and receives can be encountered in either order in time. The semantics of
send and receive automatically imposes the required waits, ensuring correct execution with
no extra effort on our part.
In shared-memory systems, synchronization can be accomplished by accessing specially designated shared control variables. A popular way is through an atomic fetch-and-add
Figure 20.1. Automatic synchronization in message-passing systems.
418
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
instruction. The fetch-and-add instruction has two parameters: a shared variable x and an
increment a. Suppose that the current value of x is c. On executing fetch-and-add(x, a ) by a
process, c is returned to the process and the new value c + a replaces the old value of x in
memory. A second process executing fetch-and-add(x , b) would then get the now current
value c + a and cause the value of x to be modified to c + a + b.
Based on the above description, multiple processes executing fetch-and-add with
positive increments will always get different values in return. The actual values returned to
the processes will depend on the particular order in which the memory “sees” the multiple
fetch-and-add instructions. In this regard, the atomicity requirement is important to guarantee
correct execution of concurrent or near-concurrent fetch-and-add instructions issued by
several processes. As an example, consider the following timing of events if each of two
processes were to execute fetch-and-add by reading the value of x from memory into an
accumulator register, adding its increment to the accumulator, and storing the sum back into
x. The three steps of fetch-and-add for the two processes may be interleaved in time as
follows:
Process A
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
step
step
step
step
step
step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Process B
read x
read x
add a
add b
store x
store x
Comments
A’s accumulator holds
B’s accumulator holds
A’s accumulator holds
B’s accumulator holds
x holds c + a
x holds c + b
c
c
c+a
c+b
This leads to incorrect semantics, as both processes will receive the same value c in return
and the final value of x in memory will be c + b rather than c + a + b .
Fetch-and-add is a powerful primitive that is useful in many different contexts. For
example, if iterations of a loop with loop index i ranging from min to max are to be assigned
to different processors for execution, the processors can execute fetch-and-add(x,1) in order
to get a value of the loop index to work on, where x is initialized to min. As another example,
to verify that all of the h subtasks of a task have been completed, one can use a fetch-andadd (x, 1) at the end of each subtask. Assuming an initial value of 0 for x, all subtasks have
been completed when the value of x becomes h.
Besides fetch-and-add, other atomic operations have been used for the purpose of
coordination or synchronization. One example is “test-and-set,” which causes a Boolean
value to be read from location x and location x be set to 1 in one indivisible operation. One
application is in implementing a lock that allows a single process to enter a critical section
but stops all subsequent processes attempting to enter until the first process releases the lock
by resetting the variable x to 0. Another example is “compare-and-swap” where a value
provided by the process is compared against the value stored in the shared variable x and the
values are swapped in one indivisible operation.
One problem with using fetch-and-add, test-and-set, compare-and-swap, or similar
mechanisms for synchronization is that the shared memory locations corresponding to the
control variables will be accessed by many processors, creating a condition known as
hot-spot contention. When a multistage interconnection network is used for routing access
requests from processors to memory banks (see, e.g., Fig. 6.9), special combining switches
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
419
Figure 20.2. Combining of two fetch-and-add requests.
can be used to mediate the memory access conflicts. Figure 20.2 shows how combining of
memory access requests can be used to reduce two memory access requests to just one.
A particularly useful synchronization scheme is barrier synchronization where a processor, in a designated set, must wait at a barrier until each of the other processors has arrived
at the corresponding point in its respective computation. Basically, in MIMD computations,
we prefer to let each processor proceed at its own speed for maximum efficiency. We try to
keep synchronizations to a minimum, not only because synchronization itself has an
overhead but also in view of the fact that some of the processors must remain idle until all
other processors, which may have been slowed down by data-dependent conditions (e.g.,
more difficult subproblems, higher cache miss rates), have caught up. Figure 20.3 accentuates
the performance benefit of less frequent synchronizations among a set of four processors.
Synchronous parallel computations are easier to visualize, and thus to develop and
debug. Asynchronous computations are more efficient because they allow each processor to
do its share of the work at full speed. Note that synchronization is required only when two
or more processors must interact; no synchronization is needed during periods that are devoid
of interprocessor communication. We can deal with the synchronization problem in two
complementary ways. On the one hand, we can make synchronizations faster by providing
hardware support. On the other hand, we can reduce the need for synchronization through
suitable programming paradigms. Each of these alternatives will be briefly discussed in the
following paragraphs. As usual, there is a trade-off in practice, with hybrid solutions that
Figure 20.3. The performance benefit of less frequent synchronization.
420
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
borrow elements from each approach being the most cost-effective in a given application
context.
A simpleminded approach to barrier synchronization is the use of an AND tree. Suppose
that, on reaching a barrier, a processor raises a “barrier flag” and then checks to see if the
AND tree output is 1. If it is, then the processor lowers its flag and proceeds past the barrier,
because all other processors have reached the barrier. However, if it is possible for a processor
to be randomly delayed between raising its flag and checking the AND tree output, then it
is possible for some processors to go past the barrier and lower their flags before others have
had a chance to examine the AND tree output.
Using two AND trees that are connected to the set and reset inputs of a flip-flop can
solve the above problem [Hoar96]. Assume that the synchronization barriers are numbered
consecutively. For each odd-indexed barrier, a processor sends a 1 into the set AND tree and
a 0 into the reset AND tree (Fig. 20.4). Thus, when all processors have reached the barrier,
the flip-flop will be set and checking for a 1 output from the flip-flop allows the processors
to proceed past the odd-indexed barrier. For even-indexed barriers, the roles of the two trees
are reversed, with each processor sending a 0 into the set AND tree and a 1 into the reset
AND tree and checking for 0. Because the flip-flop will not be reset (set) until all of the
processors have reached the next barrier, even a processor that has been significantly slowed
down will detect the correct barrier signal and no processor ever goes into an infinite wait
state.
Once we provide a mechanism like Fig. 20.4 to facilitate barrier synchronization, it is
only a small step to generalize it to a more versatile “global combine” (semigroup computation) facility. Note that the AND tree essentially implements a semigroup computation
using the binary AND operator. The generalization might involve the ability to do OR and
XOR logical reductions as well.
An example for the second strategy, i.e., that of reducing the need for synchronizations,
is the bulk-synchronous parallel (BSP) mode of parallel computation [vali90], briefly
discussed near the end of Section 4.5. In the BSP mode, synchronization of processors occurs
once every L time steps, where L is a periodicity parameter. A parallel computation consists
of a sequence of supersteps. In a given superstep, each processor performs a task consisting
of local computation steps, message transmissions, and message receptions from other
processors. Data received in messages will not be used in the current superstep but rather
beginning with the next superstep. After each period of L time units, a global check is made
to see if the current superstep has been completed. If so, then the processors move on to
Figure 20.4. Example of hardware aid for fast barrier synchronization [Hoar96].
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
421
executing the next superstep. Otherwise, the next period of L time units is allocated to the
unfinished superstep.
BSP is essentially a mechanism for ensuring overlap between computation and communication. If sufficient parallel slack is available (i.e., matrix multiplication, with each
processor being responsible for computing a sizable block of the result matrix), then the
processors will have more than enough local computations to perform in between data
arrivals. We thus gain the benefits of synchronous communication (simple to visualize, easy
to prove correct) and asynchronous computation (efficient use of processing resources).
Recall that in the LogP model of communication, also discussed near the end of Section
4.5, the aim was to characterize the communication performance of a parallel architecture
in terms of a small number of parameters in order to facilitate the development of efficient
parallel algorithms without a need for taking a great deal of machine-specific details into
account. In BSP, we go a step further by squeezing all machine-dependent considerations
into the periodicity parameter L. Note that the periodicity parameter L of BSP is different
from the network latency parameter L of LogP. However, the two are not unrelated, as given
a network with sufficient bandwidth, the periodicity in BSP can be chosen to be equal to, or
a small multiple of, the latency in LogP.
20.2. PARALLEL PROGRAMMING
The preparation of programs for parallel execution is of immense practical importance.
We have seen that the design of parallel processing hardware, particularly the interconnection
architecture, and of parallel algorithms are full of challenging problems. As difficult as these
problems are, the single most important reason for the lack of acceptance and limited
application of parallel processing is neither hardware nor algorithms but rather obscure and
cumbersome programming models. Since the early 1970s, we have witnessed moderate
successes with parallelizing compilers, which automatically extract parallelism from essentially sequential specifications, and with array languages such as High-Performance Fortran.
However, the goal of simple, efficient machine-independent parallel programming has
remained elusive.
In this section, we briefly review five approaches to the development of parallel
programs:
•
•
•
•
•
Parallelizing compilers
Data-parallel programming
Shared-variable programming
Communicating processes
Functional programming
In the first approach, the parallelism is implicit in the program and is automatically extracted
by the parallelizing compiler, while with the other four approaches, parallelism is explicitly
specified by the programmer using appropriate constructs in a parallel programming
language. There are two strategies for designing a parallel programming language: extending
an existing popular language with capabilities for dealing with parallel constructs and
422
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
building a new language from scratch. The former approach is easier and more likely to lead
to adoption of the language.
A parallelizing compiler is one that takes a standard sequential program (written in
Fortran, C, or other language) as input and produces a parallel program as output. Vectorizing
compilers are similar and have been in use for many years in connection with pipelined vector
processors. The idea in both cases is to deduce, through automatic dependence analysis,
which computations lack interdependencies and can thus be executed concurrently.
The motivation behind the use of a parallelizing compiler is twofold. First, a parallelizing
compiler allows us to utilize existing programs without the need to rewrite them for execution
on each new parallel machine. Second, there is a great deal of expertise in most large
organizations for writing and debugging sequential programs in standard languages, whereas
the development of explicitly parallel programs requires retraining of programmers not only
in the use of new parallel programming languages, but also in working with software aids
for parallel program development and debugging.
As an example, consider the two nested “for” loops in the following program fragment:
for i = 2 to k do
for j = 2 to k do
a i j : = (a i j – 1 + ai j + 1 )/2
endfor
endfor
In this example, each iteration of the i loop can be scheduled for execution on a different
processor with complete asynchrony, because successive iterations are totally independent.
Techniques similar to those used in vectorizing compilers, including reversal of nesting order,
loop unrolling (or unfolding), and conversion of conditionals to reduction operations, are
useful for deriving more efficient parallelized versions from a given sequential program.
It may seem ironic that forcing a naturally parallel computation into a sequential mold,
and then applying the powers of an intelligent compiler to determine which of these
artificially sequentialized computations can be performed concurrently, is a viable approach
to parallel processing. But this is just one example of cultural inertia and economics dictating
an approach that defies common sense.
Data-parallel programming is an approach with a long history. The APL programming
language, with its array and reduction operations, was an early example of an explicit
data-parallel programming scheme. For example, in APL, C ← A + B meant that the matrix
C is to be computed by the componentwise addition of the matrices A and B, x ← + /V
specified that x is the sum of all elements of the vector V, and U ← +/V × W represented the
inner product of V and W (sum of all elements in the componentwise product of the two
vectors). The “+/” operation, called sum reduction, was an instance of a generic reduction
operation that could be used with any arithmetic, logic, selection, or comparison operator.
Although APL was devised primarily for making the specification of numerical computations mathematically elegant and more concise, its implications for data-parallel programming were also exploited in some parallel systems. The conciseness of APL
specifications was at times a drawback because the ability of programmers to specify highly
complex computations in one or two lines of code made the deciphering or understanding
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
423
of the specifications, and thus their debugging and maintenance, very difficult, to the extent
that APL was only half-jokingly referred to as a write-only language.
A much simpler version of the APL ideas are incorporated into an extension of the
Fortran language known as High Performance Fortran (HPF), which was developed in 1992
to improve the performance and usability of Fortran-90 [Love93]. Fortran, though often
criticized for its inelegance and lack of support for modular and structured programming, is
extensively used in scientific computations, the primary application area for early parallel
and vector supercomputers. Thus, prior to Fortran-90 and HPF, many Fortran extensions had
been proposed for, and used on, various parallel machines. Examples include CFD Fortran
of ILLIAC IV (an early 2D mesh parallel computer) and CFT or Vector Fortran developed
for the Cray line of supercomputers. The introduction of HPF by a forum of researchers and
industry representatives has been a major step for imposing uniformity and compatibility in
the area of scientific parallel applications. HPF compilers are currently offered by several
parallel computer vendors.
Fortran-90, a superset of Fortran-77, is an ISO and ANSI standard language, with
extensions that include facilities for array operations. In Fortran-90, a statement such as
A = SQRT(A) + B ** 2
squares every element of array B, extracts the square root of every element of array A, and
adds the corresponding elements of the two arrays, storing the results in array A. As a second
example,
WHERE (B /= 0) A = A / B
performs a masked array assignment, resulting in each element of A being divided by the
corresponding element of B, except in those cases where the B element is 0.
The semantics of Fortran-90 is independent of the underlying machine model. It simply
provides a global name space and a single thread of control. However, array operations of
the type presented above allow Fortran-90 programs to be efficiently executed on parallel
machines. When run on a distributed-memory machine, some Fortran-90 constructs imply
interprocessor communication. Assignment of a scalar value to an array
A = S/2
may imply multicasting or broadcasting (one-to-many communication). Use of “array
section” notation or index vectors
A(I:J) = B(J:I:–1) {a section of array B is assigned, in reverse order, to array A}
A(P)=B
{P is an integer index vector; means A(P(I)) = B(I) for all I}
may require data permutation (many-to-many communication). Finally, reduction operations, such as summing all elements of an array
S = SUM(B)
may require a gather operation (many-to-one communication).
HPF extends Fortran-90 by adding new directives and language constructs. It also
imposes some restrictions for efficiency reasons. HPF includes a number of compiler
directives that assist the compiler in data distribution. These directives, which do not alter
424
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
the semantics of the program, are presented as Fortran-90 comments (begin with the
comment symbol “!”). Thus, if an HPF program is presented to a Fortran-90 compiler, it will
be compiled, and subsequently executed, correctly. As an example, the HPF statement
!HPF ALIGN A(I) WITH B(I + 2)
is a hint to the compiler that it should distribute the elements of arrays A and B among
processors or memory banks such that A(I) and B(I + 2) are stored together. If this statement
is ignored, the program will still execute correctly, but perhaps less efficiently.
Data-parallel extensions have also been implemented for other popular programming
languages. For example, the C* language was introduced in 1987 by Thinking Machines
Corporation for use with its Connection Machine parallel computers. A key element in C*
is the notion of “shape,” which is defined, given a name, and then associated with the
variables that are to have that particular shape (e.g., 20-element vector, 128 × 128 matrix).
Parallel operations are specified using constructs such as the “with” statement, for componentwise or array reduction operations, and the “where” statement for conditional parallel
operations such as
with (students) {
where (credits > 0.0) {
gpa = points / credits
}
}
Like “if” statements, “where” statements in C* can have “else” clauses or be nested.
Another example of a data-parallel language is pC++, which is based on the popular
sequential language C++ [Malo94]. A key notion in pC++ is that of “distributed collection,”
which is a structured set of objects distributed across multiple processors in a manner similar
to what is done in HPF. The user can easily build collections from some base element class
and also has access to a library of standard collection classes (e.g., vectors, arrays, matrices,
grids, and trees). Profiling and performance analysis tools that are built into pC++ allow the
user to establish the need for, and the resulting benefits of, various optimizations.
Shared-variable programming is exemplified by Concurrent Pascal and Modula-2.
Concurrent Pascal is an extension of Pascal, with the addition of processes, monitors, and
classes, along with three new statements (init, delay, continue) and a new data type (queue).
Monitors can be viewed as mechanisms that allow us to put walls around a collection of
shared resources in order to regulate multiple accesses to them. Concurrent Pascal also
provides facilities for initiating, delaying, and continuing the execution of processes and a
way of scheduling the various calls made by outside procedures in FIFO order. A class defines
a data structure and its associated operations that can be performed by a single process or
monitor (mutual exclusion). Modula-2 contains only primitive concurrency features that
allow processes to interact through shared variables or via (synchronizing) signals.
In the Sequent C shared-variable programming language, developed for use with
Sequent’s shared-memory multiprocessors, the keyword shared placed before a global
variable declaration forces all processors to share a single instance of that variable, whereas
an ordinary declaration implies that each processor will have a private copy of that variable.
A program begins execution as a single process, which may then fork into a number of
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
425
parallel processes. Program execution alternates between sequential and parallel segments,
with the transition from a parallel to a sequential segment delimited by a barrier synchronization. Even though Sequent C has no built-in support for monitors, they can be easily
implemented by using its shared lock declaration and associated “lock” and “unlock”
statements.
Communicating processes form the basis of several concurrent programming languages
such as Ada and Occam. This approach, which involves passing of messages among
concurrently executing processes, has four basic features: (1) process/task naming, (2)
synchronization, (3) messaging scheme, and (4) failure handling. Process naming can be
direct (explicit) or indirect (the sender names an intermediate object such as a channel,
mailbox, or pipe). Synchronization can be nonexistent, complete (sender proceeds only after
ensuring that its message has been delivered), or partial (e.g., remote procedure calls and use
of acknowledgments). The messaging scheme can be quite flexible and general, as in Ada,
or rigidly linked to an assumed hardware structure (such as channels in Occam). Finally,
failure handling is needed for undesirable situations such as deadlocks (complete system
lockup) or starvation (a particular process’s messages not getting through).
Instead of building interprocess communication facilities into a programming language,
it is possible to provide users with language-independent libraries. This approach, as
embodied in the MPI standard, is now the dominant approach for programming distributedmemory machines (see Section 20.3). Though not as elegant as the above-mentioned
languages, the use of libraries is practically much simpler. Compilers for powerful parallel
languages are notoriously difficult and costly to develop. These factors, along with the
limited acceptance of each such language by the user community, render the approach
economically unviable. Libraries, on the other hand, are easier to develop and can be used
in conjunction with the user’s favorite language.
Functional programming is based on reduction and evaluation of expressions. There is
no concept of storage, assignment, or branching in a functional program. Rather, results are
obtained by applying functions to arguments, incorporating the results as arguments of still
other functions, and so forth, until the final results are obtained. Alternatively, we can view
a functional programming language as allowing only one assignment of value to each
variable, with the assigned value maintained throughout the course of the computation. Thus,
computations have the property of referential transparency or freedom from side effects,
which makes their final results independent of the history of how, and in what order, various
partial results were obtained. These appear to be ideal properties for parallel processing.
However, because of the inefficiencies inherent in the single-assignment approach, the
practical application of functional programming has thus far been limited to Lisp-based
systems (e.g., MIT’s Multilisp) and data-flow architectures (e.g., Manchester University's
SISAL).
20.3. SOFTWARE PORTABILITY AND STANDARDS
During much of the history of parallel processing, parallel applications have been
developed as machine-specific, and thus nonportable (often one-of-a-kind), programs. This
has made parallel applications quite costly to develop, debug, and maintain. The reasons for
this undesirable state of affairs are
426
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
• Proliferation of parallel architectures and lack of agreement on a common model
• Infeasibility of commercial software development based on the limited customer base
• Desire for efficient hardware utilization, given the high cost of parallel processors
Changes are afoot in all of these areas, making the prospects of truly portable parallel
software brighter than ever. Ideally, a portable parallel program should run on a variety of
hardware platforms with no modification whatsoever. In practice, minor modifications that
do not involve program redesign or significant investments of time and effort are tolerated.
Program portability requires strict adherence to design and specification standards that
provide machine-independent views or logical models. Programs are developed according
to these logical models and are then adapted to specific hardware architectures by automatic
tools (e.g., compilers). HPF is an example of a standard language that, if implemented
correctly, should allow programs to be easily ported across platforms. In what follows, we
briefly review two other logical models, or user-level views, that have been developed for
parallel systems: MPI and PVM. These descriptions are necessarily oversimplified and
incomplete. They are meant only as an annotated list of user-level implementation options
and issues in parallel computing. The cited references should be consulted for details.
The message-passing interface (MPI) standard specifies a library of functions that
implement the message-passing model of parallel computation [MPIF94] [Snir96]. MPI was
developed by the MPI Forum, a consortium of parallel computer vendors and software
development specialists. As a standard, MPI provides a common high-level view of a
message-passing environment that can be mapped to various physical systems. Software
implemented using MPI functions can be easily ported among machines that support the
MPI model. MPI includes functions for
•
•
•
•
•
•
Point-to-point communication (blocking and nonblocking send/receive, . . .)
Collective communication (broadcast, gather, scatter, total exchange, . . .)
Aggregate computation (barrier, reduction, and scan or parallel prefix)
Group management (group construction, destruction, inquiry, . . .)
Communicator specification (inter-/intracommunicator construction, destruction, . . .)
Virtual topology specification (various topology definitions, . . .)
Most of the above functions are self-explanatory (refer to Section 10.1 for definitions of
point-to-point and collective communications and to Section 20.1 for barrier synchronization).
Both blocking and nonblocking sends can start independent of whether or not a matching
receive has been posted. A blocking send completes when the send buffer can be reused,
whereas nonblocking send returns before the message has been copied out from the buffer.
Thus, nonblocking send allows computation and communication to be overlapped, but
requires a separate check for completion. Blocking receive and nonblocking receive are
similarly related. A communicator is a process group (ordered set of processes) plus a context.
Each communicator has a distinct context; a message sent in one context must be received
in the same context. This feature allows multiple communications to coexist in the parallel
system without interfering with one another. The virtual topology specification allows for
hardware-independent program development. If a 2D-mesh virtual topology is specified, the
implementation of MPI on any given machine maps the virtual topology to the target
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
427
machine’s real topology (e.g., 2D mesh, 3D torus, hypercube) in such a way that efficient
communications can be performed.
MPI assumes the use of a reliable user-level transmission protocol with nonovertaking
messages. Because message-passing programs often exhibit a great deal of temporal locality,
in the sense that a process sending a message to another one is likely to send another message
to the same process in the near future, MPI includes features for persistent communication
that allow some of the overhead of sending and receiving messages to be shared across
multiple transmissions.
Parallel virtual machine (PVM) is a software platform for developing and running
parallel applications on a collection of independent, heterogeneous, computers that are
interconnected in a variety of ways [Geis95]. PVM defines a suite of user-interface primitives
that support both the shared-memory and the message-passing parallel programming paradigms. These primitives provide functions similar to those listed above for MPI and are
embedded within a procedural host language (usually Fortran or C). A PVM support process
or daemon (PVMD) runs independently on each host, performing message routing and
control functions. PVMDs perform the following functions:
• Exchange network configuration information
• Allocate memory to packets that are in transit between distributed tasks
• Coordinate the execution of tasks on their associated hosts
The available pool of processors may change dynamically. Names can be associated with
groups or processes. Group membership can change dynamically and one process can belong
to many groups. Group-oriented functions, such as broadcast and barrier synchronization,
take group names as their arguments.
20.4. PARALLEL OPERATING SYSTEMS
A parallel computer, like a sequential machine, needs system programs that manage its
resources, provide various services to user processes, and enforce the required protection,
performance monitoring, and accounting functions. From the viewpoint of how the available
computational, storage, and communication resources are managed, we distinguish two
classes of parallel processors: back-end/front-end and stand-alone.
In the back-end system subclass, the parallel processor is viewed as a resource that is
attached to a conventional (sequential) host computer. The host computer has a standard
operating system, like Unix, and manages the parallel processor essentially like a coprocessor
or I/O device. Required data are provided to the parallel processor, and the computation
results received from it, in much the same way as I/O data transfers. The host computer is
also responsible for program compilation, diagnostic testing, access control, and interface
with the users. The main advantage of this approach, which is particularly suited to
computation-intensive applications where a great deal of manipulation is performed on a
limited set of data, is that it avoids the high cost of developing and maintaining special system
software. The front-end system subclass is similar, except that the parallel processor handles
its own data (e.g., an array processor doing radar signal processing) and relies on the host
428
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
computer for certain postprocessing functions, diagnostic testing, and interface with the
users.
In the stand-alone system class, a special operating system is included that can run on
one, several, or all of the processors in a floating or distributed (master–slave or symmetric)
fashion. Because of the popularity of Unix, most parallel operating systems in use today are
extensions of Unix (Unix-based) or have very similar structures to that of Unix (Unix-like).
Note that a parallel operating system is not fundamentally different from a standard operating
system such as Unix. Modern operating systems are all concurrent programs that deal with
multiple hardware resources (e.g., processors, I/O channels), multiple asynchronous events
(e.g., interrupts), and interdependent tasks or computation threads.
Parallel operating systems have a long history. In 1960, Burroughs introduced its AOSP
(Automatic Operating and Scheduling Program) for a 4-processor shared-memory computer.
Progress in small-scale shared-memory operating systems continued in the 1970s with
TOPS-10 for the PDP-10 by Digital Equipment Corporation and OS/VS2 for the IBM
System 370 Models 158 MP and 168 MP. The advent of low-cost minicomputers in the 1970s
allowed experimentation with larger-scale parallel systems. Notable examples were the
Hydra operating system for Carnegie-Mellon University’s 16-processor C.mmp and the
Medusa and StarOS systems for CMU’s 50-processor Cm* system.
Beginning with the introduction of the MUNIX system for a dual PDP-11 configuration
in the mid-1970s, numerous Unix-based and Unix-like parallel operating systems have been
designed. Recent examples include the Dynix operating system for the Sequent Balance
shared-memory MIMD computer with up to 30 processors, the OSF/1 operating system
introduced by the nonprofit Open Software Foundation (now the Open Group) that runs the
Intel Paragon, and IBM’s AIX for its SP-2 line of parallel systems. The advent of parallel
environments based on clusters of workstations has made the Unix-based approach even
more attractive.
The Mach operating system developed at Carnegie-Mellon University is sometimes
classified as a Unix-based system in view of its ability to run serial Unix applications as
single-threaded tasks. Mach’s capability-based object-oriented design supports multiple
tasks and threads that can communicate with each other via messages or memory objects.
Tasks and threads are conceptually the same in that they specify concurrently executable
code segments. However, context switching between two threads executing the same task is
much faster than that between two arbitrary threads. This is why threads are sometimes called
lightweight processes, where lightness refers to the limited state information associated with
a process or thread.
Figure 20.5 depicts the structure of the Mach operating system. The Mach kernel runs
in the supervisor mode, performing functions relating to virtual memory management, port
and message management, and task or thread scheduling. Everything else runs in the user
mode. To make a compact, modular kernel possible, Mach designers have opted to define a
small set of basic abstractions:
•
•
•
•
•
Task: a “container” for resources like virtual address space and communication ports
Thread: an executing program with little context; a task may contain many threads
Port: a communication channel along with certain access rights
Message: a basic unit of information exchange
Memory object: a “handle” to part of a task’s virtual memory
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
429
Figure 20.5. Functions of the supervisor and user modes in the Mach operating system.
Unlike Unix whose memory consists of contiguous areas, the virtual address space in Mach
is composed of individual pages with separate protection and inheritance. This makes it
possible to efficiently handle programs with large and/or sparse address spaces. Inheritance
refers to what is in the page: shared, private, or invalid (absent) data.
Messages in Mach are communicated via ports. The messages are typed to indicate the
data type they carry and can be communicated over a port only if the sending/receiving thread
has the appropriate access rights. For efficiency purposes, messages that involve a large
amount of data do not actually carry the data; instead a pointer to the actual data pages is
transmitted. Copying of the data to the receiver’s pages does not occur until the receiver
accesses the data. So, even though a message may refer to an extensive data set, only the
segments actually referenced by the receiver will ever be copied.
The Mach scheduler has some interesting features. Each thread is assigned a time
quantum on starting its execution. When the time quantum expires, a context switch is made
to a thread with highest priority, if such a thread is awaiting execution. To avoid starvation
of low-priority threads, priorities are reduced based on “age”; the more CPU time a thread
uses, the lower its priority becomes. This policy not only prevents starvation, but also tends
to favor interactive tasks over computation-intensive ones.
A number of user-mode servers, some of which are shown in Fig. 20.5, perform
user-defined functions or extend the kernel's capabilities. For example, interprocess communication over the network is not supported by the Mach kernel. Instead, messages are sent
to a network server, which represents tasks running on remote nodes. The network server
converts process names to physical addresses and sends the messages over the network.
Similarly, at the destination, a network server receives the message, derives a local
destination port from the information contained in the message, and forwards the
message to its final destination. The various steps outlined above can be made transparent
to the user who sends messages using process names rather than physical port numbers.
In a similar vein, shared-memory accesses to remote pages are handled by a distributed
shared-memory server.
430
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
20.5. PARALLEL FILE SYSTEMS
Considerations for I/O devices to support the high bandwidth requirements of parallel
processors were discussed in Sections 18.4 and 18.5. Raw I/O bandwidth, however, is not
sufficient to balance the I/O performance with the processing power. A parallel file system,
which efficiently maps data access requests by processors to high-bandwidth data transfers
between primary and secondary memory devices, is another important piece. In fact, as the
focus of parallel processing applications shifts from number crunching to databases and data
mining, parallel file systems cannot help but grow in importance.
If the parallel file system is not to become a performance bottleneck, it must itself be
written as a highly parallel and scalable program that can efficiently deal with many access
scenarios:
• Concurrent access to files by multiple independent processes
• Shared access to files by groups of cooperating processes
• Access to large amounts of data by a single process
Figure 20.6 shows some of the complexities involved in the third case above. A read request
issued by a user process is sent to a dispatcher process which creates a server task or thread
to effect the required transfer. The actual data needed may come in part from cache copies
of various disk pages and in part satisfied by initiating disk read accesses. To achieve its goal,
the READ server process might spawn multiple COPYRD threads, one for each fixed-size
block of data to be transferred. These threads must be distributed throughout the system, not
just to allow them to be executed in parallel but also to balance the memory load and network
traffic resulting from the transfers. Hopefully, the file block allocation mechanism has
declustered the data on the disk in such a way that the disk accesses required will also be
performed in parallel.
Figure 20.6. Handling of a large read request by a parallel file system [Hell93].
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
431
Examples of existing file systems for parallel machines include Sun’s network file
system, Intel’s concurrent file system [Pier89], and nCUBE’s I/O system software [DeBe92].
20.6. HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
INTERACTION
Parallel processing has been and is being done on many different platforms. At one
extreme lie homogeneous tightly coupled parallel processors, with custom, highly optimized
interconnection structures. These machines are least flexible in terms of system scalability,
program portability, and run-time performance fine tuning. At the other extreme lie heterogeneous loosely coupled distributed systems, usually composed of commodity processing
and communication resources. The built-in management of heterogeneity and asynchrony
in such systems often makes them more readily adaptable, scalable, and portable. Many
parallel processing systems, particularly those with standard or hierarchical buses, fall
between these two extremes. Parallel applications are often not portable between these
various classes of parallel systems (sometimes not even between different machines in the
same general class).
Given the programming models and user-level views discussed in the preceding sections
of this chapter, it is possible, and highly desirable, to completely decouple the two issues of
hardware configuration and algorithm or program development for parallel systems. A
parallel application program should be executable, with little or no modification, on a variety
of parallel hardware platforms that differ in architecture and scale. This is necessary from
an economic standpoint, as very few users can afford the cost of developing parallel
applications from scratch with each new generation of hardware or, worse, with each
increment in system size. For example, it is fairly common for an organization to begin with
a small (say 8-processor) parallel system and then upgrade to larger systems as its needs
warrant. The changeover from the 8-processor to the 16-processor configuration, say, should
not require modification in the system or application programs; ideally, the upgrade should
be done by simply plugging in the new processors with associated interconnects and
rebooting the system.
From the above viewpoints, workstation clusters are ideal platforms for parallel computation, as they are readily scalable both in time and in space. They are scalable in time,
because the introduction of faster workstations and interconnects leads to a corresponding
increase in system performance with little or no redesign. They are scalable in space, because
their computational power can be increased by simply plugging in more processors. While
it is true that increasing the number of processors may lead to an imbalance between the
available computational power and communication bandwidth, compilers and operating
systems can partially compensate for this imbalance by adjusting the task granularity and
their partitioning, scheduling, and load-balancing strategies. Also, computation can be traded
off for communication by using data compression methods or context-dependent messaging
schemes.
Obviously, it is desirable to provide the same type of scalability enjoyed by loosely
coupled workstation clusters for tightly coupled multiprocessors. Many of the commercially
available parallel processors are in fact scalable in space within specific ranges (say 4–256
processors). Scalability in time is difficult at present but may be made possible in the future
432
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
through the adoption of implementation and interfacing standards of the same types that have
made personal computer modules compatible and readily interchangeable.
Besides hardware scalability, users are interested in software or application scalability.
The notion of algorithm scalability (being able to run an algorithm at various levels of
resource availability) was defined in Section 19.6. Algorithm or application scalability is
useful not only for achieving degradation tolerance but also for portability. In the remainder
of this section, we quantify the above notion and define the related measures of scaled
speed-up and isoefficiency.
Recall the definition T(1)/T( p) of speed-up introduced in Section 1.6 for a given
(fixed-size) problem. As noted near the end of Section 1. 1, we use parallel processing not
just to speed up the solution of fixed problems but also to make the solution of larger problems
feasible with realistic turnaround times. The equation for speed-up, with the problem size n
explicitly included, is
The cumulative time pT(n, p) spent by the processors can be divided into computation time
C(n,p) and overhead time H(n, p) = p T(n, p) – C(n, p), where the latter incorporates
everything besides computation, including communication time and processor idle time.
Assuming for simplicity that we have no redundancy, C(n, p ) = T(n, 1) and we get H (n , p)
= pT(n, p ) – T(n, 1) and
Efficiency, defined as E(n, p ) = S (n, p) / p, is then simply
If the overhead per processor, H( n , p) /p, is a fixed fraction ƒ of T(n , 1), then speed-up and
efficiency will become
The speed-up formula above is essentially an alternate form of Amdahl’s law that establishes
an upper bound of 1/ƒ on speed-up.
In what follows, we assume that efficiency is to be kept above one-half, but the
arguments apply to any fixed efficiency target. Based on the above formula, to have
E(n, p) > 1/2, we need pƒ < 1 or
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
433
implying that, for a fixed problem size and under the assumption of the per-processor
overhead being a fixed fraction of the single-processor running time, there is an upper limit
to the number of processors that can be applied cost-effectively.
Going back to our initial efficiency equation, we note that keeping E(n, p) above
one-half requires
Generally, the cumulative overhead H(n, p) is an increasing function of both n and p, whereas
T(n, 1) only depends on n. Recall that we are proceeding with the assumption C(n, p ) =
T(n, 1), meaning that T(n, 1) represents the amount of useful computation performed by the
p processors. As we scale the machine size (increase p) with a fixed problem size, H(n, p )
grows but T(n, 1) remains constant, thus leading to lower speedup and efficiency.
For many problems, good efficiency can be achieved provided that we sufficiently scale
up the problem size. The amount of growth in problem size that can counteract the increase
in machine size in order to achieve a fixed efficiency is referred to as the isoefficiency function
n(p), which can be obtained from the equation
With the above provisions, a scaled speed-up of p/2 or more is achievable for problems of
suitably large size. Note, however, that the parallel execution time
grows as we scale up the problem size to obtain good efficiency. Thus, there is a limit to the
usefulness of scaled speed-up. In particular, when there is a fixed computation time available
because of deadlines (as in daily or weekly weather forecasting), the ability to achieve very
good scaled speed-up may be irrelevant.
PROBLEMS
20.1. Data dependence
Consider the data dependence diagram of Fig. 20.1 to which an arrow going from B to A has
been added. If the resulting circular dependence does not make sense, say why; otherwise
provide a detailed example.
20.2. Fetch-and-add versus test-and-set
a. Show how an atomic fetch- and-add capability can do the job of test-and- set.
b. Can test-and-set be used to provide an atomic fetch-and-add capability?
c. Fetch-and-op is a generalization of fetch-and-add with an arbitrary operator. Which
operators besides “add” might be useful in this context?
20.3. Mutual exclusion
Several concurrent processes are to read and update the shared variables x, y , and z. The nature
of the application is such that in each use, all three variables are read out but only one is updated.
a. How can access to these variables be restricted to one process at a time using a shared lock
variable?
434
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
b. Is there any advantage to using three shared variables lockx, locky , and lockz to regulate
the accesses? What about drawbacks?
20.4. Mutual exclusion and deadlock
When resources are to be shared by multiple processes, a permission and release (lock/unlock)
mechanism can be employed. A process obtains a lock to use a shared resource; when done, it
returns the lock.
a. Show that deadlock is possible with as few as two shared resources, even if processes never
fail to return a lock when they are done using a resource (i.e., processes are correct and
never hang up).
b. Show that if shared resources are numbered and each process is restricted to request
resources in ascending numerical order, then deadlock cannot occur.
20.5. Fetch-and-add operation
Draw a diagram similar to Fig. 20.2 to show how six concurrent fetch-and-adds might be
combined in the switches of a multistage interconnection network.
20.6. Processor synchronization
Consider the Jacobi relaxation method, presented near the end of Section 11.4, for solving a
linear system of equations. There are n equations and p processors, so that in each iteration, a
processor must determine the new value for n/p variables based on the old values of all n
variables.
a. Assume that barrier synchronization is used so that processors move from one iteration to
the next in lockstep. Discuss the running time of the algorithm in view of the synchronization overhead.
b. Suppose that we use the asynchronous version of the algorithm by allowing each processor
to proceed at its own speed, with no synchronization. Processors may drift apart, causing
values from different iterations to be intermixed. Discuss the effects of this strategy on the
convergence and running time of the algorithm ([Bert89], pp. 434–437).
20.7. Processor synchronization
A generalized synchronization network may consist of a parallel counter that receives p
single-bit inputs and produces their log 2(p + l) -bit sum at the output.
a. Show how such a generalized network can be used for barrier synchronization.
b. Give examples where the above network is more useful than the AND-tree of Fig. 20.4.
c. Using the above network, devise an algorithm that implements a global sum operation.
20.8. Parallelizing “for” loops
Consider a “for” loop with its index i ascending from 1 to k.
a. The loop is said to have forward dependence if it contains statements such as ai := a i+1 +
b. Explain why such a forward dependence does not prevent parallelization.
b. An example loop with backward dependence contains the statement ai := b i + c i followed
by b i +1 := sqrt(d i ). Show how this particular loop can be parallelized.
c. Can you parallelize the loop containing the single statement ai+1 := a i + b i?
d. Can you parallelize the loop containing the conditional statement if ai ≤ 0 then s := s + a i
× b i?
20.9. HPF Fortran
Answer the following questions for High-Performance Fortran, where A, B, C are real vectors
and P, Q are integer index vectors (permutations of the integers in [1, N]).
SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE ISSUES
435
Does the assignment A(P) = B(P) make sense? What about Q = N + 1 – P followed by A(P)
= B(Q)?
Describe the effect of the assignment statement A = B(P) + C(N:1:–1).
Are the directives ALIGN A(I) with B(I + 2) and ALIGN B(I) WITH C(I – 2) conflicting
or compatible?
20.10. Parallel programming
Sketch the designs of parallel programs corresponding to the sieve of Eratosthenes (see Section
1.2) in two parallel programming languages of your choice. Outline the differences in the two
implementations and the application characteristics that led to them.
20.11. Functional programming
Study the functional programming approach to parallel program development, highlighting
some of the key reasons for its lack of popularity despite clean semantics and freedom from
side effects.
20.12. MPI and PVM
Study the Message-Passing Interface and Parallel Virtual Machine standards. Enumerate their
similarities and differences and contrast their domains of applicability.
20.13. Parallel systems software
Study the Unix-based operating systems, and their associated file systems, for two real parallel
machines of your choice. Explain the differences between the two in terms of interprocess
communication, protection mechanisms, task/thread scheduling, synchronization support, and
compatibility with Unix.
20.14. Isoefficiency and scaled speed-up
It can be shown that the cumulative overhead H(n, p ) for n -point FFT computation on a
p-processor hypercube and 2D mesh is O(n log p + p log p ) and O(log p + n/ ), respectively.
The work required for an n-point FFT is T(n, 1) = O(n log n). Find the isoefficiency function
and comment on the application scalability and speedup in each of the two cases.
20.15. Parallel computation speed-up and efficiency
Relate the discussion of scaled speed-up and isoefficiency in Section 20.6 to the “good-news”
corollaries to Brent’s scheduling theorem in Section 17.5.
20.16. Digital libraries
Briefly discuss how the material in each of the six sections in this chapter is relevant to the use
of a highly parallel processor as a high-performance server for a digital library [CACM95].
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Bert89]
[Blel96]
[CACM95]
[DeBe92]
[Geis95]
Bertsekas, D. P., and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods,
Prentice–Hall, 1989.
Blelloch, G. E., “Programming Parallel Algorithms,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 39, No. 3,
pp. 85–97, March 1996.
Communications of the ACM, special issue on digital libraries, Vol. 38, No. 4, April 1995.
DeBenedictis, E., and J. M. del Rosario, “nCUBE Parallel I/O Software,” Proc. 11th IEEE Int.
Phoenix Conf. on Computers and Communications, 1992, pp. 117–124.
Geist, A., et al., PVM, Parallel Virtual Machine, A User’s Guide and Tutorial for Networked Parallel
Computing, MIT Press, 1995.
436
[Gram93]
[Hell93]
[Hoar96]
[Love93]
[Malo94]
[MPIF94]
[Perr96]
[Pier89]
[Snir96]
[Vali90]
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Grama, A. Y., A. Gupta, and V. Kumar, “Isoefficiency: Measuring the Scalability of Parallel
Algorithms and Architectures,” IEEE Parallel & Distributed Technology, Vol. 1, No. 3, pp. 12–21,
August 1993.
Hellwagner, H., “Design Considerations for Scalable Parallel File Systems,” The Computer Journal,
Vol. 36, No. 8, pp. 741–755, 1993.
Hoare, R., H. Dietz, T. Mattox, and S. Kim, “Bitwise Aggregate Networks,” Proc. 8th IEEE Symp.
Parallel & Distributed Processing, October, 1996, pp. 306–313.
Loveman, D. B., “High Performance Fortran,” IEEE Parallel & Distributed Technology, Vol. 1, No.
1, pp. 25–42, February 1993.
Malony, A., et al., “Performance Analysis of pC++: A Portable Data-Parallel Programming System
for Scalable Parallel Computers,” Proc. 8th Int, Parallel Processing Symp., April 1994, pp. 75–84.
MPI Forum, “MPI: A Message-Passing Interface Standard,” Int. J. Supercomputer Applications, Vol.
8, Nos. 3/4, pp. 169–414, 1994.
Perrott, R. H., “Parallel Languages,” Chapter 29 in Parallel and Distributed Computing Handbook,
edited by A. Y. Zomaya, McGraw-Hill, 1996, pp. 843–864.
Pierce, P., “A Concurrent File System for a Highly Parallel Mass Storage Subsystem,” Proc. 4th Conf.
on Hypercube Concurrent Computers and Applications, 1989, pp. 155–160.
Snir, M., et al., MPI: The Complete Reference, MIT Press, 1996.
Valiant, L. G., “A Bridging Model for Parallel Computation,” Communications of the ACM, Vol. 33,
No. 8, pp. 103–111, August 1990.
VI
Implementation
Aspects
To learn how the theories and techniques covered in the previous chapters are
applied to the design of real machines, in this part we review the architectures
and other characteristics of several production and prototype parallel computers.
The case studies have been chosen to represent the various architectural classes
and to illustrate how implementation methods are used in the context of overall
design goals, technological constraints, and application requirements. Within
each class, we review key concepts related to the user view and then study a
cross section of real designs that include historically significant computers,
machines that have influenced the parallel processing industry, those that have
contributed significantly to a better understanding of the field, and, of course,
modern production machines that are still in use. In the final chapter, we present
a roadmap of the past and current trends and review some of the promising and
exciting research areas that are likely to shape the field of parallel processing in
the next decade. This part consists of four chapters:
•
•
•
•
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
21:
22:
23:
24:
Shared-Memory MIMD Machines
Message-Passing MIMD Machines
Data-Parallel SIMD Machines
Past, Present, and Future
437
This page intentionally left blank.
21
Shared-Memory
MIMD Machines
The shared-memory view can be provided in different ways. In this chapter,
following a survey of topics pertaining to the practical implementation and
performance of shared memory, we review several parallel computer systems
that use global or distributed shared memory. Two of the machines chosen are
products of groundbreaking research (BBN Butterfly and Stanford DASH), one
was developed in the private sector with extensive support from the U.S.
government (Tera MTA), and two are production machines from different generations: Cray Y-MP, which is a cluster of several vector supercomputers, and
Sequent NUMA-Q, which is a modern machine based on the SCI standard.
Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
21.1.
21.2.
21.3.
21.4.
21.5.
21.6.
Variations in shared memory
MIN-based BBN Butterfly
Vector-parallel Cray Y-MP
Latency-tolerant Tera MTA
CC-NUMA Stanford DASH
SCI-based Sequent NUMA-Q
439
This page intentionally left blank.
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
441
21.1. VARIATIONS IN SHARED MEMORY
Shared-memory implementations vary greatly in the hardware architecture that they use
and in the programming model (logical user view) that they support. In this section we review
the most common hardware architectures for shared memory, and also discuss the various
logical user views and their performance implications, to set the stage for the case studies
that follow in Sections 21.2 through 21.6. Ideas and terminology introduced in Section 4.3
are relevant to our discussion here, as is the discussion of cache coherence in Section 18.2.
With respect to hardware architecture, shared-memory implementations can be classified according to the placement of the main memory modules within the system (central or
distributed) and whether or not multiple copies of modifiable data are allowed to coexist
(single- or multiple-copy). The resulting four-way classification is depicted in Fig. 21.1.
With a central main memory, access to all memory addresses takes the same amount of
time, leading to the designation uniform memory access (UMA). In such machines, data
distribution among the main memory modules is important only to the extent that it leads to
more efficient conflict-free parallel access to data items that are likely to be needed in
succession (see Section 6.6). If multiple copies of modifiable data are to be maintained within
processor caches in a UMA system, then cache coherence becomes an issue and we have the
class of CC-UMA systems. Simple UMA has been used more widely in practice. An early,
and highly influential, system of this type was Carnegie-Mellon University’s C.mmp system
that was built of 16 PDP-11 minicomputers in the mid-1970s (Fig. 21.2). It had both a
crossbar and a bus for interprocessor communication via shared variables or message
passing. Here, we will study two example systems from this class: the pioneering BBN
Butterfly in Section 21.2 and the vector-parallel Cray Y-MP in Section 21.3.
When memory is distributed among processing nodes, access to locations in the global
address space will involve different delays depending on the current location of the data. The
access delay may range from tens of nanoseconds for locally available data, somewhat higher
for data in nearby nodes, and perhaps approaching several microseconds for data located in
distant nodes. This variance of access delay has led to the designation nonuniform memory
access (NUMA). One approach to softening the impact of slow remote accesses is through
Figure 21.1. Classification of shared-memory hardware architectures and example systems that
will be studied in this chapter.
442
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 21.2. Organization of the C.mmp multiprocessor.
latency hiding or latency tolerance methods (see Section 18.3). In Section 21.4, we will study
the Tera MTA as an example of machines in this class.
Another approach for dealing with slow remote accesses is to cache the needed data
within individual processors (cache-coherent NUMA or CC-NUMA). We will study two
examples of this most widely used approach: the Stanford DASH in Section 21.5 and the
Sequent NUMA-Q in Section 21.6. Alternatively, one can allow data replication in multiple
processors that have but one level of memory. This single level could be called the main
memory (no cache) or it may be viewed as the cache. The second interpretation, leading to
the designation cache-only memory architecture (COMA), is more suitable because the
multiple copies must be kept consistent and thinking of the memories as caches highlights
the connection with cache coherence protocols.
UMA machines typically use a high-performance crossbar or multistage interconnection network to allow many processors to access the central main memory simultaneously.
In many data-parallel applications, it is possible to lay out the data in main memory in a way
that access conflicts are minimized. Additionally, memory access requests can be pipelined
through the interconnection network so that processor speed depends on the network’s
throughput rather than its end-to-end latency. In this case, the effect of the interconnection
network is akin to a lengthening of the memory access pipeline. Computation can be
overlapped with memory accesses by providing large register files (e.g., the vector registers
of Cray Y-MP) that are loaded from, or stored into, main memory concurrently with
processing functions on other registers.
Similar latency hiding techniques are applicable to NUMA machines lacking processor
caches. Additionally, multithreading has been found to be quite effective for this purpose. In
a multithreaded architecture capable of switching between threads with little overhead, the
processor can be kept busy by executing portions of several other threads while waiting for
a remote access request of one thread to be satisfied via the interconnection network. Again,
it is the aggregate bandwidth of the interconnection network, rather than its end-to-end delay,
that is most important. The only effect of lower network latency is to allow the processors
to hide the memory access delay wish fewer threads. This reduces the processor complexity
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
443
in terms of control and needed register space (for highly parallel applications that have many
threads readily available) and also leads to better performance in the processing of tasks with
limited parallelism.
CC-NUMA machines typically enforce cache coherence via a directory-based scheme.
The address placed on the memory bus of a processing node is locally translated into the
identity of the home directory for the requested data. The node’s local cache hierarchy holds
copies of data from the local memory as well as from the memory of remote nodes. The
penalty for accessing remote memory is paid only if the requested data are not found in the
local node or if the enforcement of the coherence protocol (i.e., for writing to shared data)
requires coordination with other nodes.
The local memory of a COMA machine must be outfitted with additional hardware,
including tag and state storage for the coherence protocol (typically a directory-based
write-invalidate scheme). The augmented memory unit is sometimes called attraction
memory. The main advantage of COMA is its adaptivity, as data items are not permanently
tied to specific homes. Another advantage is its natural support for reliable system design
using backward error recovery (checkpointing). A simple extension of the coherence
protocol used for COMA allows recovery data to be stored in other caches just like replicated
data, except that recovery data cannot be used once their new versions have been modified
[Mori96]. The main disadvantages are in more complex procedures for locating the required
data and for enforcing the coherence of multiple data copies. As an example, note that the
replacement of data in attraction memories must be done with care to ensure that the only
copy of a data item is not permanently lost.
We next discuss the various logical views of shared memory and their design and
performance implications. These are known as shared-memory consistency models.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sequential consistency is the strictest, and most intuitive, shared-memory consistency model. It mandates that the interleaving of read and write operations be the
same from the viewpoint of all processors. In effect, sequential consistency provides
the illusion of a single-port memory system that services the read and write requests
on a first-come first-served basis. Thus, memory access requests of one processor
are always satisfied in program order and the accesses of multiple processors are
serialized arbitrarily, but in the same way as judged by several observing processors.
Processor consistency is less strict because it only mandates that write operations
be observed in the same order by multiple processors. This allows read operations
to overtake write operations in memory service queues, providing better performance as a result of optimizations afforded by out-of-order executions.
Weak consistency separates ordinary memory accesses from synchronization accesses and only mandates that memory become consistent on synchronization
accesses. Thus, a synchronization access must wait for the completion of all
previous accesses, while ordinary read and write accesses can proceed as long as
there is no pending synchronization access.
Release consistency is similar to weak consistency but recognizes two synchronization accesses, called acquire and release, with protected shared accesses sandwiched between them. In this model, ordinary read and write accesses can proceed
only when there is no pending acquire access from the same processor and a release
444
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
access must wait for all reads and writes to be completed. Further relaxation of
release consistency to improve the performance has also been suggested [Prot96].
The particular consistency model chosen affects the design and performance of the cache
coherence protocol required to enforce it. Even though most distributed shared-memory
systems are built with extensive hardware support for enforcing the chosen consistency
model, this is not an absolute necessity. Software-based, operating-system-based, and
language-based implementations have also been attempted [Prot96].
21.2. MIN-BASED BBN BUTTERFLY
The Butterfly parallel processor of Bolt, Beranek, and Newman became available in
1983. It is a general-purpose parallel computer that is particularly suitable for signal
processing applications. The BBN Butterfly was built of 2–256 nodes (boards), each holding
an MC68000 processor with up to 4 MB of memory, interconnected by a 4-ary wrapped
butterfly network. Typical memory referencing instructions took 2 µs to execute when they
accessed local memory, while remote accesses required 6 µs. The relatively small difference
between the latencies of local and remote memory accesses leads us to classify the BBN
Butterfly as a UMA machine.
The structure of each node is shown in Fig. 21.3. A microcoded processor node controller
(PNC) is responsible for initiating all messages sent over the switch and for receiving
messages from it. It also handles all memory access requests, using the memory management
unit for translating virtual addresses to physical addresses. PNC also augments the functionality of the main processor in performing operations needed for parallel processing (such as
test-and-set, queuing, and scheduling), easily enforcing the atomicity requirements in view
of its sole control of memory.
Figure 21.3. Structure of a processing node in the BBN Butterfly.
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
445
Figure 21.4. A small 16-node version of the multistage interconnection network of the BBN
Butterfly.
The wrapped 4-ary butterfly network of the BBN Butterfly required four stages of 4× 4
bit-serial switches, implemented as custom VLSI chips, to accommodate the largest 256processor configuration. A small, 16-node version of the network is depicted in Fig. 21.4.
Routing through the network was done by attaching the binary destination address as a
routing tag to the head of a packet, with each switch using and discarding 2 bits of this tag.
For example, to send a message to Node 9 = (1001)two in Fig. 21.4, the least-significant 2
bits would be used to select the second output of the switch at the first level and the
most-significant 2 bits would indicate the choice of the third output in the second-level
switch. In typical applications, message collision did not present any problem and the latency
for remote memory accesses was dominated by the bit-serial transmission time through the
network.
Because the probability of some switch failing increases with the network size, BBN
Butterfly systems with more than 16 processing nodes were configured, through the
inclusion of extra switches, to have redundant paths. Besides improving the reliability, these
redundant paths also offered performance benefits by reducing message collisions.
Much of the programming for the BBN Butterfly was done in the C language, although
Lisp and Fortran were also available. Applications were run under a specially developed
operating system and a Unix-based front end computer was used for program compilation
and loading.
A related machine, New York University’s Ultracomputer [Gott83], built around the
same time as the BBN Butterfly and using the butterfly network, merits a mention here. It
used special switches for combining fetch-and-add operations. Several versions of the NYU
Ultracomputer were built, with the largest having 16 processors.
21.3. VECTOR-PARALLEL CRAY Y-MP
The Cray Y-MP series of vector-parallel computers were introduced in the late 1980s,
following several previous Cray vector supercomputers including Cray-1, Cray-2, and Cray
X-MP. Subsequently, the Cray C-90 series of machines were introduced as enhanced and
scaled-up versions of the Y-MP.
446
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
The Cray Y-MP consisted of a relatively small number (up to eight) of very powerful
vector processors. A vector processor essentially executes one instruction on a large number
of data items with a great deal of overlap. Such vector processors can thus be viewed as
time-multiplexed implementations of SIMD parallel processing. With this view, the Cray
Y-MP, and more generally vector-parallel machines, should be classified as hybrid
SIMD/MIMD machines.
Figure 21.5 shows the Cray Y-MP processor and its links to the central memory and
interprocessor communication network. Each processor has four ports to access central
memory, with each port capable of delivering 128 bits per clock cycle (4 ns). Thus, a CPU
can fetch two operands (a vector element and a scalar), store one value, and perform I/O
simultaneously. The computation section of the CPU is divided into four subsystems as
follows:
1. Vector integer operations are performed by separate function units for add/subtract,
shift, logic, and bit-counting (e.g., determining the weight or parity of a word).
Figure 21.5. Key elements of the Cray Y-MP processor. Address registers, address function units,
instruction buffers, and control not shown.
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
2.
3.
4.
447
Vector floating-point operations are performed by separate function units for
add/subtract, multiply, and reciprocal approximation. The latter function unit is used
in the first step of a division operation x/y. The approximation to 1/y that is provided
by this unit is refined in a few iterations to derive an accurate value for 1/y, which
is multiplied by x in the final step to complete the division operation.
Scalar integer operations are performed by separate integer function units for
addition/subtraction, shift, logic, and bit-counting.
The add/subtract and multiply operations needed in address computations are
performed by separate function units within an address subsystem that also has two
sets of eight address registers (these 32–bit address registers and their associated
function units are not shown in Fig. 21.5).
The eight vector registers, each holding a vector of length 64 or a segment of a longer vector,
allow computation and memory accesses to be overlapped. As new data are being loaded
into two registers and emptied from a third one, other vector registers can supply the operands
and receive the results of vector instructions. Vector function units can be chained to allow
the next data-dependent vector computation to begin before the current one has stored all of
its results in a vector register. For example, a vector multiply–add operation can be done by
chaining of the floating-point multiply and add units. This will cause the add unit to begin
its vector operation as soon as the multiply unit has deposited its first result in a vector
register.
A key component of Cray Y-MP is its processor-to-memory interconnection network
depicted in Fig. 21.6 for an eight-processor configuration. This is a multistage crossbar
network built of 4 × 4 and 8 × 8 crossbar switches and 1 × 8 demultiplexers. The network
Figure 21.6. The processor-to-memory interconnection network of Cray Y-MP.
448
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
uses circuit switching and ensures that multiple access requests from the same port are
satisfied in presentation order.
The enhanced Cray C-90 version of the Y-MP architecture increased the maximum
number of processors to 16. In each cycle, up to four vector results can be produced by the
C-90 processor’s function units, leading to the peak performance of 1 GFLOPS per processor.
The Cray C-90 has a peak I/O bandwidth of 13.6 GB/s and works under UNICOX, an
extended Unix operating system. Vectorizing compilers for common scientific languages,
such as Fortran and C, are available. Multiple Cray C-90s can be linked through gigabyte
per second channels to a multigigabyte solid-state storage device (SSD) that acts as
secondary main memory. By sharing access to the SSD, the multiple C-90s can be used to
solve large-scale computational problems.
21.4. LATENCY-TOLERANT TERA MTA
The Tera MTA multithreaded parallel computer is unique in several ways [Tera97]. It
uses a pruned 3D torus interconnection scheme for its routing nodes (see Fig. 12.4), along
with extensive pipelining and multithreading to hide the memory access latency. It is
designed to be truly general-purpose, with near-peak performance for a wide array of
numerical and nonnumerical applications. Its clock period is 3 ns.
In its full configuration, Tera MTA has 4096 routing nodes interconnected as a 16×16×16
pruned torus. Each routing node has a degree of 4 or 5, depending on the lack or presence
of a resource connected to that node. Up to 256 processors, 512 memory modules, 256 I/O
cache units, and 256 I/O processors are connected to a subset of the routing nodes. The
network diameter is 24 and its average internode distance is about 12. The ratio of 16 between
the numbers of routing nodes and processors (64 between routing-node ports and processors)
allows each processor to have many memory access requests in transit without creating a
communication bottleneck.
Each routing node can handle a 164-bit packet consisting of source and destination
addresses, an operation, and 64 data bits in both directions on each link on every clock tick.
Because the bisection width of the 16×16×16 pruned torus is 256, and each link can
transport two 8-byte data words per 3-ns clock period, the effective bisection bandwidth of
the fully configured network is an impressive 1.4 TB/s. A packet spends two clock cycles in
the routing node’s logic and one cycle on the wire going to the next node. Routing nodes do
not buffer messages other than in their pipeline registers. Each message is immediately routed
to an output port, which may lead to derouting under heavy loads. However, because
messages are assigned random priorities at each node, each message will eventually reach
its destination.
As the MTA system is scaled up, it is envisaged that the number of routing nodes in the
3D pruned torus network grow in proportion to p 3/2 , in contrast to p in other multicomputers
with direct network or p log p in machines with multistage networks. This is justified by
the fact that the average routing distance of O( p 1/2 ) requires O(p 1/2 ) in-transit memory access
messages from each of the p processors in order to hide the memory access latency. Because
the degree of each routing node is a constant, O(p 3/2 ) such nodes are needed to route all of
the in-transit messages without significant delays (ideally no delay at all). The above can
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
449
also be justified from the viewpoint of the network's bisection bandwidth. An O( p 3/2 )-node
3D torus has a bisection of O( p) that scales linearly with the number p of processors.
Processors of the Tera MTA are multithreaded. Each processor can have as many as 128
program counters active at once. On every clock tick, a thread that is ready for execution is
selected and its next instruction placed into the execution pipeline. On the next clock tick, a
different thread may execute. If a single instruction is issued from each thread, then roughly
70 threads would be required to completely hide the expected latency (processor pipeline,
interconnection network, internal memory pipeline). However, because threads in general
allow multiple independent instructions to be issued at once, fewer threads may suffice. The
state of each thread, which consists of a 32-bit program counter, various mode/mask/condition bits, 8 branch target registers, and 32 general-purpose registers (all 64 bits wide), is held
in dedicated hardware of which a processor has 128 copies.
As shown in Fig. 21.7, the three pipelines M (memory access operation), A (arithmetic
operation), and C (control or simple arithmetic operation) can be used simultaneously. A
64-bit instruction can contain one operation of each type. With multithreaded execution, a
processor can support over 1 billion operations per second, even though each thread may run
at only 1/10 of this rate. Every processor has a clock register that is synchronized exactly
with its counterparts in the other processors and counts up once per cycle. In addition, the
processor counts the total number of unused instruction issue slots (degree of underutilization
of the processor) and the time integral of the number of instruction streams ready to issue
(degrees of overutilization of the processor). All three counters are user-readable in a single
unprivileged operation.
Figure 21.7. The instruction execution pipelines of Tera MTA.
450
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
The memory system of a p-processor Tera MTA consists of 2p or 4p memory modules
distributed around the network. Each 0.5-GB module is 64-way interleaved and memory
data references by the processors are randomly scattered among all banks of all memory
modules. Memory accesses to fetch instructions are directed to two nearby memory modules.
The peak performance of the Tera MTA is 1 GFLOPS per processor, yielding a maximum
of about 0.25 TFLOPS in the full 256-processor configuration.
Input/output is carried out primarily via disk arrays that are connected to some routing
nodes. One disk array (360 GB, 130 MB/s) for every 16 processors is the recommended
minimum requirement. Data read out from disks are placed in I/O cache memories that are
then directly mapped into the user’s address space. Concurrent I/O arising from parallel loops
or elsewhere is automatically parallelized by Tera’s Fortran, C, and C++ compilers and
libraries by letting each thread access the buffers for data.
The Tera MTA operating system is a distributed parallel version of Unix. Instruction
streams are dynamically created or destroyed using a single instruction. Large and small
tasks are run concurrently without a need for system partitioning or manual intervention. A
two-tier scheduler is incorporated into the Tera microkernel; it provides better resource
allocation to large tasks (those currently running on more than a single processor) via a
bin-packing scheme, and schedules the smaller tasks using a traditional Unix approach.
21.5. CC-NUMA STANFORD DASH
Stanford University’s directory architecture for shared memory (DASH) project of the
early 1990s had the goal of building an experimental cache-coherent multiprocessor. The
64-processor prototype resulting from this project, along with the associated theoretical
developments and performance evaluations, contributed insight and specific techniques to
the design of scalable distributed shared-memory machines. According to the terminology
introduced in Section 4.3, DASH can be classified as a cache-coherent NUMA (CC-NUMA)
architecture.
DASH has a two-level processor-to-memory interconnection structure and a corresponding two-level cache coherence scheme (Fig. 21.8). Within a cluster of 4–16 processors,
access to main memory occurs via a shared bus. Each processor in a cluster has a private
instruction cache, a separate data cache, and a Level-2 cache. The instruction and data caches
use the write-through policy, whereas write-back is the update policy of the Level-2 cache.
The clusters are interconnected by a pair of wormhole-routed 2D mesh networks: a request
mesh, which carries remote memory access requests, and a reply mesh, which routes data
and acknowledgments back to the requesting cluster. Normally, a processor can access its
own cache in one clock cycle, the caches of processors in the same cluster in a few tens of
clock cycles, and remote data in hundreds of clock cycles. Thus, data access locality, which
is the norm in most applications, leads to better performance.
Inside a cluster, cache coherence is enforced by a snoopy protocol, while across clusters,
coherence is maintained by a write-invalidate directory protocol built on the release consistency model for improved efficiency. The unit of data sharing is a block or cache line. The
directory entry for a block in the home cluster holds its state (uncached, shared, or dirty) and
includes a bit-vector indicating the presence or absence of the cache line in each cache.
Remote memory accesses, as well as exchanges required to maintain data coherence, are
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
451
Figure 21.8. The architecture of Stanford DASH.
orchestrated via point-to-point wormhole-routed messages that are sent between cluster
directories over 16-bit-wide channels.
When the required data are not found in the local cluster, an access request is sent to the
cluster holding the home directory, which then initiates appropriate actions based on the type
of request and the state of the requested data. In the case of a read request, the following will
happen:
1.
2.
For a shared or uncached block, the data are sent to the requester from the home
cluster and the directory entry is updated to include the new (only) sharer.
For a dirty block, a message is sent to the cluster holding the single up-to-date copy.
This remote cluster then sends a shared copy of the block to the requesting cluster
and also performs a sharing write-back to the home cluster.
A write (read-exclusive) request will trigger the following actions by the home directory,
with the end result of supplying the requester with an exclusive copy of the block and
invalidating all other copies, if any:
3.
4.
For a shared or uncached block, the data are sent to the requester and the directory
entry is updated to indicate that the block is now dirty. Additionally, for a shared
block, invalidation messages are sent to all caches that hold copies of the block,
with the expectation that they will acknowledge the invalidation to the requester
(new owner).
For a dirty block, the request is forwarded to the appropriate cluster. The latter then
sends an exclusive copy of the block to the requesting cluster and also performs a
sharing write-back to the home cluster.
Each of the 16 clusters in the DASH prototype is a four-processor Silicon Graphics
4D/340 Powerstation symmetric multiprocessor based on the MIPS R3000 chip. The 4D/340
452
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
clusters are modified in minor ways and augmented with two special boards that hold the
directory and network interface subsystems. The processor board modifications consist of
the addition of a bus retry signal and provision of masking capability for the bus arbiter. The
retry signal is used when a request involves service from a remote node. The masking
capability allows the directory to hold off a processor’s retry (via the bus arbiter) until the
requested remote access has been completed. Thus, effectively, a split-transaction bus
protocol is used for performing remote accesses. The added boards contain memory for the
directory entries, buffers, and a piece of the global interconnection network.
A follow-on project to DASH at Stanford aims to build flexible architectures for shared
memory (FLASH) that also supports message passing [Kusk94]. One goal of FLASH is to
integrate the SMP cache-coherent shared-memory model and the MPP software-based
cache-coherent message-passing model into one architecture. To achieve the desired flexibility, the hard-wired controller has been replaced with a programmable engine and the
directory data are placed in a portion of main memory rather than in a separate memory.
21.6. SCI-BASED SEQUENT NUMA-Q
NUMA-Q is the name given by Sequent to a series of CC-NUMA parallel computers
that originated in 1992. These machines are aimed at the on-line transaction processing and
database markets and have special provisions for improved availability, including redundant
power supplies that can be inserted on-line, enhanced shielding, and a specially designed
management and diagnostic processor (MDP). The SCI protocol has been slightly modified
in some respects as a result of performance fine tuning.
The following description is based on the NUMA-Q 2000 model that can have up to
252 processors, in 63 clusters of 4 processors (quads), and was first shipped in 1996. The
NUMA-Q 2000 cluster or quad is a modified Intel SHV server board containing 0.5–4 GB
of memory along with four Intel Pentium Pro (P6) chips, each with 0.5 MB of on-chip
Level-2 cache. A key element in the quad is a proprietary interquad (IQ) link that follows
the SCI standard, holds and controls a Level-3 or “remote” cache, and is the glue that connects
multiple quads into a large system. The 64-MB Level-3 cache uses 64-byte lines and is
four-way set-associative in order to minimize conflict misses. It holds copies of cache lines
from remote quads and, given its large size, can satisfy many of the remote access requests
without any interquad communication.
The architecture of Sequent NUMA-Q 2000 is depicted in Fig. 21.10. The IQ-Link unit
takes advantage of a “hook” provided by Intel to take control of the quad’s local bus that is
64 bits wide and operates at 66 MHz. Other quad subsystems include two Intel Orion PCI
bridges, a PCI fiber channel interface, a PCI local-area-network interface, and a management
and diagnostic processor that is linked to a console via a private Ethernet. Quads are
interconnected either by an optional IQ-Plus box, as shown in Fig. 21.10, or by simply
connecting the IQ-Links into a ring using copper cables. The console is a PC running under
the Windows NT operating system.
One of the goals of the design was to take advantage of commodity off-the-shelf (COTS)
components to the extent possible. To this end, only a few of the components, including
portions of IQ-Link and Bridge (between LAN and fiber channel), were custom designed
by Sequent.
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
453
Figure 21.9. The physical placement of Sequent's quad components on a rackmount baseboard
(not to scale).
Figure 21.11 depicts the internal organization of IQ-Link. The bus interface controller
provides the needed interface to the P6 bus, manages the bus side of the directory, and
provides the bus snooping logic. The bus controller and its associated snooping tags allow
access to data held within the remote cache to be satisfied with a latency comparable to that
of accesses to the local main memory. Within the directory controller, which manages the
network-side tags, local memory blocks are represented by a 2-bit state field and a 6-bit
Figure 21.10. The architecture of Sequent NUMA-Q 2000.
454
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 21.11. Block diagram of the IQ-Link board.
sharing list head pointer (the 6 bits are reduced from SCI’s 16 bits for the sake of efficiency).
For each block in the remote cache, the directory maintains a 7-bit state field, a 6-bit forward
pointer, a 6-bit backward pointer, and a 13-bit address tag. An important part of the directory
controller is a protocol engine that is implemented as programmable pipelined processor for
flexibility and ease of fine tuning.
Details of the key interconnect controller component, which handles the SCI input and
output within IQ-Link, is shown in Fig. 21.12. This component, which is in charge of the
link- and packet-level protocol for SCI, is a GaAs chip developed by Vitesse Semiconductor
Corporation. The elastic buffer can insert or delete idle symbols between packets to
compensate for small frequency variations between the sender and the receiver. The stripper
recognizes and removes any packet whose destination node label matches that of the local
node, sending an echo packet on the output link in its place. The bypass FIFO is needed to
accommodate packets that arrive while the local node is inserting a packet on the output link.
If the local (destination) node does not have buffer space to accept a packet, it sends a negative
echo, thus forcing a retransmission according to SCI’s retry protocol. The chip operates at
500 MHz, handling 2 bytes of data and 2 control bits (a flag and a clock) in each cycle. It
Figure 21.12. Block diagram of IQ-Link's interconnect controller.
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
455
needs eight clock cycles to route the first 18-bit symbol of a packet to the assemble block or
bypass FIFO and a single clock cycle for each subsequent symbol.
PROBLEMS
21.1. Carnegie-Mellon University’s C.mmp
a. Study the C.mmp multiprocessor system mentioned in Section 21.1 and prepare a description of its shared-memory architecture in a way that could form a section in this chapter.
b. Contrast C.mmp to the BBN Butterfly described in Section 21.2.
c. Contrast C.mmp to Stanford DASH described in Section 21.5.
21.2. CC-UMA parallel processors
Identify an example of a CC-UMA parallel processor (see Fig. 21.1) and prepare a description
of its architecture in a way that could form a section in this chapter.
21.3. Routing in the BBN Butterfly
a.
Given the description of the routing algorithm on the butterfly network of Fig. 21.4, derive
the assumed ordering of the processor labels from top to bottom.
b. How should we modify the routing algorithm if the processors are to be labeled 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
15, in order from top to bottom?
c. Draw the interconnection network for a 64-processor BBN Butterfly.
d. Repeat part (a) for the network of part (c).
e. Repeat part (b) for the network of part (c).
21.4. Robust BBN Butterfly network
Study the structure of the redundant network used in the BBN Butterfly to provide the capability
of routing around failed switches. In particular, state the effect of redundancy on the routing
algorithm. Relate your answers to the discussions of Chapter 19 on reliable parallel processing.
21.5. BBN Butterfly and NYU Ultracomputer
Compare BBN Butterfly with NYU Ultracomputer. Outline their similarities and differences
in a table.
21.6. Cray X-MP vector processor
The Cray X-MP vector processor [Robb89], a predecessor of Cray Y-MP, had floating-point
add and multiply function units, implemented as six- and seven-stage pipelines, respectively.
Vector computations needed three clock cycles for their setup, which included preparing the
appropriate function units and establishing paths from/to source and destination registers. At
the end of a vector computation, three more clock cycles were needed for shutdown before the
results in the destination vector register could be used in other operations. This six-cycle
pipelining overhead became insignificant when dealing with long vectors. The output of an
s-stage pipelined unit became available for chaining after s + 5 clock cycles. Such a unit needed
l + s + 5 cycles to operate on an l-element vector. A polynomial ƒ(x) of degree m – 1 (m real
coefficients, stored in a vector register) is to be evaluated for m different values of x (available
in a second vector register) using Homer’s rule. The m results are to be deposited in a third
vector register.
a. Estimate the number of cycles needed for this computation with no vector chaining.
b. Repeat part (a) with vector chaining.
456
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
c.
Derive the MFLOPS rating of the machine for the computations of parts (a) and (b)
assuming a clock cycle of 9.5 ns.
21.7. Cray Y-MP's interconnection network
Assuming an interleaved memory organization, in which the memory bank number corresponds to the least significant byte of the memory address, describe the motivation behind the
numbering scheme for memory banks used in Fig. 21.6.
21.8. Cray Y-MP’s interconnection network
a . Describe an algorithm for routing a memory access request from Processor i to Bank j of
memory in Cray Y-MP’s processor-to-memory interconnection network (Fig. 21.6). Note
the numbering scheme used for the memory banks.
b. How would you build the interconnection network of a 16-processor Cray Y-MP with 256
banks?
c . Describe a routing algorithm for the network proposed in part (b).
21.9. Tera MTA’s pruned torus network
a.
Find the exact diameter and average internode distance in the 16 × 16 × 16 pruned torus
network of Tera MTA computer.
b. Suppose that we use a 2D, rather than a 3D, routing network. Perform a scalability analysis
on this 2D routing scheme and determine the number of processors that can be supported
by an m × m network (or alternatively, the size of the network needed to support p
processors). Is latency hiding more or less difficult with the 2D network?
c. Repeat part (b) with the assumption that processors and memory modules are only
connected to the boundary processors of the 2D mesh. Does this restriction lead to any
advantage?
d. Repeat part (b) for a 4D mesh network; focus on special problems related to higher
dimension.
21. 10. Tera MTA's latency hiding methods
a.
b.
c.
d.
Why do you think that a p-processor Tera MTA computer uses 2p or 4p memory modules?
What are the advantages of using the same interconnection network for memory access
and input/output? What are possible drawbacks?
Is the multithreading method used in the Tera MTA applicable to uniprocessor systems?
What additions or changes to the Tera MTA latency hiding mechanisms would be needed
if the processor technology improves to the point when the 3-ns clock cycle is reduced to
1 ns?
21.11. Two-level cache coherence protocol
The Sanford DASH multiprocessor uses a two-level cache coherence protocol: a snoopy
scheme within clusters and a directory-based scheme between clusters. Why do you think this
two-level scheme was chosen over a pure directory-based protocol?
21.12. Directory protocol in DASH
Study the directory-based cache coherence protocol of the Stanford DASH multiprocessor.
Describe in detail the various states of a cache line, types and causes of state transitions, and
the scheme used for enforcing release consistency.
21.13. Stanford DASH multiprocessor
Discuss the reasons for the following design choices in the Stanford DASH multiprocessor:
SHARED-MEMORY MIMD MACHINES
a.
b.
c.
457
Including separate request and reply meshes, as opposed to one mesh with higher-bandwidth links.
Using the mesh architecture, as opposed to hypercube or another network with richer
connectivity and lower diameter.
Using mesh, rather than torus, networks for intercluster request and reply networks.
21.14. Sequent NUMA-Q parallel computer
The quad nodes of Sequent NUMA-Q are interconnected by a ring network. In what sense is
the use of the term scalable justifiable for this architecture (or for SCI for that matter)?
21.15. Comparing UMA and CC-NUMA
Pick one of the UMA (Sections 21.2 and 21.3) and one of the CC-NUMA (Sections 21.5 and
21.6) machines discussed in this chapter and present a detailed comparison of the two with
regard to performance, scalability (in time and space), cost-effectiveness, and ease of application development.
21.16. Further developments
By the time you see this book in print, changes may have occurred in the architecture,
commercial availability status, or key design/performance parameters of some of the systems
discussed in this chapter. Pick one of the machines for which you can find information on recent
developments or follow-on systems and prepare a report on your findings.
REFERENCES AND SUGGESTED READING
[Adve96]
[Gott83]
[Harr94]
[Hord93]
[Hwan98]
[Kusk94]
[Leno92]
[Love96]
[Mori96]
[Mori97]
[Prot96]
[Robb89]
Adve, S. V., and K. Gharachorloo “Shared Memory Consistency Models: A Tutorial,” IEEE
Computer, Vol. 29, No. 12, pp. 66–76, December 1996.
Gottlieb, A., et al., “The NYU Ultracomputer—Designing an MIMD Shared Memory Parallel
Computer,” IEEE Trans. Computers, Vol. 32, No. 2, pp. 175–189, February 1983.
Harris, T. J., “A Survey of PRAM Simulation Techniques,” ACM Computing Surveys, Vol. 26, No.
2, pp. 187–206, June 1994.
Hord, R. M., Parallel Supercomputing in MIMD Architectures, CRC Press, 1993.
Hwang, K., and Z. Xu, Scalable Parallel Computing: Technology, Architecture, Programming,
McGraw-Hill, 1998.
Kuskin, J., et al., “The Stanford FLASH Multiprocessor,” Proc. 21st Int. Symp. Computer Architecture, pp. 302–313, April 1994, pp. 302–313.
Lenoski, D., et al., “The Stanford Dash Multiprocessor,” IEEE Computer, Vol. 25, No. 3, pp. 63–79,
March 1992.
Lovett, T., and R. Clapp, “STING: A CC-NUMA Computer System for the Commercial Marketplace,” Proc. 23rd Int. Symp. Computer Architecture, 1996, pp. 308–317.
Morin, C., A. Gefflaut, M. Banatre, and A.-M. Kermarrec, “COMA: An Opportunity for Building
Fault-Tolerant Scalable Shared Memory Multiprocessors” Proc. 23rd Int. Symp. Computer Architecture, 1996, pp. 56–65.
Morin, C., and I. Puaut, “A Survey of Recoverable Distributed Shared Virtual Memory Systems,”
IEEE Trans. Parallel and Distributed Systems, Vol. 8, No. 9, pp. 959–969, September 1997.
Protic, J., M. Tomacevic, and V. Milutinovic, “Distributed Shared Memory: Concepts and System,”
IEEE Parallel & Distributed Technology, Vol. 4, No. 2, pp. 63–79, Summer 1996.
Robbins, K. A., and S. Robbins, The Cray X-MP/Model 24: A Case Study in Pipelined Architecture
and Vector Processing, Springer-Verlag, 1989.
This page intentionally left blank.
22
Message-Passing
MIMD Machines
Like shared-memory parallel computers, message-passing systems can be based
on different interconnection topologies and provide various logical user views.
In this chapter, following a survey of topics pertaining to the implementation and
performance of communication structures for message routing, we review
several parallel computer systems that use explicit message passing. One of the
systems chosen is a product of university research (Berkeley NOW), two were
built by companies that were pioneers in the fields of transaction and multimedia
processing (Tandem NonStop and nCUBE3, respectively), and two utilize highperformance scalable switching networks (Thinking Machines Corporation CM5 and IBM SP2). Chapter topics are
•
•
•
•
•
•
22.1.
22.2.
22.3.
22.4.
22.5.
22.6.
Mechanisms for message passing
Reliable bus-based Tandem NonStop
Hypercube-based nCUBE3
Fat-tree-based Connection Machine 5
Omega-network-based IBM SP2
Commodity-driven Berkeley NOW
459
This page intentionally left blank.
MESSAGE-PASSING MIMD MACHINES
461
22.1. MECHANISMS FOR MESSAGE PASSING
Message passing is becoming the dominant paradigm in modern large-scale parallel
systems. Like shared-memory implementations, message-passing parallel computers vary
greatly in the hardware architecture that they use and in the programming model (logical
user view) that they support. In this section we review the most common hardware architectures for message passing, and also discuss the various logical user views and their
performance implications, to set the stage for the case studies that follow in Sections 22.2
through 22.6. Ideas and terminology introduced in Section 4.5 are relevant to our discussion
here, as are the data routing topics covered in parts of Chapters 10 and 14.
The trend in building parallel computers in recent years has been to use commercial
off-the-shelf (COTS), rather than custom-designed, components. High-performance processors are readily available from several manufacturers. Various types of interconnection and
routing hardware have also emerged as COTS components. The use of COTS components
reduces the hardware development cost of parallel machines and allows for relatively simple
updating of the resulting designs as faster processors and interconnections become available.
An additional benefit is that software becomes more portable and less expensive for
COTS-based systems in view of the development cost being borne by a larger user base. The
loose coupling of message-passing architectures makes them ideal candidates for implementation with COTS components, as we will see in the rest of this chapter.
Message-passing parallel computers are built of processing nodes and interconnection
elements. Processing nodes are typically complete computers with storage for programs and
data, instruction execution logic, and input/output. Depending on the complexity of processing nodes, three categories of message-passing MIMD computers can be distinguished:
1. Coarse-grain parallelism. Processing nodes are complete (perhaps large, multiboard) computers that work on sizable subproblems, such as complete programs or
tasks, and communicate or synchronize with each other rather infrequently.
2. Medium-grain parallelism. Processing nodes might be based on standard micros
that execute smaller chunks of the application program (e.g., subtasks, processes,
threads) and that communicate or synchronize with greater frequency.
3. Fine-grain parallelism. Processing nodes might be standard micros or custom-built
processing elements (perhaps with multiple PEs fitting on one chip) that execute
small pieces of the application and need constant communication or synchronization.
Like any other classification that is based on the imprecise notions of “large,” “medium,”
and “small” (e.g., for clothes or automobiles), the above categories have fuzzy boundaries
and one can easily identify systems that could fit in two classes. Most existing messagepassing systems fall into the medium-grain category. In spite of not being very discriminative,
the classification is still useful in providing perspective and pedagogical help. Perhaps
categories such as “medium-coarse” and “medium-fine” (analogues of cooking levels for
steaks) or “medium-medium-fine” and the like (analogues of direction specifications for
wind or sailing) should be envisaged!
Note that we have defined granularity (or grain size) by considering both the processing
node complexity and the complexity of subcomputations performed by processing nodes in
462
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 22.1. The structure of a generic router.
between communications or synchronizations. In theory, it is possible to run coarse-grain
computations on fine-grain hardware, and vice versa, but neither is advisable from the
standpoint of efficient hardware utilization as measured, eg., by the FLOPS performance
per unit cost.
The interconnection network architecture needed to support message passing is strongly
dependent on granularity as discussed above. For coarse-grain parallelism, neither network
latency nor bandwidth is critical in view of the light communication load. Early messagepassing architectures, such as the pioneering C.mmp (Fig. 21.2), were of this type. We will
examine one example of such architectures in Section 22.2 (Tandem NonStop, using a bus
system for message transmissions). For fine-grain parallelism, the heavy communication
load placed on the network makes its aggregate bandwidth a critical performance parameter.
The network latency is also quite important in this case, unless latency hiding or tolerance
methods are used. You do not have to be a genius to guess that the communication loads, and
thus the network performance requirements, for medium-grain parallelism fall between the
above two extremes. All of our remaining case studies in Sections 22.3 through 22.6
(hypercube-based nCUBE3, fat-tree-based Connection Machine 5, omega-network-based
IBM SP2, and local-network-based Berkeley NOW) fall into this class.
Interconnection networks for message passing are of three basic types [Duat97]:
1.
Shared-medium networks. Only one of the units linked to a shared-medium network
is allowed to use it at any given time. Nodes connected to the network typically have
request, drive, and receive circuits. Given the single-user requirement, an arbitration
mechanism is needed to decide which one of the requesting nodes can use the shared
network. The two most commonly used shared-medium networks are backplane
buses and local area networks (LANs). The bus arbitration mechanism is different
for synchronous and asynchronous buses. In bus transactions that involve a request
and a response, a split-transaction protocol is often used so that other nodes can use
the bus while the request of one node is being processed at the other end. To ease
the congestion on a shared bus, multiple buses or hierarchical bus networks may be
used. For LANs, the most commonly used arbitration protocol is based in conten-
MESSAGE-PASSING MIMD MACHINES
463
Figure 22.2. Example 4×4 and 2×2 switches used as building blocks for larger networks.
tion: The nodes can detect the idle/busy state of the shared medium, transmitting
when they observe the idle state, and considering the transmission as having failed
when they detect a “collision.” Token-based protocols, which implement some form
of rotating priority, are also used.
2. Router-based networks. Such networks, also known as direct networks, are based
on each node (with one or more processors) having a dedicated router that is linked
directly to one or more other routers. A generic router is shown in Fig. 22.1. The
local node(s) connected to the router inject messages into the network through the
injection channel and remove incoming messages through the ejection channel.
Locally injected messages compete with messages that are passing through the
router for the use of output channels. The link controllers handle interfacing
considerations of the physical channels. The queues hold messages that cannot be
forwarded because of contention for the output links. Various switching strategies
(e.g., packet or wormhole) and routing algorithms (e.g., tag-based or use of routing
tables) can be implemented in the router. The router shown in Fig. 22.1 has in- and
out-degree of 5; 1 for the local node’s messages and 4 for in-transit messages. By
interconnecting a number of such routers, one can form a 2D mesh or torus network,
a 4-cube, or any other network with node degree of at most 4. Example routers
include the Cray T3E router (3D torus, 14-bit data in each direction, 375 MHz, 600
MB/s per link) and the Chaos router (2D torus, bidirectional 8-bit links, 180 MHz,
360 MB/s in each direction).
3. Switch-based networks. Such networks, also known as indirect networks, are based
on crossbars or regularly interconnected (multistage) networks of simpler switches.
Typically, the communication path between any two nodes goes through one or
more switches. The path to be taken by a message is either predetermined at the
source node and included as part of the message header or else it is computed on
the fly at intermediate nodes based on the source and destination addresses. Figure
22.2 shows a 4×4 crossbar and a 2×2 switch that is capable of broadcasting as well
as simple forwarding. Such switches can be used for synthesizing networks of
arbitrary size. However, the number of switches on the message path, and thus the
network latency, will grow with its size. Switch-based networks can be classified
464
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 22.3. Classification of message-passing hardware architectures and example systems that
will be studied in this chapter.
as unidirectional or bidirectional. In unidirectional networks, each switch port is
either input or output, whereas in bidirectional networks, ports can be used for either
input or output. By superimposing two unidirectional networks, one can build a
full-duplex bidirectional network that can route massages in both directions simultaneously. A bidirectional switch can be used in forward mode, in backward mode,
or in turnaround mode, where in the latter mode, connections are made between
terminals on the same side of the switch. Example switches include the Myricom
Myrinet (8×8 crossbar, 9-bit full duplex channels, 640 MB/s per link) and IBM
SP2 (crossbars for building omega networks, 16-bit bidirectional channels, 150
MHz, 300 MB/s in each direction).
Routers and switches are becoming increasingly similar and in fact there are products on the
market now that can be used to form both direct and indirect networks. An example is the
SGI Spider that supports both multistage interconnection networks and irregular topologies.
Combining the two classification schemes discussed above, we get nine categories of
message-passing parallel computers, as shown in Fig. 22.3.
22.2. RELIABLE BUS-BASED TANDEM NONSTOP
The first Tandem Nonstop, a MIMD distributed-memory bus-based multiprocessor, was
announced in 1976 for database and transaction processing applications requiring high
reliability and data integrity. Since then, several versions have appeared. The Tandem
Nonstop Cyclone, described in this section [Prad96], was first introduced in 1989. A main
objective of Cyclone’s design was to prevent any single hardware or software malfunction
from disabling the system. This objective was achieved by hardware and informational
redundancy as well as procedural safeguards, backup processes, consistency checks, and
recovery schemes.
MESSAGE-PASSING MIMD MACHINES
465
Figure 22.4. One section of the Tandem NonStop Cyclone system.
A fully configured cyclone system consists of 16 processors that are organized into
sections of 4 processors. Processors in each section are interconnected by a pair of 20 MB/s
buses (Dynabus) and can each support two I/O subsystems capable of burst transfer rates of
5 MB/s (Fig. 22.4). An I/O subsystem consists of two I/O channels, each supporting up to
32 I/O controllers. Multiple independent paths are provided to each I/O device via redundant
I/O subsystems, channels, and controllers. Up to four sections can be linked via unidirectional fiber optics Dynabus+ that allows multiple sections to be nonadjacent within a room
+
or even housed in separate rooms (Fig. 22.5). By isolating Dynabus from Dynabus,
full-bandwidth communications can occur independently in each 4-processor section. Other
features of the NonStop Cyclone are briefly reviewed below.
Processors. Cyclone’s 32-bit processors have advanced superscalar CISC designs.
They use dual eight-stage pipelines, an instruction pairing technique for instruction-level
parallel processing, sophisticated branch predication algorithms for minimizing pipeline
“bubbles,” and separate 64-KB instruction and data caches. Up to 128 MB of main memory
can be provided for each cyclone processor. The main memory is protected against errors
through the application of a SEC/DED (single-error-correcting, double-error-detecting)
code. Data transfers between memory and I/O channels are performed via DMA and thus
do not interfere with continued instruction processing.
System Performance. Performance estimates published in 1990 indicate that, after
accounting for cache misses and other overhead, the custom-designed Cyclone processor
can execute each instruction in an average of 1.5–2 clock cycles. Thus, with a clock period
of 10 ns, the peak performance of a fully configured Nonstop Cyclone system is about 1000
MIPS. Because each of the two I/O subsystems connected to a processor can transmit data
at a burst rate of 5 MB/s, a peak aggregate I/O bandwidth of 160 MB/s is available.
Hardware Reliability. Use of multiple processors, buses, power supplies, I/O paths,
and mirrored disks are among the methods used to ensure continuous operation despite
hardware malfunctions. A “fail-fast” strategy is employed to reduce the possibility of error
466
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
Figure 22.5. Four four-processor sections interconnected by D